JP2015202108A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characterized in a processing relating to a communication abnormality.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: winning means; first control means capable of executing a game control; and second control means capable of executing a control to give a prize. Even in the case where said first control means detects an abnormality relating to the communication with said second control means, said first control means can execute to start at least an operation on said winning means for a first period.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming table that performs overall gaming control by communicating between a plurality of control units (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement regarding processing related to communication abnormality.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in processing related to communication abnormality.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a winning means, a first control means, and a second control means, wherein the first control means is capable of executing at least game control. And the second control means is a means capable of executing at least control for giving a prize (hereinafter referred to as “prize giving control”), and the second control means is the first control. Means and at least electrically connected via a communication line, the first control means is means capable of executing at least a first process, and the first control means is a second The first process is a process related to the winning means, the second process is a process capable of detecting at least a first abnormality, and the first process Even if the control means detects the first abnormality, At least execution start possible means the first processed in one period, the first abnormality is the is abnormal regarding communication with the second control means, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine characterized by the process regarding communication abnormality is realizable.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a schematic diagram explaining the command processing which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a block diagram explaining the communication process of a main control part and a payout control part. (B) It is a block diagram explaining a serial communication circuit. (C) It is a block diagram explaining the flow of the serial communication of the main control part and the payout control part. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of various registers included in a serial communication related register and a diagram showing the contents of the various registers. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part accompanying the interruption | blocking of a power supply, and the timing of supply. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command transmission process. (B) An example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command transmission process. (B) An example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize ball command setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the number of prize balls of (a)-(c) prize ball number storage area 308a-308d. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball command table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a communication abnormality monitoring process. It is the time chart which showed an example of the communication abnormality process in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an area to be initialized in a RAM and its timing. It is a flowchart of the main process which a payout control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of a received command process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a received command process. It is a flowchart explaining command analysis processing. It is a flowchart explaining command analysis processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a starting process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an error management process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command process. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of a transmission command process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command process. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of a received command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a reception command process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command acquisition process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. FIG. 3A is an external perspective view of a firing handle 134. FIG. (B) It is a side view which shows the state which the player operates the launching handle 134. FIG. (C) is an exploded perspective view of the firing handle 134. FIG. It is the block diagram which showed an example of the board | substrate structure of a pachinko machine. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a launch control board 174. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 174. FIG. It is a time chart of various signals including a launch control signal. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of normal launch and turbo launch. (B) It is a front view of the launching handle 134 when the operation amount is the minimum operation amount. (C) It is a front view of the launching handle 134 when the operation amount is the maximum operation amount. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not pressing down the turbo button 804g and the launching handle 134 is in an initial position. (B) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not pressing down the turbo button 804g and rotating the launching handle 134 clockwise from the initial position. (A) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not rotating the turbo button 804g and rotating the launching handle 134 clockwise by the maximum operation amount and rotating it to the fully open position. (B) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when the launching handle 134 was rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g was pressed down. (A) It is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pushed down and the firing handle 134 is in the initial position. (B) It is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pushed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise to the fully opened position by the maximum amount of operation. (C) A rear view of the firing handle 134 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g is pressed. It is a modification of the time chart of various signals including a launch control signal. It is a modification of the graph which showed the characteristic of normal launch and turbo launch. FIG. 10 is a front view of a game machine provided with a launch handle 860 according to Modification 1; FIG. 10 shows an example of notification by a firing handle 860. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the launching handle 870 which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (B) An exploded perspective view of a firing handle 870. FIG. (A)-(c) It is the figure which showed an example of operation of the launching handle 870. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 1, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 2, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 3, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 4, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 5, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 6, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. FIG. 52 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 890 according to a modification, and is a circuit diagram corresponding to FIG. 51 described above. (A)-(c) It is a rear view of the launching handle 900 provided with two or more turbo buttons. (D) It is a side view from the side of the state of (a). (A) It is a rear view of the launching handle 910 provided with two turbo buttons with different shapes. (B) It is a rear view of the launching handle 920 in which two turbo buttons are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a launch control board 930, and is a block diagram corresponding to FIG. It is the graph which showed the characteristic of normal launch, weak turbo launch, and strong turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the above-mentioned FIG. It is a front view of a game stand provided with a plurality of turbo buttons. (A) It is the block diagram which showed an example of the connection between control boards. (B) (c) It is the block diagram which showed the other example of the connection between control boards. It is the block diagram which showed the other example of the connection between control boards. (A) The main terminals provided in the payout control microcomputer 770 are illustrated. (B) It is the figure (partially extracted) which showed the connection of the payout control microcomputer 770 and an external device (IC). It is the figure which showed an example of the main command. It is the figure which showed the example of a connection of a main board | substrate, a payout board | substrate, an external terminal board, and an external device (hall computer). (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a main board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a payout board | substrate. (A) It is the connection example which reversed arrangement | positioning of the main board | substrate and the payout board | substrate with respect to the connection example shown in the said FIG. (B) A connection example in which both the main board and the payout board are directly connected to the external terminal board. It is a schematic diagram explaining the command processing which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a block diagram explaining the communication process of a main control part and a payout control part. (B) It is a block diagram explaining a serial communication circuit. (C) It is a block diagram explaining the flow of the serial communication of the main control part and the payout control part. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part accompanying the interruption | blocking of a power supply, and the timing of supply. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize reception process. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a structure of the number-of-balls storage area | region 308a-308d provided for every winning opening and starting opening. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command analysis process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command transmission process. (B) An example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize ball command setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the number of prize balls of (a)-(c) prize ball number storage area 308a-308d. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball command table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. (B) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the signal state storage area provided in RAM308. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the mask process of the external output signal information in step S306. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the external output signal setting process. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the external output signal setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of terminal arrangement | positioning of the payout control microcomputer. (A) It is the figure which showed the data structure of the output port 1 register for outputting the data of parallel output port POP1. (B) It is the figure which showed the output pattern in the case of outputting via a 7SEG decoder. (C) It is the figure which showed the correspondence of each segment of output terminal POP10-POP16 and LED. It is the figure which showed the relationship between an error name, LED display (LED lighting pattern), the state of error display LED, and the state of payout display LED. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the timer which the payout control microcomputer 770 uses. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of RAM storage area of payout control microcomputer 770. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected with the payout control microcomputer 770. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the combination of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error which are the generation | occurrence | production conditions of a door open error. It is the figure which showed an example of the payout control command. It is the figure (b-e) which showed an example (a) of transmission command output request information used when performing transmission command processing, and the data structure of a part of payout control command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an area to be initialized in a RAM and its timing. It is a flowchart of the main process which a payout control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of a received command process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a received command process. It is a flowchart explaining command analysis processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a starting process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout management process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a signal output process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command output request information setting process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st type command output request information setting process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd type command output request information setting process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a port output process. (A) It is the time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control part 600 to the main control part 300 in case a discharge intensity changeover switch signal is ON. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control part 600 to the main control part 300 in case a launch intensity changeover switch signal is OFF. 4 is a time chart illustrating an example of transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the variable in the timing chart of the example 1 of communication of the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600, and a predetermined timing. (A) It is an enlarged view of the time chart at the time of prize ball command transmission. (B) It is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown to t3 of FIG. (A) It is an example of the time chart at the time of detecting the some winning of a start opening or a winning opening in one main control part timer interruption process. (B) It is a time chart which shows the modification of the communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the output example 1 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 2 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 3 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 4 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 5 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 6 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 7 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 8 of an external terminal board signal. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of power supply among a power board 182, a payout board 170, and a main board 156 according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a power supply in the main board | substrate 156. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of power supply in a power supply board 182 and a main board 156. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a power supply in the main board | substrate 156. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of a received command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a reception command process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command acquisition process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. (A) It shows an example of a low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 1). (B) An example of the high probability state table (special figure 1) for special figure success / failure determination. (C) shows an example of the low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 2). (D) shows an example of a high probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 2). (A) shows an example of a low probability state table for determining whether or not a normal figure is appropriate. (B) An example of a high probability state table for determining whether or not to determine a normal figure is shown. (C) It is an example of the hit action table which defined the hit action of a usual figure. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the big hit operation | movement corresponding to each of the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the big hit operation | movement corresponding to each of the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command reception interruption process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 10 ms timer interruption process. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a DMA interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of production control main loop processing. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of storage area of RAM408. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the electric long opening effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting concerning Example 1-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting concerning Example 1-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-7 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-8 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-9 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 5-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 5-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a received command process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of prize ball command reception in a command analysis process (step S806). It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a transmission command process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a transmission command process. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining display control of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the display regarding how to hit. It is the figure which showed the right-handed alert | report in time series in the big hit game. (A) It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during electric support. (B) It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during non-electric support. It is the figure which showed an example of the launch related signal input into the 1st sub control board 160, and the input signal used as the basis of the said launch related signal. It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during the magnetic error detection. It is a figure for demonstrating the application example of the turbo button 804g. It is a figure for demonstrating the power interruption and power recovery during turbo button alerting | reporting. It is the figure which showed an example of the execution timing of various displays. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (B) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (C) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (D) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) The variable prize opening performance is shown. (B) Special figure performance is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a figure which shows the 1st variable winning opening in Embodiment 2, (a) It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable winning opening 234 attached to the decoration member 250, and the door member 234a being closed. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning opening 234 in the state attached to the decoration member 250 and the door member 234a being open | released. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative member 250 and a first variable winning opening 234. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the variable winning a prize mouth unit 260 from front diagonally upward. (B) It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the variable winning a prize mouth unit 260 from front diagonally upper left. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the variable prize opening unit 260 seen from the slightly lower side than FIG. 213 (a). (B) It is a sectional side view of the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272. It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit 260. FIG. FIG. 227 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 215. (A)-(f) It is the top view, front view, left view, right view, bottom view, and back view of the door member 243a. (G) It is a perspective view of the door member 243a. (A), (b) It is the figure which showed the other example of the protrusion part formed in the front of a door member. (C) It is the figure which looked at the conventional door member in an open position from the right side. (D) It is the figure which looked at the door member 243a which concerns on this embodiment in an open position from the right side surface. It is the figure which showed an example of the rolling route | root of a game ball. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 1st route | root R1. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 2nd route | root R2. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 3rd route | root R3. It is the figure which showed the other mode of the game ball which passes 3rd route | root R3. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the variable winning opening 600 which concerns on the modification 1. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the variable prize opening 620 which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which formed in the lower surface of a variable winning opening and the back surface of a door member the route which is easy to over-win and the route which is hard to over-win with the central axis of a ball sensor as a boundary. (B) On the lower surface of the variable winning opening and the back surface of the door member, a route that is easy to over-win and a route that is difficult to over-win is formed on the center axis of the ball sensor, and the ball sensors are provided on both routes. It is the figure which showed the example. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which showed an example of the shutter-type variable winning opening 650. FIG. (B) It is a side sectional view showing a section of a part of variable prize winning opening 650. It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit. 229 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 228. FIG. (A) It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit 260. FIG. (B) It is a sectional side view which follows the AA line in the figure (a). (C) It is a sectional side view which follows the BB line in the figure (a). (D) It is a sectional side view which follows the CC line in the figure (a). (E) It is a sectional side view which follows the DD line in the figure (a). It is a sectional side view which follows the AA line in Fig.230 (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (A) It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a side view of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit in Embodiment 3, (a) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a permeation | transmission front view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(f) It is a top view which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(F) It is a front permeation | transmission figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit in Embodiment 4, (a) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a permeation | transmission front view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(e) It is a top view which shows a mode that a game ball rolls in the inside of a variable winning opening unit. (A)-(F) It is a front permeation | transmission figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. It is a top view of the variable winning a prize mouth unit concerning the modification 1. It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening in Embodiment 5, (a) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (b). (D) It is a front view of a variable prize opening unit. (E) It is sectional drawing which follows the BB line in (d). It is an upper surface penetration figure of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable winning a prize mouth unit which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. It is a top view which shows the variable winning a prize mouth unit which concerns on Embodiment 2-4. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special figure starting port which concerns on the modification 3, (a) It is the external appearance perspective view seen from the front upper right. (B) It is a front view. (A) is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front right upper part. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back upper left. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, the example of the display aspect of a hold icon, and the example of the stop display aspect of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, and the example of a structure of the determination button 136a and selection button 136b, 136c. It is a figure which shows the example of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the effect movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, operation | movement of the shielding apparatus 246, and operation | movement of an effect movable body. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the transparent plate member 118 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, and the audio | voice output from the speaker 120. FIG. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st display and the 2nd display which are displayed on the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 5 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 6 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 7 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814 from the player side. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table explaining the alerting notification that can be displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an effect. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-2 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-3 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-4 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-5 of production. In the pachinko machine 100 by 8th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure explaining the example from which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes. In the pachinko machine 100 by 8th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure explaining the example from which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing only a main part of a basic circuit 302 extracted from a main control part 300. (A) It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU304. (B) It is the figure which showed the detail of the RWM area | region of the memory map shown to (a). (C) It is the figure which showed the I / O map of CPU304. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initialization process. It is a time chart of the starting process after a system reset. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the T-registration check process performed by the initial setting 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the program list of T cash register check processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the T cash register check process which concerns on a modification. (B) It is an example of the program list of the T cash register check process concerning a modification. It is the figure which extracted and showed only the LD command from the program list of FIG.300 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of data stored in a ROM 306. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of instruction data of a main control unit 300. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the high-order bit and the low-order bit of the instruction data of the main control part 300. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data table. An example of the movement of the address by the CALL instruction is shown conceptually. It is the figure which showed an example of the command data and supplementary data of a CALL command. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of the EXESUB instruction. (B) is a diagram showing an instruction data table in which an EXESUB instruction is assigned to the empty area of FIG. 308 (b). It is the figure which showed notionally an example of the movement of the address by an EXESUB instruction. It shows an example of calling of the top address of a subroutine by the EXESUB instruction. It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data and the supplementary data of the EXESUB instruction. It is the program list which showed an example of the control program of the main control part timer interruption process. It is the figure which showed the case where the ROM area was comprised so that the ROM control area in which the control program data was memorize | stored might become larger than the area | region which can be called by the EXESUB instruction. (A) (b) It is the figure which showed an example at the time of expanding the area | region of the head address of the subroutine which can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn). (A) A part of the control program of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process is extracted. (B) A part of the control program for the normal state update process is extracted. (C) A part of a conventional memory read process is extracted. (D) It is the figure which showed a part of variable area | region provided in RAM area (RWM area | region). (E) A part of the memory read processing according to the present embodiment is extracted. FIG. 318 is a diagram comparing the machine language of the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG. 318 (c) and the machine language of the memory reading process according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 318 (e). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for table selection. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern selection table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table. (D) It is the figure which showed the reservation number storage area, the random number 1 storage area, and the random number 2 storage area which are provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the addresses F040H to F042H of the RWM area. 3 is an example of a program list showing a part of a definition of a data table stored in a ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a part of a definition of a variable storage area provided in a RAM 308. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process. It is an example of a program list of special symbol variation time lottery processing. It is the figure which showed a part of command with which the control part 300 (CPU304) is provided, and its description. (A) It is the figure which showed the high-order bit and the low-order bit of the instruction data of the main control part 300. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data table. It is the figure which showed the modification of the table for table selection, the 1st fluctuation pattern selection table, and the 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process which concerns on a modification. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the initial setting data table memorize | stored in ROM306. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of storage area of RAM308 after the initialization process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an initial setting process. It is an example of the program list of an initialization process. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of 2nd special command with which the main-control part 300 is provided. (B) It is the figure which showed the state of the flag register before and behind performing a 2nd special instruction. It is a figure showing an example of processing using a CPJR instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the program using the conventional command. (B) An example of a program using a CPJR instruction. It is a figure showing an example of other processing using a CPJR instruction. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of another process using a CPJR instruction including a process V. It is a figure showing an example of processing using a CPRT instruction. (A) An example of a program using a CPRT instruction. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the program using the conventional command. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a part of a third special instruction included in the main control unit 300. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a “RESmZ n, r” instruction. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to a RES command from the command map of the main control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program using a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a RES instruction according to Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 2. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to the RES command which concerns on the modification 2 from the command map of the main control part. It is the figure which showed the other modification of the RES instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed the instruction map at the time of providing the RES instruction which prohibits the access of a predetermined bit, and the instruction map when provided with the RES instruction which prohibits the access of a predetermined bit. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which made the magnitude of the numerical value of the 1st operand of a RES instruction differ, and the arrangement | sequence order of the instruction map of a RES instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the program starting setting process which is a part of user program. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the power-on setting process which is a part of user program. It is the figure which showed a part of user program equivalent to a main control part timer interruption process. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a fourth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 and the ROM area of the main control unit 300. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to the RST command which concerns on a 4th special command from the command map of the main control part. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a front view showing the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) It is the figure which expanded and showed the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) planarly. (B) It is the figure which showed the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU1404 of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU1504 of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 2nd sub control part. It is the figure which showed the other example of application of this invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a basic circuit 302 when a microprocessor 3000 is used. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of reset. FIG. 36 is an internal configuration diagram of a random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 364. FIG. 370 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing by the noise filter 3185 illustrated in FIG. 366. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing details of a random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 366. It is a figure which shows the range of the random number output when the maximum value of the random number generation range is not set. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a range of random numbers output when a maximum value different from that in FIG. 369 is set. It is a figure which shows the range which can acquire a random number in the random number generation range which set the maximum value and the minimum value. It is a figure which shows the derivation source of the random number used with the game machine of this embodiment with a table | surface. 5 is a diagram for explaining a first internal information register prepared in an internal register 3101 of an interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of abnormality detection in a frequency monitoring circuit 3182. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of detection of abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184. It is the figure which compared the cycle in which a random number makes a round, and the cycle of a timer interruption. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting 2 in a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the random number generation circuit initial setting process in step S1053. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a common drawing relevant lottery process. (B) It is a figure which shows a common drawing lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure related lottery process. (A) It is a figure which shows a special drawing lottery table. (B) It is a figure which shows a stop symbol lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is the figure which showed the flow of the process which acquires a special figure winning random number and a common winning random number among winning prize reception processes in step S217. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation | movement in the case of power-off. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation | movement in the case of a momentary interruption. It is a figure which shows the problem of a random number generation range. 38 is a diagram showing a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG. 368. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part timer interruption process. 6 is a diagram for explaining a second internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a third internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a fourth internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. It is a figure which shows the flow of a system reset including the relationship with random number update. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the process performed by the initial setting of a game control program. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the concept of the process of (a). FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a modification of the reset control circuit 314 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 364. 10 is a timing chart showing an example when a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs only in main control unit 300 out of main control unit 300 and first sub control unit 400. (A) It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of the structure of the main control part. (B) It is the figure which showed the 2nd modification of the structure of the main control part. (C) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the reset circuit comprised including the random delay circuit 317, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and WDT314. (A) It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of FIG. 398 (c). (B) It is the figure which showed the 2nd modification of FIG. 398 (c). (A) It is the figure which showed the 3rd modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 398 (c). (B) It is the figure which showed a part of various IC connected to CPU304. It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of the connection of the reset signal output terminal XRST shown in FIG.400 (b). It is the figure which showed a part of various IC connected to the basic circuit 302 demonstrated using FIG. 293, and this basic circuit 302. FIG. (A) An example of setting a fixed extension time is shown. (B) A setting example of the random extension time is shown. An example of setting the timeout time of WDT 314 is shown. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the change of the output signal of a reset output terminal XSRSTO terminal, and the state change of a security mode. (A), (b) It is the figure which showed the example from which the end timing of a fixed extension process and the timing which outputs the signal of H level from reset output terminal XRSTO correspond, but differ in random extension time. (C), (d) It is the figure which showed the example which the completion | finish timing of a fixed extension process and the timing which outputs the signal of H level from reset output terminal XRSTO correspond, but fixed extension time differs. It is the figure which showed the example which changes a reset output signal on the occasion of a fixed extension process. It is the figure which showed the change of the state of an address signal, a data signal, a control signal, and a reset output signal, and a security mode. (A) It is the figure which showed the state change of the other output signal after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the state change of the other output signal after internal reset. (A) It is the figure which showed the other example of the state change of the other output signal after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the other example of the state change of the other output signal after internal reset. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of the start timing of the security mode after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of the start timing of the security mode after internal reset. It is the figure which showed the basic concept of this invention. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of a connection of the power supply board | substrate 182 demonstrated using FIG. 291, the payout board | substrate 170, and the main board | substrate 156. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the conventional connection aspect corresponding to (a). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process which concerns on a modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to the said FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting 2 in a main control part main process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the signal output of the predetermined | prescribed output terminal which concerns on this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the signal output of the predetermined | prescribed output terminal which concerns on this invention. It is the figure which showed the change of the system clock signal at the time of a user reset, a data signal, a control signal, and a reset output signal.

  <Embodiment 1>

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of the game table>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

Hereinafter, the main board 156 constituting the main controller 300 may be referred to as the main control board 156, and the payout board 170 constituting the payout controller 600 may be referred to as the payout control board 170. The main control board 156 and the payout control board 170 are configured as separate boards.
<The front of the game console>

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is.

In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit 300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), the first sub control unit 400 that mainly controls the production and the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on it, a payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in accordance with a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of game balls A control unit 630 and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (details will be described later).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Processing of command transmitted from main control unit to payout control unit>

  FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating processing of a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in the figure, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are electrically connected via a serial communication line, and when the command transmission condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 sets the payout control unit 600. A predetermined command is transmitted to The payout control unit 600 performs at least a process of storing the received command once (before the analysis of the command) in a storage unit (for example, a RAM) and a process of analyzing the command stored in the storage unit. .

  That is, as shown in the figure, when a plurality of commands (command 1, command 2) are transmitted from the main control unit 300 that performs the first process to the payout control unit 600 that performs the second process, Both of the commands 2 are stored in a RAM or the like, and then the stored commands 1 and 2 are analyzed. For example, command 2 is a normal command, but even if command 1 is an illegal command, any command is temporarily stored in the RAM or the like. Thereafter, command analysis processing is performed, the illegal command 1 is discarded, and the normal command 2 is not discarded, but processing corresponding to the command (second processing) is executed.

<Serial communication between main control unit and payout control unit>

  With reference to FIG. 7, serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 7A is a schematic block diagram of a serial communication circuit, and FIG. These are the block diagrams explaining the register | resistor regarding the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600 serial communication. FIG. 7C is a block diagram for explaining the flow of serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600.

  Referring to FIG. 1A, the pachinko machine 100 is for a main control unit microcomputer (microprocessor) 760 capable of executing at least game control and for a payout control unit capable of executing at least prize ball granting control. A microcomputer (microprocessor) 770 is included. The main control unit microcomputer 760 is mounted on the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300, and the payout control unit microcomputer 760 is a payout control board 170 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (what is the main control board 156? It is mounted on another board. The main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770 each include serial communication circuits 750 and 752 shown in FIG. 5B, and transmit and receive signals (for example, prize ball commands) by serial communication. be able to.

  The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes, for example, a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication registers. The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes a CPU core register 710 including general-purpose registers (A register 712, HL register (pair register) 714, other registers 716, etc.), ROM 306, RAM (buffer) 308, and the like.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes, for example, a status register 772, a reception data register 774, a transmission data register 776, and other registers 778 as serial communication registers.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes a CPU core register 720 including general-purpose registers (A register 722, HL register (pair register) 724, other registers 726, etc.) as general-purpose registers (storage areas), ROM 706, RAM (Buffer area) 708 and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, a RAM (buffer area) 708 is provided in a storage area (first storage area), and a CPU core register 720 is provided in another storage area (second storage area). And a reception data register 774 and a transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are provided in the other storage area (third storage area).

  The reception data register 764 and the transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 may be a single transmission / reception data register. Further, the reception data register 774 and the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 may be one transmission / reception data register.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 have four-channel (Ch0, Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3) circuits. All channels are functionally independent, and there are channels that can transmit and receive by having a transmitter and a receiver, and channels that can only transmit by having only a transmitter. For serial communication between the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770, a channel (Ch0) capable of transmission and reception is used. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 operate in the FIFO mode. 64 bytes for transmission and 8 bytes for reception can be used as a FIFO.

  For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 performs data transmission, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760 to indicate that “transmission is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 766. The serial communication circuit 750 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 766.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 774 of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770. The CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the received data register 774 when “reception completed”.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 performs data transmission, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770 to indicate that “send is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 776. The serial communication circuit 752 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 776.

  For example, when the main controller microcomputer 760 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 764 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main controller microcomputer 760. The CPU of the main control unit 300 reads the reception data from the reception data register 764 when “reception is completed” with reference to the status register.

  Further, when transmitting data, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can detect the transmission state (data transmission completion, etc.) with reference to the status registers 762 and 772 of the serial communication circuits 750 and 752. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 refer to the status registers 762 and 772 when receiving data, and read data from the reception data registers 764 and 774 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, by referring to the status registers 762 and 772, whether there is data in which noise is detected in the received data, whether there is data including a break code, a framing error, and a parity error, or overrun detection The presence or absence can be confirmed.

  In this way, for example, a command transmitted from the main control unit microcomputer 760 is written in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 and is used for various calculation processes and determination processes. After being stored in the CPU core register 712 of the computer 770, it is stored in the RAM (buffer) 708. As will be described later, the command received by the payout control unit 600 is temporarily stored in a RAM (buffer) 708 before the command analysis process. Thus, by storing the received command in the buffer in preference to the command analysis process, the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the RAM 708 or the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the CPU core register 712. Since it is possible to reduce the period during which the command is played, it is possible to reduce the situation where commands are scattered in each register, and thus it may be possible to stabilize game control.

  With reference to FIG.7 (c), the flow of the serial communication process of the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600 is demonstrated. First, a first communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (1). The payout control unit 600 receives a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (2). Upon receipt of the main control communication confirmation command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a second communication confirmation command (a response command to the first communication confirmation command, a payout control communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 (3). . Receiving the payout control communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 transmits a command (for example, a prize ball command here) to the payout control unit 600 (4).

  Processes (1) to (3) are in a communication confirmation state. In this state, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a command to the payout control unit 600. When the process (3) is completed, the communication confirmation is completed, and the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600 in this state. For example, considering the influence of noise and the like, the process (1) is performed a plurality of times, and a communication error state is set when a command indicating completion of communication confirmation of the process (3) is not obtained a predetermined number of times. Even when this communication error occurs, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600. Further, in order to notify an error, a signal is output to a device connected to the outside. Note that signal output to an externally connected device may not be performed.

  The process (1) is executed once every predetermined number of interrupt processes, for example, once during the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 25 times (50 times,...). Process (2) and process (3) may be executed by the same interrupt process, or may be executed by different interrupt processes. Further, the control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted by the same interrupt process as the process (3). The control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted only when there is a change (for example, when the state changes from a normal state to an abnormal state (in the case of an error)).

  The payout control unit 600 can execute at least a process related to awarding when the first command (prize ball command) is stored in the first storage means (such as the reception data register 774). When the second command (main control communication confirmation command) is stored in the first storage means, the third command (payout control communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command response command) is sent to the main control unit 300. ) Can be executed at least (this will be described in detail later).

The reception data register 764 and transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the reception data register 774 and transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are limited in size, and the CPU core When data is transmitted / received to / from the registers 712 and 722 and the RAMs 308 and 708, data leakage may occur when a condition such as an abnormality occurs, for example.
<Serial communication related registers>

  Next, various registers included in the serial communication-related registers will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram of various registers included in the serial communication-related registers and a diagram showing the contents of the various registers.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the main controller microcomputer 760 includes a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication-related registers. Among these registers, the other registers 768 include an authentication status register 768a, a transmission data FIFO 768b, a gaming state information register 768c, a gaming machine frame information register 768d, a recovery completion notification register 768e, etc., as shown in FIG. It is.

  The authentication status register 768a is information (for example, a numerical value 1) indicating that the authentication is normally completed when authentication described below is completed, or information (for example, indicating that the authentication is not normally completed) One of the numerical values 0) is set. The transmission data FIFO 768b is a buffer for temporarily storing game information that the main control unit 300 transmits to an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600.

  In this example, the game information transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the transmission data FIFO 768b is composed of information of a total of 2 bytes including type information of 1 byte length and count information of 1 byte length. The type information can be classified into a 4-bit data type and a 4-bit data number, and the data type is the start port (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal diagram start). 228), a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226), a large winning opening (for example, a variable winning opening 234), and information indicating the type of game information such as the number of symbol stops. The data number is information indicating a number for each data type. In addition, when the data type is a start port, a winning port, or a big winning port, the count information stores a 4-bit long number of winning balls and a 4-bit long winning number, and when the data type is a symbol stop count, The count information stores a 4-bit length symbol stop count.

  The game state information register 768c is a register for storing game state information (information relating to the number of winning balls, symbol stop, etc.) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600. is there. In this example, the game state information transmitted from the main control unit 300 via the game state information register 768c is 8-byte length information. For example, information on the type of jackpot, information on probability change / change / time reduction, etc. The main control unit 300 is used for transmitting information on various abnormalities detected by the main control unit 300.

The gaming machine frame information register 768d is a register for storing gaming machine frame information (information related to various abnormalities and various requests) received by the main control unit 300 from an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600. In this example, the game frame information received via the gaming machine frame information register 768d is 8 bytes long information, for example, information on various abnormalities detected by an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600, and payout It is used for receiving a request to the main control unit 300 (game ball counting request, power saving shift request, etc.) from an external control unit such as the control unit 600. Further, the recovery completion notification register 768e is a register in which information (for example, a numerical value 1) indicating that the recovery is completed is set when the recovery described later is completed.
<Power control>

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating power control according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing the operation state of each control unit in accordance with the timing of power supply cutoff and supply, and FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram showing the operation status of each control unit at the time of power supply cutoff. It is.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current and supplies it to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400. The payout control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub control unit 500. That is, when the power source rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the first sub control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the second sub control unit 500 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. Similarly, when the power supply rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the payout control unit 600 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. The power source may input AC 100V.

  As will be described later, the payout control unit 600 can receive a command and analyze the received command during a period from when the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state until the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state. You can also Also, the payout control unit 600 can set the number of prize balls, but the payout process is not executed. Thereafter, when the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 is received by the payout control unit 600 after the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state, the set number of prize balls (not intended) It may be erased (as a prize ball command sent at timing). In addition, when the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state (and after the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state), a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Process as a normal command.

  Here, based on the content described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game machine is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like in a big hit state, when the game table is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player becomes extremely disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a situation, a power interruption process (to be described later) is executed to maintain the state of the game machine with the electric power stored in the capacitor. This power interruption process is executed not only when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as “power off”) but also when the supply voltage is temporarily reduced due to a cause such as static electricity (hereinafter referred to as an instantaneous power interruption). The FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the operation during power interruption.

  When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not immediately become 0, but the supply voltage gradually drops due to the electric power stored in the capacitor. For example, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (9.66 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. By receiving this signal, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred by a main process (described later) of the main control unit 300, and a power interruption process is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the main control unit 300 is a power-off release state from the occurrence of power interruption until the supply voltage drops to 9.66 V. After the voltage drops below 9.66V, the power is turned off. The power-off state here means a state in which the voltage is lower than a predetermined value and a low-voltage signal to be described later is turned on, and does not mean a state in which the power source is actually cut off. .

  Similarly, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (8.3 V in this embodiment), the payout control unit 600 determines that a power interruption has occurred, and executes a power interruption process. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the dispensing control unit 600 is a power-off release state from when the power interruption occurs until the supply voltage drops to 8.3 V. After the voltage drops below 8.3V, the power is turned off.

Each of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is provided with a start signal output circuit (described later) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. For example, in the main control unit 300, when the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 receives the input of the activation signal, the main control unit main process is started according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in a reset start (reset release state) by a reset interrupt. Execute. The same applies to the payout control unit 600. When the supply voltage of 12V falls below a predetermined voltage, the reset state is entered, and the system waits until the power-off state is released.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value, and the initial value (for example, 11111111B (FFH (H is a numerical value indicating that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number)) is set in the mask information provided in the RAM 308. The same applies to the following))). Further, 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set as an initial value of a communication confirmation command to be described later.

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). ) Proceeds to step S107. Even if the predetermined value (9.66 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S105, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to a power-on process (details will be described later) in step S115, and proceeds to a power recovery process in step S109 when returning to the state before power interruption.

  In step S109, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S109, power-on information (recovery command) is set in the transmission information storage area.

  This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. The power-on information is set to 00H when the power is turned on by initial activation, and is set to 01H when the power is turned on by return activation. That is, in step S109, a value (01H) indicating return activation is set as the power-on information.

  In step S111, a delay process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this delay processing, processing for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. In this example, power-on information is set in the process of step S109 prior to the delay process (step S111). Thereby, referring to the power-on information, it can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 side whether it is an initial activation or a return activation. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the delay process (step S111) may be executed earlier than the power recovery process (step S109).

  In step S113, time measurement by the WDT 314 is started. In step S115, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S115) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S117, the same delay process as in step S111 is executed (details will be described later). In step S119, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is started.

  In step S121, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. In step S121, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

In step S123, command transmission processing is performed. In this command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. In step S125, communication abnormality processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this communication abnormality process, a return process is performed when an abnormality occurs in communication with the payout control unit 600. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S121 to S125 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Power-on processing>

  Next, the power-on process (step S115) in the main control unit main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a flowchart showing a flow of processing at power-on.

  In step S131, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that there has been an operation), that is, RAM clear If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S133 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S135.

  In step S133, a RAM clear process is performed by setting an initial value (for example, 0) in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308. In step S135, it is determined whether or not the authentication is completed by referring to the authentication status register 768a (see FIG. 8). If the authentication is normally completed, the process proceeds to step S137 and the authentication is normally performed. If not completed, the process of step S135 is repeated.

  The authentication method executed in step S135 is not particularly limited. For example, the initial value of 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is 0. A checksum is calculated by adding all to a 1-byte register, and whether the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether the checksum is normal) An example is a method of performing authentication.

In step S137, it is determined whether or not the recovery is completed by referring to the recovery completion notification register 768e (see FIG. 8). If the recovery is completed, the process proceeds to step S139, and if the recovery is not completed Repeats the process of step S137. Here, “recovery” means that when a communication abnormality such as power interruption or communication line disconnection occurs and there is untransmitted data from the main control unit 300, the encryption communication control unit 315 (see FIG. 8) This refers to a process of automatically transmitting untransmitted data to another control unit such as the payout control unit 600 (regardless of the control program of the main control unit 300). In step S139, the corresponding game information is set in 0 to 2 (game state information registers 0 to 2) of the game state information register 768c, and in step S141, 3 (game state information register 3) of the game state information register 768c. Then, after setting information indicating that the setting of the gaming state information is completed (gaming state information setting completion), the processing is terminated.
<Processing when communication is abnormal>

  Next, a communication abnormality process (step S125) in the main control unit main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a flowchart showing a flow of processing at the time of communication abnormality in the main control unit main processing.

  In step S151, it is determined whether the communication abnormality flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S153, and if it is off, the process ends. This communication abnormality flag is set to ON (for example, a numerical value of 1) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a communication abnormality monitoring process described later (details will be described later).

In steps S153 and S155, processing similar to that in steps S135 and S137 of the power-on process is performed. If authentication is completed and recovery is completed, the process proceeds to step S157. Note that if the recovery is not completed when the authentication is completed, the authentication may be performed again. In step S157, the communication abnormality flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to off (for example, a numerical value of 0), and then the process ends.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S171, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 is executed. In step S173, a sub-control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set). In step S175, the interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S177, a basic random number initial value update process is executed (details will be described later). In step S177, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, a basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed. In step S179, command transmission processing is performed, whereby various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S181, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S177. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limited counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limited counter in step S175 and subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second has passed, the process proceeds to step S183.

In step S183, the sub-control unit activation wait counter is decremented by 1. In step S185, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S175. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, that is, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S173 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S187. In step S187, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes in steps S215 to S235.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON (for example, a numerical value 1) and whether a communication abnormality flag is ON (for example, a numerical value 1). If any flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes of steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, if both flags are OFF (for example, the numerical value 0), the process proceeds to step S215.

  In step S215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S216, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the ordinary drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. If there is, the corresponding number of winning balls is stored in the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening and starting port. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (ordinary symbol A) or the off symbol (general symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, a special figure prefetch control process is performed. In this special figure prefetch control process, prefetch such as a special figure winning random number is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on FIG. I, when the second off flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to have the respective modes of the special figure I, and the setting area of the RAM 308 Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S232, device monitoring processing is executed. Although details will be described later, in this device monitoring processing, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed. Here, the errors monitored in this device monitoring process are: tray pan full error (bottom pan full tank error), payout device error, payout excess error, illegal payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit not yet Examples include connection error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, frame opening error (front frame door opening error), switch non-connection error, and impact sensor error.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout. The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is the payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180. The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of the payout number switch (not shown) of the game ball controlled by the payout board 170, and stops the payout operation when an abnormal connection of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board). To do. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released. The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected. The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands (for example, a signal indicating a specific abnormality when there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S232) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, a process of outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be output to the external terminal board 609 without going through the payout board 170.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Serial command management processing>

  Next, the serial command management process (step S219) in the above-described main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command management processing.

  As described above, in this serial command management process, when it is determined in step S212 that the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0 (when the timer interrupt function is limited), or in step S214, the specific abnormality is detected. This process is not executed when it is determined that the detection flag is ON (when there is specific abnormality information such as a magnetic abnormality error or magnetic field abnormality error), or when it is determined that the communication abnormality flag is ON. . If the timer interrupt function is limited, the serial command management process may be executed. If there is only specific abnormality information, the serial command management process may be executed. The serial command management process may be executed only when it is determined that the communication abnormality flag is ON.

In step S255 of the serial command management process, a serial command reception process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command reception process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout control unit 600. When a command is received, a process corresponding to the command is performed. In step S256, serial command transmission processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command transmission process, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 is performed.
<Serial command reception processing>

  Next, the serial command reception process (step S155) in the serial command management process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command reception processing.

  In step S261, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, various information is initialized by executing the processing in steps S262 to S264, and the command If not received, the process proceeds to step S265. In step S265, the processing ends after other serial command reception processing is performed.

  In step S262, an initial value (0 in this example) is set to the serial command status stored in the RAM 308. In the next step S163, an initial value (in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter stored in the RAM 308. Then, 10) is set. Here, the serial command status is information indicating whether or not a prize ball command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value of 0, the prize command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted.

  The communication confirmation command transmission counter is a counter that is decremented by one every time a communication confirmation command is transmitted once in step S277 of the serial command transmission process described later. The communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is normal. It is used to determine whether or not it has been received. When 10 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission command, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 in step S278 of serial command transmission processing described later. This is when the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 has not been received even once during the period of 10 transmissions.

In step S264, the serial command communication error flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to 0. In the next step S265, other serial command reception processing is performed, and then the processing is terminated. Here, the serial command communication error flag is information indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in serial communication. When the information is a numerical value of 0, it indicates that serial communication is normal. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in serial communication.
<Serial command transmission processing>

  Next, serial command transmission processing will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing, and FIG. 2B is an example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600.

  In step S271, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S272, it is determined whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 (a predetermined time after transmitting the communication confirmation command to the dispensing control unit 600). (In this embodiment, whether or not 100 ms has elapsed) is determined, and if 0 (when a predetermined time has elapsed), the processing from step S274 is performed, and if other than 0 (the predetermined time has elapsed) If so, the process proceeds to step S273. In step S273, a prize ball command setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize ball command setting process, a prize ball command transmission preparation process is executed when a prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied.

  In step S274, an initial value (25 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S275, 1 (a state in which a prize ball command cannot be transmitted) is set in the serial command status. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a counter that is decremented by one every main control unit timer interrupt processing cycle (about 4 ms in this embodiment) in step S271, and transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600. Then, it is used to determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed. When 25 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is determined to be 0 in step S172 after about 100 ms (= 4 ms × 25) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the serial command status is set to 1 in step S275 so that the prize control command cannot be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command. However, it may be configured such that a prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing.

  In step S276, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to a communication confirmation command (described later) in the transmission data register. In step S277, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In the next step S278, it is determined whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 (whether the communication confirmation command has been transmitted 10 times). In the case (when transmitted 10 times), the processing from step S279 is performed, and when it is other than 0 (when not transmitted 10 times), the process proceeds to step S281.

  In step S279, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In next step S281, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status, and in next step S282. Then, after setting an initial value (1 in this example) to the serial command communication error flag, the process proceeds to step S283. In step S283, after the other serial command transmission process is performed, the process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600 the main control communication confirmation command at initial startup (value is 10H), and the main control communication confirmation at return startup. Command (value is 11H), prize ball command (value is 23H) for instructing to pay out 3 game balls, value ball command (value is 2AH) to instruct to pay out 10 game balls, 15 balls A prize ball command (value is 2FH) for instructing to pay out a game ball.

  When the first command received from the main control unit 300 is a main control communication confirmation command (value is 11H) at the time of return activation, a return process is performed, and a main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H at the time of initial activation). ), A RAM clear process or the like is performed. As described above, when transmitting the communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 always considers the power-on information, adds the value (10H) indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information, and transmits the result. The value indicating the power-on information is 00H at initial startup and 01H at return startup. As a result, the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of initial activation is 10H, and the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of return activation is 11H. The value indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information may be added each time the communication confirmation command is transmitted, may be added only for the first time, or the communication confirmation command is transmitted a predetermined number of times. It may be added each time.

In the present embodiment, in the above-described step S276, the main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) and the value (00H) indicating the power-on information set in the power recovery process (step S109) of the main control unit main process Or a value obtained by adding (01H) to the transmission data register and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. The main control communication confirmation command is transmitted at a timing of once every 100 ms as an example.
<Prize ball command setting process>

  Next, the prize ball command setting process (step S273) in the above-described serial command transmission process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command setting process.

  In step S291, it is determined whether or not the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S292. If not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S298. Here, “when the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied” means that in the above-described winning acceptance process (step S216), the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary figure starting port 228, Or, it is determined that there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234 and the serial command status indicates 0 (a state in which a winning ball command can be transmitted).

  In step S292, the prize winning ball number storage area 308a for the variable prize opening shown in FIG. 17, the first special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308b, the second special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308c, and the general The number of prize balls stored in the winning ball prize storage area 308d is updated. In the present embodiment, every time the winning ball command setting process is executed (each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed once), the variable winning prize winning ball number storage area 308a → the first special figure starting port. Award ball number storage area 308b → second special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308c → general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d In order of each prize ball number storage area, the number of winning balls It is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the storage area is 1 or more. When the number of prize balls is 1 or more, the prize ball number is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of prize balls, and the prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d being referred to is designated as the prize ball command. Get from table.

  In step S293, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the prize ball command acquired in step S292 in the transmission data register.

  FIGS. 17A to 17C are diagrams showing an example of changes in the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d. FIG. 17D shows an example of the prize ball command table. FIG. In this example, in the Nth (N is a positive integer) prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is 2 (00000010B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 2 (00000010B) to 1 (00000001B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 1) th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 2) -th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Also, a general winning opening prize ball command (0AH) corresponding to the referenced general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is acquired from the winning ball command table shown in FIG. The prize ball command (0AH) for mouth is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  Although an example in which one prize ball number is subtracted by one prize ball command setting process is shown here, two or more prize balls may be subtracted by one prize ball command setting process. In this case, the number of winning balls of the same type of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted, or the number of winning balls of different types of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted. Further, the order of referring to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is not limited. For example, the prize ball number storage area 308a to 308d may be referred to first in descending order of the number of prize balls. You may refer previously from the opening | mouth 213 and the 2nd special figure starting opening | mouth 214). The number of prize ball commands transmitted in one prize ball command setting process is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  Returning to FIG. 16, in step S294, the values in the award ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are read, the values stored in the award ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are added, and the total number of award balls provided in the RAM 308 is obtained. Store in the storage area. In step S295, it is determined whether or not the value (total number of winning balls) of the total winning ball number storage area calculated in step S294 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (10 in this example). If not, the process proceeds to step S298.

  In step S296, 10 is subtracted from the value of the total number of winning balls, and in the next step S297, 1 is added to the number of output requests provided in the RAM 308, and the process returns to step S295. In step S298, after other prize ball command setting processing is performed, the processing ends.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S295 that the total number of winning balls is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the processing returns to the determination in step S295 after performing the processing in steps S296 and S297. When the number of winning balls is 25, the processing of steps S296 and S297 is performed twice, and as a result, 2 is set as the number of output requests. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing. For example, after performing the processes of steps S296 and S297, the prize ball command setting process is once ended, and the remaining output in the next prize ball command setting process is performed. It is good also as a structure which adds the number of requests.

In such a configuration, in the previous example, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 25 to 15 in step S296, 1 is set as the number of output requests in the subsequent step S297, and the next winning ball command setting processing step is performed. In S296, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 15 to 5, and in the subsequent step S297, 1 is set as the output request number.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, device monitoring processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  In step S351, device information indicating the presence / absence of the error is initialized. In step S352, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read, the presence or absence of a specific error (specific abnormality) is monitored, and if the specific abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step S353. On the other hand, if no specific abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step S355.

  In step S353, specific abnormality information (device information) indicating the error detected in step S352 is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S354, the specific abnormality flag stored in the RAM 308 is set. Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S355. The specific abnormality information is abnormality information of one or a plurality of errors set in advance from the above-described abnormality information regarding errors. In the present embodiment, the abnormality information of the magnetic abnormality error and the magnetic field abnormality error is set in advance as the specific abnormality information, but is not limited to this.

In step S355, communication abnormality monitoring processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S356, the status (device information) is updated based on other abnormal states. In step S357, it is determined whether or not the status (device information) has changed. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S358, and if not, the process ends. In step S358, in order to output the main command corresponding to the changed status, the corresponding main command output request is set to ON, and the process ends.
<Abnormality monitoring processing>

  Next, the communication abnormality monitoring process (step S355) in the above-described device monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the communication abnormality monitoring process.

  In step S371, it is determined whether the communication timeout flag is on or off by referring to the gaming machine frame information register 768d (see FIG. 8), and if it is on (the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal). If it has occurred), the process proceeds to step S377, and if it is off (if no abnormality has occurred in communication with the payout control unit 600), the process proceeds to step S373. In step S373, the winning protection wait flag stored in the RAM is set to OFF, and in the next step S375, the winning protection wait timer stored in the RAM is reset (initialized), and then the process ends.

  In step S377, it is determined whether the winning protection wait flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S381, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S385. In step S381, the winning protection wait flag is set to ON, and in the next step S383, a predetermined value (a numerical value corresponding to 5 seconds in this example) is set in the winning protection wait timer, and then the process ends.

In step S385, 1 is subtracted from the winning protection weight timer, and in the next step S387, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning protection weight timer subtracted in step S385 is zero. If the result of this determination is that the winning protection wait timer is not 0, the process is terminated, while if the winning protection wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S389 and the communication abnormality flag is set to ON, and the next step After the winning protection wait flag is set to OFF in S391, the process ends.
<Specific examples of communication error processing>

  Next, a communication abnormality process executed by the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a time chart showing an example of communication abnormality processing in time series.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 determines whether the communication timeout flag is on or off (whether the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal) in the communication abnormality monitoring process (step 355) of the device monitoring process (step S232). If the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal, the communication abnormality flag is not immediately turned on, but the wait time (actual time) counted by the winning protection wait timer is set. In the example, the communication abnormality flag is set to ON after waiting for 5 seconds to elapse.

  For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in communication with the payout control unit 600, the processes in steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt process are not immediately interrupted, and the wait time has elapsed. Until this is done, the processes in steps S215 to S235 are continued. Therefore, even when a communication abnormality occurs during a game, it is possible to continue control relating to the game until the wait time elapses, and a situation that causes a disadvantage to the player due to the communication abnormality can be avoided. There is a case.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 20A, a communication abnormality has occurred at the timing indicated by the reference symbol T1, but since the prize protection wait timer is activated due to the communication abnormality, the timing indicated by the reference symbol T1 at which the communication abnormality has occurred. Until the timing indicated by the symbol T2 when the wait time Wt1 by the winning protection wait timer elapses, the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interruption processing is not interrupted. Therefore, during the period from the code T1 to the code T2, even if the communication is abnormal, it is possible to control the game and accept a prize.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20B, a communication abnormality occurs at the timing indicated by reference numeral T3, but before the wait time Wt1 by the winning protection wait timer elapses (after the elapse of time Wt2 (<Wt1)). In addition, the communication abnormality is resolved at the timing indicated by the reference symbol T4, and the communication timeout flag is turned off. Therefore, in this example, during the period from the code T3 to the code T4, even if the communication is abnormal, it is possible to control the game, accept a prize, and interrupt the game control even once. It is possible to return to the state before the occurrence of the communication abnormality (the state immediately before the timing indicated by the symbol T3).

  On the other hand, the main control unit 300 monitors whether there is a specific abnormality in the communication abnormality monitoring process (step 355) of the device monitoring process (step S232), and immediately detects a specific abnormality detection flag when a specific abnormality is detected. Is set to ON. For this reason, when a specific abnormality is detected, the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interruption processing is immediately interrupted. Therefore, when a specific abnormality occurs during the game, the control related to the game is not continued, and the game progresses with the specific abnormality occurring, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. It can be avoided.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 20C, after the communication abnormality described with reference to FIG. 20B is resolved, a specific abnormality occurs at the timing indicated by reference numeral T5. In this example, because the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is immediately interrupted due to the occurrence of the specific abnormality, the control regarding the game becomes impossible at almost the same timing as the occurrence of the specific abnormality, and the winning acceptance Is also impossible. In this example, the specific abnormality is eliminated at the timing indicated by reference numeral T6. However, when a specific abnormality occurs, the RAM clear is executed in the power-on process (step S115) of the main control unit main process. Until the authentication is completed and the recovery is completed (unless the power is turned off and the power is turned on again), the communication error flag including the specific communication error flag is not set to OFF. The processes of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interruption process are not executed (control regarding the game remains stopped).

  Next, the configuration of a RAM (buffer area) 708, which is a storage area of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of items stored in each storage area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing storage areas provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the initialization timing of the storage areas.

  The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 store the gaming state at the time of power interruption in the RAMs 308 and 708 by power-off processing in order to restore the gaming state at the time of power interruption / power recovery (for example, at the time of power failure recovery) The contents of the RAM are held by a backup power source.

  As a configuration of the backup function of the pachinko machine 100, although not shown, a backup power supply unit, a power supply monitoring circuit, and a RAM clear switch are provided. The RAM clear switch initializes the backed up RAM data.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is provided with a first area 708A from a small address (here, 7F00H) to an address 7F0DH and a second area 708B from an address 7F0EH to an address 7FFFH. It has been. The first area 708A is further divided into a plurality of storage areas, and stores, for example, the number of prize balls, the number of game balls, game information, an error state, an unsent command, a program activation state flag, and power state information. On the other hand, the second area 708B is divided into a setting pointer storage area, an analysis pointer storage area, a reception command buffer area, and the like. The reception command buffer area is an area for storing received commands, and the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area are areas for storing pointers used for storage processing of received commands. The setting pointer storage area, the analysis pointer storage area, and the reception command buffer area will be described later.

  The first area 708A is an area where stored information is saved (backed up) when the power is turned off, and the second area 708B is an area initialized immediately after the power is turned on. For example, in an initialization process in which power interruption detection is not performed (for example, step S115 in FIG. 9), all of these storage areas are initialized (cleared), and a power recovery process at the time of recovery start (step S109 in FIG. 9). ) Initialize (clear) only some of them. That is, in the initialization process, the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared, but when power interruption occurs, only the information in the first area 708A is backed up. In the subsequent power recovery process, the information backed up in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 is restored (set) in the first area, and only the second area 708B is cleared. Thus, there are a plurality of timings for clearing the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and there are a plurality of areas to be cleared (first area 708A, second area 708B). Further, the second area 702B may be cleared even when the payout control unit 600 is activated to return, and is not backed up even when a power interruption occurs. In other words, the area for storing received commands (reception command buffer area), the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area (values of each pointer) used for the storage processing may be cleared even at the time of return start. It becomes an area that is not backed up when power is cut off. By adopting such a configuration, the second area is cleared immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 regardless of whether the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated or when the return control is started. In some cases, a prize ball command or the like can be prevented from being transmitted to the payout control unit 600 at an unintended timing.

  Although illustration is omitted here, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 may have the same configuration. That is, it may have a first area that is backed up when a power interruption occurs and a second area that is cleared by a subsequent power recovery process. Information stored in the first area of the main control unit 300 includes, for example, a big hit state (including the number of rounds), a high probability / short time state, a random number value of a reserved memory (special symbol, normal symbol), an error state, an unresolved state, etc. The transmission command, the operation state of the movable member (ordinary electric accessory, first type special electric accessory), and the like. In addition, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, only the information stored in the first area may be backed up when a power interruption occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the initialization timing for the first area and the second area of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, a plurality of timings for initializing the RAM 708 are provided. In the figure, the first timing is the timing immediately after each of the payout control units 600 is turned on, and the second timing is the timing of the main control communication confirmation command reception process. The timing immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 will be described later (FIG. 23, etc.).

(1) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated

  In this case, both the first area 708A and the second area 708B are initialized at the first timing, and neither the first area 708A nor the second area 708B is initialized at the second timing. .

(2) When the main control unit 300 is a return start and the payout control unit 600 is an initial start or the like, it is the same as (1).

(3) When the main control unit 300 is initially activated and the payout control unit 600 is reactivated

  In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and only the first area 708A is initialized at the second timing.

(4) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are restarted

In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and no area is initialized at the second timing.
<Payment control unit main process>

  The payout control unit 600 includes a CPU, a RAM 708, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. These CPU, RAM 708, ROM, and I / O port are constituted by a single microcomputer (dispensing control microcomputer). In addition, the payout control microcomputer may have the same function as the main control microcomputer in this specification, and may not include a part of the function (for example, a random number circuit). Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the payout control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600). When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

  A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the reception of this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process. In this embodiment, the payout control unit interrupt process is not performed when a command is received, and the payout control unit interrupt process is performed using a timer interrupt. However, the payout control unit interrupt process can be performed when a command is received by setting the serial communication circuit.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the payout control unit main process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit main process.

  First, in step S301, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S302, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S303. move on.

  In step S303, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in a counter timer, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S305 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S306. Specifically, also in this step S304, the same process as in step S107 of the main control unit main process is performed, and if the RAM needs to be cleared, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and if the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S305. If it is information indicating suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S306 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S306, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the storage area to be cleared at the time of power recovery, among the storage areas of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is initialized. That is, since the state of this step is the first timing (the state immediately after the dispensing control unit 600 is turned on), the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared for initial startup or the like, If it is a return activation, only the second area 708B is cleared (see FIG. 22).

  In step S307, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, a part of error information provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S308, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main controller 300. Here, the process is performed by comparing the value referenced by the setting pointer in the RAM 708 with the value referenced by the analysis pointer, which will be described later. If there is unanalyzed data as a result of the determination, command analysis processing is performed in step S309, and if there is no unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, it is determined whether there is an untransmitted command. If there is an untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S311. If there is no untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S311, an untransmitted command is set in the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit side microcomputer 770, and is output as a transmission command.

  In step S312, as in step S302, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S308. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S313, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a checksum calculation numerical value storage area The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is performed. Further, only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is backed up.

In subsequent step S314, a process for monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is off is performed in the same manner as in step S302, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the payout control unit. Returning to the top of the main process (step S301), if the low voltage signal is on, step S314 is repeatedly executed.
<Discharge control unit interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a payout control unit interrupt process executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt process. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter / timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit at a predetermined cycle is triggered by this timer interrupt. Start.

  In step S401, the register value is saved, in step S402, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S403, WDT clear and restart are performed. In step S404, a received command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, a prize ball command is received), and if received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

  In step S405, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S406; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S414. As described above, since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from the payout control unit 600. For this reason, in this step, until the main control unit 300 is activated, a determination process is performed in order to wait for subsequent processes in steps S406 to S413.

  In step S406, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is stored in an input signal information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S407, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, the motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. Update various timers including timers.

  In step S408, error management processing is performed. In this error management process, whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300 is monitored, whether or not various errors have occurred, and information on errors is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. Remember.

  In step S409, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the number of payouts in the lending number of payout storage unit described later.

  In step S410, a payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S411, signal output processing is performed. In this signal output processing, a signal output to the outside from an external terminal board (not shown) is controlled.

  In step S412, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, a process for setting various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed. These various commands include commands related to errors. “Error” in this specification refers to “error” in this specification, such as payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, lower pan full error, payout error, main control communication error, door open error, etc. Includes everything you did. In step S413, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED for notifying the player that an error has occurred (for example, an LED disposed on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100) ) And when the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the excessive payout error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that the excessive payout error has occurred is turned on, and the excessive payout error flag is cleared. In that case, the LED is turned off. Further, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, an LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is set. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

  In step S414, the register value is restored. In step S415, the interrupt is set, and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the process of storing the received command in the RAM 708 (buffer) is performed by the received command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process, and the process of analyzing the command is the main process of the payout control unit. In the command analysis process (step S309).

  <Receiving command processing (Example A, Example B)>

  FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the details of the reception command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process shown in FIG. 23, and FIG. 25 (a) shows an example of the reception command process (Example A). FIG. 25B is a flowchart showing another example (embodiment B) of the received command process.

  Referring to FIG. 11A, in the reception command processing of the embodiment A, first, in step S501, a specific bit (reception data full flag) of the status register 772 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to for main control. Whether or not a command is received from unit 400 is determined. The reception data full flag is set when there is data in the reception data register 774. When a command transmitted from the main control unit 400 is received by the reception data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, the received command is stored in the A register 722. If there is a received command in the A register 722, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S502, the reception command of the A register 722 is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) using a pointer (described later).

  In the embodiment A, when there is a received command, the received command is always stored in the received command buffer area. Commands that should not be accepted (unauthorized commands) are excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process.

  Referring to FIG. 6B, in the received command processing of the embodiment B, first, in step S601, the received data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to, and the command reception from the main control unit 400 is performed. Determine presence or absence. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not a main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604; otherwise, the process ends. The prize ball command acceptance permission flag will be described later (FIG. 30).

  In step S604, the received command is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

  In Example B, commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in a buffer (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. More specifically, the data in the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in, for example, the A register 722 of the CUP core register 720, and then stored in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, a command that should not be accepted (an illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. In addition, before the determination process of step S1603, you may perform the process which determines whether the received command is a prize ball command. Thus, when a command that should not be received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be eliminated by the determination process.
<Command analysis processing>

  With reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the command analysis process (Example C), and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a process flow of another command analysis process (Example D). For example, as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 23, when the process shown in FIG. 26 (Example C) is performed, the received command process of the payout control part interrupt process shown in FIG. In step S404), the process of FIG. 25A (Example A) is performed. Further, as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 23, when the process shown in FIG. 27 (Example D) is performed, the received command process (step S31) of the payout control interrupt process shown in FIG. In S404, the process of FIG. 25B (Example B) is performed. Or it is good also as a process which combines either the received command process of Example A, and the command analysis process of Example C or Example D. Not limited to this, the reception command processing of the embodiments A and B and the command analysis processing of the embodiments C and D can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

  With reference to FIG. 26, the command analysis processing of the embodiment C will be described. In step S701, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S702, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S703, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, main control communication confirmation command reception processing is performed. The main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described later. In step S705, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process ends. In this step, if the received command is neither the main control communication confirmation command nor the prize ball command, the command analysis process is terminated without performing the process for the received command.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S707, and if not, the process ends. In step S707, prize ball command reception processing is performed. The process for receiving a prize ball command will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 27, the command analysis processing of the embodiment D will be described. In step S801, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired.

  In step S802, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In step S803, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S806, and if not, the process ends. In step S806, prize ball command reception processing is performed. The process for receiving a prize ball command will be described later.

  Note that the process for determining the prize ball command acceptance permission flag (step S603 in FIG. 25B and step S706 in FIG. 26) may be performed in both the reception command process and the command analysis process. For example, a process for determining a prize ball command reception permission flag may be performed in the reception command process of the embodiment A (FIG. 25A), and a prize ball command reception permission may be performed in the command analysis process of the embodiment D (FIG. 27). You may perform the process which determines a flag.

  <Processing upon reception of main control communication confirmation command (Embodiment E)>

  Next, the main control communication confirmation command reception process (steps S704 and S805) in the command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing upon reception of the main control communication confirmation command.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after activation of the payout control unit 500. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and does not apply. In that case, the process proceeds to step S904. Whether or not it is the first received main control communication confirmation command determines whether or not the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is off, and the main control communication confirmation command received flag is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S903 to execute start-up processing (details will be described later). In step S904, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S905, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In step S906, the process is terminated after the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON.
<Startup process>

  Next, the starting process (step S903) in the main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2B is a flowchart showing the flow of activation processing.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is an initial activation. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process ends. This step is determined by referring to the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (10H at initial startup and 11H at return startup). To do. That is, when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, the process proceeds to step S1002, and when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 11H, the process ends. Here, once it is determined that the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, since then, it will be at the time of return activation until the next initial activation (always the value of the main control communication confirmation command 11H), the value of the lower 4 bits is not referred to even if the main control communication confirmation command is received after the next time. Note that 10H may be transmitted after 11H is transmitted on the main control unit 300 side.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the payout control unit 600 is a return start (start to return to the state before power interruption). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process ends. .

  In step S1003, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited. In subsequent step S1004, a part of the RAM 708 is initialized. The area to be initialized here is that the main control unit 300 is initially activated (step S1001) and the payout control unit 600 is activated for return (step S1002), and the second timing (when the main control communication confirmation command is received). Process), only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 is initialized.

  In step S1005 following step S1004, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.

  <Process for receiving a prize ball command (Example F, Example G)>

  With reference to FIG. 29, a process upon receiving a prize ball command (step S707 in FIG. 26 or step S806 in FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the flow of the process for receiving a prize ball command (Example F) in step S707 of FIG. 26, and FIG. 29B is the time of receiving a prize ball command in step S806 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process (Example G).

  With reference to FIG. 29 (a), the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command in the embodiment F will be described. First, in step S1101, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1102, the number of prize balls is added to the next prize ball number area based on the analysis data. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is displayed in the number of next prize ball requests in the next prize ball number area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. Are added and stored, and after the predetermined period, the number of prize balls for the next prize ball request number is continuously paid out. For this reason, in this step, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) stored as unanalyzed data in the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 408 is added to the number of next prize ball requests stored in the next prize ball number area. To do. Note that the value of the prize ball command in this embodiment is 23H (three-ball payout instruction), 2AH (10-ball payout instruction), and 2FH (15-ball payout instruction). In the case of a command other than 3H, AH, and FH, it may not be added (excluded).

  In the next step S1103, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 29B, the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command according to the embodiment G will be described. First, in step S1201, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1202, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1204. In this step, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is OFF, the received command is ignored. That is, an illegal command is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the main process (FIG. 23) of the payout control unit.

In the next step S1203, the number of winning balls is added to the next winning ball number area based on the analysis data. Since this step is the same as that of Example F (step S1102 in FIG. 29A), the description thereof is omitted. In the next step S1204, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Error management processing>

  Next, error management processing will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of error management processing.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0, and if it is 0 (a predetermined time (about 1000 ms in this embodiment) after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300). When the time elapses), the process proceeds to step S1302. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1302, after setting the main control communication error flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON. That is, when a predetermined period (1000 ms = 100 ms × 10) has elapsed after receiving the main control communication confirmation command, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the command indicating that the communication confirmation state is received from the main control unit 300 (that is, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command and before reaching 1000 ms), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off. It may be set.

In step S1304, after other error management processing is performed, the processing ends. As other error management processing, for example, it is determined whether or not various errors have occurred, and information relating to the error is stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM, or the main control unit communication error flag in step S1302 For example, a process of stopping the launching or paying off of the ball by the launching device 110 may be mentioned.
<Transmission command processing (Embodiment H)>

  Next, the transmission command process (step S412) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processing of steps S1402 to S1404 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1402, the payout control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register. In step S1403, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1404, the prize ball command reception permission flag is set to ON.

  Originally, after receiving a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 sending a payout control communication confirmation command as a response to the main control unit 300, the main control unit 300 sends it to the payout control unit 600. A prize ball command is transmitted. However, before the main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmits the payout control communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600 receives the prize ball command, It may be written to the receive command buffer. In this embodiment, before the payout control communication confirmation command is transmitted, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF, and normal processing is performed when the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. Further, even when an illegal command that should not be received is written in the received command buffer, the illegal command is excluded in the command analysis process of the payout control unit main process. As a result, even when the payout control unit 600 receives an unintended command (an illegal command), these commands can be appropriately excluded.

  In the next step S1405, after other error command set processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S1406. As another error command set process executed in step S1405, for example, it is necessary to transmit both a communication confirmation command and a command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error). For example, a process for transmitting another command following the communication confirmation command when it is necessary to determine whether or not there is a request.

In step S1406, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1407 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S 1407, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register. In subsequent step S1408, other transmission command processing is executed, and the processing ends.
<Transmission command processing (Example I)>

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating another example (embodiment I) of the transmission command process according to the embodiment G. In step S1501, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processing of steps S1504 to S1507 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1504, the transmission request for the payout control communication confirmation command (10H) is set by setting 1 to Bit0 of the transmission command output request information of 1 byte length stored in the RAM 708.

  In step S1505, another command transmission request is set. Other commands transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 include, for example, a prize ball signal output request command (20H), an error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), and an error 2 command (40H, 41H). 42H, 44H, 48H), payout display LED notification commands (50H, 51H), and the like.

  When a prize ball signal output request command (20H) is transmitted, a transmission request for the prize ball signal output request command (20H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, and an error 1 command When transmitting (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), by setting Bit2 of the transmission command output request information to 1, transmission request for error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H) Set.

  Further, when transmitting an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H), by setting 1 to Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information, an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H) and a payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) are transmitted, the payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 4 of the transmission command output request information. ) Transmission request.

  In step S1506, other command output information is set. Here, when notifying the error release state or the completion of the prize ball payout operation as error information, 0 is set to Bit 0 of the output information of 1 byte length provided in the RAM, the occurrence of the payout number switch error, the full of the saucer When notifying the occurrence of a tan error or a prize ball payout operation, 1 is set to Bit0 of the output information. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an illegal payout error or a payout device error, 1 is set in the output information Bit1, and when notifying the occurrence of a payout excess error or a main control communication error, the output information Bit2 is set. When 1 is set and notification of the occurrence of a door opening error or CR unit non-connection error is made, 1 is set in Bit 3 of the output information.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1503 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1503, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612, and then the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1507, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1508, it is determined whether or not a winning ball signal command transmission request setting condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1509, after setting a transmission request for a prize ball signal command, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the transmission command setting counter stored in the RAM 708 is set to 5, and then the process proceeds to step S1511.

  In step S1511, it is determined whether the transmission command setting process execution condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1512. If not, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1512, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, the least significant bit (Bit 0) of the transmission command output request information set in step S1505 is referred to. When 1 is set, a numerical value (indicated by the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register) In this example, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting 10H).

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 1 command are supported. By combining the numerical value to be transmitted (30H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, 30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, or 38H) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 1 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via this.

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 2 command are supported. By combining the numerical value (40H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, or 48H in this example) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 2 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the payout display LED are supported. By combining the numerical value (50H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, either 50H or 51H) in the transmission data register, the main control unit 300 is connected via the serial communication line 612. The payout display LED notification command is transmitted to

  In step S1513, 1 is subtracted from the transmission command setting counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1514. In step S1514, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting counter is 0. If the transmission command setting counter is 0, the process ends. If not, the process returns to step S1511 to continue the command transmission process.

  <Processing upon receipt of main control communication confirmation command (Example J)>

  Next, another example of the main control communication confirmation command reception process of the embodiment E shown in FIG. 28A will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the turn-on timing of the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is different from the flow of FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing upon reception of a main control communication confirmation command.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after activation of the payout control unit 600. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1602, and is not applicable. In that case, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1602, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S1603 to execute the startup process (FIG. 28B).

In step S1604, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S1605, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1606, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and in the next step S1607, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON, and then the process ends.
<Transmission command processing (Example K)>

  Another example (embodiment K) of the transmission command process shown in FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the turn-off timing of the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is different from the flow of FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processing of steps S1702 to S1704 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register.

  In step S1703, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1704, after other error command set processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S1705. As another error command set process executed in step S1704, for example, both a communication confirmation command and a second command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error) are transmitted. For example, a process for determining whether it is necessary and transmitting a second command following the communication confirmation command when it is necessary corresponds.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the main control communication error flag is 1 (on or off). If it is on (1), the process of step S1706 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1708. move on. In step S1706, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register.

  In the next step S1707, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1708, other transmission command processing is executed and the processing is terminated.

  Example A and Example B of the received command processing, Example C and Example D of the command analysis processing, Example E and Example J of the main control communication confirmation command reception processing, and the prize ball command described above. Examples F and G of processing at the time of reception and Examples H, I, and K of transmission command processing can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

  For example, the embodiment A (FIG. 25A) is executed as the received command processing, the embodiment C (FIG. 26) is executed as the command analysis processing, and the embodiment F (FIG. )) To execute Example H (FIG. 31) as the transmission command process. Alternatively, the embodiment A (FIG. 25A) is executed as the reception command process, the embodiment D (FIG. 27) is executed as the command analysis process, and the embodiment G (FIG. 29B is executed as the prize ball command reception process). )) To execute Example H (FIG. 31) as the transmission command process.

  <Received command processing, received command acquisition processing, received command analysis processing (details)>

  Details of the reception command processing, reception command acquisition processing, and reception command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are diagrams showing an example of the reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the reception command buffer area is provided as a ring buffer that uses a storage area (buffer) of a fixed length (here, addresses 00H to 03H) in a ring shape and stores data in the buffer. Here, the storage area of addresses 00H to 03H is illustrated as the buffer size, but the buffer size is not limited to this. In the receive command buffer area, data (receive command value) is set and analyzed using a data write pointer (setting pointer) and a data read pointer (analysis pointer) as shown in the figure. When both pointers reach the end of the buffer (here, the bottom layer), they are rotated back to the beginning of the buffer (here, the top layer). In this way, data is processed conceptually as if it were a ring, and data overflows with only the actual area (fixed-length buffer area) and two pointer variables (setting pointer and analysis pointer). It is possible to realize buffer management without any problems.

  FIG. 35 is an example in which the value of the setting pointer directly indicates the address of the storage area. First, as shown in FIG. 5A, both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to the position of the start address (00H) of the reception command buffer area. In the ring buffer, the read pointer (analysis pointer) reads data from the current reference position, but when the write pointer (setting pointer) matches the reference address, the reading of data ends (waits). That is, in the state of FIG. 5A, the positions of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are the same, so the CUP of the payout control unit 600 is waiting for data reading.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH (award ball command for instructing 10 ball payout)) from the main control unit 300, the value of the received command ( 2AH) is written ((b) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((c) in the figure) Note that in FIGS. “H” indicating “” is omitted.

  Since the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to different addresses, the analysis pointer starts reading data. In other words, the analysis pointer refers to the value (2AH in this case) stored at the head address (00H), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, and jumps to the corresponding module ((c) in the figure). . After the value is read by the analysis pointer, the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((d) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((e) in the figure). Data may be read after incrementing the value of the analysis pointer.

  Next, when a received command (for example, 23H (a prize ball command for instructing a three-ball payout) is received, the value (23H) of the received command is written at the position (01H) of the setting pointer ((f) in the figure) and set. The pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((g) in the figure) When the next reception command (for example, 2FH (a prize ball command for instructing 15 ball payout) is received, the pointer is moved to the setting pointer position (02H). The value (2FH) of the received command is written ((h) in the figure), the setting pointer moves to the next address (03H) ((i) in the figure), and the analysis pointer is stored at the current address (01H). The received value (23H here) is referred to, the content of the received command is analyzed from the value and jumped to the corresponding module ((i) in the figure), and then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared. When the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared, the analysis pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((k) in the same figure). The buffer value (2FH) is read and analyzed (because they do not match), then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((l) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (03H) ( (M) in the figure.

  In the state shown in FIG. 5M, since the reference addresses of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer match, the analysis pointer waits for data reading. When the next reception command (for example, 23H) is received, the value (23H) of the reception command is written in the setting pointer position (03H) ((n) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (00H). ((O) in the figure). The analysis pointer reads the value 23H at the current address 03H and performs analysis ((o) in the figure). Similarly, data writing and reading are performed.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating another example of the reception command buffer area. In the example shown in the figure, the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is different from the address of the storage area where the data is actually stored. That is, based on the position (its value) referenced by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, the address where the data is stored is calculated, and the data is written and read.

  Referring to FIG. 36A, for example, an area from addresses 7F10H to 7F13H is secured as a reception command buffer area in which reception commands are stored. On the other hand, the setting pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0EH of the RAM 708, and the analysis pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0FH of the RAM 708, and the illustrated values (for example, 00H to 03H) are set in the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, respectively. .

  That is, in the state shown in the figure, the leading value 00H is set for both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, and no data is stored in the reception command buffer area.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH) from the main control unit 300, it performs a predetermined calculation process based on the value (00H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the received command The value (7F10H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated. Then, the reception command (2AH) is stored at the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area ((b) in the figure). After the received command is stored, the position of the setting pointer is updated (incremented) and moved to the next address. The analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (00H), and calculates the value (7F10H) of the start address of the reception command buffer area. Then, the data (2AH) at the address 7F10H in the received command buffer area is read and analyzed ((c) in the figure). Thereafter, the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area is cleared ((d) in the figure), the analysis pointer is updated, and the value of the next address is set ((e) in the same figure). In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the next reception command (for example, 23H) from the main control unit 300, it performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the value (01H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the reception command. The value (7F11H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated, and the received command (23H) is stored in the address 7F11H ((f) in the figure). Thereafter, the setting pointer refers to the next address, the analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (01H), calculates the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area, and stores the stored data ( 23H) is obtained and analyzed. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated to store and analyze data.

Note that values set to the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are actually values of 0 to 15 (4 bits), and the values are updated by an increment function. Although the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are 8 bits, the result of logical product of the value to be set (4 to 0 to 15) and 0FH is set in the pointer. Is possible.
<Configuration of storage area>

  FIGS. 37A and 37B are schematic diagrams showing a partial configuration of a storage area used in the reception command process, the reception command acquisition process, and the reception command analysis process according to this embodiment. FIG. 37C shows an example of a command (reception command) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

  FIG. 37A is a schematic diagram of a status register 772 and a reception data register 774, which are part of the built-in registers of the payout control microcomputer 770. Information indicating the state of the serial communication circuit is stored in the status register 772, and a reception command is stored in the reception data register 774. Here, although shown as a reception data register 774 for storing a command received by the payout control unit 600, a transmission / reception data register for storing transmission / reception data may be used.

FIG. 37B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. As shown in the figure, the second area 708B is composed of areas from addresses 7F0EH to 7F13H, for example, the address 7F0EH is a setting pointer storage area 7081, and the address 7F0FH is an analysis pointer storage area 7082. Addresses 7F10H to 7F13H are a reception command buffer area (ring buffer) 708R.
<Receive command processing (details)>

  An example of the received command process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As described above, the received command process is a process (see FIG. 25) performed in step S404 of the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 24). In the following description, as shown in FIG. 36, an example is shown in which the address of the received command buffer area is indirectly calculated and referenced based on the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer. That is, in the initial state, the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are both 00H, and the area where data is stored first is the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area.

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 reads received data (received command) from the received data register 774 when “reception complete” is made with reference to a specific bit of the status register 772 (1).

  As an example, the storage location of the reception command is obtained based on the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the storage destination address 7F11H is calculated by adding the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R to the value (01H) of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (address 7F0EH) (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R (3). When a reception command is read from the reception data register 774, a specific bit in the status register 772 is cleared. Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the setting pointer (4).

Note that the CPU of the payout control unit 600 may store the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R and clear the specific bit of the status register 772.
<Receiving command acquisition processing (details)>

  An example of the received command acquisition process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The received command acquisition process is a process performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 23).

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 compares the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (here 02H) with the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 (here 01H), and these values do not match. If so, perform analysis. As an example, the storage location of the data to be analyzed (reception command) is obtained based on the value in the analysis pointer storage area 7082 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the value of the analysis pointer (here 01H) and the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R are added to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the data stored in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R in another area (for example, the A register 722 (see FIG. 7)) and the address of the reception command buffer area 708R. 7F11H data is cleared (3). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the analysis pointer (4).

Thereafter, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the type of received command stored in the A register 722 (whether it is a prize ball command or a communication confirmation command) and jumps to the corresponding module.
<Received command analysis processing>

  An example of the received command analysis process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The received command analysis process is a process (step S702 in FIG. 26 or step S802 in FIG. 27) performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 23).

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an example of received command data and a jump table. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a setting example (contents) of a received command in bit units, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of a jump table.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the received command is 8-bit data, the upper 4 bits indicate the command type, and the lower 4 bits indicate the actual data. For example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “1”, it is a main control communication confirmation command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “0”, it indicates that it is the initial start time, When the value of the 4-bit actual data portion is “1”, it indicates that the recovery is being started. Further, for example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “2”, it indicates a prize ball command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “3”, it indicates that 3 balls are paid out, When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “10”, it indicates that 10 balls are paid out. When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “15”, it indicates that 15 balls are paid out. Show. The upper 4 bits of the command type and the lower 4 bits of actual data are temporarily stored separately, which will be described later.

  FIG. 4B shows an example of a jump table. The jump table is provided in the ROM control area of the ROM 706 of the payout control unit 600, and the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address 0750H of the main control communication confirmation command reception process (program) are stored in the address 0700H. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the head address (0750H in this case) of the main control communication confirmation command reception process are stored in 0701H. In addition, the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0780H) of the winning ball number command reception processing (program) is stored at address 0702H, and 0703H is received when the winning ball number command is received. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the processing start address 0780H are stored.

  The CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and when it is “1”, it refers to the address 0700H of the jump table in FIG. Jump to the start address (here 0750H). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the winning ball command, and in the case of “2”, it refers to the jump table address 0702H of FIG. Jump to the top address (0780H in this example).

  41 and 42 continue to show details of the received command analysis process, and show an example of analyzing the received command stored in the A register in (3) of FIG.

  FIG. 41A shows a case where “00100011” is stored in the A register as, for example, a prize ball command (23H) instructing to pay out three balls. First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 saves the value of the A register to the B register in order to determine the command type later. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off in step S1403 of FIG. 25B, the process is terminated without storing the received command in the buffer. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is OFF in step S706 of FIG. 26, the process is terminated without performing the prize ball command reception process. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 41A (after the prize ball command is stored in the buffer), it is analyzed that the prize ball command is referenced with reference to the upper 4 bits and the prize ball command cannot be accepted (the prize ball command). If the acceptance permission flag is off), the command may be discarded and the process terminated. Even when a command other than the main control communication confirmation command and the prize ball command is discarded, or when an unintended prize ball command is discarded by turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag, the main control unit 300 It is not necessary to send an error message.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4B, in order to obtain the value of the lower 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the values “00100011” of the A register and 0FH (“000011111”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value of the actual data portion (“00000011”) is obtained.

  Next, the value (actual data portion) of the A register is saved in the C register as shown in FIG. 8C, and then the B register is used to determine the command type as shown in FIG. The value “00100011” is stored (returned) in the A register. Note that the order of the comparison process of the actual data portion and the return process for determining the command type may be reversed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4E, in order to obtain the value of the upper 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the value “00100011” of the A register and F0H (“11110000”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value indicating the command type (“00100000”) is obtained.

  In FIG. 35A, the right shift is performed four times for the value of the A register. As a result, the value of the A register is “00000010” as shown in the case of the prize ball command (“00000001” in the case of the main control communication confirmation command).

  In FIG. 5B, the value of the A register is subtracted (decremented) to obtain “00000001” for offset calculation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5C, the value after decrementing of the A register is compared with a specific value (for example, 02H in this case) (CP 02H instruction). At this timing, the value of the A register (after decrementing) is normally 00H or 01H. Therefore, if a carry occurs, it is a normal command, and if no carry occurs, an unintended command Can be judged. Therefore, if no carry occurs, the process is terminated as an unintended command. The comparison with a specific value may be performed before the subtraction process.

  Next, in FIG. 4D, the start address 0700H of the jump table shown in FIG. 40B is stored in the HL register (pair register) 724 of the payout control unit 600.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5E, the value “00000010”, which is twice the value of the A register in FIG. 5B, is added to the value of the HL register, and the value is stored in the HL register after the addition. Jump to the current address (transition to the module). A jump to an address stored in the HL register is performed by, for example, a “JP (HL) instruction”. In this example, the process jumps to the address 0780H stored in the address 0702H of the jump table, and the process at the time of receiving the winning ball number command is executed.

  Although not shown, when the received command is a main control communication confirmation command, the value of the A register in FIG. 4B is “00000000”. That is, the double value of the A register value added to the HL register in FIG. 5E is also “00000000”, and jumps to the address 0750H stored in the address 0700H of the jump table. Processing on reception is executed.

  If the process shifts to the process for receiving a prize ball number command after the figure (e), the actual data portion saved in the C register in FIG. 41 (c) becomes the prize ball number. In step S1102 of FIG. 29A or step S1203 of FIG. 29B, a process of adding to the next prize ball number area is performed. In addition, although the illegal measure about the number of prize balls is not performed, as an illegal measure for the number of prize balls, a process of referring to the actual data portion (lower 4 bits) saved in the C register may be performed.

  The reception command processing, reception command acquisition processing, and reception command analysis processing have been described above. However, the transmission command processing (step S412 in FIG. 24) and the transmission command output processing (step S311 in FIG. 23) are described above. The process may be executed in the same manner as at least one of the received command acquisition process and the received command analysis process.

  Although the main control communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted to the payout control unit 600, it may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. In this case, only the first main control communication confirmation command is awarded as the prize ball. You may make it transmit separately from a command. Further, for example, the main control communication confirmation command 1 may be transmitted for each prize ball command 1 transmission. Further, one transmission per interrupt of the main control unit timer interrupt processing or a plurality of transmissions per interrupt, a transmission per group per interrupt, a plurality of transmissions within a range not exceeding 255 per interrupt, etc. .

  Further, when a prize ball command is transmitted / received when a prize ball is generated, transmission / reception of information related to the state of the device or the like results in an excessive increase in the amount of communication. Therefore, regular communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed. When the communication confirmation command is transmitted / received, the payout control unit 600 may transmit / receive information on the state of the device or the like at the transmission / reception timing of the communication confirmation command.

  Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is not received, the error-related command may not be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In this case, some errors may be transmitted using an error command, such as transmitting a predetermined type of error.

  When a main control communication confirmation command is received, a plurality of types of commands may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 at different timings (for example, different main processes). For example, when a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the same time, for example, the error commands may be transmitted in the order of the upper 4 bits, or may be transmitted in the order of the higher 4 bits.

  Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

  In addition, the flow of each process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the illustrated flow as long as the same function can be obtained, and the processing order can be changed as appropriate.

  Also, the reception command process (step S404) may be executed in the payout control unit main process of FIG. 23, and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed in the payout control part interrupt process of FIG. Reception command processing (step S404) and command analysis processing (step S309) may be executed in the payout control unit main processing, or reception command processing (step S404) and command analysis in the payout control unit interrupt processing of FIG. You may make it perform a process (step S309).

  In the prize ball command reception process shown in FIG. 29B, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag determination process (FIG. 25B) of the reception command process (step S404) in the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 24). In step S1403), even if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag in this step is on, the process proceeds to the next step S1203. In other words, even if it is determined that the command is invalid in the payout control unit interrupt process, the process as a normal received command may be performed in this step.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a winning means (for example, the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the variable). A game machine including a winning opening 234), a first control means (for example, main control unit 300), and a second control means (for example, payout control unit 600), wherein the first control The means is a means capable of executing at least game control, and the second control means is a means capable of executing at least control for giving a prize (hereinafter referred to as “prize grant control”). The control means is at least electrically connected to the first control means via a communication line (for example, a serial communication line 612), and the first control means includes a first process ( For example, the special drawing 1-related lottery process shown in FIG. Related lottery processing, etc.), and the first control means is a second process (for example, a process for detecting an abnormality by a communication abnormality monitoring process shown in FIG. 19, a cryptographic communication shown in FIG. The control unit 315 can execute at least a process for setting an abnormality in the register), the first process is a process related to the winning means, and the second process detects at least the first abnormality. Even if it is a case where said 1st abnormality is detected, said 1st control means is said process in said 1st period (for example, period shown by code | symbol Wt1 of Fig.20 (a)). It is a means capable of starting execution of at least one process, and the first abnormality is an abnormality related to communication with the second control means (for example, communication timeout).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when a communication abnormality occurs between the control units during the game, it is possible to continue the process related to winning means until the first period elapses. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation that causes a disadvantage to the player.

  The “process related to the winning means” according to the present invention refers to a process that refers to the state of the detection signal output from the winning means (a process that refers to off / on of the detection signal) and updates the state according to the reference result. Processing (processing that refers to whether or not the ON / OFF pattern of the detection signal is a predetermined pattern (for example, ON-ON-OFF)), processing for updating the state relating to the winning ball according to the updated state ( This includes at least one, a plurality, or all of information for outputting various signals to the external terminal board, processing for updating information on setting of control commands for the second control means, and the like. Further, the “process related to winning means” may be executed intermittently by a plurality of interruption processes.

  Further, the first control means is a means capable of starting execution of the first process even after the first period when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition May be a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is resolved in the first period.

  The first control means is a means for shifting to a winning invalid state when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is the first condition during the first period. There may be a condition that may be satisfied when one abnormality is not resolved. Note that the second condition may be a condition that is always satisfied (a condition that is 100%) when the first abnormality is not resolved in the first period. The winning invalid state may include a state including at least not executing the first process.

  The first control means is a means capable of executing at least a third process, and the third process is a process capable of detecting at least a second abnormality (for example, the specific abnormality shown in FIG. 18). And when the second abnormality is detected, the first control means does not execute the first process, and the second abnormality is an abnormality different from the first abnormality. There may be.

  The first control means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth process. The fourth process includes a random number update (for example, a basic random number initial value update process shown in FIG. The basic random number update process shown in FIG. 13 and the production random number update process shown in FIG. 13) can be executed at least, and the first control means can detect the first abnormality even if the first abnormality is detected. It may be a means capable of executing at least processing. The random number may be only a software random number or only a hardware random number.

  The first control means is means capable of executing at least the game control in accordance with a first control program, and the second control means is in the prize giving control in accordance with a second control program. The first control program is a program including at least a main process (for example, main control main process), and the first control program is an interrupt process (for example, main control). Part timer interrupt process), and the first process may be a process that can be executed at least in the interrupt process.

  The first control unit may be a unit capable of starting execution of the first process a plurality of times in the first period even when the first abnormality is detected. In addition, the first abnormality may be an abnormality that occurs due to a timeout of communication with the second control unit.

  Moreover, the game machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes first control means (for example, main control unit 300) and second control means (for example, payout control unit 600). The second control means is means capable of communicating at least with the first control means, and the first control means is means capable of executing at least a first process. The first control means is means capable of executing at least a second process, and the first process is a process capable of executing at least game control (for example, the special drawing 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. 11). And the second process is a process capable of detecting at least the first abnormality (for example, the communication abnormality monitoring process shown in FIG. 19 and the encryption communication control unit 315 shown in FIG. 8). And the first control hand Is a means capable of executing at least the first process over the first period (for example, the period indicated by the symbol Wt1 in FIG. 20A) even when the first abnormality is detected. Yes, the first abnormality may be an abnormality related to communication with the second control means (for example, communication timeout).

  The first control unit is a unit capable of continuing the first process even after the first period when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is resolved.

  The first control means is a means capable of executing at least a third process, and the third process is a process capable of detecting at least a second abnormality (for example, the specific abnormality shown in FIG. 18). When the second abnormality is detected, the first control means does not execute the first process, and the second abnormality is different from the first abnormality. It may be abnormal.

  Further, the first control means is means capable of executing at least a fourth process, and the fourth process is a process capable of at least updating a random number (for example, a basic random initial value shown in FIG. 10). Update process, basic random number update process shown in FIG. 13, production random number update process shown in FIG. 13), and even if the first control means detects the first abnormality, It may be a means capable of executing at least processing.

  In addition, a winning means (for example, a normal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, a variable winning port 234) is provided, and the first process is a process related to the winning means. There may be. The first control means is a means capable of executing at least the game control according to a first control program, and the second control means awards a prize according to a second control program. The first control program is a program including at least a main process (for example, a main control unit main process), and the first control program is an interrupt process (for example, a main process). Main control unit timer interrupt process), and the first process may be at least executable in the interrupt process.

The second process may be executed without depending on the first control program. In addition, the first abnormality may be an abnormality that occurs due to a timeout of communication with the second control unit. The second control unit may be a unit capable of communicating with the first control unit via a serial communication line (for example, a serial communication line 612).
<< Other Embodiments >>

Next, a gaming table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 844, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, a turbo state notification lamp 151, and the like are attached to the front side. .

  Here, the turbo state notification lamp 151 is a lamp (LED) for suggesting that the firing intensity of the launch handle 134 is in a turbo state, which will be described later. In case (in normal state).

  The game area 124 is defined by a rear surface of the front frame door 106 and a front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 844. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by the operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 844 by the player's operation. 200 launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of the various production devices 206 by the player's operation, and a channel for causing the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. And a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launcher 844 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launcher 146 that rotates when the launcher handle 134 is operated by the player, a launcher 148 that strikes a game ball at the tip of the launcher 146, and Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of the game table>

  44 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 43 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge control that constitutes a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 with 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball. A launch control board case 176 that houses the board 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns on / off the power by the operation of a game store clerk are operated when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are arranged. Has been established.

Hereinafter, the main board 156 constituting the main controller 300 may be referred to as the main control board 156, and the first sub board 160 constituting the first sub controller 400 may be referred to as the first sub controller board 160. The second sub board 164 constituting the second sub controller 500 may be referred to as a second sub controller board 164, and the payout board 170 constituting the payout controller 600 may be referred to as a payout control board 170.
<Game board>

  FIG. 45 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display are provided at the lower right of the game area 124. Device 214, normal symbol hold lamp 216, first special symbol hold lamp 218, second special symbol hold lamp 220, gaming status display lamp 222, round lamp 223, status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, the special figure 1 and 4 symbol display area 208e displays the result of the special figure 1 variable game to be described later, and the special figure 2 and 4 symbol display area 208f displays the success and failure result of the special figure 2 variable game to be described later. For example, when a special figure variable game (during special figure change) is flashed, “-” is displayed blinking. “○” or “△” is displayed, and “x” is displayed when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is appropriate is not met.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  The round lamp 223 is a lamp for informing the number of rounds of the big hit game. The status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224 is a lamp for informing the player of a right-handed stroke, which will be described later.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228 a, 228 b, a first special view start port 230, and a second special view start port 232 around the effect device 206. In addition, a first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged at the lower left of the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general winning holes) 226), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The general-purpose start openings 228a and 228b (hereinafter referred to as the general-purpose start openings 228a and 228b may be referred to as the general-purpose start openings 228) are called a gate or a through-chucker in a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, one universal start port 228b is provided at the center on the right side of the game board 200, and the general start port 228a is provided at the center on the left side. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game) by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game) by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200, and the second The variable winning opening 235 is disposed on the upper right of the first variable winning opening 234 (on the lower right of the game board 200). In the present specification, the first variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as a “first attacker” and the second variable winning opening 2345 may be referred to as a “second attacker”.

  The first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 have the same structure, and are provided with door members 234a and 235a that can be opened and closed, respectively, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device is won and the special figure display device stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have predetermined intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (details will be described later). Note that the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may have different structures.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 200, the second variable can be obtained by causing the ball to flow down toward the right route of the game area 124 (so-called right-handed). Although winning (pick-up) is possible at the winning opening 235, it is not possible to enter the second variable winning opening 235 by making it flow down aiming at the route on the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed) (or (It is difficult to enter the ball). On the other hand, since the first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center portion of the game board 200, the first variable winning opening 234 can be inserted into the first variable winning opening 234 regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. . That is, the winning probability (winning rate) to the second variable winning opening 235 is higher when the player hits the right than the winning rate when the player hits left (0% in this embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, a ball that has not entered the second variable prize opening 235 (for example, a ball played by the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235) when the ball is hit to the right is the first variable. Although it is arranged so that it is possible to enter the winning opening 234, for example, the first variable winning opening 234 is arranged at the lower left of the game board 200, and the first variable winning opening 234 can be entered only when left-handed. On the other hand, the second variable winning opening 235 may be configured so as to be able to enter the ball only when it is hit right. That is, the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 may be arranged on different routes in the game area 124, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable game is won. In this case, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number of balls are placed on the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. Discharge. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch solenoid with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 134 of the player, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course. The effect movable body 224 includes a motor (not shown), and moves up and down by the motor, for example.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit 300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), the first sub control unit 400 that mainly controls the production and the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on it, a payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in accordance with a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of game balls A control unit 630 and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of a lamp 222, a round lamp 223, a status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224, etc.), a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special-purpose start port 232, A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that opens and closes the door member 234a and the like of the variable prize opening 234 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (details will be described later).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73A).
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  An external terminal board 609 is connected to the payout control section 600, and the payout control section 600 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the external terminal board 609. On the other hand, various information included in the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is output (details will be described later). Here, an example in which the external terminal board 609 is separated from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 has been shown, but it may be incorporated in the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, or other configurations May be adopted.

  The launch control unit 630 is based on the launch permission signal output from the payout control unit 600 that permits or prohibits the launch of the sphere, and the control signals output from various sensors provided in the launch handle 134. Control of the launching device 844 that drives the basket 148 and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 844 are performed.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  47 (a) to 47 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In the same figure (a), 7 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure G” are displayed as the stop symbol forms in the special figure 1 stop display of special figure 1, and the symbol fluctuation stop of special figure 2 is also shown. Four types of special drawings from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” are shown as stop symbols in the display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure a" are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, "Special Figure B" and "Special Figure b" are 7R special jackpot symbols, "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure B" "C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  Moreover, after the game of 15R special big hit, 7R special big hit, and 7R big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special figure A” and “Special figure a”, which are 15R special jackpot symbols, are in a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and “Special figure B” and “Special figure b”, which are 7R special jackpot symbols, “Special figure C” and “Special figure c”, which are special figure high probability normal figure high probability states and 7R jackpot symbols, are special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability states. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol of a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol of a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state. “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and after the game for the small hit, the gaming state when the small hit is displayed is continued. When the special figure F is displayed in the game in the usual high probability state, the usual high probability state may or may not be maintained during the small hit game. During the big hit game, it will usually shift to a low probability state. Further, “special drawing G” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit. In this embodiment, by setting only hits (Special Figure D to Special Figure F) for which the profit amount is relatively smaller than 15R big hit or 7R big hit (Special Figure D to Special Figure F), Special Figure 2 than Special Figure 1 Floating Game. The floating game is a relatively advantageous floating game.

  FIG. 47 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When notifying the 15R special big hit or the 15R big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). Further, when notifying 15R special big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” in which the same three odd-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Also, when notifying the hidden probability change or small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying suddenly, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped. In the case of displaying and notifying the deviation, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes for the normal symbol, “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol, “general symbol B” which is a critical symbol, and “normal symbol C” which is an outlier symbol. Based on the detection sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all the seven segments and the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped. indicate. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

In addition, in the gaming machine in the embodiment described in the present specification, the content that the gaming state changes depending only on the above-mentioned design is described as an example, and the content of the invention is not limited to these. No. For example, when a specific special figure is displayed, the attacker opens, and based on the fact that the game ball has detected the area provided in the attacker, the gaming state is shifted to the special figure high probability state, Small hits may be promoted to big hits. (The contents described in this case may be applied to so-called type 1 and type 2 gaming machines and attack round system type gaming machines.) Also, when a special figure that is a big hit is displayed, the special figure is displayed. The configuration may be such that the start of the big hit is generated when the passing of the game ball is detected without the start of the big hit based on being automatically performed.
<Launching handle>

Next, the firing handle 134 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 48 (a) is an external perspective view of the firing handle 134, and FIG. 48 (b) is a side view showing a state in which the player is operating the firing handle 134. FIG. 48 (c). FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a firing handle 134.
<Launch handle structure>

As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 3C, the firing handle 134 is accommodated in a cylindrical handle base 802 fixed to the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 and an inner space of the handle base 802. Handle detection unit 804, dial 806 disposed in the opening of handle base 802 and slidable relative to handle base 802, and disposed on the opposite side of handle base 802 across the dial 806 And a handle illuminating unit 808 used in the above.
<Launch handle / Handle base>

  The handle base 802 includes a small diameter portion 810 and a large diameter portion 812 formed continuously on one end side of the small diameter portion 810. On the outer edge of the opening of the large-diameter portion 812, a dial guide groove 812a into which the dial 806 can be fitted and slid is formed over the entire circumference. In addition, a first shaft portion 812b, a second shaft portion 812c, and a third shaft portion 812d for fixing and supporting the handle lighting board mounting base 808a of the handle lighting portion 808 stand in the inner space of the large diameter portion 812. It is installed.

The first shaft portion 812b engages with the first guide groove 806a of the dial 806 to function as a member that restricts the rotation range (minimum rotation amount) of the dial 806 while guiding the dial 806 in a predetermined direction. The second shaft portion 812c is engaged with the second guide groove 806b of the dial 806, thereby guiding the dial 806 in a predetermined direction and limiting the rotation range (maximum rotation amount) of the dial 806. Also works.
<Launching handle / Handle detection unit>

  The handle detection unit 804 includes a firing spring 804a for urging the dial 806 in the direction of the initial position, a firing volume 804b fixed to the dial 806, a firing volume bracket 804c that holds the firing volume 804b, and this firing A touch switch 804d disposed on the volume bracket 804c, a firing stop lever 804e rotatably supported by the firing volume bracket 804c, and a firing stop switch 804f capable of detecting the state of the firing stop lever 804e; A turbo button 804g for changing the firing strength of the sphere, a turbo switch 804h capable of detecting the state of the turbo button 804g, and a washer 804i serving as a base of the dial 806. Yes.

  The firing volume 804b has a rotation shaft 804b1 fixed to the dial 806, and is configured by a potentiometer (variable resistor) capable of detecting the rotation angle of the dial 806. It can be output externally as a launch intensity adjustment signal. The firing volume 804b is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 through a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit 630 can detect the rotation angle of the dial 806 based on the firing intensity adjustment signal.

  The touch switch 804d includes a touch sensor that can detect whether or not the dial 806 is gripped by the player (whether or not the player is touching the dial 806). When the player 806 is gripped by the player (the player touches the dial 806), a low-level touch switch signal is output to the outside, and the dial 806 is not gripped by the player (the player is If the dial 806 is not touched), a high-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. The touch switch 804d is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 through a harness (not shown). In the firing control unit 630, whether or not the dial 806 is grasped by the player based on the touch switch signal (the player determines Whether or not the dial 806 is touched can be determined. When the wiring from the touch switch 804d is disconnected, a high level touch switch signal is output to the outside. When the wiring from the touch switch 804d is short-circuited, the low level touch switch signal is output to the outside. May be output.

  The firing stop switch 804f is configured by a sensor that can detect whether or not the firing stop lever 804e is pressed. In this example, the launch stop lever 804e is not pressed by the player. The low-level firing stop switch signal is output to the outside, and when the firing stop lever 804e is pressed by the player, the high-level launch stop switch signal is output to the outside. The firing stop switch 804f is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 by a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit 630 determines whether or not the firing stop lever 804e is pressed by a firing stop switch signal. Is possible.

The turbo switch 804h can detect whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed down. In this example, when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down by the player, the low-level firing intensity is detected. A changeover switch signal (turbo switch signal) is output to the outside, and when the turbo button 804g is pressed by the player, a high-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is output to the outside. The turbo switch 804h is electrically connected to the launch control unit 630 through a harness (not shown), and the launch control unit 630 determines whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed by a launch intensity changeover switch signal. Is possible. When the wiring from the turbo switch 804h is disconnected, a low-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. When the wiring from the turbo switch 804h is short-circuited, the high-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. May be output.
<Launching handle / Dial>

  The dial 806 includes a first guide portion 806a engaged with the first shaft portion 812b of the handle base 802, a second guide portion 806b engaged with the second shaft portion 812c of the handle base 802, and a firing volume 804b. A cylindrical central shaft portion 806c fitted and fixed to the rotation shaft 804b1 and an operation portion (convex portion) 806d for the player to operate the dial 806 are configured.

The operation unit 806d of the present example includes a first operation unit 806d1 and a second operation unit 806d2 that are formed to protrude outside the dial 806. The first operation unit 806d1 is made of a triangular member when viewed from the front, and has a shape that allows the player to hook a finger (eg, thumb) by forming an inclination on the left side surface when viewed from the front. Further, the second operation unit 806d2 is made of a triangular member when viewed from the front, and by forming an inclination on the left side surface when viewed from the front, the player can use his / her finger (for example, index finger) as shown in FIG. The shape can be hooked.
<Launch handle / Handle illumination unit>

  The handle illumination unit 808 covers a handle illumination board attachment base 808a fixed to the handle base 802, a handle illumination board 808b attached to the handle illumination board attachment base 808a, and a surface on one side of the handle illumination board 808b. The handle illumination board cover 808c, and the handle illumination board mounting base 808a, the handle illumination board 808b, and the hemispherical handle cover 808d for covering the entire handle illumination board cover 808c. .

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the handle illumination board 808b, and light emitted from these LEDs is delivered to the outside through the handle cover 808d. The handle illumination board 808b is electrically connected to the launch control unit 630 by a harness (not shown), and the launch control unit 630 can control the lighting of the LEDs mounted on the handle illumination board 808b.

The handle cover 808d according to this embodiment is configured to rotate in conjunction with the dial 806 when the player rotates the dial 806, but only the dial 806 is configured to rotate. (For example, see FIG. 61). In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the handle illumination board 808b are used for production in this example. When the turbo button 804g is operated, the LED emits light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode used for the production. Thus, similar to the turbo state notification lamp 151 provided on the front surface of the front frame door 106, it may function as a notification unit capable of reporting whether or not the turbo state is present. Further, the handle cover 808d may be provided with a display function, and by the display function, a display for notifying that the turbo button 804g is being operated or a display for notifying that the turbo button 804g should be pressed may be displayed. . Further, the handle cover 808d may be provided with a function of a lending button or a return button.
<Function of firing handle>

  When the player operates the operation unit 806d of the dial 806 and the dial 806 at the initial position is rotated clockwise (when the dial 806 is rotated), the firing volume 804b fixed to the dial 806 is adjusted. The rotation shaft 804b1 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 806. Although details will be described later, the launch control unit 630 controls the launch intensity of the game ball based on the launch intensity adjustment signal input from the launch volume 804b.

  Further, the launch control unit 630 determines whether or not to launch the game ball based on information on the touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d (information on whether or not the player is touching the dial 806). I do. If it is determined that the player is not touching the dial 806 as a result of the determination, the firing operation is not performed even if the dial 806 is rotated.

Also, the launch control unit 630 launches the game ball based on the information on the launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f (information on whether or not the launch stop lever 804e is pressed). Judgment is made. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the firing stop lever 804e is pressed, the firing operation is not performed even if the dial 806 is rotated. In addition, the launch control unit 630 controls the launch intensity of the sphere based on the information of the launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the turbo switch 804h.
<Various substrates>

Next, various substrates constituting the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an example of the substrate configuration. In addition, about the structure demonstrated using the said FIG.44 and FIG.46, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted.
<Various boards / game board side>

  In the game board 200 of this example, a main control board 156, a first sub control board 160, a second sub control board 164, a liquid crystal control board 820, and a board surface board 822 are mainly mounted. In the game board 200, the main control board 156 includes a first sub control board 160, a board board 822, a symbol display board 823 (for example, the special figure display devices 212 and 214, the universal map display device 210 shown in FIG. 46, various states). The display unit 328 and the like), the special figure 1 start port sensor 838, and the special figure 2 start port sensor 840 and the inner frame relay substrate 824 mounted on the main body 104. Yes.

  The first sub control board 160 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 820 and the second sub control board 164 in the game board 200. The liquid crystal control board 820 is connected to a main liquid crystal 826 (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46) and a sub liquid crystal 828 (for example, a liquid crystal display device separate from the decorative symbol display device 208). The second sub control board 164 includes a sub liquid crystal movable portion 830 for driving the sub liquid crystal 828, a panel surface side movable accessory 832 (for example, the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 46), and a panel surface side illumination board 834 (for example, 46, the game board lamp driving device 530 and the game board lamp 532) shown in FIG. The board substrate 822 connected to the main control board 156 is further connected to various sensors 320 and various solenoids 332 via a board relay board 836.

The first sub-control board 160 has a button (chance button) 136, a button illumination (chance button lamp) 138, and a door-side movable accessory (movable in the button) via a panel frame relay board 847 on the main body 104 side. 246, a door side illumination board (various lamps) 418, and a speaker 120, and also connected to a power supply board 182 via an inner frame peripheral board 846 on the main body 104 side.
<Various substrates / Body side>

  In the main body 104 of this example, a payout control board 170, a launch control board 174, a power supply board 182 and a glass frame relay board 842 are mainly mounted. The payout control board 170 is connected to the main control board 156 on the game board 200 side via the inner frame relay board 824 and also connected to the launch control board 174 and the like in the main body 104. The firing control board 174 is connected to the launching device 844 (for example, the firing motor 632 and the ball feeding device 634 shown in FIG. 46) and the glass frame relay board 842. In this example, a rotary solenoid (launch solenoid) is used as a drive source of the launch device 844, but a solenoid, a motor, or the like may be used as a drive source.

  The power supply board 182 supplies power to the main control board 156 on the game board 200 side and the boards and components connected to the main control board 156 via the inner frame relay board 824 on the main body 104 side. The power supply board 182 supplies power to the first sub control board 160 on the game board 200 side and the boards and components connected to the first sub control board 160 via the inner frame peripheral board 846 on the main body 104 side. To do. The power supply board 182 supplies power to the payout control board 170 and the firing control board 174 on the main body 104 side, and the boards and components connected to these boards.

The glass frame relay board 842 is connected to the above-described launch stop switch 804f, touch switch 804d, launch volume 804b, and turbo switch 804h via a handle relay board 848 mounted in the launch handle 134, and a turbo button. It is connected to a turbo press lamp 850 for informing the presence / absence of an 804g press operation.
<Launch control board>

  Next, the internal configuration of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the launch control board 174, and FIG. 51 is a circuit diagram of the launch control board 174. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 50, the firing control unit 174 has an input condition setting unit 174a that sets various conditions for firing a sphere, and a clock that supplies a clock signal to the input condition setting unit 174a and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d. A generator 174b, a launch counter 174c for measuring the launch timing of the sphere based on the clock signal input from the clock generator 174b, a launch characteristic setting unit 174d for controlling the launch characteristic of the sphere, and the launch intensity of the sphere And a constant current control unit 174f for driving the firing motor 632 of the launching device 844.
<Launch control board / input condition setting unit>

  Next, the input condition setting unit 174a of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The input condition setting unit 174a shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit that controls an output signal output to the firing counter unit 174c based on one or more input signals. In this example, based on three input signals of a launch permission signal input from the payout control board 170, a touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d of the launch handle 134, and a launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f. Then, a signal for permitting or prohibiting the count is output to the launch counter unit 174c.

  Referring to the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the input condition setting unit 174a mainly includes a filter unit 174a1, a signal inversion unit 174a2 (IC5), a signal latch unit 174a3 (IC3), and a signal comparison unit 174a4 ( IC1).

  The filter unit 174a1 is a circuit for rectifying the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal input from the connector CN2 and the firing permission signal input from the connector CN1, and in this example, two filters are used for each signal. It consists of resistors and capacitors.

  The signal inverting unit 174a2 is a circuit for inverting the logic of the input signal and outputting it. In this example, an inverter IC is used. The touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal that have passed through the filter unit 174a1 are input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3 after passing through the signal inverting unit 174a2 twice. On the other hand, the emission permission signal that has passed through the filter unit 174a1 bypasses the signal inversion unit 174a2 without passing through the signal inversion unit 174a2, and is input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3.

  The signal latch unit 174a3 latches (temporarily stores) the input signal input to the input terminals 1D to 8D when it detects a rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock from the clock generation unit 174b described later. It is a circuit for. In this example, the rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock is detected for the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal input from the signal inverting unit 174a2 and the firing permission signal that bypasses the signal inverting unit 174a2. Latch at the specified timing. Note that the latch timing in the signal latch unit 174a3 is not limited to the rising edge of the input clock signal, and may be the timing at which the falling edge of the input clock is detected or other timing.

  The signal comparison unit 174a4 is a circuit for generating one output signal based on a plurality of input signals. In this example, a three-input AND circuit having three inverters is used, and when all three input signals are low level signals, a high level signal is output to the firing counter unit 174c, and three inputs are output. When any of the signals is not a low level signal, the low level signal is output to the firing counter unit 174c.

That is, in this example, the input condition setting unit 174a is configured so that the dial 806 is grasped by the player only when the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low level signals. Only when the launch stop lever 804e is not pressed by the player and the launch permission signal input from the payout control board 170 indicates the launch permitted state. It is configured to output a level signal.
<Launch control board / clock generator>

  Next, the clock generation unit 174b of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The clock generation unit 174b shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit that supplies a clock signal to the input condition setting unit 174a, the firing counter unit 174c, and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d. In this example, the generated clock signal having a predetermined frequency (predetermined period) is output to the input condition setting unit 174a, the firing counter unit 174c, and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d.

When described in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the clock generator 174b is mainly composed of an oscillator 174b1 (X1), a first frequency divider 174b2 (IC6), and a second frequency divider 174b3 (IC4). It is configured. In the clock generator 174b of this example, the clock signal output from the oscillator 174b1 is divided twice by the first divider 174b2 and the second divider 174b3, so that the clock signal having a frequency of 20 kHz and a period of 50 ms is obtained. Is generated. Then, this clock signal is supplied to the clock input terminal of the count unit 174c1 of the firing counter unit 174c via the clock input terminal Clock of the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a and the signal inversion unit 174a2 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Output to CLK.
<Launch Control Board / Launch Counter Unit>

  Next, the firing counter unit 174c of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail. The firing counter unit 174c shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit that measures the launch timing of a sphere based on the clock signal input from the clock generator 174b. In this example, a clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generator 174b is counted 12 times to measure 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times), and the launch of a sphere is permitted at a period of once every 600 ms. The firing control signal to be prohibited is output toward the constant current control unit 174f.

  When described in detail using the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the firing counter unit 174c is mainly configured by a counter unit 174c1 (IC2), a 3-input NOR circuit 174c2, and a 3-input AND circuit 174c3 having three inverters. Yes.

  The counter unit 174c1 outputs a high level signal from the RC0 terminal in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal when a predetermined number of times (in this example, 12 times) the clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CLK. Is possible. In this example, since the clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal CLK, the rising edge of the clock signal with a period of once every 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times). In synchronization with this, a high level signal can be output from the RC0 terminal.

  The counter unit 174c1 has a function of permitting an output signal from the RC0 terminal only when a high-level signal is input to both the ENT input terminal and the ENT input terminal. In this example, since the DC5v voltage is always input to the ENT input terminal, the input signal input to the ENT input terminal, that is, the signal is output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Only when the output signal is high level (only when the touch switch signal, firing stop switch signal, and firing permission signal are all low level signals), the high level is output from the RC0 pin in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal. A level firing control signal is output.

  The firing control signal output from the RC0 terminal of the counter unit 174c1 is inverted in logic by the 3-input NOR circuit 174c2, and then the / LOAD input of the counter unit 174c1 (the symbol “/” indicates that the corresponding signal is low active). And is output to the 3-input AND circuit 174c3. The counter unit 174c1 is configured to initialize an internal counter when a low level signal is input to the / LOAD input. In this example, a high level firing control signal is output from the RC0 terminal. If this happens, the internal counter is initialized, and 12 counts are started anew. Note that the number of times exceeding 12 times (for example, 15 times) may be performed only for the first time.

The signal output from the 3-input NOR circuit 174c2 is input to the two input terminals of the 3-input AND circuit 174c3 after the logic is inverted again by the inverter. Further, an output signal output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a is input to the remaining one input terminal of the 3-input AND circuit 174c3. Therefore, also in the 3-input AND circuit 174c3, only when the output signal output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a is high level (the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low). High-level output signals can be output only in the case of level signals.
<Launch control board / Launch intensity setting section>

  Next, the firing intensity setting unit 174e of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail. A launch intensity setting unit 174e shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit that controls the launch intensity of a sphere. In this example, based on the firing intensity adjustment signal input from the firing volume 804d of the firing handle 134, the current (voltage) output to the subsequent constant current control unit 174f is controlled.

  Referring to the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the firing intensity setting unit 174e mainly includes a buffer circuit 174e1, an amplification unit 174e2, a gain adjustment unit 174d2 and a bias adjustment unit 174d3 of a launch characteristic setting unit 174d described later. , And an adder 174e3.

  The buffer circuit 174e1 is a circuit for reducing noise in the firing intensity adjustment signal input from the connector CN2, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op amp) is used. The amplifying unit 174e2 is a circuit for amplifying the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the buffer circuit 174e1, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op-amp) is used. The output voltage Vo1 of the amplifying unit 174e2 is calculated by Vi1 (1+ (r1 / r2)) when the input voltage is defined as Vi, the resistance value of the resistor R28 is defined as r1, and the resistance value of the resistor R22 is defined as r2. Can do.

  The adder 174e3 is a circuit for adding a plurality of voltages based on the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the amplifier 174e2, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op amp) is used. The output voltage Vo2 of the adder 174e3 is the input voltage Vi2, the resistance value of the resistor R24 is r1, the resistance value of the resistor R19 is r2, the resistance value of the resistor R17 is r3, the resistance value of the resistor R18, the resistor R16, and the variable resistor VR1. When the combined resistance value is defined as r4, the voltage at the point of the resistor R24 is v1, the voltage at the point of the resistor R19 is defined as v2, and the voltage at the point of the resistor R17 is defined as v3,-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2 ) V2- (r4 / r3) v3.

  In this example, a diode D1 for flowing a current in the first direction is connected in series to the resistor R17 of the adder 174e3, and the first direction is connected to the resistor R19 of the adder 174e3. Is connected in series with a diode D2 for flowing current in the opposite second direction. With such a configuration, the output power Vo2 of the adder 174e3 depends on the magnitude of the input voltage Vi2 (= the voltage of the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the amplifier 174e2).

  (1)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2) v2- (r4 / r3) v3

  (2)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r3) v3 (* when no current flows through r2)

(3)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2) v2 (* when no current flows through r3)
It will change to three stages.
<Launch control board / Launch characteristic setting section>

  Next, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The launch characteristic setting unit 174d shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit that controls the launch characteristic of a sphere. In this example, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d sets the launch characteristic of the launch handle 134 to the first launch characteristic (hereinafter, “normal launch”) based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the turbo switch 804h of the launch handle 134. Control to switch from one of the second launch characteristics (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “turbo launch”) to the other.

  When described in detail using the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d mainly includes a signal inversion unit 174a2 and a signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a, a switching unit 174d1, a gain adjustment unit 174d2, The bias adjusting unit 174d3 is configured.

  The firing intensity changeover switch signal input from the connector CN2 is input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3 after passing through the signal inversion unit 174a2, and is latched at the timing of the rising edge of the clock signal input from the clock generation unit 174b. .

  The switching unit 174d1 is a circuit that turns on or off the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3, and in this example, an FET circuit is used. In this example, the function of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 is turned on when the FET circuit is turned on when the firing intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is a high level signal. The launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). Details of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is a low level signal, the FET circuit is turned off, so that the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 are turned off. The launch characteristic is the first launch characteristic (normal launch). Details of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) will be described later.

  The gain adjusting unit 174d2 changes the output voltage of the adding unit 174e3 by setting the resistor R33 connected in parallel to the resistor R24 of the adding unit 174e3 of the above-described launch intensity setting unit 174e to a connected state or an unconnected state. Circuit. The bias adjustment unit 174d3 biases the firing intensity setting unit 174e and the constant current control unit 174f by setting the resistor R34 connected in parallel to the resistor R27 included in the above-described firing strength setting unit 174e to a connected state or an unconnected state. It is a circuit for changing the voltage.

Further, the firing intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 turns on / off the FET circuit (Q4) in synchronization with the on / off of the firing intensity changeover switch signal. As a result, the FET circuit (Q4) outputs a signal indicating the on / off state of the firing intensity changeover switch signal (launch intensity state signal) to the dispensing control board 170 via the connector CN4. The payout control board 170 lights the turbo state notification lamp 151 when the launch intensity state signal is a signal indicating the on state, and the turbo state notification lamp 151 when the launch intensity state signal is a signal that indicates the off state. Control to turn off.
<Launch control board / constant current controller>

  Next, the constant current control unit 174f of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The constant current control unit 174f shown in FIG. 50 is a circuit for driving the rotary solenoid (launch solenoid) of the launch device 844. In this example, the rotary solenoid is driven by controlling the current (launch solenoid signal) supplied to the rotary solenoid based on the voltage output from the firing intensity setting unit 174e.

  Describing in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 51, the constant current control unit 174f is mainly configured by a voltage comparison unit 174f1 and a current adjustment unit 174f2. The voltage comparison unit 174f1 compares the target voltage input from the launch intensity setting unit 174e in the previous stage with the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid of the launching device 844, and the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid is lower than the target voltage In this case, by turning on the FET circuits Q1 and Q2 of the current adjustment unit 174f2 at the subsequent stage, a current (launch solenoid signal) is supplied to the rotary solenoid. On the other hand, when the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid exceeds the target voltage, the current supply to the rotary solenoid is stopped by turning off the FET circuits Q1 and Q2 of the current adjustment unit 174f2 at the subsequent stage.

By such on / off control of the FET circuit, the rotary solenoid is driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 134 by the player, and the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 launch a ball.
<Launch control signal>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the firing control signal output by the counter unit 174c1 of the above-described firing counter unit 174c will be described in detail. FIG. 52 is a time chart of various signals including the launch control signal.

  Here, the waveform shown as the “fire timer clock” shows the waveform of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CLK of the counter unit 174c1 of the fire counter unit 174c, and the waveform shown as “fire state” is The waveform of the launch control signal output from the RC0 terminal of the counter unit 174c1 of the launch counter unit 174c is shown.

  Further, the waveform shown as “turbo button” is a waveform of a firing intensity changeover switch signal inputted from the launch handle 134 to the launch control board 174 (ON when the turbo button is pressed, OFF when not pressed), The waveform shown as “turbo effective state” is a waveform showing the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3, and the waveform shown as “turbo latch clock” is the signal latch unit of the input condition setting unit 174a. The waveform of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock 174a3 is shown.

  As described above, the clock signal having a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the counter unit 174c1 of the firing counter unit 174c after the logic is inverted through the inversion unit 174a2. . Then, when the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low level, the counter unit 174c1 performs a clock signal (launching) at a cycle of once every 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times). In synchronization with the rising edge of the timer clock), a high level launch control signal is output from the RC0 terminal.

  On the other hand, a clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal Clock of the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a without passing through the inversion unit 174a2. Then, the signal latch unit 174a3 latches the firing intensity changeover switch signal internally in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal (turbo latch clock) once every 50 ms.

As described above, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d determines whether the first launch characteristic (normal launch) or the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3. Control to switch to the other is performed. For this reason, at the timings T1 and T2 shown in FIG. 52, the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 shows a high level, so the sphere launches with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). At the timings T3 and T4 shown in the figure, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a low level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch). The In this example, the ball is fired with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 25 ms from the timing of T2, and the ball is fired with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 25 ms from the timing 25ms after T2. Fired. For this reason, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T2 is compared with the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T1 (when the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 50 ms). The firing intensity may be small or the same. In this example, the ball is fired with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 25 ms from the timing of T4, and the ball is fired with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 25 ms from the timing 25ms after T4. Fired. For this reason, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T4 is compared with the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T3 (when the sphere is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 50 ms). The firing intensity may be large or the same. In addition, when the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is at a high level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch), and the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is A sphere may be launched with a second launch characteristic (turbo launch) when at a low level.
<Launch characteristics of launcher>

  Next, the firing characteristics of the launching device 844 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 (a) is a graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch.

  Here, the horizontal axis of the firing characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 53A indicates the amount of operation of the firing handle 134 (of the dial 806), in other words, the amount of rotation of the firing volume 804d. In this example, the degree of the operation amount of the launch handle 134 is indicated by the hiragana characters (a) to (sa), where the symbol (a) indicates the minimum operation amount, and the code (sa) indicates the maximum operation amount. Show. Note that the operation range of the launch handle 134 from reference (A) to reference (I) is the range in which the launch stop switch 804f is mechanically pressed, so that the game ball is not launched, but the launch volume 804d Since the rotation amount is larger than 0, even the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) provides a predetermined amount of launch intensity.

  FIG. 53B is a front view of the firing handle 134 when the operation amount is the minimum operation amount, and FIG. 53C is a front view of the firing handle 134 when the operation amount is the maximum operation amount. For example, the state shown in FIG. 5B is a firing handle when the dial 806 is biased to the initial position by the firing spring 804a and the operation amount is 0 (minimum). Further, the state shown in FIG. 5C is a firing handle when the dial 806 in the initial position is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) and the operation amount is maximum.

  Note that, in order to change from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (e) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (o), for example, the dial 806 needs to be rotated 5 degrees clockwise, and the operation amount indicated by the symbol (o) In order to change the amount of operation to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (k), for example, the dial 806 needs to be rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise.

  Also, the vertical axis of the firing characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 53 (a) indicates the launch intensity (current value of the launch solenoid) of the sphere corresponding to the operation amount on the horizontal axis. In this example, the degree of launch intensity of the sphere is indicated by the symbols (a) to (su) of Katakana, where the sign (a) indicates the minimum launch intensity and the sign (su) indicates the maximum launch intensity. Yes. Note that the launch intensity on the vertical axis of the launch characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 53 (a) is not related to the output content of the signal that allows the input condition setting unit 174a to permit or prohibit the launch counter unit 174c.

  <Launch characteristics of launcher / First launch characteristics (normal launch)>

  A graph indicated by reference numeral NL in FIG. 53A shows an example of the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

  In the first launch characteristic (normal launch), the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 of the launch characteristic setting unit 174d are off, and the output voltage Vo2 of the addition unit 174e3 of the launch intensity setting unit 174e is launched. Corresponding to the change in three levels according to the magnitude of the voltage of the intensity adjustment signal, the three levels of launch characteristics are generally shown: launch characteristics NL1, launch characteristics NL2, and launch characteristics NL3.

  The firing characteristic NL1 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic NL1 is substantially equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the sign (c) and the launch intensity indicated by the sign (f), and is the most inclined among the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Is getting bigger.

  The firing characteristic NL2 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K). The inclination of the launch intensity in this launch characteristic NL2 is approximately equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (f) and the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (e), and is the most inclined among the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Is getting smaller.

  The firing characteristic NL3 is a firing characteristic in a case where the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in a range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ko) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (sa). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic NL3 is substantially equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the reference sign (c) and the launch intensity indicated by the reference sign (f), and is smaller than the slope of the launch characteristic NL1, and the launch characteristic NL2 It is larger than the slope.

  That is, in the first launch characteristic (normal launch), the launch intensity in the range of the first manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (O)) has the largest inclination. The firing intensity changes in accordance with NL1 and continues in the range of the second manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (O) to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (K)), and changes according to the launch characteristic NL2 having the smallest inclination, and continues. The firing intensity NL3 is smaller than the slope of the launch characteristic NL1 and larger than the slope of the launch characteristic NL2 in the third manipulated variable range (the manipulated quantity indicated by the reference sign (sa) to the manipulated quantity indicated by the reference sign (sa)). It changes according to.

  In this specification, the state in which the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 is controlled based on the first launch characteristic (normal launch) is referred to as “normal time”, “non-turbo time”, and “non-turbo state”. Or “first state”.

  <Launch characteristics of launcher / Second launch characteristics (turbo launch)>

  A graph indicated by reference sign TL in FIG. 53B shows an example of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch).

  As described above, the output voltage Vo2 of the addition unit 174e3 of the launch intensity setting unit 174e changes in three stages according to the magnitude of the launch intensity adjustment signal, but the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is the launch characteristic. Since the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 of the setting unit 174d are on, the two-step launch characteristics of the launch characteristic TL1 and the launch characteristic TL2 are generally shown.

  The firing characteristic TL1 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (KI). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic TL1 is substantially equal to the slope of a straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (A) and the maximum launch intensity indicated by the reference (S), and is 3 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch). The inclination is larger than any of the two launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Note that the dial 806 is changed within the range of the operation amount corresponding to the firing characteristic TL1 (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. 53A and the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K)). The dial 806 needs to be rotated approximately 5 to 10 degrees clockwise.

  The firing characteristic TL2 is a firing characteristic in a case where the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in a range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ki) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (sa). The launch intensity in the launch characteristic TL2 is a constant value with the maximum launch intensity indicated by the symbol (su).

  That is, in the second launch characteristic (turbo launch), the launch intensity in the range of the fourth manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the sign (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by the sign (K)) is the first launch characteristic ( It changes in accordance with the launch characteristic TL1 having a larger slope than any of the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3 (normal launch), and the range of the fifth manipulated variable (shown from the manipulated quantity shown in the sign (ki)) to the sign (sa) The launch intensity at the manipulated variable is a launch intensity (a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (s)) that is stronger than the maximum launch intensity (a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (si)) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

In this specification, the state in which the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 is controlled based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is referred to as “non-normal time”, “turbo time”, and “turbo state”. , Sometimes referred to as “second state”. Further, the launch characteristic NL1 is when current flows through R24 and R17 shown in FIG. 51, the launch characteristic NL2 is when current flows through R24 shown in FIG. 51, and the launch characteristic NL3 is shown when R24 and R19 shown in FIG. This is the case where current flows. Further, the launch characteristic TL is when current flows through R24 and R33 shown in FIG. When the launch characteristic TL has a plurality of inclinations like the launch characteristic NL, current may flow to R17 when the operation amount of the launch handle is small, and to R19 when the operation amount of the launch handle is large. A current may flow.
<Launch strength and sphere arrival position>

  Next, the relationship between the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 and the arrival position of the sphere will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The balls launched by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 of the launcher 844 pass through the ball path surrounded by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and reach the upper part of the game area 124, but the launcher 844 launches. The reaching position in the game area 124 differs depending on the strength (current value of the firing solenoid).

  For example, a sphere launched with the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (f) in FIG. 53 (a) moves along the locus indicated by the symbol P1 in FIG. 54, and slightly around the end of the inner rail 204. Fall down. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) is suitable for left-handed strikes (when the game ball is caused to flow down aiming at the route on the left side of the game area 124).

  Although not shown in the figure, the launch intensity is weaker than the launch intensity indicated by symbol (f) (denoted by symbols (a), (b), (c), (e), and (e) in FIG. 53 (a). The ball fired at the firing strength) cannot get over the inner rail 204 and is discharged to the lower plate 128 or falls over the inner rail 204 and falls to the left side of the game area 124.

  Further, the sphere launched at the firing intensity indicated by reference numeral (c) in FIG. 53A moves along a locus indicated by reference numeral P2 in FIG. 54, and falls downward substantially at the center of the game area 124. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (c) is a firing strength suitable for flowing down the game ball aiming at the center of the game area 124.

  Although not shown in the drawing, a sphere launched with a launch strength indicated by a symbol (K) falls downwardly slightly to the left of the game area 124 than a sphere launched with a launch strength indicated by a symbol (K).

  In addition, the sphere launched with the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 53 (a) moves along the locus indicated by the symbol P3 in FIG. 54, and is disposed on the right side of the game area 124. After colliding with a ball stopper rubber 203 made of a repulsive member, the ball stopper rubber 203 falls downward. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (U) is a firing strength suitable for a right-handed strike (when the game ball is caused to flow down aiming at the route on the right side of the game area 124).

  Although not shown in the drawing, a sphere launched with a launch intensity higher than the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (e) (the launch intensity indicated by the symbols (s), (s), and (s) in FIG. 53 (a)). Is common in the point that it falls toward the bottom of the ball stopper rubber 203 after colliding with the ball stopper rubber 203, but the ball is launched with a launch intensity stronger than the launch intensity indicated by the symbol The time from when the ball is launched until it reaches the ball stopper rubber 203 is determined by the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (k), the launch strength indicated by the symbol (sa), the launch strength indicated by the symbol (si), and the symbol (su). It becomes early in the order of the firing intensity shown. As a result, the time from when the ball is fired until it reaches the winning opening or starting port on the right side of the game area 124 is also accelerated in the same order.

  <Use of turbo button and firing strength>

  Next, the relationship between the presence / absence of use of the turbo button 804g and the firing intensity will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 55A is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not depressed and the launch handle 134 is in the initial position, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the 804g is not depressed and the firing handle 134 is in the initial position.

  At this initial position, the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (A) in FIG. 53 (a), that is, 0, so the firing intensity is the symbol (A) in FIG. 53 (a). ), Ie, zero. Therefore, in the initial position, the ball is not launched into the game area 124, and the player is only holding the firing handle 134.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), in this initial position, the turbo button 804g is located higher than the firing stop lever 804e, and the left side of the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 in the rear view. Is located. When the player holds the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is positioned between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2, and therefore, at this initial position, the turbo button 804g is pressed using the index finger. It is difficult to operate.

  FIG. 55 (b) is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise from the initial position.

  In this state, the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is, for example, the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (<) in FIG. 53 (a), and the firing intensity corresponds to the symbol ([ku]) in FIG. 53 (a). The firing strength to be. As described above, the ball launched with the firing strength indicated by the reference sign (K) falls downward in the approximate center of the game area 124. When the player grips the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the finger position is adjusted by the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the dial 806 compared to the initial position shown in FIG. 806 will be displaced in the direction of rotation.

  FIG. 56 (a) shows the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by the maximum operation amount and rotated to the fully open position. FIG. 57 (b) is a front view of the firing handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pushed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise to the fully opened position and rotated to the fully opened position. FIG.

  In this fully open position, the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is, for example, an operation amount corresponding to the symbol (s) in FIG. 53 (a), and the firing intensity is represented by the symbol (f) in FIG. 53 (a). Corresponding launch intensity. As described above, the ball launched at the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) collides with the ball stopper rubber 203 disposed on the right side of the game area 124 and then falls almost directly below the ball stopper rubber 203. To do. As described above, when the player makes a right stroke with a normal grip, the wrist needs to be greatly rotated (twisted) in the rotation direction of the dial 806 (see FIG. 56 (a)). In a right-handed game, the player may feel wrist fatigue.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in this fully opened position, the turbo button 804g is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and is more second than the first operation unit 806d1. It is located near 806d2. When the player grasps the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and close to the second operation unit 806d2. Then, if the index finger is moved, it is easy to press the turbo button 804g using the index finger. However, the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 806d1 away from the turbo button 804g, and thus the thumb. It is difficult to press down the turbo button 804g using.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g is pressed down. (C) is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g is pressed.

  In this state, the operation amount of the launching handle 134 is, for example, the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (（) in FIG. 53 (a), and the firing intensity corresponds to the symbol (su) in FIG. 53 (a). The firing strength to be. As described above, a ball fired at a firing strength corresponding to the symbol (s) collides with the ball stopper rubber 203 disposed on the right side of the game area 124 and then falls downward below the ball stopper rubber 203. To do. In addition, since the firing intensity corresponding to the symbol (su) is stronger than the firing intensity corresponding to the symbol (f) described in FIG. 56 (a), the time from when the ball is launched until the ball stopper rubber 203 is reached. The time and the time from when the ball is fired to the time when the game area 124 is reached on the right side of the game area 124 or the starting hole is earlier than the firing intensity corresponding to the reference sign (S) described in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (c), at this position, the turbo button 804g is between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and is more second than the first operation unit 806d1. Located near to. When the player grasps the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and close to the second operation unit 806d2. It is easy to depress the turbo button 804g using the index finger, and the most easily depressing operation of the turbo button 804g, but the thumb is located on the side surface of the first operation unit 806d1 away from the turbo button 804g. Therefore, it is difficult to press the turbo button 804g using the thumb.

  Furthermore, compared with the case where the turbo button 804g in FIG. 56 (a) is not used, there are cases where the wrist rotation angle is small when right-handed, and therefore it may be suitable for a long-time right-handed game. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the dial 806 is designed so that a left-handed game can be comfortably performed in a normal way of gripping, so that the turbo button 804 may be operated while performing a comfortable operation. is there.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes the operating means (for example, the firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player and the firing means (for example, that can at least launch the game ball). , A launching device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states. One is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic). (Control state by (turbo launch)), and at least in the first case, the launching means plays the game ball at the first launch intensity (for example, the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 53 (a)). To fire, said At least in the second case, the shooting means is for launching a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (s) in FIG. 53 (a)). Is a case where a first operation (for example, a rotation operation of the launching handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by reference numeral (<)> in FIG. 53A) is performed on the operation means in the second state. Yes, in the second case, the second operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the reference numeral in FIG. 53A) is performed on the operation means in the second state. The first operation is an operation different from the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It is a characteristic game stand.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the operation means is changed unintentionally due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content is prevented. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of the launching means.

  The “first case”, “second case”, “third case”, “fourth case”, “fifth case”, and “sixth case” according to the present invention are: This includes one or a plurality of cases where the firing permission signal is on, the firing stop switch is off, the touch switch is on, and no abnormality (error) occurs (the same applies hereinafter).

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes an operation unit (for example, a launching handle 134) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) that can at least launch a game ball. ), Wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The launching means launches a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 53A) at least in the first case. Yes, the firing means is small In at least the second case, the game ball is fired at the second firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 53A), and the launching means includes at least a third launching force. In this case, the game ball is fired at a third firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 53 (a)), and the launching means has a fourth launch strength in at least the fourth case. The game ball is fired at a launch intensity (for example, the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (K) in FIG. 53 (a)). In the first case, the operating means is This is a case where one operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (<)> in FIG. 53A) is performed. The second case is the second case. In this state, the operation means is indicated by a second operation (for example, indicated by the reference numeral in FIG. 53 (a)). The third case is a case where the first operation is performed on the operation means in the first state. The fourth case is a case where the fourth operation is performed on the operation means in the first state, and the first operation is the second operation. The third operation is the same operation as the first operation, the fourth operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the third launch intensity is The gaming machine has a strength different from the fourth launch strength, and the first launch strength is the same as the second launch strength.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the operation means is changed unintentionally due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content is prevented. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of the launching means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes an operation unit (for example, a launching handle 134) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) that can at least launch a game ball. ), Wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) In the case of at least the first case, the launching means launches a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 53 (a)). Yes, the firing means is small In at least the second case, the game ball is fired at the second launch strength (for example, the launch strength indicated by the symbol (e) in FIG. 53 (a)). In the first state, the first operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the reference sign (u) in FIG. 53A) is performed on the operation means. In the second case, in the second state, the operation means is subjected to a second operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (u) in FIG. 53A). The first operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even if the state of the launching means has changed, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player. May be able to provide.

  In addition, according to the game stand (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example, the operation means (for example, the launch handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player and the launch means (for example, launch) that can at least launch the game ball. Device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states being , A first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo) Control state), and at least in the first case, the launching means launches a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 53 (a)). Said launching means In at least the second case, the game ball is fired at a second firing strength (for example, a firing strength indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 53 (a)), and the launching means includes at least a third launching force. In this case, the game ball is fired with a third firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) in FIG. 53 (a)), and the launching means has a fourth launch strength in at least the fourth case. The game ball is fired at a launch strength of (for example, the launch strength indicated by the symbol (ki) in FIG. 53 (a)). This is a case where one operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the amount of operation indicated by the symbol (o) in FIG. 53A) is performed. The second case is the second case. In this state, the operation means is subjected to a second operation (for example, reference numeral (?) In FIG. In the first state, the third operation is being performed on the operation means in the first state. The fourth case is a case where the fourth operation is performed on the operation means in the first state, and the first operation is the second operation. The third operation is the same operation as the first operation, the fourth operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the first firing intensity Is an intensity different from the second launch intensity, the third launch intensity is an intensity different from the fourth launch intensity, and the difference between the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity Is greater than the difference between the third launch intensity and the fourth launch intensity. This is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there is a case where the firing strength can be made stronger in the second state than in the first state even though the operation is the same, and the gaming machine characterized by the launching means is provided. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a first operating means (for example, a turbo button 804g) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching means (for example, that can at least emit a game ball). A launching device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states Is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic ( The first operating means can be in any one of a plurality of operating states, and at least one of the plurality of operating states. The first operating state And at least one of the plurality of operation states is a second operation state, and the first operation state is a state in which the first operation means is not operated (for example, the turbo button 804g In a state where the pressing operation is not performed), and the firing means can be in the second state during a period in which the first operating means is in the second operating state. The launching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first operation means can be in the second state during a period in which the first operation means is in the first operation state.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the second operation means unintentionally changes due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content Can be prevented. In other words, even if the finger is unintentionally separated from the turbo button, the game ball can be launched in a turbo state, which may prevent the player from being disadvantaged. You may be able to provide a pedestal.

  In addition, the launching means launches a game ball with a third launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 53A) in at least the third case. At least in the fourth case, the game ball is fired with a fourth launch strength (for example, the launch strength indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 53 (a)). In the second state, it is a case where a third operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (O) in FIG. 53 (a)) is performed on the operation means. In the fourth case, in the second state, a fourth operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (ka) in FIG. 53A) is performed on the operation means. The third operation is different from the fourth operation. A work, the third radiation strength may be different intensity and the fourth radiation strength.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity even during turbo.

  The launching means includes at least launching execution means (for example, launching means 844), and the launching means includes at least launch control means (for example, launch control board 174). The launch execution means is controlled by the launch control means, and the launch control means can be in any one of the plurality of states. Also good.

  Also, the display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display is provided, and the launching unit in the first state is capable of firing at least a game ball in the first region. The launching means in the second state is capable of launching at least a game ball in the first area, and the launching means in the second state places a game ball in the second area. The first region is a region on the right side of the display means (for example, a region on the right side of the game region 124), and the second region is It may be an area on the left side of the display means (for example, an area on the left side of the game area 124).

  With such a configuration, there are cases in which game balls can be struck separately on the left and right sides of the game area even during turbo.

  The operation means is capable of changing at least an operation amount in accordance with a player's operation. The operation amount of the first operation is a first operation amount. The manipulated variable is a third manipulated variable (for example, an manipulated variable indicated by a symbol (O) in FIG. 53A), and the third manipulated variable is the first manipulated variable (eg, FIG. 53). (The operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in (a)) may be smaller.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity in a range where the operation amount is small during turbo.

  In addition, the operation means can change at least the operation amount within a first range (for example, the operation amount range indicated by reference sign (A) to the operation amount indicated by reference sign (A) in FIG. 53A). And

  The operation means is capable of changing at least the operation amount in a second range (for example, a range of operation amounts indicated by reference sign (a) to an operation amount indicated by reference sign (a) in FIG. 53A). ,

  The first range is a range in which the firing intensity of the launching unit changes in accordance with a change in the operation amount in the second state, and the second range is in the second state, A range in which the firing intensity of the launching unit does not change according to a change in an operation amount, and the size of the second range may be larger than the size of the first range.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity with a small change in operation during turbo.

  The launching means in the first state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a first launch characteristic (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is in the second state. The certain launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball with a second launch characteristic, and the second launch characteristic (for example, the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is the first launch characteristic. It may be different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to launch a game ball with different launch characteristics.

  <About the circuit diagram of the launch control board of FIG. 51>

  The following configuration may be adopted for matters related to the circuit diagram described with reference to FIG. That is, the firing control means may include at least a constant current control unit that controls a current for driving the launching device. Moreover, the launch control means may include at least an intensity setting unit that sets the launch intensity of the launching device. Further, the launch control means may include at least an input condition setting unit that sets the launchable condition of the launching device. Further, the launch control means may include at least a launch characteristic setting unit that sets a launch characteristic of the launch device.

  In addition, the strength setting unit includes at least a plurality of parts, one of the plurality of parts being a first part (IC9 in FIG. 51), and the first part being at least a plurality of parts. One of the plurality of terminals is a first terminal (terminal 2 of the IC 9 in FIG. 51), and one of the plurality of terminals is a second terminal (see FIG. 51, a terminal 3) of the IC9, and the launch characteristic setting unit is capable of changing at least the value of the current input to the first terminal when the change condition is satisfied. The characteristic setting unit may be capable of changing at least the value of the current input to the second terminal when the change condition is satisfied.

  The change condition may include at least that a signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed is latched. In addition, one of the plurality of parts is a second part (R24 in FIG. 51), and one of the plurality of parts is a third part (R27 in FIG. 51). One of the components is a fourth component (R33 in FIG. 51), one of the plurality of components is a fifth component (R34 in FIG. 51), and the first terminal is The second terminal is connected to at least the second component through the wiring, the second terminal is connected to at least the third component through the wiring, and the first terminal is connected to the wiring through the wiring. When the second part is connected to at least the fourth part, the second terminal is connected to at least the fifth part via the wiring, and the launch characteristic setting unit has a change condition established In addition, the second part and the fourth part can be connected in parallel. If there is satisfied the matter, the third component and the fifth component may be one that can be connected in parallel.

  One of the plurality of parts is a sixth part (PHC1 in FIG. 51), and one of the plurality of parts is a seventh part (OPHC2 in FIG. 51). The first part has a first light emitting part, the sixth part has a first light receiving part, the seventh part has a second light emitting part, The seventh part has a second light receiving unit, and the firing specific setting unit causes the first light receiving unit to emit light when the change condition is satisfied, and the first light receiving unit receives light. Thus, the second component and the fourth component can be connected in parallel, and when the change condition is satisfied, the launch specifying setting unit emits the second light emitting unit to emit light The third light receiving unit may receive the light and the third component and the fifth component may be connected in parallel.

  One of the plurality of parts is an eighth part (R19 in FIG. 51), and one of the plurality of parts is a ninth part (D2 in FIG. 51). The terminal may be at least connected to the eighth component via the wiring, and the eighth component may be connected in series to the ninth component.

  One of the plurality of parts is a tenth part (R17 in FIG. 51), and one of the plurality of parts is an eleventh part (D1 in FIG. 51). The one terminal may be at least connected to the tenth component via wiring, and the tenth component may be connected in series to the eleventh component.

  The first component may be an operational amplifier, the second component may be a resistor, the third component may be a resistor, and the fourth component is a resistor. Alternatively, the fifth component may be a resistor, the eighth component may be a resistor, and the tenth component may be a resistor.

  The ninth component may be a diode, the eleventh component may be a diode, and the fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the second component. The fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the eighth component, the fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the tenth component, and the tenth component. The part may be lower in resistance than the second part, the tenth part may be lower in resistance than the eighth part, and the eighth part is The resistance value may be lower than that of the second component, and the fifth component may have a resistance value higher than that of the third component.

  The third component may have a higher resistance value than the second component, the sixth component may be a photo MOS relay, and the sixth component is a photocoupler. Alternatively, the seventh component may be a photo MOS relay, and the seventh component may be a photocoupler.

Further, the turbo state may be held by the mechanism, the turbo state may be held by the circuit, or the turbo state may be held by the control. The turbo state may be maintained by at least one of the above. Further, as an example of the turbo state holding method in the control, for example, the circuit or mechanism does not hold the turbo state, and the turbo state is held when the dispensing control unit inputs the turbo signal ON for a predetermined period ( That is, even if the turbo signal is turned off, the turbo state is maintained), and when the turbo signal is turned off, the turbo signal is turned on / off for a short time.
<About the time chart of FIG. 52>

  The matter related to the time chart described with reference to FIG. 52 may employ the following configuration. That is, the launch control means is in the first state when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is that the operation means (turbo button) is in the first operation state (not pressed). ), And the second condition may be satisfied during a period in which the operating means (turbo button) is in the second operation state (pressed).

  Further, the firing control means may drive the launching device when the firing timer clock is counted N times (for example, 12 times for a period of 50 ms). Further, the cycle of the firing timer clock may be a cycle different from 50 ms. The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle different from 50 ms.

  The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be different from the cycle of the firing timer clock, the cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle smaller than the cycle of the firing timer clock, The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be greater than the cycle of the firing timer clock.

  The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle smaller than 600 ms, and the cycle of the firing timer clock may be a cycle smaller than 600 ms. The launch control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the turbo button is pressed.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed may be the same as one cycle of the turbo latch clock, or may be smaller or larger. Further, the launch control means may be capable of executing (or necessarily executing) counting of the launch timer clock when the launchable condition is satisfied. Further, the firing control means may be capable of interrupting (or necessarily interrupting) the counting of the firing timer clock when the firing possible condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the firing control means is capable of restarting (or necessarily restarting) the firing timer clock when the firing possible condition is satisfied during the period when the firing timer clock is suspended. May be. The launching means can launch a game ball at the first launch interval (600 ms) in the first state (non-turbo state), and the first launch in the second state (turbo state). The game ball can be launched at an interval (600 ms), and the first launch interval may be the same as the second launch interval.

  FIG. 58 is a modification of the time chart of various signals including the firing control signal, and corresponds to FIG. In this example, since the input condition signal is changed from the low level to the high level during the launch of the sphere, the period during which the launch state is launched is shortened from 50 ms described with reference to FIG. 52 to 25 ms. It is an example.

  Here, the waveform shown as the “input condition signal” in the figure is a waveform indicating any one of the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3. The input condition signal is a signal generated based on all of the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal (for example, a signal output from the signal latch unit 174a3 toward the firing counter unit 174c). It may be.

  In addition, the waveform shown as the “fireable state” is a waveform indicating a signal for permitting or prohibiting counting (firing), which is output from the input condition setting unit 174a to the firing counter unit 174c. The level is a signal that allows (enables) firing, and the high level is a signal that prohibits (disables) firing.

  At the timing of T5 in this example, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a high level, the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch), as shown in FIG. At the timing of T6, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a low level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch). Further, at the timing of T5 ′ in this example, since the launchable state indicates a low level, the launch with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is stopped, and at the timing of T6 ′ shown in FIG. Since the launchable state indicates a low level, the launch with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) is stopped.

In addition, when the input condition signal becomes a low level at the first timing in the firing state period (for example, the period from T5 to T5 ′, or the period from T6 to T6 ′), The timing at which the firing is stopped may be the same or different when the input condition signal becomes low level at a second timing different from the first timing. The earlier the timing when the condition signal becomes low level, the earlier the timing when the firing is stopped may be earlier or later. The launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T5 is the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T1 in FIG. 52 (when the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 50 ms). Compared with, launch intensity may be small. The launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T6 is the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T3 in FIG. 52 (when the sphere is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 50 ms). Compared with, launch intensity may be small. Further, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T5 may be smaller than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T2 in FIG. Further, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T6 may be smaller than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T4 in FIG.
<About the launch characteristics of FIG. 53>

  The following configuration may be adopted for matters related to the launch characteristics described with reference to FIG. That is, in the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the operation amount indicated by the reference sign (a) in FIG. 53A) may be larger than that in the first state. In this case, even if the launching device is unable to exhibit its original performance due to deterioration or damage over time and cannot launch the game ball to the right side of the game area in the first state, the game ball to the right side of the game area in the second state May be able to fire.

  Further, in the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 5A) may be the same as in the first state, or the second state Compared with the first state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the amount of operation of (sa)) may be small. Further, the second state may have the same launch intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (u) in FIG. In the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. 5A) may be smaller than that in the first state. In this case, in the second state, a game ball that cannot reach the game area in the first state may be quickly returned to the ball tray.

  In addition, the second state may have the same firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle (the amount of operation (A)) compared to the first state, and the second state is the same as the first state. In comparison, the firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle ((a) operation amount) may be large. Also, in the second state, compared to the first state, the game ball is placed on the right side of the game region from the launch strength (launch strength of the symbol (f) in FIG. The operation amount of the handle up to the firing intensity to be fired (the launching intensity indicated by the symbol (e) in FIG. 10A) may be small, and the second state is compared with the first state in FIG. The difference between the launch intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by () and the launch intensity at the manipulated quantity indicated by () in FIG.

  Further, in the second state, the firing intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (（) in FIG. 10A may be the same as the emitted intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. Also, in the second state, the game ball fired with the operation amount indicated by (a) in the figure (a) and the arrival position in the game area of the game ball emitted with the operation quantity indicated by the symbol (a) in the figure (a). The arrival position of the game ball in the game area may be the same. Further, in the first state, the firing intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 11A may be different from the emitted intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. In the first state, the game ball fired with the operation amount indicated by (a) in FIG. 6A and the reaching position in the game area of the game ball launched by the operation amount indicated by (c) in FIG. The arrival position of the game ball in the game area may be different.

  Further, in the second state, even if the handle is turned from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the slope of the line of the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the line of the firing characteristic diagram may be a straight line from the manipulated variable indicated by the reference sign (a) in FIG. 9A to the manipulated variable indicated by the reference sign (a) in FIG. The second state is such that the firing intensity changes uniformly when the handle is turned from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 6 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. Also good.

  Further, in the second state, even if the slope of the line of the launch characteristic diagram is one from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. Good. Further, in the second state, the line of the firing characteristic diagram may be a single straight line from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the inclination of the line of the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. May be.

  In the second state, there are two straight lines or three or more lines in the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 10 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. It may be a straight line. In the second state, there are two slopes of the line of the emission characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 10 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. To (sa) may have a slope of 0). In the second state, there are three or four or more slopes of the line of the firing characteristic graph from the manipulated variable of (a) in FIG. 5 to the manipulated variable of (a) in FIG. It may be.

  Further, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may include the same inclination angle as the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the first state, and the same inclination angle may be zero. Further, the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 10A may be determined by the voltage value input to the firing intensity setting unit, and the line of the launch characteristic diagram in the second state May include a curve. Moreover, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be continuous. Moreover, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be discontinuous.

  Further, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may include the same inclination angle as the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the first state, and the same inclination angle may be zero. Further, the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 10A may be determined by the voltage value input to the firing intensity setting unit, and the line of the launch characteristic diagram in the second state May include a curve. The lines of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be continuous. The line of the second state firing characteristic diagram may be discontinuous.

  FIG. 59 is a modification of the graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch, and corresponds to FIG. 53 described above. In FIG. 59 (a), the launch characteristic TL1 of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is in the range from the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (O). TL1a and a launch characteristic TL1b in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K). The slope of the firing characteristic TL1a in the first half is made larger than the slope of the firing characteristic TL1b in the second half.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 59B, the launch characteristic TL1 of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is in the range from the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (O). The firing characteristic TL1c and the firing characteristic TL1d in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K) are configured. The slope of the launch characteristic TL1d in the second half is made larger than the slope of the launch characteristic TL1c in the first half.

  In addition, in this example, the example in which both the first launch characteristic and the second launch characteristic change the slope from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) is shown. However, the second launch characteristic is more than the first launch characteristic. Alternatively, the inclination may be changed with a small operation amount, or the inclination may be changed with an operation amount in which the second launch characteristic is greater than the first launch characteristic. In addition, in this example, the second firing characteristic shows an example in which the firing intensity does not change when the operation amount is larger than the operation amount of (ki), but it is fired from the operation amount of (ki) to the operation amount of (sa). The intensity may be changed (for example, greater than the firing intensity of (su)), the slope may be the same from the (o) manipulated variable to the (sa) manipulated variable, and the (o) manipulated variable and ( The inclination may be changed by the operation amount of (a), or the inclination may be changed one or more times from the operation amount of (o) to the operation amount of (sa). In this example, an example in which the slope of the first launch characteristic is 3 or more is shown, but the slope of the first launch characteristic may be one or two.

  <About the launching means and firing control means according to the present invention>

  The launching means according to the present invention may include a launching apparatus, may include only the launching apparatus, may include a launching apparatus and launching control means, and may include a launching apparatus and launching means. It may include only the control means, may include the firing device, the firing control means, and the firing handle, may include only the firing device, the firing control means, and the firing handle, It may include a device, a firing control means, and a payout control means, or may include only a launching device, a fire control means, and a payout control means. May be included, or only the firing device, the firing control means, the firing handle, and the dispensing control means may be included.

  Further, the payout control means and the firing control means may be provided on the same substrate, or the payout control means may generate the firing timer clock. The launching device may be a rotary solenoid, the launching device may be a solenoid, and the launching device may be a motor.

  Further, the launch control means according to the present invention can launch a game ball when the launchable condition is established, and the launchable condition may include at least that the launch permission signal is ON, The firing condition may include at least that the firing stop switch is OFF, the firing condition may include at least that the touch switch is ON, and the firing condition may be that the handle is operated. The firing possible condition may include not detecting an abnormality (for example, disconnection detection is OFF).

  The launch control means may change the state of the signal indicating that the launch permission signal is ON for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the launch permission signal is ON. Further, the clock generator that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the emission permission signal is ON.

  The clock generation unit that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF. The clock generation unit that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the touch switch is ON.

  Also, the turbo latch clock, the clock for latching the signal indicating that the launch permission signal is ON, the clock for latching the signal indicating that the launch stop switch is OFF, and the touch switch are ON The clocks for latching the signals indicating the above may be generated by separate clock generation units, or at least a plurality of clocks may be generated by the same clock generation unit.

  Further, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the emission permission signal is ON may be the same as, shorter or longer than one cycle of the turbo latch clock. The firing control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the firing stop switch is OFF.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF may be the same as or shorter than one cycle of the turbo latch clock.

The firing control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the touch switch is ON for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the touch switch is ON.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the touch switch is ON may be the same as, or smaller than, one cycle of the turbo latch clock.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example is capable of firing at least first operating means (for example, the turbo button 804g) provided at a position where the player can operate and at least a gaming ball. A game machine comprising a launching means (e.g., launching device 844), wherein the launching means in a first launch control state (e.g., a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is a game The launching means is capable of firing at least a ball and is in a second launch control state (for example, a control state according to a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is capable of firing a game ball at least. The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is in the first launch control state at least in the first period. The first period is a period during which the first operating means is at least operated (for example, a period during which the turbo button 804g is pressed), and the firing means is at least second In the period, the second firing control state is set, and the second period is a period in which the first operating means is not operated at least (for example, a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed). It is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state can be quickly performed, and there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in launch can be provided. . For example, when switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state every time the turbo button is operated, at least 2 until the first launch control state is returned to the first launch control state again. The first operation means needs to be operated once, but according to the present invention, switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state is performed depending on whether or not the first operation means is pressed. In some cases, the first firing control state and the second firing control state can be quickly switched (by the same operation as the firing stop lever 804e).

  The launching means includes second operating means (for example, a dial 806) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the first period is the second operation. The period during which the first operating means is operated while the means is being operated, and the second period is the first period when the second operating means is being operated. It may be a period during which the operating means is not operated.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the first launch control state and the second launch control state can be switched in relation to the presence or absence of operation of the first operating means.

  In addition, a detection unit (for example, a touch switch 804d) capable of at least detecting that the second operation unit is operated is provided, and the first period is a state in which the detection unit is detecting. It may be a period during which the first operating means is operated.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the firing intensity can be changed only when launching is possible. Further, even when the turbo button is used, there are cases where the player can reliably perform the steering operation as before.

  The first operation means includes a detection means capable of at least detecting that the second operation means is operated, and the first period means that the first operation means is in a state in which the detection means is detecting. The second period is a period in which the first operating unit is not operated in a state in which the detection unit is detecting, and the first period is the first period. The period is a period excluding the period during which the detection means is not detected even when the second operation means is being operated, and the second period is the first period. Even in a state where the second operating means is being operated, it may be a period excluding a period during which the detection means is not detecting.

  Further, the second operation means is movable at least between a first position (for example, an initial position) and a second position, and the detection means is configured such that a player touches the detection means. "A period excluding a period during which the detection means is not detected even when the second operation means is operated" refers to the second When the operation means is in a position other than the first position and is not detected by the detection means (for example, when the dial operation amount is not 0, the detection means is simply broken, the player handles It may be a case where a coin or the like is held between the handle and the player does not touch the handle (touch sensor).

  With such a configuration, the firing strength can be changed only when the player is firmly touching the handle, and it may be possible to prevent the game ball from being inadvertently fired. Moreover, when the hand is released with the handle fixed, the launch can be suppressed.

  Further, the launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 53 (a)). The launching means in the second launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a second launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (ki) in FIG. 53 (a)), The second launch intensity is a launch intensity that corresponds at least to the operation amount of the second operation means, and the first launch intensity is equal to the operation intensity of the second operation means. In the same state as (for example, the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ki) in FIG. 53 (a)), the firing intensity may be at least stronger than the second firing intensity.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily switch the strength of the firing intensity.

  Further, the first firing intensity may be a firing intensity at least according to an operation amount of the second operation means.

  The launching means includes a third operating means (for example, a firing stop lever 804e) provided at least at a position operable by the player. The first period is the third period. It may be a period during which the operating means is not operated.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the feasibility of firing depending on whether or not the firing stop lever (stop button) is operated. Never get lost.

  The third operating means may be in an operated state even if the player does not operate the third operating means when the second operating means is not operated. Good.

  With such a configuration, the firing intensity can be changed only by operating the turbo button in a state where the handle is rotated, so that the conventional operation + the operation of the turbo button is performed. That is, it may be possible to prevent the game operation from becoming complicated for the player.

  Further, the second operation means is capable of moving at least between a first position (for example, an initial position) and a second position, and “when the first operation means is not operated, a game `` Those that are operated even if the user does not operate the third operating means '' means that the second operating means is at least located at the first position. Also good.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the operation of the firing stop lever (stop button) can be a firing condition.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect display, and the launching means in the first launch control state is the display means. A game ball can be emitted at least in a region (right region of the game region 124) on the right side of the front view, and the launching unit in the second launch control state operates the second operation unit. According to the amount, at least a game ball can be fired in a region on the right side of the front view of the display means, and the launch means in the second launch control state has an operation amount of the second operation means. Accordingly, at least a game ball may be fired in a region (a region on the left side of the game region 124) on the left side of the display unit when viewed from the front.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the wrist burden can be reduced (the right-handed operation without using the conventional first operation means has a large amount of rotation operation of the second operation means, and the operation is performed. May be difficult). In some cases, the second operating means may be re-gripped to reduce the burden on the wrist, and the operability may be improved by operating the turbo button.

  Further, the launching means in the second launch control state launches at least a game ball in an area on the left side of the display means when the operation amount of the second operation means is smaller than the first operation amount. The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of playing a game in an area on the left side of the display means when the operation amount of the second operation means is smaller than the second operation amount. The ball can be fired at least, and the second operation amount may be an operation amount smaller than the first operation amount.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can arbitrarily select the use of the first operation means.

  Moreover, you may provide the alerting | reporting means (for example, turbo state alerting lamp 151) which can alert | report at least that it is a said 1st discharge control state. Note that the notification means may be able to notify during a period in which right-handed turbo is performed, and may not be notified even if it is right-handed when the turbo button is not used. Further, even when the turbo button is used, it is not necessary to notify when the ball is not being fired.

  The launching means may not launch a game ball unless the player performs a launch operation.

  Further, the adoption of the turbo button may be in two stages. For example, it is possible to set whether or not to allow the turbo function by a switch provided that the player cannot operate, and the switch is in an allowed state and The configuration may be a turbo when the conditions of the present invention are satisfied. Further, the turbo button may be weakened as a whole, or may be weakened in a range corresponding to at least a part of the handle operation amount.

  In addition, the turbo button has the same push button format as the stop switch, but another one such as a touch sensor may be employed as appropriate, may be a push button type and may have the same tactile sensation as the stop switch, Different tactile sensations may be used. Further, for example, the handle unit may be movable, and the turbo may function when the movable state becomes a predetermined state (for example, the turbo switch is turned on in a predetermined operation state). May be)

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a plurality of operating means provided at positions where the player can operate and a launching means (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball. And at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a firing stop lever 804e), and at least one of the plurality of operation means. One is a second operation means (for example, turbo button 804g), at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means (for example, dial 806), and the firing means is When the first operation means is operated, at least the game ball is not fired, and the launcher is in a first firing control state (for example, a control state by the first launch characteristic (normal launch)). Is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launching means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) can launch at least a game ball. The second firing control state is at least different from the first firing control state, and the firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period. The first period is a period in which the third operating means is at least operated, and the firing means is in the second firing control state in at least the second period. And the second period is a period in which the second operating means and the third operating means are at least operated, and the first operating means has a first position (for example, FIG. The second operating means is at least at a second position (for example, the upper position in the rear view shown in FIG. 57 (a)). The gaming table is provided, wherein the second position is a position at least above the first position.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, there are cases where the second operating means can be easily operated while operating the first operating means (handle), and it is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by launching.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include at least a handle unit (for example, a launch handle), and the first operation means is provided at least to the handle unit, and the second operation means The operation means may be provided at least in the handle unit, and the third operation means may be provided at least in the handle unit.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the firing intensity can be easily changed by the second operating means while operating the first operating means (handle).

  Further, the third operating means includes at least a first convex portion (for example, a first operating portion 806d1), and the first convex portion is in accordance with an operation of the third operating means. The second position is movable at least between the first position and the second position, and the second position is the first position in a range where the third operating means can be operated. The first operating means is located at least in the first direction when viewed from the second position, and the second operating means is viewed from the second position. The second direction may be a direction opposite to the first direction with the first convex portion sandwiched between the first direction and the second direction.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the operation of the second operation means can be operated with a finger (for example, an index finger) different from the finger (for example, the thumb) for operating the first operation means.

  The first position is a position of the first convex portion when the third operating means is not operated, and the first operating means is a first position when viewed from the first position. The second operation means may be located at least in the second direction when viewed from the first position.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the third operating means (launching stop lever) from being inadvertently operated in the firing state.

  Further, the second operation means is capable of at least rotating operation between the first position and the second position, and the first convex portion is the second position. The first direction in the state may be a direction in which the first convex portion is directed from the second position toward the first position in response to the rotation operation.

  Further, the third operation means includes at least a second convex portion (for example, a second operation portion 806d2), and the second convex portion corresponds to an operation of the third operation means. At least between the third position and the fourth position, and the second protrusion is at least a third position in a state where the first protrusion is the first position. The second convex portion is at least a fourth position in a state where the first convex portion is the second position, and the second operating means is the Even if the second operating means is located at least in the first direction when viewed from the fourth position, the second operating means is positioned at least in the second direction when viewed from the third position. Good.

With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operating means (turbo button) can be easily operated while grasping the handle with a finger placed between the first convex portion and the second convex portion. . In some cases, it is easy to confirm the position of the second operation means (turbo button) in the initial state.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine, and includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect display, and the launch means in the first launch control state is the third launch control state. When the operation amount of the operation means is the first operation amount (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), at least a game ball can be launched into the area on the left side of the display means. The first convex portion is at least a fifth position in the first case, and the second convex portion is at least a sixth position in the second case, The second operating means is at least positioned in the second direction as viewed from the fifth position, and the second operating means is at least in the first direction as viewed from the sixth position. It may be located.

  With such a configuration, the turbo button is positioned between the first convex portion and the second convex portion in the left-handed state, which may be easy to operate.

  In addition, the third operation means includes at least a substantially hemispherical main body, and the first operation means has a first distance from the top of the main body, In the second operation means, the distance from the top of the main body may be a second distance, and the second distance may be a distance that is at least longer than the first distance.

  With such a configuration, when the first operating means (handle) is operated with the right hand, the thumb is generally brought into contact with the left side of the first convex portion (the index finger may also be infrequent). That is, when the third operating means (launching stop lever) is operated with the thumb (or index finger), the second operating means (turbo button) is likely to be operated with the index finger (or middle finger). The distance from the top of the spherical shape of one operation means (handle) is adjusted to the length of the finger, and the operability of the second operation means (turbo button) may be improved.

  In addition, the third operation means includes a plurality of convex portions, and at least one of the plurality of convex portions is the first convex portion, and among the plurality of convex portions. At least one of the second protrusions, the first protrusion is a protrusion at least adjacent to the second protrusion, and the first protrusion is the third protrusion. In a state where the operating means is not operated, the convex portion may be at least closest to the first operating means.

  Further, the pressing direction of the turbo button may be different from the pressing direction of the firing stop lever. In this case, the function of increasing the firing intensity and the function of stopping the firing are almost the opposite functions, and there are cases where it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation by changing not only the operation feel and outline shape but also the operation direction.

Moreover, about the said convex part, 3 or more multiple may be sufficient. Further, the light emitting means in the handle of this example may be used for notifying that the turbo function is operating, or may be notified by another light emitting means or the like. Moreover, you may use a turbo button as an effect button.
<Modification of launch handle>

Next, a modified example of the above-described firing handle 134 will be described. The gaming table according to the present invention may be provided with a launching handle described below instead of the above-described launching handle 134.
<Variation of launch handle / Variation 1>

  FIG. 60 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a firing handle 860 according to Modification 1, and FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of notification by the firing handle 860.

  The handle cover 862 of the firing handle 860 is provided with a symbol or a figure, and is configured to perform notification (handle notification) indicating the position of the turbo button 864 based on the symbol. In this example, a sticker with a symbol “TURBO” and a graphic imitating an arrow is affixed to the handle cover 862, and the handle is notified using this seal. The handle cover 862 may be engraved or a design may be printed on the handle cover 862. Moreover, the mode of a pattern is not limited to a character and a figure, You may give a symbol, a pattern, etc.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 61A, when the firing handle 860 is not operated (when the firing handle 860 is not operated or when the firing handle 860 is operated, the turbo button 864 is pressed). If the tip of the arrow on the seal of the handle cover 862 points to the direction of the turbo button 864, a handle notification is given to suggest the position of the turbo button 864 to the player. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the launching handle 134 is turbo (when the turbo button 864 is pressed), the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is configured to point in a direction other than the turbo button 864, A steering wheel notification is given to the player that the button 864 is pressed (the operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted).

  By performing such a handle notification, the player can know the position of the turbo button 864 reliably when not being operated, and can recognize the presence of the turbo button 864 even when the user does not know the presence of the turbo button 864. In addition, it is possible to easily confirm that the pressing operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted at the time of turbo, so that a sense of security can be obtained, and the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is a turbo button. By configuring to point in a direction other than 864, the visibility of the steering wheel notification can be improved because the player's hand hardly disturbs the visibility even while the turbo button 864 is being pressed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the firing handle 860 is not operated (when the firing handle 860 is not operated or when the firing handle 860 is operated, the turbo button 864 is pressed). Is configured so that the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 points in a direction other than the turbo button 864, so that the turbo button 864 is not pressed (the turbo button 864 is not operated). Handle notification is given to the player to indicate that the operation is not accepted.

  On the other hand, when the launching handle 134 is turbo (when the turbo button 864 is pressed), the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is configured to point in the direction of the turbo button 864, so that the turbo button The steering wheel notification is made to suggest to the player that 864 is pressed (the operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted).

  As described above, if the notifying means capable of at least notifying the position where the turbo button 864 is provided is provided, the design of the launch handle 134 when not in operation can be improved, and the player can use the turbo button during turbo. It can be easily confirmed that the pressing operation of 864 is accepted, and a sense of security can be obtained. Further, there are cases where the player can easily understand and can prevent malfunction.

In addition, the notification means of this example may notify the position of the turbo button with a seal or the like on the main body frame, may notify the position of the turbo button by gradation control of a lamp or the like of the main body frame, The spherical part may be informed of the position of the turbo button with a seal or the like, or may be a display means or a voice. In addition, the notification may be performed during a non-game state such as during a demonstration, during setting of Daitomo, etc., or in part of the production. Moreover, you may alert | report so that a function may be known to turbo button itself.
<Variation of launch handle / Variation 2>

  62 (a) is an external perspective view of a firing handle 870 according to the second modification, and FIG. 62 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the firing handle 870. FIG. 63A to 63C are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the firing handle 870. FIG.

  The launch handle 870 is obtained by applying a turbo button 870g and a turbo switch 870h in place of the turbo button 804g and the turbo switch 804h of the launch handle 134 described above.

  The above-mentioned turbo button 804g is disposed obliquely upward on the back surface of the large-diameter portion 812 of the handle base 802, and is slidable obliquely with respect to the axial direction of the firing handle 134 (longitudinal direction of the firing handle 134). It is configured. For this reason, when the player performs a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g diagonally downward is necessary.

  On the other hand, the turbo button 870g of the modified example is disposed on the upper surface of the small-diameter portion 810 of the handle base 802 so as to be directly above the dial 806, and is perpendicular to the axis of the firing handle 870 ( It is configured to be slidable in the short direction of the firing handle 134. For this reason, when the player performs a pressing operation of the turbo button 870g, as shown in FIG. 63A, an operation of pressing the turbo button 870g directly down is necessary.

  As described above, in the firing handle 870 of the modified example, the turbo button 870g is arranged on the upper surface of the small diameter portion 810 of the handle base 802 and close to the dial 806 so as to be slidable right below. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63A, even when the dial 806 is held, the player's finger can easily extend to the turbo button 870g, and the turbo button 870g can be easily pressed. For this reason, the operability can be further improved as compared with the above-described firing handle 134.

  Since the turbo switch 870h that also serves as a base for the turbo button 870g is a box-like body, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the dial 806 is gripped when the turbo button 870g is not pressed. In some cases, a finger (an index finger in this example) can be hooked on the right side surface of the turbo switch 870h, and the state of the dial 806 can be easily and reliably maintained. In some cases, the location of the turbo switch 870g can be notified by the shape of the turbo switch 870g itself that also serves as a base.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the dial 806 is rotated by the maximum operation amount, the first operation unit 806d1 is positioned on the left side of the turbo button 870g. Since the distance between the finger hooked on 806d1 (usually the thumb) and the turbo button 870g can be ensured, an erroneous operation of pressing the turbo button 870g by mistake can be prevented in advance.

  Although not shown, in this example, the harness that connects the turbo switch 870h and the control unit is drawn into the inner space of the handle base 802 and then pulled out from the rear of the handle base 802 together with other harnesses. Yes. However, the length of the base portion of the turbo switch 870h is extended to the rear end of the handle base 802, and the harness connecting the turbo switch 870h and the control unit is drawn into the inner space of the turbo switch 870h and pulled out from behind. May be.

With such a configuration, the turbo button 870g and the turbo switch 870h can be unitized, and parts of the turbo button 870g and the turbo switch 870h can be easily replaced.
<Modification of launch characteristics of launcher>

  Next, a modified example of the launch characteristics of the launcher 844 will be described in detail.

  <Variation of launching characteristics of launching handle / Variation 1>

  FIG. 64A is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 1, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 53 described above. In the launch characteristic shown in FIG. 53, the launch intensity corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by reference sign (s)) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NL is set to the launch intensity indicated by reference sign (f). Set, the launch intensity of the maximum manipulated variable of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TL is set to the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (su), the maximum manipulated variable of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) The firing intensity was increased.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 64A, the launch intensity S1 corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable H1 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLa and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) ) The firing strength S1 of the maximum manipulated variable H1 of TLb is set to the same firing strength.

  <Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 2>

  FIG. 64B is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to the second modification, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 53 described above. In this example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the firing intensity S2 corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable H4 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is the maximum manipulation of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb. It is set to be larger than the firing intensity S3 of the amount H4 (S2> S3).

  Further, in this example, when the manipulated variable is in the range of 0 to H2, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is larger than the launch intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). Set, within the range of operation amount H2 to H3, set the firing strength of the first launch characteristics (normal launch) NLb to be smaller than the launch strength of the second launch characteristics (turbo launch), When the manipulated variable is in the range of H3 to H4, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is set to be greater than the launch intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb. As a result, the graph of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb are represented by an intersection C1 corresponding to the manipulated variable H2 and an intersection C1 corresponding to the manipulated variable H3. It is configured to intersect at a point.

  In this example, when the manipulated variable is in the range of H3 to H4, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is increased in proportion to the manipulated variable. Similarly to (turbo launch), the launch intensity within the range of the operation amount from H3 to H4 may be constant.

  <Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 3>

  FIG. 65A is a graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to the third modification, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 53 described above. In the launch characteristic shown in FIG. 53, the launch intensity corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NL (the manipulated variable shown by reference sign (A) = 0) is indicated by the reference sign (c). The launch intensity of the maximum operation amount of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TL is set to the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (A), and the maximum operation of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is set. The amount of launch intensity was smaller.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 65A, the firing intensity S3 corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable H1 (= 0) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLc and the second launch The launch intensity S3 of the minimum manipulated variable H1 (= 0) of the characteristic (turbo launch) TLc is set to the same launch intensity.

  <Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 4>

  FIG. 65 (b) is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 4, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the launch intensity S5 corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable H6 (= 0) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd is the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). It is set to be smaller than the firing intensity S4 of the minimum manipulated variable H6 (= 0) of TLd (S4> S5).

  Further, in this example, the firing intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd is the second launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd within the entire range (the launch handle operable range) of the minimum manipulated variable H6 to the maximum manipulated variable H7. Turbo launch) It is set to be smaller than the launch intensity of TLd, and the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb graph and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb graph are configured not to intersect. ing.

  <Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 5>

  FIG. 66 (a) is a graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 5, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the firing intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLe within the entire range (the launch handle operable range) of the minimum manipulated variable H8 to the maximum manipulated variable H9. Is set to be larger by a predetermined amount α than the firing intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe, and the graph of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe and the second launch characteristic (turbo) (Launch) The TLe graph is configured not to intersect.

  <Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 6>

FIG. 66 (b) is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 6, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the first range (in this example, the range of the minimum manipulated variable H10 to the manipulated variable H11) within the launch handle operable range, Launch) The firing strength of TLf is set to be larger than the firing strength of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLf by a predetermined amount α, and the second range within the firing handle operable range (in this example, In the operation amount H11 to the maximum operation amount H12), the firing intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLf is a predetermined amount β (β <α) than the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLf. ) Or an amount less than a predetermined amount β, and the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe graph and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLe graph are configured not to intersect. ing.
<Modification of launch control board>

  Next, a modification of the above-described launch control board 174 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 890 according to a modification, and is a circuit diagram corresponding to FIG.

  In this example, in addition to the circuit shown in FIG. 51 above, even if the player stops pressing the turbo button 804g halfway by adding / changing the circuit surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 67, As long as the dial 806 is touched, a function for enabling the pressing operation of the turbo button 408g is added.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, the launch control board 890 according to the modification includes a storage unit 892 (IC10) including a flip-flop circuit. The clock signal input terminal 2CK of the storage unit 893 receives a launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the connector CN2, and the clear signal input terminal 2CLR receives a touch switch signal input from the connector CN2. When the touch switch signal input from the connector CN2 is at a low level (when the player is touching the dial 806), the firing intensity changeover switch signal is stored (held), and the stored signal is output to the output signal terminal 1Q. And / or 1Q.

  When the signal output from the output signal terminal 1Q of the storage unit 892 is a high level signal (when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is a high level signal), the FET circuit is turned on, whereby the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and The function of the bias adjustment unit 174d3 is turned on, and the launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). On the other hand, when the signal output from the output signal terminal 1Q of the storage unit 892 is a high level signal (when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is a low level signal), the gain adjustment is performed by turning off the FET circuit. The functions of the unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 are turned off, and the launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

  The signal output from the output signal terminal / 1Q of the storage unit 892 turns on / off the FET circuit (Q4) in synchronization with the on / off of the firing intensity changeover switch signal. As a result, the FET circuit (Q4) outputs a signal indicating the on / off state of the firing intensity changeover switch signal (launch intensity state signal) to the dispensing control board 170 via the connector CN4.

  <Launching handle with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, a firing handle 900 including a plurality of turbo buttons will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a) to 68 (c) are rear views of the launching handle 900 provided with a plurality of turbo buttons, and FIG. 68 (d) is a side view of the state of FIG. 68 (a).

  The launch handle 900 includes a first turbo button 902 and a second turbo button 904 having the same shape as the first turbo button 902. The number of turbo buttons is not limited to one or two, and three or more turbo buttons may be provided (hereinafter the same).

  The first turbo button 902 is disposed on the right side of the second turbo button 904 in the rear view and in the vicinity of the outer edge of the handle base 802, and the second turbo button 904 is the first turbo button 902 in the rear view. It is disposed at a position on the left side that is slightly away from the outer edge of the handle base 802. Further, the firing stop lever 905 is disposed on the lower right side of the handle base 904 when viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4D, when the tip P of the firing handle 900 is used as a reference point, the shortest distance L1 from the tip P to the firing stop lever 905, the first turbo button from the tip P The relationship between the shortest distance L2 up to 902 and the shortest distance L3 from the tip portion P to the second turbo button 904 is a relationship of distance L1 <distance L2 <distance L3, and the length of a general player's finger In other words, the relationship of the length of the thumb <the length of the index finger <the length of the middle finger.

  For this reason, the player operates the launch stop lever 905 with his thumb, operates the first turbo button 902 with his index finger, and operates the second turbo button 904 with his middle finger. It is possible to reliably and easily operate, and the operability of the firing handle 900 can be greatly improved.

  Although details will be described later, when the first turbo button 902 is pressed, the firing strength is stronger than the first launch characteristic (normal launch) described above and the third launch characteristic (described later) ( The sphere is launched according to the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch), which has a weaker launch strength than the strong turbo launch. On the other hand, when the second turbo button 904 is pressed, a third launch characteristic (launch intensity higher than the first launch characteristic (normal launch) and the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch) described above) ( The ball is fired according to (strong turbo launch). The shape of the first and second turbo buttons 902 and 904 in this example may be the structure of the turbo button having a pedestal described with reference to FIG. 63, and if such a structure is adopted, the operability is improved. There is a case where an effect that it is possible to notify the improvement or the presence of the turbo button can be obtained.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the first turbo button 902 and the second turbo button 904 are not depressed and the firing handle 900 is in the initial position.

  In this initial position, the first turbo button 902 and the second turbo button 904 are located higher than the firing stop lever 804e, and both are located on the left side in the rear view with respect to the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2. doing. When the player grasps the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the index finger is positioned between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2. Therefore, in this initial position, the first turbo button 902 is used by using the index finger. Alternatively, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904.

  FIG. 68B is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the firing handle 900 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the first turbo button 902 is pressed with an index finger.

  In this position, the first turbo button 902 is located between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2 and closer to the second operation unit 906d2 than the first operation unit 906d1. When the player grasps the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2 and close to the second operation unit 906d2. If the index finger is moved, it is easy to press the first turbo button 902 using the index finger.

  However, since the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 906d1 away from the first turbo button 902, it is difficult to press the first turbo button 902 using the thumb, and the middle finger is the first finger Since the second operation unit 906d2 away from the turbo button 902 is located on the left side in a rear view, it is difficult to press the first turbo button 902 using the middle finger.

  FIG. 68 (c) is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the firing handle 900 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the second turbo button 904 is pressed with the middle finger.

  In this position, the second turbo button 902 is located on the left side of the second operation unit 906d2 when viewed from the back. When the player grips the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the middle finger is positioned on the left side of the second operation unit 906d2 when viewed from the rear. In this position, if the middle finger is moved, the second finger It is easy to press 904.

  However, since the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 906d1 away from the second turbo button 904, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904 using the thumb, and the index finger is used for the second finger. Since the operation unit 906d2 is located on the right side of the rear view, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904 with the index finger.

  <Launching handle with multiple turbo buttons / variants>

  FIG. 69 (a) is a rear view of a firing handle 910 provided with two turbo buttons having different shapes. The launch handle 910 includes a first turbo button 912 and a second turbo button 914 having a different shape from the first turbo button 912. In this example, the first turbo button 912 has a circular shape when viewed from the back, whereas the second turbo button 914 has a rhombus shape when viewed from the back.

  If a plurality of turbo buttons of the same shape are arranged on the back of the launch handle, the player may make a mistake in operation. According to this example, the first turbo button 912 and the second turbo button 914 are distinguished by tactile sensation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player's operation mistake and not to reduce the player's willingness to play.

  In this example, the example in which the shape of each of the plurality of turbo buttons is made different is shown. However, the size of each of the turbo buttons may be made different, the amount of protrusion of each may be made different, and each operation. The sensations may be different, or the material and the touch of each may be different.

  FIG. 69B is a rear view of the firing handle 920 in which two turbo buttons are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2. The firing handle 920 is similar to the firing handle 900 described above in that it includes two parts, a first turbo button 922 and a second turbo button 924 having the same shape as the first turbo button 922. The difference is that the first turbo button 922 and the second turbo button 924 are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2.

  According to this example, the first turbo button 922 and the second turbo button 924 can be operated with one finger (for example, the index finger), and the operability of the operating means can be improved.

  <Launch handle / Launch control board with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, the internal configuration of the launch control board 930 of the launch handle having a plurality of turbo buttons will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the launch control board 930, and is a block diagram corresponding to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the firing control unit 930 includes an input condition setting unit 174a, a clock generation unit 174b, a firing counter unit 174c, a firing characteristic setting unit 174d, a firing intensity setting unit 174e, and a constant current control unit 174f. In this respect, it is the same as the above-described launch control unit 174, but the launch identification setting unit 174d receives the first launch characteristic (based on the launch intensity changeover switch signals input from the first turbo switch 932 and the second turbo switch 934). The difference is that control is performed to select one of the normal launch), the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch), or the third launch characteristic (strong turbo launch).

  The first turbo switch 932 can detect whether or not the first turbo button 902 of the above-described firing handle 900 has been pressed. In this example, the first turbo button 902 is pressed by the player. If the first turbo button 902 is pressed down by the player, a low level firing strength switching switch signal is output to the outside. Output to.

  Further, the second turbo switch 934 can detect whether or not the second turbo button 904 of the above-described launching handle 900 has been pressed. In this example, the second turbo button 904 is pressed by the player. When not operated, a low-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is output to the outside, and when the second turbo button 904 is pressed by the player, a high-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is emitted. Output to the control unit. When both the first turbo switch 932 and the second turbo switch 934 are pressed, only one of the pressing operations may be accepted.

  The launch characteristic setting unit 174d of the launch control board 930 has a first launch characteristic (normal launch) and a second launch characteristic based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Control is performed to select either (low turbo launch) or the third launch characteristic (strong turbo launch).

  <Launch handle / Launch control board with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, the firing characteristics of the firing handle 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch, weak turbo launch, and strong turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 53 described above.

  The normal launch launch characteristic NL of this example is the same as the normal launch launch characteristic indicated by the reference NL in FIG. 53, and the strong turbo launch launch characteristic TLs of this example is the turbo indicated by the reference TL in FIG. Since it is the same as the launching characteristics of launching, its description is omitted.

  The launch characteristic TLw of the weak turbo launch of this example is set so that the launch intensity TLw1 of the inclined portion changes more slowly than the launch characteristic TLs1 of the strong turbo launch. In this case, the maximum launch intensity is set when the operation amount becomes larger than the launch characteristic TLs2 of the strong turbo launch.

  <Game console with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a game table having a plurality of turbo buttons will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of a game machine having a plurality of turbo buttons.

  This game table includes a second turbo button 893 on the front surface of the front frame door 106 in addition to the turbo button 864 provided in the firing handle 860 described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The turbo button 864 is an operation means for switching the launch characteristic of the launch handle 860 from the above-described normal launch to turbo launch (or turbo launch to normal launch), and another second turbo button 893 is the launch handle 860. Are the operation means for switching the above-mentioned launch characteristics from the above-described normal launch to turbo launch (or from turbo launch to normal launch), both of which have the same function in this example.

  The functions of the turbo button 864 and the second turbo button 893 may be different. For example, one of the functions is an operation means for switching from the above-described normal launch to weak turbo launch (or weak turbo launch to normal launch). The other may be an operation means for switching from the above-described normal launch to strong turbo launch (or from strong turbo launch to normal launch). Also, the location of the second turbo button 893 is not particularly limited. For example, the second turbo button 893 may be disposed on the main body 104 of the game table or disposed next to the chance button 136 disposed on the front frame door 106. May be.

  According to this example, when one turbo button and the other turbo button have the same function, it is possible to arbitrarily select a turbo button that is easy for the player to operate, thereby improving the convenience of the player. May be possible. Further, when one turbo button and the other turbo button have different functions, it may be possible to prevent an erroneous operation such as a mistake in pressing.

  As described above, the gaming table according to this example includes a plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate, and a launching means (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball. The launching means is provided with a first launch control state (for example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is capable of firing at least a game ball. The launching means in the launch control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch)) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the third launch control state (eg, the third launch control state) The launching means that is in a controlled state by the launch characteristics (strong turbo launch) of the above is capable of launching at least a game ball, and at least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means (for example, , Handle 80 ), At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, the first turbo button 902), and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means. Operating means (for example, the second turbo button 904), the firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period, the first period is the first Is the period during which at least the operating means is operated, and the firing means is in the second firing control state at least in the second period, and the second period is the first period. A period during which at least one operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the emission means is in the third emission control state in at least a third period. Third period And, he said is that the first operating means and the period for the third operating means is at least operated, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to this example, the second operation means and the third operation means are used to change from the normal first launch control state to the multiple launch control states (second launch control state, third In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of launching.

  The “launching means” according to the present invention only needs to be “at least capable of launching a game ball”. As with the launching device 844 of the above embodiment, the game is temporarily played by pressing the launch stop lever 804e or the like. Naturally, a ball that cannot be fired but a game ball can be fired by releasing the pressing operation of the firing stop lever 804e is also included.

  The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a first launch intensity, and the launching means in the second launch control state is a second launch control state. The launching means is capable of at least launching a game ball with a launch intensity, and the launching means in the third launch control state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a third launch intensity, and the first launch The strength is a firing strength at least according to the operation amount of the first operation means, and the second launch strength is in a state where the operation amount of the first operation means is the same as the first launch strength, The third launch intensity is at least stronger than the first launch intensity, and the third launch intensity is the first launch intensity when the operation amount of the first operating means is the same as the first launch intensity. Is at least a stronger firing strength than The third launch intensity may be a launch intensity that is at least stronger than the second launch intensity when the operation amount of the first operating means is the same as the second launch intensity (for example, FIG. 72 launch characteristics NL, TLw, TLs).

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to easily select a firing strength higher than a normal firing strength.

  In addition, the second operating means is configured integrally with the third operating means, and the firing means is configured such that the second firing strength is obtained by a first operation in the second operating means. And the launching means may be capable of firing at least the game ball at the third launch intensity by the second operation of the second operation means.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the operating means related to the firing intensity as much as possible, and the operability may be improved. Since the player tends to be interested in the display means during the game, the player may not confirm the position of the operation means. That is, operability may be improved by not inadvertently increasing the number of operation means.

  The second operation may be an operation that can be executed at least after the first operation is performed (for example, a turbo button is operated a first number of times → a weak (strong) turbo → a turbo button The second time operation → strong (weak) turbo, or press and hold the turbo button for the first time → weak (strong) turbo → press and hold the turbo button for the second time → strong (weak) turbo).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to change the firing intensity step by step with a single operating means. In addition, since it is possible to shift to the second operation (strong turbo) via the first operation (weak turbo), when the turbo button is not used (the firing intensity gradually increases according to the normal rotation operation amount). Since it is possible to make a transition in the firing strength similar to the above, it may be easy for the player to understand.

  Further, the first operation may be an operation that can be executed at least after the second operation is performed (for example, a turbo button is operated a first number of times → a weak (strong) turbo → a turbo button The second time operation → strong (weak) turbo, or press and hold the turbo button for the first time → weak (strong) turbo → press and hold the turbo button for the second time → strong (weak) turbo).

  With such a configuration, depending on the gaming state, if you want to fire strongly anyway (for example, when changing from left-handed to right-handed due to priority fluctuation in Figure 2), there are many relatively unfavorable big hits. There is a case where the player wants to avoid the winning of the special figure 1), and the player may be easy to operate by making the second operation (strong turbo) first.

  The second operating means may be configured separately from the third operating means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to realize cost reduction and the like without requiring complicated operations such as the number of times and time as compared with a single unit.

  Further, the firing means includes at least a handle unit (for example, a firing handle 134), and the handle unit is fixed to a main body (for example, a handle base 802). ) At least, and the first operating means is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the fixed portion, and the second operating means is provided on the fixed portion. It may be provided at least, and the third operation means may be provided at least on the fixed portion.

  With such a configuration, the second and third operation means (turbo buttons) are arranged in a concentrated manner on the fixed portion, so there is little hesitation in operation and the player may be easy to operate. is there.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fourth operation means (launching stop lever 804e), and the fourth operation means is provided at least in the fixed portion, The second operating means is a distance along the rotational direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the first distance. The third operating means is a distance along the rotational direction of the first operating means and provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the second distance. And the first distance may be closer than the second distance.

  With such a configuration, the second operating means (weak turbo) may be easier to function first than the third operating means (strong turbo), and may be easier to operate in order of firing intensity. . In addition, since it is possible to perform the transition of the firing intensity similar to the case where the turbo button is not used (the firing intensity gradually increases according to the normal rotation operation amount), it may be easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fourth operation means (launching stop lever 804e), and the fourth operation means is provided at least in the fixed portion, The second operating means is a distance along the rotation direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the third distance. The third operating means is a distance along the rotation direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the fourth distance. The fourth distance may be closer than the third distance.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to operate when strong turbo = rotation amount: small, and weak turbo = rotation amount: easy to operate when large. As a comparison from normal launch, strong turbo is While a more rapid change in launch intensity is possible, a weaker turbo may have a relatively slow change in launch intensity.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include at least a handle unit (for example, the launch handle 134), and the handle unit includes at least a fixing portion fixed to the main body. The first operating means is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the fixed portion, and is one of the second operating means and the third operating means. Is provided in the fixed portion, and the other operating means of the second operating means and the third operating means may be provided in the main body.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous operation of the second operating means (weak turbo) and the third operating means (strong turbo).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fifth operation means (for example, a changeover switch provided in the main body), and the fifth operation means is an operation of the fifth operation means ( For example, by switching the on / off of the changeover switch), it is possible to select at least whether the firing intensity by the operation of the operating means provided in the fixed portion is the second launch intensity or the third launch intensity. It may be.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can select and arrange the type of turbo that is frequently used by the player so that it is easy to operate.

  In addition, if the weak turbo launch intensity is set to be weaker than the normal launch intensity, the strong / weak switching operation may be easily performed. Further, three or more turbo buttons may be provided, and any two of them may be applied to the second and third operation means of the present invention. Moreover, the transition from weak turbo to strong turbo may be normal → weak → strong or normal → strong → weak. Good (normal → weak → normal → strong, etc.). Controlling the direct transition of weak turbo ← → strong turbo may reduce the control burden on launch.

  In addition, the weak turbo and the strong turbo are integrated, for example, the type that switches from weak turbo to strong turbo with the passage of operation time (type that switches from weak to strong with the same operation), for example, weak turbo is temporarily It can also be used as firing intensity. In this case, it may be possible to mitigate a sudden change in the firing intensity by the weak turbo configuration. Further, whether to execute the weak turbo or the strong turbo may be determined according to yet another condition. For example, it may be determined in consideration of conditions relating to the gaming state and conditions such as player's individual information. The turbo button may have a touch sensor type configuration or the like.

  In addition, the second operating means (turbo button 1) is on the left side of the second operating part (second convex part) when the firing strength is moderate, but the third operating means (turbo button 2) ) Is arranged on the right side of the second convex portion, the turbo buttons 1 and 2 may be operated with different fingers, and there is a high possibility that no erroneous operation will be caused. On the contrary, if the turbo button 2 is disposed on the left side of the second convex portion, the turbo buttons 1 and 2 may be operated with the same finger, and the operability is high.

  Further, regarding the launch stop lever, the turbo button 1 and the turbo button 2, the distance relationship from the top portion of the handle cover is preferably the relationship of stop switch <turbo button 1 <= turbo button 2. Further, when the turbo button 1 is operated with the index finger and the turbo button 2 is operated with the middle finger, 1 <2 may be set, and when both are operated with the same finger, 1 = 2 may be set.

  The turbo button may be a slide type button in addition to the push type button, or may be a toggle type, lever type, rocker type, rotary type or keyboard type button. In the structure in which the turbo is operated only during a period in which the button is operated, it is further preferable to have a mechanism that automatically returns to a predetermined position when the button is not operated. Moreover, the structure may have a cover body like a chance button so that a player can touch the cover body and the switch is operated, or the operation emits light, vibrates or blows air. It may have a function as a production means. Furthermore, you may comprise the structure which can identify with a chance button. For example, there is a notification by a character that can be recognized as a turbo button (for example, see FIG. 151, a character that can be seen through a cover body such as translucent), a difference in size and shape, and a difference in light emission mode. Also good. Moreover, in order to make the pressing of the turbo button conspicuous, a configuration in which characters and light emission modes change while the turbo button is pressed may be used. Moreover, the structure which is assimilated or approximated to the shape and color around the position where the turbo button is disposed may be used so that the presence of the turbo button is not conspicuous.

  Further, the position of the turbo button is not limited to the above embodiment, and the position of one or a plurality of buttons may be a position where the player can operate such as a handle, a front frame, an upper plate, a frame decoration portion around the glass, etc. Can be arbitrarily set. In particular, although it is easy to operate if it is provided at a position that protrudes from the surroundings at the arrangement position, a structure that does not protrude may be used. In this case, it may be possible to prevent the player from malfunctioning the turbo button. Further, another turbo setting means may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate. For example, a dip switch etc. is provided on the back side of the game table so that whether or not turbo setting is possible can be selected at the game store side, and adjustment is possible with operation means that can be operated by the player only when it is set as turbo possible May be.

  Further, the firing handle is not limited to a pivoting type, and may be, for example, a bike-type handle or a slide lever. In addition, the handle is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. However, the handle may be provided on the left side, or a handle may be provided on both the left and right sides, and one may be a turbo handle (a handle having a function similar to a turbo button). Furthermore, the game ball may be fired vertically from the left side of the front view, or may be launched laterally from the upper left side of the front view (for example, in an enclosed game table, a game ball circulation mechanism is provided at the bottom of the game table. Therefore, the launching device may be in the upper left of the front view).

Moreover, you may have a launch control state different from a weak turbo and a strong turbo as a 4th launch control state. The fourth launch control state may be a state controlled by launch characteristics different from those of the weak turbo and the strong turbo, or may be the same as either one. Further, the fourth launch control state may be a state in which the launch characteristics are weaker than the normal launch control state. In this case, the fourth launch control state may be used for fine adjustment of the launch intensity. In addition, the conditions which can be in the fourth launch control state may be the same conditions as other launch control states, or may be different conditions.
<Communication between control boards>

  Next, communication between control boards of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a block diagram showing an example of connection between control boards. A launch unit 940 shown in the figure is a unit including the launch handle 134 and the launch device 844 described above.

  The launch control board 174 is connected to the launch handle 134 of the launch unit 940 via the handle relay board 848 and the glass frame relay board 842 shown in FIG. From the launch handle 134 to the launch control board 174, a launch intensity adjustment signal input from the launch volume 804b, a touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d, a launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f, A firing intensity changeover switch signal or the like input from the turbo switch 804h is input. The launch control board 174 is also connected to the launch device 844 of the launch unit 940, and a launch solenoid signal or the like is output from the launch control board 174 to the launch device 844.

  The launch control board 174 is also connected to the payout control board 170, and a fire permission signal or the like is output from the payout control board 170 to the launch control board 174, and the launch control board 174 to the payout control board 170. A touch switch signal, a firing intensity state signal, and the like are output.

  The payout control board 170 is connected to the main control board 156 via a serial communication line via the inner frame relay board 824 shown in FIG. 49. The payout control board 170 and the main control board 156 communicate with each other in two-way serial communication. Is possible. The main control board 156 is also connected to the first sub control board 160, but the main control board 156 and the first sub control board 160 are unidirectional from the main control board 156 to the first sub control board 160. Only communication is possible.

Touch switch signals, firing intensity state signals, and the like acquired by the payout control board 170 can be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 by serial communication. These signals are further output from the main control board 156. It is possible to output to the first sub-control unit 160 by one-way communication. It should be noted that the touch switch signal and the emission intensity state signal acquired by the payout control board 170 may not be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 and the first sub control unit 160.
<Communication between control boards / variants>

  FIG. 73 (b) is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the main control board 156 are directly connected without going through the payout control board 170, and the launch intensity adjustment signal and the touch switch are connected from the launch control board 174 to the main control board 156. A signal, a launch stop switch signal, a launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 may be able to receive signals related to launching in both the first route and the second route. The first path may be serial communication with the payout control board 170, and the second path may be directly input from the launch control board 174. The signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first route and the second route, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first route and the second route. One may be a firing intensity state signal, and the other may be a firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  According to the present example, even if the main control board 156 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 170 due to some trouble occurring in the payout control board 170, the launch control is performed instead. Various signals can be acquired from the substrate 174, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  FIG. 73C is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the first sub control board 160 are directly connected without going through the payout control board 170 and the main control board 156, and the launch control board 174 to the first sub control board 160. The launch intensity adjustment signal, the touch switch signal, the launch stop switch signal, the launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  According to the present example, even if some trouble occurs in the payout control board 170 and the main control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 174, the first control is used instead. In some cases, the secondary control board 160 can acquire various signals from the launch control board 174 and can perform stable game control.

  Note that the first sub-control unit 400 may be able to receive signals related to launching in both the first route and the second route. Further, a command from the main control unit 300 may be input to the first route, and a direct input from the firing control unit 630 may be input to the second route. Further, the command from the main control unit 300 may be a command based on serial communication with the payout control unit 600, or may be a direct input from the launch control unit 630 different from the second route. The signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first route and the second route, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first route and the second route. One may be a firing intensity state signal, and the other may be a firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  FIG. 74A is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174 are connected by a plurality of communication lines (for example, parallel signal lines), and a launch intensity adjustment signal, a touch switch signal, and a launch stop switch are connected via each communication line. Signals, firing intensity changeover switch signals, firing solenoid signals, etc. can be individually input / output.

  In this example, the firing control board 174 and the payout control board 170 are unidirectionally communicated, and a fire permission signal or the like can be output from the launch control board 174 to the payout control board 170. Furthermore, in this example, the main control board 156 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 942 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the main control board 156 is also connected to the game ball lending apparatus connection terminal plate 942. In the same manner as the above, a firing intensity adjustment signal, a touch switch signal, a firing stop switch signal, a firing intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  FIG. 74B is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, in addition to the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174, the launch unit 940 and the payout control board 170 are also connected by a plurality of communication lines, and the launch intensity adjustment signal, touch switch signal, launch stop switch signal, launch An intensity changeover switch signal, a launch solenoid signal, and the like can be directly output from the launch unit 940 to the payout control board 170.

  According to the present example, even if a certain problem occurs in the launch control board 174, the payout control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the launch control board 174, but instead the launch unit. Various signals can be acquired directly from 940, and stable game control may be performed in some cases.

  In the case where the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal are directly output from the launch unit 940 to the payout control board 170, the launch permission signal can be output to the launch control board 174 in consideration of these signals. In some cases, the circuit configuration of the launch control board 174 can be simplified.

  <Outline of payout control microcomputer>

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A illustrates main terminals provided in the payout control microcomputer 770.

  The payout control microcomputer (hereinafter also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 770 includes two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1, two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1, and data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. , And is configured. The parallel output port POP0 can output serial communication transmission signals with chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / XCS1, PO02 / XCS2, PO03 / XCS3, PO04 / XCS4, PO05 / XCSE capable of outputting a chip select signal. Output terminal PO06 / TX. The parallel output port POP1 includes general-purpose output terminals PO10 to PO16.

  The parallel input port PIP0 includes general-purpose input terminals PI00 to PI07. The parallel input port PIP1 includes a general-purpose input terminal PI10, an input terminal PI11 / XINT that can also be used as an external interrupt input terminal, and a non-maskable interrupt. An input terminal PI12 / XNMI that can also be used as an input terminal and an input terminal PI13 / RX that can receive a reception signal of serial communication are configured. Note that a terminal indicated by “/” indicates that it is a function shared terminal, and a function can be selected by setting a value in the program management area of the built-in ROM. For example, the PO01 / XCS1 terminal is a terminal that can select either a function of an output port or a chip select output to an external device.

  FIG. 75B is a diagram (partially extracted) showing the connection between the payout control microcomputer 770 and the external device (IC). In this example, the data signal output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control microcomputer 770 are connected to three IC1, IC2, and IC3, respectively, and the chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0 are connected to IC1 having eight input / output terminals. The chip select output terminals PO01 / XCS1 are connected to an IC2 having 8 input / output terminals, and the chip select output terminals PO02 / XCS2 are connected to an IC3 having 8 input / output terminals.

  In this example, when 8-bit data is input from IC1, IC1 is selected by outputting a low level signal to chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, and then from data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Enter the data. Also, when outputting 8-bit data to IC2, IC2 is selected by outputting a low level signal to chip select output terminal PO01 / XCS1, and then data is input from data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output. Further, when outputting 8-bit data to IC3, the IC3 is selected by outputting a low level signal to the chip select output terminal PO02 / XCS2, and then the data is input from the data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output.

In this example, an example is shown in which the chip select inputs of IC1 to IC3 are low active. However, when the chip select inputs of IC1 to IC3 are high active, chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / What is necessary is just to invert the logic of the signal output from XCS1, PO02 / XCS2.
<Main command>

  Next, a main command transmitted from the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) to the first sub control unit 400 (first sub control board 160) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 shows an example of the main command.

  The main command in this example consists of 16-bit data, and is classified into an 8-bit upper command and an 8-bit lower command. Bits 6 to 4 of the upper command are fixed data representing a group of main commands. For example, the main command is assigned to a group such as a command related to a gaming state such as a power-on command, a special figure holding ball number command, or a device command. being classified. In addition, bits 3 to 0 of the upper command are data for identifying commands in the same group. Note that bit 7 (most significant bit) of the command is an area in which the value of STB (strobe information) is stored. When the value of STB (strobe information) is on, it indicates that the main command is set. Show.

  Bits 7 to 0 of the lower command are variable data representing parameters (number, type, state, number of times, various flags, etc.) of each command. For example, in the lower command of the special figure hold number command 1, a numerical value indicating the number of the special figure 1 hold balls is stored as the parameter of the command, and in the lower command of the device command 1-1, as the parameter of the command, A payout control communication abnormality detection state, a panel surface switch level abnormality detection state, an external clock abnormality detection state, an impact, a magnetic abnormality detection state, and a magnetic field abnormality detection state are stored.

Further, for example, the special figure fluctuation stop command is a command transmitted when the special figure fluctuation is stopped, and the launch position command is a command transmitted after a fixed wait time (for example, 600 ms) after the special figure is stopped. is there. The main control unit 300 changes the gaming state after the fixed wait time elapses. For example, the electric support ends at the timing, and the right-handed indicator lamp 224 is also turned off at the timing. The other command parameters are as shown in the figure.
<External terminal board signal>

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, the external terminal board signal output to the outside through the above-described external terminal board 609 will be described. 77 is a diagram showing a connection example of the main board 156, the payout board 170, the external terminal board 609, and the external device (hall computer) 670. FIG. 78 (a) shows an external output from the main board 156. FIG. 78B is a diagram showing an example of the terminal board signal, and FIG. 78B is a diagram showing an example of the external terminal board signal output from the payout board 170.
<External terminal board signals 3 to 10>

  The main board 156 is configured to be capable of outputting eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 shown in FIG. The external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is a signal that outputs a voltage of a predetermined level (for example, high level) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) when power is turned on or when an abnormality is detected. Here, “when power is turned on”, which is the output start condition of the security information signal, means that the low voltage signal input to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300 is turned off (from the main control unit 660 to the main control). When the activation time of the first sub-control unit 400 has elapsed after the voltage value of the power source supplied to the unit 300 reaches a predetermined value (9V) (sub-control unit activation counted by the main control unit 300) An example is when the wait counter becomes 0).

  Also, “when abnormality is detected” which is a security information signal output start condition is an error related to winning (for example, a magnetic abnormality error, An example is a case where an abnormality (abnormal error) or an abnormality relating to a switch (for example, a switch level abnormality error or a switch disconnection error) is detected.

  The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) is a signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signals 5 to 8 (big hit information 1 to 4 signals) It is a signal indicating information related to the game success / failure determination result, and the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) is a signal indicating information regarding the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232). The external terminal board signal 3 (design fixed number information signal) is a signal indicating information related to the symbol variation of the ordinary diagram or special diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 77, eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 pass through the payout board 170 and the external terminal board 609 to the external device 670. The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in (for example, a hall computer). Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the main board 157 has. In this example, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 are output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156, but information corresponding to the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 is described above. A control command may be output from the main board 156 to the payout board 170 via the output interface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the main control unit 300 provides a storage area for external output signal information of 1 byte length in the RAM 308. Bits 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the plate signals 3 to 10 is assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 10000000B (B is a binary number), the security information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 10 is 1, the symbol fixed number information corresponding to the other external terminal board signals 3 to 9, the start The mouth information, jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information are 0.
<External terminal board signals 1 and 2>

  The payout board 170 is configured to be able to output eight types of external terminal board signals 1 to 2, a CR gaming machine READY signal, a CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and payout error LEDs 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 78 (b). . The external terminal board signal 1 (payout signal) is a signal indicating the number of paid out game balls (payout completion number) (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signal 2 (door open signal) is the opening of the front frame door 106. The CR game machine READY signal is a signal indicating whether or not a game is possible, and the CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal, which will be described later. The signal is a signal indicating a lighting / extinguishing state of a payout notification LED described later.

  As shown in FIG. 77, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are sent via an external terminal board 609 to an external device 670 (for example, a hall). The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in the computer. Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the payout board 170 has.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the payout control unit 600 has a storage area for external output signal information having a 1-byte length in the RAM, and Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the board signals 1 to 2, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the payout error LED 1 to 4 signals are respectively assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 00000001B (B is a binary number), the payout information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 1 is 1, the door opening information corresponding to the other external terminal board signal 2, the CR gaming machine READY The information corresponding to the signal, the information corresponding to the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the information corresponding to the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 are 0.
<Other connection example of external terminal board signal>

  Next, another connection example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79A shows a connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are information included in the external device 670 via the main board 156 and the external terminal board 609. Input to the input circuit 350. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. It is. Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Thus, the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670, and information relating to the number of game media payouts can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

  FIG. 79B shows a connection example in which both the main board 156 and the payout board 170 are directly connected to the external terminal board 609. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are externally transmitted via the external terminal board 609 (without the main board 156). The information is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the device 670. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. In addition, even when some abnormality occurs in the main board 156, it is possible to output two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 without passing through the main board 156.

  Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Can output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670, and output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670 due to an abnormality of the main board 156. Even if the payout board 170 is operating normally, the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) can be output from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 if the payout board 170 is operating normally. Can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

  <Processing of command transmitted from main control unit to payout control unit>

  FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram illustrating processing of a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in the figure, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are electrically connected via a serial communication line, and when the command transmission condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 sets the payout control unit 600. A predetermined command is transmitted to The payout control unit 600 temporarily stores the received command (before analyzing the command) in a storage unit (for example, a CPU core register or a RAM), and a process for analyzing the command stored in the storage unit And at least do.

  That is, as shown in the figure, when a plurality of commands (command 1, command 2) are transmitted from the main control unit 300 that performs the first process to the payout control unit 600 that performs the second process, Both of the commands 2 are stored in a RAM or the like, and then the stored commands 1 and 2 are analyzed. For example, command 2 is a normal command, but even if command 1 is an illegal command, any command is temporarily stored in the RAM or the like. Thereafter, command analysis processing is performed, the illegal command 1 is discarded, and the normal command 2 is not discarded, but processing corresponding to the command (second processing) is executed.

<Serial communication between main control unit and payout control unit>

  Referring to FIG. 81, serial communication between main control unit 300 and payout control unit 600 of pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 81 is a block diagram illustrating serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic block diagram of a serial communication circuit, and FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining registers relating to serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600. FIG. 81 (c) is a block diagram illustrating the flow of serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600.

  Referring to FIG. 1A, the pachinko machine 100 is for a main control unit microcomputer (microprocessor) 760 capable of executing at least game control and for a payout control unit capable of executing at least prize ball granting control. A microcomputer (microprocessor) 770 is included. The main control unit microcomputer 760 is mounted on the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300, and the payout control unit microcomputer 760 is a payout control board 170 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (what is the main control board 156? It is mounted on another board. The main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770 each include serial communication circuits 750 and 752 shown in FIG. 5B, and transmit and receive signals (for example, prize ball commands) by serial communication. be able to.

  The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes, for example, a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication registers. The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes a CPU core register 710 including general-purpose registers (A register 712, HL register (pair register) 714, other registers 716, etc.), ROM 306, RAM (buffer) 308, and the like.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes, for example, a status register 772, a reception data register 774, a transmission data register 776, and other registers 778 as serial communication registers.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes a CPU core register 720 including general-purpose registers (A register 722, HL register (pair register) 724, other registers 726, etc.) as general-purpose registers (storage areas), ROM 706, RAM (Buffer area) 708 and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, a RAM (buffer area) 708 is provided in a storage area (first storage area), and a CPU core register 720 is provided in another storage area (second storage area). And a reception data register 774 and a transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are provided in the other storage area (third storage area).

  The reception data register 764 and the transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 may be a single transmission / reception data register. Further, the reception data register 774 and the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 may be one transmission / reception data register.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 have four-channel (Ch0, Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3) circuits. All channels are functionally independent, and there are channels that can transmit and receive by having a transmitter and a receiver, and channels that can only transmit by having only a transmitter. For serial communication between the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770, a channel (Ch0) capable of transmission and reception is used. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 operate in the FIFO mode. 64 bytes for transmission and 8 bytes for reception can be used as a FIFO.

  For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 performs data transmission, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760 to indicate that “transmission is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 766. The serial communication circuit 750 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 766.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 774 of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770. The CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the received data register 774 when “reception completed”.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 performs data transmission, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770 to indicate that “send is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 776. The serial communication circuit 752 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 776.

  For example, when the main controller microcomputer 760 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 764 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main controller microcomputer 760. The CPU of the main control unit 300 reads the reception data from the reception data register 764 when “reception is completed” with reference to the status register.

  Further, when transmitting data, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can detect the transmission state (data transmission completion, etc.) with reference to the status registers 762 and 772 of the serial communication circuits 750 and 752. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 refer to the status registers 762 and 772 when receiving data, and read data from the reception data registers 764 and 774 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, by referring to the status registers 762 and 772, whether there is data in which noise is detected in the received data, whether there is data including a break code, a framing error, and a parity error, or overrun detection The presence or absence can be confirmed.

  In this way, for example, a command transmitted from the main control unit microcomputer 760 is written in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 and is used for various calculation processes and determination processes. After being stored in the CPU core register 712 of the computer 770, it is stored in the RAM (buffer) 708. As will be described later, the command received by the payout control unit 600 is temporarily stored in a RAM (buffer) 708 before the command analysis process. Thus, by storing the received command in the buffer in preference to the command analysis process, the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the RAM 708 or the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the CPU core register 712. Since it is possible to reduce the period during which the command is played, it is possible to reduce the situation where commands are scattered in each register, and thus it may be possible to stabilize game control.

  With reference to FIG. 81 (c), the flow of serial communication processing of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described. First, a first communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (1). The payout control unit 600 receives a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (2). Upon receipt of the main control communication confirmation command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a second communication confirmation command (a response command to the first communication confirmation command, a payout control communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 (3). . Receiving the payout control communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 transmits a command (for example, a prize ball command here) to the payout control unit 600 (4).

  Processes (1) to (3) are in a communication confirmation state. In this state, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a command to the payout control unit 600. When the process (3) is completed, the communication confirmation is completed, and the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600 in this state. For example, considering the influence of noise and the like, the process (1) is performed a plurality of times, and a communication error state is set when a command indicating completion of communication confirmation of the process (3) is not obtained a predetermined number of times. Even when this communication error occurs, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600. Further, in order to notify an error, a signal is output to a device connected to the outside. Note that signal output to an externally connected device may not be performed.

  The process (1) is executed once every predetermined number of interrupt processes, for example, once during the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 25 times (50 times,...). Process (2) and process (3) may be executed by the same interrupt process, or may be executed by different interrupt processes. Further, the control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted by the same interrupt process as the process (3). The control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted only when there is a change (for example, when the state changes from a normal state to an abnormal state (in the case of an error)).

  The payout control unit 600 can execute at least a process related to awarding when the first command (prize ball command) is stored in the first storage means (such as the reception data register 774). When the second command (main control communication confirmation command) is stored in the first storage means, the third command (payout control communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command response command) is sent to the main control unit 300. ) Can be executed at least (this will be described in detail later).

  The reception data register 764 and transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the reception data register 774 and transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are limited in size, and the CPU core When data is transmitted / received to / from the registers 712 and 722 and the RAMs 308 and 708, data leakage may occur when a condition such as an abnormality occurs, for example.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating power control according to the present embodiment. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the operation state of each control unit in accordance with the timing of power supply cutoff and supply, and FIG. It is.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current and supplies it to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400. The payout control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub control unit 500. That is, when the power source rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the first sub control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the second sub control unit 500 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. Similarly, when the power supply rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the payout control unit 600 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. The power source may input AC 100V.

  As will be described later, the payout control unit 600 can receive a command and analyze the received command during a period from when the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state until the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state. You can also Also, the payout control unit 600 can set the number of prize balls, but the payout process is not executed. Thereafter, when the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 is received by the payout control unit 600 after the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state, the set number of prize balls (not intended) It may be erased (as a prize ball command sent at timing). In addition, when the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state (and after the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state), a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Process as a normal command.

  Here, based on the content described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game machine is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like in a big hit state, when the game table is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player becomes extremely disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a situation, a power interruption process (to be described later) is executed to maintain the state of the game machine with the electric power stored in the capacitor. This power interruption process is executed not only when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as “power off”) but also when the supply voltage is temporarily reduced due to a cause such as static electricity (hereinafter referred to as an instantaneous power interruption). The FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the operation during power interruption.

  When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not immediately become 0, but the supply voltage gradually drops due to the electric power stored in the capacitor. For example, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (9.66 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. By receiving this signal, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred by a main process (described later) of the main control unit 300, and a power interruption process is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the main control unit 300 is a power-off release state from the occurrence of power interruption until the supply voltage drops to 9.66 V. After the voltage drops below 9.66V, the power is turned off. The power-off state here means a state in which the voltage is lower than a predetermined value and a low-voltage signal to be described later is turned on, and does not mean a state in which the power source is actually cut off. .

  Similarly, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (8.3 V in this embodiment), the payout control unit 600 determines that a power interruption has occurred, and executes a power interruption process. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the dispensing control unit 600 is a power-off release state from when the power interruption occurs until the supply voltage drops to 8.3 V. After the voltage drops below 8.3V, the power is turned off.

Each of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is provided with a start signal output circuit (described later) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. For example, in the main control unit 300, when the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 receives the input of the activation signal, the main control unit main process is started according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in a reset start (reset release state) by a reset interrupt. Execute. The same applies to the payout control unit 600. When the supply voltage of 12V falls below a predetermined voltage, the reset state is entered, and the system waits until the power-off state is released.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the like. . Further, 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set as an initial value of a communication confirmation command to be described later.

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). ) Proceeds to step S107. Even if the predetermined value (9.66 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S105, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S115).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not.

  If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S109 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the subsequent processing is performed. Proceed to step S111 to delay. If the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S115.

  In step S109, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S109, power-on information (recovery command) is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. The power-on information is set to 00H when the power is turned on by initial activation, and is set to 01H when the power is turned on by return activation. That is, in step S109, a value (01H) indicating return activation is set as the power-on information. In step S111, a delay process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this delay processing, processing for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. In this example, power-on information is set in the process of step S109 prior to the delay process (step S111). Thereby, referring to the power-on information, it can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 side whether it is an initial activation or a return activation. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the delay process (step S111) may be executed earlier than the power recovery process (step S109).

  In step S113, time measurement by the WDT 314 is started. In step S115, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S115) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S117, the same delay process as in step S111 is executed (details will be described later). In step S119, the operation permission to the WDT 314 and the initial value are set. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value, and an initial value (for example, 11111111B (FFH (H indicates that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number) is set in the mask information provided in the RAM 308. The same shall apply hereinafter))). The activation permission to the WDT 314 may be performed in the above step S101. In this case, the WDT 314 may be cleared and restarted in step 119.

  In step S121, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. In step S121, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

In step S123, command transmission processing is performed. In this command transmission process, a process of transmitting the command (the above-mentioned main command) set in the transmission information storage area in step S233 described later to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The above-described STB (strobe information) is turned on and off in this process. Here, the main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S121 and S123 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S131, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 is executed. In step S133, a sub-control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle of waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set). In step S135, the interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S137, a basic random number initial value update process is executed (details will be described later). In step S137, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, a basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed. In step S139, command transmission processing is performed, whereby various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S141, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S137. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limit counter in step S135 and is subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second elapses, the process proceeds to step S143.

In step S143, the sub-control unit activation waiting counter is decremented by 1. In step S145, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S135. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, that is, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S133 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S147. In step S147, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  The WDT 314 may be cleared and restarted not at the timer interrupt process but at the beginning of the loop process in the main process (for example, before execution of step S121).

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. Further, when a firing intensity state signal or a firing intensity changeover switch signal is input without going through the payout control means, the input / output may be detected in the process of step S205.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes in steps S215 to S235.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON. If the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S215.

  In step S215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S216, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this winning acceptance process, whether or not there is a winning at the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the ordinary drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. If there is a prize, the corresponding number of prize balls is stored in the RAM 308 in a prize ball number storage area provided for each prize opening and start opening. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (ordinary symbol A) or the off symbol (general symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, a special figure prefetch control process is performed. In this special figure prefetch control process, prefetch such as a special figure winning random number is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on FIG. I, when the second off flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to have the respective modes of the special figure I, and the setting area of the RAM 308 Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area, which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S232, device monitoring processing is executed. Although details will be described later, in this device monitoring processing, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command output request to the first sub-control unit 400 has occurred by referring to the output request information area. When a command output request has occurred, processing for setting the corresponding main command in the transmission information storage area is performed. For example, when the main command is the special figure reserved ball number command 1, information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number is acquired from a predetermined area of the RAM 308 and a lower command indicating the information (for example, when the reserved ball number is three) "00000011") and a high-order command indicating that it is the special figure reservation ball number command 1 is set in the transmission information storage area.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the higher level command included in the received main command makes it possible to determine the production control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and information on the lower level command included in the main command Based on the above, it becomes possible to determine detailed contents of the effect control.

  In step S234, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the above-described various status display units 328 (general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, round lamp 223, state On / off control of the indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224) is performed.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this external output signal setting process, a process of outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be output to the external terminal board 609 without going through the payout board 170.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Prize acceptance process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the winning acceptance process (step S217) in the main control timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning acceptance process, and FIG. 4B shows a configuration example of the winning ball number storage areas 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting opening. FIG.

  In step S151, the result of determination as to whether or not the winning determination pattern information in step S203 (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, the previous detection signal is present, and the current detection signal is present) is used. When it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the general prize opening 226, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232, the ordinary figure start opening 228, and the variable prize opening 234 In step S152, if there is no winning, the process ends. In step S152, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball number storage area 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting port is stored, and various random values are acquired as necessary.

  For example, when there is a winning at the general winning opening 226, the general winning opening 226 is stored in the general winning opening winning ball number storage area 308d of a predetermined byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the general winning opening 226. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 10) is stored. Further, when a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of first special figure starting port prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is stored in the storage area 308b. Further, when the reserved number storage area corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as the special figure 1 winning random number value and A value is acquired as a special figure 1 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232, the number of second special figure starting port winning balls corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is stored in the storage area 308c. If the reserved number storage area corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as a special figure 2 winning random number value and A value is obtained as a special figure 2 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Also, if there is a winning at the general chart start opening 228 and the reserved number storage area corresponding to the general chart start opening 228 is not full, the value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value is displayed. Obtained as a random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the predetermined winning byte storage area 308a for a predetermined winning byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the variable winning opening 234. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 15) is stored.

Note that the number of winning prize openings and start openings is not limited to the example of the present embodiment. For example, when a plurality of variable prize winning openings are provided, the same processing as the above processing is performed for each variable winning prize opening. Just do. In addition, the ball detection sensor may be provided for each winning a prize opening or one starting opening, or may be provided for each of a plurality of winning prize openings or a plurality of starting openings. For example, in the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided, but a ball detection sensor may be provided for each of the general winning ports 226, or one ball detection sensor is provided for the plurality of general winning ports 226. May be. In addition, when a ball detection sensor is provided for each of a plurality of winning ports or a plurality of starting ports, a winning ball number storage area may be provided for each of the plurality of winning ports or each of a plurality of starting ports. The prize ball number storage area may be an area larger than 1 byte length (0 to 15), for example, an area of 2 bytes length (0 to 255).
<Serial command management processing>

  Next, the serial command management process (step S219) in the above-described main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command management processing.

  As described above, in this serial command management process, when it is determined in step S212 that the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0 (when the timer interrupt function is limited), or in step S214, the specific abnormality is detected. This process is not executed when it is determined that the detection flag is ON (when there is specific abnormality information such as a magnetic abnormality error or a magnetic field abnormality error). The serial command management process may be executed when the timer interrupt function is limited, and the serial command management process may be executed when there is specific abnormality information. May be.

In step S155 of the serial command management process, a serial command reception process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command reception process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout control unit 600. When a command is received, a process corresponding to the command is performed. In step S156, serial command transmission processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command transmission process, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 is performed.
<Serial command reception processing>

  Next, the serial command reception process (step S155) in the serial command management process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command reception processing.

  In step S156, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the payout control unit 600 with reference to a specific bit (received data full flag) in the status register 762 of the main control unit microcomputer 760, and the command has not been received. If the command is received, the process proceeds to step S157. The reception data full flag is set when there is data in the reception data register 764. In step S157, the received command is acquired and stored in an internal register or RAM. In step S158, it is determined whether the stored command is normal. Here, in step S158, it is determined whether or not the command is normal based on whether or not the upper byte (command code) of the received command is within the numerical value range of the command code stored in advance. As a result of the determination, if the command is normal, the process proceeds to a command analysis process (details will be described later) in step S159. If the command is not normal, the process ends without performing the command analysis process.

  <Serial command reception processing / command analysis processing>

  Next, the command analysis process (step S159) in the serial command reception process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of command analysis processing.

  In step S160, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, various types of information are initialized by executing the processing in subsequent steps S161 to S163, If the command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S164.

  In step S161, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status stored in the RAM 308. In the next step S162, an initial value (in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter stored in the RAM 308. Then, 10) is set. Here, the serial command status is information indicating whether or not a prize ball command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value of 0, the prize command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted.

  The communication confirmation command transmission counter is a counter that is decremented by one every time a communication confirmation command is transmitted once in step S177 of the serial command transmission process described later, and the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is normal. It is used to determine whether or not it has been received. When 10 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission command, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 in step S178 of serial command transmission processing described later. This is when the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 has not been received even once during the period of 10 transmissions.

  In step S163, the serial command communication error flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to 0, and the process ends. Here, the serial command communication error flag is information indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in serial communication. When the information is a numerical value of 0, it indicates that serial communication is normal. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in serial communication.

  In step S164, it is determined whether or not a prize ball signal output request command is received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, the process proceeds to the subsequent step S165 to set 1 to the number of prize ball signal output requests. After the addition, the process is terminated, and if the command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S166.

  In step S166, the status (device information) corresponding to the received command is updated, and in the next step S167, it is determined whether or not the status (device information) has changed. If the status (device information) has changed as a result of the determination, the process proceeds to step S168, the processing is terminated after setting the corresponding main command output request, and the status (device information) has not changed. Ends the process without performing the process of step S168.

Here, in step S166, for example, when device command 1 (see FIGS. 102 and 103) is received from the payout control unit 600, first, the information stored in the device information 1 provided in the RAM 308 is changed to the previous time. Information is stored in a CPU core register (for example, C register). Next, the device information 1 (see FIG. 92B) provided in the RAM 308 is updated corresponding to the payout number switch error state, the illegal payout error state, and the payout excess error state included in the device command 1. In step S167, the CPU core register value is compared with the updated device information 1 to determine whether or not the status has changed. The same processing is performed for the other device commands 2 to 4, and the device information 2 to 4 (see FIG. 92B) provided in the RAM 308 corresponding to the device commands 2 to 4 are updated.
<Serial command transmission processing>

  Next, serial command transmission processing will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing, and FIG. 2B is an example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600.

  In step S171, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S172, whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 (a predetermined time after transmitting the communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600). (In this embodiment, whether or not 100 ms has elapsed) is determined, and if 0 (when a predetermined time has elapsed), the processing from step S174 is performed, and if other than 0 (the predetermined time has elapsed) If so, the process proceeds to step S173. In step S173, a prize ball command setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize ball command setting process, a prize ball command transmission preparation process is executed when a prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied.

  In step S174, an initial value (25 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S175, 1 (a state in which a prize ball command cannot be transmitted) is set in the serial command status. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a counter that is decremented by 1 every main control unit timer interrupt processing cycle (about 4 ms in this embodiment) in step S171, and transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600. Then, it is used to determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed. When 25 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is determined to be 0 in step S172 after about 100 ms (= 4 ms × 25) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the serial command status is set to 1 in step S175, so that the prize control command cannot be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command. However, it may be configured such that a prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing.

  In step S176, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to a communication confirmation command (described later) in the transmission data register. In step S177, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In the next step S178, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 (whether the communication confirmation command has been transmitted 10 times) or not. In the case (when transmitted 10 times), the processing from step S179 is performed, and when it is other than 0 (when not transmitted 10 times), the process proceeds to step S181.

  In step S179, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In next step S180, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status, and then the process proceeds to step S181. . In step S181, after the other serial command transmission process is performed, the process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600 the main control communication confirmation command at initial startup (value is 10H), and the main control communication confirmation at return startup. Command (value is 11H), prize ball command (value is 23H) for instructing to pay out 3 game balls, value ball command (value is 2AH) to instruct to pay out 10 game balls, 15 balls A prize ball command (value is 2FH) for instructing to pay out a game ball. When the first command received from the main control unit 300 is a main control communication confirmation command (value is 11H) at the time of return activation, a return process is performed, and a main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H at the time of initial activation). ), A RAM clear process or the like is performed. As described above, when transmitting the communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 always considers the power-on information, adds the value (10H) indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information, and transmits the result. The value indicating the power-on information is 00H at initial startup and 01H at return startup. As a result, the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of initial activation is 10H, and the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of return activation is 11H. The value indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information may be added each time the communication confirmation command is transmitted, may be added only for the first time, or the communication confirmation command is transmitted a predetermined number of times. It may be added each time.

In the present embodiment, the value (00H) indicating the power-on information set in the main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) and the power recovery process (step S109) of the main control unit main process in step S176 described above. Or a value obtained by adding (01H) to the transmission data register and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. The main control communication confirmation command is transmitted at a timing of once every 100 ms as an example.
<Prize ball command setting process>

  Next, the prize ball command setting process (step S173) in the above-described serial command transmission process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of a prize ball command setting process.

  In step S191, it is determined whether or not the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S192. If not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S198. Here, “when the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied” means that in the above-described winning acceptance process (step S216), the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary figure starting port 228, Or, it is determined that there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234 and the serial command status indicates 0 (a state in which a winning ball command can be transmitted).

  In step S192, the above-mentioned variable prize opening prize ball number storage area 308a, first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, second special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308c, and general winning opening The number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308d is updated. In the present embodiment, every time the winning ball command setting process is executed (each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed once), the variable winning prize winning ball number storage area 308a → the first special figure starting port. Award ball number storage area 308b → second special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308c → general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d In order of each prize ball number storage area, the number of winning balls It is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the storage area is 1 or more. When the number of prize balls is 1 or more, the prize ball number is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of prize balls, and the prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d being referred to is designated as the prize ball command. Get from table.

  In step S193, a numerical value corresponding to the prize ball command acquired in step S192 is set in the transmission data register, so that the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

  91A to 91C are diagrams showing an example of changes in the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d. FIG. 91D shows an example of the prize ball command table. FIG. In this example, in the Nth (N is a positive integer) prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is 2 (00000010B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 2 (00000010B) to 1 (00000001B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 1) th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 2) -th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Also, a general winning opening prize ball command (0AH) corresponding to the referenced general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is acquired from the winning ball command table shown in FIG. The prize ball command (0AH) for mouth is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  Although an example in which one prize ball number is subtracted by one prize ball command setting process is shown here, two or more prize balls may be subtracted by one prize ball command setting process. In this case, the number of winning balls of the same type of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted, or the number of winning balls of different types of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted. Further, the order of referring to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is not limited. For example, the prize ball number storage area 308a to 308d may be referred to first in descending order of the number of prize balls. You may refer previously from the opening | mouth 213 and the 2nd special figure starting opening | mouth 214). The number of prize ball commands transmitted in one prize ball command setting process is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  Returning to FIG. 90, in step S194, the values in the award ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are read, the values stored in the award ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are added, and the total number of award balls provided in the RAM 308 is obtained. Store in the storage area. In step S195, it is determined whether or not the value (total prize ball number) in the total prize ball number storage area calculated in step S194 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). If not, go to step S198.

  In step S196, 10 is subtracted from the value of the total number of winning balls, and in the next step S197, 1 is added to the number of output requests provided in the RAM 308, and then the process returns to step S195. In step S198, after other prize ball command setting processing is performed, the processing is terminated.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S195 that the total number of winning balls is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process returns to the determination in step S195 after performing the processing in steps S196 and S197. When the number of winning balls is 25, the processing of steps S196 and S197 is performed twice, and as a result, 2 is set as the number of output requests. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing. For example, after performing the processing of steps S196 and S197, the prize ball command setting process is once ended, and the remaining output in the next prize ball command setting process is performed. It is good also as a structure which adds the number of requests.

In such a configuration, in the previous example, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 25 to 15 in step S196, and in the subsequent step S197, the number of output requests is set to 1, and the next winning ball command setting processing step is performed. In S196, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 15 to 5, and in the subsequent step S197, 1 is set as the output request number.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, device monitoring processing (step S232) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92A is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing, and FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S251, the core register (C register in this example) used for temporary storage of status (device information) is initialized. Specifically, the C register is cleared and predetermined port information (port information corresponding to magnetic field detection, RAM clear switch signal, etc.) is set in the C register. In step S252, the C register is referenced to determine whether or not there is a specific abnormality (in this example, the magnetic field detection bit assigned to bit 0 of the C register is 1 or 0). If detected (when the magnetic field detection bit is 1), the process proceeds to step S253. On the other hand, when a specific abnormality is not detected (when the magnetic field detection bit is 0), the process proceeds to step S255. The “specific abnormality” determined in step S252 is not limited to the magnetic field detection, and one or more other abnormalities may be set as the specific abnormality.

  In step S254, the specific abnormality detection flag stored in the RAM 308 is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next step S255. Note that the specific abnormality detection flag is not necessarily used (bit 0 of a device error status described later may be used).

  In step S255, it is determined whether the serial command communication error flag is 1 or 0. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S256 to set 1 to a predetermined bit of the core register (C register), and then to step S257. move on. On the other hand, if the serial command communication error flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S257 without performing the process of step S256. As described above, the C register is used to set information on a predetermined port and various error information. Then, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the status as compared with a status for previously storing information (device error status) described later.

  In step S257, the signal states of various sensors are referred to. If there is any other abnormality, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the core register (C register), and the process proceeds to step S258. In step S258, the value of the core register (C register) is compared with the device error status stored in the RAM 308. If there is no change in the status, the process ends. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step S259. move on.

  In step S259, the value of the core register (C register) is overwritten on the previous information storage status (device error status), and then the device command 1-1 (main control is monitored) in the command setting transmission process (step S233). Predetermined transmission information indicating that device command transmission settings should be set is additionally stored in an output request information area, which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the process ends.

  Here, examples of errors monitored by the device monitoring process include a magnetic field abnormality error, a magnetic abnormality error, an impact sensor error, an external clock abnormality error, and a switch level abnormality error. In addition, the errors monitored on the payout control side are: tray full tank error (bottom pan full error), payout device error, payout excess error, incorrect payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit unconnected error , CR unit communication error, and the like.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout. The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is the payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180. The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of a payout number switch (not shown) of a game ball controlled by the payout control board 170, and when a connection abnormality of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board), a payout operation is performed. It will stop. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released. The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected. The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.
<External output signal setting process>

  Next, an external output signal setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S301, based on each information corresponding to the above-mentioned external output signal information (excluding payout schedule information, symbol fixed number information, start port information, jackpot information 1 to 4, and security information) Update the value. For example, when the security information is 1 and the other information is 0, the value of the external output signal information is updated to 10000000B.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of output requests is 1 or more, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S303, 1 is set in Bit 6 (payout schedule information) of the external output signal information. For example, in the previous example, the value of the external output signal information is updated from 10000000B to 11000000B. In step S304, 1 is subtracted from the number of output requests, and the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S307. In step S306, mask processing of external output information provided in the RAM 308 is performed.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining an example of masking processing of external output signal information in step S306. In this example, the value of the external output signal information before the mask processing is 1100010001B, that is, the security information, the payout schedule information, and the symbol determination frequency information are 1, the other jackpot information 1 to 4, and the start port information is 0. Is shown. Further, it is indicated that the value of the mask information used for the mask processing is 10000000B.

  Here, “mask information” is the same 1-byte length information as the external output signal information, and Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the mask information correspond to Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information, respectively. The mask process in step S306 is configured to compulsorily set (mask) a part of the external output signal information to 0 by calculating the logical product (AND) of the mask information and the external output signal information. Yes.

  The main control unit 300 sets the mask information to 11111111B (initial value) in the initial setting, but if it is determined that the specific abnormality detection flag is on in step S305 of the external output signal setting process (when there is specific abnormality information). Then, any one of bits 0 to 7 of the mask information is updated from 1 to 0. In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error or a magnetic field abnormality error has occurred, the mask information is set to 10000000B by updating Bits 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0 as shown in FIG. , Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are forcibly set to 0 (masked) by mask processing.

  Thereby, when 1 is set to any of Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information, that is, 1 is set to any one of the symbol determination number information, the start opening information, the jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information. Even when the information is set, all the information is masked (set) to 0, and a low level signal is output from the signal corresponding to each information.

  Returning to FIG. 93, in step S307, for example, processing for outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed based on the external output signal information. Specifically, when Bit 0 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 3 (design determination number information signal). The signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit information 1 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit information 2 signal) for a predetermined period (for example, , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When 1 is set in Bit 4 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 7 (big hit information 3 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When 1 is set in Bit 5 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 8 (big hit information 4 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) for a predetermined period (for example, For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. The “predetermined period (output time of each signal)” in this example is not limited to a period of 500 ms, and may be a period of less than 500 ms or a period of more than 500 ms.
<Variation 1 of external output signal setting processing>

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a first modification of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to Modification 1, the processes of steps S305, S401, and S402 are applied instead of the processes of steps S305 to S306 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S401 to perform the first masking process of the external output signal. Proceeding to S402, second mask processing of the external output signal is performed. In the first mask process, the same process as the mask process in step S306 is performed. In the second mask process, mask information (first mask information) different from the mask information (first mask information) used in the first mask process is used. Mask processing is performed using the second mask information. Here, in this embodiment, the first mask information is provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 and the contents can be rewritten. On the other hand, the second mask information is provided in the storage area of the ROM 306 and the contents can be rewritten. It is impossible.

  For example, in the first mask processing, the mask information is updated from 1111111B to 10000000B by updating Bit 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0, and Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are changed by the mask processing. Forcibly set to 0 (mask). On the other hand, in the second mask processing, the initial value 11111111B is used as it is as mask information, and Bits 0 to 7 of the external output signal information are not forcibly set (masked) by mask processing.

With such a configuration, mask processing can be used properly according to conditions (for example, depending on whether there is a specific abnormality), and an external signal suitable for the conditions may be output in some cases.
<Modification 2 of External Output Signal Setting Process>

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a second modification example of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to the second modification, the order of the process of step S305 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG. 93 and the process of steps S302 to S304 are switched.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306 to perform mask processing, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S302 and subsequent steps. It is configured.

With this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external signal can be prevented from being output (or the external signal is delayed). For example, when there is a specific abnormality May be able to prevent external signals from being output (or to delay external signals). For this reason, an external signal may be output at an appropriate timing.
<Discharge control microcomputer>

Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described in detail.
<Discharge control microcomputer / terminal arrangement>

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of the terminal arrangement of the payout control microcomputer 770. As described above, the payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1, and in this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP0 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP1 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. For example, in the case of FIG. 6A, for example, the terminal corresponding to the payout number switch signal of Bit0 is the PI00 terminal, and the terminal corresponding to the payout switch operation confirmation signal of Bit2 is the PI02 terminal. The same applies to the following. The payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1, and in this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel output port POP0 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of POP1 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 770 is connected to IC1 to IC3, and FIG. 9E corresponds to IC1, FIG. 9F corresponds to IC1, and FIG. Corresponds to IC3.

  <Details of payout control microcomputer / terminal arrangement / LED control>

  FIG. 98A is a diagram showing a data configuration of the output port 1 register for outputting the data of the parallel output port POP1, and FIG. 98B is an output pattern in the case of outputting via the 7SEG decoder. FIG. FIG. 98 (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and each segment of the LED.

  In this example, the output terminals POP10 to POP16 of the parallel output port POP1 are connected to each segment of the 7-segment LED, and the 7-segment LED is output via the output port 1 register for outputting the data of the parallel output port POP1. Turn on / off control of.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the output port 1 register of this example can select whether or not to control the LED through the built-in 7SEG decoding by setting bit 7 (7DEN). When bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 1, on / off of each of the output terminals POP10 to POP16 is individually controlled to control lighting / extinguishing of each segment of the LED. The correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and the LED segments is as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 0, the output pattern shown in FIG. 5B is output from the output terminals POP10 to POP16 (bit 6 to bit 0 of the output port 1 register) to the 7SEG decoder. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing control of the LED is performed via the 7SEG decoding.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relationship among an error name, LED display (LED lighting pattern), error display LED state, and payout display LED state. In this example, for example, when an error has not occurred, the number 0 is displayed using the LED, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned off. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the numbers 1 to 8 are displayed using LEDs according to the type of error, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned on or off according to the display pattern shown in FIG. Take control.

The error display LED and the payout LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, may be provided on a game board or a game frame that can be visually recognized by the player, and either one of them is provided as the payout control board. The other may be provided on the game board or the game frame. Further, a plurality of error display LEDs may be provided, the first error display LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, and the second error display LED may be provided on the game board or the game frame.
<Discharge control microcomputer / timer>

  FIG. 100A shows an example of a timer used by the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 stores a plurality of timers (software timers) shown in FIG. 5A in the RAM 708, and these timers are periodically updated in a timer update process of a payout control unit interrupt process described later ( It is configured to count up or count down). In addition, the numerical value described in the item of “timer value (ms)” indicates the time measured by each timer. For example, the CR unit connection signal monitoring timer is used to measure 2 seconds (= 2000 ms). Indicates that it is a timer.

  <Discharge control microcomputer / signal state storage unit>

  FIG. 100B is a diagram showing a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 of the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 is provided with a signal state storage area for storing various states shown in FIG. 5B in a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 (in this example, the range of addresses F051h to F056h).

  <Discharge control microcomputer / detectable error>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770. FIG. 101 (b) shows a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. It is the figure which showed the combination.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 can output errors of various devices detected in the device monitoring process (step S232) to the payout control unit 600. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 770 is similar to the main control unit 300. , Tray full tank error (bottom plate full tank error), dispensing device error, excessive dispensing error, unauthorized dispensing error, dispensing number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit disconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error error, external It is possible to detect clock error errors, magnetic field error errors, switch level error errors, frame opening errors (front frame door opening errors), switch disconnection errors, impact sensor errors, and so on. In addition to these errors, the payout control microcomputer 770 can also detect a main control communication error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example). .

  <Discharge control microcomputer / Discharge control command>

  Next, a payout control command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 (payout control board 170) to the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a payout control command, and FIG. 103 shows an example (a) of transmission command output request information used when executing a send command process to be described later and some payout control commands. It is the figure (b-e) which showed the data structure of these.

  Commands received by the payout control unit 600 from the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation command (sometimes referred to as a “main control communication confirmation command”) and a prize ball number command (sometimes referred to as a “prize ball command”). is there. These received commands are analyzed in a command analysis process (step S309) of a payout control unit main process described later, and a process corresponding to each command is executed.

  The main control communication confirmation command is a command indicating a communication state between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and an activation method (initial activation or return activation) of the main control unit 300. The prize ball command is a command indicating the payout of game balls for the designated number of prize balls.

  Commands that the payout control unit 600 transmits to the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation return command, a prize ball signal output request command, device commands 1 to 4, and a prize ball payout operation state command. These transmission commands are transmitted to the main control unit 300 in a transmission command process (step S311) of a payout control unit main process described later. The main control unit 300 analyzes these commands in the command analysis process (step S159) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described above, and executes a process corresponding to each command.

  The communication confirmation return command (sometimes referred to as “communication confirmation command”) is a command indicating that a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 has been received. The prize ball signal output request command is a command for instructing output of a prize ball signal to the trial test signal terminal. Device commands 1 to 4 are commands indicating various states of the device, and the data structure thereof is as shown in FIG. The prize ball payout operation state command is a command indicating the operation state of the prize ball payout.

In this example, the information of the above-described launch intensity state signal (turbo switch signal) is transmitted as the device command 4 (set to bit 1) from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, and the above-described touch switch signal The information is transmitted as the device command 4 from the payout control unit 600 (set to bit 0) to the main control unit 300. In this example, the firing intensity state signal and the touch switch signal are configured to be transmitted with the same device command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the device may be configured to transmit with a different device command. In addition, the launch intensity status signal (including the touch switch signal) may be configured to be transmitted by the same device command as other signals, and a device command different from a predetermined signal (for example, CR unit unconnected error). A combination of the device commands 1 to 4 and various states is possible as appropriate. The type of device command is not limited to 1 to 4.
<Discharge control microcomputer / RAM>

  Next, the configuration of a RAM (buffer area) 708 that is a storage area of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of items stored in each storage area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing storage areas provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the initialization timing of the storage areas.

  The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 store the gaming state at the time of power interruption in the RAMs 308 and 708 by power-off processing in order to restore the gaming state at the time of power interruption / power recovery (for example, at the time of power failure recovery) The contents of the RAM are held by a backup power source.

  As a configuration of the backup function of the pachinko machine 100, although not shown, a backup power supply unit, a power supply monitoring circuit, and a RAM clear switch are provided. The RAM clear switch initializes the backed up RAM data.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is provided with a first area 708A from a small address (here 7F00H) to an address 7F0DH and a second area 708B from an address 7F0EH to an address 7FFFH. It has been. The first area 708A is further divided into a plurality of storage areas, and stores, for example, the number of prize balls, the number of game balls, game information, an error state, an unsent command, a program activation state flag, and power state information. On the other hand, the second area 708B is divided into a setting pointer storage area, an analysis pointer storage area, a reception command buffer area, and the like. The reception command buffer area is an area for storing received commands, and the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area are areas for storing pointers used for storage processing of received commands. The setting pointer storage area, the analysis pointer storage area, and the reception command buffer area will be described later.

  The first area 708A is an area where stored information is saved (backed up) when the power is turned off, and the second area 708B is an area initialized immediately after the power is turned on. For example, in an initialization process in which the power interruption is not detected (for example, step S115 in FIG. 83), all of these storage areas are initialized (cleared), and a power recovery process at the time of recovery start (step S109 in FIG. 83). ) Initialize (clear) only some of them. That is, in the initialization process, the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared, but when power interruption occurs, only the information in the first area 708A is backed up. In the subsequent power recovery process, the information backed up in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 is restored (set) in the first area, and only the second area 708B is cleared. Thus, there are a plurality of timings for clearing the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and there are a plurality of areas to be cleared (first area 708A, second area 708B). Further, the second area 702B may be cleared even when the payout control unit 600 is activated to return, and is not backed up even when a power interruption occurs. In other words, the area for storing received commands (reception command buffer area), the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area (values of each pointer) used for the storage processing may be cleared even at the time of return start. It becomes an area that is not backed up when power is cut off. By adopting such a configuration, the second area is cleared immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 regardless of whether the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated or when the return control is started. In some cases, a prize ball command or the like can be prevented from being transmitted to the payout control unit 600 at an unintended timing.

  Although illustration is omitted here, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 may have the same configuration. That is, it may have a first area that is backed up when a power interruption occurs and a second area that is cleared by a subsequent power recovery process. Information stored in the first area of the main control unit 300 includes, for example, a big hit state (including the number of rounds), a high probability / short time state, a random number value of a reserved memory (special symbol, normal symbol), an error state, an unresolved state, etc. The transmission command, the operation state of the movable member (ordinary electric accessory, first type special electric accessory), and the like. In addition, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, only the information stored in the first area may be backed up when a power interruption occurs.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the initialization timing for the first area and the second area of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, a plurality of timings for initializing the RAM 708 are provided. In the figure, the first timing is the timing immediately after each of the payout control units 600 is turned on, and the second timing is the timing of the main control communication confirmation command reception process. The timing immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 will be described later (FIG. 106, etc.).

(1) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated

  In this case, both the first area 708A and the second area 708B are initialized at the first timing, and neither the first area 708A nor the second area 708B is initialized at the second timing. .

(2) When the main control unit 300 is a return start and the payout control unit 600 is an initial start or the like, it is the same as (1).

(3) When the main control unit 300 is initially activated and the payout control unit 600 is reactivated

  In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and only the first area 708A is initialized at the second timing.

(4) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are restarted

In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and no area is initialized at the second timing.
<Payment control unit main process>

  The payout control unit 600 includes a CPU, a RAM 708, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. These CPU, RAM 708, ROM, and I / O port are constituted by a single microcomputer (dispensing control microcomputer). In addition, the payout control microcomputer may have the same function as the main control microcomputer in this specification, and may not include a part of the function (for example, a random number circuit). Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the payout control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600). When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

  A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the reception of this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process. In this embodiment, the payout control unit interrupt process is not performed when a command is received, and the payout control unit interrupt process is performed using a timer interrupt. However, the payout control unit interrupt process can be performed when a command is received by setting the serial communication circuit.

  <Payout control unit / Payout control unit main process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the payout control unit main process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit main process.

  First, in step S301, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S302, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S303. move on.

  In step S303, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in a counter timer, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S305 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S306. Specifically, also in this step S304, the same process as in step S107 of the main control unit main process is performed, and if the RAM needs to be cleared, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and if the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S305. If it is information indicating suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S306 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S306, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the storage area to be cleared at the time of power recovery, among the storage areas of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is initialized. That is, since the state of this step is the first timing (the state immediately after the dispensing control unit 600 is turned on), the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared for initial startup or the like, If it is a return activation, only the second area 708B is cleared (see FIG. 105).

  In step S307, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, a part of error information provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S308, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main controller 300. Here, the process is performed by comparing the value referenced by the setting pointer in the RAM 708 with the value referenced by the analysis pointer, which will be described later. If there is unanalyzed data as a result of the determination, command analysis processing is performed in step S309, and if there is no unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, it is determined whether there is an untransmitted command. If there is an untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S311. If there is no untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S311, an untransmitted command is set in the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit side microcomputer 770, and is output as a transmission command.

  In step S312, as in step S302, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S308. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S313, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a checksum calculation numerical value storage area The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is performed. Further, only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is backed up.

  In subsequent step S314, a process for monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is off is performed in the same manner as in step S302, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the payout control unit. Returning to the top of the main process (step S301), if the low voltage signal is on, step S314 is repeatedly executed.

  <Discharge Control Unit / Discharge Control Unit Interrupt Process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, payout control unit interrupt processing executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt process. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter / timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). With this timer interrupt as a trigger, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Start.

  In step S401, the register value is saved, in step S402, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S403, WDT clear and restart are performed. In step S404, a received command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, a prize ball command is received), and if received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

  In step S405, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S406; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S414. As described above, since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from the payout control unit 600. For this reason, in this step, until the main control unit 300 is activated, a determination process is performed in order to wait for subsequent processes in steps S406 to S413.

  In step S406, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is stored in an input signal information storage area provided in the RAM. In addition, when the launch intensity state signal input from the launch control board 174 is a signal indicating the on state, the turbo state notification lamp 151 is turned on, and when the launch intensity state signal is a signal indicating the off state, the turbo condition notification lamp Control to turn off 151 is performed.

  In step S407, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, the motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. Update various timers including timers.

  In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this device monitoring process, whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300 is monitored, whether or not various errors have occurred, and depending on the error occurrence status The LED is turned off / on.

  In step S409, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication processing, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the number of payouts in the lending number of payout storage unit described later.

  In step S410, a payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S411, signal output processing is performed. In this signal output processing, a signal output to the outside from an external terminal board (not shown) is controlled.

  In step S412, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, a process for setting various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed. These various commands include commands related to errors. “Error” in this specification refers to “error” in this specification, such as payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, lower pan full error, payout error, main control communication error, door open error, etc. Includes everything you did. In step S413, port output processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this port output process, a process of outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 174 is performed.

  In step S414, the register value is restored. In step S415, the interrupt is set, and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the process of storing the received command in the RAM 708 (buffer) is performed by the received command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process, and the process of analyzing the command is the main process of the payout control unit. In the command analysis process (step S309).

  <Receiving command processing (Example A, Example B)>

  FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the details of the reception command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process shown in FIG. 107, and FIG. 108 (a) shows an example of the reception command process (Example A). FIG. 108B is a flowchart showing another example (embodiment B) of the received command process.

  Referring to FIG. 11A, in the reception command processing of the embodiment A, first, in step S501, a specific bit (reception data full flag) of the status register 772 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to for main control. Whether or not a command is received from unit 400 is determined. The reception data full flag is set when there is data in the reception data register 774. When a command transmitted from the main control unit 400 is received by the reception data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, the received command is stored in the A register 722. If there is a received command in the A register 722, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S502, the reception command of the A register 722 is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) using a pointer (described later).

  In the embodiment A, when there is a received command, the received command is always stored in the received command buffer area. Commands that should not be accepted (unauthorized commands) are excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process.

  Referring to FIG. 6B, in the received command processing of the embodiment B, first, in step S601, the received data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to, and the command reception from the main control unit 400 is performed. Determine presence or absence. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not a main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604; otherwise, the process ends. The prize ball command acceptance permission flag will be described later.

  In step S604, the received command is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

  In Example B, commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in a buffer (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. More specifically, the data in the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in, for example, the A register 722 of the CUP core register 720, and then stored in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, a command that should not be accepted (an illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. In addition, before the determination process of step S1603, you may perform the process which determines whether the received command is a prize ball command. Thus, when a command that should not be received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be eliminated by the determination process.
<Command analysis processing>

  The command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process in FIG. 106 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating a process flow of the command analysis process (example C). For example, as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 106, when the process shown in FIG. 109 (Example C) is performed, the received command process of the payout control part interrupt process shown in FIG. In step S404), the process of FIG. 108A (Example A) is performed. Or it is good also as a process which combines either the received command process of Example A, and the command analysis process of Example C or Example D. Not limited to this, the reception command processing of the embodiments A and B and the command analysis processing of the embodiments C and D can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

  With reference to FIG. 109, the command analysis processing of the embodiment C will be described. In step S701, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S702, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed. Details of this processing will be described later.

  In step S703, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, main control communication confirmation command reception processing is performed. The main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described later.

  In step S705, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process ends. In this step, if the received command is neither the main control communication confirmation command nor the prize ball command, the command analysis process is terminated without performing the process for the received command.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S707, and if not, the process ends. In step S707, prize ball command reception processing is performed. The process for receiving a prize ball command will be described later.

  <Processing upon reception of main control communication confirmation command (Embodiment E)>

  Next, the main control communication confirmation command reception processing (steps S704 and S805) in the command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing upon reception of the main control communication confirmation command.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after activation of the payout control unit 500. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and does not apply. In that case, the process proceeds to step S904. Whether or not it is the first received main control communication confirmation command determines whether or not the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is off, and the main control communication confirmation command received flag is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S903 to execute start-up processing (details will be described later).

In step S904, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S905, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In step S906, the process is terminated after the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON.
<Startup process>

  Next, the activation process (step S903) in the main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2B is a flowchart showing the flow of activation processing.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is an initial activation. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process ends. This step is determined by referring to the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (10H at initial startup and 11H at return startup). To do. That is, when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, the process proceeds to step S1002, and when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 11H, the process ends. Here, once it is determined that the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, since then, it will be at the time of return activation until the next initial activation (always the value of the main control communication confirmation command 11H), the value of the lower 4 bits is not referred to even if the main control communication confirmation command is received after the next time. Note that 10H may be transmitted after 11H is transmitted on the main control unit 300 side.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the payout control unit 600 is a return start (start to return to the state before power interruption). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process ends. .

  In step S1003, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited. In subsequent step S1004, a part of the RAM 708 is initialized. The area to be initialized here is that the main control unit 300 is initially activated (step S1001) and the payout control unit 600 is activated for return (step S1002), and the second timing (when the main control communication confirmation command is received). Process), only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 is initialized.

  In step S1005 following step S1004, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.

  <Process for receiving a prize ball command (Example F, Example G)>

  With reference to FIG. 111, a process upon receiving a prize ball command (step S707 in FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command reception process (embodiment F) in step S707 of FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 111 (a), the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command in the embodiment F will be described. First, in step S1101, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1102, the number of prize balls is added to the next prize ball number area based on the analysis data. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is displayed in the number of next prize ball requests in the next prize ball number area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. Are added and stored, and after the predetermined period, the number of prize balls for the next prize ball request number is continuously paid out. For this reason, in this step, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) stored as unanalyzed data in the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 408 is added to the number of next prize ball requests stored in the next prize ball number area. To do. Note that the value of the prize ball command in this embodiment is 23H (three-ball payout instruction), 2AH (10-ball payout instruction), and 2FH (15-ball payout instruction). In the case of a command other than 3H, AH, and FH, it may not be added (excluded).

In the next step S1103, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Timer update processing>

  Next, the timer update process (step S707) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing.

  In step S751, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is other than 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S752, and 1 is subtracted from the main control communication monitoring timer, and then the process proceeds to step S753. Then, the process proceeds to step S753. In the present embodiment, the period of the payout control unit timer interrupt process is about 1 ms, and 500 is set as the initial value of the main control communication monitoring timer in the main control communication confirmation command reception process, so step S751 The main control communication monitoring timer is determined to be 0 when about 1000 ms (= about 1 ms × 1000) has elapsed since the communication confirmation command was received from the main control unit 300. Further, the timers exemplified in FIG. 100 are also updated in step S753.

In step S753, after other timer update processing is performed, the processing ends. As other timer update processing, for example, update processing of the lending request waiting timer and the lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. For example, timer update processing.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0, and if it is 0 (a predetermined time (about 1000 ms in this embodiment) after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300). When the time elapses), the process proceeds to step S1302. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1302, after setting the main control communication error flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON. That is, when a predetermined period (1000 ms = 100 ms × 10) has elapsed after receiving the main control communication confirmation command, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the command indicating that the communication confirmation state is received from the main control unit 300 (that is, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command and before reaching 1000 ms), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off. It may be set.

  When the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality (magnetic error), as described above, the main control unit 300 does not execute the serial command management process in step S219, so the main control communication is performed to the payout control unit 600. The confirmation command cannot be sent. As a result, the payout control unit 600 causes a main control communication error, and shifts to a state in which the game ball cannot be fired. Here, in this example, it takes about 1000 ms from when the main control unit 300 detects the specific abnormality until the payout control unit 600 becomes a main control communication error. At least one ball can be launched. However, without being limited thereto, for example, when the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality, the command indicating that the specific abnormality is detected is transmitted to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 immediately permits the launch. You may comprise so that a signal may be turned off.

  In step S1304, other device state update processing is performed. In step S1305, display display setting processing is performed. In the display device display setting process, LED lighting / extinguishing / lighting control is performed based on the device state updated in step S1305. Here, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED (for example, an LED disposed on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100) for notifying the player that an error has occurred is turned on. When the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the excessive payout error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that the excessive payout error has occurred is turned on, and the excessive payout error flag is cleared. In that case, the LED is turned off. Further, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, an LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is set. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

In step S1306, after the other device monitoring process is performed, the process ends. Examples of the other device monitoring process include a process of stopping the launching and dispensing of the ball by the launching device 844 when the main control unit communication error flag is set to ON in step S1302.
<Discharge management process>

  Next, the payout management process (step S710) in the payout control unit interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout management process.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not a ball payout signal is input from the payout sensor 604. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information stored in the loan payout number storage unit provided in the RAM is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, the process proceeds to step S904. . In step S903, the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1).

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S905, and if not, the process proceeds to step S910. In step S905, the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1). In step S906, the payout amount information in the payout external output payout storage unit provided in the RAM is incremented (added by 1).

  In step S907, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout number output unit for payout is 10 or more. If yes, the process proceeds to step S908. If not, the process proceeds to step S911. . In step S908, the value of the payout external device output count provided in the RAM is incremented (added by one). In step S909, 10 is subtracted from the value of the payout amount information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout, and the subtraction result is stored in the payout amount information. In step S910, it is determined that there is an excessive payout error state, the information is stored in the RAM, and then the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S911, whether or not it is in a payout prohibition state, that is, during a payout excess error, receiving tray full sensor detection, not connected to main control unit, not connected to card unit 608, abnormal communication with card unit 608, etc. It is determined whether it corresponds to. If it is not in the payout prohibition state, the process proceeds to step S912. If it is in the payout prohibition state, the process ends.

  Even during detection of the pan full sensor, the payout control is performed so that the payout operation is stopped when the ball is full up to the passage connecting the payout device and the lower pan, and the payout device cannot physically pay out. You may comprise. Moreover, you may comprise so that the sub-control part 400 may alert | report a dish full tank based on the detection of a dish full tank sensor.

In step S912, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process proceeds to step S913. In step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process ends. In step S914, the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 is driven to pay out the game ball.
<Signal output processing>

  Next, the signal output process (step S711) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of signal output processing.

  In step S951, it is determined whether or not the payout external device output counter is greater than 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S952, and if not, the process proceeds to step S954. In step S952, a signal indicating the payout amount information (payout signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out) is output to the external terminal board 609. In step S953, the value of the external device output counter is decremented (one). Subtract).

  More specifically, the payout control unit 600 receives the above-described output schedule information and the payout request information from the main control unit 300, and then pays out the payout external output payout number storage unit in step S907 of the payout management process. If the value of the number information is 10 or more, the payout external device output counter is incremented in the next step S908. Accordingly, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 in step S952 of the signal output process (interrupt process). That is, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal indicating the payout completion number of game balls to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 after starting the payout of the ball in the payout process.

  In step S952, as other signal output processing, for example, based on the external output signal information, the external terminal board signals 1 and 2 toward the external terminal board 609, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine rental completion signal, and Processing for outputting payout error LEDs 1 to 4 is performed. Specifically, when 1 is set in Bit 0 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) for a predetermined period. (For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 2 (door opening information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as a CR gaming machine READY signal (PRDY signal) for a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms). And a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output when 0 is set. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as a CR gaming machine lending completion signal (EXS signal). For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When Bit 4 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED1 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 5 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED2 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED3 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED4 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.
<Send command processing>

  Next, the transmission command process (step S412) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

  In step S2001, transmission command output request information setting processing (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S2002, transmission command setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the processing ends.

Here, an outline of processing until the dispensing control unit 600 transmits a command to the main control unit 300 will be described. First, in the transmission command output request information setting process in step S2001, a process for determining the type of command to be transmitted to the main control 300 is performed. Next, in the transmission command setting process in step S2002, the specific content of the transmission target command is determined, and information on the command to be transmitted (untransmitted command) is set in the transmission command buffer area of the RAM 708. Then, in the transmission command output process of step S311 of the payout control unit main process, the untransmitted command set in the transmission command buffer area is set in the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit side microcomputer 770, whereby the payout control unit Processing for transmitting a command from 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed.

  <Transmission command output request information setting process>

  Next, the transmission command output request information setting process (step S2001) in the above-described transmission command process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command output request information setting processing.

  In step S2003, a first type command output request information setting process (details will be described later) is performed. In a next step S2004, processing is performed after a second type command output request information setting process (details will be described later). Exit.

  Here, the command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 includes a first type command that is a command transmitted in accordance with the transmission of the communication confirmation return command, and information to be transmitted. There is a second type of command to send. The first type commands are a device command 1, a device command 2, a device command 3, a device command 4, and a prize ball payout operation state command, and a second type command is a prize ball signal output request command and a device command. 2 (main control communication error only). Step S2003 described above is a process related to the determination (setting) of whether or not to transmit the first type command, and step S2004 described above determines whether or not to transmit the second type of command ( This is a process related to (setting). In this example, the device command 4 including the “firing intensity state” which is one of the characteristics of the present invention is the first type command, but may be the second type command.

  <First type command output request information setting process>

  Next, the first type of command output request information setting process (step S2003) in the above-described transmission command output request information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a flowchart showing the flow of the first type command output request information setting process.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is off, the process ends. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, a communication confirmation return command output request is set. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 0 of the transmission command output request information (see FIG. 103, and so on). Here, the transmission command output request information may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 or may be stored in a CPU core register (for example, C register). In step S2103, another first type command output request is set, and the flow advances to step S2104. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 2 to Bit 6 of the transmission command output request information. In step S2104, the communication confirmation command reception flag is turned off. In next step S2105, the prize ball command reception permission flag is turned on, and the process is terminated. Here, in this example, when a communication confirmation return command output request is set, it is configured to set an output request such as a device command regardless of various statuses, but only when there is a change in status, for example. An output request may be set. In this example, when a communication confirmation return command output request is set, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bits 2 to 6, but only one of them is set. The other output request may be set when the next communication confirmation return command output request is set.

  <Second type command output request information setting process>

  Next, a second type of command output request information setting process (step S2004) in the above-described transmission command output request information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing a flow of the second type command output request information setting process.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2203, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, a main control communication error command output request (device command 2 output request) is set. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information.

Next, in step S2203, it is determined whether the prize ball signal flag is on or off. If it is off, the process ends. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the process ends after setting a prize ball signal command output request. Specifically, after a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, the process is terminated. Note that the processing of step 2201 to step 2202 is not executed when a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in the device command 2 output request in the processing of step 2003 (so as not to pass the processing). ) It may be configured. Also, the processing in steps 2203 to 2204 is not executed when a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in the prize ball signal command output request in the processing in step 2003 (does not pass the processing). To).
<Send command setting process>

  Next, the transmission command setting process (step S2002) in the above-described transmission command process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the transmission command setting process.

In step S2205, after setting the command based on the output request information, the process ends.
<Port output processing>

  Next, the port output process (step S413) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of port output processing.

  In step S2301, the firing permission signal bit is cleared, and in the next step S2302, it is determined whether or not a main control unit communication error has occurred. If so, the process proceeds to step S2305 and has not occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether a CR unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2304. That is, the process proceeds to step S2304 only when it is not a main control unit communication error and a CR unit unconnected error.

  In step S2304, the firing permission signal bit is set. As a result, a firing permission signal is output from the dispensing control board 170 toward the firing control board 174. In step S2305, after the other port output process is performed, the process ends.

<Transmission timing of launch intensity state (device command 4 including launch intensity state)>

  Next, the transmission timing of the above-described device command 4 (command including the firing intensity state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. 119 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the firing intensity state signal is ON, and FIG. 119 (b) shows the firing intensity. 6 is a time chart showing an example of transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the status signal is off. FIG. 120 is a time chart illustrating an example of transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  Times T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 119 indicate the elapsed time from the timing when the firing intensity state signal is switched from on to off (or off to on), and the times T1 and T5 are times less than 100 ms (for example, 80 ms), times T2 and T6 are times longer than 100 ms (eg, 120 ms) longer than T1 and T5, and times T3 and T7 are times longer than T2 and T6 (eg, 180 ms).

  As described above, in this example, the payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit information of the firing intensity state signal to the main control unit 300 by setting bit 1 of the device command 4. However, since the timing after the time T1 has elapsed after the time T1 has elapsed since the launch intensity state signal was switched from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF) (see FIG. 97), the time T1 has elapsed and the time T5 has elapsed. At this timing, the firing intensity state of the device command 4 is turned off.

  Further, the timing after the time T2 has elapsed after the firing intensity state signal has been switched from off to on (or from on to off) and after T6 has exceeded 100 ms, but the payout controller 600 communicates with the main controller 300. Since the timing for transmitting the confirmation command has not arrived, the device command 4 itself is not transmitted at the timing after the lapse of T6 after the lapse of time T2.

  Then, after the time T3 has elapsed since the launch intensity state signal has been switched from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the timing after T7 has exceeded 100 ms, and the payout control unit 600 confirms communication with the main control unit 300. Since it is the timing for transmitting the command, the device command 4 whose firing intensity state is ON is transmitted at the timing after the elapse of time T3 and after the elapse of T7.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the firing intensity state signal received from the payout control unit 600 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a control command. However, as shown in FIG. It is configured to transmit only when the status signal changes from off to on (or from on to off). However, not only when there is a change, but every time the main control unit 300 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400, or a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 immediately after receiving the command from the payout control unit 600. You may comprise so that it may transmit at every timing.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 processes the command from the main control unit 300 at a timing of about once every 33 ms (analyzes the received command and executes a predetermined process). The determination is delayed by about 33 ms at the maximum as compared with the main control unit 300, and various processes performed based on the firing intensity state signal (for example, display based on the firing intensity state signal) are delayed for the time at least. (As described above, since the time after operating the turbo button 870g is delayed by each control unit, it will be delayed by 33 ms or more).

  <Communication example 1 between main controller 300 and payout controller 600>

  Next, communication example 1 between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a timing chart of communication example 1 of main control unit 300 and payout control unit 600 and an example of changes in variables at a predetermined timing.

  The main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer in the serial command transmission process of the N (N is a positive integer) main control unit timer interrupt process, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to 0. At that time, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to an initial value of 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms), and the serial command status is set to 1 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command cannot be transmitted). Set. At the same timing, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612, and then the communication confirmation command transmission counter 1 For example, when the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 10, it is updated to 9.

  On the other hand, when the main control communication confirmation command is received in the command analysis process, the payout control unit 600 executes the main control communication confirmation command reception process. In this main control communication confirmation command reception processing, the main control communication monitoring timer is set to an initial value of 1000 (a value corresponding to a time of about 1000 ms), the main control communication error flag is set to OFF, and the communication confirmation is performed. Set the command reception flag to ON.

  Subsequently, since the payout control unit 600 determines that the communication confirmation command reception flag is on in step S1001 of the transmission command process, it sets the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, thereby enabling serial communication. After transmitting the communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 via the line 612, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF.

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600 in the serial command reception process of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process. 0 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command can be transmitted) is set, an initial value of 10 is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter, and 0 is set in the serial command communication error flag. Further, in the serial command transmission process of the N + 1th main control unit interrupt process, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer is updated from 25 to 24 by subtracting 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a prize ball command transmission condition is established in the prize ball command setting process of the N + 2 and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processing. By setting a numerical value corresponding to the ball command in the transmission data register, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

  <Example of prize ball command transmission timing>

  For example, in the period indicated by t1 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives a communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (after the winning ball command is ready to be sent), the winning ball command is sent to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 3th main control unit timer interruption process. Sending once.

  In the period indicated by t2 in the figure, after the communication confirmation command is received from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 (the prize ball command can be transmitted). Since the award ball command transmission condition is satisfied twice, the award ball command is issued once to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 2 and N + 3 main control unit timer interruption processes. Is sending.

  Also, during the period indicated by t3 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and before the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (before the winning ball command can be sent), the sending of the winning ball command is temporarily suspended. Then, in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, after waiting for a communication confirmation command to be received from the payout control unit 600 (waiting for the award ball command to be transmitted), the N + 1th main control unit timer interruption process. In the control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 once.

  FIG. 122 (a) is an enlarged view of a time chart when a prize ball command is transmitted. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing indicated by the reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, FIG. 122B is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown at t3 in FIG. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. In addition, the main control unit 300 confirms reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then holds the payout control unit 600 on hold. The prize ball command that was being sent is sent once.

Returning to FIG. 121, during the period indicated by t <b> 4 in the figure, the main control unit 300 determines that the prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied twice before the N-th main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interruption process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, but immediately after that, the timing for transmitting a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 has arrived. Therefore, the serial command status is set to 1 (the prize ball command cannot be transmitted). For this reason, the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended, and it waits for reception of a communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600 in the N + 2th main control part timer interruption process (a state in which the prize ball command can be sent). In the N + 2 main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.
<Example of serial communication error>

  In the period indicated by t6 in the figure, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, and then the Nth and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processes. Since the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command has not been received, the serial command status is held at 1.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 300 waits for the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command until the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter becomes 10 to 0. If there is still no response, as shown in t8 in FIG. The serial communication error flag is changed from 0 to 1. If there is a response from the payout control unit 600 thereafter, the serial communication error flag is changed from 1 to 0 and the serial communication is restarted, as shown at t9 in FIG.

  <When multiple winnings are detected at the start opening or winning opening>

  FIG. 123 (a) is an example of a time chart in the case where a plurality of winnings at the start opening or winning opening are detected in one main control unit timer interruption process. In this example, the balls enter the start opening or the winning opening at the timings indicated by reference signs A and I, respectively, and then start at the timing indicated by reference signs B and J in the Nth main control unit timer interruption process. A ball entering the mouth or winning a prize is detected. In addition, at the same timing indicated by reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, and the subsequent N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process is performed. At the timing indicated by the symbol K, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.

  <Modification of Communication Confirmation Command from Payment Control Unit 600>

  FIG. 123B is a time chart showing a modified example of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. Further, the main control unit 300 confirms the reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then receives a prize ball for the payout control unit 600. Sending the command once. In response to this prize ball command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at a timing indicated by a symbol M of the M + 3th payout control unit main process.
<External terminal board signal output example>

Next, an output example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131. Note that “prize ball” in the drawing indicates the timing of winning detection by the main control unit 300 and the number of winning balls (the number of payout requests), and “payout” indicates the timing of game ball payout by the payout control unit 600. The number of payouts is shown. The “payout schedule information signal” indicates the waveform of the payout schedule information signal (external terminal board signal 9) output by the main controller 300, and the “payout information signal” is output by the payout controller 600. The waveform of the payout information signal (external terminal board signal 1) is shown.
<External terminal board signal output example 1>

  FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an output example 1 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main controller 300 detects the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the winning port counter updating process (step S216) by detecting the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. While storing 3 as the number of prize balls in the storage area, a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 3) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 in the serial command management process (step S219).

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Although 1 is added to the number of output requests, since the total number of winning balls is 3, processing for adding 1 to the number of output requests is not performed. Further, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more, but here the number of output requests is 0. The process of outputting the payout schedule information signal is not performed.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (3 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process (step S503) of the command analysis process. The payout amount information in the payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) and the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) are respectively added to payout for payout The payout number information in the number storage unit is updated to 3, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 3. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout amount storage unit is 3, after paying out three game balls, The number-of-payout information in the amount-of-payout storage unit for payout is updated to 0 (= 3-3).

  Subsequently, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 outputs an external number when the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the terminal board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 3, the payout information signal is Processing for output is not performed.

  Subsequently, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the main control section 300 stores the number of winning balls in the winning ball number storage area corresponding to the variable winning opening 234 in the winning opening counter updating process (step S216). 15 and a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= 15 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 in the serial command management process (step S219). Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 15 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 15 to update the total number of winning balls to 5, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. The number of output requests is updated to 1.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period Ta as the first payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (3 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 18. Further, the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout management process (step S710) and the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit to pay out the game ball. The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, the payout is made after paying out 15 game balls. The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) or more, Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit at the time of payout is 18, the value of the payout number information The payout information signal is output once at a timing when it is determined that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). In this example, a high level signal is output over the period Tb as the payout information signal.

Here, the high-level period Ta of the payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300 and the high-level period Tb of the payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are not particularly limited. Ta is set longer than the period Tb (the shortest period is 800 ms). With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference in pulse width.
<External terminal board signal output example 2>

  FIG. 125 is a time chart showing an output example 2 of the external terminal board signal. As described above, in the serial command management process (step S219), the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number 10, and if applicable, calculates 10 from the total number of winning balls. Subtract and add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After that, since the total number of winning balls after subtraction is 14, which is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number of winning balls 14, and the total number of winning balls is updated to 4. Has been updated.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 2. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the first payout schedule information signal, and then in the subsequent external output signal setting process, the low level signal is once In the external output signal setting process thereafter, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (9 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 24. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, after paying out 15 game balls, The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output part for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more, the external terminal board The processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via 609 is performed, but here, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 24, which is a predetermined number 10 or more. While outputting the information signal once, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 24 in the payout number output unit for payout external output, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for payout is updated to 14. Yes. Further, the payout control unit 600 outputs the payout information signal once again and outputs the payout information signal once again because the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout after payout after subtraction is 14 or more. The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 14 in the output payout number storage unit, and the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is updated to 4. In this example, as the first payout information signal, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period, and then a low level signal is output once over a period Td, and then the second payout information signal. As a result, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period.

  In this example, the output of the payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output of the payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 are performed twice each, and the first payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 is performed. The output period of the high level signal and the output period of the high level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. With such a configuration, the external device can detect the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.

  Further, the first payout information signal and the second payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are larger than the interval Tc between the first payout schedule information signal and the second payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300. The interval Td is set longer. With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference between the output interval of the payout schedule information signal and the output interval of the payout information signal.

  In this example, in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 because the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number 10 or more. Is updated to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After the subtraction, the total number of winning balls is 14, which is equal to or more than the predetermined number 10. Therefore, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number 14 of winning balls. Although the number of winning balls is updated to 4 and the number of output requests is updated to 2, it is not limited to this example.

  Therefore, for example, in the N (N is a positive integer) serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and outputs it. After updating the number of requests to 1, once the serial command management process is completed, the first payout information signal is output in the external output signal setting process, and then in the N + 1th and subsequent serial command management processes, the total number of winning balls The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from 14 to update the total number of winning balls to 4 and the output request number is updated to 1, and then the second payout information signal may be output in the external output signal setting process. That is, instead of updating all the output request numbers in one serial command management process, the output request number may be updated in a plurality of serial command management processes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing time of the serial command management process varies depending on the number of winning balls, the output timing of the payout information signal is not delayed, and stable. In some cases, game control can be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 3>

  FIG. 126 is a time chart showing an output example 3 of the external terminal board signal. Here, the “symbol-related signal” in the figure indicates the waveform of the symbol determination frequency information signal (external terminal board signal 3) output by the main control unit 300, but other start port information signals (external terminal board signal). Signal 4) and jackpot information 1 to 4 signals (external terminal board signals 5 to 8) can be replaced (considered in the example described below).

  In this example, the main control unit 300 outputs a high-level signal as a payout schedule information signal and a high-level signal as a symbol-related signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. Output. Thereafter, in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing, a low level signal is output as the payout schedule information signal, and a high level signal is output as the symbol related signal. That is, the high level signal is output for the same period as the payout schedule information signal and the symbol related signal.

With this configuration, the external device can simultaneously detect the payout schedule information signal and the symbol-related signal, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.
<External terminal board signal output example 4>

  FIG. 127 is a time chart showing an output example 4 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, in the N (N is a positive integer) number of external output signal setting processes, the main control unit 300 has an output request count of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected). In this case, the payout schedule information signal is output by outputting the payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes without outputting the payout schedule information signal in the Nth external output signal setting process. The output is delayed by a predetermined period from the first external output signal setting process.

  On the other hand, when the number of output requests is 1 or more and the specific abnormality detection flag is on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the N-th external output signal setting process, the main control unit 300 performs the external output signal setting process. In this case, the symbol-related signal is not output, and the symbol-related signal is not output in the (N + 1) th and subsequent external output signal setting processes.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud. In this example, the symbol related signal is not output when the specific abnormality detection flag is on. However, as with the payout schedule information signal, the output is delayed with respect to the original output timing. However, there are cases where the same effect can be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 5>

  FIG. 128 is a time chart showing an output example 5 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the number of winning balls by winning the variable winning opening 234 is set to 10.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the number of winning balls in the variable winning slot 234 in the winning slot counter updating process (step S216) by detecting winning in the variable winning slot 234. 10 is stored, and in the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= 10 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 10 and the predetermined number 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total winning ball number 10 to update the total winning ball number to 0, and the output request number is updated to 1. .

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the payout schedule information signal.

  In other words, in this example, the number of winning balls (10 in this example) by winning the variable winning opening 234 and the threshold value (10 in this example) as a condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same. The number of output requests is updated to 1 in one serial command management process, and a high level signal is output as a payout schedule information signal in the subsequent external output signal setting process.

In this way, if the configuration is such that the number of winning balls for winning a specific winning opening and the threshold value that is the condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same, each time a specific winning opening is won, the payout is made. Since the schedule information signal can be output once, it is possible to estimate the number of winnings for a specific winning opening. For example, when the number of winnings per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined as abnormal. Appropriate processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 6>

  FIG. 129 is a time chart showing an output example 6 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the winning to the variable winning opening 234 twice, and therefore, as the first payout schedule information signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. After outputting a high level signal for a predetermined period Ta, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing after the elapse of the predetermined period Tc. .

  On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S711) that the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). The payout information signal is output once for a predetermined period Tb.

In this example, the output period of the high-level signal of the second payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output period of the high-level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. . With such a configuration, the external device can detect the second payout schedule information signal and the first payout information signal at the same time. New information may be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 7>

  FIG. 130 is a time chart showing an output example 7 of the external terminal board signal. FIG. 130 (a) is a partial extraction of the time chart of FIG. 125, and FIG. It is a time chart at the time of determining with specific abnormality detection flag ON in the example shown to a).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In such a case, the payout schedule information signal is not output. With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud.
<External terminal board signal output example 8>

  FIG. 131 is a time chart showing an output example 8 of the external terminal board signal. FIG. 131 (a) shows a part of the time chart in the normal state, and FIG. 131 (b) shows the time when an abnormality occurs. It is a time chart.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In this case, the payout schedule information signal is not output, but the security information signal is output. On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S1708) that the value of the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in this example). A payout information signal is output.

With this configuration, even when the security information signal cannot be output to the external device due to disconnection or the like, the external device can issue the payout schedule information signal from the main control unit 300 and the payout information signal from the payout control unit 600. Based on the information, it may be possible to determine whether there is an abnormality related to payout. In addition, the external device can detect the security signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can sometimes obtain new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. When the security information signal is output, the payout schedule information signal may be output at a timing delayed by a predetermined time from the output timing of the payout schedule information signal when the security information signal is not output.
<Embodiment 3>

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 132 to 135 and these reference numerals are used only for the description in the third embodiment.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of power supply among the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described above. In the example shown in FIG. 132 (a), the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are drawn from the power supply board 182 including the power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric gaming machines, and the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are extracted. Both are connected to a payout board (payout control board) 170 including a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC (direct current) voltage of 12V is applied to the power supply line pl01, and a direct current voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl02. A power supply line pl03 is drawn from the payout board 170, and the power supply line pl03 is connected to a main board (main control board) 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game. The power supply line pl03 is connected to the power supply line pl01 in the payout board 170. Accordingly, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 through the payout board 170. Note that these voltage values are merely examples, and it is of course possible to apply voltages having different voltage values depending on the circuit to be driven.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132B, the power supply line pl04, the power supply line pl05, and the power supply line pl06 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl04 is connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl05 and the power supply line pl06 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl04 and the power supply line pl05, and a DC voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl06. That is, when a certain time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is directly supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 without going through the payout board 170.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132C, the power supply line pl07, the power supply line pl08, the power supply line pl09, and the power supply line pl10 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl08 are connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl09 and the power supply line pl10 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time has elapsed after power-on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply lines pl07 and pl09, a DC5V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl08, and a DC voltage different from DC5V / 12V is applied to the power supply line pl10. Is done. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, two types of voltages, DC5V and DC12V, are directly supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 without passing through the payout board 170.

  FIG. 133 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. This example will be described using the configuration shown in FIG. The power supply line pl03 drawn from the payout board 170 is drawn into the main board 156 and connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter 7001. The DC-DC converter 7001 has a function of converting DC12V voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 into DC5V. The voltage of DC5V generated by the DC-DC converter 7001 is applied to the power supply line pl11.

  A plurality of branch lines are connected to the power supply line pl11, and a predetermined branch line is connected to the power supply terminal A of the reset IC 7003. When a certain period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied as a drive voltage to the power supply terminal A, thereby driving the reset IC 7003. Further, another branch line branched from the power supply line pl11 is connected to the power supply terminal F of the microcomputer (CPU) 304. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied to the power terminal F as a driving voltage for the microcomputer 304. Note that the drive voltages of the reset IC 7003 and the microcomputer 304 are not the same and may be different. Further, the voltage value itself of the drive voltage of the reset IC 7003 or the microcomputer 304 may be different from the voltage value of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl11.

  The signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl11 through another branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B and grasps the state of the driving voltage of the microcomputer 304 applied to the terminal F of the microcomputer 304. On the other hand, the signal input terminal C of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl03 via a predetermined branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C and grasps the state of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03.

  The reset IC 7003 is provided with at least two signal output terminals D and E. A reset signal (start signal) is output from the signal output terminal D, and a low voltage signal is output from the signal output terminal E. If the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset IC 7003 negates the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D. To. On the other hand, if it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B has exceeded the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted (valid). That is, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D becomes a negated state, and the signal input terminal When the terminal voltage of B exceeds the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted. Note that the number of terminals of the reset IC 7003 is arbitrary, and the illustrated one is only an example, and only the terminals necessary for the description are illustrated, and the number and arrangement positions of the terminals may be the same as those illustrated. And it doesn't have to be the same.

  The signal output terminal D of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal G of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl12. The signal input terminal G is used as a system reset (XSRST) terminal. For this reason, when the reset signal output to the signal line pl12 is asserted, the microcomputer 304 shifts to the security mode. Thus, the reset IC 7003 functions as the start signal output circuit 340 shown in FIG. 46 with the signal output terminal D functioning as a reset signal output terminal.

  When the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C does not exceed a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the reset IC 7003 asserts the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C exceeds a predetermined voltage value, the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is negated.

  The signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal H of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl13. The signal input terminal H is used as one of the data terminals D0 to D7. For example, the microcomputer 304 repeats the processing of step S103 and step S105 of FIG. 84, for example, until the low voltage signal output to the signal line pl13 is negated. As described above, the reset IC 7003 functions as the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG. 46 with the signal output terminal E functioning as a constant voltage signal output terminal.

  In this example, the predetermined threshold voltage value of the signal input terminal C when the low voltage signal on the signal line pl13 changes from the asserted state to the negated state (or vice versa) is set to 9V, but is not limited thereto. For example, if the voltage at which the microcomputer 304 can continue the power interruption process is applied to the power supply terminal F during the period required from the power interruption detection to the power interruption process in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interruption process described above. Good. The DC5V voltage output from the DC-DC converter 7001 to the power supply line pl11 starts to gradually decrease around the time when the DC12V voltage of the power supply line pl03 input to the DC-DC converter 7001 decreases to about 7V. Therefore, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C becomes less than a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is changed from the negated state to the asserted state. If, for example, 9V is used as the predetermined voltage value, even if the voltage of the power supply line pl11 gradually decreases, the microcomputer during the period required for the power interruption process from the power interruption detection in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interrupt process 304 can continue to operate.

  FIG. 134 shows an example of power supply in the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. In comparison with the power supply configuration shown in FIG. 133, the DC-DC converter 7001 and the reset IC 7003 arranged in the main board 156 in FIG. 133 are arranged on the power supply board 182 in the configuration shown in FIG. Yes. Thereby, the power supply line pl11 and the signal lines pl12 and pl13 are wired across the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to supply all the power of DC5V, DC12V, and other voltage values with the power supply board 182, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a power supply circuit on the main board 156 or the payout board 170. In some cases, there is a margin in the above circuit layout.

  FIG. 135 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the branch line of the power supply line pl11 is connected to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT and the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI of the CPU 304, and a DC5V voltage is constantly applied to both terminals XINT and XNMI. ing. By doing so, the interrupt signals input to both terminals XINT and XNMI always maintain a negated state, so that malfunction due to noise or the like can be reliably prevented when an external interrupt by the interrupt terminal is not used. The configuration illustrated in FIG. 135B illustrates a case where the terminal H of the CPU 304 in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 133 functions as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Note that the symbol X of the interrupt terminal indicates low active and the L signal is input to be in an asserted state, but in the case of a circuit that is in a high active and asserted state, the L signal (for example, 0 V) is always input. Like that.

  <Received command processing, received command acquisition processing, received command analysis processing (details)>

  Details of the received command processing, received command acquisition processing, and received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 143.

  136 and 137 are diagrams showing an example of the reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the reception command buffer area is provided as a ring buffer that uses a storage area (buffer) of a fixed length (here, addresses 00H to 03H) in a ring shape and stores data in the buffer. Here, the storage area of addresses 00H to 03H is illustrated as the buffer size, but the buffer size is not limited to this. In the receive command buffer area, data (receive command value) is set and analyzed using a data write pointer (setting pointer) and a data read pointer (analysis pointer) as shown in the figure. When both pointers reach the end of the buffer (here, the bottom layer), they are rotated back to the beginning of the buffer (here, the top layer). In this way, data is processed conceptually as if it were a ring, and data overflows with only the actual area (fixed-length buffer area) and two pointer variables (setting pointer and analysis pointer). It is possible to realize buffer management without any problems.

  FIG. 136 is an example in which the value of the setting pointer directly indicates the address of the storage area. First, as shown in FIG. 5A, both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to the position of the start address (00H) of the reception command buffer area. In the ring buffer, the read pointer (analysis pointer) reads data from the current reference position, but when the write pointer (setting pointer) matches the reference address, the reading of data ends (waits). That is, in the state of FIG. 5A, the positions of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are the same, so the CUP of the payout control unit 600 is waiting for data reading.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH (award ball command for instructing 10 ball payout)) from the main control unit 300, the value of the received command ( 2AH) is written ((b) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((c) in the figure) Note that in FIGS. “H” indicating “” is omitted.

  Since the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to different addresses, the analysis pointer starts reading data. In other words, the analysis pointer refers to the value (2AH in this case) stored at the head address (00H), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, and jumps to the corresponding module ((c) in the figure). . After the value is read by the analysis pointer, the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((d) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((e) in the figure). Data may be read after incrementing the value of the analysis pointer.

  Next, when a received command (for example, 23H (a prize ball command for instructing a three-ball payout) is received, the value (23H) of the received command is written at the position (01H) of the setting pointer ((f) in the figure) and set. The pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((g) in the figure) When the next reception command (for example, 2FH (a prize ball command for instructing 15 ball payout) is received, the pointer is moved to the setting pointer position (02H). The value (2FH) of the received command is written ((h) in the figure), the setting pointer moves to the next address (03H) ((i) in the figure), and the analysis pointer is stored at the current address (01H). The received value (23H here) is referred to, the content of the received command is analyzed from the value and jumped to the corresponding module ((i) in the figure), and then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared. When the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared, the analysis pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((k) in the same figure). The buffer value (2FH) is read and analyzed (because they do not match), then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((l) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (03H) ( (M) in the figure.

In the state shown in FIG. 5M, since the reference addresses of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer match, the analysis pointer waits for data reading. When the next reception command (for example, 23H) is received, the value (23H) of the reception command is written in the setting pointer position (03H) ((n) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (00H). ((O) in the figure). The analysis pointer reads the value 23H at the current address 03H and performs analysis ((o) in the figure). Similarly, data writing and reading are performed.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating another example of the reception command buffer area. In the example shown in the figure, the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is different from the address of the storage area where the data is actually stored. That is, based on the position (its value) referenced by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, the address where the data is stored is calculated, and the data is written and read.

  Referring to FIG. 136 (a), for example, an area from addresses 7F10H to 7F13H is secured as a reception command buffer area in which reception commands are stored. On the other hand, the setting pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0EH of the RAM 708, and the analysis pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0FH of the RAM 708, and the illustrated values (for example, 00H to 03H) are set in the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, respectively. .

  That is, in the state shown in the figure, the leading value 00H is set for both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, and no data is stored in the reception command buffer area.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH) from the main control unit 300, it performs a predetermined calculation process based on the value (00H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the received command The value (7F10H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated. Then, the reception command (2AH) is stored at the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area ((b) in the figure). After the received command is stored, the position of the setting pointer is updated (incremented) and moved to the next address. The analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (00H), and calculates the value (7F10H) of the start address of the reception command buffer area. Then, the data (2AH) at the address 7F10H in the received command buffer area is read and analyzed ((c) in the figure). Thereafter, the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area is cleared ((d) in the figure), the analysis pointer is updated, and the value of the next address is set ((e) in the same figure). In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the next reception command (for example, 23H) from the main control unit 300, it performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the value (01H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the reception command. The value (7F11H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated, and the received command (23H) is stored in the address 7F11H ((f) in the figure). Thereafter, the setting pointer refers to the next address, the analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (01H), calculates the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area, and stores the stored data ( 23H) is obtained and analyzed. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated to store and analyze data.

Note that values set to the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are actually values of 0 to 15 (4 bits), and the values are updated by an increment function. Although the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are 8 bits, the result of logical product of the value to be set (4 to 0 to 15) and 0FH is set in the pointer. Is possible.
<Configuration of storage area>

  138 (a) and 138 (b) are schematic diagrams showing a partial configuration of a storage area used in the reception command processing, reception command acquisition processing, and reception command analysis processing of this embodiment. FIG. 138 (c) shows an example of a command (reception command) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

  FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram of a status register 772 and a reception data register 774, which are part of the built-in registers of the payout control microcomputer 770 (see FIG. 81). Information indicating the state of the serial communication circuit is stored in the status register 772, and a reception command is stored in the reception data register 774. Here, although shown as a reception data register 774 for storing a command received by the payout control unit 600, a transmission / reception data register for storing transmission / reception data may be used.

  FIG. 138 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second area 708 </ b> B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. As shown in the figure, the second area 708B is composed of areas from addresses 7F0EH to 7F13H, for example, the address 7F0EH is a setting pointer storage area 7081, and the address 7F0FH is an analysis pointer storage area 7082. Addresses 7F10H to 7F13H are a reception command buffer area (ring buffer) 708R.

The reception command buffer area 708R stores the reception command shown in FIG. The content of FIG. 9C is the same as that shown in FIG.
<Receive command processing (details)>

  An example of the received command process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As described above, the received command process is a process (see FIG. 108) performed in step S404 of the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 107). In the following description, as shown in FIG. 135, an example in which the address of the received command buffer area is indirectly calculated and referenced based on the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is shown as an example. That is, in the initial state, the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are both 00H, and the area where data is stored first is the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area.

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 reads received data (received command) from the received data register 774 when “reception complete” is made with reference to a specific bit of the status register 772 (1).

  As an example, the storage location of the reception command is obtained based on the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the storage destination address 7F11H is calculated by adding the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R to the value (01H) of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (address 7F0EH) (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R (3). When a reception command is read from the reception data register 774, a specific bit in the status register 772 is cleared. Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the setting pointer (4).

Note that the CPU of the payout control unit 600 may store the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R and clear the specific bit of the status register 772.
<Receiving command acquisition processing (details)>

  An example of the received command acquisition process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The received command acquisition process is a process (step S701 in FIG. 109) performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 106).

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 compares the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (here 02H) with the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 (here 01H), and these values do not match. If so, perform analysis. As an example, the storage location of the data to be analyzed (reception command) is obtained based on the value in the analysis pointer storage area 7082 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the value of the analysis pointer (here 01H) and the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R are added to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the data stored at the address 7F11H in the reception command buffer area 708R in another area (for example, the A register 722), and clears the data at the address 7F11H in the reception command buffer area 708R. (3). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the analysis pointer (4).

Thereafter, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the type of received command stored in the A register 722 (whether it is a prize ball command or a communication confirmation command) and jumps to the corresponding module.
<Received command analysis processing>

  An example of the received command analysis process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The received command analysis process is a process (step S702 in FIG. 109) performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an example of received command data and a jump table. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a setting example (contents) of a received command in bit units, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of a jump table.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the received command is 8-bit data, the upper 4 bits indicate the command type, and the lower 4 bits indicate the actual data. For example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “1”, it is a main control communication confirmation command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “0”, it indicates that it is the initial start time, When the value of the 4-bit actual data portion is “1”, it indicates that the recovery is being started. Further, for example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “2”, it indicates a prize ball command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “3”, it indicates that 3 balls are paid out, When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “10”, it indicates that 10 balls are paid out. When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “15”, it indicates that 15 balls are paid out. Show. The upper 4 bits of the command type and the lower 4 bits of actual data are temporarily stored separately, which will be described later.

  FIG. 4B shows an example of a jump table. The jump table is provided in the ROM control area of the ROM 706 of the payout control unit 600, and the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address 0750H of the main control communication confirmation command reception process (program) are stored in the address 0700H. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the head address (0750H in this case) of the main control communication confirmation command reception process are stored in 0701H. In addition, the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0780H) of the winning ball number command reception processing (program) is stored at address 0702H, and 0703H is received when the winning ball number command is received. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the processing start address 0780H are stored.

  The CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and when it is “1”, it refers to the address 0700H of the jump table in FIG. Jump to the start address (here 0750H). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the winning ball command, and in the case of “2”, it refers to the jump table address 0702H of FIG. Jump to the top address (0780H in this example).

  142 and 143 continue to show details of the received command analysis process, and show an example of analyzing the received command stored in the A register in (3) of FIG.

  FIG. 142 (a) shows a case where “00100011” is stored in the A register as, for example, a prize ball command (23H) instructing to pay out three balls. First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 saves the value of the A register to the B register in order to determine the command type later. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off in step S1403 of FIG. 108B, the process is terminated without storing the received command in the buffer. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off in step S706 of FIG. 109, the process is terminated without performing the prize ball command reception process. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (a) (after the prize ball command is stored in the buffer), the higher 4 bits are referenced to analyze the prize ball command and the prize ball command cannot be accepted (the prize ball command). If the acceptance permission flag is off), the command may be discarded and the process terminated. Even when a command other than the main control communication confirmation command and the prize ball command is discarded, or when an unintended prize ball command is discarded by turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag, the main control unit 300 It is not necessary to send an error message.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4B, in order to obtain the value of the lower 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the values “00100011” of the A register and 0FH (“000011111”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value of the actual data portion (“00000011”) is obtained.

  Next, the value (actual data portion) of the A register is saved in the C register as shown in FIG. 8C, and then the B register is used to determine the command type as shown in FIG. The value “00100011” is stored (returned) in the A register. Note that the order of the comparison process of the actual data portion and the return process for determining the command type may be reversed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4E, in order to obtain the value of the upper 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the value “00100011” of the A register and F0H (“11110000”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value indicating the command type (“00100000”) is obtained.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the value of the A register is shifted right four times. As a result, the value of the A register is “00000010” as shown in the case of the prize ball command (“00000001” in the case of the main control communication confirmation command).

  In FIG. 5B, the value of the A register is subtracted (decremented) to obtain “00000001” for offset calculation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5C, the value after decrementing of the A register is compared with a specific value (for example, 02H in this case) (CP 02H instruction). At this timing, the value of the A register (after decrementing) is normally 00H or 01H. Therefore, if a carry occurs, it is a normal command, and if no carry occurs, an unintended command Can be judged. Therefore, if no carry occurs, the process is terminated as an unintended command. The comparison with a specific value may be performed before the subtraction process.

  Next, in FIG. 11D, the start address 0700H of the jump table shown in FIG. 141B is stored in the HL register (pair register) 724 of the payout control unit 600.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5E, the value “00000010”, which is twice the value of the A register in FIG. 5B, is added to the value of the HL register, and the value is stored in the HL register after the addition. Jump to the current address (transition to the module). A jump to an address stored in the HL register is performed by, for example, a “JP (HL) instruction”. In this example, the process jumps to the address 0780H stored in the address 0702H of the jump table, and the process at the time of receiving the winning ball number command is executed.

  Although not shown, when the received command is a main control communication confirmation command, the value of the A register in FIG. 4B is “00000000”. That is, the double value of the A register value added to the HL register in FIG. 5E is also “00000000”, and jumps to the address 0750H stored in the address 0700H of the jump table. Processing on reception is executed.

  If the process shifts to the process for receiving a prize ball number command after the figure (e), the actual data portion saved in the C register in FIG. 142 (c) becomes the prize ball number. In step S1102 of FIG. 111 (a) or step S1203 of FIG. 111 (b), a process of adding to the next prize ball number area is performed. In addition, although the illegal measure about the number of prize balls is not performed, as an illegal measure for the number of prize balls, a process of referring to the actual data portion (lower 4 bits) saved in the C register may be performed.

  The reception command processing, reception command acquisition processing, and reception command analysis processing have been described above. However, the transmission command processing (step S412 in FIG. 107) and the transmission command output processing (step S311 in FIG. 106) are described above. The process may be executed in the same manner as at least one of the received command acquisition process and the received command analysis process.

  Although the main control communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted to the payout control unit 600, it may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. In this case, only the first main control communication confirmation command is awarded as the prize ball. You may make it transmit separately from a command. Further, for example, the main control communication confirmation command 1 may be transmitted for each prize ball command 1 transmission. Further, one transmission per interrupt of the main control unit timer interrupt processing or a plurality of transmissions per interrupt, a transmission per group per interrupt, a plurality of transmissions within a range not exceeding 255 per interrupt, etc. .

  Further, when a prize ball command is transmitted / received when a prize ball is generated, transmission / reception of information related to the state of the device or the like results in an excessive increase in the amount of communication. Therefore, regular communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed. When the communication confirmation command is transmitted / received, the payout control unit 600 may transmit / receive information on the state of the device or the like at the transmission / reception timing of the communication confirmation command.

  Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is not received, the error-related command may not be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In this case, some errors may be transmitted using an error command, such as transmitting a predetermined type of error.

  When a main control communication confirmation command is received, a plurality of types of commands may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 at different timings (for example, different main processes). For example, when a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the same time, for example, the error commands may be transmitted in the order of the upper 4 bits, or may be transmitted in the order of the higher 4 bits. Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

  In addition, the flow of each process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the illustrated flow as long as the same function can be obtained, and the processing order can be changed as appropriate.

  Also, the reception command process (step S404) may be executed in the payout control unit main process, and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed in the payout control part interrupt process, or the reception command process in the payout control part main process. (Step S404) and command analysis processing (Step S309) may be executed, or reception command processing (Step S404) and command analysis processing (Step S309) may be executed in the payout control unit interrupt processing. Good.

In the prize ball command reception process shown in FIG. 111 (b), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag determination process (FIG. 108 (b) in the reception command process (step S404) in the payout control unit interruption process (FIG. 107). In step S1403), even if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag in this step is on, the process proceeds to the next step S1203. In other words, even if it is determined that the command is invalid in the payout control unit interrupt process, the process as a normal received command may be performed in this step.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Special figure determination table>

  FIG. 144 (a) shows an example of the low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 144 (b) shows the high probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (Special Figure 1). An example is shown. FIG. 10C shows an example of a special figure success / failure determination low probability state table (Special Figure 2), and FIG. 10D shows a special figure success / failure determination high probability state table (Special Figure 2). ) Is an example.

  In these special figure success / failure determination tables, presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), lottery value data for special figure big hit determination, and special figure variable game success / failure results are displayed. Stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).

  <Special figure success / failure judgment table / Special figure variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the case of special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) in the jackpot judgment of special figure 1 variable game, refer to the low probability state table for special figure success / failure judgment (special figure 1) shown in FIG. When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and information indicating that the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is a big hit is set. (Hereinafter, setting the jackpot information in the jackpot flag storage area is referred to as “turning on the jackpot flag”). If the acquired special figure winning random value is 10220 to 10384, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), and the small hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is determined to be a small hit. (Hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In addition, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10385 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the above-mentioned big hit flag and small hit flag storage areas are out of place. (Hereinafter, setting the outlier information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag off”, and the outlier information in the small hit flag storage area.) Setting is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219), the winning probability of the special figure 1 variable game big hit in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit in the special figure low probability state Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 10220 to 10384 (the size of the numerical value range is 164), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/399 (= 165/65536). ).

  Also, in the case of special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment, refer to the special figure success / failure judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in FIG. If the acquired special figure winning random numbers are 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. If the acquired special figure winning random number is 12186 to 12349, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), and the small hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12350 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 2185), the winning probability of the special figure 1 probability game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 12186 to 12349 (the size of the numerical value range is 164), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/399 (= 163/65536). ). Therefore, in the special figure 1 variable game, the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is almost the same as the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state. Is set to In this embodiment, a random number (for example, 10001) that is a big hit is set regardless of the lottery probability state of the special drawing, but it is set so that the random numbers that become a big hit do not overlap in a plurality of lottery probability states. You may do it.

  <Special figure success / failure determination table / Special figure variable game jackpot determination>

  In the case of special figure low probability state (no special figure certain change) in jackpot judgment of special figure 2 variable game, refer to the low probability state table (special figure 2) for special figure success / failure judgment shown in FIG. When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10220 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219), the winning probability per jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536).

  Also, in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment, in the case of a special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), refer to the special figure success / failure judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in FIG. If the acquired special figure winning random numbers are 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12186 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 2185), the winning probability of jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). In this embodiment, the small hits are assigned to the special figure 1 and the special hits are not assigned to the special figure 2, but conversely, the small hits may be assigned only to the special figure 2 or to both. Also good. Moreover, it is not necessary to provide the small hit itself.
<Table for determining whether or not it is normal>

  FIG. 145 (a) shows an example of a normal probability determination low probability state table, and FIG. 145 (b) shows an example of a general determination correct probability state table.

  In the table for determining whether or not a special figure is received, the presence / absence of a special figure change (a high probability state or a special low probability state), a lottery value data for determining a special figure, and a success / failure result of a common figure variable game are displayed. Stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 has a predetermined sphere detection sensor that detects whether the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228a or the general map start port 228b. Based on the random number value for winning a common figure acquired when it is detected, a hit determination for determining the success / failure result of the usual figure floating game is performed.

  <Table for determining whether or not a normal figure / Judgment is made for a variable figure game>

  If the special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) is determined in the normal figure variation game, refer to the low probability state table for the normal figure success / failure judgment shown in the figure (a), and the acquired normal figure winning selection When the numerical value is 49, it is determined that the winning game (winning) of the usual game is won, and information indicating that the winning flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is hit is set (hereinafter referred to as the winning flag storage area). Setting the winning information is called “setting the winning flag to ON”). In addition, when the acquired common figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 48 or 50 to 99, it is determined that the common figure variable game is out of play, and indicates that the above-mentioned hit flag storage area is out of place. Information is set (hereinafter, setting out-of-order information in the hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the hit flag off”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the random number value for the normal drawing is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100), and the numerical value range of the lottery value data per hit in the special figure low probability state is 49 (the large numerical value range). Since the value is 1), the winning probability per game in the special figure low probability state is 1/100.

  In the case of a special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation) in the hit determination of the common figure variable game, the common figure obtained by referring to the high probability state table for the normal figure success / failure judgment shown in FIG. When the winning random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 99, it is determined that the ordinary game is winning (winning) and the winning flag is set to ON.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the random number value for winning a normal figure is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100), and the numerical value of the lottery value data per hit in the special figure high probability state is 100. The winning probability per game of the variable game in the high probability state is 100/100 = 100%. In this way, the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is set higher than the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state. It is in a state where it is easier to win the regular game than the probability state. In addition, the winning probability of the ordinary figure is not particularly limited. For example, both the winning probability of the ordinary figure variable game in the special figure high probability state and the winning probability of the ordinary figure variable game in the special figure low probability state are set to 100%. May be. On the contrary, in the special figure low probability state, the winning probability of the normal figure may be set to 0%.
<Normal hit action table>

  FIG. 145 (c) is an example of a hit action table in which the hit action of the usual figure is defined. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a general symbol lottery that determines the type of the general symbol stop symbol based on the table shown in FIG. When the winning flag is on, the winning symbol random value generated from the above-mentioned common symbol winning random number is used as the symbol lottery random value. When the winning flag is off, the above-mentioned common symbol winning random number is used. The symbol random value for loss generated from the numerical value is used as the symbol lottery random value.

  In this example, when the normal figure is a win, the normal figure A is selected with a probability of 50/100, and the normal figure B is selected with a probability of 50/100. Is selected with a probability of 100/100. Then, when the normal figure A is selected when the time-short operation is not performed, the electric Chu 232 is opened for 100 ms and then closed for 500 ms, and then is controlled to open 5250 ms. When the normal figure A is selected for the short-time operation, The control for closing the electric Chu 232 for 500 ms after opening it for 180 ms is performed three times.

  In addition, when the normal figure B is selected when the time shortening is not activated, the electric chow 232 is controlled to be opened for 100 ms. When the normal figure B is selected during the short time operation, the electric chew 232 is opened for 2400 ms and then closed for 500 ms. Next, after opening 1450 ms, close 500 ms and finally open 1450 ms

In the present embodiment, the average time of the public utility service opening time at the time of short-time non-operation is set to be shorter than the average time of the public power service opening time at the time of short-time operation. The average duration of the public service opening time may be long.
<Special Figure 1 Determination Table>

  FIG. 146 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. 146 (b) shows the jackpot operation corresponding to each of the stop symbols of special figure 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or the special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the acquired symbol random number value. Do. When the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol random number value generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the above special figure winning random number is used. When the small-hit symbol random number value generated from the random number value is used as the random lottery value for symbol lottery, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are off), the above-mentioned special The symbol random number value for loss generated from the symbol winning random value is used as the symbol random number value.

  In the special figure 1 variable game symbol lottery, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, select the special figure A with a probability of 30/100, select the special figure B with a probability of 25/100, The special figure C is selected with a probability of 25/100, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 10/100, and the special figure E is selected with a probability of 10/100. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, the special figure F is selected regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for small hits), that is, with a probability of 100% at the small hit. To do. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is a failure, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol lottery random number value (the symbol random value for loss).

  In addition, when special figure A, special figure B, special figure D, or special figure E is selected, the special figure high probability state (probability change) is entered after the big hit game ends, but when special figure C is selected. Shifts to a special figure low probability state (non-probable change) after the big hit game ends. In addition, when Special Figure A, Special Figure B, Special Figure C, or Special Figure D is selected, the time is shortened after the big hit game ends in either the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state (electric support) Is granted. When special figure C is selected, the assigned time is 100 fluctuations of special figure 1. In addition, if Special Figure E is selected when the special figure low probability state is not activated and the time is not activated, the latent probability change state is not provided after the big hit game is finished, and the state other than the special figure low probability state and the short period of time is not activated. When special figure E is selected, time is given after the big hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, the performance changes according to the number of fluctuations of the special figure only for the short time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance may be changed according to the number of fluctuations of the special figure. For example, it may be shifted to the special figure low probability state based on the fact that the special figure has changed by 100 in the special figure high probability state. Further, a falling lottery may be executed separately from the determination of success or failure, and when the falling lottery is won, the special figure high probability state may be shifted to the special figure low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when Special Figure A is selected as a result of the symbol drawing of Special Figure 1, a big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is 15 If the special figure B or special figure C is selected, the big hit game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed seven times (round). Is selected, the big hit game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed twice (round).

  In addition, if Special Figure E is selected when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated, the jackpot game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 100 ms is performed twice (round). When the special figure E is selected in a state other than the low probability state and the short time non-operating state, the big hit game in which the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is opened with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed twice (round). In other words, if the special figure E is selected when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated, it is difficult to enter the first attacker (variable winning opening 234). When the special figure E is selected, it is easy to enter the first attacker (variable winning opening 234). When special figure F (small winning) is selected, the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is opened twice with an opening time of 100 ms, and special figure E is displayed when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated. The same control as when selected is performed.

Note that the opening pattern of the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) and the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 146 (b), and for example, during the one big hit game You may perform control which opens and closes both an attacker (variable winning opening 234) and a 2nd attacker (variable winning opening 235). Also, when the special figure 1 is a big hit, only the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is always opened, and when the special figure 1 is a big hit, the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) is opened. May not be opened. Further, when a predetermined number of game balls have won the variable winning opening, the variable winning opening may be shifted to a closed state before reaching a predetermined opening time.
<Special Figure 2 Determination Table>

  FIG. 147 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, and FIG. 147 (b) shows the jackpot operation corresponding to each of the stop symbols of special figure 2. It is the figure which showed an example.

  In the special drawing 2 variable game symbol lottery, if the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, select the special figure a with a probability of 70/100, select the special figure b with a probability of 5/100, The special figure c is selected with a probability of 25/100. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss).

  When special figure a or special figure b is selected, the special figure high probability state (probability change) is entered after the big hit game is finished. However, when special figure c is selected, the special figure is low after the big hit game is finished. Transition to a probability state (non-probability change). In addition, when special figure a, special figure b, or special figure c is selected, time reduction (electric support) is given after the big hit game is ended in any of the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When special figure c is selected, the assigned time is set to 100 fluctuations of special figure 2.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, when the special drawing a is selected as a result of the symbol drawing of the special drawing 2, the big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is 15 When the special figure b or special figure c is selected, the big hit game for releasing the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed seven times (round).

In this way, in the special figure 2 variable game, there is no small hit with a small number of balls, the opening time of the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) during the big hit game is all 29000ms, and time is always given after the big hit game ends. Therefore, the game has a higher advantage than the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the variable prize opening 234 and the variable prize opening 235 can be made different for each special figure by differentiating the prize balls to be paid out to the player when a game ball is won, or by varying the maximum number of prizes in one opening. A difference can be provided in the degree of advantage.
<First sub-control unit main process>

  Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main process.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 403 described above, the first sub control unit 400 starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 406. First, in step S301, initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT described later to 0), and the like are performed.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is 33 or more. If the variable CNT is applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the determination process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. Here, the variable CNT is a variable added every 1 ms in a 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the variable CNT is 33 or more in step S302 is the process for determining whether or not 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S301 or step S303. Is synonymous with In step S303, after the variable CNT is initialized to 0, the process proceeds to step S304. Note that the process of step S302 is not limited to this example, and for example, the main loop process (steps S302 to S312) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times per second).

  In step S304, liquid crystal reception driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal reception driver processing, processing of a command received from a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) (control unit that controls the decorative symbol display device 208) is performed. In step S305, an effect control driver process is performed. In the effect control reception driver process, a command received from the second sub control unit 500 is processed.

  In step S306, effect control main loop processing is performed. In this effect control main loop process, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process described later is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed. For example, FIG. The lamp and sound are controlled based on the performance execution timing data shown in FIG.

  In step S307, a lamp control main loop process is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306. In step S308, sound control main loop processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound control main loop process, control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306.

  In step S309, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, the light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process in step S307. In step S310, sound driver processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound driver process, the sound output from the speaker 120 is controlled via the sound control circuit 431 based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop process in step S308.

  In step S311, liquid crystal communication driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal communication driver process, a process of transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) is performed. In step S312, the effect control unit communication driver process is performed. In the effect control communication driver process, the process proceeds to step S302 after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 and the like.

The first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S302 to S312 except for interruption due to a command reception interrupt process, a 1ms timer interrupt process, a 10ms timer interrupt process, or a DMA interrupt process, which will be described later. .
<Command reception interrupt processing>

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S401, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.
<1ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a 1 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes a 1 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S501, the process ends after adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406.
<10ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4D is a flowchart showing the flow of 10 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (in this example, 10 ms), and executes a 10 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S601, the first sensor reading process is performed. In the next step S602, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a detection signal of the second output setting switch 194 is acquired via the sensor circuit 428 (see FIG. 48), and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as a player setting value. Processing to memorize is performed. In the second sensor reading process, a detection signal from another switch is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408. <DMA interrupt process>

  Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5E is a flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt notifying the end of the DMA transfer, and executes a DMA interrupt process triggered by this DMA interrupt. In step S <b> 701, after performing various processes accompanying the end of the DMA transfer, the process ends.
<Production control main loop processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149 (a), the effect control main loop process (step S in the first sub-control unit main process will be described. FIG. 149 (a) shows the flow of the effect control main loop process. It is a flowchart to show.

In step S801 of the effect control main loop process, the command of the main control unit 300 stored in the command storage area of the RAM 408 is acquired. In step S802, the status is updated based on the acquired command. Here, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 provides a status management area in a part of the storage area of the RAM 408, and stores various statuses in the area. In step S803, an electric-chu-long opening effect (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S804, the other effect control main loop process is performed, and then the process ends.
<Electric Chulong opening effect>

  Next, the electric long open effect (step S803) in the effect control main loop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the flow of the electric-chu long opening effect.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in the RAM 408 is off or on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2406. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2402. Here, in this example, the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is set to ON during the period of the effect performed based on the determination result of the special figure, and is set to OFF during the period other than the effect. Flag.

  In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is a win, and in the case of a win (in this example, the stop symbol of the normal figure is the normal figure A or the normal figure B), the process proceeds to step S2403. In the case of deviation (in this example, the usual stop symbol is usual figure C), the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary figure is the ordinary figure A. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2404, where the effect data corresponding to the effect of the successful pattern is set. In the example, in the case where the usual figure stop symbol is ordinary figure B), the process proceeds to step S2405 to set production data corresponding to the production of the failure pattern A, and the process proceeds to step S2406. Here, in the production of the success pattern of the present example, notification (turbo button notification) indicating that the turbo button 902 is pressed is performed. A specific example of turbo button notification will be described later.

  In step S2407, an electric-chu long open gasse effect execution lottery process is performed, and in the next step S2408, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S2407 has been won. Production data corresponding to the production is set, and the process proceeds to step S2406. On the other hand, if the lottery in step S2407 is not won, the process proceeds to step S2406 without setting the effect data. In step S2406, after the other electric long opening effect control process is performed, the process ends.

  The production data of the failure pattern A and the failure pattern B may be different data or the same data. In addition, an example in which a success pattern is always produced when the success / failure determination result is normal is shown, but when the success / failure determination result is normal, an effect lottery is performed and the effect lottery is won. You may comprise so that the production | generation of a success pattern may be performed only in the case.

In addition, since the game stand in this embodiment has the above-described configuration of the electric-chu long open, an opportunity to launch a game ball toward the right side of the game board surface on which the electric-chu is arranged even in a low-probability state. There is. Since the electric Chu in the present embodiment is arranged on the right side of the game board surface, it cannot be won if it is not made to the right, but this is not limited to this. There may be, and it may be arranged in the position which can win a prize from both right and left. Moreover, the structure which never wins according to the direction which launches a game ball may be sufficient, and the structure where the other winning rate becomes worse than one may be sufficient.
<Turbo button notification>

Next, an example of the turbo button notification described above will be described.
<Turbo Button Notification / Example 1-1>

  FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-1 in time series. In the following drawings, the turbo button 804g is exaggerated above the firing handle 134 in order to explain whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed. In addition, the turbo button may actually be provided on the upper plate 126, or may be provided on the upper plate 126 while being provided on the back surface of the firing handle 134.

  As described above, in the game area 124 of the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at the center, the general start port 228a is disposed on the left side, the general start port 228b, the second special view on the right side. A start opening 232 and a second variable winning opening 235 are arranged, and a first special figure starting opening 230 and a first variable winning opening 234 are arranged at the lower center.

  FIG. 5A shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal state, and the player operates the launch handle 134 to launch a ball into the gaming area 124. Since this normal state is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 is conditioned on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, as shown in FIG. Using the display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) of “release turbo” is performed using the first display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 and “release turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120 at the first volume. Note that the notification execution condition is not limited to pressing a button. For example, the configuration that can detect the passage of a game ball provided on the right side of the board (for example, the normal start port 228a or the second variable winning port 235), Notification may be given when passage is detected.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been detected after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the first turbo button notification shown in FIG. As a condition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to perform second turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g. In this example, as a second turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “Warning to release the turbo button immediately” is used by using a second display area larger than the first display area. At the same time, a voice (warning sound) “Please release the turbo button now” is output from the speaker 120 at a second volume higher than the first volume.

  If such turbo button notification is performed, an operation leading to a player's disadvantage can be stopped, and the player's willingness to play may be sustained in some cases. In addition, it may be possible for an amusement store to prevent an excessive profit from being given to a player.

  In this example, in the second turbo button notification, the display using the second display area larger than the first display area used in the first turbo button notification is performed. The second display area is set at a position where the visibility of the decorative symbol, the hold icon, and the variation icon displayed simultaneously on 208 is not hindered.

  Further, in this example, an example is shown in which the turbo button is notified by a warning display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and a warning sound by the speaker 120. For example, by pressing the turbo button 804g, an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. You may be encouraged to stop. In this case, the vibration amount may be different between the first turbo button notification and the second turbo button notification, or the first turbo button notification is not vibrated but only the second turbo button notification is vibrated. May be. In addition, the turbo button 804g may be prompted to stop pressing the turbo button 804g by causing the turbo button 804g to emit light or blink.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 passes a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) even after the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected (even after the player stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g). Until then, the second turbo button notification is continued using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the case of performing turbo button notification using the turbo button 804g, the second turbo button notification may be terminated when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-2>

  FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-2 in time series. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the first sub control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during the normal reach in the normal state, the first sub control unit 400 notifies the first turbo button notification. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the production of the super reach in the normal state, the second turbo button notification is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, during the super reach, the second turbo button notification is performed in order to move the display of the decorative symbol in the reach state to the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display area and reduce the display. In addition, at least a part of the display of the decorative design may be displayed on the character display by the second turbo button notification, and conversely, the second turbo button may be displayed on the display of the decorative design. You may superimpose and display at least one part of the character display by alerting | reporting. At this time, by superimposing one display on the other display, the other display may be completely invisible to the player.

Further, in the second turbo button notification during the super reach, the warning sound by the speaker 120 may be stopped and only the warning display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed. With such a configuration, the warning sound from the speaker 120 does not make it difficult to hear the sound during super reach, and the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Conversely, during the second turbo button notification, the sound that was originally reported during the super reach may not be notified. When turbo button notification is performed in a plurality of notification modes (sound, display, vibration, etc.), the first turbo button notification is performed in all notification modes during reach, and at least one notification mode is used during super reach. You may perform 2nd turbo button alerting | reporting by changing or canceling.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-3>

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-3 in time series. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the mode of turbo button notification according to the state of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g when the ball passes through the general opening 228b.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decoration on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected when the sphere passes through the general opening 228b. Using the symbol display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, the character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sound (warning sound) “release the turbo” is generated. Output from the speaker 120.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5C, the first sub-control unit 400 has a decorative design on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected when the ball passes through the general opening 228b. The display device 208 is used to provide a third turbo button notification that prompts the firing handle 134 (dial 806 thereof) to rotate to the left. In this example, as a third turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “return the handle to the left” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (return the handle to the left) ( Warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

According to this example, optimal notification can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation means, and the player's profit may be increased. It should be noted that the game ball passed through the normal start port 228a while the first and second turbo button notifications were being executed (the turbo button was released or the launch handle was twisted to the left). Based on the detection, the notification may be stopped, or the notification may be continued for a certain time.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-4>

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-4 in time series. FIG. 6A shows a state in which the gaming state is an electric support probability change state (a special high-probability normal figure high-probability state), and the player is operating a launching handle 134 to launch a ball into the game area 124. . Since this electric support probability changing state is a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Strike promotion notification. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the right stroke promotion notification, and a character display of “right stroke” and an animation display in which a plurality of right-pointing arrows are moved in the right direction are performed.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in (b) of the figure, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after performing the right stroke promotion notification shown in (a) of the figure. The symbol display device 208 is used to notify that the turbo button 804g is being pressed while the turbo button 804g is being pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display “turbo in progress” and an animation display in which a plurality of right-pointing arrows are moved to the right (in comparison with “right-handed” display). The arrow moves quickly to the right), and a translucent aura is displayed on the edge of the screen, and the running Yoshimune is accelerating.

  Here, the notification that changes the mode based on the reception of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g may be related to the lottery result, or may be notified regardless of the lottery result. good.

  In other words, the right-handed promotion notification that is performed before pressing the turbo button 804g and the turbo-button-pressing notification that is performed after pressing the turbo button 804g share the same animation display for moving a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right. The character display is different. As described above, only a part of the notification mode may be different between the notification performed before the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g and the notification performed after the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g (the notification mode of other parts is common), All notification modes may be different.

  According to this example, information that is advantageous to the player can be provided by the right-handed promotion notification, and it can be easily confirmed that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted. May give a sense of security to the person. Further, since the mode can be changed depending on whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed, the pressing of the turbo button 804g can be promoted.

  FIG. 3C shows a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game. The jackpot start interval state is a normal state (normally low probability state and no variable winning opening is opened), but as shown in FIG. 4D, in the big hit game (big winning state), the second variable winning slot 235 is provided. The first sub-control unit 400 stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the big hit start interval state. Thus, the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to do so is not performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect the turbo button 804g while the jackpot game is being executed. A notification is given while the turbo button is being pressed, which suggests that the pressing operation of the button 804g has been accepted. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display an animation that rotates a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the letter “T”. Note that when the turbo button 804g is not pressed, the circular image itself with the letter “t” does not have to be displayed, but it is displayed but not rotated or has a rotational speed. It may be displayed later than when pressed.

As in this example, the notification mode of the notification while the turbo button is pressed may be different depending on the gaming state (for example, in the electric support probability change state and the big hit state), or a part of them may be shared. The notification while the turbo button is pressed may be a moving image or a still image.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-5>

  FIGS. 155 and 156 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the fifth embodiment in time series. Although this example is in a normal state, as shown in FIGS. 156 (c) and 156 (d), when the normal / unusual determination result is normal figure A or universal figure B (the second special figure starting port 232 is set for a predetermined time). When the release control is performed), the right-handed state is recommended. Therefore, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g in the normal state of the present example, The first turbo button notification for urging to stop the pressing operation is not performed. (The first turbo button notification may not be performed at all times, or the first turbo button notification may not be performed only for a predetermined period when the ordinary figure A or ordinary figure B is won. In the latter case, the right warning including the first turbo button notification is performed in other periods.)

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to display a normal map related to the determination result of the normal map while the normal symbol display device 210 is changing in the normal state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b). A notice is given. In addition, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), in the general map notice, the image g1 (“help” indicates that the determination result of the normal map is a hit (in this example, the general map A or the general map B). Sphere image) marked with “”.

  Subsequently, in the normal state shown in FIG. 156 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 opens the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined period of time in accordance with the success / failure determination result of the usual figure. While performing an electric chew opening effect that suggests that control (electrical chow opening) is performed, a right-handed promotion notification is made to urge right-handing. In this example, as an electric chew release effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display the characters “helping chance is occurring”, and as a right-handed promotion notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display “right-handed”. "!" Is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (d), the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the execution of the electric chew release. The turbo button 804g pressing operation is notified to indicate that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted, and the sound effect is continuously output.

  In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display an animation that rotates a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the letter “T”. In addition, in this example, the animation display by the notification while the turbo button is pressed is superimposed on a part of the character display of “right-handed!” By the right-handed promotion notification, and a part of the electric Chu opening effect is changed. It is covered by the decorative pattern being displayed.

  The turbo button pressing notification may be applied as a turbo button pressing suggestion prompting the user to press the turbo button 804g when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected after the right stroke promotion notification. In this case, even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the display of the turbo button pressing suggestion notification may be continued, or another display is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the turbo button pressing suggestion notification. May be. In addition, while displaying a circular image with the letters “t”, the turbo button press notification is performed, and the “t” is selected based on the detection of the turbo button press operation during the notification. A circular image with letters may be rotated and displayed. In other words, the press-promotion notification and the press-in-progress notification may be associated and notified.

In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is normal, when the electric chew is opened for a long time, the content is permitted to be right-handed, but not limited to this, the launch direction is set for each gaming state. It may be completely specified. For example, in the same way as described above, the electric Chu may be long open even in the normal state, and even if the right-handed winning rate is better, the right-handed warning may be warned. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-6>

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-6 in time series. This example shows a state in which the operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed across both gaming states when the gaming state shifts from the electric support probability change state to the normal state.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 5A on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability changing state. A turbo button pressing notification that indicates that the pressing operation is accepted is performed. Note that the pachinko machine according to the present example is a number cut probability change machine (ST machine), and the gaming state shifts to the normal state from the next fluctuation of the fluctuation.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decoration as shown in FIG. 5B on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the gaming state shifts from the electric support probability change state to the normal state. The symbol display device 208 is used to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g or to make a right-hand stop notification for urging left-handed for a predetermined time (in this example, during the period until the special figure change ends). In this example, as a right-handed stop notification, a character display of “Please return to left-handed” (first warning display) and an animation display (second warning display) that moves multiple left-pointing arrows to the left In addition to using the decorative symbol display device 208, a voice (warning sound) “please return to left-handed” is output from the speaker 120.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g as shown in FIG. 10C on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the end of the right-handed stop notification. The first turbo button notification that prompts the user to perform is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) of “release turbo” is performed using the first display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 and “release turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120 at the first volume.

According to this example, even when the gaming state changes during the pressing operation of the turbo button 408g, appropriate notification can be performed, and thus the player's profit may be increased. The content is the reverse of this example, but if the button continues to be pressed for a period during which the button operation is not permitted from the period during which the turbo button is allowed to be pressed, the button is pressed during the period when the button is not allowed. In such a case, it is not necessary to notify the hazard that is originally performed. If the button is released during a period when it is not permitted and the button is operated again, a warning notification may be issued again.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-7>

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-7 in time series. This example shows a state in which an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed during the demonstration in the normal state.

  The states shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B are states where the demonstration is started on the condition that a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the stop of the special figure fluctuation in the normal state. In this example, when the demonstration (simulated game) shown in FIG. 5B is started, the decorative symbol and hold icon display area displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. The change icon display area is erased and the characters “DEMO” are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4C, the first sub-control unit 400 does not perform turbo button notification even when detecting the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during the demonstration, as shown in FIG. In addition, during the demonstration, a left-handed promotion notification for urging left-handed is performed on the condition that a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected and the ball has passed through the normal opening 228b. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the left-handed promotion notification to display the characters “return to left-handed”.

In other words, this example is configured such that notification is performed when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed during symbol variation display. Further, for example, even when the player releases the handle immediately after the game ball is launched in the state shown in FIG. 5C, and continues to press the turbo button 804g, as shown in FIG. Warning notification may be performed. That is, the warning notification may be a notification that is slightly delayed from the timing at which the right strike is actually performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-8>

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-8 in time series. This example shows a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed during the small hit state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is winning (small hit), and a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the small hit (in this example, decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3) (B) is a state in which a small hit game is started.

  Since this small hit state is a gaming state in which the opening control of the second special figure starting port 232 is performed and the second variable winning port 235 can be opened, the first sub-control unit 400 is shown in FIG. As described above, the decorative pattern display device 208 is used to make a right-handed promotion notification that prompts a right-handed person. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as a right stroke promotion notification to display a character display of “right strike” and a still image with a right-pointing arrow. The right-handed indicator lamp 224) is turned on.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the decoration as shown in FIG. 10C on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after performing the right stroke promotion notification shown in FIG. Using the symbol display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (warning sound) “release the turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120. At this time, the display position of the character “right-handed” is changed based on the detection of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g.

  In other words, in this example, although it is inconspicuous, a warning notification will be given if the player actually presses the turbo button and tries to make a right turn, even though a “right-handed” display that prompts the player to make a right turn is displayed. Is executed.

In addition, in this example, when right-handed acceleration notification is performed after the right-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. It is not necessary to perform notification.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-9>

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-9 in time series. This example shows an example in which another image is hidden by a notification while the turbo button is being pressed or a notification while the turbo button is being pressed is hidden by another image.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a notification while the turbo button is being pressed on condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability change state. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display “turbo in progress” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  In this example, the decoration is changed during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the electric support probability changing state shown in FIG. 5A or during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decoration symbol in the reach state in the electric support positive changing state shown in FIG. There is a case where a display is made such that a notification is superimposed on the symbol while the turbo button is pressed. According to this example, the visibility of the notification while the turbo button is being pressed can be improved, and the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g can be surely confirmed by the notification while the turbo button is being pressed. Since it can be confirmed, there is a case where a sense of security can be given to the player.

  On the other hand, during the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 10C, there is a case where the decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the notification while the turbo button is pressed. During the super reach shown in FIG. There is a case where the notification while the turbo button is pressed is made invisible by the super reach production. According to this example, it is possible to improve the visibility of displays and effects important to the player, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed by a notification during the turbo button pressing operation. May give you a sense of security.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) according to the present example includes a notification means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of notifying at least a plurality of notifications and a launching means (for example, capable of firing at least a game ball). , And a launch handle 134), wherein at least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a turbo button press notification (“turbo” shown in FIG. 154 (b)). Character display of “medium” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right)), and in the first launch control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launch means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on the first launch characteristic (normal launch)) reduces the number of game balls. The second firing control state is at least different from the first firing control state, and the launching means is at least in a first period (eg, pressing a turbo button 804g). In the turbo state by the operation), the first firing control state is entered, and the launching means is in the normal state by at least the second period (for example, the suspension of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) In the second period), and the notification means is capable of at least starting notification of the first notification in the first period. It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the first launch control state by the first notification. There may be a case where it is possible to provide a game table that can be operated and has characteristics of launching means.

  The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a first launch characteristic (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and The launching means in the launch control state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a second launch characteristic (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the second launch characteristic is It may be a characteristic different from the one firing characteristic.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to launch a game ball with different launch characteristics.

  Further, the notification unit may not notify at least the first notification in the second period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second launch control state by the first notification, so that the player plays a game in accordance with the state of the launching unit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification (for example, a right-handed promotion notification (“right-handed” shown in FIG. 154 (a) and a plurality of right-pointing arrows in the right direction). In the second notification, the first notification (for example, the first turbo button notification shown in FIG. 153 (b) is displayed (character display “warning”) (warning display). ) And the voice (warning sound)) “separate the turbo”), and the gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a normal state), and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, electric support). The probable state) and the launcher Is in the first launch control state at least in the third period, and the notification means is capable of at least starting notification of the second notification in the third period, The first period may be a period during the first gaming state, and the third period may be a period during the second gaming state.

  The first operation means (for example, the turbo button 804g) provided at least at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first period is a period during which the first operation means is at least operated. The second period may be a period during which the first operating means is not operated at least.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a third notification (for example, a turbo button pressing operation promotion notification (character display “turbo standby” shown in FIG. 175 (d))). The means does not at least notify the third notification in the first period, and the notification means can at least start notification of the third notification in the second period, Also good.

  In addition, a plurality of the notification means (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notification means”) (for example, a decorative symbol device device 208, a speaker 120, various lamps, and an effect movable body) are provided, and at least of the plurality of notification means One is a first notification means, at least one of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means, and the first notification means is the first notification means in the first period. The second notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the first notification in the first period.

  In addition, the first notification by the second notification unit may be started after the first notification by the first notification unit.

  The launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball when a player performs a launch operation, and the launch means is a game when the player has not performed a launch operation. It may be one that does not fire a sphere.

  In addition, it comprises second operating means (for example, a firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player, and firing control means (for example, a firing control board 174) that can at least control the firing means, Is capable of launching a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 53 (a)) when the first condition is satisfied. The means is capable of launching a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 53A) when the second condition is satisfied, The first condition is that the firing control means rotates the firing handle 134 by the operation amount indicated by the first operation (for example, the symbol (u) in FIG. 53 (a)) in the first firing control state. Operation) is performed at least. The second condition is that when the firing control unit is in the second firing control state, the operation unit is operated by a second operation (for example, the firing handle 134 is operated by an operation amount indicated by reference sign (u) in FIG. 53 (a)). Rotation operation) is performed, the first operation is the same as the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It may be.

  With such a configuration, even if the state of the launch control means has changed, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player, providing a gaming table characterized by the launch means You may be able to.

  In addition, it comprises second operating means (for example, a firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player, and firing control means (for example, a firing control board 174) that can at least control the firing means, Is capable of launching a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 53 (a)) when the first condition is satisfied. The means is capable of launching a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 53 (a)) when the second condition is satisfied, When the third condition is satisfied, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball with a third launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (f) in FIG. 53 (a)), When the fourth condition is satisfied, the launching means has a fourth launch intensity ( For example, it is possible to launch a game ball with a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (K) in FIG. 53 (a), and the first condition is that the launch control means performs the operation in the second launch control state. Means including at least that a first operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (o) in FIG. 53A) is performed, and the second condition is In the second firing control state, the firing control means has performed a second operation on the operating means (for example, rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ka) in FIG. 53A). And the third condition includes at least that the first operation has been performed on the operation means in the first firing control state, and the third condition The fourth condition is the launch control The stage includes at least that the second operation is performed on the operation means in the first firing control state, and the first operation is different from the second operation, The first launch strength is different from the second launch strength, the third launch strength is different from the fourth launch strength, and the first launch strength and the second launch strength are different. The difference from the launch intensity may be greater than the difference between the third launch intensity and the fourth launch intensity.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the firing strength can be made stronger in the second state than in the first state even though it is the same operation, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by launching means. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the notification unit may be capable of at least reporting the first notification when the emission unit is in the first emission control state.

  Further, the notification mode may be changed for each gaming state, for example, notification may be performed when the launch state is switched from the first state to the second state, and the launch state is changed from the second state to the first state. You may alert | report when it switches to the state of. Further, the notification may be continuously performed during the turbo, or the notification may be performed only when the turbo is operated. In addition, the notification mode may be the same during the probable substation support and during the time reduction, the first mode is a notification indicating that the turbo is operating, and the second mode prompts the turbo to stop operating. Notification may be used. In addition, there may be a case where notification is not performed by pressing detection (in the period in which the player loses, even if pressing is detected, notification is not performed. In the period in which the player gains notification)

  Further, even when a game ball is not being fired (stop button pressed, number of remaining upper plate balls 0), it may be notified. Further, when the game ball is not being fired, it may be prevented from being notified even if the launch characteristics have changed. In addition, even when the launch state is switched, the notification mode may be different (or no notification is performed) when no game ball is fired. In spite of the period during which the player is likely to lose when the turbo is activated, even if the turbo is activated, the player is not angry (notification that is notified in the period during which the player loses is not notified. There is no notification.) There may be cases.

  In addition, when the notification is composed of multiple elements (display, sound, light emission, moving object operation, etc.), such as when the system is hit or immediately after power recovery, or during error notification, one or more elements may be May be hidden. However, other elements that are not hidden may be continuously notified. In addition, when a serious error that causes the game to stop is generated, a notification that prompts the player to stop firing the game ball may be performed based on detection of pressing of the turbo button.

  Further, other notifications may be hidden by the turbo notification, or the turbo notification may be hidden by other notifications. For example, some notifications are hidden, all notifications are hidden, turbo system notifications hide notifications (e.g., change notices, look-ahead notifications, hold, symbols, characters), and turbo notifications are hidden during super reach. The turbo notification is hidden by the movable object, the turbo notification is hidden by the launch position suggestion notification (“Please return to the left-handed”), the turbo system notification is hidden by the error notification, and the power supply is restored for a predetermined time. Is not notified (the launch characteristics are changed even during the period when the notification is not performed), the notification mode changes depending on the number of operations and the operation time, the notification mode changes to a completely different mode, When it is not performed (the player can stop the notification by any operation), the notification mode changes stepwise (related to a plurality of notification modes), and should not be operated The notification mode is changed according to the first operation count and the second operation count. A notification is given to a player who has entered a password, and notification is given to a player who has not entered a password. Not performed (even if the notification condition is achieved), the notification mode is changed according to the detection result of other detection means (the turbo button is turned on even though the touch sensor of the handle is OFF) In this case, since there is a risk of failure, it may be notified in an error-like manner different from the usual notification manner.

  Further, there may be a case where the notification timing is shifted for each notification means. In addition, the player may be notified at a position where it is difficult to see (a turbo button provided on the back of the handle shines). Further, the notification based on pressing of the turbo button may be notified on the right side from the center of the game board, and the notification based on non-pressing (released) of the turbo button may be notified on the left side from the center of the game board.

  In addition, when conditions relating to operation of the operation means are satisfied (for example, occurrence of a serious error or detection of fraud, operation by a store clerk, etc.), the firing of the launching means is stopped or one of a plurality of launch characteristics You may control so that the used launch cannot be performed. In addition, the first attacker that opens and closes at the time of the first big hit and the second attacker that opens and closes at the time of the second big hit, the first attacker and the second attacker are provided on different flow paths. Regardless, the game table may be one that can digest the first big hit and the second big hit at the same handle angle (the game ball can enter the attacker that opens and closes during the big hit). The first handle angle can digest both the first jackpot and the second jackpot, but the second handle angle can only digest the second jackpot and digests the first jackpot Can't). That is, even if the steering angle is the same, the firing characteristics can be changed by pressing the turbo button, so that the above contents can be realized.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button is performed, and the notification may be ended by performing an operation according to the notification (the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button). The notification is terminated based on the detection). In this case, the notification prompting the user to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. Good.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-1>

  161 and 162 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 2-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which notification regarding the turbo button 902 is performed based on a change in the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 makes a notification while the turbo button is being pressed on condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability change state. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 performs right-handed stop notification on condition that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support probability change state to the normal state. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. In this example, because the right-handed stop notification is given on the condition that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support probability change state to the normal state, the gaming state is not detected even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected. A right-handed stop notification is made when the power support change state is shifted from the normal state to the normal state. (Even when the turbo button is released and the handle is twisted to the right, a right-hand stop notification is given.)

  Further, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 does not detect the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g after performing the right-hand stop notification (the player presses the turbo button 804g). ), Or when a new pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the right-handed stop notification as shown in FIG. 161 (d) (after the right-handed stop notification is given, the player is The right-handed stop notification is continued even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed again after the pressing operation of the button 804g is stopped. According to this example, an appropriate operation method that matches the gaming state can be notified, and the player's profit may be increased.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 162 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 indicates that a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the right-handed stop notification (or the turbo button 804g The right-handed stop notification is terminated on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed since the pressing operation is stopped and the turbo state is switched to the normal state), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (f) In addition, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to perform the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (warning sound) “release the turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-2>

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 2-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which notification regarding the launch handle and notification regarding the turbo button 804g are simultaneously performed in the right-hand stop cancellation notification.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the player has made a right turn with the firing handle 134 in the normal state, and the first sub-control unit 400 has passed the normal start port 228b in the normal state. On the condition that this is detected, the right-hand stop cancellation notification shown in FIG. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. In other words, in this example, even when the turbo button 804g is not right-handed, a character display (second warning display) “Please release the turbo button” may be displayed. Is partly contradictory.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 5B is a state where the player has pressed the turbo button 804g in the normal state, and the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g in the normal state. (C) in the same manner as in the case of right-handed by the launching handle 134, on the condition that (or the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected when the ball passes through the normal opening 228b). The right-hand stop cancellation notification shown is performed. That is, in this example, even when the firing handle 134 is not right-handed, the character display (first warning display) may be displayed as “Please return the handle to the left”, and the actual operation and notification Is partly contradictory.

In the present gaming machine, it is possible to press the turbo button while twisting the handle to the right, so that the right-handed stop notification described above is consistent in such a situation. That is, one notification may or may not contradict depending on the situation.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-3>

  FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 2-3 in time series. This example shows an example in which a plurality of types of notifications are performed while the turbo button 804g is kept pressed.

  The state shown in FIG. 6 (a) is a special state variation display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, so the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. The first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, the character display (warning display) “Please release the turbo button” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice “Please release the turbo” ( Warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6B is a special state stop display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, so the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. On the condition that it is detected, the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is continued. In this example, the decorative symbol stop display has a higher priority for display than the first turbo button notification, and therefore the decorative symbol is displayed on the first turbo button notification.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6C is a jackpot confirmation display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, but a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, but the first sub-control unit 400 The first turbo button notification is not performed until the timing of the big hit start interval shown in FIG.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6D is a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game. Although the big hit start interval state is a normal state, right hitting is recommended in the big hit game (big hit state) that is started immediately thereafter, so the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208. The right-handed promotion notification is made to urge right-handing. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as a right-handed promotion notification, and the text “Press the turbo button to aim the right attacker!” Is displayed.

In this example, since the right-handed promotion notification is performed on the condition that the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot start interval state, the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected (the transition to the jackpot start interval state). Even when the player continues to press the turbo button 804g from the front), when the gaming state shifts to the big hit start interval state, the right-handed promotion notification is performed. That is, even if the player has already pressed the turbo button 804g, a notification that prompts the player to operate again is performed, so that the player who has continued to operate continues to feel uncomfortable.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-4>

  FIG. 165 and FIG. 166 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 2-4 in time series. In this example, notification that contradicts the actual operation of the turbo button 804g is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 165 (a) is a state in which notification is being made while the turbo button is being pressed in the power support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  The state shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the number of times of the variable game of the special figure reaches the specified number (100 in this example) in the number cut probability change machine (ST machine) and shifts to the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a right-handed hit on the condition that the number of special games has reached the specified number of times (100 in this example) during the power support probability change state. A right-handed stop notification is issued to prompt the stop. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. The game machine continues to execute this notification for a certain period regardless of the detection result of the transition.

  That is, in this example, even when the firing handle 134 is not right-handed, the character display (first warning display) may be displayed as “Please return the handle to the left”, and the actual operation and notification Is partly contradictory. In addition, in this example, even when a new pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not performed (when the turbo button 804g is pressed before the timing shown in FIG. 5B), “release the turbo button. May be displayed (second warning display), and the actual operation and the notification partially contradict each other.

  Further, in this example, in the normal state shown in the following (c) to (d), the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected, but the stop cancellation notification started at the timing of (b) in the same figure. continuing.

  In addition, in the big hit start interval shown in FIG. 166 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 continues the right-handed stop notification while the turbo button press operation suggestion notification that prompts the user to press the turbo button 804g (in this example, Character display “Press the turbo button!” And a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the “T” character in accordance with the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) ing.

That is, in this example, a notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g and a notification that prompts the user to press the turbo button 804g are simultaneously performed. According to this example, by making contradictory notifications, gameability can be improved, and new fun can be added to the game. The contradictory states due to the plurality of notifications are a plurality of patterns when the right-handed stop notification is normalized first, and when the turbo button press promotion notification is normally ended first There is. Further, the contradiction may be resolved by simultaneously finishing a plurality of notifications.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-6>

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 2-6 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state and the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g are common.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which notification is made while the turbo button is pressed in the electric support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  The state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the power support probability changing state shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the gaming state has changed regardless of the detection of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. Stop notification. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 10C is a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, regardless of the gaming state, and uses the decorative pattern display device 208 to make a right-handed notification. Stop notification.

  That is, in this example, the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g shown in FIG. According to this example, since the same notification is performed based on different factors, it may be possible to perform unexpected notification. Note that the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state and the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g do not have to be completely the same, as long as at least a part is common. In this way, it is not necessary to switch the notification mode for each condition, so that design and control become easy.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launching unit (for example, a launching device) capable of firing at least a game ball. 884), wherein one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a right-hand stop notification (“handle is displayed” shown in FIGS. 161 (b) to (d)). ”Return to the left” and “Please release the turbo button”)), and in the first firing control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launching means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)) launches at least a game ball. Possible The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is in the first launch control state at least in the first period. Yes, the launching means is in the second launch control state at least in the second period, and the notifying means can at least start notifying the first notice in the first period. The notification means does not start the first notification in the second period, and the notification means starts notification in the first period in the second period. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification can be continued (for example, during the period shown in FIGS. 161 (b) to 161 (d)) and at least notification can be made.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, the first notification can be continued even when the launching unit is changed from the first launch control state to the second launch control state. In some cases, an appropriate operation can be performed in accordance with this notification, and a game stand having characteristics of the launching means can be provided.

  In addition, the first notification is a notification that prompts the user to change to one of the first period and the second period (for example, right-hand stop cancellation notification shown in FIGS. 161 (b) to 161 (d)). (The character display “Please return the handle to the left” and the character display “Please release the turbo button”)).

  With such a configuration, the player can appropriately switch the state of the operation means in accordance with the first notification, and may be able to maintain the game motivation.

  In addition, the notification means can at least notify the first notification that has been started in the first period over a first time (for example, 30 seconds) in the second period. It may be.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification, and the notification unit is capable of starting at least a second notification in the second period, and the notification unit In the first period, the second notification that has been started in the second period can be continued at least, and the second notification is the first notification. Different notifications may be used.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications may be a third notification, and the notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the third notification in the first period. Good.

  In addition, the notification may be executed regardless of the detection result of the turbo button. For example, the turbo button is pressed based on the fact that the through button provided on the right side of the board detects the game ball without pressing the turbo button. It is also possible to notify the user to release (the notification content does not change even if it is released or not). Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through, it may be determined whether or not the turbo button has been pressed for the first time, and notification may be made based on the determination result.

  Further, although the turbo button is being pressed (for example, at the timing of changing the gaming state or the timing at which a specific determination result is derived), a notification that prompts the user to press the turbo button may be issued. . Further, the notification may be performed over a predetermined time. Further, the notification that is started regardless of the result of detecting the pressing of the turbo button may be terminated based on the result of detecting the pressing of the turbo button. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be a notification prompting the change of the launch characteristics. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be notification regarding the player's profit. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be a notification that is not related to the player's profit. The notification may be notified over a predetermined time.

  In addition, although notification based on the detection result is performed, notification that is not based on the detection result may be performed. For example, notification based on the detection result and notification based on the detection result may not be reported together. It may be. In addition, when the other notification is started while one notification is being executed, the notification that was being performed may be stopped (in normal gaming state, the warning is notified by pressing the turbo button immediately before the big hit. During the warning notification, symbol stop + right strike notification (notification based on the detection result of the turbo button is promoted) Notification based on the detection result is more effective than notification based on the detection result. You may make it alert | report for a long time (or short time).

In addition, notification based on the detection result and notification not based on the detection result may be performed at the same time. For example, the notification may be performed while performing the “return to the left” notification without using the detection result at the end of the right handing. Since the press of the auto button is detected, “return to the left notification” may be additionally performed based on the press detection. In addition, conflicting notifications may be performed at the same time. For example, based on the fact that the auto button was pressed during non-electric support, a “return to the left notification” is started, and Based on what is hit, "right-handed promotion (prompt to press the auto button) notification" may be performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-1>

  FIG. 168 and FIG. 169 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed during the electric support probability changing state.

  The state shown in FIG. 7A to FIG. 9B is a state in which the tutorial notification is started in the electric support probability changing state (not changing). The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the special figure variation game has not occurred for a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) during the power support probability change state, and uses the turbo button 804g. Make a tutorial notification to inform you how to use. Note that the tutorial notification in this example consists of a movie, and the progress is not changed by an operation by the player. (See below for cancellation)

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used during the period of FIGS. 168 (b) to 169 (f) to explain the location of the turbo button 804g (in this example, FIG. 168 (c) ), And the description of the function of the turbo button 804g (in this example, the “sphere strength” shown in FIG. 169 (e)). Is displayed in the animation display. Note that the tutorial notification is not limited to animation display, and may be constituted by one or a plurality of still images.

  In the tutorial notification, various configurations related to the turbo button (such as a handle and a turbo button) may be notified to the player through video and images. At this time, what can be visually recognized by the player is not an actual configuration but may be CG or the like. Further, it is not necessarily the same as the actual configuration, and deformation or the like may be applied.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that an operation according to the content of the tutorial notification (in this example, a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) is detected. Note that the tutorial notification end condition is not limited to the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and may be ended when the operation of other operation means is detected, or automatically when the tutorial notification is performed to the end. You may end it.

Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 performs tutorial notification on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the tutorial notification). It is configured to forcibly end (cancel). The forced termination condition for the tutorial notification is not limited to the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and may be forcibly terminated when the operation of other operation means is detected, or when the fluctuation of the special figure is started. You may kill it.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-2>

  FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 3-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed at the big hit start interval.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a special figure stop display in the normal state, and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 5B is a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs tutorial notification for notifying the usage method of the turbo button 804g using the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the state has shifted to the big hit start interval state.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to explain the location of the turbo button 804g at the timing shown in FIG. 7C (in this example, the character display “push” and the turbo button 804g). , An image indicating an arrow pointing to the right) by the turbo button 804g, and an animation for explaining a winning opening aimed at by right-handed hitting (in this example, a character display of “Enter!” And an image indicating an arrow pointing to the second variable winning opening 235) Display is in progress. In this example, since the big hit game is started immediately after the big hit start interval state and the opening control of the second variable prize opening 235 is performed, the timing shown in FIG. Even if the explanation related to the second variable prize opening 235 is performed in a state where the second variable prize opening 235 is opened, the player does not have a significant disadvantage because the second variable prize opening 235 opens immediately after.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 4D is a state where the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that the jackpot game has been started (the jackpot start interval state has ended).
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-3>

  171 and 172 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-3 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed during a normal state where right-handed is not recommended.

  The state shown in FIG. 10A to FIG. 10B is a state where tutorial notification is started in the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 is conditioned on the condition that the determination result of the special figure is a specific result (in this example, a failure) during the normal state, and that the fluctuation time of the special figure is a specific fluctuation time. Using the decorative symbol display device 208, the start notification display of the tutorial notification for notifying the usage method of the turbo button 804g is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which a tutorial notification start suggestion display is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 confirms that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, when special figure fluctuation is started and the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is out of date and a specific fluctuation timer is selected). As a condition, tutorial notification is started. Note that the tutorial notification start condition is not limited to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and may be terminated when an operation of another operation means is detected, or the tutorial notification may be automatically started.

  When the special figure change is started, a message “What is the turbo button?” Is displayed by the character 爺 and a chance button is displayed on the character Yoshimune side. When the press of the chance button is detected within a predetermined time, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 5C, and when the press of the chance button is not detected within the predetermined time, the effect ends. . Even if the pressing of the chance button is not detected, the effect may be advanced.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used during the period of FIGS. 171 (b) to 172 (f) to explain the location of the turbo button 804g (in this example, FIG. 171 (c) ) “What is a turbo button?” And “Looks for a button near the handle”), explanation of the function of the turbo button 804g (in this example, “ “What will happen?” And “Character display of“ The momentum of the sphere will change! ”).

  Note that the tutorial notification is not limited to animation display, and may be constituted by one or a plurality of still images. Also, the tutorial notification during a normal game may also serve as a preliminary announcement that suggests that the result of whether or not the special figure is successful, and the winning probability of the special figure variable game for which the tutorial notification is given will be notified by the tutorial notification. It may also serve as an advance notice that suggests that the winning probability of the special figure variable game is not lower.

  The state shown in FIG. 5G is a state where the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the tutorial notification has been performed to the end). Note that the tutorial notification end condition is not limited to the completion of the tutorial notification, and may be ended when the operation of the operation unit is detected.

  Further, in this example, during the tutorial notification shown in FIG. 5 (f), on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the first turbo button notification that prompts to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g ( In this example, the character display (warning display) “Please release the turbo button 804 g” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, although the operation described in the tutorial notification (the operation of pressing the turbo button 804g) is performed, notification that prompts the user to cancel the operation is performed.

In addition, after the tutorial notification shown in Fig. 5 (g), on the condition that the ball has passed through the general opening 228b, the right-hand stop notification is displayed (in this example, "Please return the handle to the left") (The first warning display) and the character display “second turbo display” (second warning display) are performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In other words, in this example, in spite of an event (entrance to the normal start port 228b) caused by the operation described in the tutorial notification (pressing operation of the turbo button 804g), a notification that prompts the user to stop the operation is performed. Yes. In other words, if an operation is performed as informed by the tutorial notification just because the tutorial notification is being performed, the user may be prompted to stop the operation. Although not shown, a part or all of the tutorial notification may be prevented by notification that prompts the user to stop the operation.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-4>

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 3-4 in time series. This example shows an example in which a tutorial notification according to a player's operation is performed.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to explain the location of the turbo button 804g and the function of the turbo button 804g during the jackpot game 2R. Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 explains the location where the turbo button 804g is arranged (this example) on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected at the timing shown in FIG. Then, using the decorative symbol display device 208, “character display that it is easy to digest a big hit if the turbo button near the handle is used” is performed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the location of the turbo button 804g is described (in this example, the text “Yes! That button is displayed”) Is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not shown, when another operation means is operated at this timing (for example, the chance button 136), an error may be notified, or the area where the turbo button 804g is provided. The player may be notified of the correct placement position of the turbo button 804g.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the function of the turbo button 804g is explained on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected (in this example, the momentum of the sphere while the button is pressed). Is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that another notification may be performed based on the player releasing the turbo button 804g during the notification.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-5>

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-5 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notifications regarding a plurality of operation means are simultaneously performed.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5A and the tutorial display shown in FIG. The right-handed explanation by In addition, you may display the animation which repeatedly performs the tutorial display shown to the figure (a), and the tutorial display shown to the figure (b).

  Specifically, in the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5A, an image display imitating the turbo button 804 and a character display “Turbo button ...” indicate that it is an explanation of the turbo button 804. The image display of holding the firing handle 134 with the hand and the character display “handle is...” Indicate that the firing handle 134 is explained.

  Further, in the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5B, an image display showing the state where the turbo button 804 is pressed and a character display “push!” Suggest a right-handed method by the turbo button 804 and the launch handle 134 is displayed. An image display showing a state of rotation and a character display “twist!” Suggest a right-handed method using the firing handle 134.

  Note that the tutorial notification described in the present embodiment may be notified immediately before the period when right-handed is recommended (during electric support, during big hits, etc.), or right-handed is recommended. It may be notified during the period. Also, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, both notifications do not need to be repeatedly executed in the same cycle, the cycle may be different for each notification, and one notification is periodically repeated. It does not have to be a thing, and it may end in one time.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launching unit (for example, a launching device) capable of firing at least a game ball. 844), and at least one of the plurality of notifications is a tutorial notification (for example, the tutorial notifications shown in FIGS. 168 (b) to 169 (f)), The launching means in one launch control state (for example, a control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and a second launch control state (eg, first The launching means in the launch characteristic (normal launch) control state) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the second launch control state is the first launch control state. The firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period, and the firing means is in the second firing control in at least the first period. The first period is a period that is operated at least by the first operation, and the second period is a period that is operated at least by the second operation. The tutorial notification is notification including at least notification regarding the first operation (for example, description of the location of the turbo button 804g and description of the function of the turbo button 804g). It is a game stand.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, since the tutorial notification regarding the first operation can be performed, the player can perform an appropriate operation after grasping the information regarding the operation according to the tutorial notification, and the launching unit. In some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming table with features.

  The first operation means (for example, a turbo button 804g) provided at least at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first operation is an operation in which the first operation means is at least operated. (For example, pressing operation), and the second operation is an operation in which the first operation means is not operated at least (for example, stopping the pressing operation). Good.

  With such a configuration, the first operation unit can easily switch between the first state and the second state, and the convenience of the player may be improved.

  In addition, the tutorial notification is a notification that suggests an operation method of the first operation means for shifting the first period to the second period (for example, “Press” shown in FIG. 170 (c)). ”And an image display of an arrow pointing to the turbo button 804g) may be included.

  With such a configuration, the player can know the operation method of the first operation means by tutorial notification, and may be able to perform an appropriate operation.

  The gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state. , At least one of the plurality of gaming states is in a second gaming state, and the launching means is in the second launch control state in at least a third period, and the second Is a period during the first gaming state, the third period is a period during the second gaming state, and the second period is more gaming than the third period. It is a period unfavorable to the user, and the notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the tutorial notification in the second period.

  Further, it may include a symbol display unit capable of displaying at least a symbol variation display, and the notification unit may be capable of at least initiating notification of the tutorial notification in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

  In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go judging means capable of at least executing the go / no-go judgment, and the notifying means is capable of at least starting the informing of the tutorial notice when the first go / no-go judgment result is derived by the go / no-go judging means. May be.

  Further, the symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a losing symbol variation when the losing is derived by the success / failure determination unit, and the notifying device displays the tutorial during the display of the losing symbol variation. The notification may be at least capable of starting notification.

  Also, the player includes at least second operation means (for example, a dial 806) that can be operated, and further includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least effect display. In the fourth period, the first launch control state is set, and the launching means can launch at least a game ball in an area on the right side of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed area”). The fourth period is a period in which the second operation means is operated at least in the third operation, and the launching means in the first launch control state is At least the game ball can be fired in the right-handed area, and the tutorial notification is a notification that suggests one of the first operation and the third operation. Notification (e.g., shown in FIG. 174 (a), and tutorials indication as to the turbo button 804 g, shown in FIG. (B), either one of the tutorial displays about the handle 806) to include or may be that of.

  Also, the player includes at least second operation means (for example, a dial 806) that can be operated, and further includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least effect display. In the fourth period, the first launch control state is set, and the launching means can launch at least a game ball in an area on the right side of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed area”). The fourth period is a period in which the second operation means is operated at least in the third operation, and the launching means in the first launch control state is A game ball can be fired at least in the right-handed area, and the tutorial notification includes at least a notification indicating both the first operation and the third operation (example) If, shown in FIG. 174 (a), and tutorials indication as to the turbo button 804 g, shown in FIG. (B), may be that the tutorial both display) relating to the handle 806.

  Moreover, you may perform the tutorial alert | report regarding a turbo button during a demonstration. Further, the tutorial notification may be canceled when the symbol variation is started. Further, as a tutorial notification, an operation for changing the launch characteristics may be illustrated. Further, even during the tutorial notification, depending on the gaming state, a warning may be given if the tutorial notification is followed.

  Also, the probability that the tutorial notification will be interrupted when launching according to the tutorial notification (turbo-pressed right-handed) is less likely to be interrupted than when the launch is not following the tutorial notification. Good. The tutorial notification may be started by a player's operation. Further, the tutorial notification may be canceled by the player's operation. Further, the turbo button press may be detected during the tutorial notification, and the notification mode may be changed based on the detection result (for example, the tutorial notification may be changed according to the player's operation mode). May be).

  Moreover, you may perform the tutorial alerting | reporting regarding a turbo button during a pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may make it the alerting | reporting aspect of a tutorial differ with the timing and conditions performed. Further, the tutorial notification may be more easily executed in the case of the loss variation than in the big hit variation (for example, the tutorial notification may not be performed in the case of the big hit variation).

  Further, the tutorial notification may be partially or entirely hidden by other notification notifications (regardless of the change / prefetching notification). Also, tutorial notification may be executed in accordance with the fluctuation lottery result (for example, as a result of the fluctuation, a state where the turbo button may be pressed (preferably pressed) is started. The tutorial notification may be executed as a notification of the start of the state). In addition, the changing tutorial effect may be a notification that the change is a big hit.

  Further, the tutorial notification may be performed immediately before the period in which the game is actually performed using the turbo button is started. Also, the tutorial notification may be performed during the big hit. Moreover, when the conditions regarding operation of an operation means are materialized, you may control so that the launch of a launching means may be stopped, or the launch using one of several launch characteristics cannot be performed.

  In addition, the first attacker that opens and closes at the time of the first big hit and the second attacker that opens and closes at the time of the second big hit, the first attacker and the second attacker are provided on different flow paths. Regardless, the first jackpot and the second jackpot can be digested at the same handle angle (a game ball can be entered into an attacker that opens and closes during the jackpot). The first handle angle can digest both the first jackpot and the second jackpot, but the second handle angle can only digest the second jackpot and digests the first jackpot I can't.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button may be performed, and the notification may be terminated by performing an operation according to the notification. For example, the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button. The notification may be terminated based on the fact that this is detected. Further, the notification that prompts the player to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 4-1>

  175 and 176 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 4-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which turbo button notification is performed using a combination of decorative symbols.

  The state shown in FIG. 175 (a) is a state in which the decorative pattern combination in the reach state (in this example, decoration 7- (changing) -decoration 7) is displayed, and the state shown in FIG. 175 (b) is This is a state in which the turbo button notification is started using the decorative pattern combination in the reach state.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs turbo button notification using the decorative symbol combination in the reach state on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the decorative symbol combination in the reach state. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to (c), as a turbo button notification, among the decorative symbol combinations in the reach state, the transparency is set before the decorative symbol image (↓) being displayed in a variable manner. Animation display is performed in which a rectangular image with the characters “turbo” is gradually appearing.

  Note that this turbo button notification may also serve as a preliminary notification indicating that the determination result of the special figure being fluctuated is a specific determination result (for example, special figure D (sudden probability change)). It may also serve as an advance notice that suggests that the result is a determination result (for example, loss or small hit). In addition, when a rectangular image with a transparent “turbo” character as shown in FIG. 5B is displayed, the special figure D may be always displayed in a stopped state, or the discontinuity is displayed in a stopped state. It may be done. Further, the probability that the probability change is suddenly generated may be higher when the rectangular image is displayed than when the rectangular image is not displayed.

  According to this example, since it is possible to suggest whether or not a special figure is changing, it is possible to suggest an event (such as an electric-chu release) that is executed based on the result of the success / failure determination. You may be able to increase your expectations. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the player's sense of immersion in the game by giving notifications related to before the event occurs and during the event.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which a big hit game in which the opening control of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is performed is being executed. Since this big hit game is a game state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a right-handed promotion notification that encourages right-handing. In this example, animation display for moving a plurality of right-pointing arrows in the right direction is performed as right-handed promotion notification.

  In this example, simultaneously with this right-handed promotion notification, a turbo-button pressing operation promotion notification that indicates that it is a recommended period for pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display the characters “Waiting for turbo”. In addition, in the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification of this example, in order to increase the relevance with the turbo button notification performed immediately before the big hit game, the notification using the character “turbo” is illustrated, but other characters are used. The notification which used the image which imitated the turbo button 804g may be sufficient.

  Further, the states shown in FIGS. 176 (e) and (f) are the end intervals for shifting from the big hit state to the electric support probability changing state, and the state shown in FIG. 176 (g) is the electric support probability changing state. In the big hit state (end interval), the first sub-control unit 400 continues the right stroke promotion notification that prompts the user to make a right strike, and sets the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification as a “turbo standby” character display → Character display of “Turbo activation !!” → Image display imitating turbo button 804, character display “turbo button ...” + image display indicating that turbo button 804 has been pressed, and character display “press!” The order is changed.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which notification is being made while the turbo button is being pressed in the power support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.
<Turbo button notification / Example 4-2>

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 4-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which turbo button notification is performed based on a prefetch result of a special figure.

  The state shown in FIG. 7B is a state in which turbo button notification is performed based on the result of prefetching the special figure being changed and on hold. The first sub-control unit 400 performs turbo button notification based on the prefetching result of the special figure being changed (or the prefetching result of the special figure on hold). In this example, as a turbo button notification, a band-like image display with the letters “in preparation for turbo” and a hold corresponding to the second hold based on a pre-read result of a special figure corresponding to the second hold The icon “Turbo” is added to the icon.

  In this example, simultaneously with the increase in the special figure hold, an effect of blinking the turbo button 804g is started, and the effect is continued until the special figure variable game corresponding to the increased hold is completed. The effect may be ended before the special figure variable game corresponding to the increased hold is ended, or a gaze effect that does not give a right-handed opportunity while performing the effect may be performed. When the effect is executed, the special figure D may always be stopped and displayed, or a big hit or a small hit different from the special figure D may occur. Furthermore, the effect that “Turbo” is displayed on the hold icon and the effect that “Turbo is being prepared” may be separately executed.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launching unit (for example, a launching device) capable of firing at least a game ball. 844), and a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute the determination (for example, the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S229 shown in FIG. 85 and the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231 shown in FIG. 85). A gaming table, wherein at least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, turbo button notification using a decorative combination of reach states shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and (c)) And the launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball, and the launching means in the second launch control state emits at least a game ball. The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is configured to be in the first launch control state at least in the first period. The launching means is in the second launch control state at least in the second period, and the notifying means has a first success / failure determination result (for example, In the case of special figure D (sudden probability change)), the first notification can be notified at least, and the first notification is a notification including at least a notification regarding the first launch control state. It is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and may have an expectation that some profit may be obtained by the first notification. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having a characteristic launching means.

  In addition, a symbol display means (for example, the second special figure display device 214) capable of displaying at least the symbol fluctuation display is provided, and the notification means finishes the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first success / failure determination result. Alternatively, the notification of the first notification may be terminated.

  With such a configuration, the first notification can be performed as the advance notification of the change, and the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced.

  In addition, a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display is provided, and the notification unit is configured to start displaying the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success / failure determination result. In addition, the first notification may be started at least.

  With such a configuration, the first notification can be performed as the pre-reading advance notification of the variation after the variation, and the player's expectation may be further enhanced.

  Further, the notification unit may not notify the first notification when the second determination result is derived by the determination unit.

  In addition, the notifying means, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification,

  The notification means is capable of notifying at least the second notification when the second determination result is derived by the determination unit, and the second notification is the first notification and the second notification. The same notification mode is included, and the second notification may include a notification mode different from the first notification.

  Further, the gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, , Non-electric support state), at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, electric support state), and the gaming table is When the determination result is derived, it is possible to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the first gaming state, the launching means is in the first firing control state. In this case, it may be more disadvantageous for the player than in the case where the launching unit is in the second firing control state in the second gaming state.

  In addition, a turbo button press-promoting notification may be performed with a pre-reading notice. Moreover, the notification mode of the hold icon includes a mode related to a notification mode that is notified when the firing characteristics of the launching unit are changed. (At least a part of the mode that is notified while the launch characteristics are changed is the same as at least a part of the display mode of the hold icon.)

  In addition, a turbo middle symbol (decorative symbol suggesting that it is in the first state) is notified when at least one symbol aspect of the symbol combination indicating the lottery result changes the firing characteristics of the launching means. It may consist of a mode related to the notification mode. Moreover, about the general figure long release effect, you may make it notify about turbo according to the lottery result of a normal figure change, and the information about turbo in the effect and the information which is not related to turbo are a part of the aspect. May be common and other parts may not be common.

In addition, when the launch characteristics are changed and when the launch characteristics are not changed, the execution probability of a specific effect may be different. For example, even if there is an effect that is not executed with one characteristic Good. In addition, not only the start of the turbo state is notified, but the advance notification may be made that the turbo state ends. In addition, a phenomenon (gase effect (false effect)) different from the notified content may occur.
<Turbo button notification / Example 5-1>

  FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 5-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the gaming state.

  In this example, in the normal state (normal state immediately before the electric support state starts) shown in FIG. 10A, turbo button notification using the decorative combination of the reach state described with reference to FIG. In the big hit state (end interval) shown in FIG. 4B, the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the electric support state shown in FIG. 10C, the right-handed promotion notification described with reference to FIG. 176G is performed, and the normal state shown in FIG. In the normal state), the left-handed promotion notification for urging the left-hand is performed in a manner different from the notification manner shown in FIGS.

  According to this example, in the normal state immediately before the electric support state starts, in addition to performing the turbo button notification using the decorative symbol combination shown in FIG. In the state (end interval), since the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 5B is performed, the player can prepare for the right-handed stroke using the turbo button 804g before shifting to the electric support state. In the electric support state, it becomes possible to obtain profits more reliably. For this reason, it is possible to improve the player's impression of the game table and to increase the operating rate of the game table.

Further, in the normal state immediately after the power support state is over, the left-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. 5D is performed, but the notification regarding the operation of the turbo button 804g is not performed. The player's willingness to play is not reduced more than necessary. Further, an operation suitable for the game can be notified to the player who has made a right turn with the launch handle 134.
<Turbo button notification / Example 5-2>

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 5-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the player's degree of advantage.

  In this example, at the start of the big hit with a ball shown in FIG. 10 (a), the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification described with reference to FIG. 176 (f) is performed. At the start of the big hit with a ball, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 is longer than that at the start of a big hit without a ball as shown in FIG. Since it is in a state, the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification is actively performed. Thereby, the winning probability to the 2nd variable winning opening 235 can be raised, and a player's willingness to play may be improved.

  On the other hand, at the start of a big hit without a ball shown in FIG. 5B, a notification that a part of the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification is changed to the character display of “turbo?” Is performed. At the start of the big hit without a ball, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 is shorter than that at the start of the big hit with a ball shown in FIG. Therefore, while notifying that the right-handed stroke is to be made, the notification that promotes the pressing operation of the turbo button is not actively performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing useless operations (operations that are hardly linked to profits), and it may be possible to avoid a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  According to this example, when the right-handed operation is advantageous for the player, a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the turbo button is performed, and when not, a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the turbo button is performed. Since it is configured so that there is no inconvenience to the player, the impression of the turbo button can be improved and the game motivation can be increased.

  Moreover, according to the game stand (for example, pachinko machine) according to the present example, a notification means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launch means (for example, capable of firing at least a game ball) , And a launcher 844), wherein one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a left-handed promotion notification for promoting left-handedness shown in FIG. 178 (d)). The launching means in a first launch control state (eg, a control state based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is capable of at least launching a game ball, and is in a second launch control state (eg, The launching means in the first launch characteristic (control state by normal launch) is capable of launching at least a game ball, and the second launch control state is the first launch control state. At least in a different state The launching means is in the first launch control state in at least a first period, and the launching means is in the second launch control state in at least a second period. The gaming table takes a first state when operated in a first operation in the first period, and the gaming table operates in a second operation in the second period. The second state is an operation different from the first operation, and the first notification relates to the first state. The game machine is characterized in that the notification includes at least notification.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the first state by the first notification. Therefore, the player performs an appropriate operation according to the first notification. There may be a case where it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of launching means.

  Also, the game apparatus includes a plurality of operation means that can be operated at least by the player, and one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a turbo button 804g), One of them is a second operating means (for example, a launch handle 134), and the first operation is to operate (for example, to press) the first operating means, and The first operation is to operate (for example, rotate) the second operation means, and the second operation is to not operate the first operation means (for example, pressing operation) And the second operation may be to operate the second operation means.

  With such a configuration, the first operation unit can easily switch between the first state and the second state, and the convenience of the player may be improved.

  Further, the display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display is provided, and the launching unit is a game ball in a region (hereinafter referred to as “left-handed region”) on the left side of the display unit when viewed from the front. At least in the second period, the gaming table takes a second state when operated in a third operation, and the second state is the second state. The second state is a state in which the launching means at least launches a game ball in the left-handed region, and the third operation is the first operation means. The third operation may be to operate the second operation means.

  In addition, one of the plurality of notifications is that the second notification includes at least a notification related to one of the second operation and the third operation (for example, in FIG. 178 (d)). The second notification may be a notification different from the first notification.

  As for the notification regarding “left-handed”, since the left-handed operation cannot be realized if the operation is continued with either the turbo button or the dial, the method is used instead of performing the notification for the specific method. You may make it alert | report the phenomenon which may occur in a case. This is often the timing of returning to the left-hand side when the advantageous state has ended (end of jackpot, end of electric support, etc.), and the advantageous state may end and the player may feel frustrated In spite of this, it is because there is a possibility that the irritation of the player may be further amplified if the player speaks again about the method already performed by the player.

  In addition, regarding notification regarding “right-handed”, specific notification can be emphasized by providing a case where specific notification is performed while there is a case where specific notification is not performed. There is a case. In addition, there may be a pattern that specifically informs both the “left-handed” and “right-handed” methods. Even if the pattern is not automatically notified, it may be possible to imagine what method the player should take during the notification.

  Even if the result is the same (return to the left), the notification mode may be different. For example, “turn back to the left” by switching the gaming state, detect turbo when not in turbo state A notification such as “return to the left” may be performed based on the above. Moreover, when the conditions regarding operation of an operation means are materialized, you may control so that the launch of a launching means may be stopped, or the launch using one of several launch characteristics cannot be performed.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button may be performed, and the notification may be terminated by performing an operation according to the notification. For example, the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button. The notification may be terminated based on the fact that this is detected. Further, the notification that prompts the player to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 6>

  180 and 181 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the sixth embodiment in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the gaming state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 180 (b), the game state is shifted from the electric support state shown in FIG. The main control unit 300 transmits a control command (subcommand) notifying that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state after displaying the special figure stop display. In the example, since the transmission timing of the subcommand is the next special chart fluctuation display start time, the first sub-control unit 400 can grasp the transition of the gaming state than the next special chart fluctuation start time. It will be late.

  In the state shown in FIG. 180 (c), the main control unit 300 recognizes that the gaming state is the normal state, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet grasped the transition of the gaming state and has the gaming state. This is a state in which the power support state is recognized.

  In this state, since the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), it is assumed that the sub-command notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been received. However, turbo button notification (warning display) cannot be performed.

  In addition, the demonstration stage is not performed in the electric support state, but the demonstration stage starts the demonstration stage when the demonstration start condition is satisfied in the normal state (for example, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop display of the special figure). In this case, in the state shown in FIG. 5C, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state). Even if a demonstration start command for notifying the demonstration start is received, the demonstration production cannot be started.

  In the state shown in FIG. 180 (c), when the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet grasped the transition of the gaming state and has recognized that the gaming state is the electric support state, This is a state in which a ball entering the normal start port 228b is detected.

  Even in this state, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), and therefore has detected that the ball has entered the normal start port 228b. Even if a subcommand for notification is received, turbo button notification (warning display) cannot be performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 181 (f) is a state immediately before the main control unit 300 detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 and starts the special figure variation display. The main control unit 300 transmits a subcommand notifying that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of the special figure variation display. After the timing, the first sub-control unit 400 can grasp the transition of the gaming state.

  The state shown in FIG. 181 (g) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 grasps the transition of the gaming state. The first sub-control unit 400 performs notification for promoting left-handed based on the fact that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 181 (h) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has grasped the transition of the gaming state and has received a sub-command notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g from the main control unit 300. It is.

In this state, since the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. In this case, turbo button notification (warning display) can be performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 7>

  182 and 183 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the seventh embodiment in time series. This example shows an example of a notification mode of turbo button notification when the power is shut off (power interruption) and the power is restored (power recovery).

  The state shown in FIG. 182 (c) is a state where a power interruption has occurred during a normal state due to a power failure or the like. In this state, since the power supply to the game machine is stopped, even if the turbo button 804g is pressed, the operation cannot be detected. Therefore, the process corresponding to the turbo button 804g is not performed, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 cannot be performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 182 (d) is a state in the middle of the game table returning to the state before the power interruption due to power recovery (during power recovery). When power supply to the game machine is started, the first sub-control unit 400 performs power recovery processing. As part of the power recovery processing, the first sub-control unit 400 displays “ "???" is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits a command for instructing the LED of the turbo button 804g to be lit in a special manner to the launch control unit 630 via the payout control unit 600. Thereby, LED of turbo button 804g notifies that it is returning to power by lighting in a special mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying that a ball entering the normal start port 228b has been detected, Even when a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the button 804g is received, turbo button notification (warning display) is not performed.

  In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during a period from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time elapses, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the turbo button 804g. The LED is lit in a special manner and is configured to output a voice “turbo button” from the speaker 120. With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily confirm whether or not the turbo button 804g functions effectively.

  The state shown in FIG. 183 (f) is a state in which a special figure that has been fluctuating at the time of power interruption is stopped and displayed due to the restoration of the power supply. After the restoration of the power supply, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying that the entrance to the normal start port 228b has been detected or receiving a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. Sometimes, turbo button notification (warning display) is performed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (For example, a decorative symbol display device 208), a first control means (for example, a launch control board 174) capable of at least executing control of the launching means, and a first control means capable of executing at least control of the first notifying means. And a second control means (for example, a payout control board 170, a main control board 156, a first sub control board 160, a second sub control board 164, an effect control board 820), wherein the launching means Is capable of at least transitioning to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)) At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and in the first state, the launching means at least plays a game ball. The second state is a state in which the launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the second state is different from the first state. The first state and the second state are states of the first notification (for example, a right-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. 164 (d) (“Press the turbo button to aim the right attacker!”). Character display), turbo button pressing notification, turbo button operation notification, turbo button operation cancellation notification, turbo button tutorial notification, turbo button monitor signal, and second state Performed easiness of knowledge, etc.) are different, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first notification can easily grasp whether the launching unit is in the first state or the second state, the player can make a first notification. The player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and can improve the fun of the game by performing notification in various modes. There is a case. In addition, since the first control means capable of executing the control of the firing means and the second control means capable of executing the control of the notification means are provided, the control burden of each control means is reduced by distributing the control burden. And stable game control may be possible.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include the first control means, and the firing means is configured to include a firing execution means (for example, a firing solenoid). The control means may be capable of at least controlling the firing execution means, and the first control means may be capable of at least shifting to the plurality of states.

  The first state is a state in which at least a game ball can be launched with a first launch characteristic (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the second state is a second launch characteristic. It is in a state where at least the game ball can be launched with characteristics (for example, first launch characteristics (normal launch)), and the second launch characteristics may be different from the first launch characteristics.

  The first notification is performed when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when performing a right-handed notification, when performing a left-handed notification, when performing a turbo press display, or when performing a turbo release display). In addition, it may be configured to at least notify.

  Moreover, you may provide the 2nd alerting | reporting means (for example, right-handed indicator lamp 224) which can perform at least 2nd alerting | reporting. The second notification may be configured to at least notify when the second condition is satisfied.

  The launching means is capable of at least launching a game ball when a launch operation is performed, and the launch means does not launch a game ball when the launch operation is not performed. There may be. The first notifying unit may be capable of displaying at least an image.

  In addition, it is possible to at least control the notifying means capable of emitting at least a game ball, first control means capable of executing at least first control, notifying means capable of executing at least first notification, and notifying means. And a second control means, wherein the first control includes at least a control for adjusting a firing strength of a game ball launched from the launching means. The control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity, The first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied when the first operating means is operated. There are certain conditions, The notification, the one in which the at least one notification regarding operation means may be a gaming table, characterized in that.

  The timings of the first notification and the second notification are as follows: during liquid crystal loading, when special processing is not performed (when the load on the control unit is low), when the turbo button is operated in the normal gaming state (when special effects are performed) ), During special production (production for suggesting the state at the time of latent hit, trigger for one announcement, trigger for promotion production), when operating the turbo button during the special game state, turbo button during the electric support game state At the time of operation, special game state transition (except in case of small hit, latent probability change), at the start of a specific round in special game state (extra round, V Attacker release), electric support game state transfer, electric support Special during the transition from the probabilistic state to the probable state (right-handed gaming state → left-handed gaming state), during transition from the non-normal gaming state to the normal gaming state (right-handed gaming state → left-handed gaming state) Other than out (right-handed notification continuation) may be a (hereinafter the same).

  The conditions for performing the first notification and the second notification are when one, a plurality, or all of the various errors (underfill full error, payout shortage error, etc.) shown in FIG. 99 occur. Or it may be the case where it does not occur.

  In addition, the notification means includes an LED indicating that the turbo button is effective, an LED indicating that the turbo button is operated, an LED indicating that the turbo button is operated, The turbo button signal connection LED, the turbo button on / off LED, the turbo button on / off LED controlled by the main control board, the turbo button on / off LED controlled by the first sub control board, etc. A speaker, an LED, a liquid crystal display device, an accessory, a turbo button itself, a decorative body on the upper right of the frame, or the like may be used (or the like).

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (For example, various state display units 328 including a state display lamp (right-handed display lamp) 224) and second notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device) capable of executing at least a second notification. A gaming machine, wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch ), And at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the first state is Play balls at least The second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state different from the first state, and the second notification ( For example, the right-handed indicator light 224 is turned on) at least in the case of the first game state (for example, the hit state, the electric support state), and the first condition is the first game. In the state (for example, a big hit gaming state), it is configured to notify at least, and the first notification (for example, the right-handed display lamp (right-handed display light) 224 is turned on by turning on) Promotion notification, turbo button press notification, turbo button operation prompt notification, turbo button operation cancel notification, turbo button tutorial notification, turbo button monitor signal, and second state Execution start timing of knowledge, etc.), said a second execution start timing of the broadcast is a gaming table characterized are different, that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. Moreover, since the 1st alerting | reporting means which can perform 1st alerting | reporting and the 2nd alerting | reporting means which can perform 2nd alerting | reporting are provided, the control burden of each control means is reduced by distributing a control burden. And stable game control may be possible.

  Further, the second notification is configured to notify at least when the third condition is established, and when the third condition is the first gaming state, Conditions that may hold may be used.

  The second notification is configured not to be notified in the second gaming state (for example, non-electric support state), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. The state may be a state having at least a different degree of advantage.

  Also, a launching means capable of firing at least a game ball, a launch control means capable of executing at least a first control, a first notifying means capable of executing at least a first notification, and at least a second notification. And a second informing means, wherein the first control includes at least a control for adjusting a firing strength of a game ball fired from the launching means. The control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity, The first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied when the first operating means is operated. There are certain conditions, The notification is at least executable when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first gaming state is satisfied, The second notification includes at least notification related to the first operation means, and the execution start timing of the second notification is different from the execution start timing of the first notification. It may be a characteristic game stand.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (E.g., a decorative symbol table device 208), wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) Control state), the first state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, and the second state is What is the first state? In the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, the normal state and the winning state, the electric support state and the non-electric support state), the first notification (for example, FIG. 157 (b)) Right-handed stop notification (character display “Please return to left-handed” and animation display to move multiple left-pointing arrows to the left), turbo button press notification, turbo button operation notification, turbo button operation The game table is characterized in that the easiness of performing the notification of canceling, the tutorial notification regarding the turbo button, the monitor signal of the turbo button, the notification regarding the second state, and the like is different.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. There may be a case where a game stand having a characteristic launching means can be provided. In addition, since the first notification is performed in the case of the first gaming state, the player can grasp the gaming state through the first notification and may be able to perform an operation suitable for the gaming state. .

  Further, the display unit is capable of executing at least symbol variation display, and the first condition (the first game state and the symbol variation display is not being executed, or the symbol variation display is not being executed, etc.) There may be a condition that may be satisfied when the symbol variation display is not executed (may also be satisfied when the symbol variation display is executed). “Start notification” may be during non-execution of symbol variation display or during symbol variation display.

  A gaming machine comprising: a launching unit capable of launching at least a game ball; a launch control unit capable of executing at least a first control; and a notifying unit capable of executing at least a first notification. The first control includes at least control for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball launched from the launching means, and the launch control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and At least one of the states is a first state, the first state is a state relating to the firing strength, and the first state is when the first condition is satisfied, The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operating means is operated, and the first notification is the first operating means. Including at least The first notification is at least executable when the second condition is established, and the second condition is established when the first gaming state is established. There may be a gaming machine characterized by the condition that there is a case.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a notification unit (for example, capable of executing at least the first notification). A game table provided with a decorative symbol table device 208), wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state. (For example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a control state based on a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) And at least one of the plurality of states is a third state (for example, a state where the firing stop lever 804e is pressed, a state where the player is not touching the dial 806, or between control units) The first state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, and The third state is a state in which at least the game ball cannot be fired, and the second state is a state different from the first state. Even in the third state, the first state Notification (for example, right-handed stop notification shown in FIG. 157 (b) (character display “please return to left-handed” and animation display for moving a plurality of left-pointing arrows to the left), At least notification of turbo button operation notification, notification of canceling turbo button operation, tutorial notification regarding turbo button, monitor signal of turbo button, notification regarding the second state, etc. can be notified at least Those that are configured, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. There may be a case where a game stand having a characteristic launching means can be provided. In addition, since the first notification is performed even in the third state, the player can grasp whether or not the launch is impossible through the first notification, and can perform an operation suitable for the gaming state. There are cases where it is possible.

  A gaming machine comprising: a launching unit capable of launching at least a game ball; a launch control unit capable of executing at least a first control; and a notifying unit capable of executing at least a first notification. The first control includes at least control for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball launched from the launching means, and the launch control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and At least one of the states is a first state, at least one of the plurality of states is a second state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity; The second state is a state in which the launching means does not cause a game ball to be launched, and the first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, One condition is the first The first notification is at least a notification related to the first operation means, and the first notification is a second condition. The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied even when the firing control means is in the first state, and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied. A game machine characterized by

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and instead of (or in addition to) the configuration of the pachinko machine 100, modified examples described below. You may apply.
<Modification / Receiving command processing>

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the received command process. In this reception command process, first, in step S601, the reception data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to and whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 400 is determined. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not a main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604; otherwise, the process ends. In step S604, the received command is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

  In Example B, commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in a buffer (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. More specifically, the data in the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in, for example, the A register 722 of the CUP core register 720, and then stored in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, a command that should not be accepted (an illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. In addition, before the determination process of step S1603, you may perform the process which determines whether the received command is a prize ball command. Thus, when a command that should not be received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be eliminated by the determination process.
<Modification / Command analysis processing>

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of command analysis processing. In step S801 of this command analysis process, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S802, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed.

  In step S803, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S806, and if not, the process ends. In step S805, a main control unit communication confirmation command reception process is performed. In step S806, a prize ball command reception process described below is performed.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the flow of a prize ball command reception process (step S806) in the command analysis process shown in FIG. In step S1201 of the award ball command reception process, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1202, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1204. In this step, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is OFF, the received command is ignored. That is, an illegal command is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the main process of the payout control unit.

In the next step S1203, the number of winning balls is added to the next winning ball number area based on the analysis data. In the next step S1204, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Modification / Transmission command processing>

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the transmission command process. In step S1501 of the transmission command process, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processes of steps S1504 to S1507 are executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1504, the transmission request for the payout control communication confirmation command (10H) is set by setting 1 to Bit0 of the transmission command output request information of 1 byte length stored in the RAM 708.

  In step S1505, another command transmission request is set. Other commands transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 include, for example, a prize ball signal output request command (20H), an error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), and an error 2 command (40H, 41H). 42H, 44H, 48H), payout display LED notification commands (50H, 51H), and the like.

  When a prize ball signal output request command (20H) is transmitted, a transmission request for the prize ball signal output request command (20H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, and an error 1 command When transmitting (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), by setting Bit2 of the transmission command output request information to 1, transmission request for error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H) Set.

  Further, when transmitting an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H), by setting 1 to Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information, an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H) and a payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) are transmitted, the payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 4 of the transmission command output request information. ) Transmission request.

  In step S1506, other command output information is set. Here, when notifying the error release state or the completion of the prize ball payout operation as error information, 0 is set to Bit 0 of the output information of 1 byte length provided in the RAM, the occurrence of the payout number switch error, the full of the saucer When notifying the occurrence of a tan error or a prize ball payout operation, 1 is set to Bit0 of the output information. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an illegal payout error or a payout device error, 1 is set in the output information Bit1, and when notifying the occurrence of a payout excess error or a main control communication error, the output information Bit2 is set. When 1 is set and notification of the occurrence of a door opening error or CR unit non-connection error is made, 1 is set in Bit 3 of the output information.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1503 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1503, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612, and then the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1507, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1508, it is determined whether or not a winning ball signal command transmission request setting condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1509, after setting a transmission request for a prize ball signal command, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the transmission command setting counter stored in the RAM 708 is set to 5, and then the process proceeds to step S1511.

  In step S1511, it is determined whether the transmission command setting process execution condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1512. If not, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1512, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, the least significant bit (Bit 0) of the transmission command output request information set in step S1505 is referred to. When 1 is set, a numerical value (indicated by the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register) In this example, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting 10H).

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 1 command are supported. By combining the numerical value to be transmitted (30H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, 30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, or 38H) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 1 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via this.

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 2 command are supported. By combining the numerical value (40H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, or 48H in this example) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 2 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the payout display LED are supported. By combining the numerical value (50H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, either 50H or 51H) in the transmission data register, the main control unit 300 is connected via the serial communication line 612. The payout display LED notification command is transmitted to

  In step S1513, 1 is subtracted from the transmission command setting counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1514. In step S1514, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting counter is 0. If the transmission command setting counter is 0, the process ends. If not, the process returns to step S1511 to continue the command transmission process.

  <Modification / Main control communication confirmation command reception processing>

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the main control communication confirmation command reception process. In step S1601 of the main control communication confirmation command reception process, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the main control communication confirmation command received first after the payout control unit 600 is activated. If YES in step S1602, the process advances to step S1602. If not, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1602, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S1603 to execute the above-described activation process.

In step S1604, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S1605, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1606, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and in the next step S1607, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON, and then the process ends.
<Modification / Transmission command processing>

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the transmission command process. In step S1701 of the transmission command process, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register.

  In step S1703, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1704, after other error command set processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S1705. As another error command set process executed in step S1704, for example, both a communication confirmation command and a second command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error) are transmitted. For example, a process for determining whether it is necessary and transmitting a second command following the communication confirmation command when it is necessary corresponds.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the main control communication error flag is 1 (on or off). If it is on (1), the process of step S1706 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1708. move on. In step S1706, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register.

In the next step S1707, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1708, other transmission command processing is executed and the processing is terminated.
<Display control of pachinko machine 100>

  Next, display control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. 190 is a conceptual diagram for explaining display control of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a specific example of “display about how to hit”.

  In the pachinko machine 100, as a display that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, “display relating to the first type of hitting” shown in FIG. 190 (a) and “second type” shown in FIG. 190 (b). "Indication about how to hit". In addition, the “display relating to the first type of hitting” shown in FIG. 10A further includes the “display relating to the first hitting type” shown in FIG. “Display for the second type” shown in FIG. 4B is further divided into “Display for the first type” (not shown) and FIG. Suppose that there is an “indication about the second hit”.

  Here, as an example of “display about how to hit the first type”, there is “display about how to hit the game ball”, and as an example of “display about how to hit the first ball”, Display "(for example, three types of right-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 191 (a) to (c)). As an example of" display related to the second hit "," display related to left-handed "( For example, there are two types of left-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 191 (d) and 191 (e).

  <Display control of pachinko machine 100 / right-handed notification, left-handed notification>

  Also, each of the three types of right-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) has different display contents and the position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. In addition, the right-handed notification “Please make a right-handed” shown in FIG. 191 (c) is classified as a warning display for warning the player, and the type is different from other display modes. ing. In the right-handed notification during the big hit, the notifications shown in (a), (b), and (c) of FIG.

  In addition, each of the two types of left-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 191 (d) and (e) has different display contents and the position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. In addition, the left-handed notification “Please left-handed” shown in FIG. 191 (e) is classified as a warning display for giving a warning to the player, and the type is different from other display modes. ing.

  <Display control of pachinko machine 100 / turbo button notification>

  An example of “display relating to the second type of strike” is “display relating to right strike”, and an example of “display relating to the first strike” is related to “right strike by firing handle 134”. Display ”(for example, a character display such as“ turn the handle to the right ”or the like) is an example of“ display related to the second hit ”, for example,“ display related to right stroke by the turbo button 804g ”(for example, FIG. 191). (F) to (i) shown, four types of turbo buttons 804g turbo button notification).

  In addition, each of the four types of turbo button notifications shown in FIGS. 191 (f) to 191 (i) has different display contents and position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. Further, the turbo button notification “Turbo button operation prohibited state” shown in FIG. 191 (i) is classified as a warning display for giving a warning to the player. Is different.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), “display relating to the first type of hit” and “display relating to the second type of hit” are simultaneously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 190 (d), there are other displays in the display area between the “display relating to the first type of hit” and the “display relating to the second type of hit”. It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (e), "display about the first type" and "display about the second type" of "display about the first type" are either one. As shown in FIG. 190 (f), “display about the first type” and “second type” of the “display about the second type” Only one of “display concerning” can be displayed exclusively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190 (g), the “display regarding the second type” of the “display regarding the second type of hit” is the “display regarding the first type of hit”. Covering at least a part of the “display for the first type” of “and displaying at least part of the“ display for the first type ”of the“ display for the first type ” (Or at least the visibility has changed. As a result, it may be easier to visually recognize).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 190 (h), the entire “display related to the second type” of the “display related to the second type of hit” is the “display related to the first type of hit”. By placing it in the display area of “Display for the first type”, the display of most of the “Display for the first type” of the “Display for the first type” is displayed. Invisible (or difficult to see) (at least the visibility has changed. As a result, it may be easier to visually recognize).

  The time chart shown in FIG. 190 (j) is a diagram schematically showing the change of the state, and what is in the “first state” at the timing shown in t1 in FIG. It changes from the “first state” to the “second state” at the timing, indicating that this “second state” is maintained after the timing shown in FIG.

  Here, as an example of the combination of “first state” and “second state”, for example, “normal state” and “big hit game”, “stop display of special figure” and “variable display of special figure” , “Electric support state” and “non-electric support state”, “probability change state” and “non-probability change state”, “lighting state” and “light-off state”, “turbo state” and “non-turbo state”, and the like.

  The display period of the above-mentioned “display relating to the first type of strike” and “display relating to the second type of strike” may be a period from the timing indicated by t1 to the timing indicated by t3 in FIG. 190 (i). The period from the timing indicated by t1 in FIG. 190 (i) to the timing indicated by t2 may be used, or the period from the timing indicated by t2 in FIG. 190 (i) to the timing indicated by t3 may be used. In addition, the period from the timing indicated by t1 to the timing indicated by t2 in FIG. 190 (i) is displayed in the first display mode, and the period from the timing shown by t2 to the timing shown by t3 is the first display mode. You may display in the 2nd display mode different from.

The classification of “display relating to the first type of hit” and “display relating to the second type of hit” is not limited to this example, and “display related to the first type of hit” is a warning display (for example, 191 (c), (e), (i), etc.), the “display regarding the second type of hitting” may be classified as a display other than the warning display, or “related to the first type of hitting” In the display (for example, FIG. 191 (a), (d), (f), etc.) in the first stage (for example, the first display in the configuration for switching the display in time series) “Display on type” is classified as a display (for example, FIG. 191 (b), (e), etc.) in the second stage (for example, displayed after the first stage or at a different timing). In FIG. 191, “Regarding the first type of hitting” Display ", displayed on the" second type of Uchikata "," indication of a first Uchikata ", the display mode in FIG. 192 as" display regarding the second Uchikata "can be appropriately combined.
<Example of right-handed notification>

  Next, an example of the right-handed notification described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 192 is a diagram showing the right-handed notification during the big hit game in time series. Each display shown by reference numerals (a) to (i) is a part of the display performed during the period from the special figure change display shown in (a) to the big hit effect shown in (i). The time interval between the displays is not necessarily constant.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display are performed. At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. The fluctuation variation display using the symbol combination (decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) is performed. Further, at the timing shown in the same figure (c), a stop display is made with a combination of decorative symbols (decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) corresponding to the jackpot, and at the timing shown in the same figure (d), the gaming state is displayed. While shifting from the normal game to the special game state, the round lamp 223 (16R in this example) and the right-handed indicator lamp 224 are turned on.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the big symbol notification (in this example, “big hit” character display) and the first right strike notification (in this example, FIG. 191 described above) are performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. (Right-hand notification shown in (a)) is performed, and turbo button notification (in this example, turbo button notification shown in FIG. 191 (g)) is performed at the subsequent timing shown in FIG.

  Further, at the subsequent timing shown in (g) of the figure, instead of the first right-hand notification, the second right-hand notification (in this example, the right-hand notification shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable winning opening (attacker) 235 is opened, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 5I, the big hit effect and the first right-hand notification are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6J, in this example, after the game state is shifted from the normal state to the special game state at the timing shown in FIG. Strike notification (display related to the first type of display regarding the first type of strike) is performed, and turbo button notification (display related to the second type of strike) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. The second right-hand-notification is performed at the timing shown in (g) of the drawing (display related to the second hitting method among the indications relating to the first type of hitting), and at the timing shown in FIG. The variable winning opening (attacker) 235 is opened, and the first right-hand notification (the display related to the first type of display related to the first type) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. ing.

Note that the execution order of each display ((e), (f), (g), (i) in the figure) is not limited to this example. For example, the figure (e) may be displayed after the figure (f), and the figures (e) and (f) may be simultaneously displayed after the figure (g). The same applies to the execution timing and execution order of each operation state and each display. Further, only one type of execution order or the like may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. For example, at least a part of the execution order may be different depending on the type of jackpot.
<Turbo button notification delay processing>

  Next, turbo button notification delay processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram showing time-series turbo button notification when the turbo button is pressed during the electric support, and FIG. 193 (b) shows the turbo button notification during the non-electric support. It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting when a pressing operation was performed in time series. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating an example of a firing-related signal input to the first sub control board 160 and an input signal that is a basis of the firing-related signal.

  The gaming table of this example includes a first path for inputting a firing-related signal (a firing intensity state signal, a touch switch signal, and a solenoid signal shown in the output signal of FIG. 194) to the first sub-control unit 160 through a delay circuit; A second path that bypasses the delay circuit and inputs the fire-related signal to the first sub-control unit 160. Then, during the electric support shown in FIG. 5A, the turbo button 804g is pressed by inputting the firing intensity changeover switch signal based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g to the first sub-control unit 160 through the second path. Ta is the time from when an operation is detected until turbo button notification (in this example, the character display of “pressing turbo button”) is performed based on the firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  On the other hand, during the non-electric support shown in FIG. 5B, the firing intensity changeover switch signal based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is input to the first sub-control unit 160 through the first path, so that the turbo button 804g The time from detection of the pressing operation until turbo button notification (in this example, “Turbo button operation is prohibited”) is delayed from Ta based on the firing intensity switch signal. Tb.

  In this example, an example in which a firing-related signal is directly input to the first sub-control board 160 has been shown. However, as described above, other examples such as the launch control board 174, the payout control board 170, and the main control board 156 are used. A control unit or a substrate may be used. Also, the firing related signal may be one or more of a firing strength state signal, a touch switch signal, and a solenoid signal.

  In addition, the discharge control board inputs information (signal itself, command indicating the state, etc.) regarding the firing intensity state signal and the firing intensity changeover switch signal (either one or both), but the main control board and sub-control board Even in the case of adopting a configuration that does not input, a configuration that inputs the payout control board and the main control board but does not input the sub control board, etc. It is.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 194 (a) is a normal state, and the state shown in FIG. 194 (b) is a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed in the normal state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 5C is a state in which the firing handle 134 is being operated and the firing permission signal is off. FIG. 4D shows a state in which the turbo button 804g is pressed in addition to the state shown in FIG. 4C. The state shown in FIG. (F) of FIG. 5 shows a state where the firing stop lever has been pressed.

  <Turbo button notification when game ball cannot be fired>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, turbo button notification in a state where the game ball cannot be launched will be described. Note that FIG. 195 is a diagram showing time-series turbo button notification when a turbo button is pressed during magnetic error detection.

  In this example, when a specific error (an error prohibiting the launch of a game ball. For example, a magnetic error) occurs during the game, the launch of the ball by the launch device 844 is prohibited and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. Error notification. In addition, when a specific error occurs, in addition to prohibiting the launch of the game ball, a part of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is restricted, and operations such as power cycle and RAM clear Unless it is performed, it is configured not to return to a normal gaming state from a specific error.

  However, in this example, even when such a specific error occurs, it is possible to accept the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and in addition to the turbo button notification (in this example, prohibiting the turbo button operation) based on the pressing operation. Character display) is possible. The specific error is not limited to a magnetic error. For example, a CR unit disconnected error, a main control communication error, a solenoid signal is turned off (the firing stop lever is pressed or the touch switch is turned off) Error). The detection of a specific error is not limited to the main control unit 300, and may be performed by another control unit.

It should be noted that the display related to the operation of the turbo button during any error may or may not have changed in visibility compared to the non-error case. When it is changing, at least one of the error display and the display related to the turbo button operation may be difficult to view (impossible). In this case, one display may change the visibility of the other display, or the visibility may change depending on the display (for example, LED) related to the one display.
<Other application examples of turbo buttons>

  Next, another application example of the turbo button 804g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a diagram for describing an application example of the turbo button 804g.

  The states shown in FIGS. 7A and 7C show a state before the game machine is turned on, and no image is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. is there. When the gaming machine is turned on from this state, as a first initial operation, for example, initial setting of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, processing for developing effect data in VRAM, operation checking operation of the accessory, A process of outputting a sound or turning on an LED, a process of operating a chance button 136, or the like). In addition, during this first initial operation, as shown in FIGS. 2B and 2D, a notification (in this example) indicates that the first initial operation is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. , Character display during loading (first initial operation)).

In this example, after the first initial operation is finished, an operation means (in this example, the turbo button 804g or the chance button 160) provided at a position where the player or game clerk can operate is operated. In addition, the second initial operation is performed. In addition, although the example which performs a 2nd initial operation when an operation means is operated was shown, for example, when other conditions are satisfied (for example, when the front frame door 106 is open), The second initial operation may be performed when the operation means is operated.
<Power interruption and power recovery during turbo button notification>

  Next, power interruption / recovery during turbo button notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining power interruption / recovery during turbo button notification.

  In this example, the turbo button 804g is pressed during the big hit shown in FIG. 10A, and the turbo button notification shown in FIG. 10B is displayed (in this example, “Turbo is operating!” Is displayed). This shows an example in which power interruption / recovery was performed while

After power recovery, the initial screen is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, based on the fact that the turbo button notification was performed before power recovery, a part of the initial screen after power recovery A right-handed notification (in this example, a character display of “please make a right-hand →”) is displayed. This right-handed notification is configured to maintain the display as shown in FIG. 4D even when a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted.
<Execution timing of various displays>

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of various displays. Right-handed display (right-handed notification) can be started at various timings (for example, at the start of a small hit) shown in the rightmost column of FIG. Further, the turbo press display can be started at various timings shown in the rightmost column and the second column from the right in FIG. Left-handed display (left-handed notification) can be started at various timings (for example, after the end of a small hit) shown in the rightmost column and the second column from the left in FIG. Further, the turbo separation display can be started at various timings (for example, turbo operation during non-electric support) shown in the rightmost column and the leftmost column in FIG.

  Note that the execution timing of this example is merely an example, and for example, any display timing (for example, the timing of starting an effect by a light guide plate described later, the timing after the end of a blackout effect) or operation in the present embodiment or an embodiment described later. In addition to external timing such as the movement start timing of the movable object and the movement start timing of the sub liquid crystal, internal timing (for example, transition timing of the variation pattern table) may or may not be included. May be. Also, a predetermined detection (such as a gate) is one of the conditions that change the control state of the game table, such as the determination of the number of Rs and the passing timing of the game ball to the predetermined gate for starting the opening of the attacker. The timing of detection of entry of a game ball into a predetermined area may be included.

  As will be described later, the display related to the turbo button in the present embodiment (displayed before operation, or at least one display displayed during operation or after operation) is another object (display, accessory, etc.). The visibility may or may not be changed depending on the configuration of the game machine, and the visibility of other objects may or may not be changed. Indirect ones may also be included. For example, the visibility of other objects may be changed by the effect of the light guide plate in a configuration in which an image is displayed based on a turbo button operation and the effect is displayed on the light guide plate described later. Moreover, what is necessary is just to change visibility by at least one of an indirect thing and a direct thing (both are included).

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<< Embodiment 2 >>
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back>

  FIG. 200 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 199 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 201 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display are provided at the lower right of the game area 124. A device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, an effect display area 208d, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol display. The region 208f is configured. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of the special figure 1 variable game (to be described later), and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f has the result of the special figure 2 variable game (to be described later). For example, “-” blinks during special figure variation game (during special figure variation), and “○” is displayed when the result of special figure variation game is winning, If the result of the special figure variation game is wrong, “×” is displayed. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208f can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, below the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special figure start port 230, a second special figure start port 232, A first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, they are respectively disposed below and below the center of the game board 200. As will be described in detail later, the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 have the same structure and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball is inserted while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the ball is impossible and the special figure display device wins the special figure change game and the special figure display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a are set at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds, a closing time of 1. 5 seconds), and opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable game is won. In this case, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course. The effect movable body 224 includes a motor (not shown) and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234, and a second variable winning port. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 235a of 235 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 203 (a) to 203 (d). The types of special maps and common maps to be explained FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 203 (a), five types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. There are four types of special symbols “stop” from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as special symbols 2 of special symbol 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  The stop symbol mode of the other special figure 1 will be described. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. The “special drawing E” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  Further, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol. , “Special Figure d” is an outlier symbol.

  FIG. 203 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and the 8R jackpot of “Special Figure c” are notified, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1—Decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 8R special jackpot of "Special Figure b", a combination of symbols in which three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged (For example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” suddenly changes is notified. Then, “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E or the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 203 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of the normal figure, “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol and “normal figure B” which is an outlier symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  FIG. 204 (a) shows an example of the high probability state table for determination of success / failure (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 204 (b) shows an example of the low probability state table for determination of success / failure (Special Figure 1). Is. FIG. 4C shows an example of the high probability state table for success / failure determination (special figure 2), and FIG. 4D shows an example of the low probability state table for the success / failure determination (special figure 2). It is shown.

  These success / failure determination tables correlate presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), special figure big hit judgment lottery value data, and special figure variable game success / failure results. Has been remembered. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).

  <Win / fail judgment table / special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 12185 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 1 variable game winning (big hit) ) Is set and information indicating that a big hit flag is provided in the storage area for the big hit flag provided in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is set to “turn on the big hit flag on”) "). Further, when the special figure winning random number value is 12186 to 13823 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the storage area for the small hit flag is set (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag to ON”). If the acquired special figure winning random number is a value other than 10001 to 12185 or 12186 to 13823 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of the above state. Set the information indicating that there is a loss in the storage area of the big hit flag and the small hit flag (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to off) In other words, setting out-of-order information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 12185), so the winning probability of the special figure 1 probability game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 12185/65536). Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 12186 to 13823 (the size of the numerical value range is 12185), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/399 (= 1638/65536). ). On the other hand, the winning probability per jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the numerical range of the lottery value data per small lot in the special figure low probability state is 10220. Since it is ˜11857 (the size of the numerical range is 1638), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/399 (= 1638/65536).

  <Win / fail judgment table / special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the special figure 2 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 12185 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 2 variable game winning (big hit) ) And the big hit flag is set to ON. The special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit. Also, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number is a value other than 10001-12185, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play, and a big hit flag and a small hit Set the flag off.

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 12185), the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 12185/65536), and the special figure 1 in the special figure high probability state. It is set to be the same as the winning probability for the jackpot of the variable game. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), They are set the same.
<Special figure determination table>

  FIG. 205 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, and FIG. 205 (b) is a special figure used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. It is an example of the table for determination. In these special figure determination tables, the determination result of special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game), the lottery value data, and the types of stop symbols are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs symbol lottery to determine the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the symbol random number value. In addition, when the big hit flag is on, the acquired big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. When the symbol random number value is used as the symbol lottery random number value and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of order), the acquired random number value for losing is drawn in the symbol lottery Use as a random value.

  <Special figure determination table / Special figure 1 stop symbol>

  For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 24, the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 25 When the numerical value is -49, the special figure B is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and when the symbol random number is a numerical value of 50-99, the special figure C is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 floating game is successful is a small hit, the special figure 1 is stopped regardless of the symbol random number value (the symbol random value for small hit), that is, with a probability of 100% at the small hit. When special figure D is selected as the symbol, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong, it is unrelated to the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. The special figure E is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol.

  <Special Figure Determination Table / Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern>

For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value between 0 and 69, the special figure a is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol and the symbol lottery random value is 70. When it is a numerical value of -74, the special figure b is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol, and when the symbol lottery random value is a numerical value of 75-99, the special figure c is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure 2 stop symbol is used regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. Select special figure d.
<Variable prize opening performance, special performance>

  FIG. 206 (a) shows the variable prize opening performance. The variable winning opening performance includes the relationship between the type of the variable winning opening, the arrangement position on the game board 200, the maximum number of rounds of the big hit game, the maximum number of counts per round, and the number of prize balls per count. Show. FIG. 2B shows special figure performance. This special figure performance shows the relationship between the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2, the type of variable winning opening, the maximum number of rounds, the total number of prize balls, the probability change and the presence or absence of electric support.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs the 15R special big hit game when the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery. This 15R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened up to 15 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 9, and the number of prize balls per count is 14 The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed as 15 maximum rounds × 9 maximum counts × 14 winning balls = 1890. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty and with electric support).

  When special figure B is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-mentioned symbol lottery, a 15R normal big hit game is performed. This 15R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened up to 15 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 9, and the number of prize balls per count is 14 The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed as 15 maximum rounds × 9 maximum counts × 14 winning balls = 1890. In addition, after the 15R normal big hit game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (no probability change, with electric support).

  When the special figure C is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 2R special big hit game is performed. This 2R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened for a short time twice at maximum, and the magnitude of the game value (cumulative prize ball number) is expressed as almost zero. Can do. In addition, after the 2R special jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty change, with electric support).

  When the special figure D is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 2R normal big hit game is performed. This 2R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened for a short time twice at maximum, and the magnitude of the game value (cumulative prize ball number) is expressed as almost zero. Can do. Also, after the 2R normal big hit game is over, the game state is not shifted.

  Further, when the special figure a is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, a 16R special big hit game is performed. This 16R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened up to 16 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 16 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 2400. In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty, with electric support).

  Further, when the special figure b is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 8R special big hit game is performed. This 8R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened up to 8 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10 times, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 8 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 1200. In addition, after the 8R special jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty change, with electric support).

Further, when the special figure c is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 8R normal big hit game is performed. This 8R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened up to 8 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10 times, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 8 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 1200. In addition, after the 8R normal big hit game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (no probability change, with electric support).
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 202 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 202 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that this has occurred.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 203 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 203 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure a shown in FIG. ~ Special figure d (In the special figure 1 state update process, the special figure A to the special figure E shown in FIG. 203 (a) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (see FIG. 1 is the door member 234a) and the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a (see FIG. 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234) of the second variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high-probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  <Structure of the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235)>

  Next, the structure of the first variable winning opening 234 will be described in detail. Note that the second variable prize opening 235 has the same structure as the first variable prize opening 234, and thus the description thereof is omitted. 211 (a) is an external perspective view of the first variable winning opening 234 attached to the decorative member 250 and the door member 234a being closed, and FIG. 211 (b) is attached to the decorative member 250. It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable prize opening 234 in the state where the door member 234a was opened. FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative member 250 and the first variable winning opening 234.

  The decorative member 250 includes a winning port unit 250a in which the wall portion 250a1 constituting the above-described general winning port 226 is formed, a base unit 250b to which the winning port unit 250a is fixed, and a base unit 250b that is fitted and fixed. And a decorative unit 250c made of a transparent member.

  Two U-shaped wall portions 250a1 constituting the general winning port 226 are formed in the winning port unit 250a. In the base unit 250b, a ball passage 256b1 for guiding a game ball that has entered the wall 250a1 to a predetermined position is formed in a projecting manner at a position corresponding to the wall 250a1 formed in the winning opening unit 250a. . The base unit 250b has a first opening 250b2 for fitting the decoration unit 250c from the back side on the left side when viewed from the front, and a door member of the first variable prize opening 234 on the right side when viewed from the front. A rectangular second opening 250b3 into which 234a is fitted is formed.

The first variable winning opening 234 is a door member 234a that is rotatably attached to the second opening 250b3 of the base unit 250b, and a variable winning opening unit 260 that is disposed behind the door member 234a and is attached to the base unit 250b. And is configured.
<Variable prize opening unit>

  Next, the variable prize opening unit 260 will be described in detail. As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 212, the variable prize opening unit 260 includes a lower case 262 made of a translucent member, a rectangular parallelepiped ball-entry sensor 264 housed in a sensor housing portion of the lower case 262, and a lower case. A drive unit 266 for driving the door member 234 a, a plate-shaped magnetic shield plate 268 disposed so as to cover the drive unit 266, and a half fixed to the lower case 262. And an upper case 270 made of a transparent member.

  The incoming ball sensor 264 includes a ball passage 264a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the maximum diameter of the game ball, and is configured to be able to detect that the game ball has passed through the ball passage 264a. Note that the method of detecting the game ball by the entrance sensor 264 is not limited. For example, when the game ball passes through the internal space of the ball passage 264a, a high level signal is output, and the game ball passes through the ball passage 264a. It is configured to output a low level signal when not passing through the internal space. In addition, the incoming ball sensor 264 is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is along the short direction of the lower case 262 (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the lower case 262). Thereby, the length in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning a prize opening unit 260 is made shorter than that of the conventional game stand to save space.

  The drive unit 266 is engaged with the solenoid 266a, the solenoid shaft of the solenoid 266a, and is engaged with the bearing portion 266b slidable in the axial direction of the solenoid shaft, and the bearing portion 266b, and rotates the door member 234a. Arm portion 266c. Further, a magnetic shield 268 is disposed above the solenoid 266a, thereby preventing the magnetic force generated when the solenoid 266a is energized from leaking to the outside and affecting the rolling of the game ball. .

In a state where the power to the solenoid 266a is not supplied, the arm 266c engaged with the bearing 266b is rotated counterclockwise by the solenoid shaft retracting toward the solenoid 266a. Thereby, the door member 234a engaged with the arm portion 266c is rotated to the closed position shown in FIG. 211 (a). On the other hand, in a state where electric power is supplied to the solenoid 266a, the arm portion 266c engaged with the bearing portion 266b is rotated clockwise by the solenoid shaft protruding in a direction away from the solenoid 266a. Thereby, the door member 234a engaged with the arm portion 266c is rotated to the open position shown in FIG. 211 (b). That is, by energizing the solenoid 266a, the door member 234a can be moved to the open position so that a ball can enter the first variable prize opening 234, and the energization to the solenoid 266a stops the door. The member 234a can be moved to the closed position so that a ball cannot enter the first variable winning opening 234.
<Variable prize opening unit / ball passage>

  FIG. 213 (a) is an external perspective view of the variable winning opening unit 260 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right, and FIG. 213 (b) is an external perspective view of the variable winning slot unit 260 as seen from diagonally upward on the front left. is there. FIG. 214 (a) is an external perspective view of the variable winning opening unit 260 viewed from a slightly lower position than FIG. 213 (a), and FIG. 214 (b) is a side sectional view of the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272. It is.

  The variable prize opening unit 260 is provided with a ball passage 272 (274, 276, 278) for guiding the game ball that has entered by rolling the door member 234a to a predetermined position when the door member 234a is in the open position. It has been. The spherical passage 272 includes a lower surface 274 formed on the lower case 262, a lower side surface 262b formed to protrude in the vertical direction on the lower case 262, and an upper side surface 270b formed to protrude in the vertical direction on the upper case 270. (262a, 270b) and an upper surface 278 formed on the upper case 270, the three sides are surrounded. That is, the part facing the side surface 276 is an opening that is opened or closed by the door member 234a.

  The lower surface 274 of the ball passage 272 is an inclined surface that descends from the right end portion 274a in the front view of the variable prize opening unit 260 toward the left end portion 274b. Due to the inclined surface of the lower surface 274, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 272 rolls from the right end portion 274a of the lower surface 274 toward the left end portion 274b, and the ball entering sensor 264 disposed near the left end portion 274b. The guide is smoothly and reliably guided in the direction of the ball passage 264a.

  In addition, a guide wall 274c that protrudes upward is formed in the vicinity of the left end 274b of the lower surface 274. The guide wall 274c is an inclined surface that descends from the door member 234a side toward the entrance sensor 264 side on the lower surface 274. Due to the inclined surface of the guide wall 274c, the game ball that rolls from the right end 274a to the left end 274b of the lower surface 274 is directed toward the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264 disposed in the vicinity of the left end 274b. Thus, the game ball is prevented from jumping out from the ball passage 272 toward the door member 234a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 is composed of two members, a lower side surface 262b of the lower case 262 and an upper side surface 270b of the upper case 270. A slight gap is provided between the side surface 262b and the upper side surface 270b. Accordingly, the game ball B rolling on the lower surface 274 while contacting the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 contacts the end portion 262b1 of the lower side surface 262b and the end portion 270b1 of the upper side surface 270b, and these end portions 262b1. It rolls on the lower surface 274 while being guided by 270b1 (movement is restricted). Accordingly, the game ball is smoothly and reliably guided along the side surface 276 toward the ball passage 264a of the ball entering sensor 264. In FIG. 214 (b), the lower side surface 262b and the upper side surface 270b are flush with each other, but one surface projects from the other surface, and the game ball is guided by the end of the projecting surface. You may comprise as follows.

  FIG. 215 is a plan view showing a part of the variable prize opening unit 260 in a transparent manner. On the lower side surface 262a of the lower case 262, a guide convex portion 262a1 that protrudes toward the spherical passage 274 is formed. The guide protrusion 262a1 is formed in an inverted triangular shape in plan view. The guide convex portion 262a1 guides the game ball rolling on the lower surface 274 from the right end portion 274a toward the left end portion 274b while contacting the lower side surface 262a of the ball passage 272 in the direction of the guide wall 274c. I have to.

  In addition, a triangular rib 278 a that protrudes toward the lower case 262 is formed on the upper surface 278 of the upper case 270. The triangular ribs 278a guide the game balls that have jumped up by colliding with other game balls on the lower surface 274 toward the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264 smoothly and reliably.

  FIG. 216 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. The back surface of the side surface 276 of the spherical passage 272 (the surface opposite to the spherical passage 274) is provided with a knurled knurled process. This knurling prevents the board 280 and the solenoid 266a arranged on the back side of the side surface 276 from being difficult to see from the front by the player, and prevents the board 280 and the solenoid 266a from being improperly crafted. Yes. In addition, a rectangular tube-shaped ball passage 282 through which a game ball can pass is formed between the housing portion that houses the substrate 280 and the housing portion that houses the solenoid 266a. A rib 282a that protrudes in the direction is provided. The rib 282a is not subjected to the knurling process described above, so that the game ball passing through the ball passage 282 is visible from the front side.

In addition, an insertion hole 274d for discharging dust and dust accumulated on the lower surface 274 downward is formed in the vicinity of the ball entry sensor 264 on the lower surface 274 of the ball passage 272. By providing such an insertion hole 274d, dust and dust attached to the game ball and accumulated in the vicinity of the entrance sensor 264 can be dropped downward, and a ball clogging in the vicinity of the entrance sensor 264 can be prevented. Can be prevented. Although not shown, when the variable prize opening unit 260 is assembled, another member is inserted into a part of the insertion hole 274d, so that dust and dirt accumulated in the insertion hole 274 can be removed. It is configured to be forcibly discharged by another member. Further, a rib 810 is provided on the left outer side of the incoming ball sensor 264.
<Door member>

  217 (a) to (f) are a plan view, a front view, a left side view, a right side view, a bottom view, and a rear view of the door member 243a, respectively, and FIG. 217 (g) shows the door member 243a. FIG.

  The door member 243a is made of a plate-shaped transparent member, and a first drop-off prevention wall 290a and a second drop-off prevention wall 290b are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction so as to protrude in the vertical direction with the back surface 290 as a base end. . The first drop prevention wall 290a and the second drop prevention wall 290b prevent the game balls that have entered the back surface 290 from falling (falling off) from both sides of the back surface 290 when the door member 243a is in the open position. It is a member for doing.

  On the first drop-off prevention wall 290a, an engaging portion 290a1 made of two rod-like members engaged with the arm portion 266c of the driving portion 266 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is formed to protrude. A recess 290b1 is formed in the second dropout prevention wall 290b as shown in the left side view of FIG. Since the door member 243a is made of a transparent member, the recess 290b1 changes the bending rate of light at the portion, and from the front of the door member 243a (from the direction of FIG. 5B), the door member 243a. This is a part that makes it difficult to see the incoming ball sensor 264 arranged in the left back of the player (prevents the visual recognition of the incoming ball sensor 264) and prevents fraud.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g), the back surface 290 of the door member 243a has a long side 290c which is the long side on which the game ball enters, on the side where the game ball retreats. A first inclined surface 290e that descends toward the exit side long side 290d that is the long side, and a second inclined surface 290f that descends toward the exit side long side 290d at an angle different from the first inclined surface are formed. Yes.

  Further, on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the back surface 290 of the door member 243a, a first guide slope 290g descending toward the back surface 290 with the point where the first drop prevention wall 290a and the exit side long side 290d intersect each other, A second guide slope 290h that descends toward the back surface 290 is formed at a point where the drop prevention wall 290b and the exit side long side 290d intersect. The first guide slope 290g and the second guide slope 290h are parts for guiding the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 over the entrance-side long side 290c toward the center of the exit-side long side 290d, The rear view in which the diameter increases from the entry-side long side 290c toward the exit-side long side 290d is a substantially triangular non-target portion.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the second guiding slope 290h is designed to be larger than the tilting angle of the first guiding slope 290g, so that the game ball is back at the same speed as the back surface 290 of the door member 243a. Even if the vehicle enters the vehicle, the slope of the first guide slope 290g can be overcome, but the slope of the second guide slope 290h that is steeper than the first guide slope 290g may not be overcome.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9E, a protrusion 294a is formed on the front surface 294 of the door member 243a so as to protrude from the upper right side to the lower side when viewed from the front. The protrusion formed on the front surface 294 may have a curved shape as shown in FIG. 218 (a), or may have a polygonal pyramid shape as shown in FIG. By forming such a protrusion, positioning may be easily performed when a decorative seal or the like is attached to the front surface 294.

FIG. 218 (c) is a view of a conventional door member in the open position as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 218 (d) is a view of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment in the open position as viewed from the right side. FIG. The maximum width W2 of the front end portion of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment is designed to be narrower than the maximum width W1 of the front end portion of the conventional door member, and the door member 243a and a transparent plate member (panel glass). The possibility that a game ball will be sandwiched between 118 and the present invention is reduced as compared with the prior art. Moreover, the maximum protrusion amount L2 of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment is designed to be larger than the maximum protrusion amount L1 of the conventional door member, and when the door member 243a is in the open position, In addition, a large number of game balls are allowed to enter the door member 243a so as to give as much profit as possible to the player.
<Rolling route of game balls>

  Next, the rolling route along which the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 rolls will be described in detail. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of a rolling route of game balls. A plurality of types of game ball rolling routes are conceivable. For example, there are three possible routes: a first route R1, a second route R2, and a third route R3.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a state of a game ball passing through the first route R1. As shown in the figure, the first route R1 is after the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position has fallen over the first guide slope 290g ( (A)), the ball passage 272 enters the vicinity of the right end 274a of the lower surface 274 (FIG. (B)), and extends from the right end 274a toward the left end 274b along the side surface 276 of the lower surface 274. Rolls on the inclined surface (FIGS. (B) to (c)), collides with the guide convex portion 262a1, bounces away from the side surface 276 (FIG. (C)), and reaches the guide wall 274c facing the side surface 276. Colliding (Fig. (D)), rolling the lower surface 274 to the left end portion 274b along the guide wall 274c (Fig. (E)), passing through the ball passage 264a of the entrance sensor 264 (Fig. (F)), the route to reach the ball passage .

  FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a state of a game ball passing through the second route R2. The second route R2 has a back surface 290 along the edge of the first guide slope 290g without the game ball entering the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position, riding on the first guide slope 290g. It rolls up (FIG. (A)), and in a portion where there is a height difference (step) between the door member 243a and the lower surface 274, it rolls on the back surface 290 (FIG. (B)), and the door member 293a and the lower surface 274 are moved. In a portion where there is no height difference (step), the ball enters the lower surface 274 of the spherical passage 272 (FIGS. (C) to (d)), passes through the side of the guide wall 274c, and rolls the lower surface 274 to the left end 274b. ((D) to (e) in the figure), the route passes through the ball path 264a of the incoming sensor 264 ((f) in the figure) and reaches the ball path. This second route R2 is the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 290 of the door member 234a until it passes through the ball passage 264a of the ball entry sensor 264 (the time during which the game ball stays in the first variable winning opening 234). ) Is the shortest route that is the shortest of the first route R1 to the third route R3.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing a state of a game ball passing through the third route R3. The third route R3 collides with the side surface 276 after the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when riding on the second guiding slope 290h (FIG. 5A) when the door member 234a is in the open position. After rolling from the left end portion 274b toward the right end portion 274a against the inclination of the lower surface 274 (FIG. 5B), the inclined surface is rolled from the right end portion 274a toward the left end portion 274b. At the beginning (Fig. (C)), it passes by the side of the guide wall 274c and rolls to the left end portion 274b (Figs. (D) to (e)), and passes through the ball passage 264a of the entrance sensor 264. (Figure (f)) is a route that reaches the ball passage. This third route R3 is the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 290 of the door member 234a until it passes through the ball passage 264a of the ball entry sensor 264 (the time during which the game ball stays in the first variable winning opening 234). ) Is the longest route that is the longest among the first route R1 to the third route R3.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing another aspect of the game ball passing through the third route R3. After the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position rides on the second guide slope 290h (FIG. 5A), the above-described figure is applied until it collides with the side surface 276. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5B, after the game ball rebounds at a reflection angle of about 90 degrees with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball, the first guidance is performed. After rolling on the back surface 290 along the edge of the slope 290g (Fig. (C)), and further rolling on the back surface 290 in a loop along the longitudinal direction (Figs. (D) to (f)). This is a route that passes by the side of the guide wall 274c and rolls to the left end 274b (FIGS. (G) to (h)), passes through the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264, and reaches the ball passage. . In this route, the game sphere can be guided by the side surface 276 in a direction away from the entrance sensor 264 (outside the winning entrance), so that it is easy to take the entering gaming ball out of the winning entrance again. It may be possible to make the time taken to pass the means longer.

  <Effects of the first and second variable winning entries>

  Next, the effects of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 will be described. FIG. 224 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front, and is the same as FIG. 201 described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first variable prize opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200, and the second variable prize opening 235 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 200. When a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of 124, the game ball is easier to enter the first variable prize opening 234 than the second variable prize opening 235, and the game ball is launched at the right side of the game area 124. In such a case, the game ball is configured to enter the second variable prize opening 235 more easily than the first variable prize opening 234. When the special figure 1 variable game is won, a big hit game (or a small hit game) is performed in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When the variable game is won, the jackpot game is performed in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  Therefore, when the player wins the special figure 1 variable game, the player strikes the game ball on the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed) with the aim of entering the first variable winning opening 234. Thus, when the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is adjusted and the special figure 2 variable game is won, the game ball is launched to the right of the game area 124 with the aim of entering the second variable winning opening 235 ( The game is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 so as to make a right-hand hit.

  For this reason, the entrance to the first variable winning opening 234 is more from the left side (the first route R1 or the second route R2) than the first variable winning entrance 234 (the third route R2). R3) is highly likely, and the time for the game ball to stay in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes longer, and an over winning is induced than in the second variable winning opening 235, and the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 variable game Can enjoy for a long time.

  The pachinko machine 100 closes the door member 235a when the ball sensor 264 detects the passage of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls at the first variable winning port 234 (same as the second variable winning port 235). To change. However, during the movement period from the open state to the closed state (until the door member 235a is completely closed), the game ball can enter the first variable winning opening 234. That is, even after the entrance sensor 264 detects the passage of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, it is possible for more game balls to enter, which is advantageous for the player. In this specification, winning a game ball in a predetermined number (for example, more than 10) is referred to as over winning.

  There may be a case where time is required from when the ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 until it is detected by the ball sensor 264. For this reason, a predetermined number of game balls may be detected by the ball entry sensor 264 during a period in which the game balls stay in the first variable prize winning opening 234.

On the other hand, the ball entering the second variable winning port 235 is a ball entering from the right side (the first route R1 or the second route R2) rather than the ball entering from the left side (the third route R3) of the second variable winning port 235. ), The time during which the game ball stays in the second variable prize opening 234 is shortened, over-winning is suppressed more than the first variable prize opening 234, and the big hit game based on the special figure 2 variable game is digested Efficiency is increased.
<Variation of variable prize opening>

  Next, a modified example of the variable winning opening will be described. FIG. 225 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a variable winning opening 600 according to the first modification. The variable prize opening 600 according to the first modification includes a variable prize opening unit 602 and a door member 604, and dropout prevention walls 604 a are formed on both sides of the door member 604 in the longitudinal direction.

  The back surface 606 of the door member 604 is formed continuously from the first inclined surface 606a that descends from the right side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 604 to the left side, and the lower edge of the first inclined surface 606a. A second inclined surface 606b that descends toward the variable prize opening unit 602 in a direction parallel to the short side direction, is formed continuously with the upper edge of the first inclined surface 606a, and is opposite to the first inclined surface 606a. A third inclined surface 606c that descends toward the bottom, and a lower edge of the third inclined surface 606c that is formed continuously with the lower edge of the third inclined surface 606c and parallel to the short direction of the door member 604. And a fourth inclined surface 606b. The lengths of the third inclined surface 606c and the fourth inclined surface 606d in the longitudinal direction are designed to be longer than the lengths of the first inclined surface 606a and the second inclined surface 606b in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

  A lower surface 608 of the variable winning opening 602 is adjacent to the second inclined surface 606b of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 and descends toward the ball entering sensor 610 in a direction parallel to the short direction of the variable winning opening 602. An inclined surface 608a, a second inclined surface 608b that is adjacent to the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 and descends obliquely toward the entrance sensor 610, and the second inclined surface 608b. And a third inclined surface 608c that is formed and descends obliquely toward the entrance sensor 610.

  In the first modified example, when the door member 604 is in the open position, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 606a of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the first inclined surface 606a → the first inclined surface 606 of the back surface 606 of the door member 604. 2 The inclined surface 606b → rolls on the first route of the first inclined surface 608a of the lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602 and reaches the ball entering sensor 610. In this first route, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball entry sensor 610 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600) is the longest. This is the shortest route to be shortened.

  In addition, the game ball that has entered the third inclined surface 606c of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the third inclined surface 606c of the rear surface 606 of the door member 604 → the fourth inclined surface 606d → the first lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602. It rolls on the second route of the second inclined surface 608b (or the third inclined surface 608c) and reaches the entrance sensor 610. This second route has the longest time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball sensor 610 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600). It is the longest route that gets longer.

  In addition, the game ball that has entered the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 → the second inclined surface 608b of the lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602 (or It rolls on the third route of the third inclined surface 608c) and reaches the entrance sensor 610. In this third route, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball entry sensor 610 (time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600) This route is shorter than the second route and longer than the first route.

  According to the variable prize opening 600 according to the first modification, the game ball can be guided to the ball entry sensor 610 through at least three routes by one variable prize opening. For example, in the second route, an over prize is obtained. In the first route, over-winning is suppressed and the digestion efficiency of the jackpot game is increased.

  FIG. 225 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the variable prize opening 620 according to the second modification. The variable winning opening 620 according to the second modification includes a variable winning opening unit 622 and a door member 624, and dropout prevention walls 624 a are formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624.

  The back surface 626 of the door member 624 includes a first inclined surface 626a that descends from the left side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624 toward the center, a second inclined surface 626b that descends from the right side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624 toward the center, And the lower edges of the first inclined surface 626a and the second inclined surface 626b are configured to substantially coincide with the central axis of the entrance sensor 630. Further, the length n1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 626a is designed to be longer than the length n2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 626b (n1> n2).

  The bottom surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 includes a first inclined surface 628 a that descends from the left in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning opening 622 toward the central winning sensor 630, and the central winning sensor from the right in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning opening 622. And a second inclined surface 628b that descends toward 630. The length m1 of the first inclined surface 628a in the longitudinal direction is designed to be longer than the length m2 of the second inclined surface 628b in the longitudinal direction (m1> m2).

  In the second modification, a game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 626a of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 when the door member 624 is in the open state is the first inclined surface 6206a → second of the back surface 626 of the door member 624. The inclined surface 626 b → rolls along the first route of the second inclined surface 628 b of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 and reaches the ball entering sensor 630. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 626b of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 is the second inclined surface 626b of the rear surface 626 of the door member 624 → the first inclined surface 626a → the first lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 620. Roll along the second route of the two inclined surfaces 628 a to reach the entrance sensor 610.

  The length n1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 626a of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 is the same as the length m1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 628a of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622, and the door member 624. If the length n2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 626b of the rear face 626 and the length m2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 628b of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 are the same, the variable according to the second modification example At the winning hole 620, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 626 of the door member 624 until it passes through the ball passage 630a of the ball sensor 630 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning hole 620) is The first route and the second route are the same.

  According to the variable prize opening 620 according to the modified example 2, the time that the game ball stays in the variable prize opening can be made uniform regardless of whether the game ball passes through the first route or the second route. .

  FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which a route that is easy to win over and a route that is difficult to win over is formed on the lower surface of the variable winning opening and the back of the door member with the central axis of the ball sensor as a boundary.

  In this example, a game ball that has entered the right region on the back surface of the door member is guided in a direction approaching the ball sensor by the door member and the variable winning opening, but a game that has entered the left region on the back surface of the door member. The sphere is guided once in the direction away from the entrance sensor by the door member, and then guided in the direction approaching the entrance sensor by the variable winning opening. According to the variable winning opening and the door member according to this example, the rolling route of the game ball can be made different depending on the ball entry position of the door member.

  In FIG. 226 (b), a route that is easy to over-win and a route that is hard to over-win is formed on the bottom surface of the variable winning opening and the back surface of the door member, and both of the ball sensors are provided. It is the figure which showed the example provided on the route | root.

  In this example, the game ball that has entered the right region on the back surface of the door member is guided in a direction approaching the right first entrance sensor by the door member and the variable winning opening, but in the left region on the back surface of the door member. The game ball that has entered the ball is guided once in the direction away from the left second incoming sensor by the door member, and then guided in the direction approaching the second incoming sensor by the variable winning opening. According to the variable winning opening and the door member according to this example, the rolling route of the game ball can be made different depending on the entrance position of the door member, and the game ball can be made to enter a different entrance sensor. it can.

  FIG. 227 (a) is an external perspective view showing an example of a shutter-type variable winning opening 650, and FIG. 227 (b) is a side sectional view showing a section of a part of the variable winning opening 650. FIG. The variable winning opening 650 includes a door member 654 that can slide between an open position where a ball can be entered into the variable winning slot unit 652 and a closed position where a ball cannot be entered.

  The door member 654 is formed continuously from a first inclined surface 654a that descends away from the entrance sensor 656, and an upper edge of the first inclined surface 654a, and descends in a direction approaching the entrance sensor 656. 2 inclined surfaces 654a.

  In the variable winning opening 650, the game ball dropped on the first inclined surface 654a of the door member 654 rolls away from the ball-entry sensor 656 along the inclination of the first inclined surface 654a, and the door member 654 is opened. When it falls into the variable prize opening unit 652 due to the movement to the position, it is guided in the direction of the ball entry sensor 656 by the inclination of the bottom face of the variable prize opening unit 652. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen on the second inclined surface 654b of the door member 654 rolls in a direction approaching the entrance sensor 656 along the inclination of the second inclined surface 654b, and the door member 654 moves to the open position. When falling into the variable prize opening unit 652, it is guided in the direction of the ball entry sensor 656 by the inclination of the bottom surface of the variable prize opening unit 652.

  According to this variable winning opening 650, a single game can be used to guide a game ball to the winning sensor 656 via at least two routes. For example, in a route that rolls on the first inclined surface 654a, In addition, it is possible to induce over winning and enjoy the big hit game for a long time. In the route that rolls on the second inclined surface 654b, over winning is suppressed and the digestion efficiency of the big hit game is increased.

  <Variable prize opening unit and ball passage shape>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 to 234, the shapes of the variable prize opening unit 260 and the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 of the present embodiment will be further described.

  FIG. 228 is a plan view showing a part of the variable prize opening unit 260 in a transparent manner (here, a front view seen from the side of the door member 234a not shown). As described above, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is an area surrounded by the lower surface (bottom surface) 274, the side surface 276, and the upper surface 278, and the front side (side surface 276 shown in FIG. 228). The portion facing) is an opening 820 that is opened or closed by a door member 234a (not shown here). As shown in the figure, hereinafter, the distance between both ends in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 (the left end 274b in front view and the right end 274a in front view) is referred to as an opening width W0, and the opening width W0. The center (center line) in the longitudinal direction LD is referred to as an opening center line 820c.

  In the variable prize opening unit 260, the ball entry sensor 264 is provided at a position closer to the left end 274b than the opening center line 820c. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the entrance sensor 264 (for example, the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264 in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820) to the left end 274b is the first distance The distance LL1 is the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264 to the opening center line 820c. The second distance LL2 is the second distance LL2. The distance is longer than the distance LL1. Here, the first distance LL1 and the second distance LL2 have been described with reference to the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264, but any one end portion in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 of the entrance sensor 264 ( In the illustrated state, the left end or the right end) may be used as a reference.

  FIG. 229 (a) is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 228, and FIG. 229 (b) is a side sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 229 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 of the present embodiment is arranged along the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 in the first ball path area 822 (the diagonally downward slanting line). A hatched area), a second spherical passage area 824 (horizontal stripe hatched area), and a third spherical passage area 826 (lower right hatched area). That is, the variable winning a prize opening unit 260 has a ball entry sensor 264 arranged further to the left of the left end 274b of the opening 820, and the third ball passage area 826, from the left end 274b toward the right end 274a, The first ball passage region 822 and the second ball passage region 824 are arranged in this order. Further, the third sphere passage region 826, the first sphere passage region 822, and the second sphere passage region 824 are adjacent to each other, and the third sphere passage region 826 and the first sphere passage region 822 are all connected to the opening center line 820c. It arrange | positions between the entrance sensors 264 (left side edge part 274b). The third ball passage region 826 is disposed between the first ball passage region 822 and the incoming ball sensor 264.

  The first ball passage region 822 is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 820. The first sphere passage region 822 includes at least a region having a first sphere passage width W1. The first ball passage width W1 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the tip of the guide convex portion 262a1 to the guide wall 274c facing the first ball passage width 262a in the drawing.

  The second sphere passage region 824 is disposed between the first sphere passage region 822 and the right end portion 274a so as to cross both sides of the opening center line 820c with the opening center line 820c interposed therebetween. The second ball passage region 824 includes at least a region having a second ball passage width W2 in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. The second ball passage width W2 is a distance (width) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822 to the end portion on the right end portion 274a side. The second ball passage width W2 is larger than the first ball passage width W1 and larger than twice the diameter WB of the game ball B. Further, the second ball passage width W2 is larger than the width WC (= W0 / 2) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the left end 274b to the opening center line 820c, and is smaller than the opening width W0. The second ball passage area 824 is at least easily visible to the player when the door member 234a of the variable prize opening unit 260 is in the open position (in the state shown in the drawing).

  The third ball passage region 826 includes at least a region having a third ball passage width W3. The third ball passage width W3 in the same figure in the short side direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260 from the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 in the vicinity of the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822 to the guide wall 274c opposite thereto. Distance (width). The third ball passage width W3 is the maximum width of the third ball passage region 826 in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260, and the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 822 and the game ball Greater than diameter.

  The third ball passage area 826 is provided at a position closer to the incoming sensor 264 than the first ball passage area 822. More specifically, the first ball passage area 822 (for example, the variable winning opening of the first ball passage area 822) from the ball entering sensor 264 (for example, the center 264c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of the ball entering sensor 264). The distance in the longitudinal direction LD to the center 260 in the longitudinal direction LD of the unit 260 is the third distance LL3, and the third sphere passage region 826 (for example, the third sphere passage region) from the center 264c of the incoming sensor 264. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD to the center 826c) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning award slot unit 826 is the fourth distance LL4, and the fourth distance LL4 is shorter than the third distance LL3. It is.

  Further, the second ball passage region 824 is a region provided on the right end 274a side with respect to the first ball passage region 822. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the right end 274a to the first ball passage region 822 (for example, the center 822c of the first ball passage region 822) is the fifth distance LL5. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD from the right end 274a to the second ball passage area 824 (for example, the center 824c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of the second ball passage area 824) is the sixth distance The sixth distance LL6 is shorter than the fifth distance LL5. Here, the third distance LL3 to the sixth distance LL6 have been described with reference to the center of each area. However, any one end of each area in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 ( In the illustrated state, the left end or the right end) may be used as a reference.

  Further, the second sphere passage region 824 includes at least a region (wide portion 824a) having a fourth sphere passage width W4 in a part thereof. Here, the fourth ball passage width W4 is the width in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of a part (wide portion 824a) of the second ball passage region 824 in the vicinity of the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822. It is. The fourth ball passage width W4 is the maximum width of the second ball passage region 824 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 260, and is larger than the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 822.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the ball entry sensor 264 has a ball passage (sensor hole) 264a into which the game ball B can enter at least, and when the game ball B enters the ball passage 264a, the game ball The entry of B can be detected. The spherical passage 264a has a fifth spherical passage width W5. The fifth ball passage width W5 is the maximum width of the ball passage 264a. Here, as an example, the spherical passage 264a in the side sectional view of FIG. 5B is not a perfect circle, but is configured by a curve over the entire circumference, and is more in the X-axis direction than the diameter WY in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction). The horizontal diameter (WX) has a slightly long circular shape, and the fifth spherical passage width W5 is a width in the X-axis direction (maximum diameter WX). Further, the diameter in the X-axis direction passing through the center of the spherical passage (sensor hole) 264a (indicated by the intersection of the one-dot chain line) is the maximum diameter. The first sphere passage width W1 of the first sphere passage region 822 is smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5.

  The diameter WY in the Y-axis direction and the diameter WX in the X-axis direction of the ball passage 264a are both longer than the diameter WB of the game ball B. The diameter WY in the Y-axis direction may be the same length as the fifth sphere passage width W5 (X-axis direction diameter WX), may be smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5, or may be smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5. It can be large. Further, the shape of the spherical passage 264a may be a perfect circle, or at least a part thereof may be constituted by a straight line. For example, it may be a hexagonal shape or an octagonal shape. W5 is the length of the maximum diameter.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 has a width (first ball path width W1) shorter than the diameter WB of the game ball B by the guide convex portion 262a1. A ball passage region 822 is provided, and the second ball passage width W2 of the second ball passage region 824 located on the right side of the guide convex portion 262a1 in FIG. 229 (a) is the width in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. The width is equal to or greater than the first ball passage width W1, and more specifically, a width equal to or greater than two game balls (more than twice the diameter WB of the game balls B).

  The second ball passage area 824 is an area in which the game ball B rolling on the variable prize opening unit 260 is temporarily retained. With such a configuration, the game ball B is placed in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. Even if a large amount of liquid stays, clogging of the balls can be suppressed.

  In addition, a third ball passage region 826 including a first ball passage width W1 and a width wider than the diameter of the game ball (third ball passage width W3) is provided between the guide convex portion 262a1 and the entrance sensor 264. .

  Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball B is detected by the incoming ball sensor 264 and to make it easier to over-win.

  230 is a view showing a side cross section of the variable prize opening unit 260, FIG. 230 (a) is a plan view similar to FIG. 228, and FIG. 230 (b) is an AA line in FIG. 230 (a). 230 (c) is a side sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 230 (a), and FIG. 230 (d) is taken along line CC in FIG. 230 (a). FIG. 230 (e) is a side sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 230 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 5B, a rib 810 is provided on the left outside of the incoming ball sensor 264 to guide the game ball to the out ball path. The ribs 810 are provided in a substantially C shape in a side sectional view from the back side of the lower case 262 to the back side of the upper case 270, the upper side of the upper case 270, the front side of the upper case 270, and the front side of the lower case 262. The rear side (the left side in the figure) is inclined to be lower than the front side (the right side in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 6C, a light emitting means 830 is provided below the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 of the ball passage 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260. The light emitting means 830 is, for example, an LED, and illuminates the spherical passage 272 from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is at least partially open (for example, the area of the first ball path area 822 and the third ball path area 826). A guide wall 274c is configured such that the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 on the side (the door member 234a not shown here) is higher than the other lower surface 274. Further, the width of the guide wall 274c (the amount of protrusion to the ball passage 272) increases from the vicinity of the guide convex portion 262a1 toward the ball entering sensor 264. The game ball can be smoothly guided to the entrance sensor 264 by such a guide wall 274c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5E, the guide wall 274c is not provided on the right end side of the guide convex portion 262a1, and the lower surface 274 of the spherical passage 272 is a flat surface without reducing the momentum. The game ball can roll on the ball passage 272. In addition, the width (fourth ball passage width W4) of the lower surface 274 of a part (the wide portion 824a) of the second ball passage region 824 in the same figure is larger than the diameter of the game ball. 826 is larger than the third ball passage width W3 ((d) in the figure).

  FIG. 231 is a side sectional view that is the same as FIG. 230 (b), and shows a state in which the game ball B that has passed through the incoming ball sensor 264 is guided to the path of the out ball.

  The rib 810 is inclined downward toward the back side, and the width W ′ of the ball path of the game ball B that passes through the ball sensor 264 toward the path of the out ball is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and It is smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball B (more specifically, 1.5 times the diameter).

  The game ball B that has passed through the ball passage (sensor hole) 264a of the incoming ball sensor 264 rolls along the shape of the bottom surface of the rib 810 (FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C) and moves toward the back side. . Since the width of the variable winning award opening unit 260 in the short direction SD is small, if the game ball B rolls too much, the game ball B may jump up and cause a ball clogging on the way to the path of the out ball. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 5E, the momentum of rolling is moderately attenuated by the ribs 810, the jumping of the game ball B is suppressed, and the ball is smoothly moved to the path of the out ball. The ball of the game ball B is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first spherical passage width W1 of the first spherical passage region 822 is the width at the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 of the first spherical passage region 822, that is, the lower end (lower surface) of the guide convex portion 262a1 as described above. The distance (width) from the end portion on the 274 side to the lower end (the end portion on the lower surface 274 side) of the guide wall 274c facing this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first spherical passage width W1 may be a horizontal distance (width) from the upper end of the guide protrusion 262a1 to the upper side of the opposite guide wall 274c, or the first protrusion 262a1. The distance (width) in the horizontal direction from between the lower end and the upper end to the opposing guide wall 274c may be used. Further, as shown in the side sectional view of FIG. 230 (c), the guide wall 274c is a wall (gradient is inclined) such that the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the lower end is larger than the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the upper end. The wall is not limited to a vertical wall, but may be an overhanging wall (a wall whose gradient exceeds vertical) that is inclined so that the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the lower end is smaller than the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the upper end. In addition, a protrusion-like wall (a wall that slopes below the vertical and has an overhang in the middle while projecting from the upper end and the lower end may be formed between the upper end and the lower end.

  FIG. 232 is an exploded perspective view showing an example of a shutter type winning device (variable winning unit) 700 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 232 shows the shutter-type winning device (variable winning unit) 700 from the front to the rear from the lower left to the upper right.

  The shutter-type winning device 700 is roughly classified into a variable winning opening defining unit 710, a winning device base 720, an illumination unit 730, a base cover 740, a shutter driving member 750, a shutter driving solenoid 760, and a shutter driving system. The unit 770 and the shutter 800 are included.

  The variable winning opening defining unit 710 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a front surface (front surface) 710a, a front surface rear surface 710b, a left surface 710c, a right surface 710d, and a bottom surface first inclined plane 710e. , Bottom bottom second inclined plane 710f, non-winning ball passage 710g, rear inclined surface 710h, and upper end side 710i. In FIG. 232, since the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f and the rear inclined surface 710h are hidden, no leader line or reference numeral is attached. Further, the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the like face forward from the base plane portion (base plate) 720a that is in contact with the surface of the game board 200. So that it may be referred to as a protruding portion.

  The variable winning opening defining part 710 has a pair of left side part 710c and right side part 710d formed toward the front. An upper portion of the left side surface portion 710c is provided with a non-winning ball passage 710g having an inclined plane that descends from the right to the left. An inclined plane descending from right to left is also provided on the upper portion of the right side surface portion 710d. The inclined plane of the non-winning ball passage 710g and the inclined plane above the right side surface portion 710d are included in substantially the same plane (hereinafter referred to as a first reference plane). That is, the height of the left side surface portion 710c is lower than the height of the right side surface portion 710d.

  In addition, the variable winning opening defining unit 710 has a front surface portion 710a formed on the front surface side that is connected to the left side surface portion 710c and the right side surface portion 710d. The flat surface of the front surface portion 710a is provided with a decorative pattern with low unevenness, and the convex portion is plated with gold, for example. For this reason, the front surface portion 710a is also referred to as a decorative portion 710a.

  An upper end side 710i that is linearly inclined parallel to the first reference plane at a predetermined distance from the first reference plane is provided on the upper portion of the front surface portion 710a.

  The front surface rear surface 710b is formed in a planar shape substantially orthogonal to the first reference plane. In the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b, an uneven portion 900 (not shown) is arranged along the upper end side 710i in parallel with the first reference plane. The uneven portion 900 will be described later.

  A bottom surface portion is formed in a lower portion of a region surrounded by the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, and the front surface portion 710a. The bottom surface portion has a bottom surface inclined plane that is substantially orthogonal to the front surface rear surface 710b and is inclined downward from left to right. Further, the bottom surface portion includes a rear inclined surface 710h (not shown in FIG. 232) following the bottom surface inclined plane. The bottom surface inclined plane is a bottom surface first inclined plane 710e having a first inclination angle and a bottom surface portion first continuous with the bottom surface first inclined plane 710e and having a smaller inclination angle than the bottom surface first inclined plane 710e. 2 inclined planes 710f (not shown in FIG. 232). Hereinafter, a plane including the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f is referred to as a second reference plane. For example, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility, the second reference plane is substantially opposite to the first reference plane across the horizontal plane, and the angle formed between the second reference plane and the horizontal plane is the first reference plane and the horizontal plane. It is almost equal to the angle between A rearward inclined surface 710h that is inclined downward from the front to the rear is provided downstream of the bottom surface second inclined plane 710f. The inclined plane may be partially curved.

  The rear end sides of the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the second bottom surface inclined surface 710f, and the non-winning ball passage 710g of the variable winning opening defining portion 710 are constant from the front surface back surface 710b. Are included in a plane parallel to the rear face 710b on the rear side by a predetermined width.

  The winning device base 720 is a member screwed to the game board 200 only when the shutter-type winning device 700 is positioned and fixed at a predetermined position on the lower right of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The winning device base 720 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an arc shape in which an edge from the bottom toward the upper right matches the arc shape of the lower right side of the game area 124. The winning device base 720 includes a base plane portion (base plate) 720a, a shutter retracting opening 720b, a winning ball passing opening 720c, light emitting windows 720d and 720e, a shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f, and a general winning ball passage. 720g.

  The entire front surface of the winning device base 720 is substantially flat. A base plane portion 720a serving as one inner surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is provided at a predetermined position above the front surface. At a predetermined position on the right end of the base plane portion 720a, there is provided a winning ball passing opening 720c in which an opening of a size through which a game ball can pass is formed. The left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the non-winning ball passage 710g of the variable winning a prize opening defining portion 710 are arranged on the base plane portion 720a. The variable prize opening defining part 710 is fixed to the front side of the base plane part 720a from the back side of the base plane part 720a with two mounting screws 714 after being aligned with a predetermined position on the front surface. Is configured. The second variable prize winning opening 235 includes a front inner back surface 710b and a base flat surface portion 720a, which are opposed inner walls arranged substantially in parallel with a predetermined width, and includes a bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e and a bottom surface portion second inclined plane. 710f, the rear inclined surface 710h, and the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d perpendicular to the front surface rear surface 710b and extending in the vertical direction form a bottom surface portion and a side surface portion connecting the opposing inner walls. Further, a plane including the front surface rear surface 710b, a plane including the surface of the base plane surface portion 720a, a plane including the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, and a plane including the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d intersect the first reference plane. An opening surface (opening region) of the second variable winning award port 235 is configured by a closed region in the first reference plane defined by the above. The rear inclined surface 710h is fixed with its rear end extending to the lower side of the winning ball passing opening 720c.

  The base plane portion 720a below the line of intersection between the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 and the surface of the base plane portion 720a is an elongated rectangle parallel to the line of intersection and within the width in the left-right direction of the line of intersection. A light emitting window 720d in which three openings are formed is disposed. Above the intersection line, a shutter protrusion / disengagement opening 720b in which an elongated rectangular opening having a width slightly exceeding the width in the left-right direction of the intersection line is formed in parallel to the intersection line.

  A light emitting window 720e having a circular shape with a transparent resin flat plate having a relatively high smoothness is disposed below the surface of the base flat portion 720a and above the arc-shaped end of the winning device base 720. Yes. A predetermined surface of the winning device base 720 is decorated with a low unevenness, and a part of the convex part is plated with, for example, gold, the other part has transparency, and the concave part has, for example, semi-transparency. Has been processed.

  A shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f is provided on the back surface of the base flat portion 720a and above the shutter protruding / sending opening portion 720b. A general winning ball passage 720g is arranged on the right side of the shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f. A general winning opening 226 is arranged on the front side of the general winning ball passage 720g, and is fixed by two mounting screws 716 from the back of the winning device base 720. On the upper end surface of the arc-shaped edge of the winning device base 720, a ball path 712 is disposed to change the course of the game ball flowing down from the upper right of the gaming area 124 to the lower left, and the back of the winning device base 720. Are fixed by one mounting screw 718.

  The illumination unit 730 has a shape that is integrally formed with a transparent resin material, for example, and is fitted into a not-shown uneven portion formed on the back surface of the winning device base 720. The illumination unit 730 includes light emitting units 730a and 730b, a winning ball passage 730c, and an upper plane portion 730d.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted to the back surface of the winning device base 720, the light emitting unit 730a has an opening outline of the three light emitting windows 720d so that the light emitting unit 730a is fitted to the three light emitting windows 720d opened in the base flat part 720a. It has a projecting portion to follow. The front portion of the protruding portion is formed in a planar shape that substantially matches the surface of the base plane portion 720a when the light emitting portion 730a is fitted into the light emitting window 720d. A plurality of microprisms that scatter incident light are arranged on the back surface of the front flat surface of the protrusion. A light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED is disposed inside the protruding portion, and the light emitting portion 730a receives the light from the light emitting element from the front surface of the protruding portion through the light emitting window 720d to the second variable prize opening. Inject into 235.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, the light emitting unit 730b follows the opening contour of the light emission window 720e so that the light emission unit 730b is fitted into the circular light emission window 720e below the front surface of the base plane part 720a. Has a protrusion. The front portion of the protruding portion is formed in a planar shape that substantially matches the back surface of the light emitting window 720e when the light emitting portion 730b is fitted into the light emitting window 720e. A plurality of minute prisms that scatter incident light are randomly arranged on the front rear surface of the protrusion. A light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED is disposed behind the protruding portion, and the light emitting portion 730b emits light from the light emitting element forward from the front surface of the protruding portion through the light emitting window 720e.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, the winning ball passing passage 730c is fixed in the front-rear direction with the winning ball passing opening 720c opened at a predetermined position on the right end of the base flat portion 720a. Opposes at a distance.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, a predetermined space including a gap between the winning ball passage 730c and the winning ball passage opening 720c is formed, and a ball detection sensor is formed in the predetermined space. 732 is sandwiched. The sphere detection sensor 732 includes an opening having an inner diameter through which the sphere can pass, and an electric circuit section that generates a sphere detection signal when the sphere passes through the opening. The opening of the ball detection sensor 732 is disposed between the winning ball passage opening 720c and the winning ball passage 730c, enters the second variable winning opening 235, and enters the winning ball passage opening 720c. The reached game ball is allowed to flow and flow down to the winning ball passage 730c.

  The upper flat portion 730d on the upper side of the light emitting portion 730a is disposed at a position lower than the lower side in the left-right direction of the shutter protruding / retracting opening 720b by a predetermined distance when the illumination unit 730 is fitted to the back surface of the winning device base 720.

  The base cover 740 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and is disposed in combination with the back surface of the winning device base 720. The base cover 740 has a substantially flat cover surface on the front surface and an edge portion standing upright at a predetermined height on the front side of the cover surface around the cover surface. A thin recess is formed between the front surface and the edge of the cover surface. A winning ball passing opening 740a and an upper flat portion 740b are formed at predetermined positions on the cover surface. The lighting unit 730 and the ball detection sensor 732 are fitted into the back surface of the winning device base 720, and the light emitting elements (not shown) and their wirings are accommodated in the recesses, and the base cover 740 is attached to the back surface of the winning device base 720. Position and fix to the back of the winning device base 720 with three mounting screws 746.

  The winning ball passing opening 740a is disposed at a position exposing the rear opening of the winning ball passing passage 730c of the lighting unit 730, and the upper flat portion 740b substantially coincides with the lower side in the left-right direction of the shutter retracting opening 720b. Placed in position.

  The shutter driving member 750, the shutter driving solenoid 760, and the shutter 800 are housed in the shutter drive system housing portion 770. The shutter drive system accommodating part 770 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a box shape with an open front surface. The solenoid housing portion 770a, the shutter drive plate housing portion 770b, the ball passage 770c, and the sensor housing portion 770d are partitioned in order from the left to the right when viewed from the front. A shutter accommodating portion 770e is defined above the solenoid accommodating portion 770a, the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b, and the ball passage 770c, and an upper portion of the shutter accommodating portion 770e is a shutter accommodating roof rear portion 770f. A plurality of slits for heat dissipation are opened in the shutter housing roof rear part 770f.

  The solenoid housing portion 770a houses a shutter driving solenoid 760. The shutter drive solenoid 760 includes a yoke 760a, a coil 760b, and a movable iron core 760c. The coil 670b has a copper wire wound around a bobbin made of ferrite, for example. A fixed iron core is disposed on one end side inside the bobbin, and the fixed iron core and, for example, an iron yoke 760a are magnetically connected. The yoke 760a has a structure in which two opposing surfaces are removed from a hollow box shape. The coil 670b is installed in the yoke 760a so that the fixed iron core of the coil 670b is fixed to one surface of the upper and lower surfaces of the yoke 760a and the other end of the bobbin is located on the other surface. On the other surface of the yoke 760a, an opening through which the other end side inside the bobbin is exposed is provided. The movable iron core 760c is inserted into the bobbin through the opening. A gripping disc to be inserted into the gripping portion at the upper end of the swing jig 750a of the shutter driving member 750 is fixed to the tip of the movable iron core 670c. The movable iron core 670c is held so as to be movable in the vertical direction inside the coil 760b. The movable iron core 670c is biased downward by a spring (not shown) in a state where no current flows through the coil 760b, and moves upward when a current flows through the coil 760b. Thereby, the swing jig 750a attached to the tip of the movable iron core 670c moves up and down.

  A mounting bracket 772 for fixing the shutter driving solenoid 760 to the solenoid housing portion 770a is fixed to the rear wall surface of the solenoid housing portion 770a by two mounting screws 776. Two screw holes are provided on the side of the yoke 760a of the shutter driving solenoid 760 facing the rear wall of the solenoid housing portion 770a. Through holes are provided in positions corresponding to the two screw holes in the rear wall of the solenoid housing portion 770a and the mounting bracket 772, respectively. Through this through hole, two mounting screws 774 are screwed into the two screw holes of the yoke 760a from the rear side of the mounting bracket 772, and the shutter driving solenoid 760 is fixed to the solenoid housing portion 770a.

  The shutter driving member 750 includes a swing jig 750a and a shutter driving plate. The swing jig 750a is formed of, for example, black resin. The shutter drive plate is integrally formed of, for example, black resin, and has a shaft portion 750b, a plate-like first plate portion 750c, a second plate portion 750d, and a third plate portion 750e.

  The first plate portion 750c protrudes into a guide groove formed on the right side surface of the swing jig 750a accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 770a on the lower left side surface of the first plate portion 750c, and is movable with its direction regulated by the guide groove. A guide shaft is formed.

  A shaft portion 750b having an axis projecting substantially vertically from the left and right side surfaces is formed on the upper end side of the first plate portion 750c. The lower end side of the second plate portion 750d is integrated with the upper end side of the first plate portion 750c and shares the shaft portion 750b. With respect to the first plate portion 750c, the second plate portion 750d is bent forward at a predetermined angle at the shaft portion 750b. The third plate portion 750e is formed to extend in parallel with the plate surface of the second plate portion 750d from the upper end side of the second plate portion 750d. The plate thickness of the third plate portion 750e is formed thinner than the plate thickness of the second plate portion 750d. The upper end side of the third plate portion 750e has an arc shape in cross section.

  The distance from the shaft portion 750b to the upper end of the third plate portion 750e is longer than the distance from the shaft portion 750b to the guide shaft of the first plate portion 750c.

  The shutter driving plate of the shutter driving member 750 is accommodated in the shutter driving plate accommodating portion 770b. The shutter drive plate housing portion 770b is provided with a bearing portion that receives both shafts of the shaft portion 750b of the shutter drive plate. When the shutter drive plate is accommodated in the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b and both shafts of the shaft portion 750b are placed on the bearing portion, the first to third plate portions 750c to 750e of the shutter drive plate have the shaft portion 750b as the center of rotation. It can be rotated back and forth.

  In addition, the shutter drive plate is accommodated in the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b, and the guide shaft that protrudes to the left bottom surface of the first plate portion 750c is formed on the right side surface of the swing jig 750a accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 770a. Inserted into the guide groove.

  When the shutter driving solenoid 760 is not driven, the bottom surface of the swing jig 750a at the end of the movable iron core 670c is in contact with the bottom surface of the solenoid housing portion 770a and is stopped. The position of the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e at the stop position of the guide shaft in the guide groove of the swing jig 750a at the time of non-driving is set as the initial position.

  The guide groove of the swing jig 750a is formed with a groove passage so that when the swing jig 750a is raised, the guide shaft of the first plate portion 750c is rotated forward about the shaft portion 750b. For this reason, when the shutter driving solenoid 760 is energized to drive the movable iron core 670c and raise the swing jig 750a by a predetermined distance, the guide groove of the swing jig 750a rises along the groove path in the guide groove. The guide shaft is moved to rotate the first plate portion 750c in the forward direction with the shaft portion 750b as the center of rotation. Thereby, the upper end side of the 3rd board part 750e located in the other side of the 1st board part 750c on both sides of the axial part 750b can be moved back predetermined distance from an initial position.

  A set of left and right rail members 752 and 754 are attached to the shutter accommodating portion 770e so as to hold the accommodated shutter 800 so as to be able to protrude and retract. Each of the left and right rail members 752 and 754 is formed of, for example, black resin. The left rail member 752 has an inverted U-shaped concave rail portion and an attachment end portion provided at the base end of the concave rail portion. The right rail member 754 has a U-shaped concave rail portion and an attachment end portion provided at the base end of the concave rail portion. The left and right rail members 752 and 754 are fixed to the rear wall surface of the shutter accommodating portion 770e by two mounting screws 756 and 758, respectively, with allowance for slidably holding the left and right ends of the shutter 800. The left and right rail members 752 and 754 are arranged such that the right rail member 754 is higher than the left rail member 752 so that the shutter 800 can protrude and retract from the shutter retracting opening 720b when the shutter-type winning device 700 is assembled. Is attached.

  The shutter (door member) 800 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin member, and has a thin rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole. The shutter 800 includes a shutter flat surface portion 800a, a shutter tip portion 800b, and a driving member connecting portion 800c. The shutter flat surface portion 800a has a substantially rectangular flat surface, and the left-right width is slightly wider than the left-right width of the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235. A shutter front end portion 800b is formed with a predetermined width from the front side edge of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. The shutter front end portion 800b has an inclined upper plane that descends forward at a predetermined angle from the front side edge of the upper plane of the shutter plane portion 800a, and a lower plane that extends forward in line with the lower plane of the shutter plane portion 800a. Yes. The front end side where the inclined upper plane and the lower plane intersect is subjected to predetermined rounding. An angle between the inclined upper plane and the lower plane is, for example, 25 degrees to 30 degrees. Since the shutter front end portion 800b of the shutter 800 is formed thin, the area that becomes a contact point when the shutter 800 and the game ball come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the possibility of ball engagement can be reduced. Since the upper surface side of the shutter front end portion 800b is inclined, it is possible to release the force when the game ball is caught between the corner portions of the uneven portion 900.

  A driving member connecting portion 800c is provided at substantially the center of the rear side edge of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. The driving member connecting portion 800c has a recess that is open on the lower side and into which the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e of the shutter driving member 750 is inserted.

  The third plate portion of the shutter driving member 750 is inserted into the concave portion of the driving member connecting portion 800c while the left and right side surface portions of the shutter 800 are inserted into the left and right rail members 752 and 754 with the driving member connecting portion 800c side of the shutter 800 facing rearward. The shutter 800 and its drive system are configured by inserting the upper end side of 750e.

  The shutter drive system accommodating portion 770 has a spherical passage 770c formed on the right side of the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b. Further, a sensor housing portion 770d is formed on the right side of the ball passage 770c. A predetermined sensor 762 is disposed in the sensor housing portion 770d.

  The shutter driving system accommodating portion 770 accommodating the shutter driving member 750, the shutter driving solenoid 760, the shutter 800, and the like is attached to the back surface of the base cover 740 that is screwed to the back surface of the winning device base 720. It is fixed to the base cover 740 with a screw 748. A closed portion is provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of the base cover 740 so as to block the opening of the bearing portion so that the shaft of the shaft portion 750b of the shutter drive plate does not fall off from the bearing portion of the shutter drive plate housing portion 770b. Yes. Further, the upper surface of the shutter accommodating roof rear portion 770f of the shutter drive system accommodating portion 770 substantially coincides with the upper surface of the shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f.

  FIG. 233 is a perspective view of the assembled shutter-type winning device 700. Both FIGS. 233 (a) and 233 (b) show the shutter type winning device 700 from the front to the rear from the lower left to the upper right in the figure. FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the shutter 800 appears and closes the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235. In the state shown in FIG. 233 (a), the shutter driving solenoid 760 is not driven, the movable iron core 670c is pushed downward by the spring, and the third plate portion 750e is in the initial position through the driving member connecting portion 800c. In this state, 800 is pushed forward. As a result, the shutter 800 appears from the shutter retracting opening 720b, the shutter tip 800b comes into contact with the front surface rear surface 710b, closes the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235, and closes the second variable winning opening 235. It is in a state.

  Further, the left end of the shutter tip 800b appears above the non-winning ball passage 710g, and the right end appears so as to partially cover the right side 710d to close the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235. . The shutter flat surface portion 800a is inclined so as to descend from the right to the left, and functions as a spherical passage. Since the space above the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is made as wide as possible, the game ball riding on the upper part of the shutter 800 can be quickly allowed to flow down when the shutter 800 is closed. For example, the ball that has reached the ball passage 712 bounces or rolls, passes through the shutter flat surface portion 800a on the second variable winning opening 235, rolls or jumps over the non-winning ball passage 710g, and moves to the lower left. Flow down.

  FIG. 233 (b) shows a state in which the shutter 800 has exited and the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 appears. In the state shown in FIG. 233 (b), when the shutter driving solenoid 760 is in a driving state, the magnetic force of the electromagnet is greater than the force of the spring and the movable iron core 670c is raised, and the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e is moved backward from the initial position. In this state, the shutter 800 is moved rearward via the driving member connecting portion 800c. In this state, the shutter 800 is retracted behind the shutter retracting opening 720b, the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235 appears, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. As described above, the shutter 800 can appear and disappear in the space S including the upper left end of the left side surface 710c of the variable winning opening defining unit 710, the upper right end of the right side 710d, and the upper end 710i of the front surface 710a. ing. When the opening surface of the second variable prize opening 235 appears as shown in FIG. 233 (b), for example, the ball that has reached the ball passage 712 bounces or rolls, and the space S and the opening surface are detected with high probability. Pass through and enter the second variable prize opening 235.

  When there is a ball in the special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 starting ports 230 and 232 and the result of the lottery processing shown in the special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 (steps S229 and S231 in FIG. 205) is 15R special big hit, the main control In the jackpot game after the end of the special figure variable game, the unit 300 controls the moving operation of the shutter 800 by the state update process of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 (steps S225 and S227 in FIG. 205). At this time, based on the control of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S315 in FIG. 206, etc.), during the big hit game, from the light emitting unit 730a facing the rear lower side of the opening surface of the second variable winning port 235 The shutter-type winning device 700 shines by the light emission and the light emission from the light emitting unit 730b.

  It should be noted that the shutter-type winning device 700 shown in the figure may be provided with other winning means (winning port).

  FIG. 234 shows the assembled shutter-type winning device 700. FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view of the shutter-type winning device 700 as seen from a position shifted from the upper right to the right rear. The front side of the shutter-type winning device 700 is shown on the left side of the drawing, and the left side is shown on the upper side of the drawing. ing. FIG. 234 (b) shows a state in which the shutter-type winning device 700 is viewed from directly above, and the front side of the shutter-type winning device 700 is shown on the left side of the drawing, and the left side is shown on the upper side of the drawing. FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b) are diagrams in which the shutter 800 is submerged in the shutter protrusion / disengagement opening 720b and the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235 (or the first variable winning opening 234, the same applies below) is exposed. The state of 233 (b) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) and (b), an uneven portion 900 extending substantially parallel to the upper end side 710i is formed in the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b. The uneven portion 900 is formed in the space S above the position where the shutter 800 appears. The uneven portion 900 is formed integrally with, for example, the variable prize opening defining portion 710, and a plurality of inclined portions having substantially the same shape are discretely arranged in a line on the upper surface of the convex beam portion extending along the upper end side 710i. Have a structure. The slope portion has an inclined plane extending from the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b toward the rear lower side, and has a schematic shape of a triangular prism having the inclined plane as one side surface. This shape is formed in the left-right direction at the uneven portion 900. With this shape, when the game ball flowing down from above hits the inclined plane, the game ball can be dropped to the rear side of the second variable winning opening 235. Further, the corners of the front surface rear surface 710b and the lower surface of the convex beam portion are concave portions of the uneven portion 900. Details of the uneven portion 900 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), at the intersection angle between the front surface back surface 710b and the left wall surface of the right surface surface 710d, the spherical alignment of the planar plate-shaped portion is almost perpendicular to the front surface back surface 710b. One member 910 is formed. The first spherical alignment member 910 is formed integrally with the left wall surface of the front surface rear surface 710b and the right side surface portion 710d below the uneven portion 900, for example. The first spherical alignment member 910 is flattened leftward from the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d by a predetermined distance from the front surface back surface 710b.

A rear end side extending in a row and a linear oblique end side extending leftward from the rear end side and in contact with the front surface rear surface 710b.

  The width between the front surface back surface 710b and the surface of the base flat surface portion 720a is, for example, about 1.3 to 1.6 times the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, and preferably about 1.5 times. It has become. Similarly, the width from the front surface rear surface 710b of the first ball alignment member 910 to the rear edge is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 0.4 times. Is set to For this reason, the plate-like portion of the ball alignment first member 910 is formed so as to protrude smaller than half of the game balls from the front surface rear surface 710b side, so that the game balls ride on the ball alignment first member 910. It is designed not to be stupid. In addition, it is possible to reduce side friction caused by rolling of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the length of the rear end side of the ball alignment first member 910 viewed from directly above is, for example, about 1.3 to 1.6 times the diameter of the game ball. Is about 1.5 times. Similarly, the length of the oblique end side of the ball alignment first member 910 is, for example, about 0.6 to 1.0 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 1.0 times. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), when viewed from directly above, the rear inclined surface 710h is partially hidden at the rear end side of the ball alignment first member 910 and is observed in a substantially square shape on which one game ball can be placed. Is done.

  When the game ball comes into contact with the rear end side or the oblique end side of the ball alignment first member 910, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the rear inclined surface 710h are constituted by the bottom inclined portions. It is possible to align the balls flowing down by gradually narrowing the rollable width (or region) of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball path. This makes it possible to align the game balls toward the ball detection sensor 732 as the ball detection sensor 732 is approached. Further, the clogging of the ball passage in the second variable prize winning opening 235 can be eliminated.

  As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), a flat thin plate-like sphere alignment second member 920 is formed so as to intersect with the sphere alignment first member 910. The second spherical alignment member 920 rises from the rear inclined surface 710h and is substantially parallel to the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d and substantially perpendicular to the front surface rear surface 710b. For example, the second ball alignment member 920 is integrally formed with the rear surface 710b, the first ball alignment member 910, and the rear inclined surface 710h. The second spherical alignment member 920 includes a rear end side extending in parallel upward from the rear inclined surface 710h by a predetermined distance to the front surface rear surface 710b, and a straight line extending forward from the upper end portion of the rear end side and in contact with the front surface rear surface 710b. And an upper end side of the shape.

  The width from the front surface rear surface 710 b to the rear end side of the ball alignment second member 920 is substantially the same as that of the ball alignment first member 910. The distance from the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d of the second ball alignment member 920 is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 0.4 times. For this reason, the game ball is prevented from riding on the ball alignment second member 920.

  The first spherical alignment member 910 is formed continuously from the upper side of the first inclined plane 710e of the bottom surface portion to the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d on the downstream side, and the second spherical alignment member 920 is the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d on the downstream side. Is projected at a position that is shorter than a half of the game balls. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from getting on between the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d and the ball alignment second member 920.

When the game ball comes into contact with the upper end side or the rear end side of the ball alignment second member 920, the game ball stays above the rear inclined surface 710h, or by winning the game ball from the upper side of the ball alignment first member 910, It is possible to eliminate the game ball from being placed above the ball alignment first member 910.
<< Embodiment 3 >>

  With reference to FIGS. 235 to 236, another form of the variable prize opening unit 840 and the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 will be described.

  FIG. 235 is a view showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, and FIGS. 235 (a) and (c) are top views and correspond to FIG. 229 (a). It is a figure (the figure which visually recognizes the lower surface (bottom surface) 848 of the ball path 842). FIG. 235 (b) is a transparent side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 as seen from the front side (player side).

  As shown in FIGS. 235 (a) and 235 (b), the variable prize opening unit 840 guides the game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 840 to a predetermined position when the door member (not shown) is in the open position. A ball passage 842 (844, 846, 848, 850, 852) is provided. The ball passage 842 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by a front side (player side) side surface 844, a back side surface 846, a lower surface 848, a left side surface 850, and a right side surface 852. . That is, the part facing the lower surface 848 is an opening 860 that is opened or closed by the door member. The both ends in the longitudinal direction of the opening 860 are a right side surface 852 and a left side surface 850 here. In addition, here, as an example, a shutter-type variable prize opening unit 840 as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234 is shown, and the door member is located at a portion facing the lower surface 848, for example, the rear side surface 846 and the front side surface. It moves between 844 and can slide between the open position and the closed position, and the state shown in the figure shows the case where the door member is in the open position.

  A ball entry sensor 854 is provided on the rear side surface 846 from the right side surface 852 of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840. The ball entry sensor 854 has a substantially circular ball passage 854a in the side view of FIG. 5B, and the ball passage 854a is located in the vicinity of the right side surface 852 of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, an inclined surface 850c is formed on the left side surface 850 of the variable prize opening unit 840. The inclined surface 850c has a gradient such that the amount of protrusion increases from the upper surface (opening 860) of the variable prize opening unit 840 toward the lower surface 848 of the ball passage 842. The lower surface 848 includes an inclined portion 848a, a step portion 848b, and a flat portion 848c. The inclined portion 848a is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the left side surface 850 (inclined surface 850c) toward the right side surface 852, and the inclination angle is smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 850c. A stepped portion 848b is formed at the right end of the inclined portion 848a, and a flat portion 848c is formed at a lower position. The flat portion 848c is located in front of the ball passage 854a of the incoming sensor 854, and the ball passage 854a is located between the step portion 848b and the right side surface 852.

  In addition, a guide protrusion 868 that protrudes toward the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 is provided at the lower end of the front side surface 844. The guide convex portion 868 guides a game ball that rolls on the lower surface of the ball passage 842 from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 in the direction of the back side surface 846, thereby making the game ball smooth. It is possible to enter the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854.

  The opening width W0 of the present embodiment is a distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860, which is a distance from the upper end of the left side 850 (inclined surface 850c) to the upper end of the right side, and is the length of the opening width W0. The center (center line) in the direction LD is referred to as an opening center line 860c.

  The guide convex portion 868, the stepped portion 848b and the flat portion 848c, and the ball passage 854a of the entrance sensor 854 are provided between the opening center line 860c and the right side surface 852.

  That is, the entrance sensor 854 (a ball passage 854a for detecting entrance) is located closer to the right end 856a than the opening center line 860c (position closer to the right end 856a side than the opening center line 860c). Provided. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860 from the center of the ball passage 854a to the right end 856a is the first distance LL1, and the opening from the opening center line 860c to the right end 856a. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD of 860 is the second distance LL2, and the second distance LL2 is longer than the first distance LL1.

  Further, here, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the center of the spherical passage 854a to the opening center line 820c is the second 'distance LL2', and the second 'distance LL2' is the first distance LL2 '. The distance is longer than the distance LL1. The spherical passage 854a only needs to be disposed on the right side of the opening center line 820c and between the opening center line 820c and the right side surface 852, and the first distance LL1 is longer than the second ′ distance LL2 ′. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, the variable winning award opening unit 840 includes a first ball passage area 862 (a left-hatched hatched area), a second ball passage area 864 (a horizontal stripe hatching area), and a third ball. The second ball passage region 864, the first ball passage region 862, and the third ball from the left side surface 850 along the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840. The passage areas 866 are arranged in this order.

  The first ball passage area 862 is disposed between the opening center line 860c and the incoming sensor 854 (ball passage 854a), and is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 860. The first sphere passage region 862 includes at least a region having the first sphere passage width W1. The first ball passage width W1 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the front end of the guide convex portion 868 to the back side surface 846 opposite to the first ball passage width W1.

  The second sphere passage region 864 is disposed between the first sphere passage region 862 and the left end 856b. The second ball passage region 864 includes at least a region having a second ball passage width W2 in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860 (variable prize opening unit 840). The second ball passage width W2 is a horizontal distance from a portion adjacent to the first ball passage region 862 to an end portion of the left side surface 850 (upper end portion of the inclined surface 850c) (a distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840). It is. The second ball passage width W2 is larger than the first ball passage width W1, larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, and smaller than the opening width W0. The second ball passage area 864 is at least easily visible to the player when the door member (not shown) of the variable prize opening unit 840 is in the open position (in the state shown in the figure).

  The third ball passage region 866 is provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the incoming ball sensor 854 at a position closer to the incoming ball sensor 854 (ball passage 854a) than the first ball passage region 862. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD from the center 854c of the ball passage 854a to the first ball passage region 862 (for example, the center 862c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the first ball passage region 822) is , The third distance LL3, and the length from the center 854c of the ball passage 854a to the third ball passage region 866 (for example, the center 866c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the third ball passage region 866). The distance in the direction LD is the fourth distance LL4, and the fourth distance LL4 is a distance shorter than the third distance LL3.

  The third ball passage region 866 includes at least a region having a third ball passage width W3. The third ball passage width W3 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the rear side surface 846 to the front side surface 844 opposite to the third ball passage width W3 in FIG. The third ball passage width W3 is the maximum width of the third ball passage region 866 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840, and the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862 and the game ball Greater than diameter.

  The second sphere passage region 864 is a region provided on the left end 856b side of the first sphere passage region 862, and includes at least a region having a fourth sphere passage width W4 (wide portion 864a). The fourth ball passage width W4 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 from the back side surface 846 to the front side surface 844 opposite thereto. The fourth ball passage width W4 is the maximum width of the second ball passage region 864 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840, and is larger than the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862. Here, the third ball passage width W3 and the fourth ball passage width W4 are equal.

  The ball passage (sensor hole) 854a of the incoming ball sensor 854 has a fifth ball passage width W5. The fifth ball passage width W5 is the maximum width of the ball passage 854a. Here, as an example, the diameter passing through the center in the X-axis direction of the spherical passage 854a is the maximum diameter. The first sphere passage width W1 of the first sphere passage region 822 is smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5.

  In addition, a part of the front side (player side) side surface 844 protrudes in the direction of the back side surface 846 in the guide convex portion 868 of the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide convex portion 868 may have a part of the lower surface 848 (inclined portion 848a) protruding upward. Moreover, the guidance convex part 868 which protrudes in the direction of the front side surface 844 from the back side surface 846 may be sufficient. Moreover, the convex part may be provided in the wall part on the opposite side to the player side.

  In addition, the first ball passage area 862 of the present embodiment has a first ball passage width W1 sandwiched between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846 and the diameter of the game ball around the guide convex portion 868. This is a region including a wide region (regions on the left and right of the guide convex portion 868 in FIG. 5C) and the guide convex portion 868. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 may be only the region of the first ball passage width W1 sandwiched between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846, or a region having a width wider than the diameter of the game ball. May be included, or only a region having a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball may be included, or a region not including the guide protrusion 868 may be included.

  In the present embodiment, the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  The third sphere passage width W3 may be a passage width different from the fourth sphere passage width W4, or the third sphere passage width W3 may be a passage width larger than the fourth sphere passage width W4. The reverse may be possible.

  FIG. 236 is a view showing a state in which the game ball B rolls in the variable winning opening unit 840 according to the second embodiment, and FIGS. 236 (a) to (f) are top views corresponding to FIG. 235 (a). FIGS. 9A to 9F are transparent side views corresponding to FIG. 235B.

  As shown in the figure, when the door member (not shown) is in the open position, the game ball B enters from the opening 860 from the left end 856b and rolls along the inclined surface 850c of the left side 850. (Figs. (A) and (A)), and then rolls from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 along the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 to reach the guide convex portion 868 (Figs. B)). In the first ball passage area 862, since the first ball passage width W1 between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B collides with the guide convex portion 868 and rides on this. ((C), (C) in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball B passes through the stepped portion 848b of the lower surface 848 (FIGS. (D), (D), (e), and (E)), reaches the flat portion 848c, and enters the ball path 854a of the incoming sensor 854. It enters ((f), (F) in the figure).

  The inclined surface 850c of the left side surface 850 and the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 cause the game ball B that has entered the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 to roll from the left end portion 856b toward the right end portion 856a, The guide is smoothly and reliably guided in the direction of the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 disposed in the vicinity of the right end 856a.

In addition, a guide convex portion 868 and a step portion 848b are provided in the vicinity of the ball passage 854a of the incoming ball sensor 854. The game ball B collides with the guide convex portion 868 and overcomes it, and further passes through the stepped portion 848b and falls to the flat portion 848c, whereby the rolling speed (momentum) is moderately attenuated. As a result, the game ball B is smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball passage 854a of the ball sensor 854, the game ball B collides with the right side surface 852, rebounds, and collides with the subsequent game ball B. Thus, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of ball clogging in front of the ball passage 854a.
<< Embodiment 4 >>

  With reference to FIG. 237, another form of the variable prize opening unit 840 and the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 shown in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 237 is a view showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, FIGS. 237 (a) and (c) are top views, and FIG. 237 (b) is the front side. It is the permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from (player side). Here, the configuration different from the second embodiment will be mainly described, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the lower surface 848 (a part of the right end of the inclined portion 848a) is a position separated from both the front side surface 844 and the rear side surface 846 in a top view (FIG. 5A). In addition, a rectangular notch 870 is provided, and the shape of the stepped portion 848b is uneven when viewed from above, and this is used as a guide protrusion 872. The notch 870 has a width 870W1 in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840 and a width 870W2 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 smaller than the radius (WB / 2) of the game ball B. It is about 5 mm. The widths 870W1 and 870W2 may be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball B.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the first spherical passage region 862 includes a notch 870, a step 848b on the front side of the notch 870 (front-side guide protrusion 872a), and a step on the back side. This is a region including the portion 848b (back side guide convex portion 872b). Further, the widths in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the front side guide convex portion 872a, the notch portion 870, and the back side guide convex portion 872b are the first ball passage widths W11, W12, and W13, respectively. .

  The second ball passage region 864 is a region between the first ball passage region 862 and the left side surface 850, and the second ball passage width W2 is the second ball passage region in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840. The length is 864.

  The third sphere passage region 866 is a region between the first sphere passage region 862 and the right side surface 852, and the third sphere passage width W3 is between the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 opposite thereto. Is the distance.

  Further, the fifth ball passage width W5 of the ball passage (sensor hole) 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 is, for example, the maximum diameter passing through the center of the ball passage 854a in the X-axis direction.

  The first ball passage area 862 of the present embodiment has an area of the first ball passage widths W11, W12, and W13 and an area that is wider than the diameter WB of the game ball B around the guide convex portion 872 (see FIG. The left and right regions of the guiding convex portion 872) and the guiding convex portion 872 are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage area 862 may be only the area of the first ball passage width W11, W12, W13, may include an area wider than the diameter of the game ball, Only a region having a width narrower than the diameter may be included, or a region not including the guide convex portion 872 may be included.

  In the present embodiment, the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the game ball B rolls in the variable prize opening unit 840 according to the third embodiment, and FIGS. 238A to 209E are top views corresponding to FIG. 235A. FIGS. 9A to 9E are transparent side views corresponding to FIG. 235B.

  As shown in the figure, when the door member (not shown) is in the open position, the game ball B enters from the opening 860 from the left end 856b and rolls along the inclined surface 850c of the left side 850. (Figs. (A) and (A)), rolling along the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 (Figs. (B) and (B)). ((C) and (C) in the figure). The guide convex portion 872 including the stepped portion 848b provided with the notched portion 870 in a concavo-convex shape in a top view holds the game ball B slightly. Thereafter, the game ball B reaches the flat portion 848c and enters the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 ((d), (D), (e), and (E) in the figure).

In the state shown in FIGS. 7C and 7C, if the guiding convex portion 872 (notch portion 870) is too large, the holding amount of the game ball B is increased, the rolling of the game ball B is stopped, and the ball is blocked. In this embodiment, the width 870W1 and 870W2 of the notch 870 are both smaller than the radius of the game ball B, so that the rolling speed (momentum) of the game ball B is moderately attenuated. . As a result, the game ball B is smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball passage 854a of the ball sensor 854, the game ball B collides with the right side surface 852, rebounds, and collides with the subsequent game ball B. Thus, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of ball clogging in front of the ball passage 854a.
<Modification 1>

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating another form of the guide protrusion 868 of the second embodiment. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, FIG. 239 (a) is a top view, and FIG. 239 (b) is the front side (player side). It is a permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from ().

  The guide convex portion 868 may not be in contact with the front side surface 844, and may be provided at a position separated from either the front side surface 844 or the back side surface 846, as shown in FIG. .

  In this case, the first sphere passage area 862 includes first sphere passage widths W11 and W12. The first ball passage width W11 is a length in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the guide convex portion 868 to the front side surface 844, and the first ball passage width W12 is from the guide convex portion 868 to the back surface. This is the length in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 up to the side surface 846.

  The first ball passage region 862 includes a region having a width WZ larger than the diameter of the game ball B in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B (first ball passage widths W11 and W12). However, in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, a region having the same width as the diameter of the game ball B may be included, or in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, Other regions narrower than the diameter may be included.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating another form of the guide protrusion 872 of the third embodiment. 240 is a view showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, FIG. 240 (a) is a top view, and FIG. 240 (b) is the front side (player side). It is a permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from ().

  The guide convex portion 872 may be provided at a position adjacent to the back side surface 846. That is, a guide convex portion 872 including a notch portion 870 and a step portion 848b is formed on a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) 848 of the back side surface 846.

  In this case, the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862 is the length in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840 from the guide convex portion 872 to the back side surface 846, and the first ball passage The width W1 is smaller than the radius of the game ball B.

  The first ball passage region 862 includes a region having a width WZ larger than the diameter of the game ball B in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B (the first ball passage is Awa W1). In addition to an area having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, an area having the same width as the diameter of the game ball B may be included. In addition to an area having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the diameter of the game ball may be included. Other narrow areas may be included.

  In this case, the guide convex portion 872 may be provided at a position adjacent to the front side surface 844.

Further, the guide convex portion 868 of the second embodiment and the guide convex portion 872 of the third embodiment are rectangular in a top view, and are configured in a cube or a rectangular parallelepiped (the wall surfaces of the guide convex portions 868 and 872 are vertical). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wall surfaces of the guide protrusions 868 and 872 may be inclined surfaces. In that case, the slope of the inclined surfaces of the guiding convex portions 868 and 872 may be an inclined surface that is smaller than the vertical, or may be an inclined surface that is larger than the vertical (an inclined surface of an overhang), and includes these. It may be a shape.
<< Embodiment 5 >>

  With reference to FIG. 241, another form of the variable prize opening unit will be described. FIG. 241 is a view showing an example of the variable prize opening unit 880 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 241 is an external perspective view, FIG. 218 is a top view, and FIG. FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 2B, FIG. 4D is a front view, and FIG. 4E is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. Moreover, in the same figure, it is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit 880 when a door member not shown is in an open position. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 241, in the variable prize opening unit 880, a ball passage 882 for guiding a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 880 to a predetermined position when the door member (not shown) is in the open position. 884, 886, 888, 890, 892). The spherical passage 882 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by a left side surface 884, a right side surface 886 that opposes the left side surface 884, a lower surface (bottom surface) 888, an upper surface 890 that opposes this, and a rear side surface 892. That is, the part facing the back side surface 892 is a first opening 894 that is opened or closed by the door member.

  The left side surface 884 includes a curved portion 884a and a flat surface portion 884b that protrude toward the center of the spherical passage 882. Similarly, the right side surface 886 includes a curved portion 886a and a flat portion 886b that protrude toward the center of the spherical passage 882. Due to the curved portions 884a and 886a, the spherical passage 882 has a shape in which the width W in the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894 gradually narrows from the first opening 894 toward the back side. Further, the flat portions 884b and 886b are arranged to face each other so as to be parallel to each other, and constitute a rectangular space SP together with the back side surface 892. In the rectangular space SP, a portion facing the back side surface 892 is a second opening 896. The second opening 896 is not provided with a door member and is always open, but a door member that can move between an open state and a closed state may be provided. Further, here, a ball passage 898a of the incoming sensor is provided in the vicinity of the flat portion 886b and the rear side surface 892 of the right side surface 886. Although not shown in the drawing, a ball entering sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage 898a is provided.

  Furthermore, in this example, the guide protrusion 900 is provided in the second opening 896. The guide convex portion 900 is a rectangular parallelepiped convex portion provided at the lower end portion of the left side surface 884 so as to protrude into the spherical passage 882. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the guide convex portion 900 may have a shape having an inclined surface. In addition, the guide convex portion 900 may be provided so as to protrude from the right side surface 886, and in this case, the entrance sensor 898 may be provided in the vicinity of the flat surface portion 884 b of the left side surface 884 and the back side surface 892. . In addition, the guide convex portion 900 may be provided in the vicinity of the center of the second opening 896, separated from both the left side surface 884 and the right side surface 886. Further, the guide convex portion 900 may be a concave and convex portion by providing a notch on the left side surface 884 (or right side surface 886) or the lower surface 888.

  In this example, the curved portion 884a on the left side surface 884 and the curved portion 886a on the right side surface 886, even if the game ball enters the first opening 894 from any direction, the entrance located in the innermost portion is located. It is possible to guide the game balls almost uniformly into the ball passage 898a of the ball sensor. In addition, since the ball path 898a is provided at the innermost part of the variable winning a prize opening unit 880, the ball path 898a (enters the ball path 898a (incoming) regardless of whether the game ball enters from the left direction or the right direction of the first opening 894. The distance to the ball sensor) is increased and the game ball stays, so that it is easy to induce an over winning.

  In such a configuration, the guiding convex portion 900 provided on the left side surface 884 allows the game ball to enter more smoothly into the ball passage 898a disposed on the right side of the innermost portion. For example, when the guide convex portion 900 is not disposed, a game ball that has entered from the right direction of the first opening 894 is unlikely to directly enter the ball passage 898a disposed on the right side of the innermost portion, and the left side After colliding with the flat surface portion 884b of the side surface 884, the back side surface 892, and the like, the possibility of entering the ball passage 898a increases. At this time, depending on the speed at which the game ball rolls, it may collide with the flat surface portions 884b and 886b and the back side surface 892 to cause clogging of the ball. In such a case, by providing the guide convex portion 900 on the left side surface 884, there is a possibility that the game ball entering from the right direction of the first opening 894 collides with this and the momentum of rolling is moderately attenuated. Since the height is increased, it is possible to prevent clogging of the balls and make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering sensor. In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball that has changed its direction by colliding with the guide convex portion 900 will directly enter the entrance sensor.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered from the left direction of the first opening 894 collides with the guide convex portion 900, the rolling direction changes or the rolling speed decreases, so that the ball path 898a (incoming The time to reach the ball sensor) can be earned, and the possibility of inducing over winnings can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 242, the width W0 of the first opening 894 in this case is the left end 894b of the first opening 894 from the front end of the left side 888 to the front end of the right side 886. To the right end 894a in the longitudinal direction LD.

  In addition, the ball passage 882 includes a first ball passage region 902 (a region with hatching with a left-downward slant), a second ball passage region 904 (a region with horizontal stripe hatching), and a third ball passage region 906 (a region with vertical island hatching). have. The first spherical passage region 902 is a region including the guide convex portion 900, and a front-side region and a back-side region of the guide convex portion 900. Further, the width in the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894 from the guide convex portion 900 to the right side surface 886 is the first spherical passage width W1. The second sphere passage area 904 is an area between the first opening 894 and the first sphere passage area 902, and the second sphere passage width W2 is the end of the first sphere passage area 902 from the first opening 894. The distance in the direction (referred to as the depth direction DD) from the front side to the back side of the variable prize opening unit 880. The third ball passage region 906 is a region between the first ball passage region 902 and the back side surface 892, and the third ball passage width W3 is from the end of the first ball passage region 902 to the back side surface 892. Until the distance in the depth direction DD.

  In addition, the fifth spherical passage width W5 of the spherical passage (sensor hole) 898a of the incoming sensor is, for example, the maximum diameter of the spherical passage 898a (diameter parallel to the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894).

  As described above, a plurality of variable prize opening units have been described. However, at least in the case of a big hit, the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is adjusted so that the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 124 (so-called right strike). In a game stand (pachinko machine) for playing a game, it is preferable to provide a variable winning opening unit having a shape specialized for right-handed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 224, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 200, and when a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area 124, The game ball is configured to be easier to enter the second variable winning opening 235 than the first variable winning opening 234. In such a case, the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper right side of the second variable winning opening 235 is higher than the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper left side of the second variable winning opening 235. In such a configuration, for example, a variable prize opening unit 260 of the second embodiment as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 may be provided.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the game ball that rolls in the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 to the ball entering sensor 264. In addition, depending on the game balls to be won, it may be possible to extend the distance until the ball sensor 264 is detected by extending the distance to the ball sensor 264. Therefore, it is possible to induce over winning and enjoy the big hit game for a long time. be able to.

  Similarly, at least in the case of a big hit, a game stand (pachinko machine) that adjusts the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 so as to launch a game ball to the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed). In this case, it is preferable to provide a variable winning opening unit having a shape specialized for left-handed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 224, when the first variable prize opening 234 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200, and a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game area 124, the first variable prize is awarded. A game ball can easily enter the mouth 234. In such a case, the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper left side of the first variable winning port 234 is higher than the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper right side of the first variable winning port 234. In such a configuration, for example, a variable prize opening unit 840 of Embodiment 3 as shown in FIGS. 235 to 240 may be provided.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the game ball rolling on the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 to the ball entering sensor 854. In addition, depending on the game balls to be won, it may be possible to extend the distance until the ball sensor 854 detects the game by extending the distance to the ball sensor 854. be able to.

  For left-handed use, it is also suitable to use the variable prize opening unit 880 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. As described above, the variable prize opening unit 880 in FIG. 241 can enter the game ball regardless of whether the game ball enters from the left direction of the first opening 894 or the right direction. It may be easy to guide to the ball sensor 898, and depending on the game ball, it may be possible to extend the time to be detected by the ball sensor 898 by extending the distance to the ball sensor 898. , You can enjoy a big hit game for a long time.

In addition, the variable prize opening unit 260 described in FIGS. 211 to 223 and FIGS. 228 to 231 is suitable for either left-handed use or right-handed use. Moreover, as for the suitable variable winning a prize opening units 260 and 840 described above, a right-handed unit may be applied for left-handed use, and a right-handed unit may be applied for left-handed use. In addition, even in a game stand that makes a right hit during a big hit, a variable winning opening may be provided below the center of the game board 200.
<Modification 2>

  With reference to FIG. 243, another form of the variable prize opening unit will be described. FIGS. 243 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a schematic configuration of the variable prize opening unit 908 according to the second modification, and are transparent front views as seen from the front side (player side).

  As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the variable prize opening unit 908 may be provided with blade-shaped opening / closing means. That is, the variable prize opening unit 908 has a movable part (blade member) 924 that can move between an open position and a closed position, and a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 908 when the blade member 924 is in the open position. A ball path 912 (914, 916, 918) for guiding the vehicle to the position and a ball entering sensor 950 are provided. The blade member 924 is provided on the right side surface of the variable prize opening unit 908 in the illustrated front view. The spherical passage 912 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by an upper surface 914, a lower surface (bottom surface 916), a left side surface 918, and a front side surface and a rear side surface that are not shown. That is, the part facing the left side surface 918 is an opening 922 that is opened or closed by the door member. The ball passage 912 (lower surface 916) is an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion in a front view. Also, a ball entry sensor 950 is provided in the vicinity of the right end portion of the variable winning a prize opening unit 908 (in the vicinity of the left side surface 918 of the ball passage 912). A guide protrusion 926 that protrudes toward the upper surface is provided on a part of the lower surface 916.

  Thus, by providing the guide convex part 926 in a part of the ball passage 912, it becomes easy to guide the game ball to the ball entering sensor 950, and depending on the game ball, the distance to the ball entering sensor 950 is extended. In some cases, the time until the ball sensor 950 is detected can be extended, so an overwinning can be induced and the big hit game can be enjoyed for a long time.

  In addition, the variable pitching means may be another winning entry unit or a movable accessory provided with a movable portion (opening / closing means) 924, and another variable pitching means is provided inside the variable pitching means. The present invention can also be applied to two types, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, applicable to a first variable winning port unit 930 having a second variable winning port (V winning port) 932 and the like. is there. Further, the present invention is also applicable to variable ball entry means that does not have a detection means (ball entry sensor).

  Referring to FIG. 5C, the first variable prize opening unit 930 includes another prize opening (V prize opening 932) in a part of the lower surface 916 of the ball passage 912. The V prize opening 932 is provided with, for example, a shutter-type door member 962. Then, when winning at either the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, the blade member 924 of the center accessory unit 930 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times. By opening and closing (for example, once) and entering the V prize opening 932 at the time of opening and closing, a jackpot game for opening and closing the blade member 924 for a specific number of times (for example, 15 times) is started. . Alternatively, if the winner of the special drawing lottery is won, the big win game for opening the door members of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is started. As a result of the special drawing lottery, When winning, the blade member 924 of the first variable prize opening unit 930 and the door member 962 of the V prize opening 932 are opened and closed, and when the blade member 924 is opened, a game ball is placed in the open V prize opening 932. A big hit game that opens and closes the door members of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 may be started by entering the ball. In addition, if the win is won as a result of the special drawing lottery, the blade member 924 and the door member 962 of the V prize opening 932 may be opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and a payout may be made when the ball is entered (1 Round), when the blade member 924 is opened, if the player enters the open V prize opening 932, a big hit after two rounds may be started. Furthermore, the probability variation flag may be turned on by entering the V winning opening 932 during the big hit round. (If you do not enter the V prize opening 932, you will not be in the state of special high accuracy and high accuracy.)

  FIG. 244 is a view for explaining the first ball passage region 822 in the present embodiment. FIG. 244 is a top view of the variable prize opening unit 260 of the second embodiment, and FIGS. ) Is a top view of the variable prize opening unit 840 according to the third and fourth embodiments.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first ball passage region 822 may be a region having only a width smaller than the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260. In this case, an area having the same width as the diameter WB of the game ball B is not included in the first ball passage area 822. That is, in the same figure, the area | region shown with hatching except the guidance convex part 262a1 in the lower surface 274 of the spherical path 272 is the 1st spherical path area | region 822. FIG. In addition, although illustration is omitted, also in the variable prize opening unit 840 according to the third and fourth embodiments, the first ball passage area 862 is similar to the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction of the variable prize opening unit 840. For example, in FIG. 235 (c), a region where the guide convex portion 868 is removed on the lower surface 848 in the hatched hatching region with the lower left in FIG. 235 (c) is the first spherical passage region. It may be 862.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 244 (b) and (c), a plurality of guide protrusions 868 (a first guide protrusion 8681 and a second guide protrusion 8682) may be provided. In this case, the first spherical passage region 822 is a continuous region from one end (leftmost end) of the first guide convex portion 8681 to one end (rightmost end) of the second guide convex portion 8682. There may be a plurality of (separated) first spherical passage regions 822 including a region including the first guide convex portion 8681 and a region including the second guide convex portion 8682.

  In these cases, the first ball passage area 822 includes the first guide protrusion 8681 and the second guide protrusion 8682, and the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840. May be a region including a lower surface 848 having a small width, or may be a region including only the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 (only the lower surface thereof). There may be a region only of the lower surface 848 having a width smaller than the diameter WB of the game ball B (the region of hatching with a downward slanting left side) excluding the portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 are disposed at adjacent positions (the same side surface (here, the front side surface 844)). May be. In this case, as shown in the figure, the adjacent first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 may be disposed at a position where they do not contact each other, or disposed at the contacting position. May be. In the case of no contact, the distance between the guide protrusions may be such that the distance between the bottom surfaces (or the end of the widest part of the guide protrusion) is larger than the diameter WB of the game ball B. It may be small or the same.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 are disposed to face each other (on the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 side, respectively). Arrangement). In this case, the first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 may be disposed so as to completely face each other at the same position in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840, or may completely face each other. Instead, it may be arranged at a position shifted to the left or right in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 (a position where a part of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 opposes), and the first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 Are disposed on the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 side, but may not be disposed at all (see the right figure), or may not be provided on the same side surface.

Although not shown, the plurality of guide convex portions (the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682) can also be applied to the variable prize opening unit 260 in FIG.
<Modification 3>

  245 and 246 are views showing the second special figure starting port 232, FIG. 245 (a) is an external perspective view seen from the front right upper side, FIG. 245 (b) is a front view, FIG. 246 (a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 246 (b) is an exploded perspective view seen from the upper left rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. Then, when the general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 246, a sphere detection sensor (entrance sensor) 940 is provided on the back side of the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232. When the entrance sensor 940 detects the entrance to the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 (not shown) is driven here, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the second special figure display device 214. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 rolls in the ball path 942 for discharge, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In such a second special figure starting port 232, a portion (in this case, for the discharge path of the game ball after passing through the ball passage 940a of the ball entering sensor 940) that is located behind the ball entering sensor 940 (for discharging) A notch 944 for guiding the game ball may be provided in the ball passage 942). The notch 944 can moderately suppress the momentum of the game ball passing through the ball passage 942 and smoothly guide the game ball to the ball passage communicating with the game island side.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has variable pitching means (for example, variable winning unit 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232). The variable entry means is provided with at least a first opening (for example, openings 820, 860, 894, 922), and the variable entry means is a sensing device. Means (entrance sensor 264, 854, 940) are provided at least, and the variable entry means is in either a first state (for example, a closed state) or a second state (for example, an open state). The second state is a state in which a game ball is at least more likely to enter than the first state, and the detection means is a game ball. Entry is detectable at least, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the first opening is a first end (eg, left end 274b, 856b, 894b), and the first The other end in the longitudinal direction of the opening is a second end (e.g., right end 274a, 856a, 894a), and the detection means is provided at least in the first position, The first position is a position closer to the first end than the center of the first opening, and the variable entry means has a first region (for example, a first ball passage). Region 822, 902) is provided, and the first region includes at least a region having a first width (for example, the first spherical passage width W1), and the first width and Is the width in the short direction of the variable pitching means The first area is an area provided at least between the center of the first opening and the detection means, and the variable ball entry means is a second area (for example, a first area). Two ball passage regions 824, 904) are provided at least, and the second region is a region provided at least between the first region and the second end, The second region includes at least a region having a first lateral width (for example, a second ball passage width W2), and the first lateral width is a width in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the distance of the first lateral width is at least larger than the distance of the first width.

  The distance from the detection means to the first end is a first distance, and the distance from the detection means to the center of the first opening is a second distance, The second distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the second distance may be a distance that is at least longer than the first distance.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided with at least opening / closing means (for example, door member 234a), The first state is a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least closed, and the second state is a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least opened. It may be a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the variable ball entry means is provided with an opening, a detection means, an opening / closing means, and a ball passage including at least a first area and a second area. The ball passage may be a passage including the first region, the second region, and other regions, or may be a passage having only the first region and the second region.

  Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least closed” may include a state where the opening / closing means is closed and a period during which the opening / closing means transitions from the open state to the closed state. . Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least closed” may be a state indicating only the state where the opening / closing means is closed.

  Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least opened” may include a state where the opening / closing means is opened and a period during which the opening / closing means transitions from the closed state to the opened state. . Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least opened” may be a state showing only the state where the opening / closing means is opened.

  Further, the “variable winning means” may be “variable winning means”.

  The detecting means may be capable of detecting at least a game ball.

  Further, the distance from the center to the detection means may be longer than the distance from the center of the first opening to the first end. Moreover, the reverse may be sufficient and the same may be sufficient.

  The first width is the width at the bottom surface, and the width of the passage at the first height from the bottom surface may be the fifth width. Here, the distance from the bottom surface to the first height may be the same as the radius of the game ball, may be lower than the radius, or higher than the radius. Further, the fifth width may be wider, narrower, or the same as the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the height from the bottom surface of the opening in the first region to the top surface of the opening is the second height, and the second height may be higher than the first height. The second height may be higher than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the height from the bottom surface to the top surface of the variable pitching means is a third height, and the third height may be lower than the first height, may be the same, or higher. Also good. Further, the third height may be higher, lower or the same as the diameter of the game ball.

  In addition, the first lateral width in the second region may indicate “the lateral width of the path of the game ball on the bottom surface”.

  The second region may be a region provided at least between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The second region may be a region provided only between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The second region may be a region provided other than between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The detection means (for example, the incoming ball sensors 264, 854, 940) has a second opening (for example, the ball passages 264a, 854a, 898a, 940a of the incoming ball sensor 264) through which at least a game ball can enter. The detection means is capable of detecting at least the entry of the game ball when the game ball enters the second opening, and has the first width (for example, the first width) The one-ball passage width W1) is a width that is at least smaller than the second width (for example, the fifth ball-passage width W5), and the second width is the maximum at the second opening. It is good also as what is the diameter which becomes.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent clogging of the balls in the variable ball entry means and to smoothly detect the game balls.

  The first lateral width (for example, the second ball passage width W2) may be a width that is at least larger than twice the diameter of the game ball.

  With this configuration, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the detection means detects the game ball moving on the furthest route from the detection means. In some cases, it is possible to increase the time to be played and to make the game ball easily stay. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  Further, the variable pitching means is capable of changing at least to the first state (for example, the closed state) when the first condition is satisfied in the second state (for example, the open state). The establishment requirement of the first condition may be a requirement including at least that the first number of game balls are detected by the detection means.

  Further, “at least changeable to the first state” may indicate that the second state can be changed only to the first state. In addition, the phrase “at least changeable to the first state” may indicate that it can change from the second state to a third state different from the first state.

  In addition, the requirements for establishing the first condition are “the gaming state is a big hit”, “the opening / closing means is in an open state”, and “a first number of game balls detected by the detecting means” It may be.

The first condition is a requirement that includes requirements other than the requirement that “the first number of game balls are detected by the detection means” (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the open state was started) It may be established even when (Yes) is established.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to make the game ball stay easily. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning.

In the second area (for example, the second ball passage area 824, 904), the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening unit 260) is in the second state (for example, the open state). Furthermore, it may be at least easily visible to the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

  When it is possible to increase the player's expectation by making it easy to see the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means and making it easier to recognize that there will be profits in the future by adopting such a configuration There is.

  The variable ball entry means is easily visible in the second state, the transition period from the first state to the second state, and the transition period from the second state to the first state. Also good. Further, the variable pitching means may be easily visible from the player only in the second state.

  Further, the game board (for example, the game board 200) is provided, and the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided at least on the game board. It is good also as what was made.

  Further, the variable pitching means may be provided only on the game board. Moreover, the variable pitching means may be provided also in parts other than the game board (for example, the front frame door). Further, the variable pitching means may be provided on the game board.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

  In the above configuration, the first width may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The third width may be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the first width may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Thereby, the game ball may be smoothly guided to the detection means.

  Further, at least a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. The inclined surface may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the detection means. Further, the inclined surface may be inclined downward from the second region toward the detection means.

  Further, at least a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. Further, the entire bottom surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. The inclined surface may guide the game ball to the detecting means.

  Thereby, there is a case where the game ball can be smoothly guided to the detection means.

  The opening / closing means has an inclined surface on the first surface of the opening / closing means (for example, the door member 234a) (for example, the back surface side of the door member 234a (the surface through which the game ball passes when the door member 234a is open)). The inclined surface may be at least capable of guiding the game ball into the variable pitching means when the opening / closing means is in the second state (for example, open state). The opening / closing means may be provided with a second surface, and the second surface may be the back surface of the first surface. It may be a surface adjacent to a game area that can be passed (for example, a surface that is visible next to the game region 124 when the door member 234a is closed), for example, in the above-described embodiment, the second embodiment. Door member 234a in the open state is With game ball can be rolled to a first surface, game balls on the second surface is rollable in a closed state.

  Thereby, when the opening / closing means is in the second state, the game ball may be easily guided into the variable pitching means, and it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, there are cases where the game ball can be guided smoothly and the time until the game ball is guided to the detecting means can be shortened. Further, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from stagnating on the opening / closing means.

  In the above configuration, the opening / closing means may be provided with at least a plurality of inclined surfaces. The first inclined surface of the plurality of inclined surfaces may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the first position. The second inclined surface of the plurality of inclined surfaces may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the second position. Further, the first position may be a position (first end side) close to the detection means side. Further, the second position may be a position (second end side) close to the side opposite to the detection means. Further, the detection means may be provided at a position closer to the first position than the second position. Further, the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface may have different shapes (asymmetrical left and right). Moreover, the same shape (left-right symmetry) may be sufficient as the shape of a 1st inclined surface and a 2nd inclined surface.

  The opening / closing means may be provided with only one inclined surface. The opening / closing means may be provided with only the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. The opening / closing means may be provided with three or more inclined surfaces.

  Thereby, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball guided to the second inclined surface is detected by the detection means. Further, since the game ball is easily guided in a plurality of directions, it may be difficult to cause the ball clogging.

  The opening / closing means may be provided with a first surface, and the first surface may be capable of guiding the game ball to the game area when the opening / closing means is the first. The first surface may be moved out of the game area when the opening / closing means is the second. In addition, the opening / closing means may be provided with a second surface, and the second surface may be the back surface of the first surface. For example, in the above embodiment, in the case of a shutter type variable winning device (variable pitch unit) 700 as shown in FIG. 233, one surface (shutter flat surface portion 800a) of the door member (shutter 800) is closed by the shutter 800. In the state, the game ball can roll, but in the open state, the game ball does not roll to the back side of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. That is, in the case of the shutter-type variable ball entry unit 700, the game ball can roll only on one surface of the door member.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, at least one part of the lower edge of an opening part may be located in the position higher than at least one part of an opening-and-closing means.

  Further, only a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than only a part of the opening / closing means. Further, only a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the entire opening / closing means. Further, the entire lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than only a part of the opening / closing means. Further, the entire lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the entire opening / closing means.

  In this way, by providing the guide wall (guide wall 274c) that protrudes upward and has an inclined surface on the lower surface (lower edge of the opening) of the ball path of the variable winning means, the inclined surface of the guide wall is provided. The game ball can be rolled so as to be lifted from the bottom along the path, and the game ball can be smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball path of the detecting means, and the game ball can be moved from the ball path of the variable winning means to the door member. It may be possible to prevent jumping out to the side.

  Further, the first width may be a width on the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable pitching means.

  In the above embodiment, the payout means may be provided, and the payout means may be capable of paying out at least the second number of game balls when the second condition is satisfied. Further, the requirement for establishing the second condition may be a requirement including at least that the game ball is detected by the detection means. In that case, when the detecting means detects the first number of game balls, the variable pitching means may change to the first state. Until the first state, the game ball can enter, and at least a third number of game balls can enter the variable entry means, and the third number is greater than the first number. There may be many.

  Thereby, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detecting means and to easily induce over winning. Further, there are cases where the profit given to the player can be increased.

  In addition, it is a gaming machine equipped with variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), wherein the variable pitching means has a first opening portion. (For example, openings 820, 860, 894, and 922) are provided at least, and the variable entry means is provided with at least detection means (eg, entry sensors 264, 854, and 940). And the variable entry means can change at least from one of a first state (for example, a closed state) and a second state (for example, an open state) to the other, and the second state Is a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the first state, and the detection means is capable of detecting at least the entry of the game ball, and is in the first opening. One end in the longitudinal direction is a first end (for example, left end 274b, 856b, 894b), and the other end in the longitudinal direction in the first opening is a second end. Part (for example, right end parts 274a, 856a, 894a), and the detection means is provided at least at the first position, and the first position is the center of the first opening. The variable entrance means is provided with at least a first area (for example, a first ball passage area 822, 902), The one region includes at least a region having a first width (for example, the first ball passage width W1), and the first width is a width in the short direction of the variable ball entry means. Yes, the first region is the center of the first opening and the detection It is an area provided at least between the steps, and the first area is provided at least at a position that is at least visually recognizable by the player through the first opening. It is a stand.

  The distance from the detection means to the first end is a first distance, and the distance from the detection means to the center of the first opening is a second distance, The second distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable pitching means, and the second distance may be at least a distance longer than the first distance.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in variable pitching means. That is, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), and the variable pitching means has a first opening. The part (for example, the openings 820, 860, 894, 922) is provided with at least opening / closing means (for example, a door member 234a), and the first state is that the opening / closing means is at least closed. It is a state including a state, and the second state may be a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least opened.

  By adopting such a configuration, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable ball entry means, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the variable ball entry means. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), and the variable pitching means has a first opening. The portion (for example, the opening 820, 860, 894, 922) is provided with at least a second region (for example, the third ball passage region 826, 906), It is a region provided at least at a position closer to the detection means than the first region, and the second region includes at least a region having a second width (for example, a third ball passage width W3). The second width is a width in the short direction of the variable pitching means, and the second width is a width at least larger than the first width. It may be a thing.

  The distance from the detection means to the first area is a third distance, the distance from the detection means to the second area is a fourth distance, and the fourth distance is The distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the fourth distance may be a distance that is at least shorter than the third distance.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is easy for the game balls to stay in the variable ball entry means, and the player has a sense of expectation that there are many game balls in the variable ball entry means. It may be easy to give. Further, since the momentum of the rolling of the game ball in the first region having the first width is moderately attenuated, it may be possible for the player to easily see the game ball in the variable pitching means. .

  The detection means (for example, the incoming ball sensors 264, 854, 940) has a second opening (for example, the ball passages 264a, 854a, 898a, 940a of the incoming ball sensor 264) through which at least a game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the second opening, the detection means can detect at least the entry of the game ball, and the first width (e.g., The first sphere passage width W1) is at least a width smaller than a third width (for example, the fifth sphere passage width W5), and the third width is a diameter that is maximum in the second opening. It is good also as a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent clogging of the balls in the variable ball entry means and to smoothly detect the game balls.

  The second area (for example, the third ball passage area 826, 906) may be an area provided at least between the detection means and the first area.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to make the game ball stay easily. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  In addition, the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) has a fourth area (for example, a part of the second ball passage area 824 (wide) Portion 824a)) is provided, and the fourth region is provided with at least a region having a fourth width (for example, a fourth ball passage width W4), and the fourth width is provided. Is the width in the short direction of the variable pitching means, the fourth width is a width at least larger than the first width, and the fourth region is It is good also as what is the area | region provided at least in the said 2nd edge part side rather than said 1st area | region.

The distance from the second end to the first region is a fifth distance, and the distance from the second end to the fourth region is a sixth distance, The sixth distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the sixth distance may be a distance that is at least shorter than the fifth distance.
It may be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay in the variable entry means and to increase the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  Further, the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) satisfies the first condition in the second state (for example, the open state). The first condition (e.g., the closed state) is at least changeable, and the first condition is satisfied when the first number of game balls is detected by the detection means. It is good also as what is the requirement which contains at least.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to easily induce over-intrusion.

  Further, the game board (for example, the game board 200) is provided, and the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided at least on the game board. It is good also as what was made.

  By adopting such a configuration, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even if a part of the game ball stays in the variable ball entry means, In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  Moreover, the detection means may be provided outside the variable pitching means. In that case, the game ball detected by the detection means may be able to enter the variable entry means.

  Further, the “bottom surface” may be “a plane in which the game ball can roll inside the variable ball entry means”, and “a plane in which the game ball can roll in the variable ball entry means”. It may be “the widest plane among them”. A part or all of the bottom surface may be inclined.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a first state (for example, a state in which the door members 234a and 235a are in the closed position) and a second state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first state ( For example, a game table provided with variable pitching means (for example, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235) that can be changed from any one of the door members 234a and 235a in the open position). The variable entry means has an opening through which a game ball can enter (for example, an opening facing the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272), and the variable entry means allows the game ball to enter. Detectable detection means (for example, a ball entry sensor 264), the variable ball entry means has openable / closable opening / closing means (for example, door members 234a, 235a), and the opening / closing means In the state of In the second state, the opening / closing means is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the opening, and the detection means is configured to be unable to guide to the opening. It is provided at a first position (for example, near one end in the longitudinal direction) of the variable ball entry means, the opening / closing means includes a plurality of guiding means, and the plurality of guiding means are first guiding means (for example, Second guiding slope 290h) and second guiding means (for example, first guiding slope 290g), wherein the plurality of guiding means are provided asymmetrically in the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing means, and the first guiding means May be configured to be able to guide the game ball toward a second position different from the first position.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by providing a plurality of guiding means asymmetrically left and right, even if there is a difference in the right and left ratio of the game balls that contact the opening and closing means, a big hit is caused without causing a ball clogging or the like. May be able to digest. In addition, since it is possible to lengthen the time required for the game ball guided by the first guide means to be detected by the detection means after entering the variable entry means, more than the specified number of game balls enter the ball. In some cases, the frequency of over winning can be improved, and the profit given to the player can be increased. In addition, even when game balls heading in the direction of the detection means are concentrated and a ball is clogged, it is possible to apply different vector (direction) forces depending on the game balls guided to the first guide means. There are cases where it is easy to eliminate clogging. In addition, by providing it on the back, it is difficult to visually recognize the shape of the guiding means from the game ball (it is not visible when the opening / closing means is closed, and it is difficult to see it almost horizontally with the player's eyes when opened). In the game store, the game ball staying time is changed so that it is difficult for the player to be noticed even when adjustments advantageous to the game store are made, while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game stand, You may be able to keep the side profits.

  The variable entry means has an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the first position (on the bottom surface (for example, the lower surface 274)), and the first guiding means is at the second position. The second guiding means may have an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the first position.

  With such a configuration, the game ball guided to the first guiding means is guided in the direction opposite to the first position, so that the residence time in the variable winning means can be increased. On the contrary, for the game ball guided to the second guide means, the residence time can be shortened. In addition, the game ball guided to the second guide means can be digested smoothly due to the high speed of the ball due to the guide by the second guide means and the guide by the inclined surface. Cheap. However, there is a case where the ball clogging can be eliminated by applying a force of another vector to the game ball guided to the first guide means. In addition, since the change in the degree of advantage that occurs when the direction of the game ball toward the variable winning means is changed by adjusting the nail becomes significant, the player's attention may be attracted to the game nail. In addition, even if a single game stand is provided with a plurality of variable winning means of the same shape, the performance of the big hit is changed depending on the area provided with the variable winning means and the gauge configuration (placement and adjustment of nails). Therefore, there are cases where the player's attention can be attracted to the rolling of the game ball, in particular, the state of entering the variable winning means and the state of entering the detecting means after entering the variable winning means.

  The first position is a specific side surface in the short direction of the variable ball entry means, and the detection means is in a direction coinciding with the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means at the first position. It is provided so that it can detect a moving game ball, and the bottom surface of the variable pitching means is a first bottom surface on the specific side surface side on which the detection means is provided and a second bottom surface on the opposite side to the specific side surface. The first bottom surface is provided at the same height as the uppermost portion of the inclined surface, and the second bottom surface is provided at the same height as the lowermost portion of the inclined surface. Also good.

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where the difference in residence time changed by the guided guiding means can be made more conspicuous (for example, when being guided to the first guiding means, over-winning is more likely). When induced and guided to the second guiding means, the residence time can be further shortened). Further, by providing the detection means on the side surface of the variable winning means, there are cases where the vertical and forward / backward widths of the unit can be made more compact than before while the residence time is shortened.

  In the second state, the variable pitching means has a narrow region in which the width in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inclined surface is provided at least in the narrow region, The variable pitching means has a first width at the first position in the narrow width region, and the variable pitching means detects the detection position more than the first position in the longitudinal direction of the variable pitching means. A second width larger than the first width may be formed at the second position in the narrow area close to the means.

  With such a configuration, the area occupied by the variable winning means can be reduced, and an area having necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means can be afforded, and the degree of freedom in design. May be improved. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, by suppressing the clogging of the ball when the variable means is closed, the force applied to the game ball by the inclination and closing of the variable means is changed to the speed of the game ball, thereby eliminating the clogging that occurred in the vicinity of the detection means. You may be able to.

  In the first state, at least a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the lower edge of the opening / closing means.

  With such a configuration, when entering the variable winning means through the opening from the opening / closing means, the ball power is reduced by the step, thereby suppressing the movement in the back direction and the game ball in the shortest path May be guided to the detection means. Further, the game ball guided by the first guiding means and guided to the variable winning means after climbing the inclined surface is moved again onto the opening / closing means by the step, and then the detecting means by the step and the second guiding means. In some cases, the game ball is less likely to drop off from the opening / closing means and the variable winning means while keeping the residence time as long as possible. In particular, as shown in FIG. 215, the positional relationship between the lower edge of the opening and the lower edge of the opening / closing means may be continuously changed by continuously inclining the bottom surface of the variable winning means. In the present embodiment, the bottom of the variable winning means increases as it goes to the right when viewed from the front, and it is difficult to win the variable winning means from the opening / closing means side. Since the difference in the height of the lower edge becomes smaller as it slides to the left from there, it becomes easier to win. In the present embodiment, the difference in height of the lower edge is provided again when it is further to the left, so that the difference in height of the lower edge is minimized at the substantially central position in the left-right direction. The difference in height of the lower edge may be provided over the entire region. In contrast to the present embodiment, by providing the lower edge of the opening / closing means at a position higher than the lower edge of the variable winning means, it may be possible to reliably prevent the game balls in the variable winning means from spilling. .

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. For example, in order to prevent the game balls on the opening / closing means from falling off at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing means. Protective walls (for example, a first dropout prevention wall 290a and a second dropout prevention wall 290b) may be provided. In addition, a plurality of inclined surfaces provided on the bottom surface of the variable winning means may be provided, and the inclination angle may be different for each inclined surface. Moreover, the bottom face between several inclined surfaces may be horizontal.

  The second guiding means is a boundary, and the game ball guided to the second guiding means passes through the shortest distance toward the sensor, crosses the boundary and is guided to the back wall of the variable winning means. If the game ball is configured to pass the second shortest distance toward the sensor, the distance and time for entering the sensor will be different for the two routes, so it may be possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging. is there.

  Further, the first guiding means may be capable of guiding the game ball so that there are more game balls toward the second position than game balls toward the first position. Furthermore, the first guiding means may not be one that guides the game ball toward the first position.

  In addition, the ball entering sensor provided on the side surface of the variable winning means is difficult to see by the opening / closing means (the trace of the molding pin for providing the decorative seal attached to the front of the opening / closing means and the first guiding means). You may comprise. The solenoid for driving the opening / closing means may be provided on the side opposite to the direction in which the sensor is provided, and the longitudinal direction thereof may be provided in accordance with the longitudinal direction of the variable winning means.

  In addition, by providing an attacker with the same shape below the center of the game machine and above the right below the center, there is a difference in the benefits given to the player depending on the type of jackpot (open attacker), while reducing the number of members In some cases, the cost can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may provide a graded inclination in the back surface of a door member. In addition, when the first guiding means and the second guiding means are configured with an inclination, when the door is closed, the outer side is closed faster than the inner side. In some cases, it is possible to induce an over winning without dropping the remaining game balls.

  The gaming machine further comprises variable entry means that can change from one of the first state and the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state to the other. The ball means has an opening through which the game ball can enter, the variable ball entry means has a detection means capable of detecting the entry of the game ball, and the variable ball entry means can open and close the opening. Open / close means, and the open / close means is configured such that, in the first state, the game ball cannot be guided to the opening, and the open / close means is in the second state. The game ball can be guided to the opening, and the detection means can detect the game ball at a third position in the variable ball entry means, and the opening / closing means A plurality of inclined surfaces, and a small number of the plurality of inclined surfaces. Both of the inclined surfaces are first inclined surfaces, at least one of the plurality of inclined surfaces is a second inclined surface, and the shape of the second inclined surface is the first inclined surface. The first inclined surface is different from the shape of one inclined surface, the first inclined surface is easier to guide the game ball to the first position than the second position, the second inclined surface, It is easier to guide the game ball to the second position than the first position, the first position is closer to the first end than the second end, The second position is closer to the second end than the first end, and the third position is closer to the first position than the second position; The first position is a position between the second position and the third position, and the first end is in the longitudinal direction of the opening. The second end portion is an end portion on the opposite side to the first end portion in the longitudinal direction of the opening, and the variable pitching means is: In the second state, the width of the bottom surface in the short direction has a first region smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first region is located from the third position to the first position. Is provided at a position where the distance from the third position to the first region is closer than the distance to the first region, and the first region is located at the first position more than the second position. It is good also as what was provided in the position near.

  With such a configuration, by providing a plurality of inclined surfaces asymmetrically left and right, even if there is a difference in the right and left ratio of the game balls that contact the opening and closing means, it is possible to digest the big hit without causing ball clogging or the like There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since it is possible to lengthen the time from entering the variable ball entry means to being detected by the detection means for the game balls guided to the first inclined surface, more than the specified number of game balls enter the ball. In some cases, the frequency of over winning can be improved, and the profit given to the player can be increased. The detection means can detect the game ball at the third position (near the first end), and can reduce the dwell time and make the vertical and forward / backward widths of the unit more compact than before. There is a case. In addition, the area occupied by the variable winning means can be reduced, and there is a possibility that the area provided with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means can be afforded, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved. . Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, a ball generated in the vicinity of the detection means is obtained by changing the force applied to the game ball by closing the first region and the opening / closing means to the speed of the game ball while suppressing clogging of the ball when the opening / closing means is closed. In some cases, clogging can be eliminated. In addition, the first area is provided near the third position (position exceeding the first position on the moving path of the game ball), and the width of the bottom surface in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. By passing the ball, the game ball may be smoothly and surely guided toward the ball path 264a of the incoming ball sensor 264 disposed in the vicinity of the left end 274b. Further, the game ball passing through the first region rolls so as to be lifted from the bottom surface of the ball passage 272, so that a different vector force can be applied to the game ball, and the ball clogging that occurs in the vicinity of the detection means is prevented. Sometimes it can be resolved.

  Moreover, the said variable pitching means may have a 2nd area | region where the width | variety of the said transversal direction is larger than the diameter of a game ball in said 2nd state.

  With such a configuration, by varying the shape (width in the short direction) of the first region and the second region, there may be variations in the rolling (speed) of the game ball, and the passage In some cases, it is possible to change the residence time of the game ball in the means. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls heading to the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, by suppressing the clogging of the ball when the variable means is closed, the force applied to the game ball by the inclination and closing of the variable means is changed to the speed of the game ball, thereby eliminating the clogging that occurred in the vicinity of the detection means. You may be able to.

  Further, the bottom surface of the variable ball entry means may be inclined downward from the second position toward the first position.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the rolling of the game ball from the second position toward the first position, suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging even in the vicinity of the narrow first region, In some cases, the game ball can be reliably guided to the detection means.

  Moreover, the said variable pitching means is good also as a thing by which the protrusion part which protrudes in the front side of this transversal direction was provided in the back side surface of the said transversal direction.

  With such a configuration, a game ball that rolls on the lower surface 274 from the right end 274a toward the left end 274b while being in contact with the lower side surface 262a of the ball passage 272 is guided in the direction of the guide wall 274c. There are cases where it is possible. In some cases, the game ball may collide with the guide convex portion 262a1 and bounce off in the direction away from the side surface 276, which causes variation in the rolling (speed) of the game ball and the game ball in the ball passage 272. In some cases, the residence time can be changed. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls heading to the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  In the first state, at least a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the lower edge of the opening / closing means.

  With such a configuration, when entering the variable winning means through the opening from the opening / closing means, the ball power is reduced by the step, thereby suppressing the movement in the back direction and the game ball in the shortest path May be guided to the detection means. Further, the game ball guided by the first guiding means and guided to the variable winning means after climbing the inclined surface is moved again onto the opening / closing means by the step, and then the detecting means by the step and the second guiding means. In some cases, the game ball is less likely to drop off from the opening / closing means and the variable winning means while keeping the residence time as long as possible. In particular, as shown in FIG. 215, the positional relationship between the lower edge of the opening and the lower edge of the opening / closing means may be continuously changed by continuously inclining the bottom surface of the variable winning means. In the present embodiment, the bottom of the variable winning means increases as it goes to the right when viewed from the front, and it is difficult to win the variable winning means from the opening / closing means side. Since the difference in the height of the lower edge becomes smaller as it slides to the left from there, it becomes easier to win. In the present embodiment, the difference in height of the lower edge is provided again when it is further to the left, so that the difference in height of the lower edge is minimized at the substantially central position in the left-right direction. The difference in height of the lower edge may be provided over the entire region. In contrast to the present embodiment, by providing the lower edge of the opening / closing means at a position higher than the lower edge of the variable winning means, it may be possible to reliably prevent the game balls in the variable winning means from spilling. .

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a detection unit that can detect at least the passing means (for example, the ball passage 272) through which the gaming ball can pass and the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means. A game machine comprising means (for example, a ball entry sensor 264) and at least opening / closing means (for example, a door member 234a), wherein the passage means has an opening (for example, an opening facing the side surface 276). Part), and the passing means has at least a first area (for example, a narrow area between the guide convex part 262a1 and the guide wall 274c), and the passing means is a second part. (For example, the region near the tip of the arrow of the third route R3 shown in FIG. 219), and the opening is at least accessible to a game ball. In the first state, the game ball can enter at least the opening, and in the second state, the game ball cannot enter the opening. In the direction, the second region is a region away from the detection unit in the first direction, and the second region is a region away from the detection unit in the first direction, and the first region. The width in the second direction is the first width, the width in the second direction in the second region is the second width, and the first state means that the opening and closing means The second state is a state in which the opening / closing means is at least closed, and the first direction is a longitudinal direction of the passage means. And the second direction is the short side of the passing means The first distance is shorter than the second distance, and the first width is narrower than the second width. It is a stand.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a feature in the passage means. That is, by varying the shape (first width and second width in the second direction) of the first region and the second region through which the game ball passes, the rolling (speed) of the game ball varies. May be given, and the staying time of the game ball in the passing means may be changed. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied by the passage means can be reduced, and there can be a margin in an area provided with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls heading to the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  The bottom surface in the first region is a first bottom surface, the bottom surface in the second region is a second bottom surface, and the width in the second direction on the first bottom surface is The first width may be the second width of the second bottom surface in the second direction.

  With such a configuration, since the width of the bottom surface can be narrowed in a part of the passing means, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be varied, and the game ball stays in the passing means. There are cases where changes in time can be given. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied in the width direction of the bottom surface of the passage means can be reduced, and there can be afforded an area with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, thereby improving the degree of freedom of design. There are cases where it is possible. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls heading to the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  The first bottom surface may be provided at least at a position lower than the second bottom surface.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to roll from the second bottom surface toward the first bottom surface, and even in the vicinity of the first bottom surface where the width in the second direction is narrow, Occurrence can be suppressed and the game ball can be reliably guided to the detection means.

  In addition, it comprises a profit granting means (for example, a payout device 152) that can at least give a profit, and the profit granting means can give at least the profit when the detecting means detects a game ball. It may be a thing.

  With such a configuration, the force applied to the game ball by the closing of the opening / closing means is suppressed while the ball in the vicinity of the detection means is suppressed before the game ball related to the provision of profit is detected by the detection means. By changing to the speed of the game ball, there is a case where the ball clogging near the detection means can be eliminated.

  Further, the passage means has at least a third region (for example, a region at the tip of the arrow of the first route R1 shown in FIG. 219), and the third region is in the first direction, A third distance away from the detection means; a width in the second direction in the third area is a third width; and the third distance is greater than the second distance. The third width may be narrower than the second width.

  With such a configuration, since the shape of the passing means becomes more complicated, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be further varied, and the residence time of the game ball in the passing means is changed. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied in the width direction of the bottom surface of the passage means can be reduced, and there can be afforded an area with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, thereby improving the degree of freedom of design. There are cases where it is possible. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls heading to the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  Further, the passing means has at least a fourth area (for example, an area closest to the incoming ball sensor 264), and the fourth area extends from the detection means to the fourth area in the first direction. The width in the second direction in the fourth region is a fourth width, and the fourth distance is a distance shorter than the first distance, The fourth width may be wider than the first width. The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  With such a configuration, since the shape of the passing means becomes more complicated, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be further varied, and the residence time of the game ball in the passing means is changed. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. Further, by providing an area that is wider in the second direction than the first area immediately before the detection means, it is possible to eliminate the clogging that has occurred in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing the clogging in the vicinity of the detection means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the rolling (speed) of the game ball varies, it may be possible to avoid the concentration of the game balls toward the detection means, and the occurrence of the ball near the detection means while suppressing the clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, the blocked ball clogging can be eliminated.

  By providing the turbo button (configuration described in the first embodiment) and the attacker (configuration described in the second to fifth embodiments) on the game stand, the operation burden on the player in the right-handed game is reduced. While reducing, it is possible to improve the winning rate to the attacker and the over winning rate.

In particular, by using a turbo button, it is possible to easily perform swinging (a method of launching a game ball in both the left side area and the right side area) without operating the handle. The above-described swinging requires a large amount of operation of the handle and requires a knack, and is a difficult way for beginners to perform. Further, since there may be a difference in profits given depending on whether or not the above-described swinging can be performed, there is a possibility that a difference may be produced in profits given depending on the skill level of the player. Since the attackers have different shapes for the game balls staying in the attackers according to the place where the prize is won, for example, the area where the game balls enter the attacker from both the left side area and the right side area of the board When it is provided (for example, in the center area of the board surface), it is possible to easily generate an overwinning by performing the above-described swinging. Here, by providing the turbo button, it is possible to provide the above-described attacker that can give a high profit without causing a difference depending on the skill level of the player.
<< Sixth Embodiment >>

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 for launching into 200 game areas 124, a chance button 136 for changing the presentation mode of various presentation devices 206 (see FIG. 249) by the player's operation, and a chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 that emits light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives a card unit return instruction to the card unit, and a game A ball lending display unit 144 for displaying a person's balance and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 248 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 247 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 250). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process, and the first control process related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls are configured, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game store clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball are configured. A launch board case 176 for housing the launch board 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and being operated when the power is turned on. Accordingly, a power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit. And are arranged.

  FIG. 249 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center, and around the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, and the first symbol display device 210. A special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one special opening 2 is provided directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 are disposed in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  In this embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and a display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436. VDP (video) that generates and displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is connected with your display processor) 434, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 251 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 251 (a) shows ten types of special drawings “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 251 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change or latent probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 251 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 251 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 251 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 251 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (normal symbol A) or the off symbol (normal symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  On the other hand, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for the usual figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of not winning, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending general figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. Flags such as a probability variation flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on In FIG. I, when the second off-flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the state of each special figure J is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special I) ) And the second off-set symbol (special symbol J).

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, in the case of a game machine of the number cut probability variation type (ST type), if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number and the subtraction is performed. When the result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed, the effect is displayed in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the waiting period is set. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, a predetermined probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game (ST type). in the case of).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 priority change is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game, and the special figure 1 hold is a priority figure change that is consumed in preference to the special figure 2 hold. May be. In addition, the priority opening variation which starts the special drawing variable game related to the suspension of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 in the starting opening winning order without giving priority to any of the special drawing 2 floating game and the special drawing 1 floating game. It may be. In the starting entry winning order fluctuation, for example, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and therefore the priority fluctuation that the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the substantial number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are configured with command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the number of the flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, including the values of the 1 small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, etc., the special figure probability Including the value of the fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, include the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. That. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, etc. Set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lost flag, second lost flag, stored in the RAM 308 as command data, Information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag is set.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 254 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 254 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 254 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 254 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 255 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 255B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 255 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an operation request notifying unit capable of executing at least an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation (an example of notification of information for prompting operation of the operation unit), and an operation request notification unit. Operating means (an example of means controlled by the second control of the notification control means) capable of executing at least an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification. Hereinafter, each example of the operation request notification requesting the player for a predetermined operation and the operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification will be described. Note that the operation request notification may directly indicate that a predetermined operation is requested, or may not indicate directly. For example, when something (for example, part or all of the effect) changes by performing a predetermined operation in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed, the predetermined notification is included in the operation request notification.

  FIG. 256A shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (a), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in FIG. 256 (a) and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is represented by a downward thick arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol and a special symbol hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In this example, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  FIG. 256B shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (b), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  FIG. 256 (c) shows an example of the display mode of the hold icon. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 256 (c), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed may be displayed in the hold icon. The mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 includes, for example, a button image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The display of the hold icon including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or another hold icon is “eight”, “price” as shown in the lower part of FIG. 256 (c). ”,“ General ”,“ Military ”4 characters are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle, or a mode that matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani, Bancho, etc.) You may make it change to the various aspects of. The mode may be changed by pressing the chance button 136 may be the hold icon (a hold icon including a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed), or other hold icons other than the hold icon. There may be only the holding icon concerned.

  FIG. 256 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol stop display mode. As shown in FIG. 256 (d), the decorative design may be displayed in a form in which a mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. The mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 includes, for example, the characters “PUSH”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The stop display of the decorative design including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In FIG. 256 (d), the symbol “decoration 2” is illustrated, but any symbol of “decoration 1”, “decoration 3” to “decoration 10” may be used. For example, when the decorative symbol that stops first among the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 256 (d), when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player, Transition. Also, for example, the decorative symbols that stop at the first to third are stopped and displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 256 (d), respectively, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player each time it is stopped and displayed. When success or failure is determined by lottery every time 136 is pressed, if all succeeds, a special SP reach or special mode is entered. Also, for example, if any of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the manner as shown in FIG. 256 (d), if the chance button 136 is pressed in that state, it is executed when the chance button 136 is normally pressed. The action to be performed (for example, the action at the time of pressing the chance button mentioned in the example described above or below) may be executed. Further, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated while the hold icon in the upper part of FIG. 256 (c) and the decorative symbol of FIG. 257 are displayed at the same time, the button operation is invalid for the hold icon (for example, the reaction Do not perform a predetermined presentation) may be effective (for example, react, perform a predetermined presentation), may be valid for the hold icon, may be invalid for the decoration, It may be invalid for both icons and decorative symbols, or may be valid for both reserved icons and decorative symbols. When the button operation is valid for one side and invalid for the other, the invalid side may be made valid after performing the production of the valid side based on the button operation.

  FIG. 256 (e) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (e), at the top of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “→ right stroke →” suggesting a right stroke is displayed. This message is displayed, for example, to suggest how to hit the player during probability change. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a right turn. This message may be displayed again as a warning display, for example, when a winning is made at a general drawing start opening provided on the left side or a special figure 1 starting opening that is awarded only when left-handed.

  FIG. 256 (f) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (f), a message “← left-handed ←” indicating left-handed is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed, for example, when the probability change (electric support) is completed, in order to suggest the player how to hit. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 256 (g) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (g), a message “Return to left-handed” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which suggests returning to left-handed. This message is displayed when, for example, the player has left-handed in the gaming state to be left-handed (for example, the game ball has passed through the normal start opening provided in the right-handed route after shifting to the gaming state to be left-handed) ) Is displayed as a warning. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 256 (h) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 256 (h), at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “↑ Aim for Chance Attacker” is displayed, which suggests that the variable winning opening 234 is aimed. This message is displayed, for example, on a game table that produces an effect using a ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 in an initial round in a big hit game or a small hit game. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234.

  257 (a) and (b) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 257 (a), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the message “Yoshimune is ...” (part of the tutorial display). ing. This display indicates to the player that the continuation of the tutorial display is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), the continuation of the tutorial display “I am an eight great general” is displayed. The message “Yoshimune is ...” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 257 (c) shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 257 (c), the selected symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ( The display of the symbol combination itself may be information indicating the profitability of the jackpot). In the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “˜Big hit” is displayed to notify that the big hit game is being played. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes numerical values relating to effects during the big hit game, such as the current round number of the big hit game (in this example, “10R”) and the number of enemies defeated during the retreat. Defeated "), the number of prize balls acquired during the retreat (" 28314pt "in this example), etc. are displayed. These displays correspond to an operation request notification for requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234. For example, when one game ball enters the 15 variable prize openings 234, the number of prize balls displayed is “15” as the number of prize balls obtained and the number of prize balls entered into the variable prize opening 234. It may be “14” (= 15−1), which is the difference (net profit) from the lost number of balls “1”, or “15” of the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 257 (d) shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 257 (d), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 0” is displayed. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). It should be noted that the display indicating that it is an empty board does not necessarily have to be clearly indicated by a text message as in this example, and it may be understood that a demonstration is being performed by displaying the background of the screen. Moreover, it is only necessary to know that the symbol is stopped even if it is not known that the demonstration is in progress. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed together with a message “Daitomo is here”. This display suggests to the player that the screen relating to the membership service is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIGS. 257 (e) and (f) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 257 (e), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a mark indicating that the chance button 136 has been pressed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 together with a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) that “A reach is expected to develop”. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 257 (f), a line of a samurai character “The chance is up by the appearance of a samurai” is displayed. The display of the princess character's dialogue and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed shown in FIG. 257 (e) corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIGS. 257 (g) and (h) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 257 (g), a message “˜A stage” is displayed above the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the present stage is the A stage. Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 has been pressed is displayed together with a message “if you want to change”. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed (for example, immediately after the start of change), and are produced by pressing the chance button 136. This suggests to the player that the stage can be switched from stage A to another stage. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 257 (h), the production stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed at the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “~”. "A stage ~" is switched to "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, a message “if you want to change” and a press of the chance button 136 are indicated on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is switched from the B stage to another stage by pressing the chance button 136. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 258 (a) shows a determination button 136a and a selection button 136b that can be provided in the pachinko machine 100 as a push button switch that can be pressed by the player instead of or in addition to the chance button 136. An example of the configuration of 136c is shown. As shown in FIG. 258 (a), the enter button 136a has a circular planar shape. The left selection button 136b for selecting the left (or top) has a planar shape that suggests "left" (for example, an isosceles triangular shape with an apex angle on the left side, a left arrow shape), It is arranged on the left side of the determination button 136a. The right selection button 136c for selecting the right (or lower) has a planar shape (for example, a shape symmetrical to the left selection button 136b) suggesting "right", and is arranged on the right side of the decision button 136a. Yes.

  258 (b) and (c) show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the buttons 136a to 136c shown in FIG. 258 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 258 (b), as in FIG. 257 (g), the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as “˜A stage˜” informing that the current stage is the A stage. A message is displayed. Further, a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed is displayed along with a message “A stage” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The message “A stage” and a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed. When the right selection button 136c is pressed, the stage is changed from the A stage. This suggests that the player can switch to the stage. When the right selection button 136c is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 258 (c), the effect stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “ "~ A stage ~" switches to "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, the message “B stage” and the left selection button 136b are pressed to the right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is returned from the B stage to the original A stage by pressing the left selection button 136b. These messages “A stage” and “B stage” and a mark suggesting that the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c is pressed are operations for requesting the player to press the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c. Corresponds to request notification. The operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and (c) are similar to the operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 257 (g) and (h), but the operation request notification before the button press shown in FIG. 257 (g). And the operation request notification after the button press shown in FIG. 257 (h) are in the same mode, the operation request notification before the button press shown in FIG. 258 (b) and the button shown in FIG. 258 (c). The mode is different from the operation request notification after pressing. In addition, a type in which three stages A, B, and C (or four or more stages) can be cyclically shifted, such as A⇔B⇔C⇔A, may be used. In this case, in the operation request notification shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and (c), both a mark indicating that the left selection button 136b is pressed and a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed are displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine provided with two chance buttons, a predetermined reaction is shown when the second chance button is pressed while an operation request notification requesting the pressing of the first chance button is made. It may be.

  FIG. 258 (d) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 258 (d), a button image imitating the chance button 136 and a meter moving image representing a meter are displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The meter moving image has, for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is white as a whole at the beginning of the moving image, and the black portion gradually increases from the left end with the passage of time. These button images and meter moving images do not explicitly indicate that the chance button 136 is pressed, but those skilled in the art or a player may recognize that these images are black as a whole. It can be recognized that this implies that the chance button 136 should be pressed before becoming. Therefore, the display of these button images and meter moving images corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. As described above, the operation request notification includes not only notification that explicitly requests a predetermined operation but also all notifications that enable a person skilled in the art or a player to recognize that the predetermined operation is prompted. The notification implying that the chance button 136 should be pressed may include a countdown display such as 3 → 2 → 1 → 0.

  FIG. 258 (e) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 258 (e), a message “Yoshimune mode” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the current effect mode is the Yoshimune mode. The number “3” is displayed in the upper part of the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the number “4” is displayed in the lower part. This display informs that the number of hold of special figure 1 variable game is 3, and the number of hold of special figure 2 variable game is 4. Below the special figure hold number display area 208f, the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations for a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations for the probability change in the ST machine, etc.) related to a state advantageous to the player is displayed (this example). Then, “70 times remaining”). This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  FIGS. 258 (f) and (g) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 258 (f), above the variation icon display area 700 of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a samurai character image and a message “Chance chance when the family crest stops” as a samurai character dialogue. It is displayed. These are displayed as effects related to normal fluctuations, and suggest that a predetermined chance time starts when a “family crest” symbol is stopped and displayed in roulette, which will be described later. These samurai character images and messages correspond to operation request notifications for requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  As shown in FIG. 258 (g), a special animation effect is produced in the fluctuation icon display area 700 or in the vicinity thereof before and after the holding is completed for the holding that is won at the time of the normal drawing and the opening of the electric tulong. Done. For example, when the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 won at the time of the opening of the electric tulong is moved from the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 to the variable icon display area 700 (when the hold is digested), the decorative symbol is displayed. Apart from the variation display, rotation of the roulette in the variation icon display area 700 (the variation display of the effect symbol) is started. When the roulette stops after the elapse of a predetermined time, one of a plurality of types of effect symbols is displayed in the variation icon display area 700. Thereafter, various effects are executed based on the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the variation icon display area 700. In the example shown in FIG. 258 (g), the hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 moves to the variable icon display area 700 and the rotation of the roulette is started. , “Thousand boxes” symbol moves toward the top of the screen. Such an operation of the “thousand box” symbol (in this example, the movement of the display position) is an operation that is executed by digesting the increased holding due to the entrance to the special symbol start opening, so that an operation request notification ( For example, it corresponds to an operation request related operation related to notification for requesting the launch of a game ball. When the “thousand box” symbol moves upward on the screen, the “thousand box” symbol temporarily overlaps the character image. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification (display of the habit character image) due to the operation request related operation (movement of the display position of the “thousand boxes” symbol).

  FIG. 258 (h) shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 258 (h), the symbol combination “decoration 2—decoration 8—decoration 0” for notifying the deviation is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). This display may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, a message “menu display with button PUSH” is displayed in telop below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This display indicates to the player that a menu screen (for example, a screen related to the membership service) is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the menu screen displayed based on pressing of the chance button 136 may be displayed overlapping with various information displayed on the screen. Such display of the menu screen may correspond to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIGS. 259 (a) and (b) show examples of the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect movable body (movable accessory) provided around it. In the example shown in FIGS. 259 (a) and (b), effect movable bodies 800 and 802 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. The effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 operate in a predetermined operation pattern when, for example, a predetermined effect lottery is won. In the following description, “overlapping” and “non-overlapping” are as viewed from the player side.

  The forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 of this example can be rotated by a stepping motor in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The forearm portion 224b does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the forearm portion 224b is at one movable end position (for example, an initial position or a standby position) (see FIG. 259 (a)). Further, the forearm portion 224b overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the other movable end position (for example, the maximum movable end position, the effect position) (see FIG. 259 (b)). ).

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 is located above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the effect movable body 800 is at the upper movable end position, and does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 259 (a)). In addition, the effect movable body 800 overlaps with a part of the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the effect movable body 800 is at the lower movable end position (see FIG. 259 (b)). In this example, when the effect movable body 800 is in the lower movable end position, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, the special figure reservation number display area 208f, etc. of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The movable body 800 is shielded and cannot be visually recognized. However, the fourth symbol display area 208e may be always visible regardless of the position of the effect movable body 800.

  The effect movable body 802 has a shape imitating a panda. The effect movable body 802 is movable in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). In this example, a horizontal stage (not shown) having the same height as the lower end of the screen is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stage is provided with an opening that allows the movable movable body 802 to move in the vertical direction. In the state where the production movable body 802 is at the lower movable end position, only a part (in this example, the panda's head) is exposed on the stage, and the other parts (in this example, the panda's trunk, limbs, etc.) It is stored below the stage (see FIG. 259 (a)). Further, in this state, a part of the effect movable body 802 on the stage is overlapped with a part below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Other portions of the effect movable body 802 stored below the stage cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, the effect movable body 802 appears almost on the stage in the state of the upper movable end position (see FIG. 259 (b)). In this state, almost the entire effect movable body 802 overlaps with a part of the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 802 is overlapped with the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at any position. For example, in the state where it is at the lower movable end position, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is. It may not be overlapped.

  Here, as shown in part A of FIG. 259 (b), the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the effect movable body 802 at the upper movable end position are not in contact with each other. Yes. Therefore, the effect movable bodies 800 and 802 do not contact each other regardless of the position. On the other hand, as shown in part B of FIG. 259 (b), the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 at the other movable end position are in contact with each other. For this reason, the effect data defining the operation pattern of these effect movable bodies is designed so that the effect movable body 800 and the forearm portion 224b do not reach these positions at the same time.

  When the effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 are moved or rotated to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the screen may not be visible. Therefore, the movement or rotation of the effect movable bodies 224, 800, 802 to the position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208. May correspond to the operation.

  260A to 260C show examples of display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and operation of the shielding device 246. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 260 (a), the shielding device 246 is in a fully opened state, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 260 (b), the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is only partially visible through the lattice holes of the shielding device 246. This makes it difficult for the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the decorative symbol and the message “please remove the ball”. The shielding device 246 (right door 246b) of this example has an opening at a position corresponding to the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) in the fully closed state. 246c is provided. Thereby, even if the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) are visible.

  When the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different from the normal mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 260 (c), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and / or moved as necessary, so that the decorative symbols can be easily removed from the lattice holes of the shielding device 246 (left door 246a). Visible. When the door has finished moving, it is in a state as shown in FIG. 260 (b) or (c), but it may be in a state in which decorative symbols, messages, etc. are more difficult to see while the door is moving.

  The closing operation of the shielding device 246 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize.

  Note that the gap (hole) provided in the shielding device 246 of this example is surrounded by a member in the shape of a letter “B”. A notch-shaped gap surrounded by a letter may be provided.

  FIGS. 260D to 260F show examples of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect movable body. In the example shown in FIGS. 260D to 260F, effect movable bodies 800 and 804 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 can take at least a position that does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position that overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect movable body 800 may temporarily shield the fourth symbol display area 208e during the movement, but may not stop at the position where the fourth symbol display area 208e is shielded.

  The effect movable body 804 includes a sub display device using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The effect movable body 804 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. In this example, the sub display device provided in the effect movable body 804 is provided with at least a special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons as the number of hold in FIG. Further, the sub display device can display a message for requesting a predetermined operation from the player.

  In the state shown in FIG. 260 (d), a small part of the lower end portion of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the effect movable body 804, but all of the substantial display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. It is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. At the lower left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. On the other hand, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 provided in the effect movable body 804, three hold icons are displayed. Although not shown, another effect movable body 800 is positioned above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state shown in FIG. 260 (e), the effect movable body 804 slightly moves upward, and a message “chance button pressed” is displayed on the sub display device of the moved effect movable body 804. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the message “please remove the ball” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see due to the movement of the effect movable body 804. In other words, in this example, the effect movable body 804 that displays the operation request notification makes it difficult to visually recognize another operation request notification. Note that the same content may be displayed on the sub display device of the effect movable body 804 instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the message “please remove the ball” on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 260 (f) shows a state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the period in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like, and the predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 is displayed. Move down. It should be noted that the effect movable body 800 may always operate when the chance button 136 is pressed within a period in which pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested. In the state shown in FIG. 260 (f), the effect movable body 800 moves downward and overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 800 moved downward by pressing the chance button 136 shields a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the fourth symbol display in the screen. It stops so as not to overlap the area 208e, the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”). The effect movable body 800 that has moved downward may shield the operation request notification of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a message “please remove the ball”) and make the operation request notification difficult to view. It should be noted that there is a display of “Press the chance button” on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the chance button is pressed, the effect movable body 804 moves, and the effect movable body 804 displays “Press the chance button”. May be difficult to view.

  Further, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping with the effect movable body 804 (sub display device), shields the operation request notification (message “chance button pressed”) of the sub display device, and notifies the operation request notification. It may be difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “chance button pressed”) is based on the fact that a predetermined condition including at least pressing of the chance button 136 (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is established. It may be difficult to recognize by the movement operation of the effect movable body 800 executed in this manner.

  Movement of the effect movable bodies 800 and 804 to a position overlapping with the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or movement of the effect movable body 800 to a position overlapping with the screen of the sub display device is performed by the decoration symbol display device 208 or the sub display device. In some cases, at least a part of the operation request notification corresponds to an operation that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 261 shows an example of the configuration of the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106. As shown in FIG. 261, a plurality of (for example, three) light sources 850 that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at one end portion (upper left end portion in this example) of the transparent plate member 118. . For example, an LED or the like is used as the light source 850. The plurality of light sources 850 are arranged at a predetermined arrangement interval that is relatively narrow in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. In addition, a plurality of light sources 852 (for example, the same number as the number of light sources 850) that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at another end portion of the transparent plate member 118 (lower right end portion in this example). It has been. For example, the same LED as the light source 850 is used as the light source 852. The plurality of light sources are arranged at an arrangement interval wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. For example, the light sources 850 and 852 are controlled to emit light by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, and emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  On the front or back surface of the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118, dot patterns (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflect or scatter light from the light source 850 are formed. Light from the light source 850 enters the transparent plate member 118 and guides the inside thereof, and is reflected or scattered by the first region 118a where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Thus, when the light source 850 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 is relatively narrow, it is possible to increase the proportion of light incident on the dot pattern of the first region 118a out of the light from the light source 850. For this reason, the emission intensity of the first region 118a is relatively high.

  On the front surface or the back surface of the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118, a dot pattern (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflects or scatters light from the light source 852 is formed. Light from the light source 852 enters the transparent plate member 118 to guide the inside, and is reflected or scattered by the second region 118b where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Accordingly, when the light source 852 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 852 is wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850, the light from the light sources 852 is easily dispersed in the transparent plate member 118, and the light incident on the dot pattern of the second region 118b out of the light from the light sources 852. The ratio is likely to be low. For this reason, the emission intensity of the second region 118b may be lower than that of the first region 118a.

  When the first region 118a or the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 emits light, a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208 arranged to overlap with the back side of the first region 118a or the second region 118b when viewed from the player Becomes difficult to see. For this reason, the light emission of the first region 118a and the second region 118b by the light emission of the light sources 850 and 852 is an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the operation request notification on the display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208. May fall under.

  FIGS. 262 (a) and (b) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 262 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed, together with a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) that “A reach is expected to develop”. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), a line of a samurai character “appears that the chance is up due to the appearance of a samurai” is displayed. Since the line of the samurai character overlaps with the line of the princess character and is displayed on the front layer, it is difficult to visually recognize the line of the princess character. The display of the princess character's lines and the mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed shown in FIG. 262 (a) corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the display of the samurai character line shown in FIG. 262 (b) corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (the line of the princess character) is difficult for the player to recognize. In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting pressing of the chance button 136 (the line of the princess character) is executed based on the operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 is pressed). It is difficult for the player to recognize by the display of the character's dialogue.

  FIG. 262 (c) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 262 (c), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Below the message, a hero character image is displayed. An effect image representing the aura of the hero character is displayed behind the hero character image. This effect image is arranged behind the main character image and in a layer in front of the message “please remove the ball”. The effect image gradually increases as the player presses the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The effect image in the state shown in FIG. 262 (c) overlaps with the message “please remove the sphere”, which makes it difficult to see the message. The display of the effect image that is gradually increased corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize. In the state shown in FIG. 262 (c), the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is not difficult to visually recognize by the effect image, but may be difficult to visually recognize by the effect image. In this case, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 (a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed) is an operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 has been pressed for a long time). It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the effect image based on the enlarged display size of the effect image. In this example, there is a relation between the size of the effect image and the expectation level of the jackpot. For example, when the expectation level of the jackpot is high, the effect image tends to be large. Further, when the effect image is large, the degree of difficulty in visually confirming the operation request is likely to increase. As a result, when the degree of expectation for jackpot is high, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request is likely to increase.

  FIG. 262 (d) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 262 (d), a mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 is displayed in front of the message “please remove the ball”, making the message difficult to see. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the display of a mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (a message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIGS. 262 (e) and (f) show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and audio output from the speaker 120. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 262 (e), in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed together with the message “PUSH !!!!”. These messages and marks correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, a voice message “please remove the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a predetermined interval at a medium volume. The output of the voice message corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state and a predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 262 (f), From the speaker 120, the sound effect “Jakine” is output at a large volume. A voice message “please pull out the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a medium volume, but this voice message is difficult to recognize because the sound effect is output at a high volume. That is, the output of the sound effect “Jakin” at a high volume corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (output of a voice message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 263 shows that the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the front of the screen can be moved in the vertical direction and the first display and the second display can be shielded. The example of the relationship with a shielding means is shown. In FIG. 263 and FIGS. 264 to 266 described later, both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a predetermined operation from the player. In FIGS. 263 to 265, the shielding means corresponds to an operation means capable of executing an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The first display is located below the screen, and the second display is located above the first display. FIGS. 263 (a) to (h) show, in time series, how the shielding means moves from below to above.

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (a), the shielding means (not shown in FIG. 263 (a)) is positioned below the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (b), the upper end of the shielding means is positioned above the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is positioned below the first display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (c), the shielding means overlaps the entire first display, but does not overlap the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to view (for example, the entire display is not visible), but the second display is visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (d), the shielding means overlaps the entire first display and also overlaps the lower part of the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, some cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (e), the shielding means overlaps the upper part of the first display and also overlaps the whole of the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, a part cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (f), the shielding means does not overlap the first display, but overlaps the entire second display. In this state, the first display can be visually recognized, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the entire display cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (g), the shielding means does not overlap the first display but overlaps the upper part of the second display. In this state, the first display is visually recognizable, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, some of the images cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 263 (h), the shielding means is located above the second display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the above description, there is an example in which there is one item to be hidden (shielding means) and two items to be hidden (first display and second display). However, there are two or more items to be hidden. One or three or more may be hidden.

  FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 show an example of the relationship between the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means that can move in front of the screen in the vertical direction. . The width of the shielding means in the left-right direction is narrower than the width of the screen. In addition, the shielding means moves up and down in the vicinity of the center of the screen in the horizontal direction. The broken lines in the figure represent the movement trajectories of the left end and the right end of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 264 (a), both the first display and the second display are horizontally long, and the width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The vertical heights of the first display and the second display are both lower than the vertical height of the shielding means. In this case, depending on the position of the shielding means, the first display is a non-shielding state that does not overlap with the shielding means (visible state), a partially shielded state that partly overlaps the shielding means (partially difficult to see) ), And a total shielding state where the whole overlaps with the shielding means (a state where the whole is difficult to visually recognize). The second display can take two states, an unshielded state and a partially shielded state, depending on the position of the shielding means. The second display does not take full shielding. For example, when the shielding means moves from the lower movable end toward the upper movable end, the first display is in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → full shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state. The second display changes in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 264 (b), the first display is the same as FIG. 264 (a), but the second display is vertically long and is arranged at the right end of the screen. The second display is located on the right side of the movement locus at the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take the same three states as described above. The second display is in a non-shielding state regardless of the position of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 264 (c), the first display is the same as FIG. 264 (a), but the second display is arranged immediately above the first display. Both the first display and the second display are located between the left end movement locus and the right end movement locus of the shielding means. The distance from the upper end of the second display to the lower end of the first display is longer than the height in the vertical direction of the shielding means. In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 264 (d), the arrangement of the first display and the second display is switched as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 264 (c). In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265 (a), the width in the left-right direction of the second display is wider than the width in the left-right direction of the shielding means as compared with the arrangement in FIG. 264 (c). The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states, that is, a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state, whereas the second display does not take a fully shielded state, and the non-shielded state, partly Two states of the shielding state can be taken.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265 (b), the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged on the right side of the first display. The distance from the left end of the first display to the right end of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means. The right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display and the second display are not in a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265 (c), the width of the shielding means is widened to the left as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 265 (b). The distance from the left edge of the first display to the right edge of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means, but the left edge of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left edge of the shielding means. ing. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265 (d), the first display is located at the upper left of the second display. The distance from the upper end of the first display to the lower end of the second display is longer than the vertical width of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  Although the example in which the shielding unit moves in the vertical direction has been described in FIGS. 263 to 265, an example in which the shielding unit moves in another direction (for example, the left-right direction) can be considered in the same manner.

  266 (a) to 266 (d) show examples of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series. Both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation. For example, the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged near the center of the screen.

  FIG. 266 (a) shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 266 (b) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are still displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 266 (c) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG. 266 (d) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification includes a display that continues to be displayed over a plurality of change periods (first display in this example) and a display that is deleted when the next change starts (second display in this example). Display).

  266 (e) to (h) show another example of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 266 (e) shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, the first display is displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 266 (f) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, a second display is newly displayed in addition to the first display.

  FIG. 266 (g) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG. 266 (h) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the second display is displayed again in addition to the first display.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification is displayed over a plurality of variation periods, but is displayed only during the symbol stop display period and is erased during the symbol variation display period (in this example, There is a second display).

  FIG. 267 shows a specific example 1 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the examples shown in FIGS. 267 (a) to 267 (d), it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 267 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In the operation request notification of this example, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is requested, but it may be requested to press the chance button 136 one time or a plurality of times (short press is also possible). On the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” overlaps with a part of the main character, but it does not need to overlap. In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the hero character image and the aura image described later, but is displayed on the layer behind the hero character image and the aura image. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a layer behind one of the main character image and the aura image and before the other.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 267 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 ends. Even after the chance button 136 is pressed, an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136 may continue to be displayed. Further, the moving image of the confrontation scene is continuously displayed, and when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the effect mode may change depending on the length of time of the long press operation. In this example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed for a predetermined time or longer, an aura image is displayed behind the main character. In the state shown in FIG. 267 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed. The message “please remove the sphere” is difficult to see because the aura image is displayed. The display of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The size of the displayed aura image may gradually increase as the time of the long press operation of the chance button 136 increases. For example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is continued from the state shown in FIG. 267 (b), the display size of the aura image may be enlarged as shown in FIG. 267 (c). By increasing the display size of the aura image, the message “please remove the sphere” becomes more difficult to see. The enlargement of the display size of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is further continued from the state shown in FIG. 267 (c), the aura image may be further enlarged as shown in FIG. 267 (d). The larger the aura image, the higher the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the message “please remove the ball”. In this example, the larger the aura image is, the higher the expectation is. The upper limit of the size of the aura image in the effect is determined in advance by random lottery at the start of the change. When the player stops the long press operation of the chance button 136, the size of the aura image may be maintained at the time when the long press operation is stopped, or the size of the aura image may be maintained. It may be gradually reduced.

  The size of the aura image at the end of the effect display in this example is determined by the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image and the long press operation time of the chance button 136. For example, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the maximum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 267 (d)) is relatively high when the determination result of the variation is a big hit. When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively low. Further, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the minimum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 267 (b)) is relatively low when the result of the determination of whether or not the change is a big hit is relatively low. When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively high.

  On the other hand, even if the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image is the maximum value, if the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is short, the effect display is ended while the size of the aura image remains small. There is a case. In this example, the upper limit of the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is the time from the start to the end of the effect (for example, the change period in the case of an effect executed over one change period or multiple changes). It is. Therefore, when the production period itself is short, the long press operation time tends to be short, and it may be difficult to execute the production with high expectation. On the other hand, when the production period is long, the long press operation time tends to be long, and thus a production with high expectation may be easily executed.

  In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, so it may not become invisible even if the degree of visual difficulty increases. You may make it invisible or you may make it the whole invisible.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “please remove the ball”) is sent to the player by a predetermined action (for example, display of the aura image, enlargement of the display size of the aura image). It becomes difficult to see. Here, in a state in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, only a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, and the whole operation request notification is difficult to see. , Part of the operation request notification is not visible, only part of the operation request notification is not visible, the whole operation request notification is not visible, part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is visible (viewing Easy), part of the operation request notification is not visible and the other part is visible (easy to see), part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is not visible, part of the operation request notification is It is difficult to view, and some of the other parts are not visible, and another part is visible (easy to see).

  FIG. 268 shows a specific example 2 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 268 (a) to 268 (d), it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In this example, unlike FIG. 267 (a), the message “please remove the ball” is not displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is still displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 268 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image of this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. In the state shown in FIG. 268 (b), since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image do not overlap, the operation request notification is not difficult to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 268 (c), the display size of the aura image is enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. The enlarged aura image overlaps with a part of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 268 (d), the display size of the aura image is further enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. Compared to FIG. 268 (c), an overlapping portion (for example, an overlapping area) with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136 is increased due to enlargement of the aura image. The impossible part is increasing.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a display requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136) is performed by an operation requested by the operation request notification (for example, a long press operation of the chance button 136). An operation (for example, displaying an aura image, enlarging the display size of the aura image) executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition including at least a failure makes it difficult for the player to recognize.

  The layer on which the operation request notification is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is relatively far behind (for example, aura, for example) as shown in FIG. The system side (for example, a request for removing a ball or a request such as “Please call a clerk”) may be relatively nearer as shown in the example in FIG. 267. In some cases, it may be on the side (for example, nearer than the aura image).

  FIG. 269 shows a specific example 3 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to (d), as in FIG. 267, the message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Yes. Similarly to FIG. 268, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation on the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a chance A downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 269 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is still displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 269 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image in this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 269 (b), the aura image overlaps with a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132, but what is the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136? There is no overlap. Therefore, although the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is difficult to visually recognize, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is not difficult to visually check.

  In the state shown in FIG. 269 (c), the display size of the aura image is enlarged. Thereby, the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image increases. Therefore, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification is increasing. The aura image also overlaps with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification.

  In the state shown in FIG. 269 (d), the display size of the aura image is further enlarged. Thereby, since the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased. Further, since the overlapping portion between the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased.

  Here, for example, in the change from FIG. 269 (c) to FIG. 269 (d), regarding the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136, In both cases, the overlap with the aura image is increasing. However, since the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may not increase so much even if the overlapping portion increases (difficulty in visual recognition). May not change at all, or the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may decrease). On the other hand, since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in a layer behind the aura image, an increase in the overlapping portion may directly lead to an increase in the degree of difficulty in visual recognition.

  FIG. 270 shows a specific example 4 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 270 (a), a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136, in this example, a moving image in which the facial expression of the main character is enlarged is displayed on the moving image of the confrontation effect and the small screen arranged in the layer in front of various operation request notifications. A cut-in production will be performed. In this example, a plurality of cut-in effects having different degrees of reliability (expectations) are prepared. The reliability of the cut-in effect depends on the facial expression of the main character displayed on the small screen (for example, the higher the reliability is for a facial expression with a spirit), or the vertical height of the small screen (for example, the higher the height is (Or the thicker the upper and lower frames), the higher the reliability).

  FIG. 270 (b) shows an example of a cut-in effect with high reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is high, both the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 are both the small display displayed on the previous layer. The screen is invisible.

  FIG. 270 (c) shows an example of a cut-in effect with low reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is low, the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 does not overlap the small screen at all. Therefore, the entire operation request notification is visible. Further, only part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 overlaps the small screen. Therefore, only a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 270 (b) and 270 (c), in this example, the degree of difficulty in viewing various operation request notifications varies depending on the type of cut-in effect. The higher the reliability of the cut-in effect, the higher the degree of difficulty in viewing various operation request notifications.

  Note that the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be deleted after the cut-in effect small screen is displayed (see FIG. 270 (c)), or the cut-in effect small screen is displayed. And may be erased (see FIG. 270 (d)).

  FIG. 271 shows a specific example 5 of an effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 271 (a), a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed. The button image of this example is displayed with a larger display size as the reliability of the variation is higher. The button image shown in FIG. 271 (a) is a standard size. The button image is displayed on the layer before the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 271 (b) shows a state in which an enlarged button image is displayed. The enlarged button image overlaps a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible. The degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 increases as the display size of the button image increases. In this example, the operation request notification is not difficult to view when a standard-size button image is displayed, but is difficult to view only when an enlarged-size button image is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 271 (a) (the button image is a standard size), and when the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 271 (a) (the button image is an enlarged size) Then, the performance performed thereafter may or may not be the same. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a predetermined effect movable body operates. The operation request notification may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the effect movable body. Different production movable bodies may be operated depending on the size of the displayed button image, and the operation pattern (eg, movable range) of the production movable body may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image. May be.

  In the state shown in FIG. 271 (a), the entire standard-sized button image is in an opaque state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the background image of the portion overlapping the button image cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 271 (b), a part (side surface part) of the enlarged button image is in the transmissive state (transmittance 100%). For this reason, a part of the hero character, a part of the enemy character, and a part of the background image, which overlap with the side part of the button image, are visible. Thus, the entire operation request notification (button image) displayed in the standard size is in an opaque state, and a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size is in a transparent state. It may be.

  A part of the standard size button image may be in a transparent state. The operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be entirely opaque. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be 0% to 100%. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) may be gradually increased as time passes.

Note that only the side surface of the button image may be transparent, and the upper surface of the button image (the portion representing the upper surface (pressed surface) of the chance button 136) may be opaque. Further, only the upper surface of the button image may be transparent, and the side surface of the button image may be opaque.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271 (c), a message “Mode change with left / right keys” is displayed on the layer in front of the enlarged button image, overlapping the button image. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the selection buttons 136b and 136c (see FIG. 258 (a)). As described above, the operation request notification may be displayed on a layer in front of the button image.

  FIG. 272 shows a specific example 6 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 272 (a) shows a state where the big hit effect is started. On the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “Big hit!” Is displayed. In this example, the jackpot round number is 16R, but it is assumed that the player has not been notified of the jackpot round number at this time.

  In the state shown in FIG. 272 (b) after that, the message “big hit !!!!” is deleted, and the winning symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 272 (c), a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 272 (d) after that, a message “16R big hit confirmed by crest dropping !!” is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 272 (e) after that, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Press!”, A button image representing the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation is displayed.

  In this example, since the number of rounds per jackpot is 16R, when the chance button 136 is pressed, an animation in which the family crest image moves (drops) from above is displayed as shown in FIG. 272 (f). Thus, the player is notified that the number of rounds per jackpot is 16R. Further, since the family crest image is displayed in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 (message “please remove the ball”), a part of the operation request notification is a family crest image. It becomes difficult to see. That is, the display of the animation in which the family crest image moves from above corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 272 (g) thereafter, the family crest image is erased, and the entire operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 becomes visible.

  FIG. 273 shows a specific example 7 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 273 (a) shows a state where the effect of selecting the SP reach after the reach development has started. In this state, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is horizontally divided into three. The left split area represents A reach with medium expectation (two stars), the middle split area represents B reach with high expectation (three stars), and the right split area represents the highest expectation (five stars) ) X reach. In the center of the screen, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Determine destination with buttons”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and an operation for pressing the chance button 136 are displayed. And a downward arrow image indicating that is displayed. Further, on the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), the thick frame cursor surrounding any one of the three divided regions starts to move between the three divided regions at a high speed. The thick frame cursor stops when the chance button 136 is pressed. Then, the reach effect corresponding to the divided area surrounded by the stopped thick frame cursor is selected. Note that which reach effect is selected, that is, in which divided area the thick frame cursor surrounds may be determined in advance.

  For example, when the B cursor is selected in a state where the thick frame cursor surrounds the central divided region and B reach is selected, as shown in FIGS. 273 (c) and 273 (d), the central divided region and the thick frame surrounding it are displayed. An animation is displayed that expands the cursor to the entire screen. Thereby, the player is notified that the B reach has been selected. At this time, since the thick frame cursor crosses the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) displayed on the left side of the screen, the operation request notification becomes difficult to visually recognize. Accordingly, the display of the animation in which the central divided region and the thick frame cursor surrounding it are enlarged over the entire screen corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to see.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the notification control means (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit) that can execute at least the first and second controls. 500), a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, etc.), and a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body) that can at least notify information. 804, a sub-display device, a speaker 120, etc.), wherein the notification control means can execute at least the first control when the first control condition is satisfied. The notification control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second control condition is satisfied, and the first control is provided to the notification means. The operation information includes at least control for performing notification, and the operation information includes at least information for prompting operation of one of the plurality of operation units, and the operation information notification , Second control (for example, control for operating the effect movable body, control for moving the shielding means, control for displaying the effect image on the layer in front of the operation information in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light sources 850 and 852. And the second control condition is a state in which the second control condition is one of the plurality of operation means. It is characterized in that at least one of the operating means is operated.

  According to this configuration, the operation information that prompts the operation of the operation means can be made difficult to recognize, and thus the player's attention may be attracted to the operation information. In addition, since the effects can be diversified, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a determination result is established, whether or not the determination is possible can be performed at least by a determination unit (for example, special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231), special figure 2 related. And a lottery process (step S229). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a symbol variation condition is established, at least a symbol variation stop display is executed to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation. It further has possible symbol display means (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when the control state transition condition is satisfied, the first control state and the second control state (for example, the control state having higher advantage than the first control state) Control state transition means (for example, special figure 1 state update process (step S227), special figure 2 state update process (step S225), etc.) It further has these.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, game control including at least main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc.). And the main control means is capable of executing at least control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub control means is capable of executing at least control relating to presentation based on a control command transmitted from the main control means. It is a characteristic.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the operation information (for example, information for prompting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132) is information acquired by the main control means (for example, lower plate full tank error information, main control unit). Based on information included in a command transmitted from 300 to the first sub-control unit 400). The notification control means may include the main control means and the sub control means.

  In the above embodiment, the notification that suggests the operation of the operating means (for example, the chance button 136) to the player includes an effect of the operating means itself (for example, lighting, blinking, vibration, etc. of the chance button 136). Also good.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 273 again.

  (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of operation units (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, selection buttons 136b and 136c), and a display unit (for example, which can execute at least a plurality of types of display). , The decorative symbol display device 208), display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing the first control, and determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of at least performing the determination of correctness. , Special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)), and symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display) capable of executing at least symbol variation display Apparatus 214) and control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process) capable of at least executing transition control of a plurality of control states Step S225) and special figure 1 state update processing (step S227)), wherein at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136). ), And at least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display. (For example, a button image representing the chance button 136), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 ( "Please remove the ball")), at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image), and the display control means When the condition is satisfied, the first control can be executed at least, and the first condition is when the first operation means is operated during the execution of the first display. The first control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means, and the third display is performed in the first period. When the first control is executed, at least a part of the second display is displayed by displaying the third display in front of the second display. Hereinafter, the “first region”) has lower visibility after execution than before execution of the first control, and at least a part of the third display (hereinafter, referred to as “first area”). "Second area") is displayed at a position overlapping the first area. The first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control means (for example, the first sub-control) that can execute at least control according to the command from the first control means. Part 400), and the second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means in response to the command, and the second operation means is operated when The game ball is configured to be discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) that can store the game ball, and the first display is an image showing an appearance of the first operation means. The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray, and the third display displays the game. It is an effect display that produces effects. .

  According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.

  (2) In the pachinko machine 100, when the second display is performed during the execution of the third display, the third display is erased when the first period elapses. Even in such a case, the second display can be continuously displayed.

  According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.

  (3) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display, and the second display is the first display of the first display. It can be displayed even during execution.

  (4) In the pachinko machine 100, the first control can be executed even while the second display is being executed, and the first control can be performed using the second display. It can be executed even when it is not being executed.

  (5) In the pachinko machine 100, the display control means can execute at least a second control when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is The second control is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display, and the second control displays the second display displayed on the display means. It is characterized by including at least the control to be erased.

  (6) In the pachinko machine 100, the display control means can execute at least a third control when the third condition is satisfied, and the display control means When the above condition is satisfied, the fourth control can be executed at least, and the third control includes at least a control for displaying the first display on the display means, The fourth control includes at least control for displaying the second display on the display means, and the first display is performed in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136). It is at least displayable.

  (7) In the pachinko machine 100, the second period is a period started before the start of the first period.

  (8) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the first operation unit, and the second display includes a display of the second operation unit. It is characterized by including at least a display for prompting an operation.

(9) In the pachinko machine 100, the transmittance of the second region is not 100%.
It is characterized by that.

  (10) In the pachinko machine 100, when the first control is executed, the third display is displayed on the front surface of the second display, thereby executing the first control. The first region at a later time is not visible.

  (11) In the pachinko machine 100, the second control unit includes at least the display control unit.

  (12) The pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of control boards, at least one of the plurality of control boards being a first control board (for example, a main board 156), and the plurality of control boards. At least one of the substrates is a second control board (for example, the first sub-board 160), and the first control means includes at least the first control board. The second control means includes at least the second control board.

  (13) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, selection buttons 136b and 136c), and a display means (for example, capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display). , The decorative symbol display device 208), display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing the first control, and determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of at least performing the determination of correctness. , Special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)), and symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display) capable of executing at least symbol variation display Device 214) and control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process) capable of at least executing transition control of a plurality of control states. (Step S225) and special figure 1 state update processing (step S227)), wherein at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button) 136), at least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132), and at least one of the plurality of types of indications is a first operation means. Display (for example, a button image representing the chance button 136), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132). (“Please remove the sphere”)), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image or a family crest image). At least one is a fourth display (for example, an image of a hero character, an image of an enemy character), and the display control means performs the first control when the first condition is satisfied. The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated during execution of the first display, and the first condition is the first condition. The control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means, and the third display is displayable at least in the first period, and the first control is executed. Before the second display, the fourth display is displayed on the back of the second display, and when the first control is executed, the third display is displayed on the front of the second display. By being displayed, at least a part of the second display ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first region”. ) Is less visible after execution than before execution of the first control, and at least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “second region”) It is displayed at a position overlapping the first area, and is capable of executing at least control according to a command from the first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and the first control means. Two control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), wherein the second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means according to the command, and The operation means is configured such that, when operated, the game ball is discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) that can store the game ball. Including at least an image showing an appearance of the first operation means. The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray, and the third display is an effect display that produces a game. It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.

  (14) In the pachinko machine 100, when the second display is being performed during the execution of the third display, the third display is erased when the first period elapses. Even in such a case, the second display can be continuously displayed.

  According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.

  (15) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display, and the second display is the first display of the first display. It can be displayed even during execution.

  (16) In the pachinko machine 100, the first control can be executed even while the second display is being executed, and the first control can be performed using the second display. It can be executed even when it is not being executed.

  (17) In the pachinko machine 100, the display control unit can execute at least a second control when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition The second control is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display, and the second control displays the second display displayed on the display means. It is characterized by including at least the control to be erased.

  (18) In the pachinko machine 100, the display control unit can execute at least a third control when the third condition is satisfied, and the display control unit When the above condition is satisfied, the fourth control can be executed at least, and the third control includes at least a control for displaying the first display on the display means, The fourth control includes at least control for displaying the second display on the display means, and the first display is performed in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136). It is at least displayable.

  (19) In the pachinko machine 100, the second period is a period started before the start of the first period.

  (20) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the first operation unit, and the second display includes a display of the second operation unit. It is characterized by including at least a display for prompting an operation.

  (21) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the transmittance of the second region is not 100%.

  (22) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the second control means includes at least the display control means.

  (23) The pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of control boards, at least one of the plurality of control boards being a first control board (for example, a main board 156), and the plurality of control boards. At least one of the substrates is a second control board (for example, the first sub-board 160), and the first control means includes at least the first control board. The second control means includes at least the second control board.

  (24) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display, and the pachinko machine 100 includes At least one is a first display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)), and at least one of the plurality of types of display. One is a second display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image), and the display means is capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display area, and the display means The second display can display at least the second display, the first display includes at least a notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball, and the second display With the first display At least different at the second of the at least a portion of the display area, the one in which overlaps with the first at least a portion of the display area, it is characterized.

  According to this configuration, the production can be diversified, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (25) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means is capable of at least starting display of the second display during display of the first display.

  (26) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the display means is capable of at least starting display of the second display while the first display is not displayed.

  (27) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means is capable of at least starting display of the first display during display of the second display.

(28) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the display means is capable of starting display of the first display at least while the second display is not displayed.

  (29) In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the first display can be displayed at least in a part of the second display area.

  (30) In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the second display can be displayed at least in a part of the first display area.

  (31) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that at least a part of the second display can be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first display.

  (32) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the first display includes at least a plurality of characters (for example, a message “please remove the ball”).

  (33) In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the plurality of characters can be displayed at least so as to overlap with at least a part of the second display.

  (34) In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the second display can be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the plurality of characters.

  (35) In the pachinko machine 100, at least some of the plurality of characters have at least different visibility before the display start of the second display and after the display start of the second display. It is characterized by that.

  (36) The pachinko machine 100 includes a storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) capable of storing game balls, and the first display discharges game balls from the storage tray to a player. It is characterized by including at least a notification that prompts the user to do so.

  (37) In the pachinko machine 100, the second display is an effect display for producing a game.

  (38) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that it is provided with operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132 and a chance button 136) that can be operated at least by the player.

  (39) The pachinko machine 100 includes movable means (for example, the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body 800, the effect movable body 802, and the effect movable body 804), and the movable means is at least at the first position. The movable means is movable, and the movable means is movable at least to the second position.

(40) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine.
<< Seventh Embodiment >>

  Next, a game machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention is described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 274 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (f) show, in this order, specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an effect movable body 806. The effect movable body 806 is installed below the effect device 206. The effect movable body 806 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means) can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. . The effect movable body 806 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The effect movable body 806 includes a sub display device 808 (second display means) using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The sub display device 808 is fixed to the effect movable body 806 so that the display area is positioned within the horizontally long rectangular frame 806a of the effect movable body 806. For this reason, the sub display device 808 can move integrally with the effect movable body 806. A frame portion 807 outside the frame 806 a is a frame area of the sub display device 808. The frame portion 807 may be decorated with a resin member, an LED lamp, or the like.

  Here, the positional relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is indicated. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. Further, the side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in the effect device 206. From the rear side to the front side of the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in this order. In other words, the sub display device 808 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 in the effect device 206, in order from the rear side, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 810 described later), an effect movable body 224, and a transparent plate (for example, described later). A light guide plate 812) is provided. In addition, the arrangement | sequence order of a decoration part, the production | presentation movable body 224, and a transparent board can be changed arbitrarily. Further, the transparent plate may not be provided.

  In addition, on the front side of the sub display device (production movable body 806) in the production device 206, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 814 described later), a transparent plate, and a front stage 244 are installed in this order from the rear side. The transparent plate is provided to prevent the game ball from entering the rear side of the front stage. Therefore, the transparent plate only needs to prevent the ingress of game balls from the front stage 244, and may be installed only below the rendering device 206 (near the front stage 244). It may be installed so as to cover the entire surface of 206. Further, the arrangement order of the decorative portion and the transparent plate may be the order of the transparent plate and the decorative plate from the rear side to the front side. Note that the transparent plate may be omitted.

  274 to 276, the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means), the effect movable body 806, the sub display device 808 (second display means), the special figure 1 display apparatus 212, and the special figure. 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 display device 214, and special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black.

  A hold icon display area 710 is provided in the vicinity of the left side slightly from the center of the lower long side (horizontal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area 710, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 710, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons, and the special figure variable game related to each hold with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of each hold icon. It is possible to make a prefetch notice of the determination result. The hold icon display area 710 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 710 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  Two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 each having two small square display areas are provided below the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and the following examples, the square display area of the fourth symbol in the special figure variable game is outlined, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at fixed positions during the execution of the special figure variable game regardless of the game state and the type of effect.

  Also, rectangular reserved number display areas 712a and 712b are provided near the center of the right short side (longitudinal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The number-of-holds display area 712a displays the number of holds shown in FIG. 1, and the number-of-holds display area 712b displays the number of holds shown in FIG.

  FIG. 274 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. In the special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure I (first off symbol) indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure I indicating that the determination result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In addition, the 1st to 4th LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are respectively lit, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four. All the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  Since the special figure variation games of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not executed, both of the two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Further, a hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 710, a hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, a hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and a hold icon a4 is displayed in the fourth area. The display mode of the hold icons a1 to a4 is a white circle. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and since the number of hold in the special figure 2 is zero, the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “0”.

  In addition, the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position (first position). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the initial position, the effect movable body 806 and the decorative symbol display device 208 do not overlap each other when viewed from the player. When the effect movable body 806 is waiting at the initial position, the sub display device 808 displays the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, “CR Yoshimune”).

  FIG. 274 (b) continuing from FIG. 274 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (may be referred to as left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c), the decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation display is executed. In the present embodiment, during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212 is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 2 display device 214 is repeatedly turned on and off. Thereby, the player can confirm that each special figure is variably displayed.

  In addition, since one special figure 1 hold has been consumed and the number of special figure 1 holds has become three, the first to third LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are respectively lit, and the hold icon In the display area 710, the hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area, the hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, the hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and “3” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a. ”Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of suspension in FIG. 1 is three.

  FIG. 274 (c) continuing from FIG. 274 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect (reach effect) of the special figure 1 variable game being executed is started. In this example, a character string “Let's support Yoshimune with repeated button strokes!” And a villager c5 who supports Yoshimune are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the sub display device 808, an image imitating the chance button 136 and Tonosama (Yoshimune) c1 are displayed. In addition, the sub display device 808 displays a character string “good” above the image imitating the chance button 136 to notify that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started. In addition, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, which are located at substantially the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, are reduced and moved to the upper right of the display area, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. .

  FIG. 274 (d) following FIG. 274 (c) shows a state in which the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation reception period is started, a character string “continuous hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 808 is white indicating an image imitating the chance button 136. A pull-out arrow is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is executed. The sub display device 808 displays a horizontally long bar-shaped meter image below the image imitating the chance button 136. The meter image includes a rectangular frame image, and indicates the operation reception period of the chance button 136 by the length of the colored portion in the frame image. In addition, the sub-display device 808 displays a character string “support”, and an effect of supporting the grandfather c1 is executed.

  FIG. 274 (e) following FIG. 274 (d) shows a state in which the player has hit the chance button 136 a plurality of times. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of character strings “do your best!” Corresponding to the number of times the chance button 136 has been pressed (the number of times the chance button sensor 426 has detected the chance button 136 has been detected) is displayed.

  In addition, after the operation reception period starts, the effect movable body 806 starts moving upward in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pachinko machine 100 may start moving the effect movable body 224 according to the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136, or start moving when other conditions are satisfied (for example, the start of the operation reception period, the elapse of a predetermined time). May be. While the effect movable body 806 is moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, all or part of the images and symbols displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlapping the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Becomes invisible. In the state shown in FIG. 274 (e), the entire hold icon a3 is invisible.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 274 (e), the lower plate full tank error is detected based on the fact that the lower plate full tank sensor detects that the game balls (prize balls) stored in the lower plate 128 are full. Occurs. For example, a prize ball that has not been paid out for any reason during the previous jackpot game is paid out at this time, or a prize ball is paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the general winning slot 226, and is not in a jackpot game. May also cause a bottom full tank error. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 (first display) is displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 703 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 274 (e), the lower pan full tank error display 703 has a band-shaped band image and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed at the approximate center of the band image. At the start of displaying the lower pan full tank error display, the belt-like image is displayed in black and opaque. The character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed in white letters. In addition, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed in a layer before the villager c5 and the character string “do your best!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d. For this reason, a part of the character string of villager c5 and “Do your best!” Is invisible. Further, the display of “0” in the number-of-holds display area 712 b indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 is displayed in front of the lower pan full tank error display 703. Thereby, even when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the player may be able to accurately recognize the number of reserved special figures. Further, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed without overlapping the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2. For this reason, the visibility of the fourth symbol does not deteriorate even when the lower pan full tank error occurs.

  274 (f) continuing from FIG. 274 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving upward in the front plane of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the villager c5, and a part of “Do your best!” Are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and are difficult to see (one Part is invisible). Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 changes from the non-transmissive state to the transmissive state. Therefore, the character string “Do your best!” Displayed overlapping the lower plate full tank error display 703 becomes visible. As described above, the belt image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed by alternately changing between the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) and the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The opacity and transmission of the band image may change gradually and continuously or may change stepwise.

  Further, the villager c5 and the character string “Do your best!” Are hidden from the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, and then deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The villager c5 and “Do your best!” May be deleted together with the display of “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 275 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. 275 (a) to 275 (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 274 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 has moved in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and stopped almost at the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the chance button 136 is operated a specified number of times within the operation reception period, the effect movable body 806 moves to approximately the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is the movement completion position. Yes. As a result, a part of the belt image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire character string “please remove the ball” are displayed on the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Hidden and invisible. Further, the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed by changing from the transparent state to the black non-transparent state. In addition to the lower plate full tank error display 703, the effect movable body 806 and the sub-display device 808 are used to display decoration symbols, hold icons, effects display (for example, villager c5, notice notice of change, pre-read notice notice), etc. At least a part of the display may be hidden. In addition, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 allow the decoration symbol, the hold icon, and the effect display (for example, Other indications such as villager c5, notice notice of the change, prefetch notice notice) may not be hidden. Further, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, it may be displayed on the sub display device 808 that the lower pan full tank error has occurred. In this case, the lower plate full tank error display 703 may be continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display state of the lower plate full tank error on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 overlaps. A state in which only the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808 displays the lower pan full error display may be included. In addition, when the lower pan full tank error display is displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808, the lower pan full tank error display may not be displayed on the other display device. .

  Further, since the operation acceptance period has ended, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is gradually erased, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 808 is simulated. The displayed image and the meter image indicating the operation reception period are deleted.

  In addition, after the villager c5 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 808 starts to display the shrine c1 who has made a guts pose and the villager c5. The display start timings of the clan c1 and the villager c5 who made a guts pose in the sub display device 808 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  FIG. 275 (b) continuing from FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the clan c1 and the villager c5 having a guts pose are displayed on the sub display device 808. Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 gradually changes from the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%).

  FIG. 275 (c) continuing from FIG. 275 (b) shows a state in which the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). In addition, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted.

  FIG. 275 (d) following FIG. 275 (c) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of “decoration 7” is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. At the start of the shaking fluctuation display, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to approximately the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is started. Thus, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Since the effect movable body 806 remains stopped at the approximate center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the left and right decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c In addition, all of the central decorative symbols that are swayed and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. As a result, a part of the left and right decorative symbols that are displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are hidden by the lower pan full error display 703 in addition to the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Therefore, the expectation that a special jackpot may be won in the special figure 1 variable game being executed without allowing the player to recognize which decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuation manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. May be available to the player.

  FIG. 275 (e) continuing from FIG. 275 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thereby, compared with the state shown in FIG. 275 (d), the visibility of the decorative symbols that are swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is improved. Further, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 displayed on the sub display device 808 are gradually deleted.

  FIG. 275 (f) continuing from FIG. 275 (e) shows a state after the effect movable body 806 starts moving toward the initial position. Due to the movement of the production movable body 806, the character string “please remove the ball” in the lower plate full tank error display 703 is visible. However, the lower tray full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the player may not be able to recognize the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Moreover, the movement start timing of the production movable body 806 may be after the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start erasure, before the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start to erase, It may be simultaneously with the start of erasure of the villager c5.

  FIG. 276 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 276 (a) to 276 (c) are effects executed subsequently to FIG. 275 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 276 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving toward the initial position. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thus, the player can recognize that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the sub display device 808, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 are deleted, and the display of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed so that the display color gradually becomes darker.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows a state where the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the lower tray full tank error display 703 changes to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). As a result, a part of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is hidden. The sub display device 808 displays “CR Yoshimune”.

  FIG. 276 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative design display apparatus 208. , It is informed that the big hit (15R special big hit) of “Special Figure A” has been won. In addition, the fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in a predetermined color to notify that the special figure 1 variable game has ended. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The lower plate full tank error display 703 continues to be displayed until the lower plate full tank error is canceled (until the lower plate full tank sensor stops detecting the game ball).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a sub display device 808 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 as a first display.

  The sub display device 808 can display at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 has at least low visibility when the sub display device 808 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state where at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 are displayed by the sub display device 808.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be low, and thus the decorative symbol display that is difficult to see is displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, since the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight is easier to see than the lower plate full tank error display 703, and the villager c5. May be able to point to.

  The ball removal notification may be an error display for notifying that the storage tray (for example, the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128) is full.

  The ball removal notification may be hidden when the special figure variable game is finished. In this case, when the next special figure variable game is started, a display for informing the lower plate full tank error may be displayed again.

  The ball removal notification may be hidden when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device. In this case, the display for informing the bottom plate full tank error may be displayed again at the start of the big hit game, may not be displayed at the start of the big hit game, and may be displayed again during the round of the big hit game.

  When displaying the ball removal notification once again after being hidden, the mode before being hidden and the mode when it is displayed again may be the same or different.

  Even if the display of the ball removal notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, other display means (for example, an LED lamp, a sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, a speaker) 120), it may be notified that a lower pan full error has occurred.

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 280. FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment 2-2. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a surface closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front surface”, and a surface farther from the player than the “front surface” is referred to as “rear surface”. Is written.

  As shown in FIG. 277, a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decorative portion 814 is disposed on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 277, the decorative portions 810 and 814 are illustrated as a horizontally long flat plate shape. On the front surfaces of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, decorative members, lamps, and the like molded in a predetermined shape with a resin or the like are installed. Further, the decorative portion 810 has an opening 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decoration unit 810 is arranged so that the opening 810 a overlaps the screen of the decoration symbol display device 208. The area of the opening 810a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decoration unit 810. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part that is visually recognized through the opening 810a (a part surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is an area that is visible to the player. Further, the frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. A lens cut having a predetermined pattern is formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812. As a result, the light beam incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp is reflected to the player side by the lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812 and is emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted from the light guide plate 812 in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, blue) to a predetermined pattern (for example, a pattern 705 on the face of the lord (hereinafter referred to as the face 705 of the lord) as shown in FIG. 277). As seen by the player. As a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In this example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of Tonosama's face 705, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the pattern of the LED lamp to be lit. Further, the pattern (light emission pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamp is not lit, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the light guide plate 812 such as the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible to the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, may be easily visible, or may be difficult to visually recognize. , It may be invisible.

  A decorative portion 814 is disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 812. The decorative portion 814 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 814a. The decorative portion 814 is disposed so that the opening 814a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. For this reason, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decorative portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is a display region that is visible to the player. For this reason, the outer peripheral part 812a (outside the dotted line in the figure) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is not visible to the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a is not limited to light when the LED lamp emits light. Those arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 812, such as 208, are visible or easily visible to the player.

  The decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. A plurality of effect movable bodies such as effect movable bodies 224 and 800 (see FIG. 259) may be arranged between the decoration unit 810 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. One or more effect movable bodies (for example, the effect movable body 806) may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed on the front side of the effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 278 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 as viewed from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 278 (a), the face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is visually recognized through the opening 814 a of the decorative portion 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 278 (b) shows a state where an effect is actually being executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, FIG. 278 (c) is a diagram in which the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are removed from FIG. 278 (b). A region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 278 (c) indicates a display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be actually visually recognized by the player through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 278 (c), “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208. Further, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, hold number display areas 712a and 712b are provided, respectively. In the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect as shown in FIG. 278 (c), if the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player is informed as shown in FIG. 278 (b). Is visible. Since the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the transparent light guide plate 812 with light emission in a predetermined color, it is displayed so that the rear side is transmitted (the rear side is visible). For this reason, in the image or design displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the visibility of the portion that overlaps the lord's face 705 is relatively low, and the visibility of the portion that does not overlap the lord's face 705 is low. It is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 278 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1, b2 and the reserved number display area 712a and almost the entire reserved number display area 712b (the part where the reserved number is displayed in numbers). Is displayed so as not to overlap with Tonosama's face 705. For this reason, even when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player can reduce the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a special figure variable game is executed and the number of special figure holds.

  Positions where the whole or part of the hold number display area 712a (displays the hold number of the special figure 1) and the whole or part of the hold number display area 712b (displays the hold number of the special figure 2) do not overlap with the face 705 May be displayed.

  At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712 a and 712 b may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the face 705 of the lord, and the other may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the face 705 of the lord. In addition, both the hold icon and the hold number display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the Tonosama face 705, or may be arranged at a position where both do not overlap.

  Next, a specific effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 and 280. FIGS. 279 (a) to 279 (g) show specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in time series.

  In FIGS. 279 to 280, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are not shown. In addition, when the LED lamp disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 emits light and the noble face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the noble face 705 is shown on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 279 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 2 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a special jackpot. Since the special figure 2 variable game is finished and the special figure variable games of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. .

  The gaming state at the time point shown in FIG. 279 (a) is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (a probability variation state with electric support). For this reason, “probably changing” is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that it is in a special figure high probability state (probability changing state).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays only the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 in the normal figure high probability state (during electric support). For this reason, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (the first hold), the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold, the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold, The hold icon a14 indicates the fourth hold in the hold order. The display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is a white circle. In addition, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four, so the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “4”. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon indicating hold in FIG. 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during power support.

  FIG. 279 (b) continuing from FIG. 279 (a) shows a state in which it is notified that the special big hit is won in the special figure 2 variable game ended in FIG. 279 (a). In the special jackpot (the jackpot of the special figure A), the game state shifts to a probable change state (special chart high probability state) after the big jackpot game. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is not stopped. The hold icon display area 710 also disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a special big win winning notification effect is executed by the character string “probability big hit”.

  FIG. 279 (c) continuing from FIG. 279 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 279 (c), the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of the beach is displayed. The upper right of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It is reported that there is. The top left of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 279 (d) following FIG. 279 (c) shows a state where the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). In the round number display area 717, “6R” is displayed to notify that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 279 (e) following FIG. 279 (d) shows a state in which the Tono-like face 705 (second display) not displayed in FIGS. 279 (a) to 279 (d) is displayed on the light guide plate 812. Is shown. By displaying the Tono-sama's face 705 on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, part of the background image, hold icon, round number display, jackpot type display) is reduced. Since the time shown in FIG. 279 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is determined as a result of the special figure prefetching processing that the prefetching result for the special figure variable game that is currently held has a big hit (so-called Only when it is determined that there is a reserved villa. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. For example, in the special chart prefetching process executed up to the time point shown in FIG. 279 (a), if there is a big hit in the hold, the Tono-sama's face 705 is displayed to indicate that there is a reserved game in the big hit game. To inform. In the present embodiment, the Tono-sama's face 705 is used as a premier effect (effect of confirming a big hit) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In FIG. 279 (f) continuing from FIG. 279 (e), a prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game is paid out to the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 becomes full, This shows the state where the bottom pan full error has occurred. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 (first display) is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in the frame. The lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. The lower pan full tank error display 704 has a relatively low visibility when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed until the game ball (prize ball) stored in the lower plate 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by operating the ball discharge lever 132 and the lower plate full tank error is canceled. Continue to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 279 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 is changed from white (indicated by a right-upward hatching in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a <b> 13 to notify that the prefetching result related to the special figure 2 variable game with the hold order of 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color has changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (a big hit determination effect) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. Since the time shown in FIG. 279 (f) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 279 (g) following FIG. 279 (f) shows a state in which the display color of the hold icon a13 is further changed from the time shown in FIG. 279 (f) (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). As described above, in the premier effect executed using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is changed as needed. The change in the display color of the hold icon may be, for example, continuously changing from blue to green or red, or may be changed so that the hold icon is lit. There may be. Since the time shown in FIG. 279 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 280 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the present embodiment. 280 (a) to 280 (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 279 (g), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 280 (a) shows a state where the change in the display color of the hold icon a13 has been completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in the color when the display color change is completed until the corresponding hold is digested and erased. Note that the display mode of the hold icon during a special game (for example, during a big hit game) is different from the display mode of the hold icon during a normal game (for example, during probability change, short time, special figure low-precision normal figure low-probability state, etc.). You may make it let. Since the time shown in FIG. 279 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 280 (b) following FIG. 280 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 is turned off and the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. Yes. In this example, the Tonosama's face 705 is erased after the change in the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is completed. It should be noted that the erasure timing of Tonosama's face 705 may be earlier than the change completion timing of the hold icon, may be at the same time, or may be later. In addition, since the Tono-sama's face 705 is deleted, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the round number display, and the big hit type display is improved. Note that the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed across a plurality of rounds.

  Further, the character string “please remove the ball” included in the lower tray full tank error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. The sea portion of the background image displayed on the back of the character string is displayed in dark blue, for example. Since the black character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed so as to overlap the dark blue color, it is difficult to see the character string that is a part of the lower pan full error display 704. Thus, depending on the color of the background image, it may be difficult to see part of the lower pan full error display 704.

  FIG. 280 (c) continuing from FIG. 280 (b) shows a state in which the sixth round of the big hit game has been completed and has entered the interval between rounds. The interval between rounds means a period from the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in one round to the opening of the variable winning opening 234 in the next round of the round in the big hit game. In the interval between rounds, the round number display area 717 is erased and the round number is not displayed. In addition, the lower pan full tank error display 704 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds. In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be continuously displayed in the interval between rounds, may not be displayed in the interval between rounds, and may be displayed again after moving to the next round. In addition, the round number display (for example, 6R) of the round which ended during the interval between rounds may be continuously displayed, and the round number display of the round which starts at the same time as or after the variable winning opening 234 is opened ( For example, 7R) may be displayed. In addition, a round number display (for example, 7R) to be started next may be displayed at the same time as or after closing the variable prize opening 234 (for example, the closing of the variable prize opening 234 in the sixth round).

  FIG. 280 (d) following FIG. 280 (c) shows a state in which the seventh round of jackpot game has started. Since the interval between rounds is over and the seventh round is started, a round number display area 717 is provided and “7R” is displayed.

  FIG. 280 (e) continuing from FIG. 280 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error is released. For example, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the prize ball (game ball) stored in the lower plate 128 to the dollar box, so that the lower plate full tank error is canceled. As a result, the lower pan full error display 704 is erased.

  FIG. 280 (f) continuing from FIG. 280 (e) shows a state immediately before the fifteenth round which is the final round of the jackpot game ends. “15R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the 15th round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 280 (g) continuing from FIG. 280 (f) shows a state where the big hit game is finished. As a result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 2 variable game is successful is a special big hit (special figure A big hit), the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability state (probability changing state) after the big hit game is over. Also, the gaming state at the end of the last special figure 2 variable game is also a special figure high probability state. For this reason, the effect display area 208d expanded over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Continue change probability!” To notify that the gaming state shifts to the special figure high probability state. At the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. Note that the hold icon may be continuously displayed even when the big hit game ends.

  It should be noted that the lower plate full tank error display 704 may be hidden during the round interval. In addition, when a lower pan full tank error occurs, an error notification by voice may be performed together with the lower pan full tank error display 704.

  Further, the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed so as to be repeatedly turned on and off (by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surfaces of the light guide plate 812). Also, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed so as to blink (flashing a plurality of LED lamps). In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may continue to be displayed with a predetermined luminance (a plurality of LED lamps continue to be lit with a predetermined luminance).

  In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed so that the color continuously changes over time, or may be displayed in gradation. Further, when a serious error (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a game shop clerk) occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be deleted. Even if a serious error occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be continuously displayed. When a serious error occurs, the round number display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display. Further, when a serious error occurs, all the displays including the round number display may be hidden, and only a display for notifying that a serious error has occurred may be displayed. Further, even when a serious error occurs, the round number display may be continued.

  In addition, if a power interruption / recovery occurs during a game (during a big hit or during a symbol change) (for example, when an electrical system abnormality such as a power supply voltage drop due to a lightning strike occurs, and then the power is restored), the specified timing The effect display may be hidden until the next round starts during the big hit round, and the next fluctuation starts when the symbols are changing, and a power return display such as “power is being restored” may be displayed. In addition, a message such as “Please launch a ball” may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, it may be displayed that an error has occurred. Further, only serious errors may be displayed. In addition, error display is not performed, and another display means (for example, LED lamp, sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, speaker 120) may be notified that an error has occurred. Good.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means. The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as a first display. The sub display device 808 can display at least the Tonosama face 705 as the second display. At least a part of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state. The first state is a state where at least the Tono-like face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 may be lowered, so that the decorative design display in which an invisible error display is made. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, so that the player's line of sight is more easily visible than the lower plate full tank error display 703. There are cases where it can be directed.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as a first display, a later-described alerting notification effect 722, a right-handed notification effect 724, an attention alert notification effect 750, and an attention alert notification effect. 772 and the first display 790 may be displayed. Further, the sub display device 808 displays, as second displays, pre-read notice notification effects 730 and 740 described later, an electric long long opening effect, an electric long long false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, and a second display 792. It may be displayable.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 280 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and second display means (for example, a sub display device 808 and a light guide plate 812). The first display means includes a first display (for example, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704, an alerting notification effect 722, a right-handed notification effect 724, an attention alert. The notification display 750, the alerting notification display effect 772, the first display 790) can be displayed at least, and the second display means can display a second display (for example, a display display, a lord c1, a villager c5, a lord). Can display at least the face 705, the pre-read notice notification effect 730, 740, the electric-chu long open effect, the electric-chu long open false effect 760, the user level notification effect 775, and the second display 792). And at least a part of the first display is at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state, and the first state is the first state The second display means is in a state where at least the second display is displayed.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be low, the player tries to recognize the notification content by the first display. It may be possible to focus on the means and concentrate the player on the game. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the first display. The second display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the second display. The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display. All or part of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display unit. The first state may be a state in which one or a plurality of displays including the second display are displayed by the second display unit. At least a part of the first display may have at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state. At least a part of the first display may be in a state where visibility is at least low when the second display means is in the first state. The first state may be a state where at least the second display is displayed by the second display means.

  (2) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a display related to a game (for example, lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704), and the second display Is an effect display (for example, an effect display, Tonosama c1, Villager c5, Tonosama's face 705).

  According to this configuration, since the display related to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see due to the effect display displayed on the second display means, the effect display displayed on the second display means May be noticed by the player.

  (3) In the pachinko machine 100, at least part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state. The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display is higher in the second state than in the first state, the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be possible to make it easier for the player to guess that the player is present.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state. Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state. . Part or all of the first display is more visible than the first state when the second display means is in the second state, and more than one or more states different from the first state. Also, the visibility may be low. The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means. The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means.

  (4) In the pachinko machine 100, the first area is provided at least in a position overlapping at least the second area in the first state, and the first area is It is at least a part of the first display means (for example, a display area for displaying a game, an image display area, a frame area 805), and the second area is at least the second display means. It is a part (for example, a display area for displaying an effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, and an outer peripheral portion 812a).

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display unit may be lowered, so that the player can focus on the first display unit and concentrate on the game. There are cases where it is possible. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first area may be only a partial area or the entire area of the first display means. The second area may be only a part or all of the second display means. The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only with the second region in the first state. In the first state, the first region may be one that overlaps with one or more regions including the second region.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is an error display (for example, lower pan full error display 703, 704).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, an effort can be made to make the player recognize the error display so that the player can watch the error display carefully. There are cases where it is possible. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being missed due to the error display being displayed.

  (6) In the pachinko machine 100, the second display means is provided at least in front of the first display means, and the second display is more than the first display. Is also displayed at least on the front side.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, the second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, so that the player can easily focus the second display on the player. . In the first state, the first display may be displayed on the rear side of the second display so that the player can carefully watch the first display.

  The second display means may be provided in front of the first display means. The second display means includes one or a plurality of parts including the first display means (for example, display means, rendering means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate It may be provided in front of the member. The second display means is provided in front of the first display means and is different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, rendering means, movable means, winning a prize) It may be provided behind the means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.

  The second display may be displayed in front of the first display. The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays different from the first and second displays. The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.

  (7) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display relating to a game). The second display means is provided with at least a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying an effect display), and the first display area displays at least the first display. The second display area can display at least the second display, and the third display area overlaps the fourth display area in the first state. The third display area is at least a part of the first display area, and the fourth display area is the second display area. At least partly , Characterized in that.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at the overlapping position, so that the player can display the first display displayed in the first display area. Can be made to look carefully. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display displayed in the second display area.

  The first display means may be provided with only the first display area. The first display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the first display area. The second display means may be provided with only the second display area. The second display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the second display area. The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display. The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.

  The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display. The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display. The third display area may be a part or all of the first display area. The fourth display area may be a part or all of the second display area. A part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with part or all of the fourth display area in the first state.

  (8) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is information more important to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting operation of a store clerk or a player of a game store ( Ball notification, error notification, chance button press request notification, and the like).

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including information having high importance for the player has a lower visibility due to a part of the effect display (second display). In some cases, the player's line of sight can be easily directed to the display means.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display. The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display. The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included. The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

  (9) The pachinko machine 100 includes operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the first display It is characterized by including at least notification for prompting the operation of the operation means.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate and entertain the player on the effect display by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display.

  The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate. The first display may include only a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means. The first display may include one or a plurality of notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with production means (for example, production movable body 806). The production means is at least movable (for example, moved, rotated, vibrated). The production means may be one that performs one or more of movement, rotation, and vibration, or may be capable of performing all of movement, rotation, and vibration. Further, the effect means may be provided with second display means (for example, sub display device 808, light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) does not move. The first display means is fixed. At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

  At least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. For the second display means, a transparent plate or glass plate made of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may not be 0%. The entire second display means may be transparent. Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means may be 100%. Note that at least a part of the first display unit may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display unit. It should be noted that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means. Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%. Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other. Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display means is changed from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance. The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) liquid crystal display device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transmissive. Note that both the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive. Only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive. The third display unit may be the same as the second display unit. Note that the third display means may be installed in a rendering means that is movable (movable, rotatable, vibrated).

  The third display unit may execute an effect that can be executed by the second display unit. The technical matter applied to the second display means can also be applied to the third display means. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with further display means (for example, display means constituted by a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate). Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%. Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (the second display may be transmitted).

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent). Note that the entire second display may be transparent. Only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%. Note that part or all of the first display may be visible through a part of the second display. A part of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display. Note that one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  A part of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display. Note that one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display. Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%. Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value. Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other. Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display has the low transmittance from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  Thereby, the second display can be easily seen, and it may be difficult for the player to miss the second display.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%. Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent). Note that part or all of the transmittance of the first display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent). Only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%. Note that part or all of the second display may be visible through a part of the first display. A part of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display. Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display is the first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%. Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value. Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other. Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing from the low state of the first display to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least difficult to see from the player. The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least invisible from the player. The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area. The second area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area. The first area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first region corresponds to a part of a so-called center accessory. The second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second region corresponds to a decorative portion of the sub display device 808 and the like.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of at least reporting an error. The error notification means includes a decorative lamp (notification by light emission), a speaker (notification by sound), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (characters and patterns appear by light emission), a liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like. There is a first error in which an error is displayed on a display means such as a first display means or a second display means. There is a second error that does not display an error on the display means. The error display is the first error. The first error may be an error that is not easily noticed by the player if no error is displayed (no error notification is given). For example, the first error is a door opening error, a lower pan full error, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for warning the player of fraud. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification to warn the player of fraud when a predetermined sensor detects an external radio wave, magnetism, vibration, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for notifying an amusement shop clerk of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification for notifying the abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a predetermined sensor detects radio waves, magnetism, vibration, and the like from the outside.

  Note that the second error may be an error that is less likely to be resolved immediately. This second error is, for example, a door opening error or a lower pan full error. The second error is an error that is easily noticed by a player without displaying an error (for example, a game ball cannot be fired, an image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize ball is not paid out, or an effect movable body 224. Etc.) may be an error).

  Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error related to an abnormality in the number of game balls to be paid out, a lower pan full tank error (ball removal notification) that is notified when the lower pan is full, an open condition for an attacker or electric chew An abnormal winning error that is notified when a winning of a game ball to an attacker or electric chew is detected when is not established. When fraud is detected by a sensor (for example, magnetism or radio wave), a fraud error is reported as a fraudulent act (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), or vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside. Vibration detection error (vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, (A game state may be left on the display means), a gaming machine failure error for notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error relating to an abnormality of the payout means, an error relating to a poor connection of the board, and a production movable body 224 There are errors related to abnormal stop positions.

  Any of the above errors may be the first error. Any of the above errors may be a second error.

  The above error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or left on the display means in any game state. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store at least a game ball.

  When operated, the operation means is capable of discharging at least the game balls stored in the storage tray. The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray is hidden by the effect display, thereby reducing the visibility of the notification, thereby concentrating the player on the effect display. You may be able to entertain.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes first operating means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes second operation means (for example, a chance button 136). The operation means may be at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means. Note that the operation means may be a chance button. Note that the operation means may be a return button (for example, the return operation button 142). The operation means may be a lending button (for example, a ball lending operation button 140).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable display devices that are movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and capable of vibrating). For example, a liquid crystal display device is used as the movable display device. The visibility of a part of the first display may be lowered when one of the plurality of movable display devices moves. When one of the plurality of movable display devices moves, the overall visibility of the first display may be lowered. The visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered by moving the plurality of movable display devices. By moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered. One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

  At least a part of the display area of the movable display device is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the movable display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

  Further, at least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. For the movable display device, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%. Note that the entire movable display device may be transparent. Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%. Note that at least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device. Note that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device. Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%. Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may be changed in a stepwise manner. This stepwise change means that the transmittance is a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other. Note that the transmittance of the movable display device may be changed from a low state to a high state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are respectively displayed, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  The display related to the game includes, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power-on display (power supply display) Or during power recovery).

  An operation means (launch strength changing operation means) capable of changing at least the launch intensity of the game ball during the 134 operation of the ball launch handle by the player may be provided. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed so as to increase only when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed to become stronger based on the operation of the launch intensity changing operation unit once. In this case, when the firing strength changing operation means is further operated once, the launching strength of the game ball may be restored.

  As an example of the first display, a display capable of notifying that the firing intensity changing operation means is operated, a display prompting the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means, and prompting the release of the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, pressing Display that prompts you to release your hand from the launch intensity changing operation means, and a display that reminds you of the operation of the launch intensity changing operation means (for example, an image that reminds you of the launch intensity changing operation means in the roulette effect of the electric tulong opening effect (for example, In the case of playing a big hit game by right-handed, the notice display of the big hit decision of the special figure variable game being executed is stopped).

  The display relating to the firing strength changing operation means may have different display modes according to a plurality of gaming states (for example, during electric support and during non-electric support). In this case, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one gaming state (during electric support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-electrical state) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “supporting” may not be hidden by the second display. Further, for example, at least a part of the display regarding the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during electric support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-display) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “electric support” may be hidden by the second display.

  The display related to the firing intensity changing operation means may be a display mode different from a right-handed notification (for example, a right-handed notification effect 724 described later), may be a display mode included in the right-handed notification, The display mode may be the same as that for the hit notification.

In addition, the display regarding a right-handed alert | report and a firing intensity change operation means may partially overlap the displayed period. For example, the period of notification that “Please return the handle to the left” at the end of the electric support is the period from the end of the electric support to the end of the 4th special figure variation game. For example, the period in which “Please let go” is informed from the end of the electric support to the end of the first special figure variation game.
<< Eighth Embodiment >>

  Next, a game machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 289. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  First, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 281 (a) and FIG. 281 (b) show display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 281 (a), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 281, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is represented by a downward bold arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol and a special symbol hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 281 (a), a lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed, and it is notified that a lower pan full tank error has occurred. Further, in this example, the game ball in the ball tank 150 is lost or the ball shortage error occurs when the number of game balls in the ball tank 150 becomes less than the predetermined number, together with the lower plate full tank error. This ball shortage error may occur, for example, when a game ball is clogged in an island facility where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Further, the lower plate full tank error can be canceled by the player operating the ball discharge lever 132, but the ball shortage error is an error that can be canceled only by a game store clerk in a game store. For this reason, a ball shortage error display 706 including a character string “Please call a clerk shortage clerk” is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a ball shortage error has occurred. In addition, the player is informed that an operation by the store clerk of the game store is necessary to cancel the ball shortage error.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 281 (a), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached, and an image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow pointing to the image are displayed below the ball shortage error display 706. Including a chance button operation request display 707 prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. Also, below the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a tutorial display 708 including a character image of a girl (princess Chibi) and a speech balloon image of a girl “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed. Has been. In the tutorial display, explanations of effects executed during the game are given. The tutorial display 708 in this example suggests that if a reach is executed among a plurality of reach effects provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example, the reach effect may be developed later. .

  FIG. 281 (b) shows a state after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed once) by the player from the state shown in FIG. 281 (a). Based on the operation of the chance button 136, a tutorial display 709 including a character image of a spear and a speech balloon image of a spear “The appearance of a spear is a chance up” is displayed. This suggests that an effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed in the special figure variation game being executed. Further, the tutorial display 709 is displayed on a layer in front of the lower dish full error display 704. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the lower pan full error display 704. For this reason, at least a part of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is hidden by the tutorial display 709, and the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is lowered. On the other hand, the tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap with the insufficient sphere error display 706. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the sphere shortage error display 706 does not deteriorate. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure hold number display area 208f. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the fourth symbol and the special figure reservation number display does not decrease.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 281 (c) to 281 (e) will be described. FIG. 281 (c) shows a display example on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 281 (c), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, since a lower plate full tank error has occurred, a lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 281 (e), the background displayed in the back layer of the lower pan full tank error display 704 is white. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively high.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 281 (d), during the execution of the special figure variable game, an effect is started in which Tono-sama and Panda confront each other in space. In the effect display area 208d, an image of Tono-sama holding a sword, an image of a panda wearing boxing gloves, and a background image of the universe as a confrontation place are displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed, for example, on a layer in front of the Tono-sama image. Also, the lower space full error display 704 and the outer space portion of the background image displayed on the back layer of the Tono-sama image are displayed in gray close to black. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively lowered. In addition, the visibility of the decorative symbol and the special figure reservation number display is similarly lowered. On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 281 (d) is started, the outline portion of the fourth symbol displayed in black circles in FIG. 281 (c) is displayed in white. For this reason, even if the effect shown in FIG. 281 (d) is started, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the fourth symbol and to understand that the special figure variable game is being executed. Note that the outline of the fourth symbol may always be displayed in white. That is, the fourth symbol may be easily visible in any state.

  Also, FIG. 281 (e) shows that after the player notices the lower plate full tank error display 704 shown in FIG. 281 (c) and operates the ball discharge lever to release the lower plate full tank error, This shows a state in which an effect of confronting is started. Since the lower plate full tank error is cancelled, the lower plate full tank error display 704 is erased. In addition, when FIG. 281 (d) is compared with FIG. 281 (e), the visibility of the Tono-sama image is higher in FIG. 281 (e). Thus, the visibility of the effect display (for example, a character image of Tono-sama, etc.) can be made higher when an error (for example, lower pan full error) has not occurred than when the error has occurred.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 281 (f) and 281 (g) will be described. As shown in FIG. 281 (f), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  Further, a tutorial display 708 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The tutorial display 708 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative design. For this reason, at least a part of the decorative design is hidden in the tutorial display 708 and the visibility is lowered.

  FIG. 281 (g) shows a state in which the shielding means 816 is moving upward in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure variable game. . In the drawing, an upward arrow shown at the lower left of the shielding unit 816 indicates the moving direction of the shielding unit 816. The shielding unit 816 can shield the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by moving to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the shielding unit 816, for example, the above-described effect movable bodies 800, 802, 804, 806, and the like can be given.

  In this example, when the shielding means 816 and the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, the variable icon display area 700, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 disappear. , All pending icons are erased. The tutorial display 708 is also deleted. In addition, when the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be deleted. In addition, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 move, for example, to the upper left of the screen. Thereby, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c do not overlap with the shielding means 816 and are not shielded. In this way, the decorative design is not hidden during the performance with the movement of the shielding means 816.

  It should be noted that a hold icon or a variation icon may be displayed at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816. Further, during the movement of the shielding means 816, an effect image or the like may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, at least a part of the effect image may be hidden by the shielding unit 816. Further, at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816, the special figure holding number display area 208f may disappear and the special figure holding number may be deleted, or the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only the fourth symbol. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can at least display, for example, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as the first display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a tutorial display 709 as a second display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a sphere shortage error display 706 as a third display.

  At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state in which at least the tutorial display 709 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

The ball shortage error display 706 is displayed at least at a position where visibility is at least higher than the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state. ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 may be lowered, the decorative symbol display device tries to recognize the notification content of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704. In some cases, the player can be focused on 208 so that the player can concentrate on the game. In addition, since the visibility of the lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be directed to the tutorial display 709. is there. In addition, since the ball shortage error display 706 is easy to check even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to check the ball shortage error display 706 while viewing the tutorial display 709.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 287. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 capable of executing a plurality of notification effects such as an alerting notification effect, an electric-chu long opening effect (details will be described later), or a prefetch notification effect. . FIG. 282 is a table for explaining an alert notification (first display) that can be displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The alerting notice is a notice that alerts the player about matters that are not directly related to the profit of the game. The game profit includes a prize ball awarded as a profit to the player and information related thereto. Since the contents of the alert notification do not directly affect the profit of the game, there is no effect on the profit of the game even if the player ignores the alert alert or does not follow the alert alert. However, the alert notification includes, for example, physical, mental, or monetary matters that may affect the player's profit other than the game profit.

  Note that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be a medal, for example. Also, it is not always necessary to give a player a real ball, medal, etc., for example, first, a profit is electronically given to the player, and the player uses the electronic profit for a game, It may be converted into a prize ball. Of course, the player may not be provided with the real thing, and the player may be able to exchange electronic profits for prizes.

  Further, the profit related to the game may be defined as that the profit can be used to play the game again on the game machine. In other words, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the profit cannot be used again on the game stand using the profit.

  The table shown in FIG. 282 exemplifies nine alerting notifications (notifications not related at least to the profits of the game). In FIG. 282, the notification content and the notification timing are shown together with the name of each alerting notification.

  The alert notification with the name “age restriction” has the notification content “games under 18 years of age and admission to the playground are regulated by law”, and the notification timing is “during demonstration”. . That is, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variable game is inactive and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the "age restriction" alert notification is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that even if the game profit is obtained, the exchange to the prize is not permitted.

  The alert notification with the name “Capture Method” has the notification content “Beware of Vicious Strategy Sales” and the notification timing is “Demo”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alerting notification of the “strategy method” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that may pay money for useless information.

  The alert notification with the name “game time” is the notification content “If you play for a long time, please put a break moderately.”, The notification timing is “During Demonstration / 2 hours after game start It is. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “game time” is not followed, there are physical disadvantages such as a decrease in the player's physical function and fatigue due to a long game.

  The alert notification with the name “Direction” is the notification content “Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Be careful not to pinch your fingers etc. in the stage device. Please enjoy the game with appropriate volume and light intensity. The notification timing is “during demo / volume and light amount adjustment”. Disadvantages for players who fail to follow the cautionary alerts for `` directing '' include physical disadvantages such as decreased hearing due to high volume games and light-sensitive seizures caused by lighting or blinking of high-intensity lamps. is there.

  The alert notification with the name “Secondary use restriction” is the notification content is “Prohibit uploading of photos, videos, etc. to the Internet on this game machine”, and the notification timing is “During Demonstration / At the time of production execution” It is. Disadvantages of players who fail to comply with the “secondary use restriction” alerts include monetary and social status disadvantages such as fines and imprisonment for violation of laws and regulations.

  The alert notification with the name “investment deterrence” is “Notice of excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a fun game to enjoy moderately”. The predetermined rotation speed has elapsed. A player's disadvantage caused by not following the “investment deterrence” alert notification is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

  The alert notification with the name “prevention of forgetting to pick up” is the notification content “Please be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft.”, And the notification timing is “at the end of jackpot / at the end of power support state”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “prevention of forgetting” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the balance in the prepaid card that has been forgotten.

  In addition, you may perform the alerting alerting | reporting of the said "forgetting prevention" at timings other than the above-mentioned timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurred in the normal gaming state, a “not forgetting” warning alert is notified, and at the end of the big hit in the villa that occurred with the big hit, It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, if the jackpot is less profitable than other jackpots, or if the jackpot is not profitable, a “forget-to-forget” warning alert is reported. It does not have to be done. In the first place, if a player forgets to take a prepaid card, there is a prepaid card in which the player's consciousness is added to the profit when the profit is given with the remaining balance on the prepaid card. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” warning is issued immediately after the player has been given a profit, and the player forgets the presence of the prepaid card. It is desirable to be notified after the benefits are granted. Furthermore, the trigger for the “forget-to-forget” warning alert is most effective when the player quits the game. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” attention alert notification is notified at a timing when a state advantageous to the player ends such as at the end of ST in FIG.

  In addition, a warning notification of “forgetting to miss” may be notified at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change). In addition, "prevent forgetting" at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state in the special figure high probability state (probability change) You may alert | report alerting alerting | reporting. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert.

  The alert alert with the name “Prevention of damage” is the notification content “Don't operate the operation means with a strong force because there is a risk of damage.” The notification timing is “During demonstration / during performance” is there. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the warning notification of “breakage prevention” is not followed, there is a physical disadvantage of being injured due to damage to the operation means.

  The alert notification whose name is “Prevent forgetting to take” is “The user mode is being set. Be careful not to forget to take a 2D barcode at the end of the game.” “User mode is being set (always)”. There is a gaming disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are lost as a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “Preventing forgetting to take” is not followed. However, it is not a game penalty related to money.

  Note that the notification timing of the above alerting notification does not necessarily have to be executed at the above timing. Moreover, it may be performed at timings other than the notification timing described above. In addition, the above alerting notification is merely an example, and other alerting notifications other than those described above may be executed.

  Further, the alerting notification (notification that is not at least related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the illustrated example, and if the player does not follow the notified contents, the player may have a disadvantage different from the game profit. It only has to be generated.

  FIG. 283 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. A display example of a notification effect is shown. Each of FIGS. 283 (a) to (l) and FIGS. 284 to 287, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 249, the decorative symbol display device 208, the universal diagram display device 210, and the special diagram 1 A display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, an ordinary figure hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a variable winning opening 234 (hereinafter referred to as "large board behavior attacker 234") Are extracted). For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to.

  The normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, the ease of entering the normal symbol start port 228, special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232 (open state), variable winning port 234 (open state), etc., falls down the right path. The game ball that is to be played differs from the game ball that is to be dropped on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arrange | positioned on the right path | route. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, the special FIG. 1 starting port 230 is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling down the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. Moreover, you may further provide a usual figure start port in the left side path | route. In addition, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is arranged at the lower center of the game board, and it is easy to enter the special figure 2 starting port 230 with a game ball falling on the right path and a game ball falling on the left path. May be the same.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (a), all the common figure hold lamps 216 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no usual figure hold. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, one LED on the left side is lit and the other three are turned off, and it is informed that there is one holding in the special figure 2. Further, special figure A is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit.

  In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. A change icon display area 711 is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern is displayed. Has been. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711, a special figure holding display area 713 for displaying the holding of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is arranged, and “8”, “dai”, “general”, “military” are displayed in a circular pattern. One hold icon 713a having the same pattern as the variation icon, in which characters are evenly arranged, is displayed, and it is notified that there is one hold in FIG. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (b) following FIG. 283 (a), the big hit game start effect is executed. In the big hit game start effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbols are not stopped, and the variable icon display area 711 and the special figure hold display area 713 are also displayed. It disappears and no change icon or hold icon is displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a jackpot game start effect 715 is displayed with a character string of “big board big hit”. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (c) following FIG. 283 (b), the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. The upper left of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the big hit game in the first round is being executed. Is informed. The top right of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds).

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (d) following FIG. 283 (c), the 15th round (15R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. In the round number display area 717, “15R” is displayed to notify that the big hit game of the 15th round is being executed. In the jackpot type display area 718, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the jackpot is a 15R special jackpot. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). In addition, two usual figure hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that two usual figure holds are increased during the big hit game. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (e) following FIG. 283 (d), the big hit game end effect is executed. In the big hit game end effect, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the probability change notification effect 720 by the character image including the character string of “probability change entry!” Is displayed. The probability change notification effect 720 notifies that the game state after the big hit game is in a probability change state. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (f) following FIG. 283 (e), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 is ended, and the attention alert notification effect 722 for performing the alert notification of “preventing forgetting to take” is started. In the alert notification effect 722, an animation in which the IC card emerges along the arrow from the IC card insertion slot is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. From the upper right end of the effect display area 208d, “Forget IC card” is displayed. An animation in which the character string “N” appears in sequence toward the left is displayed, and an animation in which the character string “Please note” appears in reverse order from the lower left end of the effect display area 208d is displayed. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (g) following FIG. 283 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 for alerting “forgetting prevention” is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Moreover, the general map display device 210 has started a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (h) following FIG. 283 (g), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (i) following FIG. 283 (h), the “notice to forget” alerting notification effect 722 has ended, and the special figure 2 variable game in FIG. 283 (a) has ended. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed again, and the state immediately before the start of the next special figure 2 variable game is displayed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  The state shown in FIG. 283 (j) following FIG. 283 (i) shows a state immediately after the special figure 2 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 283 (j), the leftmost LED lamp of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is extinguished, and the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the fluctuation display of special figure 2. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the special figure hold display area 713, display of a hold reduction animation for reducing the number of hold icons 713a by 1 is started. In this example, the hold decrease animation moves the hold icon 713a in the special figure hold display area 713 to the left as a whole and moves it to the variable icon display area 711. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that the hold in the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED lamp.

  In addition, since the most recent big hit was a special figure A big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to the electric support state (ordinary high probability state). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the general-purpose starting port 228 and the special-purpose starting port 232 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, when the gaming state is the electric support state, the player hits the game ball with a right hand and plays a game. For this reason, a right-handed notification effect 724 is started at the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d in order to notify the player that the player should make a right-hand shot. In the right-handed notification effect 724, an animation is displayed in which a white character string “⇒Right-handed⇒⇒” moves in the reverse order toward the right from the upper left end of the effect display area 208d to a black belt-like telop. From the lower right end of the area 208d, an animation is displayed in which a black character string “⇒Right type⇒⇒” sequentially moves toward the left on a black belt-like telop. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (k) following FIG. 283 (j), the start state of the special figure 2 variable game is continuously shown, and the hold reduction animation is being executed. The hold icon 713a shows a state where the hold icon 713a has moved further in the direction of the variable icon display area 711 than the state shown in FIG. 283 (j). The right-handed notification effect 724 is continuously executed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 283 (l) following FIG. 283 (k), the state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is continuously shown. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display region 711 on the lower left side in the effect display region 208d to notify that the special figure variation game is currently being executed. It is informed that there is no hold icon in the special figure hold display area 713 on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711 and there is no hold in the special figure 2. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 executes the variable game of the special figure 2. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game. In addition, in the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d, in order to inform the player that a right stroke should be made, a black belt-like telop is displayed in white letters from the left end to the right end as “right”, “hit”, “ The right-handed notification effect 724 is executed with an animation in which the character strings of “C”, “⇒”, or “⇒⇒” are sequentially moved.

  The states shown in FIGS. 283 (e) to 283 (h) are jackpot end intervals, which are periods during which the special figure variable game is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is not operated. During the jackpot ending interval, the special figure variable game and the variable prize opening 234 are in the game because the normal figure variable game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the player has passed the normal figure start port 228 can be operated. Since the opening / closing operation is inactive, it can be said that it is a period in which the significance of launching a game ball is less than in other periods.

  FIG. 284 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where neither the special figure variable game nor the big hit game is executed. Example 3-2 of the notification effect is shown. Since the states shown in FIGS. 284 (a) to (e) are the same as those in FIGS. 284 (a) to (e), description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the period of FIGS. 284 (f) to 284 (i) is the same as that of FIGS. 283 (f) to (h). In the state shown in FIG. 284 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 similar to that shown in FIG. 283 (e) is completed, and the alert notification for “not forgetting prevention” attention similar to FIG. 283 (f) is issued. Production 722 has started. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  FIG. 284 (f) further shows a state in which the effect of the pre-reading notice is started based on the result of pre-determining the stop symbol by pre-reading the suspension of special figure 2 in the special figure pre-reading process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is not operating and when the large board behavior attacker 234 is not operating ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the prefetch notice notification effect 730 shown in FIG. 284 (f), an image representing a family crest is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d so as to hide the alert notification effect 722. However, in FIG. 284 (f), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is set to be relatively high, and the player can visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 284 (g), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 gradually decreases, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. Become. By doing so, the player pays attention to the alerting notice effect 722 at first, but gradually pays attention to the prefetch notice notice effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 284 (h), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is 0%, and the player cannot visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. . In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 284, the alerting notice for preventing the IC card from being forgotten is hidden by the prefetching notice notice executed based on the pending prefetching result in FIG. Note that the pre-reading notice notification need not be a big hit confirmation, and visual recognition of the alerting notice may be hindered by executing a false prefetching notice notice.

  In FIG. 284 (i) following FIG. 284 (h), the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 is finished, and the “not forgetting prevention” alerting notification effect 722 hidden in the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. Shows the state. FIG. 284 (j) following FIG. 284 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 284 (k), special figure A is stopped on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game of this time was a 15R special big hit. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. Moreover, all the LEDs of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lit, and it is notified that there are four special figure 2 holds. Also, in the special figure hold display area 713, hold icons 713b, 713c, 713d, and 713e of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern are displayed, respectively. Has been. When the special figure variable game is ended and a big hit is made, the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden. Further, only one of the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden when the big hit.

  In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications. Further, since the alerting notification is not related to the profit of the game (the number of game balls), even if it is hidden by another notification, it does not affect the profit of the game in which the player is most interested in the game.

  FIG. 285 shows various states in which the special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big hit game is executed, or the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-3 of the notification effect is shown. Since FIGS. 285 (a) to (k) are the same as FIGS. 284 (a) to (k) except that the effect of the pre-reading notice is different, description of the same parts is omitted.

  In FIGS. 285 (f) to (h), the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and instead of the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 shown in FIGS. 284 (f) to (h), the effect display area. A state is shown in which a prefetch notice notification effect 740 is displayed in which the entire 208d is displayed in black and a white character string is displayed to notify the prefetch notice. The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is inactive and the large board behavior attacker 234 is inactive ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the pre-read notice notification effect 730, the effect display area 208d is painted black, so that even if the alert notification effect 722 is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the alert image. It can be said that the pre-reading notice notification effect 740 is performed instead of the alerting notification effect 722. It should be noted that the effect execution times of the alerting notification effect 722 and the prefetch notice notification effect 740 may be the same or different.

  Thus, the other alerting effects (for example, the prefetch notification effect) may be executed, so that the alerting alert effect need not be executed at all. Moreover, you may switch an alerting alerting | reporting effect to another alerting | reporting aspect by performing another effect. For example, the notification mode of the alerting notification that has been performed by the image display and the voice notification may be switched to only the voice notification, or may be changed to a notification mode that is completely different from the notification mode that should have been originally performed. .

  In FIG. 285 (i) following FIG. 285 (h), the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 is finished, and the “not forgetting prevention” alerting notification effect 722 hidden in the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. Shows the state. In this way, it may be configured such that a part of the execution period of the alerting notification effect 722 is hidden by the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 and the alerting notification effect 722 can be confirmed during the remaining period.

  FIG. 286 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-4 of the notification effect is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 286 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special game 1 is executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, a variation display of a decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing) in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially moves from top to bottom is executed. . A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 711 to notify that the special figure 1 variation game is currently being executed. In the special figure hold display area 713, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the state shown in FIG. 286 (b) following FIG. 286 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general figure hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two hold of the normal figure. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the result of the variable game of the special figure 1 is out of date. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 6—decoration 1—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of this special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Has been. In the variation icon display area 711, no variation icon is displayed, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is inactive. In the special figure hold display area 7, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figure 2.

  FIG. 286 (c) shows a state during the demonstration performance period in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 286 (b). The demonstration effect including the alerting notice is executed based on the passage of a predetermined time from the stoppage of the special figure. Further, the demonstration effect including the alerting notification is executed even while the usual figure is changing. During the demonstration effect period, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed, and neither the variable icon display area 711 nor the special figure hold display area 713 is displayed. During the demonstration production period, the character string “menu call by chance button” is displayed together with the image of the chance button 136 in the lower stage of the production display area 208d, and it is notified that various menus can be called by the player pressing the chance button 136. Has been. In FIG. 286 (c), an alerting notification effect 750 for alerting the “age restriction” shown in FIG. 282 is executed. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  FIG. 286 (d) following FIG. 286 (c) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “age restriction” shown in FIG. ing. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In addition, an electric-chu-long opening effect area is arranged on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. In this example, it is assumed that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful is that the stop symbol is a normal figure B (out of line). During the demonstration period, the execution of the electric Chu long opening effect is not regulated. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a general-purpose variable game during non-temporary time (during non-electric support). It is an effect that tells whether or not to open for a long time (for example, about 5 seconds) and / or open several times (hereinafter sometimes referred to as long opening). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  In this example, there is a deviation in the hit determination of the common figure variable game, but in the lottery process executed by the first sub-control unit 400, the special figure 2 starting port (electric Chu) 232 may be opened long. The electric-chu-long opening false effect 760 is executed in the electric-chu-long opening false effect area. As an electric Chu-long opening false effect 760, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance lottery in progress”. A roaring effect that causes the player to expect that 232 may be released for a long time is being executed.

  The notice condition of the notice change notification (second display) of the result of the ordinary figure floating game by the electric-chu-long opening effect is that the alerting notice effect 750 (first display) is being executed and the special figure change game is not displayed. In addition to being in operation and being not in operation (maintaining the closed state) of the attacker 234, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the stop pattern of the usual figure variable game is shown in FIG. In the case of (missing), it is to win the execution of the electric tulong opening false effect.

  As shown in FIG. 286 (d), a part of the alert notification effect 750 is hidden by the electric tulong opening false effect 760, making it difficult for the player to confirm the part. The alerting notification effect 750 includes a portion that overlaps the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the first display portion and a portion that does not overlap the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the second display portion. For this reason, even if the alerting notification effect 750 and the electric long open false effect 760 are simultaneously executed, at least a part of the alerting notification effect 750 can be recognized by the player. By causing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the alerting notification, the electric tulong opening false effect 760 can attract more attention of the player. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.

  FIG. 286 (e) following FIG. 286 (d) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “Strategy” shown in FIG. 282 to “Production” during the demonstration effect period. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 stops the general map B and notifies that the general map variable game is out of play. In addition, the electric Chulong opening false effect 760 is displayed with the word “unfortunate” along with the indication of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened because the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place. Notify

  FIG. 286 (f) following FIG. 286 (e) shows a state where the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “production” shown in FIG. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 286 (f), the left one of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 is lit, and it is notified that there is one general-purpose hold. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210.

  FIG. 286 (g) following FIG. 286 (f) shows a user menu effect 770 in which the player presses the chance button 136 to display a menu image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. Note that the general map display device 210 is executing a general map variable game. When the user menu effect 770 is started, the demonstration effect is stopped and the alerting notification effect 750 is also ended. By doing so, it is possible to hide the alert notification made during the demonstration production by an operation by the player. When the display of the user menu is started based on the fact that the player has operated the chance button 136, the demonstration effect that has been executed is canceled, so that the player who thinks that the alerting notification is unnecessary is required to perform the demonstration effect. Can be canceled arbitrarily.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a setting operation unit that can be operated by the player. For example, the setting operation unit is disposed in the vicinity of the chance button 136 of the door 108 with a ball storage tray. The setting operation unit is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button positioned to the right of the confirm button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. . In addition, the setting operation unit includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 249) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  In FIG. 286 (h) following FIG. 286 (g), the player operates the button on the setting operation unit to move the pointer to the “END” icon displayed on the menu image, and the user menu effect 770 is ended. The state which is going to be shown.

  FIG. 286 (i) following FIG. 286 (h) shows a state after the user menu effect 770 has ended. The left two of the four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two pending figures. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the display similar to the state shown in FIG. 286 (b). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the state shown in FIG. 286 (i), the demonstration effect is executed again. The contents of the demonstration effect at this time may be started from the beginning or may be continuously executed from the interrupted position.

  FIG. 287 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where neither the special figure variable game nor the big hit game is executed. Example 3-5 of the notification effect is shown.

  FIG. 287 (a) shows a state in which the user menu effect 770 is being executed. In the upper stage of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which the character string “menu” is arranged in the center is displayed. On the left side of the screen, from top to bottom, there are six icons with “member registration”, “password input”, “barcode issuance”, “data clear”, “volume / light quantity adjustment”, and “end”. Are lined up. Of the six icons, “bar code issuance” and “data clear” can be selected after the password is input, and are displayed at low brightness indicating that selection is not possible at this time. On the right side of the six icons, a hand-shaped pointer indicating a selectable icon is arranged. In FIG. 287 (a), the pointer is positioned on the right side of the “password input” icon. A character image of “画面” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon, and an alert notification effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is given to the player. It is running.

  In FIG. 287 (b) following FIG. 287 (a), the player operates the button of the setting operation unit, positions the pointer on the “password input” icon displayed on the menu image, and confirms the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing the button, the password input screen is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which a character string “password input” is arranged in the center is displayed. An input area for inputting a 4-digit number is displayed on the left side of the screen. In the input area, “15” is already entered in the upper two digits. “**” indicating no input is displayed in the lower two digits. A numeric keypad is displayed on the right side of the screen, indicating that the pointer is at the position “5”.

  FIG. 287 (c) following FIG. 287 (b) shows that the player places the pointer on the “OK” icon on the numeric keypad and presses the confirm button on the setting operation unit. Is displayed.

  FIG. 287 (d) following FIG. 287 (c) shows a state in which “bar code issuance” and “data clear” become high in brightness and can be selected as a result of accepting the password input. In addition, a character image of “爺” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon. 772 is being executed. Also, a user level notification effect 775 is executed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the player's current arrival level is 250 and the title in the game is “General”. The user level notification effect 775 is also a warning notification that causes the player to confirm the user level and to be aware that the user mode is being set. As shown in FIG. 287 (d), the user level notification effect 775 hides a part of the alert notification effect 772 related to the operation explanation, and the player cannot visually recognize a part of the alert notification effect 772. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.

  FIG. 287 (d) shows a state in which the player is about to end the user menu effect 770 by operating the button on the setting operation unit to move the pointer to the “end” icon displayed on the menu image. Show.

  In FIG. 287 (e) following FIG. 287 (d), the player operates the button on the setting operation unit, positions the pointer on the “end” icon displayed on the menu image, and confirms the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing, a state transitioned from the user menu image is shown. In the effect display area 208d shown in FIG. 287 (e), a character image of “爺” is displayed together with the user level notification effect 775, and “Let's be careful not to forget to take the two-dimensional barcode at the end of the game” in the balloon. A character string "" is displayed, and a warning alerting effect 780 regarding the operation explanation is executed for the player. As shown in FIG. 287 (e), the user level notification effect 775 partially hides the alert notification effect 780 related to the operation explanation. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm a part of the alerting notification effect 780. In this way, while attracting the player's attention by the alerting notification, concealing the alerting notification by other alerts in a state where attention has been gathered, the player can be focused on other alerts. In addition, since the user mode is arbitrarily set by the player, it can be considered that the alerting notification effect 780 itself relating to the operation explanation for the player has been executed arbitrarily by the player. In the present embodiment, the alert notification effect 780 executed arbitrarily by the player is intentionally hidden by the user level notification effect 775.

  FIG. 287 (f) following FIG. 287 (e) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 and a special figure 1 variable game has started. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the effect 780 for notifying the operation explanation is ended and hidden, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are set in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The user level notification effect 775 is also executed during the special figure variable game, and also functions as a warning notification that alerts the player that the user mode is being set. The user level notification effect 775 is always executed while the user mode is set. The user level notification effect 775 allows the player to always receive a warning during the setting of the user mode that the user mode is being set and that the issue of the two-dimensional bar code should not be forgotten. it can.

  Note that it may be possible for the player to set whether or not to execute the alert notification, the execution timing, and the like. For example, the time may be set, and at least a part of the notification executed when an alarm function for notifying the player that the set time has been activated may be hidden by another notification.

  The user mode can be arbitrarily set by the player. During the user mode setting, a player may be given a profit different from the game profit. For example, special points are given, customizing functions are provided, special images and sounds can be selected, special titles are given, mission achievement lists can be viewed, games, etc. There is an advantage that cumulative data can be referred to. While the user mode is being set, the user level notification effect 775 that alerts the user mode to be set and the game data of this time will not be reflected unless a special operation is performed at the end of the user mode. A warning alerting effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is performed.

  Alert notification (for example, alert notification effect 772) regarding data that is very important for one player and not at all important for another player is provided by another alert (for example, user level notification effect 775). By inhibiting, it is possible to give different impressions depending on how the player perceives. Thus, when the other notification is performed, only a specific player can be focused on the other notification.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described with reference to FIG. First, an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 (a) to (f).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (a), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed at a predetermined interval. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display 790, as shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (a). Thus, by displaying the second display 792 on the front surface of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 792. It may be less visible than the display 792 and the second display 792 may be easier to see than the first display 790. In addition, when the display is switched from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (a) to the state shown on the right side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the first display 790 is stopped while the first display 790 is stopped. It may be easier to see than the second display 792.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (a) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. Further, when the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (a) to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may gradually move away from the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moved so as to overlap the second display 792, the first display 790 that is moving is less visible than the second display 792 that is stopped. When the display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the moving first display 790 may be easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (b), the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, for example, based on pressing of the chance button 136, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be darker as shown on the right side of FIG. 2514 (b). Thereby, when the display color of the second display 792 is changing, the second display 792 whose display color is changing is easier to see than the first display 790 where nothing is changing, After the change of the display color is completed, the second display 792 displayed on the back side of the first display 790 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (b) to the state shown on the left side. Thus, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed so as to be thin while the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped with each other, the second display 792 is superimposed on the front surface. In some cases, the first display 790 can be made easier to see and the second display 792 can be made harder to see.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (c), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the interval between the first display 790 and the second display 792 becomes D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (c). Become. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (c) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it easy to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Also, when switching from the state shown on the left side to the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (c) or from the state shown on the right side to the state shown on the left side, focus attention on the moving display. Of the first display 790 and the second display 792, the display that is moved may be easier to see than the display that is not moved.

  Also, as shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (d), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. For example, based on pressing of the chance button 136, as shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (d), the front-rear relationship between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed, The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. In this way, the second display 792 displayed on the back surface of the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the first display 790 so that the second display 792 is easier to see than the first display 790. The first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (d) to the state shown on the left side. By displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back surface of the second display 792 on the front surface of the second display 792, the first display 790 is made easier to see than the second display 792, and the second display 792 is displayed. The display 792 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped. When the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, the first display 790 is displayed on the right side of FIG. 288 (e) based on, for example, pressing the chance button 136. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed, so that the state in which the first display 790 is easier to see than the second display 792 can be maintained. There is a case.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (e) to the state shown on the left side. As described above, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed to make both the first display 790 and the second display 792 bright. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a state that is easier to see than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include a decorative design, a hold icon, a variation icon, a presentation display such as a character image or a background image, an error display, an operation request notification display, a tutorial display, and the like. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, error display and decorative symbol display), or the same type of display (for example, three decorative symbols). Or two of the hold icons). In addition, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a part or only a part of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . Thereby, one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be less visible (easy to see) than the other.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 288 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. It has become. As described above, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink color close to white is relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black. Becomes relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 288 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left side of FIG. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790 displayed in a light ink color close to white is relatively easy to see, and the second display 792 displayed in a gray close to black is relatively It becomes difficult to see. As described above, even when the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may change due to the change of the background color. is there.

  FIGS. 288 (a) to (f) show examples in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes. However, the display is not related to the change in visibility (for example, , A third indication) may be present. For example, when display A, display B, and display C are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, display A corresponds to the first display 790 and display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be. In this case, the visibility of the display C may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display A may be maintained while the visibility of display B and display C is changed. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display B may be maintained while changing the visibility of display C and display A.

  FIGS. 288 (a) to 288 (f) show an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes. However, there are three displays related to the change in visibility. There may be more than one. For example, display A and display B may correspond to the first display 790, and display C may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and B may correspond to the second display 792. Thereby, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 288 (g), the background color of the hold icon display area 794 displaying the hold icons a1 to a4 is different from other background colors, and the hold icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes. When the display shown in FIGS. 288 (a) to 288 (e) is switched in the hold icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display changes in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, it is possible to keep the area to be held only within the hold icon display area 794.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of two displays changes depending on the brightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 289 shows a color chart when the gradation levels of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation value and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example will be described in which the gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed overlapping the circular image are changed. The circular image and the square image are displayed so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the square coincide with each other. Further, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. In addition, the circular image is displayed on a layer in front of the square image. Further, the transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 289, the R value, G value, and B value of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and the R value, G value, and B value of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are made the same, and the gradation values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255. Similarly, the R value, G value, and B value of the square image are made the same, and the gradation values of the respective colors are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255.

  For example, as shown in the first row and first column of FIG. 289, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), since the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, they cannot be recognized separately. Also, as shown in the eighth row and the eighth column in FIG. 289, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, so that they cannot be distinguished and recognized. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row and first column of FIG. 289, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white, and the square image is displayed in black. Also, as shown in the first row and the eighth column of FIG. 289, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black, and the square image is displayed in white. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  In this way, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, if the difference in brightness between the two images is the same or small, it becomes difficult to identify the two images and the visibility of the two images is also reduced. be able to. Further, if the brightness difference between the two images is increased, the two images can be easily identified and the visibility of the two images can be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the brightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer of the two images displayed in a superimposed manner It is effective to put on. Further, in order to improve the visibility of the player's display, a hue difference or a saturation difference may be given to the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer. However, even if the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the previous layer are different in hue, the visibility of the two images decreases if the lightness and saturation are substantially the same. . For this reason, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to make a difference in brightness between the two images.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 289 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means is a first display (for example, a lower plate full tank error display). (Ball removal notification) 704, attention alert notification effect 722, right-handed notification effect 724, attention alert notification effect 750, attention alert notification effect 772, first display 790) can be displayed, and the display means includes: , A second display (for example, an effect display, a tutorial display 709, a pre-read notice notification effect 730, 740, an electric-chu-long opening false effect 760, an electric-chu-long opening false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, a second display 792). The display means can display at least a third display (for example, a sphere shortage error display 706, a fourth symbol display area 208e). At least a part of the first figure displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f). In the state, the visibility is at least low, and the first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display means, and the third display At least a part of the display means has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player is focused on the display means in an attempt to recognize the notification content of the first display, and the player is concentrated on the game. May be possible. In addition, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be able to be directed to the second display. Further, since the third display is easy to confirm even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to confirm the third display while viewing the second display.

  The first display may be displayed at the first display position on the display means. The second display may be displayed at the second display position on the display means. The third display may be displayed at a third display position on the display means. The third display position may be a position with higher visibility than the first display position when the display means is in the first state. The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state. The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state. Part or all of the third display may have at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.

  (2) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a display relating to a game, and the second display is an effect display.

  According to this configuration, since the display related to the game is difficult to see due to the effect display, the player may be able to pay attention to the effect display. Even if the effect display is displayed, the player can easily confirm the third display, and thus it may be easier to confirm the third display while viewing the effect display.

  (3) In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state. Yes, the second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than that in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be easier for the player to guess that.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state. Part or all of the first display may be more visible than one or more states including the first state when the display means is in the second state. When the display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state and is different from the first state and the second state. The visibility may be lower than the state. The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means. The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  (4) The pachinko machine 100, wherein the second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.

  According to this configuration, since the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display in the first state, it may be possible to make the second display easy to attract the player. . In the first state, since the first display is displayed behind the second display, the player may be able to carefully watch the first display.

  The second display may be displayed in front of the first display. The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display. The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays other than the first display.

  (5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first display is an error display.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, the player is encouraged to recognize the notification content of the error display, and the error display is carefully viewed by the player. There is a case that can be made. Moreover, since the visibility of the second display is higher than the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the second display. Also, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display even when an error is displayed.

(6) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display, and the third display includes the second display It is characterized in that it contains at least information that is more important to the player than the display of.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of a part of the first display including information that is highly important for the player is hidden and reduced by a part of the effect display, so that the line of sight of the game is directed to the display means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the third display having high importance for the player can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with peace of mind.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display. The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display. The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included. The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

  The third display may be a display that includes only information that is more important to the player than the second display. The third display may be a display that includes only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display. The third display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included. The third display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

(7) The pachinko machine 100 includes operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132 and a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the first display indicates to the player On the other hand, it includes at least notification for prompting the operation of the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the operation of the operation means is hidden by the effect display, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the effect display and play the game. You may be able to entertain. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned “position having at least higher visibility than the first display” means a position where the player can always confirm at least the third display when the second display is displayed. Thus, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. May be difficult to miss.

  The above “information highly important for a player” may include at least information related to payout of a game ball (for example, an error related to ball removal notification or payout means). Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing information related to the profit of the game.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information that is highly important to the player” is information related to the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is changing), the decorative symbol change display, the hold icon, the hitting notification. (A right-handed notification, a notification that “turn the handle to the left”, etc.) may be included. ”“ Information that is highly important to the player ”is information related to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (board The above-mentioned “information that is highly important to the player” is information relating to fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor, etc.). Error etc.) at least.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include second display means (for example, a sub display device 808). The “display unit” may be a display unit of at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols. For example, if one winning symbol is won, even if it is non-electric support, the wing member 232a opens so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting port 232, and if the other winning symbol is won, the non-electric support The blade member 232a may be opened to the extent that a game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the case where the other winning symbol is won during non-electric support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the usual figure variable game may be executed in the electric Chu long opening effect.
<< Other Embodiments >>

Next, a gaming table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 291 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 290 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 292 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit 300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), the first sub control unit 400 that mainly controls the production and the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on it, a payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in accordance with a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of game balls A control unit 630 and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (details will be described later).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 294 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 294 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 294 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Basic circuit of main control unit>

  Next, the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300 will be described in detail. FIG. 295 is a diagram showing only the main part of the basic circuit 302 extracted from the main control part 300.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes a CPU 304 that controls the entire main control unit 300, a ROM 306 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 304 and various data referred to by the CPU 304, and the CPU 304 temporarily stores data. RAM 308 for storing.
<Built-in register of CPU of main control unit>

  The CPU 304 is a control register for controlling a counter circuit, a timer circuit, a serial communication circuit, a random number circuit, an arithmetic circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, and the like, and a built-in register such as a register used when the CPU 304 executes a control program Is provided. The built-in registers include a T register (special register), a general purpose register, a program counter (PC), an instruction register, etc., which are one of the features of the present invention. The type of general-purpose register is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, an 8-bit register including an I register, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, and an L register is provided. The B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers also function as 16-bit registers (pair registers) of the BC, DE, and HL registers that can perform 16-bit operations, respectively. It is configured.

  In this embodiment, the value of the interrupt vector (interrupt vector read from a predetermined device) output from the built-in device is the lower 8 bits, and the content of the I register (interrupt vector register, interrupt register) is the upper 8 bits. A 16-bit address is read as an interrupt processing address, and is branched (jumped) to an interrupt processing to be described later. For example, when an interrupt processing request is generated when the value of the I register is 00H and the value of the interrupt vector is 60H, this is indicated by 0060H (the upper byte is 00H of the I register and the lower byte is 60H of the interrupt vector). A 2-byte address (for example, 0412H) is loaded to the PC with the value (for example, 12H) stored at the address to be stored as the lower byte, and the value (for example, 04H) stored at the address indicated by 0061H as the upper byte. Thus, a branch (jump) is made to an interrupt process using this address as the head address.

  When an instruction is executed, the F register sequentially executes the S flag (sign flag), Z flag (zero flag), SZ flag (second zero flag), H flag (half carry flag) from bit 7 in the F register according to the execution result. , Bit 3 (empty bit), P / V flag (parity / overflow flag), N flag (subtract flag), and C flag (carry flag) change to 1 or 0 or do not change Or The SZ flag changes in the same way as the Z flag for instructions that change the Z flag, and all LD instructions of Z80 compatible instructions, all 16-bit arithmetic operation instructions (including INC instructions and DEC instructions), and RLCA of rotate shift instructions. It changes with an instruction, an RLA instruction, an RRCA instruction, an RRA instruction, and an “INA, (n)” instruction.

  Note that the 16-bit arithmetic instruction ADC instruction and SBC instruction change the Z flag, the other instructions do not change the Z flag, and the 16-bit arithmetic instruction changes the SZ flag. In addition, in the “INA, (n)” instruction, the SZ flag changes and the Z flag does not change. The position of the SZ flag or empty bit in the F register may be a bit other than the above-described bits. Note that the SZ flag may not be changed in the case of a special instruction described later.

  In the present embodiment, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used as auxiliary registers (back registers) corresponding to the general-purpose registers (main registers). Each of the general-purpose registers C ′, D ′, E ′, H ′, and L ′ is provided, but only the T register that is a special register is not provided with an auxiliary register. Therefore, the usage of the T register is limited, and the usage frequency of the T register is lower than that of the general-purpose register. Therefore, a situation in which the value of the T register is inadvertently rewritten (the contents of the T register are destroyed). Situation) can be prevented in advance. Note that the value of the auxiliary register cannot be directly read / written by various instructions, and only the value of the main register and the value of the auxiliary register are allowed to be exchanged by a special exchange instruction (EX instruction, EXX instruction). Here, for convenience of explanation, a register whose register value can be easily changed by an instruction such as a PUSH instruction / POP instruction is a general-purpose register. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and special registers such as an A register (accumulator) and an F register (flag register) are used. It is not necessary to include a register having a role as a general-purpose register.

  Although an example in which the T register is built in the CPU 304 is shown here, for example, the T register may be provided outside the CPU 304 or may be provided in a part of the RAM 308 separate from the CPU 304. That is, it is preferable that the T register is provided at a location physically different from storage means (ROM 306 in the present embodiment) for storing the control program. Furthermore, it is preferable that a control unit that performs a process of writing a specific value (described later) in the T register is different from a control unit that reads a control program from the ROM 306 and performs game control. This is because it is possible to make it difficult to perform both modification of the control program and illegal acquisition of a specific value by making the control unit different.

  <Memory space and I / O space of CPU of main controller>

  Next, the memory space and I / O space of the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU 304, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an I / O map of the CPU 304.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in registers, ROM 306, RAM 308, etc., and an I / O space for inputting / outputting control signals to / from the above-mentioned I / O 310. doing. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 6A, the address / data signal line of the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H is 16 in this embodiment)). 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 304 reads the data from the ROM 306 by designating this ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area in the memory space (in this embodiment, FE00H to FEBFH), and the CPU 304 reads data from the built-in register to this register area and sends it to the register. Write the data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 308 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 304 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 308 and sends it to the RAM 308. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F4000H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

Also, as shown in the I / O map of FIG. 10B, the I / O 310 of the main control unit 300 is assigned to the work area of the I / O space (in this embodiment, 00H to BFH). The control signal is input / output to / from the I / O 310 via the I / O space. In addition, the other area | region (0C0H-FFH in this embodiment) of I / O space is made into the non-use area | region.
<Initialization process>

  Next, the initialization process of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of initialization processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes this initialization process before shifting to a security mode or a user mode described later.

  Specifically, in step S51, a specific value (in this embodiment, F0H which is the upper byte of the start address 7E00H of the RWM area described above) is stored in the T register built in the CPU 304. In step S52, an initial value is set in a register other than the T register, and then the process proceeds to step S53 to execute a main control unit main process described later.

  Needless to say, the specific value stored in the T register is not limited to F0H. For example, 20H which is the upper byte of the start address (2000H in the present embodiment) of the register area is stored in the T register. If configured, the access efficiency to the built-in register may be improved by the same principle as the access to the RAM 308 described later. At the first timing, the upper byte of the head address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the upper byte of the head address of the register area is set in the T register at the second timing thereafter (or before). You may comprise. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the upper byte of the leading address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If not, the upper byte of the start address of the register area may be set in the T register.

  In this initialization process, the upper byte of the start address of the RWM area is set in the T register (or / and the upper byte of the start address of the register area is set in the T register) without depending on the control program. Then, after this initialization processing, the start address of the register area in the T register (manually) by a control program (for example, initial setting 1 processing in step S101 described later, initial setting 2 processing in step S107, initialization processing in step S113, etc.) May be configured (or / and / or the upper byte of the start address of the RWM area is set in the T register).

  Here, the above-mentioned reset interrupt includes a system reset interrupt (a reset interrupt caused by an external event such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period to the system reset terminal) and a user reset interrupt (a user reset terminal). There are two types of reset interrupts that are triggered by an external event, such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period, and reset interrupts that are triggered by an internal event, such as a WDT timeout or access outside a specified area) There is an interrupt. In a reset by a system reset interrupt, all internal circuits including a control register and a general-purpose register are initialized (for example, an initial value corresponding to the register (for example, 00H is set in the I register)). A part of the internal circuit is initialized.

  FIG. 298 is a time chart of the startup process after system reset. After executing an initialization process by a system reset (when an H level signal is input after an L level signal is input to the XSRST terminal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of four cycles of the system clock)) When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the process shifts to the security mode, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process shifts to the user mode. Here, the security mode is a mode for authenticating the user program. Specifically, when the system reset is input, re-calculate whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the result (security check result) is OK (no abnormality), this mode is terminated. When the security check result is NG (abnormal), the CPU 304 is configured to stop. The authentication code is written in the ROM 306 together with the user program (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “control program”) when writing into the ROM.

  After the security check is finished in this security mode, when the fixed extension process (hereinafter also referred to as “fixed delay function”) waiting for a certain period of time is finished, an H level reset output is output from the XRSTO terminal, and thereafter When the random extension process (hereinafter also referred to as “random delay function”) that waits for the passage of a random period is completed, it is configured to shift to the user mode (a combination of the fixed extension process and the random extension process) Security mode extension processing ”or“ security mode extension function ”). The user mode is a mode in which the user program is executed from the reset address of the ROM (0000H, which is the first address of the first area of the ROM area described above), and main control unit main processing described later is started. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 executes the user program, the byte length of data read into the instruction register in one process (one state) is 1 byte (8 bits). The data length is not particularly limited, and may be 16 bits or 32 bits, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described initialization process is configured to be executed (automatically (regardless of the control program)) before shifting to the security mode or the user mode. You may comprise so that it may be performed after transfering to user mode. Further, the initialization processing execution timing may be different depending on the type of reset (the type of interrupt factor in the case of a user reset interrupt).

  Specifically, referring to a register (one of the built-in registers) for managing the reset factor that occurred immediately before, whether or not the reset factor that occurred immediately before is (1) a system reset. (2) It is determined whether or not a user reset is caused by a timeout of WDT, and (3) whether or not a user reset is caused by access outside the designated area, and the execution timing of the initialization process is determined according to the determination result. You may comprise. In addition, the specific value and the initial value set in the initialization process may be configured to be different depending on the type of reset and the type of register (for example, a general-purpose register has 00H as an initial value in both system reset and user reset). The T register is set such that F0H is set as a specific value at the time of system reset, but may not be initialized at the time of user reset).

The security mode time can be extended by a set time or can be extended by a random time. By extending by a random amount of time, it may be difficult for the fraudster to aim at the start timing of the user program. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can set the time from user reset (for example, reset by timeout of WDT) to the start of execution of a user program to random time. With such a configuration, there is a case where fraud aimed at the start timing of the user program can be prevented in advance.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Start-up, timer-out time setting, T-registration check processing (details will be described later), and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value as the timeout time of the WDT 314. In this example, the WDT 314 is activated and the timeout time is set immediately before entering the main loop of the main control unit main process. However, for example, it is performed in other processes such as the initialization process described above. May be. In step S103, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In addition, although the example which performs clear & restart of WDT314 immediately after a main loop start was shown, you may perform regularly in the main control part timer interruption process mentioned later, for example.

  Although not shown, the basic circuit 302 includes a start register and a clear register as registers for controlling the WDT 314. The start register is an 8-bit register for controlling the start / stop of the WDT 314. When starting the WDT 314, a value (for example, CCh) instructing the start is set (written) and stopped when the WDT 314 is stopped. Is set so as to set a value (for example, 33h).

  This start register is valid when “start by software” is set (selected) in the program management area at the time of reset. In this case, a stop instruction value (for example, 33h) is set as an initial value. Is set. Therefore, in order to activate WDT 314 when “activation by software” is set (selected), it is necessary to set a value (for example, CCh) instructing activation by the game control program (manually). On the other hand, when “activation by software” is not set (selected) at the time of resetting, a value instructing activation (for example, CCh) is an initial value (automatically) regardless of the game control program. The WDT 314 is activated (automatically) regardless of the game control program.

  The clear register is an 8-bit register for controlling clearing and restarting of the WDT 314, and after setting a predetermined first value (for example, 55h), a predetermined second value (for example, AAh) Is set, WDT 314 is cleared and restarted immediately after. When the value of the clear register is read, a predetermined fixed value (for example, FFh) is read. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time-out time of the WDT 314 can be freely set by presetting any of the 4-bit length setting value data 0000B to 1000B in the predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. (See FIG. 404).

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). Also, as will be described later, the values of predetermined registers stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption are read out, reset to these registers, and then the interrupt permission (EI) is set. Do. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption.

The CPU 304 according to the present embodiment includes a “PUSH TI” instruction, a “PUSH ALL” instruction, and a “PUSH GRP” instruction as PUSH instructions. The “PUSH TI” instruction is an instruction for saving the values stored in the T and I registers to the above-described stack area. Specifically, when the stack pointer at the time of executing the PUSH instruction is SP, the PUSH instruction is executed. Sometimes the value stored in the T register is saved to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the value stored in the I register when the PUSH instruction is executed is saved to the address indicated by (SP-2). . Further, "PUSH ALL" instruction, T at PUSH instruction is executed, I, A, F, B , C, D, E, H, L, IX H, IX L, IY H, stored in the IY _L register This is an instruction to save values in the stack area in this order. The “PUSH GRP” instruction is an instruction for saving the values stored in the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers in the stack area in this order when the PUSH instruction is executed.

Further, the CPU 304 includes a “POP TI” command, a “POP ALL” command, and a “POP GRP” command as POP commands. The “POP TI” instruction is an instruction that restores the value stored in the stack area to the T and I registers (loads data from the storage area of the RAM 308 to the T and I registers). When the stack pointer at the time of execution is SP, the value stored at the address indicated by (SP-1) is restored to the T register when the POP instruction is executed, and the address indicated by (SP-2) when the POP instruction is executed. The value stored in is returned to the I register. In addition, the “POP ALL” instruction uses the values stored in the stack area when the POP instruction is executed as T, I, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX _H , IX _L , IY. _This is an instruction to restore the _H and IY _L registers. Further, the “PUSH GRP” instruction is an instruction for returning the value stored in the stack area to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers when the POP instruction is executed.

  In order to restore the T register from the stack area, it is necessary to use the “POP TI” instruction. However, even if the I register is not used, the value of the stack area is also restored to the I register. Become. In this way, by eliminating the generality of the instruction using the T register as an operand (making it difficult to use), it is possible to prevent the instruction using the T register as an operand from being frequently used. May be rewritten inadvertently (a situation where the contents of the T register are destroyed).

  The CPU 304 includes an instruction that permits acceptance of an interrupt request (EI instruction) and an instruction that prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request (DI instruction). The above-described “POP TI” instruction is an interrupt request by a DI instruction. It is configured to execute only when reception of the request is prohibited, and is configured not to execute when reception of the interrupt request is permitted by the EI instruction. As described above, if the “POP TI” instruction is not executed when the acceptance of the interrupt request is permitted, the execution of the “POP TI” instruction causes the interrupt register to function as an interrupt vector register or an interrupt register. In some cases, an unexpected value may not be restored from the stack area, and reliable game control can be performed by reliably executing the interrupt processing.

  In addition to the above-described instructions, the CPU 304 also loads an 8-bit load (transfer) instruction, a 16-bit load (transfer) instruction, a stack operation instruction, an 8-bit arithmetic logic operation instruction, a 16-bit arithmetic logic operation instruction, multiplication / division Instruction, accumulator operation instruction, MPU control instruction, exchange instruction, block transfer instruction, block search instruction, bit operation instruction, rotate / shift instruction, unconditional jump instruction / conditional jump instruction, call instruction / return instruction, input / output instruction, It has compound instructions.

  In this embodiment, when power is interrupted, the values of the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that do not include the T and I registers are saved (stored) in the stack area by the “PUSH GRP” instruction. When power is restored, the “POP GRP” instruction is used to restore the values of the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers from the stack area, not including the T and I registers. The T register is configured so that both saving by the “PUSH GRP” instruction and restoration by the “POP GRP” instruction cannot be performed (the T register cannot be specified as an operand of these instructions). In this embodiment, the T register cannot be specified as an operand of an addition instruction (INC instruction) or a subtraction instruction (DEC instruction). As will be described later, the T register is a special register that plays an important role in accessing the RAM 308. However, a situation in which an unexpected value is set in the T register due to a coding error or the like can be surely avoided. Stable game control is possible. In addition, since the T register is not both saved by the PUSH instruction and restored by the POP instruction, the processing at the time of power interruption or restoration may be accelerated.

  The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. In step S116, if the RAM is cleared, the RAM is cleared. If not, the WDT 314 is started after the data is restored to each register.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition (DI) setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. In step S114, if the RAM is cleared, the RAM is cleared. If not, the WDT 314 is started after the data is restored to each register.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<T cash register check processing>

  FIG. 300A is a flowchart showing the flow of the T registration check process performed in the initial setting 1, and FIG.

  In step S131 of the T registration check process, the value of the T register is set in the A register (LD A, T). In the next step S132, whether or not the value of the A register matches a specific value (F0H). (SUB F0H, JP Z, SEIJYOU) If they do not match (in case of abnormality; the value obtained by subtracting a specific value (F0H) from the value in register A becomes a value other than 0 and the Z flag becomes 0) ) Proceeds to step S133, and if they match (if normal; the value obtained by subtracting a specific value (F0H) from the value of the A register becomes 0 and the Z flag becomes 1), the value of the T register Is determined to be normal, the T registration check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the subsequent process. In step S133, after determining that the value of the T register is abnormal and setting a specific value (F0H) in the T register (LD T, F0H), the T registration check process is terminated and the process proceeds to the subsequent process.

  The T-registration check process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 300, and may be a process as shown in FIG. FIG. 300A is a flowchart showing a flow of a T-registration check process according to the modification, and FIG. 300B is an example of a program list of the T-registration check process according to the modification.

In the T-registration check process according to this modification, the error process in step S135 is performed instead of the process in step S133. Specifically, when it is determined in step S132 that the value of the A register does not match the specific value (F0H) (in the case of abnormality; the value obtained by subtracting the specific value (F0H) from the value of the A register is other than 0) If the value becomes Z and the Z flag becomes 0), the process proceeds to step S135 to perform error processing (SUB F0H, JP NZ, moError). The content of this error processing is not particularly limited. For example, the error processing is configured not to enter the infinite loop and execute the subsequent main control unit main processing, or to use a liquid crystal display device or a speaker in the subsequent main control unit main processing. It may be possible to report an error.
<LD instruction>

  Next, the LD command provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. The LD instruction (LD OP1, OP2) is stored in the register indicated by the first operand OP1, the value stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 (or the immediate value (immediate value or immediate value) indicated by the second operand OP2. For example, when the instruction “LD A, T” is executed in a state where F0H is stored in the T register before the execution of the T-registration check process described above. The value stored in the T register indicated by the second operand, that is, F0H is stored in the A register, and when the instruction “LD A, F0H” is executed, the second operand is also stored in the A register. Is stored, that is, F0H is stored.

  On the other hand, in the LD instruction using the first operand OP1 as a T register, the second operand is limited to an immediate value, and setting a register in the second operand is prohibited (in the process of being assembled into a machine language). Error and cannot be assembled). Therefore, as described in the above-described T-registration check process, programming (coding) of an LD instruction (“LD T, F0H” in the above example) having the second operand as an immediate value is permitted, but the second operand Programming (coding) of an LD instruction (eg, “LD T, A”) that sets a register is not allowed. As described above, the LD instruction using the first operand OP1 as the T register is configured to transfer data as a direct value to the T register, so that the set data may be easily confirmed. Further, since data is not transferred to the T register via another register, the value of the T register cannot be inadvertently changed, thereby reducing the occurrence of coding errors. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 302 shows only the LD command extracted from the program list. In this example, five LD instructions are used. For example, let us consider a case in which tracing is performed by debugging with respect to a value stored in the B register after execution of the LD instruction “LD B, A” in (4). In this case, it is necessary to trace back the program list for the A register which is the second operand of the LD instruction “LD B, A”. For example, the search of the program list can be performed using the search key “LD A”. If this is done, the LD instruction “LD A, H” in (3) will be hit in addition to the LD instruction “LD A, B” in (1). That is, the LD instruction with the A register set to the first operand is frequently used because it is permitted to set the register to the second operand and to set the second operand to an immediate value. This can contribute to a reduction in the efficiency of review work and debugging (for example, tracing of the A register). Although the A register having the highest use frequency has been described here, the same can be said when other registers other than the T register are used.

On the other hand, the LD instruction in which the T register is set in the first operand is prohibited from setting the register in the second operand, and only the second operand is allowed to have an immediate value. The frequency of use is relatively lower than that of the LD instruction, and it becomes possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing), and the control program development efficiency may be improved.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 294 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 294 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the success / failure determination result storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first miss flag, second miss flag, special figure probability A flag for each of a variation flag and an ordinary probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 294 (a) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when the special figure I is turned on and the second off-flag is turned on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, information that can specify the type of command, such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command) Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of the strobe interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S <b> 319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in S <b> 309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<ROM of main controller>

  Next, the types of data stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows an example of data stored in the ROM 306 described above.

  The ROM area corresponding to the storage area of the ROM 306 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area from 0000H to 2FFFH) is a ROM control area (in this embodiment, 0000H to 0BB0H), a non-use area (in this embodiment, 0BB1H to 0FFFH), ROM data area (1FFFH to 18FDH in this embodiment), and other areas (18FEH to 2FFFH in this embodiment). The storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to this ROM control area contains instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 304 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 304 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is stored, and a specific value (00H in this embodiment) is uniformly set in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the non-use area. In the storage area of the ROM 306 that is stored and corresponds to the ROM data area, reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program is stored. Also, management data for managing the control program (for example, data indicating the final address of the control program data) is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the other area. In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to each address in the ROM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the ROM control area. doing.

  Further, the control program is composed of a plurality of subroutines, and it is possible to move to the top address of the subroutine by a CALL instruction, an EXESUB (EXECUTE SUBBROUTINE) instruction, which will be described later, and execute the subroutine sequentially. .

  By the way, in the field of gaming machines, it is necessary to limit the storage area for storing control program data from the viewpoint of improving the inspection efficiency of the control program. In this embodiment, the ROM control area is limited to 0000H to 0BB0H as described above. doing. In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, it is necessary to store control program data in a young address in the ROM control area so that no unused area or unused data is provided between control program data. In order to fill the storage area of the control program data that is not used at the stage, work such as dividing and assigning another control program data occurs, and as a result, a lot of control program data for calling a subroutine is required. Furthermore, since subroutines are frequently used to improve control program development efficiency and to simplify maintenance work such as control program debugging, a large amount of control program data is required to call the subroutines. .

  In order to enhance the interest of the game in such a development environment, conventional control program data stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area (for example, calling the above subroutine) It is necessary to secure a storage area where new control program data can be added to the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area.

  In particular, a control program for executing a timer interrupt process for executing a predetermined process at a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms) includes a plurality of external information randomly generated from a plurality of game control processes (for each sensor). Control for invoking many subroutines, such as processing for detecting changes (for example, input port state update processing (step S205)) and processing based on detection results of external information (for example, device monitoring processing (step S237)) Since the program data is included, it is necessary to compress the control program data for calling a subroutine included in the control program for executing the timer interrupt process.

In addition, in order to be able to perform stable game control, the above-described timer interrupt process must be focused and stabilized. Specifically, it is indispensable to suppress coding mistakes and to improve processing speed in order to execute predetermined processing at predetermined intervals (for example, 10 ms) (to ensure real-time performance). Therefore, it is necessary to devise a control program for calling a subroutine (details will be described later).
<Command data of main control unit>

  Next, the command data of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 307 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the instruction data of the main control unit 300. FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the upper and lower bits of the instruction data of the main control unit 300, and FIG. 308 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the instruction data table.

  For example, when the instruction data is composed of 1-byte (8-bit) data, the instruction data of the main control unit 300 can be defined up to 256 patterns. Note that the defined instruction data is not stored in the ROM 306 but is incorporated in the CPU 304 in hardware. Further, when the 1-byte instruction data is classified according to the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the relationship between the pattern and the instruction data is as shown in FIG. 308 (b). For example, INC (instruction data) used for “INC BC (instruction for adding one BC register)” is assigned to upper bit 0H (0000B) and lower bit 3H (0011B), and “DEC B (B register DEC (instruction data) used for “an instruction for subtracting 1 from” is assigned to the upper bit 0H (0000B) and the lower bit 5H (0101B).

  In addition, as a method of allocating instruction data having a pattern number exceeding 256 patterns of instruction data that can be defined by 1 byte length, for example, a new one byte is added to one pattern among the 256 patterns defined by 1 byte. There is a method of defining instruction data of up to 511 patterns (255 patterns (1 byte instruction data) +256 patterns (2 bytes instruction data)) by associating 256 patterns to be defined. Since this instruction is used because it is composed of byte data, the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area is compressed rather than using the above-described one-byte instruction data.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the region surrounded by the thick line in FIG. 308 (b), that is, the combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH (1111B), and the upper bit 3H (0011B) An area formed by a combination of the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH (1111B) is set as a special area for assigning an EXESUB instruction to be described later. As described above, a limited hardware resource (for example, 1 byte) can be used by using, as a special area, an empty area from which instruction data has not been allocated or the allocated instruction data has been deleted. A definable pattern (256 patterns)) can be used effectively, and compression of the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area by instruction data can be suppressed.

Also, the instruction data is grouped by role (an area consisting of a combination of a plurality of lower bits consecutive to one upper bit or one lower bit for easy checking of the machine language after assembly. An instruction data having the same system role is assigned to an area composed of a combination of a plurality of consecutive upper bits with respect to a bit and assigned to an instruction data table (for example, upper bit 8H (1000B) and lower bit 0H (ADD instruction in a part defined by a combination of (0000B) to 7H (0111B)). In recent years, in order to reduce the development burden of the chip, the instruction data allocated to the conventional instruction data table has been reduced, or new instruction data has been added to the part to which the reduced instruction data has been allocated. Develop. For this reason, it is necessary to assign the instruction data of the same system to be added as a group when newly adding instruction data for data compression while simplifying checking the machine language after assembly. In the present embodiment, the problem is solved by allocating the EXESUB instruction as a group to a special area. Furthermore, in order to efficiently allocate new instruction data to the subdivided special area, it is necessary to allocate the instruction data group to be added as a subdivided group. In this embodiment, the EXESUB is further allocated. The problem is solved by assigning instructions to sub-groups and assigning them to special sub-regions.
<CALL instruction>

  Next, a CALL instruction which is one of the above control programs will be described. FIG. 309 conceptually shows an example of address movement by the CALL instruction, and FIG. 310 shows an example of instruction data and supplementary data of the CALL instruction.

  For example, when the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the transfer destination subroutine is 03FFH, the relative addresses of the two (the transfer source address and the transfer destination address) as shown by reference numeral X in FIG. The address difference is 0301H (= 0700H-03FFH), and this relative address can be expressed by 2-byte data. Here, when this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), a control of 3 bytes in total with 1 byte of instruction data indicating the CALL instruction and 2 bytes of supplemental data indicating the destination address. Program data is required.

  Also, when the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the destination subroutine is 075FH, the relative address of both is 005FH (= 075FH-03FFH), as indicated by symbol Y in FIG. The relative address can be expressed by 1-byte data. Even in this case, if this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), the total of 1-byte instruction data indicating the CALL instruction and 2-byte supplemental data indicating the destination address is totaled. 3-byte control program data is required.

  That is, the control program for executing the CALL instruction requires 3 bytes of control program data regardless of the destination address (any address in the storage area (0000H to FFFFH) that can be defined by 2 bytes). Become.

When executing the CALL instruction, the CPU 304 specifically executes the CALL instruction after executing the process of storing the data (2 bytes) stored in the PC register (program counter) in the stack area. Subroutine can be called by executing a process (moving to the start address of the subroutine) that stores the supplementary data (data indicating the start address of the transfer destination subroutine (2 bytes)) in the PC register (program counter) It becomes.
<EXESUB instruction>

  Next, the EXESUB instruction, which is one of the above control programs, will be described. FIG. 311 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the EXESUB instruction, and FIG. 3 (b) is a diagram showing an instruction data table in which the EXESUB instruction is assigned to the free area of FIG. 308 (b). It is.

The EXESUB instruction is the same as the above CALL instruction in that it can call a subroutine, but the structure of instruction data / supplementary data and the storage capacity required for control program data are different (details will be described later) ).
<EXESUB instruction / instruction data>

  In the present embodiment, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction includes 0 (fixed value) of bit 7, 0 (fixed value) of bit 6, bit, in order from the most significant bit 7 (MSB) to the least significant bit 0 (LSB). 5 for α (variable value), 1 for bit 4 (fixed value), 1 for bit 3 (fixed value), β for bit 2 (variable value), γ for bit 1 (variable value), δ for bit 0 (variable) Value) is a total of 8 bits (1 byte). That is, the EXESUB instruction becomes instruction data of a pattern (2 4 = 16 patterns) defined by changing the above-described variable value. Note that m, which is a total of 4 bits of data of α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1, and δ of bit 0, can represent a numerical range of 0H to FH, and represents the start address of the subroutine to be called It is a part of identification information (binary format) that can be identified.

  Further, as described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is an area surrounded by a thick line in the instruction data table shown in FIG. 5B, that is, the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH ( 1111B) and a free space consisting of a combination of the upper bit 3H (0011B) and the lower bits 8H (0111B) to FH (1111B) (in the past, no instruction data has been assigned or assigned instruction data Allocated to the deleted area).

  As described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is configured such that a fixed value bit is inserted between the variable value bit and the variable value bit, thereby grouping the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction. , It becomes possible to allocate to the above-mentioned free space. Therefore, the machine language of the EXESUB instruction data can be easily checked and coding errors can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction has a variable value bit number (for example, 1 (above 1) described above) with one or more fixed value bits (for example, the above bit 4 and bit 3) interposed therebetween. Compared with bit 5)), the number of lower-order variable values (for example, 3 (bit 2, bit 1, bit 0 above)) across the fixed value bit is increased (the storage capacity is increased). ), The instruction data of the EXESUB instruction can be grouped and finely allocated to the above-described free area. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area by compressing instruction data. The conventional control program data can be compressed. It should be noted that the number of bits of the upper variable value across the fixed value is larger than the number of bits of the lower variable value across the one or more fixed value bits (the storage capacity is increased). Even if it is comprised, it has the above-mentioned effect.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the above-described variable values α, β, γ, and δ and the bit 7 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is not limited to the above-described correspondence relationship. , Bit 2 may be associated with variable value β, bit 1 may be associated with variable ground γ, and bit 0 may be associated with variable value δ.

Furthermore, the order of the variable values α, β, γ, and δ constituting the instruction data may be any order, but the above-described order (α, β, γ, δ in order from the upper bit), that is, an address described later. By setting m in mn to an order that can be defined by arranging α, β, γ, and δ in order from the upper bits, it is possible to easily check the machine language of the EXESUB instruction data and suppress coding errors.
<EXESUB instruction / supplementary data>

  In the present embodiment, supplementary data for the EXESUB instruction is composed of n that is 8-bit data indicating a numerical range of 00H to FFH.

Therefore, the EXESUB instruction has a total of 12 bits configured by arranging m, which is 4-bit data included in the instruction data, and n, which is 8-bit supplemental data, in this order (m is a higher order and n is a lower order). This is an instruction that can call a subroutine having a head address in an address area (0000H to 0FFF) definable by the address mn. That is, n is at least a part of information obtained by removing a part (m) of the identification information from the identification information (binary format) that can identify the head address of the subroutine to be called.

  <EXESUB instruction / subroutine call>

  FIG. 312 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of address movement by the EXESUB instruction. In this embodiment, m (4-bit data) indicates the lower 4 bits (0H to FH) of the upper 1 byte among the addresses 0000H to 0FFFH in the ROM area, as shown in FIG. (8-bit data), as shown in FIG. 4B, when the storage area of 100H units (0m00H to 0mFFH: m = 0H to FH) expressed by the upper address m is one block, This is a value indicating an address (00H to FFH) in one block.

  Note that even if the address area where the destination address can be set is defined as either n or m data as upper address data, the effect of reducing the control program data described later can be obtained. By defining m included in the instruction data as upper address data, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction can be grouped and associated with the address area as shown in FIG. 312 (a), thereby suppressing coding errors. can do.

  In addition, since the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is configured to include m which is a part of the head address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is wrong, If erroneous data is included in the instruction data, execution of the control program is stopped, so that coding errors can be suppressed.

  FIG. 313 shows an example of calling the top address of a subroutine by the EXESUB instruction, and FIG. 314 shows an example of instruction data and supplement data of the EXESUB instruction.

  For example, suppose that the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the transfer destination subroutine is 03FFH. When this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as described above, the relative address (the difference between the source address and the destination address) indicated by symbol X ′ in FIG. 313 is 0301H (= 0700H-03FFH). This relative address can be expressed by 2 bytes of data, and requires 1 byte of instruction data and 2 bytes of supplementary data for a total of 3 bytes of control program data.

  On the other hand, when this control program is expressed by an EXESUB instruction, the movement to the destination address is conceptually indicated by X ″, and this relative address is 00FFH (= 03FFH-0300H) that can be expressed by 1-byte data. ) In other words, as shown in FIG. 314 (a), the EXESUB instruction requires a total of 2 bytes of control program data including 1-byte instruction data represented by 00001111B and 1-byte supplement data represented by 11111111B. .

  Further, a case where the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the subroutine to be called is 075FH will be described. In this case, even if this control program is expressed by either a CALL instruction or an EXESUB instruction, as described above, as shown by the symbol Y ′ in FIG. 313, the relative address of both can be expressed by 1 byte. 005FH (= 0C5FH-0C00H), and this relative address can be expressed by 1-byte data. However, when this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, a total of 3 bytes of 1-byte instruction data and 2 bytes of supplementary data are provided. Byte control program data is required.

  On the other hand, when this control program is expressed by an EXESUB instruction, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), a total of 2 bytes of control including 1-byte instruction data represented by 00001111B and 1-byte supplementary data represented by 0101111B. Program data is required, and the data per instruction can be reduced by 1 byte compared to the CALL instruction described above.

  Therefore, the control program for executing the EXESUB instruction requires control program data of 2 bytes regardless of the destination address (any address in the storage area (0000H to 0FFFH) that can be defined by 12 bits). As compared with the above CALL instruction, the control program data per instruction can be reduced by 1 byte.

  That is, by using the above EXESUB instruction for a control program for calling a subroutine, a control program (for example, a CALL instruction) for calling a conventional subroutine can be compressed and stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Note that when executing the EXESUB instruction, the CPU 304 specifically executes the EXEBUS instruction after executing the process of storing the data (2 bytes) stored in the PC register (program counter) in the stack area. Subroutine can be called by executing a process (moving to the start address of the subroutine) that stores the supplementary data (data indicating the start address of the transfer destination subroutine (2 bytes)) in the PC register (program counter) It becomes.

  Further, by using the above EXESUB instruction for the control program for calling the subroutine, the processing speed of the control program for calling the subroutine is improved (the number of states is reduced) than the conventional (for example, CALL instruction) due to the compression of the control program. Less).

  Further, as described above, the ROM area stores all control program data in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the area (0000H to 0FFFH in the present embodiment) that can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction. ROM control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) is provided, and at least a ROM in which control program data is stored from an area (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) that can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction The area (0BB1H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) excluding the control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) is configured to be a non-use area, and the ROM data area follows the non-use area. It is configured as follows.

In the gaming machine having the ROM area as described above, the CPU 304 is used by using the EXESUB instruction described above as a control program for calling a subroutine (the control program data of the EXESUB instruction is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area). However, since data other than control program data and non-use data is not directly read as instruction data, malfunctioning of the CPU 304 due to a coding error in supplementary data may be prevented.
<Example of control program>

  FIG. 315 is a program list showing an example of the control program for the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process. “**” indicates supplementary data for the EXESUB instruction.

  When starting the timer interrupt process, the CPU 304 first executes a process for restarting the WDT, executes a predetermined process (details omitted), and then uses the EXEBUS instructions (1) to (19), respectively. The following subroutine is read out. Input port status update processing, basic random number initial value update processing, basic random number update processing, production random number update processing, timer update processing, winning a prize counter update processing, winning acceptance processing, payout request number transmission processing, general drawing state update processing, Figure-related lottery process special figure prefetch control process, special figure 2 state update process, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 related lottery process, special figure 1 related lottery process, command setting transmission process, external output signal setting process, device Monitoring processing is executed, and other processing (details are omitted) is executed. Although not described in detail, the start address of the subroutine called by the above-described EXESUB instructions (1) to (19) is included in the ROM control area (0000H to 0BB0H in this embodiment).

  In this way, the above EXEBUS instruction is used for the control program that calls the subroutine in the timer interrupt processing (the control program data of the EXESUB instruction is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the timer interrupt processing area in the ROM control area). Thus, timer interrupt processing can be stabilized.

  By the way, in the development of a gaming machine, a new gaming machine is generally developed by changing (deleting or adding) a part of a conventional control program. In particular, it is desirable to avoid changing the control program as much as possible in order to stabilize game control.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to use the above EXEBUS instruction for all the control programs that call subroutines in the ROM area (for example, the timer interrupt processing area), depending on necessity (for example, whether or not the above-mentioned control program data compression is requested). May be used as appropriate.

Furthermore, the above-described EXESUB instruction is a conventional 3-byte instruction control program data (for example, CALL instruction) composed of 1-byte instruction data and 2-byte supplement data, and 1-byte instruction data and 1-byte supplement. Although the control program is compressed into control program data of 2-byte instructions composed of data, any control program that compresses the control program composed of instruction data and supplemental data may be used. In other words, the EXESUB instruction includes instruction data including a part of identification information (binary format) that can identify the start address of a subroutine to be called, and the identification information included in the instruction data is excluded from the identification information. The control program is composed of supplemental data composed of at least a part of information, and more specifically, each of the above-described instruction data and supplemental data has a data length (for example, read by the CPU 304 in one process). It may be an integer multiple of 8 bits).
<Modification of ROM control area>

  FIG. 316 shows a ROM control area (in this embodiment) in which the control program data is stored rather than an area (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) in which the ROM area can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBmn). , 0000H to 11B8H) is a diagram showing a case where it is configured to be wide. FIGS. 317 (a) and 317 (b) are diagrams showing an example in which the area of the top address of a subroutine that can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn) is expanded.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 316, the ROM control area (0000H to 11B8H in this embodiment) is an area of the top address of a subroutine (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) that can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn). When the area is wider, the ROM control area is composed of an EXESUB target area (0000H to 0FFFH in the present embodiment) and an EXESUB non-target area (for example, 1000H to 11B8H).

  In this case, even if the above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to supplement the instruction for calling the subroutine having the address corresponding to the EXESUB non-target area with the above-mentioned CALL instruction, as described above, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while being stable. It is possible to realize game control.

  However, as shown in FIG. 317, the above-described effect can be further enhanced by expanding the area of the top address of the subroutine that can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn).

  As specific means, as shown in FIGS. 317 (a) and 317 (b), a variable value σ described later is used to maintain the storage capacity required for the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn) and to execute the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn). The command data is expanded. In the following, the variable value σ newly added to the figure will be described.

  The variable value σ is used to extend the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm′n described later). As shown in FIG. 317 (a), the instruction data (EXESUBm′n described later) of the EXESUB instruction (in this embodiment, 8 bits), which changes according to the value of m ′ of the address m′n indicating the start address of the subroutine to be called.

  In addition, in the instruction data table, as shown in FIG. 317 (b), the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) expanded by the variable value σ is an area surrounded by a thick line shown in FIG. It is allocated to an empty area consisting of a combination of bit 5H (0101B) and lower bits 8H (1000B) and 9H (1001B).

  Here, m ′ is data having the same role as m shown in FIG. 311 (a), but the above m is α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1, and δ of bit 0. In this case, m ′ is a total of 5 bits of data of σ of bit 6, α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1 and δ of bit 0. However, m ′ is data that can express a numerical range of 00H to 11H, and is a part of identification information (binary format) that can identify the head address of a subroutine to be called.

  As described above, the address area (000H to FFF) definable by the address mn is expanded using the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) in which the variable value σ is provided in the bit 6 of the instruction data of the above EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBmn). (By making the address area definable by the address m′n into 0000H to 11FFH), the subroutine having the address corresponding to the above-mentioned EXESUB non-target area at the top address is called using the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm′n) Can do.

  The correspondence relationship between the above-described variable values σ, α, β, γ, and δ and the bits 7 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) is not limited to the above-described correspondence relationship. Similarly, the variable value α may correspond to the bit 4, the variable value β to the bit 2, the variable ground γ to the bit 1, the variable value δ to the bit 0, and the correspondence described with reference to FIG. 311. It may be the same as the relationship.

  Furthermore, the order of the variable values σ, α, β, γ, and δ constituting the instruction data may be any order, but the above-described order (σ, α, β, γ, δ in order from the upper bit), that is, By setting m ′ of address m′n, which will be described later, in order that can be defined by arranging σ, α, β, γ, and δ from the upper bits in order, it is possible to easily check the machine language of the EXESUB instruction data. Coding mistakes can be suppressed.

  In this way, by providing the above-mentioned EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) corresponding to the above-described ROM control area (for example, 0000H to 11B8H), the data is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Further, as described above, the ROM area is a ROM control area in which control program data is stored rather than an area (0000H to 11FFH in this embodiment) that can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBm'n). The area excluding (in this embodiment

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 306 and FIG. 316, the ROM control area provided for each developed game machine may be different among the restricted ROM control areas. In addition, it is wasteful from the viewpoint of development man-hours and costs, and development of a stable game control that uses a CPU that includes each of the above-mentioned EXESUBmn or EXESUBmn'n as instruction data is unnecessary from the viewpoint of development man-hours and costs. It will be difficult to realize. Therefore, even for the gaming machine having the ROM control area shown in FIG. 306, it is desirable to use EXESUBm′n for the EXESUB instruction.

  Even in this case, the ROM control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) stores control program data rather than the area (0000H to 11FFH in this embodiment) that can be called by EXESUBm'n. Therefore, at least an area that can be called by the above-described EXESUBm'n, excluding a ROM control area in which control program data is stored (in this embodiment, 0BB1H to 11FFH) ) In the non-use area, and the ROM data area may follow the non-use area.

  <Special drawing state update processing, general drawing state update processing>

  Next, a part of the control program for the above-described special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227), and general figure state update process (step S221) will be described with reference to FIG. To do. FIG. 8A shows a part of the control program for the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process, and FIG. The part is extracted.

  For example, in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 6A, first, by executing the instruction “LD L, Low.vbTokuzuStatus”, the address defined as vbTokuzuStatus in FIG. In the example, the lower byte (60H in this example) of F060H which is an address indicating the special figure status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is stored in the L register.

  Subsequently, by executing the instruction “JP moReadMemory”, the process moves to moReadMemory (memory reading process) shown in FIG. In this memory read processing, F0H is first stored in the H register by executing the instruction “LD H, F0H”, and then indicated by the HL register by executing the instruction “LD A, (HL)”. The content (in this example, F060H) of the address (in this example, F060H) is stored in the A register. Subsequently, after executing the instruction “AND A”, the process returns to the special figure state update process of the reading source. It should be noted that the common figure status update process shown in FIG. 6B also uses the common subroutine moReadMemory (memory read process) to read the common figure status stored in the common figure status storage area of the RAM 308. I do,

  As described above, when the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG. 5C is used, an instruction “LD H, F0H” causes the upper address of the special figure status storage area or the general figure status storage area to be higher. (F0H) is analyzed, and there is a risk of causing fraud. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the memory read process shown in FIG. 5E is adopted instead of the conventional memory read process shown in FIG.

  In the memory read processing according to this embodiment, the value of the T register is stored in the A register by executing the instruction “LD A, T”. As described above, a specific value ( Since F0H) is stored, F0H is stored in the A register. The subsequent processing is the same as the conventional processing, but since the T register is used instead of using the immediate value, the upper address (F0H) of the address of the special status status storage area or the normal status storage area is In some cases, there is little risk of analysis and fraud can be prevented. Further, when the immediate value is used, the possibility of a coding error increases, for example, when F0H is mistakenly input as F1H. However, if the T register is used, the coding error may be prevented in advance.

FIG. 319 is a diagram comparing the machine language of the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG. 318 (c) and the machine language of the memory reading process according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 318 (e). When the “LD H, F0H” instruction on the first line in the conventional memory read processing is assembled, the machine language is “26F0H” and includes “F0H”. Therefore, in the conventional memory read processing, There is a risk that the upper address (F0H) of the address in the storage area for the normal status is analyzed. On the other hand, when the “LD A, T” instruction on the first line in the memory read processing of the present embodiment is assembled, the machine language is “ED01H” and does not include “F0H”. Therefore, in the memory read processing of the present embodiment, There is a very low possibility that the upper address (F0H) of the special figure status storage area and the general figure status storage area will be analyzed, and it may be possible to prevent fraud.
<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S1001, special symbol random number transfer processing is performed. In this special symbol random number transfer process, the random value stored in the primary is transferred (stored) to the special symbol related lottery random number storage area provided in the RAM 308. In step S1002, a special symbol per lottery process is performed. In the lottery processing per special symbol, the above-mentioned special symbol random value (the special symbol 1 random value, the special symbol 2 random value) is compared with the special symbol lottery data stored in the ROM 306 in advance, and the lottery result The 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. Set and set the special symbol gaming state while fluctuating.

  In step S1003, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, a lottery for comparing the display symbol determination random number stored in the RAM 308 with the display symbol lottery data stored in advance in the ROM 306 is performed, and according to the lottery result, the 15R special jackpot symbol (special Figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (Special Figure B), Sudden Probability Variation (Special Figure C), Sudden Short-Time Design (Special Figure D), Hidden Probability Variation (Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (Special Figure F), No. One small symbol (Special G), second small symbol (Special H), first off symbol (Special I), and second off symbol (Special J) are set. .

  In step S1004, a special symbol variation time lottery process is performed (details will be described later). In step S1005, a special symbol variation time setting process is performed. In this special symbol variation time setting process, a timer corresponding to the variation pattern (pattern number) acquired in the special symbol variation time lottery process in step S1004 is set (stored) as a special symbol variation timer. In step S1006, special symbol on-hold information migration processing is performed. In this special symbol hold information transfer process, the special symbol hold information is transferred (stored) to the previous storage area in the order of change, and then the process ends.

  Here, as an example, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process has been described. For example, the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the common figure related lottery process Similar processing can be applied to (step S223).

  <Data table and variable storage area of main controller>

Next, a part of the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a part of the variable storage area provided in the RAM 308 will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322.
<Table selection table>

  FIG. 321 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the table selection table. FIG. 322 shows a part of the definition of the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and the variable storage area provided in the RAM 308. It is an example of the program list which showed a part of definition of.

In the table selection table shown in FIG. 321 (a), the destination address indicating the address of the ROM 306 in which the first variation pattern selection table, which will be described later, is stored is 0 for every number of special figure variation games held. It is divided and stored in four for individual use. Specifically, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1600H to 1601H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 0. (1600 DEFB 174FH). In addition, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1602H to 1603H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 1 ( 1602 DEFB 174FH). Further, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1604H to 1605H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 2 ( 1604 DEFB 174FH). In addition, 1755H is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1606H to 1607H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 3 ( 1606 DEFB 1755H).
<First variation pattern selection table>

FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the first variation pattern selection table. This first variation pattern selection table stores the difference (offset) between the address of the table and the address where the second variation pattern selection table described later is stored, and the number of random numbers. Specifically, AEH is stored as an offset in the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the address 1750H of the ROM data area, and the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to 1751H that is continuous with this address. , 20 is stored as the number of random numbers (1750H DEFB AEH, 20), and the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1752H to 1759H of the subsequent ROM data area is as shown in FIGS. 321 (b) and 322. In addition, an offset of 1 byte length and the number of random numbers of 1 byte length are alternately and continuously stored. In the first variation pattern selection table, the number of random numbers is indicated by a decimal number.
<Second variation pattern selection table>

FIG. 321 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the second variation pattern selection table. The second variation pattern selection table stores a pattern number and the number of random numbers. Specifically, 01H is stored as a pattern number in the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the address 1800H in the ROM data area, and the 1-byte area indicated by 1801H that is continuous with this address is stored in the 1-byte area. , 255 is stored as the number of random numbers (1800H DEFB 01H, 255), and the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to addresses 1802H to 180FH of the subsequent ROM data area is as shown in FIGS. 321 (c) and 322. A pattern number of 1 byte length and the number of random numbers of 1 byte length are stored alternately and continuously. In the second variation pattern selection table, the number of random numbers is indicated by a decimal number.
<Variable storage area>

FIG. 321 (d) is a diagram showing a reserved number storage area, a random number 1 storage area, and a random number 2 storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the addresses F040H to F042H of the RWM area. A 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the RWM area address F040H has a reserved number storage area (F040 vbHoryuuSP1 DEFS 1), and the reserved number storage area stores the reserved number. A random number 1 storage area is provided in the 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the address F041H (F041 vbRndHendou1 DEFS 1), and the random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 storage area. A random number 2 storage area is provided in the 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the address F042H (F042 vbRndHendou2 DEFS 1), and the random number 2 is stored in the random number 2 storage area.
<Special symbol variation time lottery processing>

  Next, the special symbol variation time lottery process in the special figure 1 related lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special symbol variation time lottery process, and FIG. 324 is an example of the program list of the special symbol variation time lottery process.

  In step S1101, effect random number acquisition processing is performed. In this effect random number acquisition process, the special figure 1 random value (0 to 255) acquired in the special figure 1 related lottery process is stored in the random value 1 storage area (RWM area address F041H). The special figure 2 random value (0 to 255) acquired in the special figure 2 related lottery process is stored in the random value 2 storage area (address F042H of the RWM area).

  In the next step S1102, the start address (1600H in this embodiment) of the table selection table (FIG. 321 (a)) is transferred to the HL register (LD HL, tableSelectTable). As a result, 1600H is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S1103, the number of reservations stored in the above-described reservation number storage area (RWM area address F040H) is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (40H)). Here, as shown in FIG. 325, the “LDT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction is an instruction for loading data at an address indicating the T register in the upper order and the immediate value in the lower order into the A register. In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (40H)” instruction is executed, an address (F040H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (40H) as the lower order. ), That is, the number of holds stored in the hold number storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the hold number stored in the hold number storage area is 2, 02H is loaded (transferred) to the A register.

  In the next step S1104, the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register (ADD A, A). In the above example, 04H is stored in the A register by adding the value (02H) of the A register to the value (02H) of the A register. In the next step S1105, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (ADDTWOONE HL, A). Although details will be described later, the ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWOONE HL, A) is an instruction for adding the 1-byte length value stored in the A register to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register. In the previous example, 1604H is stored in the HL register by adding the value (04H) of the A register to the HL register (1600H).

  In the next step S1106, the value of the address indicated by the HL register is transferred to the DE register (LDTWO DE, (HL)). Here, the “LDTWO DE, (HL)” instruction is an instruction for loading data at the address indicated by the HL register into the DE register, as shown in FIG. In the above example, 174FH is stored in the DE register by transferring the value (174FH) of the address (1604H) indicated by the HL register to the DE register.

  In the next step S1107, the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register are exchanged (EX DE, HL). In the above example, 174FH is stored in the HL register and 1604H is stored in the DE register by exchanging the value (174FH) of the DE register with the value (1604H) of the HL register.

  In the next step S1108, the random number 1 (special symbol variation time determination random number 1) stored in the random number 1 storage area is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (41H)). In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (41H)” instruction is executed, an address (7E41H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (41H) as the lower order. ), That is, random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is 250, 250 is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1109, the values stored at the next two consecutive addresses after the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the BC register (INCTENSOU BC, (HL)). As will be described in detail later, the “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction adds 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and 1 stored in the address indicated by the value of the HL register after the addition. After the byte length value is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value of the HL register after the addition is added. This is an instruction for storing the stored 1-byte value in the upper B register of the BC registers. In the above example, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (174FH) stored in the HL register, and the 1-byte length value (AEH) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (1750H) after the addition. ) Is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value (1751H) of the HL register after the addition is added. The stored 1-byte value (20) is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers.

  In the next step S1110, the value of the B register is subtracted from the value of the A register (SUB B). In the above example, the value (20) of the B register is subtracted from the value (250) of the A register. In the next step S1111, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred as a result of the subtraction in step S1110, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a negative value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1112. Are repeatedly executed until the condition is satisfied (JP NC, LOOP01). In the previous example, a carry is generated by repeating the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 three times, and when proceeding to step S1112, the value of the B register is 8, the value of the C register is B0H, and the value of the HL register is 1755H. Become.

  In the next step S1112, the value of the C register is added to the value of the HL register (ADDTWOONE). In the above example, 1805H is stored in the HL register by adding the value (B0H) of the C register to the value (1755H) of the HL register. In the next step S1113, the random number 2 (special symbol variation time determination random number 2) stored in the random number 2 storage area (F042H in the present embodiment) is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (42H)). In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (42H)” instruction is executed, an address (7E42H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (42H) as the lower order. ), That is, random number 2 stored in the random number 2 storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the random number 2 is 148, 148 is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1114, the values stored in the next two consecutive addresses after the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the BC register (INCTENSOU BC, (HL)). In the previous example, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (1805H) stored in the HL register, and the 1-byte length value (04H) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (1806H) after the addition. ) Is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value (1807H) of the HL register after the addition is added. The stored 1-byte value (128) is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers.

In the next step S1115, the value of the B register is subtracted from the value of the A register (SUB B). In the above example, the value (128) of the B register is subtracted from the value (148) of the A register. In the next step S1116, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred as a result of the subtraction in step S1115, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a negative value. If so, the process proceeds to step S1117. The processing of steps S1114 to S1116 is repeatedly executed until it corresponds (JP NC, LOOP02). In the previous example, a carry is generated by repeating the processing of steps S1114 to S1116 twice, and when proceeding to step S1117, the value of the B register is 32, the value of the C register is 05H, and the value of the HL register is 1809H. become. In step S1117, the process ends after other processes are performed. Here, as an example, the processing related to special figure 1 and special figure 2 has been described, but the same processing can be applied to, for example, the number of pending reservations and random values.
<Special instruction of main control unit>

Next, a special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 and 326. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing a part of the commands provided in the main control unit 300 and a description thereof. FIG. 326 (a) is a diagram showing the upper and lower bits of the instruction data of the main control unit 300, and FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the instruction data table.
<Special instruction / LDT instruction>

  The “LDT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, is an instruction for loading data at an address indicating the T register in the higher order and the immediate value in the lower order as described above. In step S1103 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing the “LDT A, (40H)” instruction, the address (F040H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (40H) as the lower order. Data, that is, the hold count stored in the hold count storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register.

  Although not shown, the main control unit 300 further uses “LDT (n: immediate value),” for loading the data stored in the A register into an address indicating the T register as the upper and the immediate value as the lower. A "instruction. On the other hand, an instruction (for example, an instruction such as “LDT A, H”) for loading data at an address indicating the T register as a higher order and a general-purpose register (for example, an H register) as a lower order is stored in the A register. An instruction (for example, an instruction such as “LDTH H, A”) for loading the data into an address indicating the T register as the higher order and the general-purpose register (for example, the H register) as the lower order is not provided.

That is, the lower byte of the address that can be specified by the LDT instruction is limited to an immediate value, and it is prohibited to specify a general-purpose register (an error occurs during the assembly into the machine language and the assembly cannot be performed). . For this reason, the LDT instruction makes it easy to check the address when checking the program list and the like, and the value of the T register (the upper byte of the address) cannot be changed carelessly. And the occurrence of malfunctions may be reduced.
<Special instructions / LDTWO instructions>

  As described above, the “LDTWO OP1, (OP2)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, loads the data at the addresses indicated by the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 into the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. The “LDTWO (OP2), OP1” instruction is an instruction to load the data of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1 to the address indicated by the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2, for example, In step S1106 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing the “LDTWO DE, (HL)” instruction, the value (174FH) of the address (1604H) indicated by the HL register is loaded (transferred) to the DE register. Thus, 174FH is stored in the DE register. When OP2 is a BC register or DE register that is not an HL register, OP1 becomes a BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, and only when OP2 is an HL register, OP1 becomes a BC register, DE register, HL register, AC register, AE register, BD register, IX register, IY register. The LDTWO instruction is suitable for protecting the A register and the HL register.

  In the LDTWO instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as the LDTWO instruction is performed using a conventional instruction, the required number of states is 14 (= 4 + 6 + 4) and the required number of bytes is 3 (= 1 + 1 + 1) as shown in FIG. . Therefore, if the LDTWO instruction is used when the address data indicated by the HL register is loaded into the DE register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened and the control burden can be reduced, and the amount of program code can be reduced. In some cases, the storage area of the ROM having a limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  <Special instruction / ADDTWOONE instruction>

  The ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWONE OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 into a 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for adding a 1-byte value (or a 1-byte immediate value indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the ADDTWOONE instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bits 0H (0000B) to 2H (0010B) of the instruction data table, It is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bits 4H (0100B) to 7H (0001B), 9H (1001H) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. In this embodiment, the instruction code of the special instruction is 2 bytes long, but the byte length of the instruction code is not particularly limited, and may be 1 byte, for example. Further, only a specific instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, A” instruction) among the ADDTWOONE instructions may have a shorter instruction code (for example, 1 byte length) than other ADDTWOONE instructions. Further, only a specific instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, A” instruction) in the “ADDTWOONE OP1, A” instruction may have a shorter instruction code (for example, 1 byte length) than other ADDTWOONE instructions. In this case, the convenience of the command can be improved.

  Taking the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction as an example, a value of 1 byte length stored in the C register indicated by the second operand is added to a value of 2 bytes length stored in the pair register HL indicated by the first operand. For example, in step S1112 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing “ADDTWOONE HL, C”, a 2-byte length value stored in the HL register The value of the HL register is updated to 1805H by adding the 1-byte length value (B0H) stored in the C register to (1755H). It should be noted that the ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWOONE OP1, OP2) is less likely to carry, but the 2-byte length value (for example, FF01H) stored in the HL register is a 1-byte length value (for example, FF01H). When adding (FFH), carry occurs. That is, when a carry occurs after execution of the ADDTWONE instruction (ADDTWOONE OP1, OP2), it can be determined that the H register is FFH.

  Further, in the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction, the required number of states is 8 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when processing similar to that of the “ADDTWONE HL, C” instruction is performed by a conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. = 1 + 1 + 3 + 1). Therefore, if the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction is used to add the 1-byte length value stored in the C register to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened. In addition, the control burden can be reduced and the amount of program code can be reduced, so that the storage area of the ROM having a limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the case of an 8-bit arithmetic instruction that is conventionally provided in the CPU, the addition result (subtraction result in the case of the “SUB A, E” instruction) is input to the A register as in the case of the “ADD A, E” instruction. However, by executing the ADDTWOONE instruction and changing it to the “ADDTWOONE HL, E” instruction, “ADD L, E” is enabled, and it can be preserved without using the A register. As a result of using a wide A register for other instructions, the program capacity may be reduced). In addition, after executing “LD H, 00H” instruction and transferring 00H to the H register, “ADDTWONE HL, E” instruction is executed, the value of the E register is added to the L register, and the “SRL H” instruction is issued. Executing and checking whether or not the L register has overflowed can be saved without using the A register by checking whether or not the carry flag is set (use the A register which is widely used for other instructions) As a result, the program capacity may be reduced).

  In other words, the “ADD A, L” instruction can be executed, the “ADD L, A” instruction cannot be executed, but the “ADDTWONE HL, A” instruction can be executed. By increasing the number of instructions in the instruction set by one, it is possible to increase the number of registers that can store the addition results of 8-bit operations and also enable 16-bit to 8-bit operations. Two functions can be realized.

  In other words, the addition instruction “specific register pair ← specific register pair + specific register” is included in the instruction set, and the lower register of the specific register pair is different from the 8-bit arithmetic accumulator.

  Conventionally, since it was not desired to increase the number of instructions in the instruction set, only 16-bit arithmetic and 8-bit arithmetic are mounted. Further, the 16-bit accumulator is only a specific register pair among a plurality of register pairs, and the 8-bit accumulator is Although only a specific register among a plurality of registers is used, a plurality of functions can be realized with a small increase in the number of instructions.

  Also, in order to check whether the HL register is 0, conventionally, after the value of the H register is transferred to the A register with the “LD A, H” instruction, the “OR A, L” instruction is executed and then the 0 flag is set. Whether or not the HL register is 0 is confirmed. That is, since an 8-bit operation is executed to check whether it is 0, an 8-bit operation accumulator (in this case, the A register) has been used. However, it is not necessary to use the A register by checking whether or not the 0 flag is set after the “ADDTWOONE HL, n (00H)” instruction. That is, the “ADDTWONE HL, n” instruction has a function of adding an 8-bit direct value to a 16-bit register pair, a function of checking whether the 16-bit register pair is 0, and a function of preserving the A register. I have. Further, since direct values are used for the instructions, the readability of the program source can be improved.

  <Special instruction / INCENSOU instruction>

  The INCTENSOU instruction (INCTENSOU OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, adds 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2, and the value of the two registers after the addition The 1-byte length value stored at the address indicated by is stored in the lower register of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1, and then stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2. 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value, and the 1-byte length value stored in the address indicated by the two register values after the addition is added to the higher order of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for storing in a register. The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the INCENSOU instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to 9H (10001B) of the instruction data table, The higher order bit DH (1101B) and the lower order bits 4H (0100B) to 6H (0110B) are assigned to the instruction data table. In this example, the code of the machine instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 is a serial number (for example, the code of the “INCTENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD4H, the code of the “INCTENSOU AE, (HL)” is EDD5H). ing. Also, a machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “INCENSOU AE, (HL)” instruction is EDD5H) among instructions including an accumulator in the first operand OP1, and an accumulator is included in the first operand OP1. Among the non-instructions, the machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “INCENSOU BD, (HL)” instruction is EDD6H) is serialized. In addition, a machine instruction code of a plurality of INCENSOU instructions (for example, “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction code is ED18H, “INTCENSOU DE, ( HL) "instruction code is ED19H) and the machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction among the instructions that do not include an accumulator in the first operand OP1 (for example, the code of the" INCTENSOU BD, (HL) "instruction is EDD6H) And the numbers apart. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  For example, in the case of the “INCENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand, and the value is indicated by the value of the pair register HL after the addition. After the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) is stored in the lower register C of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand, 2 stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand Further, 1 is added to the byte length value, and the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the pair register HL after the addition is the higher order of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand. This is an instruction for storing in the register B. The INCENSOU instruction is suitable for transferring a value stored in an address subsequent to the address indicated by the value of the HL register to the register. In addition, the INCENSOU instruction determines whether to repeat the instruction based on the value stored in the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register after execution of the instruction. It is suitable to use the instruction because the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register can be set to the next address by adding 1 to the HL register by the instruction.

  For example, in step S1109 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (174FH) stored in the HL register by executing “INCENSOUBC, (HL)”. The 1-byte length value (AEH) stored at the address indicated by the value (1750H) of the later HL register is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, and then the 2-byte length stored in the HL register. 1 is added to the value of 1 and the 1-byte length value (20) stored at the address indicated by the value of the HL register (1751H) after addition is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers. Yes.

  In the “INCENSOUBC BC, (HL)” instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as the INCENSOU instruction is performed by the conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 325, the required number of states is 26 states (= 6 + 7 + 6 + 7), and the required number of bytes is 4 bytes (= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1). . Therefore, when the value stored in the next two consecutive addresses after the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the BC register, the processing time of the control program can be obtained by using the “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction. In addition, it is possible to reduce the control burden and reduce the amount of program code, and in some cases, it is possible to effectively use the storage area of the ROM with a limited memory capacity.

  Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the INCENSOOU instruction is repeatedly executed in the loop processing of steps S1109 to S1111 or the loop processing of steps S1114 to S1116, so that the effect of reducing the processing speed is high. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  <Special instruction / TENSOUINC instruction>

  The TENSOUINC instruction (TENSOUINC OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, indicates the 1-byte length value stored in the address indicated by the two register values indicated by the second operand OP2 by the first operand OP1. Two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 after adding 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 The 1-byte length value stored at the address indicated by the value is stored in the upper register of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1, and is stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2. This is an instruction for adding 1 to a 2-byte length value. The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the TENSOUINC instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 6H (0110B) to 7H (0111B) of the instruction data table, The higher order bit DH (1101B) and the lower order bits 0H (0000B) to 2H (0010B) of the instruction data table are assigned. In this example, the code of the machine instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 is a serial number (for example, the code of “TENSOUINC AC, (HL)” is EDD0H, and the code of “TENSOUINC AE, (HL)” is EDD1H). ing. Also, a machine instruction code of a specific TENSOUINC instruction (for example, “TENSOUINC AE, (HL)” instruction code is EDD1H) among instructions including an accumulator in the first operand OP1, and an accumulator is included in the first operand OP1. Among the non-instructions, a machine instruction code of a specific TENSOUINC instruction (for example, a code of “TENSOUINC BD, (HL)” instruction is EDD2H) is serialized. Also, the machine instruction code of a plurality of TENSOUINC instructions (for example, “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction code is ED16H, “TENSOUINC DE, ( HL) "instruction code is ED17H), and a specific TENSOUINC instruction machine instruction code (eg," TENSOUINC BD, (HL) "instruction code is EDD2H) among instructions that do not include an accumulator in the first operand OP1. And the numbers apart. In addition, the TENSOUINC instruction and the INCENSOU instruction have the same number of instructions in the first operand OP1 in the TENSOUINC instruction than the INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction is ED16H, “INCTENSOU BC, (HL) "instruction code is ED18H). Also, the machine instruction code of the TENSOUINC instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 (for example, the code of “TENSOUIC AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD0H) and the machine instruction of the INCTENSOU instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 Codes (for example, the code of the “INCTENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD4H) and / or before and after the machine instruction code of the instruction other than the TENSOUINC instruction and the INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code EDD3H) Yes.

  Taking the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction as an example, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the pair register HL indicated by the second operand is indicated by the first operand. The value of the pair register HL indicated by the second operand is stored in the lower register C of the pair register BC and 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand. 1 byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by is stored in the upper register B of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand, and is stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand. This is an instruction for adding 1 to a 2-byte length value. The TENSOUINC instruction is suitable for transferring a value stored in an address after the address indicated by the value of the HL register to the register. In addition, when the TENSOUINC instruction determines whether to repeat the instruction depending on whether or not the value of the B register is 0 after the execution of the instruction, if it is determined to repeat, the HL register is incremented by 1 before the determination. Is suitable for using the instruction. Even when the repeated processing is not performed, after the TENSOUINC instruction, the next process can be performed in the state in which the value of the HL register is incremented by 1, so that the instruction is suitable.

In the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as that of the TENSOUINC instruction is performed by the conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 325, the required number of states is 26 states (= 7 + 6 + 7 + 6), and the required number of bytes is 4 bytes (= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1). . Therefore, when transferring the address indicated by the value of the HL register and the value stored at the next address to the BC register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened by using the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction. In addition to reducing the control burden, the amount of program code can be reduced, and the ROM storage area with limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind. Note that both the INCENSOU instruction and the TENSOUINC instruction may be provided to be executable in the CPU, or only one of them may be provided to be executable.
<Special instruction / CPT instruction>

  The “CPT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, is an instruction for comparing the contents of the A register with the data at the address indicating the T register as the upper level and the immediate value as the lower level. When “CPT A, (40H)” is executed while F0H is stored in the T register, the contents of the A register are compared with the data at the address (F040H) indicating the T register as the upper level and the immediate value as the lower level. .

  <Special Instruction / ADDONETWO Instruction>

  The ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 in the 1-byte length value stored in the register indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for adding a 2-byte length value (or an immediate value of 2-byte length indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the ADDONETWO instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bit AH (1010B) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. Note that the ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2) is easy to carry, and a 1-byte length value (eg, 00H) stored in the A register is a 2-byte length value (eg, 0100H) stored in the HL register. ) Adds a carry. That is, when the H register is other than 00H, a carry can be generated by executing an ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2). Note that both the ADDTWOONE instruction and the ADDONETWO instruction may be provided in the CPU, or only one of them may be provided.

  <Special instruction / SUBTWOONE instruction>

The SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 from the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for subtracting a 1-byte value (or a 1-byte immediate value indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the SUBTWOONE instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bit 8H (1000B) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. The SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2) is difficult to carry, but a 2-byte length value (for example, 0001H) stored in the HL register to a 1-byte length value (for example, 0001H) When subtracting (FFH), a carry occurs. That is, if a carry occurs after executing the SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2), it can be determined that the H register is 00H.
<Modification of data table>

  Next, a modified example of the above-described data table will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a modification of the table selection table, the first fluctuation pattern selection table, and the second fluctuation pattern selection table, and corresponds to FIG. 321 described above.

  In the first variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 11B, the item of the number of random numbers is changed to the item of the upper limit of the random numbers as compared with the first variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Further, in the second variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 10C, the value of the number of random numbers is changed with respect to the second variation pattern selection table shown in FIG.

  <Modified example of special symbol variation time lottery processing>

  Next, a modified example of the special symbol variation time lottery process shown in FIG. 323 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process which concerns on a modification.

  In the special symbol variation time lottery process according to this modified example, the process of step S1109 and the process of step S1114 using the “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” command of the special symbol variation time lottery process shown in FIG. The processing is changed to the processing in step S1150 using the “AC, (HL)” instruction or the processing in step S1152, and the above-described CPT instruction is used in steps S1151 and S1153.

  Specifically, in step S1150, the values stored at two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the AC register (INCTENSOU AC, (HL)). For example, when the value of the HL register is 174FH, the value stored in the two consecutive addresses (1750H, 1751H) next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the AC register, so that the A register 19 and AEH are stored in the C register.

  In the next step S1151, by executing “CPT A, (41H)”, the contents of the A register, the data of the address (F041H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the upper level, and the immediate value (41H) as the lower level, That is, the random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is compared (the random number 1 is subtracted from the value of the A register). In the next step S1154, it is determined whether or not a carry occurs as a result of the comparison (subtraction) in step S1151, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a positive value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1112. If not applicable, the processing of steps S1150 to S1151 is repeatedly executed until it is applicable.

  In step S1152, the values stored in the two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the AC register (INCENSOU AC, (HL)). For example, when the value of the HL register is 17FFH, the value stored in the two consecutive addresses (1800H and 1801H) next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the AC register, so that the A register 255 and 01H are stored in the C register.

In the next step S1153, by executing “CPT A, (42H)”, the contents of the A register, the data of the address (F042H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order, and the immediate value (42H) as the lower order, That is, the random number 2 stored in the random number 2 storage area is compared (the random number 2 is subtracted from the value of the A register). In the next step S1155, as a result of the comparison (subtraction) in step S1153, it is determined whether or not a carry occurs, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has a positive value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1117. If not applicable, the processing of steps S1152 to S1153 is repeatedly executed until it is applicable.
<Initial setting process>

  Next, the initial setting process executed in the initial setting 2 (step S107) of the main control unit main process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 329 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an initial setting data table stored in the ROM 306, and FIG. 329 (b) is a diagram showing a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 after the initial setting processing. FIG. 6C is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting process. FIG. 330 is an example of a program list for the initial setting process.

  In step S1201, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the HL register by the above-described TENSOUINC instruction (“TENSOUINC BD, (HL)”) is converted into the lower D register of the BD register. After adding 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the HL register value is 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, for example, the initial address of the initial setting data table shown in FIG. In this case, F0H is stored in the D register and 3 is stored in the B register.

  In the next step S1202, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the HL register by the above-mentioned TENSOUINC instruction (“TENSOUINC AE, (HL)”) After storing 1 in the 2-byte length value stored in the E register and the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the HL register value is stored in the AE register. 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, for example, in the above example, the E register has a value 17H stored in 100FH. The A register stores 01H, which is the value stored in 1010, and the value in the HL register is updated to 1011H.

  In the next step S1203, the value of the A register is stored in the address (DE) indicated by the value of the DE register. In the previous example, 01H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in 7E17H of the RAM 308, which is the address indicated by the value of the DE register (see FIG. 5B).

  In the next step S1204, 1 is subtracted from the value of the B register, and the processing of steps S1202 to S1203 is repeatedly executed until the subtraction result becomes 0 (relative jump to the processing address of step S1202 is executed). If the subtraction result is 0, the process proceeds to step S1205.

  In the above example, when the B register is 2, 20H which is the value stored in 1011H is stored in the E register and the value stored in 1012H is stored in the A register by the processing in step S1202. 16H is stored, the value of the HL register is updated to 1013H, and the value of 16H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in F020H of the RAM 308, which is the address indicated by the value of the DE register, by the processing of step S1203 (same figure). (See (b)).

  If the B register is 1, 3AH which is the value stored in 1013H is stored in the E register and 06H which is the value stored in 1014H is stored in the A register by the processing in step S1202. The value of the HL register is updated to 1015H, and the value of 06H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in F03AH of the RAM 308, which is the address indicated by the value of the DE register, by the processing of step S1203 ((b) in the figure). reference). The game settings (various information used for game control) stored in F017H, F020H, and F03AH include, for example, power status, payout control command processing type, display display status, etc., and the number of game settings is There may be more than one or only one. In addition, the initial setting process (moDataSet) is performed by setting the value of the HL register at the start of processing (the address set in the HL register is set to the head address of another table different from the initial setting data table). Therefore, it may be handled as a general-purpose data setting processing module that can be called from a plurality of processes (for example, can be called using an HL register as an argument). In this case, the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  In this initial setting process, since the TENSOUINC instruction is used in steps S1201 and S1202, the number of states can be reduced from the conventional 26 states to 14 states, the processing time can be shortened, and the number of bytes can be reduced. Can be reduced from the conventional 4 bytes to 2 bytes, and the program capacity can be reduced. In particular, in this example, since the TENSOUINC instruction is repeatedly executed in the loop processing of steps S1202 to S204, the effect of reducing the processing speed is high.

  Also, among the TENSOUINC instructions, the instruction (in this embodiment, TENSOUINC AC, (HL), TENSOUINC AE, (HL)) having a pair of the A register (accumulator) and another register as an operand is the value of the A register. At the same time, the upper byte register (B register and D register in this embodiment) of the pair register (BC register and DE register in this embodiment) is fixed, while the lower byte register (this embodiment) of the pair register is fixed. In the embodiment, only the values of the C register and the E register can be changed, so that more advanced programming than before can be performed, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Among the TENSOUINC instructions, the upper byte register (B register in the present embodiment) of the first pair register (BC register in the present embodiment) and the second pair register (DE register in the present embodiment) ) Instruction (TENSOUINC BD, (HL) in this embodiment) having a pair of registers (D register in this embodiment) as operands is higher in the first pair register and the second pair register. Since only the byte register value can be changed, more advanced programming than before is possible, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Also, among the TENSOUINC instructions, instructions including the B register in the operand (TENSOUINC BC, (HL), TENSOUINC BD, (HL) in the present embodiment) are used, and steps S1202 to S1204 of the above-described initial setting process are used. If the B register is used to determine the number of times loop processing is performed as in the case of loop processing, the program capacity of the loop processing can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Note that the CPU 304 can execute both the TENSOUINC instruction and the INCTENSOU instruction, and the game control program executes both the table search by the first instruction (TENSOUINC) and the table search by the second instruction (INCTENSOU). Also good.

  The “table search” may have a meaning as a general term. For example, a table including one or more rows and one or more columns (for example, the first variation pattern selection table of FIG. 321 and FIG. 327). The second variation pattern selection table (initial setting data table of FIG. 329) may be used to search for a corresponding row, and the process of retrieving the value of one or more columns of the row may be indicated. It is good also as processing which derives the position (for example, line number). Similarly, a process for finding a corresponding column and extracting a value of one or a plurality of rows of the column may be indicated, or a process for deriving a column position (for example, a column number) in the table of the searched column. Good.

The process of finding the corresponding row here corresponds to the specific row when the value or values you are looking for match or relate to the value of one or more specific columns in the specific row in the table. It is also possible to perform processing such as making a line to be executed. The process for finding the corresponding column may be the same.
<Second special instruction of main control unit>

  Next, the second special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 331 (a) is a diagram illustrating a part of the second special instruction included in the main control unit 300.

  <Second special instruction / CPRT instruction (operation + return instruction)>

  The “CPRTZ r” instruction (or “CPRTZ (rr)” instruction), which is one of the second special instructions, is a register indicated by the operand r (or an address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). 0 is subtracted from the value stored in (1) and the Z flag is set to 1 (when the subtraction result is 0. The same applies hereinafter), the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer PC is After loading (returning) the data stored in the lower address of the program counter PC and the data stored in the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer PC to the upper address of the program counter PC, two stack pointers PC are added and then the Z flag is added. Is set to 1 and the Z flag is cleared to 0 (when the subtraction result is other than 0. The same applies hereinafter) ), The address of the subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC, and then the Z flag is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the timing for setting the program counter PC and the timing for clearing the Z flag to 0 may be reversed or simultaneous.

  Also, the “CPRTNZ r” instruction (or “CPRTNZ (rr)” instruction) is 0 from the value stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). When the Z flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer PC is stored in the lower address of the program counter PC and in the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer PC. When the stored data is loaded (returned) to the upper address of the program counter PC, the stack pointer PC is added by two, the Z flag is cleared to 0, and the Z flag is set to 1. Set the Z flag to 1 after setting the address of subsequent processing in the program counter PC It is an instruction to do. The register indicated by the operand r includes B, C, D, E, H, and L registers, and the pair register indicated by the operand rr includes BC, DE, and HL (the next CPJR instruction) The same).

  <Second special instruction / CPJR instruction (operation + jump instruction)>

  The “CPJRZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJPZ (rr), e” instruction), which is one of the second special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). 0 is subtracted from the value stored in the stored address), and when the Z flag is set to 1, the Z flag is jumped to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a value from +127 to -128) Is set to 1 and the Z flag is cleared to 0, the address of the subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC and then the Z flag is cleared to 0. The “CPJRNZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJPNZ (rr), e” instruction) subtracts 0 from the value stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register indicated by the operand rr), When the Z flag is cleared to 0, after jumping to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a value from +127 to -128), the Z flag is cleared to 0 and the Z flag is set to 1 In this case, the Z flag is set to 1 after the address of subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC.

  The “CPJRC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJRC (rr), n, e” instruction) is an address stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). ) Is subtracted from the value stored in (8-bit immediate value), and when the C flag is set to 1 (when the subtraction result is 0, the same applies hereinafter), the program counter PC + e (e Jumps to the address indicated by +127 to -128) and then sets the C flag to 1 and the C flag is cleared to 0 (when the subtraction result is other than 0. The same applies hereinafter) This is an instruction for setting the C flag to 0 after setting the address of the subsequent processing in the program counter PC. Further, the “CPJRNC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJRNC (rr), n, e” instruction) is an address stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). ) Is subtracted from the value stored in (8-bit immediate value), and when the C flag is cleared to 0, the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a numerical value of +127 to −128) This instruction clears the C flag to 0 after the jump and sets the C flag to 1 after setting the address of the subsequent processing in the program counter PC when the C flag is set to 1.

FIG. 331 (b) shows the state of the flag register before and after executing the second special instruction. The main control unit 300 includes an 8-bit flag register having an S flag, a Z flag, an SZ flag, an H flag, a P / V flag, an N flag, and a C flag. The S flag, Z flag, SZ flag, H flag, and C flag included in this flag register are set to 1 or cleared to 0 by execution of the second special instruction or execution of other arithmetic logic operation instructions. .
<Process using CPJR instruction>

  Next, processing using the CPJR instruction will be described. FIG. 332 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing using the CPJR instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, after executing the process X, the CPJR instruction is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process jumps to the process Z. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent module Processing for executing processing Y is performed.

  Here, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied” means that the Z flag is set to 1 if the above-mentioned “CPJRZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJRZ (rr), e” instruction) is used. If the above-described “CPJPNZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJRNZ (rr), e” instruction), the Z flag is cleared to 0. If the above-mentioned “CPJRC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJPC (rr), n, e” instruction) is used, the C flag is set to 1, and “CPJRNC” In the case of the “r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJPNC (rr), n, e” instruction), the C flag is cleared to 0.

  When the contents of the flag register in the process X performed before the execution of the CPJR instruction are the first contents α, the contents of the flag register in the subsequent processes Y and Z are changed to the second contents α by executing the CPJR instruction. The content changes to β. However, in this embodiment, in addition to not referring to the contents of the flag register during the execution of the CPJR instruction, the contents of the flag register changed by the CPJR instruction are also referred to in the processes Y and Z after the execution of the CPJR instruction. It is configured to perform the processing without doing.

  In this way, in addition to not referring to the contents of the flag register during the execution of the CPJR instruction, the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPJR instruction. If the processing is performed without referring to the contents, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of the program execution can be eliminated, the analysis of the program becomes difficult, and unauthorized program tampering can occur. Can be prevented. In this example, the contents of the flag register are not referred to during the execution of the CPJR instruction. However, the contents of the flag register are referred to during the execution of the CPJR instruction, and in a predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPJR instruction. Even if the processing is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register changed before the execution of the CPJR instruction, the same effect may be obtained (the same applies hereinafter).

  FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a program using a conventional instruction, and FIG. 333 (b) is an example of a program using a CPJR instruction. For example, when a program for determining whether the value of the A register is 0 or other than 0 and jumping to a predetermined process when the value of the A register is 0, the conventional program shown in FIG. Then, it is necessary to realize by two instructions of an AND instruction (AND A) shown in (1-1) and a JR instruction (JRZ, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (1-2). In the program of this embodiment shown, the same processing is realized by only one CPJR instruction (CPJRZ A, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (2-1).

  In this way, if the CPJR instruction is used to determine whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied and a program that jumps to a predetermined process when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the program code can be reduced as compared with the conventional case. In some cases, limited memory can be used effectively.

  In the program of this embodiment shown in FIG. 5B, in the processing Y and processing Z after execution of the CPJR instruction (CPJRZ A, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (2-1), the flag register changed by the CPJR instruction is changed. Processing is performed without referring to the contents at all. In this way, if the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPJR instruction, the predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPJR instruction is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register. The relationship between the change in the contents of the program and the flow of execution of the program can be eliminated, the analysis of the program is difficult, and the analysis of the illegal program can be prevented in advance.

  In the process V following the process Z of the program of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 6B, the flag register changed by another instruction (in this example, the “OR (HL)” instruction) after the execution of the CPJR instruction. Processing (in this example, a JR instruction) based on the contents (in this example, the contents of the Z flag) is performed. In this way, if the process Z that does not refer to the contents of the flag register and the process V that refers to the contents of the flag register are continued, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution may be complicated. In some cases, it is difficult to analyze a program, and an unauthorized program can be prevented from being analyzed.

  Furthermore, in this example, the LD instruction (load instruction) is executed in the process Z. However, since the LD instruction is one of the instructions that changes the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after the instruction is executed, “ After execution of the “LD A, (HL)” instruction, the Z flag does not change, but the SZ flag changes. On the other hand, in the subsequent process V, “JR Z, ITmrRnwCtL040” is executed. Here, the branch process is performed by referring to the Z flag that has not been changed by the execution of the “LD A, (HL)” instruction of process Z. It is carried out.

  In this way, a first instruction (for example, CPJR instruction) that changes the values of a plurality of flags including the SZ flag and the Z flag is executed, and a second instruction (for example, a DEC A instruction) that does not refer to the flag is executed. Execute a third instruction (for example, an LD instruction) in which only one of the Z flag and the SZ flag changes, and a fourth instruction (for example, refer to the flag that has not changed (changed)) , JR Z instruction), the relationship between the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution can be complicated, making it difficult to analyze programs and analyzing illegal programs. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  FIG. 334 is a diagram illustrating an example of another process using the CPJR instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, after executing the process X, the CPJR instruction is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process jumps to the second module different from the first module and performs the process Z. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent process Y is executed. As described above, when a program that jumps to a predetermined process when a predetermined condition is satisfied using the CPJR instruction, the program may be jumped to not only the process in the same module but also the process of another module. .

FIG. 335 is a diagram illustrating an example of another process using the CPJR instruction including the process V described above. In the second module shown in the figure, after executing the process Z, an arithmetic logic operation instruction is executed, and a branch process is performed based on the content γ of the flag register changed by the execution of the instruction. In this way, processing based on the flag register changed by execution of the CPJR instruction is not performed, and processing based on the flag register changed by execution of an instruction other than the CPJR instruction (in this example, an arithmetic logic operation instruction) is performed. With this configuration, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution can be complicated, making it difficult to analyze the program and preventing unauthorized program analysis in some cases.
<Process using CPRT instruction>

  Next, processing using the CPRT instruction will be described. FIG. 336 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing using a CPRT instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, the CALL instruction is executed to call the second module, the process X is executed in the second module of the call destination, the CPRT instruction is executed, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Returning to the first module of the caller, the process Z is performed. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent process Y is executed.

  Here, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied” means that the Z flag is set to 1 if the above-described “CPRTZ r” instruction (or “CPRTZ (rr)” instruction) is used. If it is the above-mentioned “CPRTNZ r” instruction (or “CPRTNZ (rr)” instruction), the Z flag is cleared to 0.

  When the contents of the flag register in the process X performed before the execution of the CPRT instruction is the first contents α, the contents of the flag register in the subsequent process Y and process Z are changed to the second contents α by executing the CPRT instruction. The content changes to β. However, in addition to not referring to the flag register during execution of the CPRT instruction, processing Y and processing Z after execution of the CPRT instruction are performed without referring to the contents of the flag register changed by the CPRT instruction. It is configured.

  In this way, in addition to not referring to the flag register during the execution of the CPRT instruction, the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPRT instruction, while the contents of the flag register are determined in a predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPRT instruction. If the processing is performed without referring to, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of the program execution can be eliminated, making the analysis of the program difficult and the analysis of the illegal program in advance. Sometimes it can be prevented.

  FIG. 337 (a) shows an example of a program using a CPRT instruction, and FIG. 337 (b) shows an example of a program using a conventional instruction. For example, when it is determined whether the value of the A register is 0 or other than 0, and a program that returns (returns) to a predetermined process when the value of the A register is 0 is shown in FIG. The conventional program needs to be realized by two instructions, ie, an AND instruction (AND A) shown in (1-1) and a RET instruction (RET Z) shown in (1-2). In the program of the present embodiment shown, the same processing is realized by only one CPRT instruction (CPRTZ A) shown in (2-1).

  In this way, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a program that returns (returns) to a predetermined process when a predetermined condition is satisfied is used, a CPRT instruction is used, so that the program code is reduced as compared with the conventional case. In some cases, limited memory can be used effectively.

  In the program of this embodiment shown in FIG. 9A, in the processing Y and processing Z after execution of the CPRT instruction (CPRTZ A) shown in (2-1), the contents of the flag register changed by the CPRT instruction are displayed. It is configured to perform processing without referring to it at all. In this way, if the contents of the flag register are changed by execution of the CPRT instruction, while the predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPRT instruction is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register, the flag register The relationship between the change in the contents of the program and the flow of execution of the program can be eliminated, the analysis of the program is difficult, and the analysis of the illegal program can be prevented in advance.

In the process V following the process Z of the program of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 6A, a process based on the contents of the flag register changed by another instruction after the execution of the CPRT instruction is performed. In this way, if the process Z that does not refer to the contents of the flag register and the process V that refers to the contents of the flag register are continued, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution may be complicated. In some cases, it is difficult to analyze a program, and an unauthorized program can be prevented from being analyzed.
<Third special instruction of main control unit>

Next, the third special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram illustrating a part of the third special instruction included in the main control unit 300.
<Third special instruction / RES instruction>

  One of the third special instructions, “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7), of the values stored in the register indicated by the second operand r, of the bit indicated by m. This instruction prohibits access and resets the bit n (n is a numerical value of 0 to 7 excluding m) indicated by the first operand to 0. In addition, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7) is a value stored at the address stored in the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr). In this instruction, access to the bit indicated by m is prohibited, and n bits (n is a numerical value of 0 to 7 excluding m) indicated by the first operand are reset to 0.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 339 (a), the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction has a bit (in this example, a bit) indicated by m among values stored in the L register indicated by the second operand L. 2) is an instruction for prohibiting access and resetting bit 2 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, bit 2 of the L register is not reset to 0. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES2Z 4, L” instruction is a bit indicated by m (in this example, bit bit) among the values stored in the L register indicated by the second operand L. 2) is an instruction that prohibits access and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, access to bit 2 of the L register is prohibited, but bit 4 is reset to 0. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction is stored in the address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL). Among these values, this is an instruction that prohibits access to the bit indicated by m (bit 2 in this example) and resets bit 2 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, the instruction is stored in F010H. Bit 2 of the value being set is not reset to zero. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES2Z 4, (HL)” instruction is stored in the address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL). Among these values, this is an instruction that prohibits access to the bit indicated by m (bit 2 in this example) and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, the instruction is stored in F010H. Access to bit 2 of the current value is prohibited, but bit 4 is reset to 0.

  According to such a RES instruction, access to a predetermined bit can be prohibited and other bits can be reset to 0 at the same time. Therefore, the numerical value of the predetermined bit can be protected, and the predetermined bit can be expected. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a malfunction occurs due to a change to a numerical value that does not occur.

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing an extracted part corresponding to the RES instruction in the instruction map of the main control unit 300. As described above, the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are instructions that access to bit 2 is prohibited and bit 2 cannot be reset (because they are substantially meaningless instructions). ), As indicated by the thick-lined square in the figure, the 25H portion corresponding to the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the 26H portion corresponding to the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are free areas. . Thus, by providing an empty area in a part of the instruction map, it may be difficult to analyze a program (machine language) using the instruction map.
<Modification 1 of RES instruction>

  FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating a RES instruction according to the first modification. A “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254), which is a modification of the RES instruction, has a decimal number m of 1 among the values stored in the register indicated by the second operand r. Access to a bit that is set to 1 when converted to a binary number of bytes is prohibited, and bit n (n is not set to 1 when m is converted to a binary number of 1 byte) Bit) is reset to 0. The “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) is a decimal number among the values stored in the address stored in the pair register indicated by the second operand rr. Access to bits that are set to 1 when m is converted to a 1-byte binary number and n bits (n is set when m is converted to a binary number) indicated by the first operand This is an instruction to reset the bit number (not yet) to 0.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), the “RES2Z 4, L” instruction changes the decimal number 2 from the values stored in the register L indicated by the second operand L to a 1-byte binary number. This instruction prohibits access to a bit (bit 1 in this example) that is set when converted, and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0. Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES3Z 4, L” instruction converts the decimal number 3 from the value stored in the register L indicated by the second operand L to a 1-byte binary number. This is an instruction that prohibits access to bits set to 1 when converted (bit 1 and bit 0 in this example) and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0.

  FIG. 344 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program using the RES instruction according to the first modification. As described above, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) is a value stored at the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr). Among them, access to a bit set to 1 when a decimal number m is converted to a 1-byte binary number is prohibited, and n bits (n is a value converted to a binary number) indicated by the first operand This is a command for resetting the bit number (sometimes 1 is not set) to 0.

  Accordingly, the “RES251Z 2 (= ebCS20pnSGt), (HL)” instruction shown in (3-1) in the figure is an address stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL) (in this example, Of the values stored in F096H (= v0ptCS2)), bits that are set to 1 when the decimal number 251 is converted into a 1-byte binary number (in this example, bits 0 to 1, 3 to 7) This instruction prohibits access and resets the bit (bit 2 in this example) indicated by the first operand to 0.

According to such a RES instruction, while prohibiting access to a predetermined bit, other bits can be reset to 0 at the same time, so that the numerical value of the predetermined bit can be protected. (For example, CLR instruction, SET instruction, RES instruction, BIT instruction, etc.) It is possible to prevent a situation in which a predetermined bit is changed to an unexpected numerical value due to a coding error or the like, and debugging or test work can be prevented. May be shortened, and stable game control may be performed. In addition, since the bit for which access is prohibited can be designated by a decimal number, analysis of the program may be difficult.
<Modification 2 of RES instruction>

  FIG. 345 is a diagram illustrating a RES instruction according to the second modification. A “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7), which is a modification of the RES instruction, is a bit indicated by m among the values stored in the pair register including the register indicated by the second operand r. And the bit n (n is a numerical value of 0 to 8 excluding m) indicated by the first operand is reset to 0. In addition, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7) is stored in an address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr) and an address consecutive to this address. An instruction that prohibits access to the bit indicated by m in the 2-byte length value and resets the bit n indicated by the first operand (where n is a numerical value of 0 to 8 excluding m) to 0. is there.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 346, the “RES2Z 8, L” instruction is a bit (bit 2) indicated by 2 among the values stored in the pair register HL including the register L indicated by the second operand L. Is an instruction that resets bit 8 (in this example, bit 0 of the H register, which is the upper byte of the HL register) indicated by the first operand to 0.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 347, the “RES2Z 8, (HL)” instruction is sent to the address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL). Of the 2-byte length values stored in successive addresses (F011H in this example), access to the bit indicated by 2 (bit 2) is prohibited, and bit 8 indicated by the first operand (in this example) , Bit 0 value of the value stored in F011H consecutive to F010H) is reset to 0.

FIG. 348 is a diagram in which a portion corresponding to the RES instruction according to Modification 2 is extracted from the instruction map of the main control unit 300. As described above, the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are instructions in which access to bit 2 is prohibited and bit 2 cannot be reset. Instead of these instructions, a “RES2Z 8, L” instruction and a “RES2Z 8, (HL)” instruction are assigned. Thus, by making the order of arrangement of a part of the instruction map irregular, it may be difficult to analyze the program (machine language).
<Other Modifications of RES Instruction>

  FIG. 349 is a diagram showing another modification example of the RES instruction. For example, in the RES instruction shown in FIG. 5A, in the “RESmZ n, r” instruction or “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) in the above-described modification example 1, The numerical value m is changed so that 0 can be designated. When 0 is designated, access to all bits is permitted. In the RES instruction shown in FIG. 5B, in the “RESmZ n, r” instruction or the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) in the above-described modification 1, The numerical value m is changed so that the specification can be omitted. When the specification is omitted, access to all bits is permitted.

  FIG. 350 (a) is a diagram showing an instruction map when an RES instruction that does not prohibit access of a predetermined bit is provided, and an instruction map when an RES instruction that prohibits access of a predetermined bit is provided. As described above, the program (machine) is changed by changing the order of arrangement of a part of the instruction map between the case where the RES instruction which does not prohibit the access of the predetermined bit is provided and the case where the RES instruction which prohibits the access of the predetermined bit is provided. Word) may be difficult to analyze.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example in which the numerical order of the first operand of the RES instruction is different from the arrangement order of the instruction map of the RES instruction. Thus, by assigning the RES instruction to the instruction map so that the numerical values of the first operand of the RES instruction are irregularly arranged as 8 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7, the program (machine language) May be difficult to analyze.
<Specific examples of user programs>

  Next, a specific example of the above user program will be described. As described above, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the user mode, instructions stored after 0000H, which is the first address of the first area of the ROM area, are sequentially executed to start the user program.

  FIG. 351 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a program startup setting process that is a part of the user program, and FIG. 351 (b) shows an example of a power-on setting process that is a part of the user program. It is a figure. In the user program shown in the figure, a program start setting process (instructions stored at addresses 0000H to 0005H) is first executed to set a stack pointer and an interrupt mode, and then a power-on setting process. It is configured to jump to (address 0062H). In the power-on process, instructions stored after the address 0062H are sequentially executed, thereby permitting operation to the WDT, setting an initial value, and monitoring the power supply voltage.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing a part of a user program corresponding to the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt signal is input from the counter timer 312, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the interrupt vector table as shown in the figure and jumps to the address defined in the interrupt vector table. In this example, the program jumps to an address 040AH defined corresponding to the timer interrupt. In the main control unit timer interrupt processing, the instructions stored after the address 040AH are sequentially executed, so that register saving and various processes shown in FIGS. Is called.
<Fourth special instruction of main controller>

Next, the fourth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 353 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the fourth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 and the ROM area of the main control unit 300.
<4th special instruction / RST instruction>

  The “RST” instruction, which is one of the fourth special instructions, is an instruction for jumping to a fixed address by setting a fixed address in the program counter PC.

  In this embodiment, eight types of RST instructions having different addresses stored in the program counter PC are provided, and the instruction data of the RST instruction is composed of a 5-bit instruction code (opcode) and a 3-bit operand. Yes. Specifically, the 7 bits of 7 types of RST instructions of instruction data C8H to F8H, 5 bits of 2 to 0 are the 3 bits of the RST instruction's instruction code (opcode) and the other 5 to 3 bits. (A portion surrounded by a bold line) indicates a part of a jump destination address (in this example, bits 5 to 3) that can be branched by executing each RST instruction as an operand. Address bits 2 to 0 are fixed to 0).

  For example, since bits 5 to 3 of the RST instruction of the instruction data C8H are 001B, bits 5 to 3 of the jump destination address are 001B and bits 2 to 0 are 0 (fixed), that is, 0008H. Since the bits 5 to 3 of the RST instruction of the instruction data D0H are 010B, it indicates that bits 5 to 3 of the jump destination address are 010B and bits 2 to 0 are 0 (fixed), that is, 0010H. ing. Further, jump destination addresses of other RST instructions are as shown in the figure.

  On the other hand, bits 7-6 and 2-0 of the RST instruction of the instruction data C0H indicate the instruction code (operand) of the RST instruction, and other 3 bits (enclosed by bold lines) of bits 5-3. Indicates a jump destination address that can be branched by executing this RST instruction (in this example, 0040H that cannot be predicted from the numerical value 000B stored in bits 5 to 3). That is, in the RST instruction of the instruction data C0H, even if the operation code and the operand can be analyzed based on the machine language, it is extremely difficult to analyze the jump destination address that can be branched by executing the RST instruction. It is said that.

  Since the instruction data of these RST instructions is composed of a 5-bit instruction code (opcode) and a 3-bit operand as described above, the user cannot freely set the operand (RST instruction). The jump destination address that can be branched by the RST instruction cannot be freely set), and it is only allowed to select the jump destination address that can be branched by the eight types of RST instructions described above. .

  In this example, by including an operand in the instruction data, the jump destination address that can be branched by the instruction is controlled. However, the instruction data may not include the operand. For example, when an opcode (RST) and an operand (0040H) are configured separately as in “RST 0040H” and an address other than a specifiable address (for example, 0000H) is set as an operand, an assembly error is generated. The operands that can be set may be limited, for example, such that it cannot be converted into machine language. In addition, even when a configuration that includes operands in the instruction data is adopted, configurable operands such as an assembly error that cannot be converted into machine language when an address other than a specifiable address is set as an operand. You may restrict.

  That is, in the RST instruction according to the present embodiment, it is possible to jump to only eight types of addresses (0008H, 0010H, 0018H, 0020H, 0028H, 0030H, 0038H, 0040H). The first area of the first area cannot be jumped to 0000H. For this reason, there is a case where an act of incorporating an illegal program and jumping to the start address (starting the user program from the start address and making it an initial state illegally) can be prevented in advance.

In the RST instruction of the instruction data C0H, the numerical value 0040H that is not included in the instruction data is used as the jump destination address. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to specify the jump destination address and the program flow by disassembly or the like. In some cases, unauthorized program modifications can be prevented. In the RST instruction, the order of instruction codes is set in ascending order (C0H → C8H →...) As shown in the instruction map of FIG. 354, whereas the order of jump destination addresses (0040H → 0008H → ...) are not arranged in ascending order, it is extremely difficult to analyze instructions, and unauthorized program modification may be prevented in advance.
<Embodiment 2>

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (slot machine 1100) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1100 shown in the figure includes a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1101. Inside the center of the main body 1101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111 and right reel 1112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 1100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1110 to 1112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1110 to 1112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1110 to 1112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1120 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 1123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, every time the bet button 1130 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 1132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be performed electronically by using the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1141, and the insertion includes both. is there. The stored number display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 1125, the game information display 1126, and the payout number display 1127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or when the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. Stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1135, and are associated with the reels 1110 to 1112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1137 to 1139, and when the stop button 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1133 is a button for pressing and removing a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1134 is a button for adjusting the medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1155. Door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1102 of slot machine 1100 is inserted. Below the stop button unit 1136, a title panel 1162 for displaying a model name and pasting various types of certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 1162, a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161 are provided.

  The sound hole 1180 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1160 is disposed above the front door 1102, and a sound hole 1143 is provided above the effect device 1160. This effect device 1160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1163 including two right shutters 1163a and 1163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 1100 when the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157. It has become. It should be noted that the display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  FIG. 356 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 1101 is a box that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 1261, a left side plate 1260, a right side plate 1260, a lower surface plate 1264, and a back plate 1242 and opens to the front. Inside the main body 1101, a main control board storage case 1210 in which a main control board is stored is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation opening 1249 provided in the upper part of the back plate 1242. Below the three reels 1110 to 1112 are arranged. On the side plate 1260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 1210 and the reels 1110 to 1112, a sub control board storage case 1220 storing the sub control board is disposed. The right side plate 1260 is attached with an external concentration terminal plate 1248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 1100 to an external device.

  The bottom plate 1264 is provided with a medal payout device 1180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 1180, that is, below the reels 1110 to 1112. A power supply device 1252 is provided, and a power switch 1244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 1252. The power supply device 1252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 1100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as a main control unit 1300 and sub-control units 1400 and 1500 described later. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 1240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 1180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 1264, and the power cord 1264 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 1262 provided in the back plate 1242 of the main body 1101. Yes.

  The front door 1102 is hinged to the left side plate 1260 of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and an effect device 1160 and an effect control board (which controls the effect device 1160) are provided above the symbol display window 1113. An upper speaker 1272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 1113, a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 1266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 1170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 1161, etc. are provided. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 1277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 1100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 1300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success or failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted from the main control unit 1300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), a first sub control unit 1400 that mainly controls production and a command transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 And a second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the above.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. The basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, control program data, lottery data used during an internal lottery for a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 1306 for storing position, RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 1310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 1312 for measuring time, frequency, etc. WDT (watchdog timer) 1314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 1306 and the RAM 1308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 1304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1306 to the counter timer 1312. The counter timer 1312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 1304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 1304 executes monitoring of each sensor and transmission of drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 1314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 1312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division in the ROM 1306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a random number generation circuit 1316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and an activation signal output circuit that outputs an activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 1338 (starts main processing main processing described later).

  Further, the main control unit 1300 includes a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 is inserted from various sensors 1318 (a bet button 1130 sensor, a bet button 1131 sensor, a bet button 1132 sensor, and a medal slot 1141 at every interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, checkout button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 1180, index sensor for reel 1110 , The index sensor of the reel 1111, the index sensor of the reel 1112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 1320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 1316. The random number generation circuit 1316 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 1141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 1135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 1135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 1137 sensor, the stop button 1138 sensor, and the stop button 1139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 1130 sensor, the bet button 1131 sensor, and the bet button 1132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, and the medal electronically stored in the RAM 1308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detecting the input operation when The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 1110, the index sensor of the reel 1111, and the index sensor of the reel 1112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 1110 to 1112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Becomes L level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 1304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the reel rotation position information to zero.

  The main control unit 1300 is provided in a drive circuit 1322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 1180. A drive circuit 1326 for driving the motor, various lamps 1338 (a winning line display lamp 1120, a notification lamp 1123, a game medal insertion enable lamp 1124, a re-game lamp 1122, a game medal insertion lamp 1129, a game start lamp 1121, and a stored number display. A driving circuit 1328 for driving a device 1125, a game information display 1126, and a payout amount display 1127).

  In addition, an information output circuit 1334 (external concentration terminal board 1248) is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main controller 1300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 1334. The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the slot machine 1100 is output to the information input circuit 1652 provided.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 includes the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 1302.

The main control unit 1300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 1400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 1400. Information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 1400. However, the first sub-control unit 1400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 1300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The first sub control unit 1400 includes a basic circuit 1402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 1300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 1400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404, a RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 1400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 1404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1406 to the counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a sound source IC 1418, and the sound source IC 1418 is provided with speakers 1272 and 1277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 1272 and 1277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 1404. The sound source IC 1418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored. The sound data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 1272 and 1277.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a drive circuit 1422, and various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 1162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 1422 through an input / output interface. It is connected.

  The CPU 1404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 1500 via the output interface. Second sub-control unit 1500 performs various controls of effect device 1160 including display control of effect image display device 1157. Note that the second sub-control unit 1500 is, for example, a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 1157 and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 1163). For example, a plurality of control units may be used.

  The second sub control unit 1500 includes a basic circuit 1502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 1500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1502 includes a CPU 1504, a RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 1512. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 1500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 1504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1506 to the counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a drive circuit 1530 for driving the motor of the shutter 1163, and the drive circuit 1530 is provided with a shutter 1163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 1530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to a command from the CPU 1504.

The second sub-control unit 1500 is provided with a sensor circuit 1532, and a shutter sensor 1538 is connected to the sensor circuit 1532 via an input interface. The CPU 1504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 1538 every interruption time.

The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a VDP 1534 (video display processor), and a ROM 1506 and a VRAM 1536 are connected to the VDP 1534 through a bus. The VDP 1534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 1506 based on a signal from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 1536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 1157.
<Pattern arrangement>

  Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 1110 to 1112 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram in which the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, right reel 1112) is developed in a plane.

In each reel 1110 to 1112, a plurality of types (eight types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the same figure are arranged by a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Also, numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112. For example, in the present embodiment, the “Replay” symbol is assigned to the number 1 frame on the left reel 1110, the “Bell” symbol is assigned to the number 0 frame on the middle reel 1111, and the “No. 2” symbol is assigned to the number 2 frame on the right reel 1112. "Watermelon" design is arranged respectively.
<Type of winning prize>

  Next, the types of winning combinations in the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the big bonuses (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as a combination for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is a replay without newly inserting a medal. Each winning combination is sometimes distinguished from a winning combination and sometimes called an “acting combination”. However, in the “winning combination” in this embodiment, a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replay that are operating combinations are included. included. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an actuator not accompanied by a medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on an active line, for example, a big bonus, regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 1100 includes a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay (replay). Needless to say, the type of winning combination is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  “Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “BB”) is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. . Corresponding symbol combinations are “white 7-white 7-white 7” for BB1, and “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” for BB2. Further, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in the determination result storage area of the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in that game, The flag indicating the internal winning is kept until winning, and the BB1 and BB2 are still in the internal winning even after the next game, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 "white 7-white 7-white 7", corresponds to BB2. The symbol combination “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” is in a state of winning a prize.

  The “regular bonus (RB)” is a special combination (operating combination) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning. The corresponding symbol combination is “bonus-bonus-bonus”. Note that the RB carries over the flag as well as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the regular bonus game (RB game) is won internally and the combination of symbols is displayed on the winning line. In addition, the regular bonus game is started after the start of the big bonus game, and when the regular bonus game is finished once, the regular bonus game is automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is immediately started. It is good. “Short (cherry, watermelon, bell)” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “cherry”, “watermelon”, “bell”) is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The symbol combinations are “cherry-ANY-ANY” for cherry, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” for watermelon, and “bell-bell-bell” for bell. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “cherry-ANY-ANY”, the symbol of the left reel 1110 may be “cherry”, and the symbol of the middle reel 1111 and the right reel 1112 may be any symbol.

“Replay” is a winning combination (operating combination) in which a game can be performed without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning, and no medal is paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is “replay-replay-replay” for replay.
<Type of gaming state>

Next, the types of gaming state of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The gaming state is information for identifying the type of lottery data selected in a lottery or the like. In the present embodiment, the gaming state of the slot machine 1100 is roughly divided into a normal game, a BB game, an RB game, and an internal winning game of a big bonus (BB) and a regular bonus (RB). However, the internal winning game may be a division included in the normal game.
<Normal game>

  The winning combinations that are internally won for normal games include a big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay (replay), and small roles (cherry, watermelon, bell).

  “Big Bonus (BB)” is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning. “Regular Bonus (RB)” is a special combination (operating combination) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) upon winning. The “replay” (replay) is a winning combination (operating combination) in which a game can be performed without a medal being inserted in the next game by winning, and no medal is paid out. The “small role” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. In addition, the internal winning probability of each combination is a range of random values obtained at the time of internal lottery from numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each combination from lottery data prepared for normal games. It is calculated by the value divided by the numerical data (for example, 65535). The lottery data prepared for the normal game is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range. It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select and set any set value.

In the normal game, the internal lottery result is almost lost (big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay (replay) and small role won), or any stop display result A setting is made so that the stop display result of the losing that does not correspond to the symbol combination of the combination is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals. Therefore, it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific symbol combination is displayed), it is a gaming state that may be changed to increase the probability of internal winning of replaying. In this case, Consumption of medals used for games is suppressed, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a small role, resulting in a gaming state where the total number of medals exceeds the total number of medals inserted, which is beneficial to the player. May become a gaming state.
<BB game>

The BB game is set to be in a gaming state that is beneficial to the player. That is, the BB game is in a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the BB game is started by winning a big bonus (BB), and an RB game (described later) can be continuously executed repeatedly, and a predetermined number (for example, during the game) The process ends when more than 465 medals are obtained. However, the BB game only needs to be able to execute the RB game a plurality of times. For example, when a combination (for example, replay-replay-replay) is set for starting the RB game, and this combination is won internally, or The RB game may be set to start when winning. Furthermore, in the BB game, when the BB general game excluding the RB game during the BB game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), or the number of the RB games executed during the BB game is a predetermined number of times. It may be made to end when it reaches (for example, three times).
<RB game>

  The RB game is set so as to be in a gaming state that is beneficial to the player. That is, the RB game is in a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the RB game is started by winning a regular bonus (RB), and a predetermined role is set to a variation that increases the probability of internal winning (for example, “setting 1” or “normal game”). The internal winning probability 1/15 of “small role 1” is increased to an internal winning probability 1 / 1.2, which is a predetermined value), and a predetermined number (for example, 8 times) It ends when there is a prize. In the RB game, when a predetermined number of times (at least 2 times) is won (for example, 8 times), or when the number of RB games executed during the RB game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, (8 times). Since the BB game described above can execute the RB game a plurality of times, when a single RB game is performed, the number of medals less than the total number of medals obtained in the BB game is acquired and terminated. Become.

  <Big winning (BB) and regular bonus (RB) internal winning games>

  The winning combination that is internally won for the internal winning game of the big bonus (BB) and the regular bonus (RB) includes a replay and a small role. The big bonus (BB) and the regular bonus (RB) are not won internally, and are game states in which a symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus (BB) or the regular bonus (RB) can be won.

However, the probability of the internal winning of the replay may be changed from the next game internally won in the big bonus (BB) and the regular bonus (RB). Until the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB) wins, the total number of medals to be acquired is almost the same as the total number of inserted medals, and is compared with the normal game. The gaming state may be beneficial to the player. It should be noted that BB game and RB game are both game states that are beneficial to the player, and may be generally referred to as bonus games or special games.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 to which this activation signal has been input executes a main control unit main process in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 1306 after being reset by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S2101. In this initial setting, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, setting of interrupt inhibition, initial setting of the I / O 1310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 1308, operation permission to the WDT 1314, and initial setting Set the value. In step S2103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 1120 is turned on in response to the insertion of the medal. Note that when a re-win is won in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 1135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 1135, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and an effective winning line is determined. In step S2107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 1316 is acquired. In step S2109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 1306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S2107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S2111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

In step S2113, rotation of all reels 1110 to 1112 is started. In step S2115, the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 1110 to 1112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S2111. Stop based on data. When all the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, a winning determination is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the bell. In step S2119, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines. In step S2121, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, a process related to transition of each game state of normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted when those start conditions and end conditions are satisfied. Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, returning to step S2103 and repeating the above-described processing, the game proceeds.
<Main control unit 1300 timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 1304 to the stack area is performed. In step S2203, the WDT 1314 is periodically updated (not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the count value of the WDT 1314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S2205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 1320 of the various sensors 1318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 1310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 1318 is partitioned in the RAM 1308. Store in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S2207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 1318), and processing according to this status is performed (for example, the interrupt statuses of the acquired stop buttons 1137 to 1139). Based on the stop button reception process). In step S2209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S2211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, rotation start command when rotation of reels 1110 to 1112 starts, and operation of stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are accepted. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (stop button reception command accompanying the reels 1110 to 1112, stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of the reels 1110 to 1112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying the medal payout processing, etc.) Predetermined information corresponding to the command type). The first sub-control unit 1400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 1300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S2213, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to an information input circuit 1652 that is separate from the slot machine 1100 via the information output circuit 1334.

  In step S2215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S2205 are read to monitor the presence / absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities and medal payout abnormalities. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 1170 (medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 operates), various lamps 1338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S2217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2221. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2219.

In step S2219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2201 is set in each original register. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S2221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 1308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400. . FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400.

  First, in step S2301 in FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2301. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 1408, and the like are performed.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S2307, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400 determines whether a command is received from the main control unit 1300.

  In step S2309, an effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S2307, a process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 1406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S2311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 1418 in the effect data read out in step S2309, this command is output to the sound source IC 1418. In step S2313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 1420 in the effect data read in step S2309, this command is output to the drive circuit 1422.

  In step S2315, information output processing is performed to perform setting for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 1500 in the effect data read in step S2309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S2303.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 1400 detects the strobe signal output from the main control unit 1300. In step S2401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 1300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing. Execute in the cycle.

In step S2501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1408 described in step S2303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 1500 set in step S2315, update processing of a random number for production, and the like are performed.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described using FIG. 2A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second secondary control unit 1500, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 1500. . FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500, and FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 1500.

  First, in step S2601 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2601. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 1508, and the like are performed.

  In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S2607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400.

In step S2609, an effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S2607, a process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 1506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S2611, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2609. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S2609, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed. In step S2613, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S2609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the flow returns to step S2603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 1400. In step S2701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 1400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1508 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 1500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S2801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1508 described in step S2603 in the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2803, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S2613 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S2901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 1504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 1536. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 1506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 1536) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 1534 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 1534 transfers image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 1534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

  In step S2903, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 1534 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2905. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S2905, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 1536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 1536 in step S2901, the CPU 1504 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 1536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 1534. The VDP 1534 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S2907, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1504 instructs the VDP 1534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 1534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 1504. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 1534 based on the end of image drawing has been input. Wait for input. In step S2911, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  One, a plurality, or all of the features of the present invention described below can be applied to the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 as well.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a main control unit (e.g., CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game (e.g., CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)). Main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) and sub-control units (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500 (for example) that control the effect of the game based on the game control of the main control unit. Or a first sub-control unit 1400, a second sub-control unit 1500)), and the CPU uses a first register (eg, “POP TI command”, “PUSH TI command”, etc.) It can be used with the load instruction of T, but it cannot be used with the operation instruction (it cannot change its value directly by the operation instruction) and the second register. A register (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, an L register, and a back register thereof), and the first register via the second register There is no instruction for transferring data (for example, an instruction for transferring data directly to the T register via the A register like the “LD T, A” instruction), and the first register has a direct value (immediate value or immediate value). The game machine is provided with an instruction (for example, an “LD T, F0H” instruction) for setting data according to the above.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since data is transferred to the first register as a direct value, it is easy to check the set data. There is. In addition, since data is not transferred to the first register via another register, the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced. In addition, since the first register is only allowed to transfer data by direct value, it is used relatively more than other registers that allow both data transfer via the register and data transfer by direct value. Less frequent. For this reason, it is possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment is a game machine having a CPU and game control means for performing game control, and the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Yes, the CPU is built in a microcomputer, the CPU includes at least a specific register (for example, a T register), and the CPU receives a load instruction among the functions for setting a value in the specific register What is performed based on is a game machine having only a function of setting a value by a direct value.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since the load instruction cannot set data other than the direct value to the specific register, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly. As a result, the occurrence of coding mistakes can be reduced, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, since the data set in a specific register can be easily confirmed visually on the source code, coding review work and debugging efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of mistakes is greatly reduced compared to the past. And stable game control can be performed. In addition, since specific registers are only allowed to set data with direct values, they are used more frequently than other registers that allow both data sets via registers and data sets with direct values. Becomes lower. For this reason, it may be possible to improve the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  The present invention is not characterized by “not using a load instruction at the time of programming”, but “based on the fact that the CPU receives a load instruction among the functions for setting a value in a specific register. Since it only has a function to set a value by a direct value as it is performed ", it is characterized by" only a load instruction that sets a value by a direct value can be used for a specific register during programming " .

  In other words, the present invention has a function that the CPU itself executes (understands) such a load instruction even when an attempt is made to use a load instruction for setting a value to a specific register via another register during programming. Therefore, normally, in the process of assembling the assembler language into a machine language, it is excluded as an instruction that cannot be executed (understood) by the CPU and cannot be converted into a machine language. For this reason, a programmer cannot use a load instruction that sets a value in a specific register via another register during programming. In this specification, an example is shown in which programming is performed using assembly language. However, the situation is the same when programming is performed using machine language. Even if it is desired to use a load instruction for setting a value via another register, the instruction cannot be used unless the CPU can execute (understand) it.

  For this reason, in the present invention, the above-described remarkable effect can be obtained. However, in the prior art, the load instruction is not limited as in the present invention. A load instruction that sets a value via another register can be freely used. “Whether or not to use a load instruction during programming (whether or not to use it is a matter that can be appropriately selected by those skilled in the art based on the contents of the program, etc.”) Although it is possible to appropriately select whether or not to use a load instruction for setting a value via another register, the conventional technique has an option that the instruction can be used. An effect equivalent to the effect cannot be obtained with certainty.

  Further, even if a rule that the instruction is not used in programming is formulated, whether or not to follow the rule depends on the programmer (human), and other than the specific register as in the present invention. The use of a load instruction that sets a value via the register of 100% is not completely eliminated.

  Furthermore, in an environment where a load instruction for setting a value to a specific register via another register can be used freely, it is usually an instruction that can be executed (understood) by the CPU in the process of assembling the assembler language into a machine language. The instruction can be converted into machine language. For this reason, in the prior art, even if a programmer is careful not to use a load instruction that sets a value to a specific register via another register during programming, the assembler is optimized. The possibility of being assembled into a machine language corresponding to the instruction cannot be completely excluded.

  The second register includes one specific register (for example, A register) and a plurality of non-specific registers (for example, F register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, and the like) And the CPU transfers the data to the non-specific register via the first register (for example, “LD B, T” instruction, T register in the B register) May be provided with an instruction (for example, “LD A, T” instruction) for transferring data to the specific register via the first register.

  With such a configuration, the first register can be made difficult to use compared to other registers, so that the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced.

  The first register and the second register are 8-bit registers capable of storing 8-bit values, and the non-specific register is a register capable of 16-bit operations in combination with other registers. A register that can form a combination (for example, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register), but the first register cannot be combined with other registers to form a combination of registers that can perform the 16-bit operation. It may be a simple register.

  With such a configuration, the first register can be made difficult to use compared to other registers, so that the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced. Note that the T register cannot be combined with any other register to allow a 16-bit operation, but as described above, the “PUSH TI” instruction or the “POP TI” instruction uses I Together with the register, it is possible to save and restore 16 bits long. In other words, the T register is a register that cannot be used as an operand of an operation instruction but can be used as an operand of a transfer instruction.

  In addition, a storage unit that stores data used for the game control is provided, and the storage unit stores a ROM (for example, ROM 306 (or ROM 1306)) that stores a program executed by the CPU, and the CPU performs the game control. RAM (for example, RAM 308 (or RAM 1308)) that can temporarily store data used at the time, and the CPU before the game control is started (for example, “after power-on, the main control unit 300 of Before the CPU 304 executes the user program (control program) ”,“ After the system reset, before the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes the user program (control program) ”,“ Immediately after shifting to the security mode ”,“ Security check ” Immediately after the result is OK and the mode is changed to the user mode "," During a period of initialization processing by stem reset, etc.), a specific value (for example, F0H) indicating the upper address of the top address of the RAM is stored in the first register (regardless of the program). It may be set.

  With such a configuration, when reading / writing RAM data, only the lower address of the RAM needs to be specified by fixing the first register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, and the amount of program code As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of not being able to change the value of the first register inadvertently.

  A gaming machine comprising a microcomputer having a CPU, a ROM storing a gaming control program, and a RAM capable of temporarily storing data, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine. The CPU has at least a specific register, and the upper byte of the start address of the RAM is larger than the upper byte of the start address of the ROM, and the CPU has a function of setting a value in the specific register. Of these, only the function of setting a value by a direct value is performed based on receiving the load instruction, and the CPU has the load instruction among the functions of setting a value in the specific register. As other than what is performed on the basis of having received, the same value as the upper byte of the top address of the RAM is set as the initial value. Set Te functions may be at least a.

  With such a configuration, by setting a value indicating the upper address of the RAM as the initial value of the specific register, when reading or writing RAM data, only the lower address of the RAM needs to be specified. Reduction of the amount and improvement of the processing speed can be realized. In addition, since only the direct value by the load instruction can be set in the specific register other than the initial value, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly. The occurrence of data read / write errors and the like can be avoided, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, since it is frequently used for computation, it is possible to prevent an incorrect value from being set in a specific register via a register in which an unintended computation result is stored, and an upper byte of the RAM start address as an initial value. Since the same value is set in a specific register, if the RAM is accessed using a specific register after the power is turned on, the specific register is not operated without setting the value in the specific register. Can be used to access the RAM, and with regard to the “accessing the RAM”, it is possible to prevent a problem that the information of an unintended address is accessed because the value of a specific register is incorrect. The effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the program, there are cases where illegal acts caused by rewriting the program can be effectively prevented. In particular, a user mode in which a user program set by a user of the CPU can be executed and a non-user mode in which the user program cannot be executed (for example, a security mode) are provided. If the first register is set, it may be possible to prevent an illegal act in which a specific value is altered to another value or a specific value is read out.

  The RAM includes a first area (for example, a work area of 7E00H to 7EFFH (or an area accessible by an I / O mapped I / O method)) and a second area (for example, a stack area of 7FE0H to 7FFFH ( Alternatively, the area may be accessed by a memory mapped I / O method)), and the specific value may be a value indicating an upper address (F0H) of the first area.

  With such a configuration, when reading and writing data in the first area of the RAM, the first register is fixed as a value indicating the upper address of the first area of the RAM, so that the first area of the RAM is It is only necessary to specify the lower address, so that the amount of program code can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved, and the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of. In addition, by fixing the upper address of the first area, there is a case where it is possible to prevent a mistake that an intention to read / write the first area erroneously reads / writes the second area.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304) that performs game control centering on the progress of the game and data used for the game control. And a memory for storing a program executed by the CPU (for example, ROM 306 (or ROM 1306)) and data used when the CPU performs the game control. RAM (for example, RAM 308 (or RAM 1308)) at least, and the CPU before the game control is started (for example, “after power-on, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is a user program). (Before executing (control program) "," After system reset, main controller 30 Before the CPU 304 executes the user program (control program), “immediately after shifting to the security mode”, “immediately after shifting to the user mode with the result of the security check being OK”, “initialization processing by system reset” During a period, etc.), a specific value (for example, F0H) indicating the upper address of the head address of the RAM is set to a specific register (for example, the CPU 304 separate from the ROM 306). This is a gaming machine characterized in that it is set in a T register built in.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, when reading / writing data in the RAM, by fixing the specific register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, only the lower address of the RAM is obtained. It is only necessary to specify this, and it is possible to reduce the amount of program code and increase the processing speed, as well as reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of not being able to change the value of a specific register carelessly. May be possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment is a game machine including a microcomputer that includes a CPU, a ROM that stores a game control program, and a RAM that can temporarily store data. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, the CPU includes at least a specific register, and the upper byte of the top address of the RAM is larger than the upper byte of the top address of the ROM. The gaming machine is characterized in that the same value as the upper byte of the head address of the RAM is set in the specific register as an initial value regardless of the control program.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to describe the upper byte of the RAM address in the game control program, even if the program is illegally analyzed by an unauthorized person. It is difficult to specify the address of the RAM, and the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the game control program, so that illegal acts caused by rewriting the game control program can be effectively prevented. In addition, when reading and writing data in the RAM, it is sufficient to specify only the lower address of the RAM by fixing the specific register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, thereby reducing the amount of program code and improving the processing speed. In addition to being able to be realized, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly, and as a result, the occurrence of coding errors can be reduced.

  In addition, since the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the program, there are cases where illegal acts caused by rewriting the program can be effectively prevented. In particular, a user mode in which a user program set by a user of the CPU can be executed and a non-user mode in which the user program cannot be executed (for example, a security mode) are provided. If the first register is set, it may be possible to prevent an illegal act in which a specific value is altered to another value or a specific value is read out.

  The CPU further includes non-specific registers (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, an L register, and a back register thereof), and the specific register Are not provided with an instruction for transferring data via the non-specific register (eg, an instruction for transferring data via the A register to the T register, such as an “LD T, A” instruction). May be provided with an instruction (for example, an “LD T, F0H” instruction) for setting data.

  With such a configuration, since data is transferred to a specific register as a direct value, it may be easy to check the set data. In addition, since it is configured so that data cannot be transferred to a specific register via another register, the value of the specific register cannot be inadvertently changed, thereby reducing the occurrence of coding errors. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, because specific registers are only allowed to transfer data by direct data, they are used more frequently than other registers that allow both data transfer through registers and direct data transfer. Becomes lower. For this reason, it is possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  The CPU may be configured to transfer the specific value to the specific register based on an instruction to transfer data to the specific register as a direct value.

  With such a configuration, when the general-purpose register becomes empty due to loop processing or the like, the specific register is temporarily used and then returned to the initial value, so that convenience can be improved.

  Further, the CPU is configured to be able to transfer the specific value to the specific register (for example, transfer by “POP TI” instruction) based on an instruction to transfer data from the RAM to the specific register. May be.

  With such a configuration, the specific register can be used for specific processing, and the convenience of the specific register can be improved in some cases.

  The RAM includes a first area (for example, a work area of 7E00H to 7EFFH (or an area accessible by an I / O mapped I / O method)) and a second area (for example, a stack area of 7FE0H to 7FFFH ( Alternatively, the area may be accessed by a memory mapped I / O method)), and the specific value may be a value indicating an upper address (F0H) of the first area.

  With such a configuration, when reading and writing data in the first area of the RAM, the specific register is fixed as a value indicating the upper address of the first area of the RAM, thereby lowering the lower address of the first area of the RAM. It is possible to reduce the amount of program code and increase the processing speed, as well as reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of the inadvertent change of specific register values. There is a case that can be made. In addition, by fixing the upper address of the first area, there is a case where it is possible to prevent a mistake that an intention to read / write the first area erroneously reads / writes the second area.

  In addition, the CPU can execute an interrupt process (for example, main control unit main process) that is executed based on a predetermined interrupt condition being satisfied, and executes the first interrupt process after the power is turned on. Before that, a process for determining whether the specific value is set in the specific register (for example, a T-registration check process) may be executed. In addition, examples of “before executing the first interrupt process after turning on the power” include other “after power on and before confirming the low voltage state in step S105 of the main control unit main process”, “ For example, after power-on, before confirming whether or not to return to the state before power interruption in step S109 of the main control unit main process, or “before power-on, before confirming the rise of the first sub-control unit”. it can. Further, according to the result of the “determination process”, a specific value may be set in the specific register as shown in FIG. 300 or the error process may be executed as shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to determine whether or not the game machine is operating normally by checking the value of the specific register.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of types of data (for example, non-use data and data) including control program data in storage areas (for example, ROM areas) indicated by a plurality of addresses. A plurality of ROMs (for example, ROM 306) storing reference data) and interrupt processing (for example, main control unit timer interrupt processing) executed at predetermined intervals based on the control program data stored in the ROM A CPU (for example, a CPU 304) that executes a type of game control process, and the ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, each of which corresponds to a plurality of types of commands executed by the CPU (Opcode) and one or more of the control program data, the CPU Specific identification information (for example, a subroutine) that stores supplementary data (operands) necessary for executing the instruction, and is capable of identifying a specific address (for example, the head address of the subroutine). First address data (for example, m) indicating the first identification information that is a part of the first address of information in binary format) and other data different from the first address data (for example, the EXESUB instruction) Specific instruction data (for example, EXESUB instruction), for example, which causes the CPU to read the data stored in the storage area indicated by the specific address. , The instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) and the supplementary data, the information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information Specific supplementary data that is composed of second address data (for example, n) indicating second identification information that is at least a part of the CPU and that is necessary for the CPU to execute the specific instruction. (For example, in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the timer interrupt processing area in the ROM control area (the storage area indicated by the address corresponding to the timer interrupt processing)) It is a game stand characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, the first address data m included in the instruction data is defined as upper address data, thereby grouping the instruction data into the address area. In some cases, coding errors can be suppressed. In addition, because the instruction data includes data that forms part of the top address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is incorrect, the erroneous data is If included in the instruction data, the execution of the control program may be stopped, so that coding errors may be suppressed. In addition, a control instruction (for example, a CALL instruction) for calling a conventional subroutine can be compressed, and conventional control program data stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area can be compressed. . In addition, due to the compression of the control program, there are cases where the processing speed of the control program for calling a subroutine can be improved (the number of states can be reduced) as compared with the conventional case (for example, CALL instruction).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of data including control program data and reference data referred to based on the control program data in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses. And a CPU for executing a plurality of types of game control processes including an interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals based on the control program data and the reference data stored in the ROM, The ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, the command data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU, and the one or a plurality of the control program data, the CPU And supplementary data necessary for executing A storage area composed of first address data indicating first identification information that is part of specific identification information enabling identification of an address and different data different from the first address data, and indicated by the specific address Specific instruction data corresponding to a specific instruction for causing the CPU to read the data stored in the CPU and the supplementary data, the second identification information which is information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information And the specific supplementary data necessary for the CPU to execute the specific instruction is stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing, and All the control program data is stored in a specific storage area that can be read by the CPU by execution, and the specific record in which all the control program data is stored is stored. In different storage area from the region, a gaming table, characterized in that stores the reference data.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, when the CPU executes a specific command, the reference data is erroneously read, and an unintended game control process is performed based on the reference data. Such a situation can be prevented and game control can be stabilized. Further, since the specific instruction is configured to be able to read all the control program data stored in the specific storage area, the arrangement (storage location) of the call source and the call destination in the control program data may be limited. Therefore, the control program can be designed with a degree of freedom. In the field of gaming machines, a plurality of types of gaming machines share control program data (for example, frequently used subroutines), while reference data (for example, lottery values) according to the specifications and performance of each gaming machine. Or production data) is generally different, and is particularly suitable for a game machine.

  A ROM storing a plurality of types of data including control program data and reference data referred to based on the control program data in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses; and the control program data stored in the ROM And a CPU that executes a plurality of types of game control processes including an interrupt process that is executed at predetermined intervals based on the reference data, and the ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, Storing instruction data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU, and one or a plurality of the control program data, which is supplementary data necessary for the CPU to execute the instructions; Indicates first identification information that is part of specific identification information that is instruction data and enables identification of a specific address. Specific instruction data corresponding to a specific instruction that is constituted by first address data and different data different from the first address data, and causes the CPU to read data stored in the storage area indicated by the specific address; The supplementary data is composed of second address data indicating second identification information, which is information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information, and the CPU executes the specific instruction. Specific supplementary data necessary for the interrupt processing is stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing, and all the control program data is stored in a specific storage area readable by the CPU by the execution of the specific instruction. The reference data may be stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area in which all control program data is stored.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, when the CPU executes a specific command, the reference data is erroneously read and an unintended game control process is performed based on the reference data. And stabilization of game control can be achieved. Further, since the specific instruction is configured to be able to read all the control program data stored in the specific storage area, the arrangement (storage location) of the call source and the call destination in the control program data may be limited. Therefore, the control program can be designed with a degree of freedom. In the field of gaming machines, a plurality of types of gaming machines share control program data (for example, frequently used subroutines), while reference data (for example, lottery values) according to the specifications and performance of each gaming machine. Or production data) is generally different, and is particularly suitable for a game machine.

  Further, the ROM includes the first identification information (for example, mn) that makes it possible to identify the specific address by defining at least the order of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first instruction data indicating one identification information and the specific command data composed of the separate data, and the second address data indicating the second identification information among the specific identification information. The specific supplementary data may be stored so as to correspond to an instruction executed in the interrupt process.

  With such a configuration, since the instruction data is configured to include data that forms part of the top address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is wrong, If erroneous data is included in the instruction data, the execution of the control program is stopped, so that a coding error may be suppressed.

  The ROM includes at least first configuration data (for example, bit 7 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) that is a part of the first address data, and second configuration data that is at least a part of the other data. (For example, bits 6 to 3 of the instruction data of the EXEBUS instruction), third configuration data obtained by removing the first configuration data from the first address data (for example, bits 2 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) The specific instruction data configured in this order may be stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compressing instruction data. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Further, the third configuration data (for example, bits 2 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXEBUS instruction) has a larger data capacity than the first configuration data (for example, bit 7 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction). Alternatively, the specific instruction data configured such that the first configuration data has a data capacity larger than that of the third configuration data (for example, 1 bit compared to 3 bits) is generated by the interrupt processing. You may memorize | store corresponding to the command performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compressing instruction data. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  The ROM stores all the control program data in a specific storage area (for example, 0000H to 0FFFH or 0000H to 11FFH) in which data that can be read by the CPU by execution of the specific instruction is stored. A storage area (for example, a storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to a non-use area) excluding a control storage area (for example, a storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area) in which the control program data is stored from the specific storage area ) May be stored non-use data (for example, 00H) that is not used for execution of the game control process.

  With such a configuration, the CPU 304 does not directly read data (for example, reference data or management data) excluding unused data and control program data as instruction data. It may be possible to prevent operation.

  The ROM stores a plurality of types of data represented by a specific data length (for example, 1 byte (8 bits)) in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses. A plurality of types of game control processes including the interrupt process are executed by reading the data stored in the storage area indicated by one address stored in the ROM for each process, and the ROM further includes: The specific identification information that can identify the specific address represented by a first data length (for example, 2 bytes (16 bits)) that is an integer multiple of 2 or more of the specific data length The specific instruction data composed of the first address data indicating the first identification information and the separate data, and data that is an integer multiple of the specific data length than the first data length The specific supplementary data composed of the second address data expressed by a second data length (for example, 1 byte (8 bits)) that is short only so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing May be stored.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compressing instruction data. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 110) according to the present embodiment has a ROM (eg, ROM 306) storing a control program composed of a plurality of control program data, and game control based on the control program. And the ROM executes first data (for example, bit 6 and bit 7 in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) among the plurality of control program data. , Second data (for example, bit 5 (α) in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBMn)), third data (for example, bits 3 and 4 in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)), 4 data (for example, the EXESUB instruction (EX Bit 0 (δ), bit 1 (γ), bit 2 (β)) in the instruction data of SUBmn), and fifth data (for example, supplementary data (n) in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) The instruction data of specific control program data (EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) configured to include at least the second data, the third data, and the fourth data are arranged in order (for example, the address is young) The CPU stores the first instruction (for example, the first address of the subroutine) specified by using the first and third data when the specific control program data is read. And a second instruction (for example, specified by using the second data, the fourth data, and the fifth data) For example, an instruction for specifying the start address of a subroutine to be called) and a specific instruction (for example, EXESUB instruction) specified in (1) during interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) executed at a predetermined cycle. It can be said that it is a game stand.

  The ROM includes at least one of the first data and the second data, the second data and the third data, and the third data and the fourth data. The specific control program data configured to include another data between any one of the data may be stored. However, the ROM stores the first data, the second data, and the data. If the specific control program data composed only of the third data and the fourth data is stored, the machine language after assembly can be checked more easily and coding errors can be suppressed. it can.

  The data length of the first data, the second data, the third data, and the fourth data is the same as the data length of the fourth data (for example, 1 byte ( (8 bits) long). Furthermore, the data length of the data read by the CPU at the same time may be the same as the data length of the fourth data.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308 (or ROM 1306, RAM 1308)) for storing program data and temporary data, and storage in the storage means. A main control unit (for example, main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game using the stored data, and a game based on the game control of the main control unit A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500)) that performs the production control. The main control unit includes a plurality of registers (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, etc.) each having a first bit length (for example, 8 bit length). Register, D register, E register, H register, L register, T register), and can calculate a second bit length (for example, 16-bit length) that is double the first bit length. Indicated by a value stored in a first register and a second register (for example, an H register and an L register) of the plurality of registers (for example, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register). And a first value (for example, AEH) stored in a first address (for example, 1750H) in the storage means and a second address (for example, 1751H) continuous with the first address, and a second The value (for example, 19) is assigned to the third register (for example, C register) and the fourth register (for example, A register) of the plurality of registers. A predetermined instruction (for example, an “INCENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction) to be transferred, and the predetermined instruction is executed in the game control (for example, a special symbol variation time lottery process), and the third register And the fourth register is a gaming machine characterized by being different from a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (BC register, DE register, HL register). The “second address continuous with the first address” is not limited to an address larger than the first address, and may be an address smaller than the first address. In the above example, the first address is 1750H. The second address may be 174FH.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, two data stored in consecutively arranged addresses are converted into two types of registers that do not constitute a register pair by one instruction. Since the program capacity can be stored, the capacity of the program can be reduced, the capacity can be allocated to the program for improving the game performance, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Further, there are cases where the processing time can be shortened and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by reducing the program capacity, it becomes easier to see the program, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, since the third register and the fourth register are not a register pair, a program can be created with care when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, and the occurrence of coding errors and bugs may be suppressed. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes at least first to fourth registers, and a CPU that can execute processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, A gaming machine equipped with a microcomputer storing a ROM for storing a gaming control program, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU receives a first instruction and a second instruction. A plurality of instructions can be executed, and a combination of at least two of the first register and the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and the third register and the second register At least one of the fourth registers is the upper register, and is based on execution of the first instruction. A first value stored in an area indicated by a first address indicated by a value stored in the predetermined register pair is set in the fourth register, and the second value is continuous with the first address. The second value stored in the area indicated by the address of the second address is set in the third register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, Based on the execution of the instruction, the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address continuous with the first address indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair is the fourth value. A third value stored in a region indicated by a third address that is set in the register and indicated by the third address that is continuous with the second address is set in the third register, and a value of the predetermined register pair is set in the third register Indicates address The CPU can set the value stored in the ROM to a combination of two registers of the third register and the fourth register different from the register pair with one instruction. The predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair is based on receiving the first function and the second instruction for setting a value based on receiving the first instruction. It is a gaming machine having only two of the second functions for setting values.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, the function of setting values to two combinations of the third register and the fourth register, which are less versatile than the register pair, is limited by one instruction. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of illegally altering a value related to a player's profit. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. In some cases, stable game control can be performed.

  In addition, a microcomputer including at least first to fourth registers, a CPU capable of executing processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, and a ROM storing a game control program is provided. The gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU can execute a plurality of instructions including a first instruction and a second instruction, and at least the first register And the combination of the two registers of the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and at least one of the third register and the fourth register is the upper register, Based on the execution of the first instruction, the first instruction indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair. The first value stored in the area indicated by the address is set in the fourth register, and the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address is the third value. Is set in a register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, and is stored in the predetermined register pair based on the execution of the second instruction. The second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address indicated by the value is set in the fourth register, and the third address that is continuous with the second address is The third value stored in the area indicated is set in the third register, the value of the predetermined register pair becomes the value indicating the third address, and the CPU is different from the register pair. Third register A value stored in the ROM can be set to a combination of two registers of the fourth register with one instruction, and a predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair includes the first register The CPU has at least two of a first function for setting a value based on receiving one command and a second function for setting a value based on receiving the second command; The CPU has at least a specific register, and among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the function for setting a value to one combination of the third register and the fourth register, which is less versatile than the register pair, is limited. It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of tampering. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. And stable game control can be performed.

  Further, at least one of the third register and the fourth register may constitute a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (for example, the B register has a 16-bit length). A BC register, which is a register pair that can be operated, is configured).

  With this configuration, the value of one register of a register pair that performs 16-bit arithmetic can be fixed, and the value of one register set before a predetermined instruction can be saved without saving the value of one register. In some cases, the program capacity can be reduced. Also, when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, a program can be created with care, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  Further, at least one of the third register and the fourth register may be an upper register of a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (for example, the B register is a 16-bit register). (It is a high-order register of the BC register, which is a register pair capable of long operations).

  With such a configuration, the value of the upper 8 bits of the register pair that performs 16-bit arithmetic can be changed, and the upper part of the address indicated by the register pair can be changed and used in processing after a predetermined instruction. May be possible. For example, each of the third register and the fourth register can be used for different processing (for example, one is used by the INCENSOU instruction and the other is used as a counter for counting the number of loop processes). It is possible to effectively use the limited registers. Also, when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, a program can be created with care, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  The predetermined instruction may include a process of adding a predetermined value to a value of a lower register of the first register and the second register (for example, a process of adding 2 to the HL register). .

  With such a configuration, the following processing can be performed in a state in which the value of an address obtained by adding a predetermined value from a predetermined address is set in a register after the completion of the predetermined instruction. In some cases, the program capacity can be reduced compared to a program that is executed a predetermined number of times.

  The first address is an address next to an address (for example, 174FH) (for example, 174FH) indicated by values stored in the first register and the second register before the predetermined instruction is executed. 1750H).

  With such a configuration, the address can be specified first in the repetition process, and when the repetition process is finished, the address value obtained by adding a predetermined value from the address before the predetermined instruction is set in the register. The following processing can be performed in the state that has been performed. In particular, when using a data table in which two types of data are alternately stored, desired data can be quickly read from the data table.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308 (or ROM 1306, RAM 1308)) that stores program data and temporary data, and storage in the storage means. A main control unit (for example, main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game using the stored data, and a game based on the game control of the main control unit A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500)) that performs the production control. The main control unit includes a first register (for example, C register) capable of storing a value of a first bit length (for example, 8-bit length) and the first A plurality of registers (for example, BC register, DE register, HL) including a second register (for example, HL register) capable of storing a value of a second bit length (for example, 16-bit length) that is an integral multiple of the bit length A predetermined instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction) that adds the value of the first register to the value of the second register and stores the value in the second register, The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined command is executed in the game control (for example, special symbol variation time lottery processing). The second register only needs to be able to store a value of the second bit length that is an integral multiple of the first bit length. For example, when the bit length of the first register is 4 bits, the second register is 4 bits. May be a register whose bit length is a multiple of (4, 8, 12,...), And when the bit length of the first register is 16 bits, a multiple of 16 (16, 32, 64,...) A register may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to carry out a carry process separately, so that the program capacity can be reduced and a capacity is allocated to a program for improving game playability. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the processing time can be shortened and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by reducing the program capacity, it becomes easier to see the program, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. Furthermore, since addition operations between registers having different bit lengths can be performed, for example, an addition operation that has conventionally been performed using two 16-bit register pairs can be performed with a 16-bit register pair and an 8-bit register. In some cases, a long register can be used, and a limited number of registers can be used effectively.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a CPU including at least first to third registers capable of storing an 8-bit value, and the CPU has a 16-bit value. At least a fourth register, and the CPU is capable of executing a process using a register pair including the first register and the second register, and includes a microcomputer incorporating the CPU. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU adds the value of the third register to the value of the fourth register and adds the value to the fourth register. A first instruction capable of setting a result is executable, wherein the first instruction adds the value of the third register to the value of the register pair; The CPU can set the addition result to the register pair, and the CPU can subtract the value of the third register from the value of the register pair and set the subtraction result to the register pair. The function of adding / subtracting the 8-bit value to / from the 16-bit register pair in the CPU is realized by both the first instruction and the second instruction. The function of adding / subtracting the value of the 8-bit length to / from the fourth register of the 16-bit length in the CPU is realized only by the first instruction.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, values of registers having different bit lengths can be added and subtracted. For example, conventionally, two 16-bit register pairs are used. In some cases, the addition and subtraction performed can be performed with a 16-bit register pair and an 8-bit register, and a limited number of registers can be used effectively. In addition, since addition / subtraction is performed between register values, the processing time for addition / subtraction can be shortened compared to the case of using RAM or the like, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by configuring such that addition / subtraction using the fourth register can be executed only by the first instruction, a fraudulent act of illegally tampering with the value related to the player's profit (for example, a numerical value advantageous to a register pair) It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an act of improperly embedding an instruction to add the. In addition, since the capacity of the game control program can be reduced compared to the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured with conventional instructions, capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play, There are cases where the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, a microcomputer including at least first to fourth registers, a CPU capable of executing processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, and a ROM storing a game control program is provided. The gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU can execute a plurality of instructions including a first instruction and a second instruction, and at least the first register And the combination of the two registers of the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and at least one of the third register and the fourth register is the upper register, Based on the execution of the first instruction, the first instruction indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair. The first value stored in the area indicated by the address is set in the fourth register, and the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address is the third value. Is set in a register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, and is stored in the predetermined register pair based on the execution of the second instruction. The second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address indicated by the value is set in the fourth register, and the third address that is continuous with the second address is The third value stored in the area indicated is set in the third register, the value of the predetermined register pair becomes the value indicating the third address, and the CPU is different from the register pair. Third register A value stored in the ROM can be set to a combination of two registers of the fourth register with one instruction, and a predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair includes the first register The CPU has at least two of a first function for setting a value based on receiving one command and a second function for setting a value based on receiving the second command; The CPU has at least a specific register, and among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the function for setting a value to one combination of the third register and the fourth register, which is less versatile than the register pair, is limited. It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of tampering. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. And stable game control can be performed.

  Further, the first register (for example, C register) may be a lower register of a combination of registers (for example, BC register) capable of calculating the second bit length.

  With such a configuration, the value of the upper 8 bits of the register pair can be fixed, and a program can be created with care when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, which can lead to coding errors and bugs. In some cases, it can be suppressed. In addition, each of the upper register and the lower register of the register pair can be used for different processing (for example, one is used by the ADDTWOONE instruction and the other is used as a counter for counting the number of loop processing). Limited registers can be used effectively.

  In addition, the main control unit includes a first value and a second value stored at two consecutive addresses based on a predetermined address indicated by a value stored in the second register (for example, an HL register). Are transferred to the first register (for example, C register) and the third register (for example, B register) of the plurality of registers, respectively, for example, a predetermined second instruction (for example, “INCENSOUBC, ) "Instruction), and after executing the predetermined second instruction, the predetermined instruction may be executed.

  With such a configuration, one of the values stored in two consecutive addresses is added to the first register, and a value indicating an address related to a predetermined address is set in the first register. The following processing can be performed, and the program capacity may be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit executes a predetermined determination process (for example, as shown in steps S <b> 1110 to S <b> 1111) from a B register (third register) after executing the predetermined second instruction. The value stored in the predetermined storage area) is subtracted to determine whether or not carry occurs, and the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined value (for example, carry occurs) The predetermined command may be performed.

  With such a configuration, when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined value, the next process can be performed in a state in which a value indicating an address related to the predetermined address is set in the first register, The program capacity may be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit may execute the predetermined second instruction and the predetermined determination process again after executing the predetermined instruction (for example, executing the INCENSOOU instruction in step S1109, After the ADDTWOONE instruction is executed in step S1112, the INCENSOU instruction is executed again in step S1114, and a specific value is subtracted from the B register in step S1116 to determine whether or not a carry occurs.

  With such a configuration, for example, the second table address of the two-stage lottery can be set, the two-stage lottery program can be made easy to see, and the occurrence of coding errors and bugs can be suppressed in some cases. .

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or the main control unit 1300)) having a CPU for performing game control, and the main control unit. A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400, the second sub-control unit 1500)) that controls the production of the game based on the game control The CPU includes a predetermined flag (for example, Z flag, SZ flag), and the main control unit is executed between the first process and the second process. A third process for changing the content of the flag, which was the first content in the first process, to the second content before the start of the second process, The second process is the result of the execution of the third process. A process performed when the result of the second does not refer to the flag changes to the content process (e.g., CPRT instruction, CPJR instruction) is a gaming table which is a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the change in the flag contents and the flow of program execution, making it difficult to analyze the program and altering the illegal program. Can be prevented in advance. For this reason, stable game control can be performed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  The third process may be a process that does not refer to the flag that is the first content.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the change in the flag contents and the flow of program execution, making it difficult to analyze the program and preventing unauthorized alteration of the program in some cases. For this reason, stable game control can be performed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or the main control unit 1300)) having a CPU for performing game control, and the main control unit. A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400, the second sub-control unit 1500)) that controls the production of the game based on the game control The CPU includes instructions (for example, RES instruction, RST instruction) in which access to a predetermined area of storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308, register, program counter) is restricted. The gaming machine is characterized in that the command is executed in the game control.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since access to a predetermined area can be prohibited, the predetermined area can be protected, and the content of the predetermined area changes to an unexpected value. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  The instruction may be an instruction that can access a predetermined specific area among the areas excluding the predetermined area.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to read and write the contents of the specific area at the same time while prohibiting access to the predetermined area, so that the contents of the predetermined area can be protected and the degree of freedom in program design is reduced. There is nothing.

  The CPU may further include an instruction capable of accessing the predetermined area. With such a configuration, it is possible to read and write the contents of the specific area at the same time while prohibiting access to the predetermined area, so that the contents of the predetermined area can be protected and the degree of freedom in program design is reduced. There is nothing.

  Further, if the instruction is configured not to be able to jump to a predetermined area of the storage means, a malicious program is incorporated and jumped to the top address of the user program (the user program is started from the top address and illegally initialized). In some cases, it is possible to prevent such actions.

  The game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine 1100 described above. Therefore, for example, in the above-described embodiment, an example of a little endian CPU is shown, but the present invention can also be applied to a big endian CPU. Further, the present invention is not limited to an 8-bit CPU, and can be applied to a 16-bit CPU, a 32-bit CPU, and the like. Further, the names of the instructions are not limited to the names shown in the above embodiment.

  Moreover, although the example applied to CPU304 of the main control part 300 (or CPU1304 of the main control part 1300) was shown, you may apply to CPU of another control part. Further, the storage means is not limited to ROM and RAM, and other storage means may be applied.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 363 (a), “a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and a lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. When the number of coins is added to the number of remaining credits and cashout 2009 is selected, the present invention is applied to a casino machine 2000 that issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits is issued from the receipt issuing machine 2010. May be. Further, it may be suitable for an arrange ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a mobile phone 3000 having a control unit including the configuration of the present invention is provided, and as shown in FIG. 5C, a control unit including the configuration of the present invention is provided. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 and a home video game machine 5000 including a control unit including the configuration of the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 3000 in FIG. 5B stores an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and the acquired data related to the game. A storage unit, and a control unit including the configuration of the present invention, which controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 10C includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game. And a control unit including the configuration of the present invention, which controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  In addition, the home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 5C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and an acquired game. A storage unit that stores data, and a control unit including the configuration of the present invention that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit are provided.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6D, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 including a control unit including the configuration of the present invention. In some cases, the program code including the configuration of the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. The present invention can also be applied to a game program in which the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.
<Embodiment 3>

Next, a pachinko machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Example of basic circuit configuration of main controller>

  Next, a configuration example of the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the basic circuit 302 when the microprocessor 3000 is used.

  The microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 364 corresponds to an example of the electric control means according to the present invention, and has the function of the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 293 and the function of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. . Note that in FIG. 364, portions corresponding to the configuration illustrated in FIG. 293 are described with the same reference numerals used in FIG.

  A microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 364 includes a CPU 304, a ROM (built-in ROM) 306, a RAM (built-in RAM) 308, an external bus control circuit 3101, a parallel input port 3102, an address decoding circuit 3103, a timer circuit 311, a counter circuit 312, In addition to the reset control circuit 314, an interrupt control circuit 3100, a clock circuit 3200, and a random number generation circuit 318 are provided, all of which are connected to each other via an internal bus 3300. The built-in ROM 306 corresponds to an example of a storage unit. The external bus control circuit 3101, parallel input port 3102, and address decode circuit 3103 correspond to the I / O 310 in FIG. 293.

  Hereinafter, details of each of the above-described units will be described. First, the CPU 304, the ROM 306, and the RAM 308 are as described with reference to FIG. The external bus control circuit 3101 includes an IO request terminal (XIORQ terminal), a memory request terminal (XMREQ terminal), a read signal terminal (XRD terminal), a write signal terminal (XWR terminal), a 16-bit width address output terminal (A0 terminal to A15 terminal) and data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) which are input / output terminals having an 8-bit width. In this embodiment, the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) are used for data output to the drive circuits 324, 326, 330, and 334 shown in FIG. 293 and data input from the peripheral control circuits. It has been. The data input / output destinations of the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) are the address signal output from the address output terminals (A0 terminal to A15 terminal) and the chip select signal output from the address decode circuit 3103. Use to switch.

  The parallel input port 3102 has four input terminals (P0 terminal to P3 terminal). These input terminals (P0 terminal to P3 terminal) are connected to the sensor circuit 322 shown in FIG. 293 and are used to input signals from the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, a signal from a sphere detection sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure start port 230 is input to the P0 terminal, and a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the second special figure start port 232 is used. Is input to the P1 terminal, and a signal from a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the normal start port 228 is input to the P2 terminal. The signal from the sensor circuit 322 is output to the random number generation circuit 318 as a latch signal for causing the CPU 304 to acquire a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318. This operation will be described later.

  The address decoding circuit 3103 has 14 output terminals (XCS0 terminal to XCS13 terminal). The output terminals (XCS0 terminal to XCS13 terminal) are connected to a peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000, and data output from the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) of the external bus control circuit 3101. Is used to output a chip select signal or the like for switching the transmission destination.

  The timer circuit 311 is used for time measurement. The timer circuit 311 outputs a timeout signal to the counter circuit 312 when the set measurement time has passed. On the other hand, the counter circuit 312 is used for measuring the number of rises (or falls) of various signals. In addition to the system clock of the microprocessor 3000, signals measured by this counter circuit also measure timeout signals from the timer circuit, memory read / write signals, memory request signals, external input / output signals, interrupt response signals, etc. can do.

  The reset control circuit 314 has two terminals, a system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal) and a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal). This system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal) is connected to the voltage monitoring circuit 338. When a system reset signal (for example, a signal of L level for a predetermined time) is input from the system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal), the reset control circuit 314 outputs this system reset signal to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000. At the same time, a reset signal (for example, a rising signal from L level to H level) is output from the reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. In this case, the microprocessor 3000 executes a process called system reset and initializes each circuit. An example in which this system reset is executed is when the power is turned on. This system reset will be described later.

  Further, the reset control circuit 314 includes a watch dog timer (WDT) 3141 (corresponding to an example of a return instruction unit), and a travel prohibition circuit 3142 outside the designated area. When the WDT 3141 times out or when the CPU 304 refers to an address outside the predetermined range (running outside the designated area), the reset control circuit 314 sends a system reset signal to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 and One of the user reset signals is output. Whether to output the system reset signal or the user reset signal depends on the setting of the program management area (details will be described later) in the ROM 306. A reset signal is output from a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000.

  The microprocessor 3000 can execute either the system reset or the process called user reset according to the setting. In the user reset, each circuit is initialized as necessary. This user reset will be described later.

  The traveling outside the designated area means that the program is operating unexpectedly. In this case, the CPU 304 operates with a code that should not be handled as a program. Such a situation may be caused by some sort of fraud other than a so-called runaway state due to a program mistake. In this case, normal operation can be restored by the system reset process described above. In addition, when the WDT 3141 times out, there are a runaway state due to a program error, a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop, and the like. Also in this case, it is possible to return to normal operation by the above-described system reset processing.

  The interrupt control circuit 3100 generates an interrupt in order to appropriately execute a process according to a change in external input or internal state. This interrupt process includes, for example, a process executed when an external input (signal from a sensor) is received. In this embodiment, even when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a latch signal for acquiring a random number, it can execute interrupt processing (generate an interrupt). The interrupt control circuit 3100 includes an internal information register 3101. The internal information register 3101 includes an abnormality in the cycle of the external clock (count clock) that determines the random number update cycle by the random number generation circuit 318, and update of the random number. In addition, information on the reset factor that occurred immediately before is stored. The internal information register 3101 corresponds to an example of an abnormality detection information holding unit.

  The clock circuit 3200 has an external clock (24 MHz in this example) input from the crystal oscillator 316b shown in FIG. 293 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a system crystal oscillator 316b) via an external clock input terminal (EX terminal). Clock) is divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example), and the divided system clock (12 MHz clock in this example) is supplied to each circuit in the microprocessor 3000. The system clock is output to a peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000 via a system clock output terminal (CLKO terminal).

  The random number generation circuit 318 uses the clock signal (count clock) for updating the random number and holds the updated random number in the random number register when the random number latch signal is received. In the present embodiment, the external clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 316a via the external clock input terminal (RCK terminal) is divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example) and is used as this count clock. Although it is used, a clock signal in the microprocessor 3000 can also be used. In this case, the crystal oscillator 316a is not necessary. The value held in the random number register can be read and used as a random number. Note that when a random number is read from the random number register, an allowable state in which the random number register is allowed to latch the next random number can be set. Details of the random number generation circuit 318 will be described later.

  Next, a processing flow when reset is executed will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of reset. This flowchart is a process executed by each circuit of the microprocessor 3000 when a system reset signal is input to the reset control circuit 314, when the WDT 3141 times out, or when traveling outside the designated area is detected. .

  In the first step SH01, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the microprocessor 3000: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the process proceeds to step SH03. This system reset operation corresponds to an example of a return process according to the present invention. When executing a reset operation that is not a system reset operation, that is, a user reset operation, the process proceeds to step SH11.

  In step SH03, a first internal circuit initialization process is executed. This first internal circuit initialization process is performed by the CPU 304 core and built-in registers (timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, parallel input port 3102, RAM 308 access protect register, interrupt control circuit 3100, and random number generation circuit 318). Initialize the value. When the first internal circuit initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to step SH05.

  In step SH05, a security check process is executed. In this security check process, it is determined whether or not the value calculated based on the user program matches the value representing the authentication code stored in the program management area of the ROM 306. That is, recalculation of whether or not the authentication code is correct is performed. The user program here corresponds to an example of the contents stored in the storage unit (internal ROM 306) according to the present invention, and the authentication code stored in the program management area of the internal ROM 306 is the predetermined authentication according to the present invention. This corresponds to an example of information. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step SH07. If not, the operation of the CPU 304 is stopped. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the security check is performed in this way, so that stable control can be performed by the gaming machine.

  In step SH07, a fixed extension process is executed. In this fixed extension process, the security mode is extended for a preset fixed time (for example, set using 0 to 2 bits of the security time setting in the program management area of the ROM 306). For example, when n is the time set in the program management area and the system clock is SCLK, the time is extended by 3n × 2 ^ 24 / SCLK seconds. A reset signal is output from the XRSTO terminal when this extended time has elapsed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SH09.

  In step SH09, a random extension process is executed. In this random extension process, the security mode is extended by a random time selected in advance (for example, setting using 3 to 4 bits of security time setting in the management area). For example, when the short mode is set, the time is extended from 0 to Sμ seconds, when the middle mode is set, 0 to Mμ seconds, and when the long mode is set, the time is extended from 0 to Lμ seconds ( S <M <L). When this process ends, the process shifts to the user mode, and the CPU 304 starts the process from address 0000H in the memory map. In the present embodiment, the main process of the main control unit 300 is started.

On the other hand, in step SH11 which proceeds when executing the user reset operation in step SH01, the second internal circuit initialization process is executed. This second internal circuit initialization processing is performed by using internal registers (timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, parallel input port 3102, RAM 308 access protect register, interrupt control circuit 3100) excluding the registers for controlling the core of CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318. ) Value is initialized. That is, in the second internal circuit initialization process, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. When the second internal circuit initialization process is completed, the process shifts to the user mode, and the CPU 304 starts the process from address 0000H in the memory map. In the present embodiment, the main process of the main control unit 300 is started.
<Random number generation circuit>

  Next, details of the random number generation circuit 318 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 364 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an internal block diagram of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG.

  The random number generation circuit 318 includes four random number generation channels CH1 to CH4 that generate different random numbers. Since the internal configuration of each channel circuit is the same, FIG. 366 shows one random number generation channel CH1, and the remaining random number generation channels CH2 to CH4 are simplified in illustration. In the following description, the random number generation circuit 318 will be described focusing on the random number generation channel CH1.

  The random number generation circuit 318 includes an initial setting register 3181, a frequency monitoring circuit 3182, a random number updating circuit 3183, a random number monitoring circuit 3184, a noise filter 3185, a soft latch register 3186, a latch selection register 3187, and a random number register 3188. And a random number latch flag register 3189 and a random number interrupt control register 3180. The frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 correspond to an example of update abnormality detection means.

  The initial setting register 3181 stores clock selection information for determining which of the external clock signal from the RCK terminal and the system clock (internal clock signal) to use in the random number update circuit 3183 in the program management area. Set based on information. The external clock signal and the system clock (internal clock signal) from the RCK terminal are input to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number update circuit 3183. The initial setting register 3181 inputs the update clock selection signal to the multiplexer according to the clock selection information, so that the clock signal selected by the update clock selection signal is input to the random number update circuit 3183. When an external clock signal is selected, a clock signal divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (in this example, 1/2) is input to the random number update circuit 3183. Note that the frequency-divided clock signal cannot be used when the frequency is not lower than that of the internal clock. In the present embodiment, the description will be continued assuming that the external clock signal is selected.

  The frequency monitoring circuit 3182 monitors the period of the internal clock signal and the external clock signal, and outputs information indicating that the clock signal is abnormal to the internal information register 3101 when the period is not constant.

  The random number update circuit 3183 receives the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181 and updates the random number according to the cycle of the clock signal. The updated random number value is output to the random number monitoring circuit 3184 and the random number register 3188, respectively. Details of the random number update circuit 3183 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 368 to 371.

  The update of the random number value may be started (automatic start) when shifting to the above-described user mode, or may be started (manual start) when the maximum random number value is set in the random number register 3188 by the user program. ), Or may be configured so that it cannot be manually started when the automatic start is performed (a maximum value cannot be set). Further, the maximum value of the random number may be set individually in the random number generation channels CH1 to CH4. Further, it may be configured such that the update of the random number value cannot be stopped in the case of automatic start, and the update of the random number value can be manually stopped in the case of manual start. In the case of manual start, a register for instructing start, a register for instructing stop of update, and a register for instructing restart of update may be provided separately.

  In addition, one of the 16-bit random value and the 8-bit random value may be configured so that an initial value can be set, and the other may be configured so that an initial value cannot be set, and whether or not the random number is normally updated. One may be monitored and the other may not be monitored. In addition, the initial value of the random number value may be different between an internal reset and an external reset described later (for example, the initial value at the time of internal reset is 33H, and the initial value at the time of external reset is CCH). In the initial setting of the user program or the like, the type of reset may be determined based on the initial value of the random number value, and processing according to the type of reset may be executed.

  Based on the input from the random number update circuit 3183, the random number monitoring circuit 3184 monitors whether or not the random number has been updated normally. If there is an abnormality in updating the random number, information indicating that there is an abnormality in updating the random number is output to the internal information register 3101.

  In the above description, the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 are provided inside the random number generation circuit 318, but may be provided outside the random number generation circuit 318. In the above description, the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 are provided separately from the random number update circuit 3183. However, these circuits may be provided inside the random number update circuit 3183.

  Input from the P0 terminal to P3 terminal is input to the noise filter 3185 as a latch signal via the parallel input port 3102. In FIG. 366, the P3 terminal and the circuit connected to the P3 terminal are not shown. As described above, a signal from a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is input to the P0 terminal, and a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is input to the P1 terminal. A signal from a sphere detection sensor to be detected is input, and a signal from a sphere detection sensor that detects a ball entering the normal start port 228 is input to the P2 terminal. Further, the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181 is input to the noise filter 3185. Using this clock signal, the noise generated at the inputs from the P0 to P3 terminals is removed, and then the latch signal is detected. When this latch signal is detected, a hard latch signal is output to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188. Details of the noise removal will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Information indicating that a random number is latched from the random number register 3188 is appropriately set in the soft latch register 3186 according to an instruction from the CPU 304. This information is output as a soft latch signal to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188.

  The latch selection register 3187 has information indicating which of the hard latch signal and the soft latch signal is output from the multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188, that is, which latch signal is input to the random number register 3188. These are set as appropriate according to instructions from the CPU 304. By setting this information, a random number can be obtained by appropriately using a hard latch signal and a soft latch signal.

  Three signals are input to the random number register 3188. The first signal is a signal representing a random number output from the random number update circuit 3183. The second signal is a random number latch signal (a signal set by the latch selection register 3187 out of the hard latch signal and the soft latch signal) output from the multiplexer provided in front. The third signal is a read signal indicating random number reading.

  A signal indicating the random number updated by the random number update circuit 3183 is always input to the random number register 3188. Here, when a random number latch signal is input, a random number at this input timing is latched (held) in the random number register 3188. At this time, a set signal indicating that the random number is latched is output from the random number register 3188 to the random number latch flag register 3189. At this time, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number. Note that when a random number is acquired by the CPU 304, a read signal is input to the random number register 3188. When a new random number latch signal is input by this signal, an allowable state is entered in which the random number is allowed to be latched. In other words, once the random number is latched, it becomes an unacceptable state in which the random number cannot be newly latched until the read signal is inputted. Note that since the latched random number is held even when a read signal is input, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number any number of times at the same latched timing. With this configuration, the influence of chattering in the sensor circuit that outputs the random number latch signal can be suppressed. A clear signal indicating that the read signal has been input is output to the random number latch flag register 3189. As shown in FIG. 366, since there are a plurality of random number registers 3188, random numbers generated from the same random number update circuit can be acquired at various timings.

  The random number latch flag register 3189 stores information indicating whether or not a random number is latched in the random number register 3188. The random number latch flag register 3189 is automatically cleared when the random number latched in the random number register 3188 (all or part of a 16-bit random number or all or part of an 8-bit random number) is read. You may comprise so that it may clear by CPU.

  In the random number random number interrupt control register 3180, information indicating whether or not the interrupt control circuit generates an interrupt when a random number is held in the random number register 3188 is set. This information can be set for each random number register 3188. For example, when the random number of the random number generation channel CH1 is latched by entering the first special figure starting port 230, an interrupt is generated, and by entering the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating channel CH2 is set. If a random number is latched, it can be set such that no interrupt is generated.

  In the present embodiment, using the random number generation circuit 318 described above, random numbers are acquired at the timing when the ball enters each of the general view start port 282, the first special view start port 230, and the second special view start port 232. Note that the program can be executed so that the CPU 304 can acquire a random number at an arbitrary timing. Further, independent random numbers can be acquired using different random number generation channels, and the maximum value of the random number generation range can be set for each channel.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the random number generation range can be changed for each individual channel and a predetermined maximum value (for example, 65535) is applied when the range is not set has been described. For example, when changing the random number generation range, the configuration may be required to set the random number generation range for all channels.

  In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the general figure starting port 282 is used as a general figure winning random number described later. In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 is counted up (down) by processing (for example, a circuit different from the random number generation circuit (for example, the basic circuit 302 or the counter circuit 312)). The value is added (subtracted) to the random number, etc.) and used as a special figure 1 winning random number described later. Furthermore, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the second special figure starting port 232 is processed and used as a special figure 2 winning random number described later.

  The random number processing is not limited to the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232, but other triggers (for example, entering the normal figure starting port 282). You may perform with respect to the random number acquired by the timing of balling etc.). Furthermore, when the maximum value of the random number generation range described above is set, processing corresponding to the set maximum value (for example, a process of adding a value not exceeding the maximum value to the random number) may be performed.

  In addition, although it is not always necessary to perform random number processing, it is effective to prevent random numbers from being processed. For example, when the CPU 304 monitors whether or not the processed random number has been updated, it cannot be accurately determined whether or not the random number update in the random number generation circuit 318 is normally performed. Thus, when processing random numbers, monitoring of update of random numbers by the random number monitoring circuit 3184 described above works more effectively.

  Subsequently, the operation of the noise filter 3185 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of processing by the noise filter 3185 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the noise filter 3185 receives input from the P0 terminal to P3 terminal as a latch signal via the parallel input port 3102 and receives the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181. For example, as shown in FIG. 367, the noise filter 3185 receives input signals from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal until the down edge of the clock signal (the falling signal from the H level to the L level) is continuously input four times. If H is at the H level, a hardware latch signal is output. If a hardware latch signal is simply output based on only the rising and falling edges of the signal, the hardware latch signal is output even when noise occurs. For this reason, the hardware latch signal is not output due to noise by detecting the sensor signal for a certain period using the clock signal as described above.

  In the above description, an example in which a hard latch signal is output by an input from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal has been described. . In this case, the random number is latched not by the hard latch signal but by the soft latch signal output from the soft latch register 3186. In this case, the CPU 304 executes processing similar to the processing by the noise filter. That is, it is determined whether or not the input from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal has continued for a predetermined period. Thereafter, the soft latch register 3186 is set so as to output a soft latch signal.

  Next, details of the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 366 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the details of the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG.

  A random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 368 (a) includes a counter circuit 3183a, a start value selection circuit 3183b, and a maximum value setting register 3183c. Note that FIG. 366 shows that either the external clock signal or the internal clock signal is input to the random number update circuit 3183 as an update clock signal for updating the random number. The random number shown in FIG. Maximum value data is further input to the update circuit 3183 from the CPU 304.

  A random number (random number data) is output from the counter circuit 3183a. The initial value of this random number is set in the start value selection circuit 3183b. The initial value is set to one of a fixed value (for example, 0), a value based on the ID number of the microprocessor 3000 stored in the program management area, and a value lottery within the random number generation range. Is done.

  The counter circuit 3183a is provided with a counter in which 1 is added for each clock of the update clock signal, and a value obtained by adding the initial value of the random number input from the start value selection circuit 3183b to the value of this counter is provided. Output as a random number.

  The maximum value of the random number output from the counter circuit 3183a is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c. Note that the maximum value of the random number is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 304. FIG. 368 (b) shows a 16-bit register in which this maximum value is set. The initial value when there is no instruction for setting the maximum value from the CPU 304 is FFFFH (65535). Instead of the maximum value setting register 3183c, for example, an area for setting a maximum value may be provided in the program management area of the ROM 306, and the set maximum value may be referred to.

  When the output random number exceeds the maximum value, the counter circuit 3183a subtracts a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, and then outputs this value as a random number. For example, in the case where the maximum value is 65535, if the value obtained by adding the initial value and the counter value is updated in the order of 65534, 65535, 65536, 65537, the output random numbers are 65534, 65535, 0 (655536). (65535 + 1)), 1 (65537- (65535 + 1)). That is, when the maximum value is exceeded, the output random number returns to zero.

  Further, when the value of the counter provided in the counter circuit 3183a reaches the maximum value set in the maximum value register 3183c, the value of this counter is cleared to 0, and from the counter circuit 3183a to the start value selection circuit 3183b. A signal (circular signal) indicating that the output of the random number has been completed is output. In the start value selection circuit 3183b that has received this round signal, the initial value of the random number is updated. When the initial value updated at this time exceeds the maximum value of the random number set in the maximum value setting register 3183c, for example, a fixed value can be used, or it can be set after multiplying the current maximum value of the random number once. By using a value divided by the maximum value (65535) of the random number generation range, a value that does not exceed the maximum random number value (a value within the random number generation range) is reset as an initial value. Of course, a value within the random number generation range may be set as an initial value by using this resetting method from the beginning.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum value set in the maximum value setting register 3183c is automatically updated when the output from the counter circuit 3183a completes a cycle. It may be updated.

  Here, the range of the random number generation will be described with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370. FIG. 369 is a diagram illustrating a range of random numbers output when the maximum value of the random number generation range is not set (default state). FIG. 370 is a diagram showing a range of random numbers output when a maximum value different from FIG. 369 is set.

  First, FIG. 369 (a) describes the situation in the nth cycle (immediately after the (n-1) th round signal is output). FIG. 369 (a) shows a random number generation range of 0 to 65535. Further, the initial value of the output random number is shown as the start value (X).

  A random number is updated and output from the random number update circuit 3183 for each clock of the update clock. More specifically, the start value (X) is output first, and then the random numbers updated in the order of X + 1 and X + 2 are output every clock thereafter. When the value of the random number reaches 65535, which is the maximum value of the random number generation range, the random number output next is returned to 0 by the above-described processing. Thereafter, the random numbers updated in the order of 1, 2 are output, and when the X-1 is output, this random number generation range is completed. At this time, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is the same as the maximum value. The start value selection circuit 3183b outputs a signal (round signal) indicating that the random number output has rounded.

  Subsequently, when one clock is input, the output of the random number update circuit 3183 enters the (n + 1) period (immediately after the nth round signal is output). The situation in the (n + 1) th cycle will be described with reference to FIG. First, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is cleared to zero. In the start value selection circuit 3183b, a new initial value is set. FIG. 369 (b) shows this new initial value as the start value (X ′). A random number is output in the same flow as the flow described above based on the new initial value and the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a.

  Next, in FIG. 370 (a), the situation in the nth cycle (immediately after the (n-1) th round signal is output) when the maximum value smaller than the maximum value of the random number generation range shown in FIG. 369 is set. Will be described. FIG. 370 (a) shows a random number generation range that is narrower than the random number generation range shown in FIG. 369 (a) by the set maximum value from 0 to 65535. Note that the range of random numbers that are not output is indicated by a left-down hatching. Further, the initial value of the output random number is shown as the start value (Y).

  Similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 369, the random number update circuit 3183 first outputs a start value (Y), and then outputs random numbers updated in order of Y + 1 and Y + 2 every clock. . When the value of the random number reaches the set maximum value, the random number output next is returned to 0 by the above-described processing. That is, random numbers in the range indicated by the left-down hatching are not output. Thereafter, the random numbers updated in the order of 1, 2 are output, and when the Y-1 is output, this random number generation range is completed. At this time, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is the same as the set maximum value. The start value selection circuit 3183b outputs a signal (round signal) indicating that the random number output has rounded.

  Subsequently, when one clock is input, the output of the random number update circuit 3183 enters the (n + 1) period (immediately after the nth round signal is output). The situation in the (n + 1) th cycle will be described with reference to FIG. 370 (b). As in the case described with reference to FIG. 369 (b), the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is cleared to zero. In the start value selection circuit 3183b, a new initial value is set. In FIG. 370 (b), this new initial value is shown as the start value (Y ′). A random number is output in the same flow as the flow described above based on the new initial value and the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a.

  In addition to appropriately setting the maximum value of the random number generation channel as described above, for example, the maximum random number value is 65535 in one random number generation channel, but the maximum random number value is 255 in another random number generation channel. For example, the random number generation range may be different for each channel. In this case, the channel may be selected according to the required random number generation range. In this case, the capacity of the maximum value setting register can be reduced and the processing load for setting the maximum value can be reduced. Furthermore, even if a plurality of maximum values that can be set in advance are set and an appropriate maximum value is selected and set from these, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the maximum value setting register and to reduce the processing load for setting the maximum value. Can be reduced.

  The random number output from the random number update circuit 3183 has been described above. Hereinafter, a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a range in which random numbers can be acquired in a random number generation range in which a maximum value and a minimum value are set.

  In the examples of FIGS. 368 to 370, the example of changing the maximum value of the random number generation range has been described. However, for example, the minimum value may be set. Further, a register for setting not only the maximum value but also the minimum value may be prepared, and as shown in FIG. 371 (a), the minimum value and the maximum value may be set to set the random number generation range. In addition, as shown in FIG. 371 (b), a plurality of random number generation ranges may be set. That is, any configuration can be used as long as the range of the output random number can be set. Further, in the above description, the example in which the output random number increases by 1 has been described for easy understanding, but other random number update methods may be used.

  Hereinafter, random numbers used in the game machine of this embodiment and main derivation sources will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a table showing random number derivation sources used in the game machine of this embodiment. Each random number shown in this figure is used in a flowchart described later.

  First, the special figure 1 winning random numbers, the special figure 2 winning random numbers, and the universal figure winning random numbers are based on random numbers generated by the random number generation channels CH1 to CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318. This value is appropriately processed as necessary and used as these random numbers.

  The big hit special figure random number, the small hit special figure random number, and the lost special figure random number are generated in a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later. That is, these random numbers are so-called software random numbers. Note that the initial value generating random numbers used when generating these random numbers are generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  For the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number, the value of the counter circuit 312 is used as a random number. In the count circuit 312 of this embodiment, in addition to the system clock of the microprocessor 3000, a timeout signal from the timer circuit, a memory read / write signal, a memory request signal, an external input / output signal, and the like can be used as counter targets. . Therefore, by combining these, a value having no regularity is derived and used for the above random number. The production random number is generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  Next, details of the internal information register 3101 provided in the interrupt control circuit 3100 shown in FIG. 364 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the internal information register 3101 has an external clock (count clock) cycle abnormality that determines the random number update cycle by the random number generation circuit 318, an abnormality of the generated random number value, and a user reset that occurred immediately before. The reset factor information and the like are stored. The internal register 3101 includes a first internal information register, a second internal information register, and a third internal information register.

  FIG. 373 is a diagram for describing the first internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 373 (a) shows a range in which information indicating abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 is stored in the first internal information register. This range is composed of 8 bits, and FIG. 373 (b) shows a table showing what information each bit represents.

  The CPU 304 checks the contents of the first internal information register every time a timer interrupt described later is executed (step S235a in FIG. 384). This content is used to determine whether or not to perform processing such as stopping the progress of a game when an abnormality occurs. For example, the present embodiment is configured such that the winning acceptance process is not executed when an abnormality is detected by the random number generation circuit 318 (see step S235c in FIG. 384 and FIG. 385). In addition, the ball may not be launched, the payout may not be performed, or the variation timer may not be subtracted. In particular, when there is an abnormality in random number update, there is a possibility that a large current is flowing through the random number update circuit 3183 (latch-up state). Good.

  Bit number 0 is a bit indicating an abnormality of the external clock (update clock) of the random number generation circuit 318. 0 indicates no abnormality and 1 indicates an abnormality. Bit numbers 1 to 4 are bits indicating an abnormality of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318 for each channel, where 0 indicates no abnormality and 1 indicates an abnormality. Bit numbers 5 to 7 are not used (fixed to 0).

  When the value of the first internal information register is 1, when read from the CPU 304, it is set (cleared) to 0. Since the internal information register is read by the CPU 304 at a time, if the value held in the first internal information register is set to 0 (cleared), the value is read after reading the value of the first internal information register to the CPU 304. You can discard the value. Further, as described above, when either system reset or user reset processing is executed, the internal information register is set (cleared) to 0 as in the case of reading from the CPU 304. It will be.

  As described above, how the abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 is stored has been described, but information indicating the reset factor is also stored in the first internal information register as in this example. In the above description, the abnormality of the random number generation channel is represented for each channel by the bit numbers 1 to 4, but it may be represented by one bit whether an abnormality has occurred in any channel. (It may be common to all channels). In this embodiment, the internal information register 3101 is provided in the interrupt control circuit 3100, but may be provided in another circuit. The second internal information register and the third internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100 will be described later.

  Next, an example of abnormality detection in the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 illustrated in FIG. 366 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows an example of abnormality detection in the frequency monitoring circuit 3182. FIG. 374 shows, from the top, normal operation, abnormal operation example 1 (abnormal time 1), and abnormal operation example 2 (abnormal time 2), respectively. In these examples, in addition to the internal clock of the microprocessor 3000 and the external clock (RCK) input to the random number generation circuit 318, the ratio of the cycle of the internal clock to one cycle of the external clock is shown. In this detection operation, the ratio of the period between the external clock and the internal clock is monitored, and a case where this ratio changes is detected as an abnormality.

  In the normal example shown in FIG. 374 (a), a state where the internal clock has 2.5 cycles continues during one cycle of the external clock. That is, since the ratio of the period between the external clock and the internal clock does not change, information indicating abnormality is not output.

  Next, operation example 1 (abnormal time 1) at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 374 (b) shows a state where there are 4.5 internal clocks in one period of the external clock. When the state shown in FIG. 374 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 374 (b), information indicating abnormality is output at this point.

  Next, at the beginning of the operation example 2 (abnormal time 2) at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 374 (c), a state in which the internal clock has 0.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock is shown. If the state shown in FIG. 374 (a) is changed to the first state shown in FIG. 374 (c), information indicating abnormality is output at this point. Further, in FIG. 374 (c), the state in which the internal clock is 0.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock continues, and the state in which the internal clock is 2.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock continues. ing. Information indicating abnormality is output even when the ratio of the period changes.

  In the above example, when one of the external clock and the internal clock becomes abnormal, information indicating abnormality is output. That is, even when the internal clock is used as a random number update clock, an abnormality can be detected. If the ratio between the external clock and the internal clock is the same, no information indicating abnormality is output even if both frequencies are changed. In this case, for example, information indicating the frequency of the external clock or the internal clock can be stored in the program management area, and the abnormality of the external clock or the internal clock can be detected using this information. The method for detecting an abnormality of the update clock is not limited to the above-described method, and other methods may be adopted as long as the abnormality of the update clock cycle can be detected.

  Next, an example of abnormality detection in the random number monitoring circuit 3184 illustrated in FIG. 366 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of detecting an abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184. In this detection example, the random numbers before and after the update are compared every time the random number is updated, and it is checked whether or not the same random number is generated. If the same random number is generated, information indicating abnormality is output. In the example of FIG. 375 (a), since the same random number is not generated before and after the update, information indicating abnormality is not output. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 375 (b), the same random number is generated in the middle of the update (random number 4 is generated twice), and at this point (second time point 4 is output) Will output information indicating anomalies. In the above example, the check is performed every time the random number is updated. However, the check may be performed every predetermined cycle longer than the random number update cycle.

  As described above, in the random number generation circuit 318, information indicating abnormality is output from the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 to the internal information register 3101. Further, the value of the internal information register 3101 is read by the CPU 304 at every timer interruption.

  By monitoring the abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 using both the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 as described above, there is an abnormality in the update clock frequency, but there is no abnormality in updating the random number ( An abnormal state that cannot be detected only by the random number monitoring circuit 3184) and an abnormal state in which the frequency of the update clock is normal but there is an abnormality in updating the random number can be accurately grasped. Control can be stabilized.

  In conventional game machines, fraud may be made by targeting the random numbers used in the lottery so that it is easy to derive the lottery results advantageous to the player, making it difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. ing. However, according to the gaming table of the present embodiment, since the random number generation 318 described above can grasp the abnormality of the random number used in the lottery, it can be dealt with. Can be secured. Note that the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 continuously monitor regardless of the information stored in the internal information register 3101.

  Here, the value of the internal information register 3101 is a cycle in which the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318 makes a round (a period required to output all the values in the random number generation range once, hereinafter, a random cycle) ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 376. This figure is a comparison of the cycle of the random number and the timer interrupt cycle. The top of FIG. 376 shows a random number round cycle t1 that is longer than the timer interrupt cycle t4 shown at the bottom. Also, the second and third from the top of FIG. 376 show random number round cycles t2 and t3 shorter than the timer interrupt cycle t4, respectively.

  As described above, the contents of the internal information register 3101 are confirmed for each timer interrupt. For example, when the random number round cycle is longer than the timer interrupt cycle t4 as in the random round cycle t1 shown in FIG. 376, this value can be read before the value held in the internal register 3101 is cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the maximum value of the random number generation range can be set, there may occur a situation where the random number cycle period is shortened accordingly. For example, when the round cycle of the random number is shorter than the timer interrupt cycle t4 as shown in the round trip cycles t2 and t3 of FIG. 376, this value may be cleared before reading the value held in the internal register 3101. That is, the CPU 304 may not be able to acquire information indicating abnormality.

In this embodiment, once the value of the internal information register 3101 is set, the value is held until this value is read. That is, this value is maintained regardless of whether it has returned to normal. Further, when the CPU 304 reads this value, the value of the read portion is cleared. For this reason, even if the round cycle of the random number has changed as described above, information indicating abnormality can be acquired from the internal information register 3101. If the abnormality continues after the value indicating abnormality is read, the value indicating abnormality is set again.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  This main control unit main process corresponds to the above-described process in the user mode, and is a process executed regardless of whether a system reset is applied or a user reset is applied. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293, there are special jackpot special figure 1 random number counters, small jackpot special figure 1 random number counters, loss special figure 1 random number counters, and counters for these counters of special figure 2. Is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of holds shown in FIG. The determination result of FIG. 1, the special figure 1 variation time, and the reservation number, random number, and result for the special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As shown below, the reserved storage unit of Special Figure 1 determines Special Figure 1 winning random numbers, Special Bonus Figure 1 random numbers, Special Bonus Figure 1 random numbers, Loss Special Figure 1 random numbers, and Special Figure 1 variation time determination. One set of five random numbers for use is stored as a set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 377 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the like. .

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is cut off), this step S103 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). Then, the process proceeds to step S105. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In step S105, initial setting 2 is performed.

  FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing a flow of initial setting 2 in the main process of the main control unit. First, in step S1051, setting processing relating to the counter circuit 312 such as processing for setting a maximum value and a numerical value for determining an update source in the counter circuit 312 is performed. Note that setting processing related to the timer circuit 311 is also performed, such as processing for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to the timer circuit 311 at regular intervals. In step S1052, a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1053. In step S1053, a random number generation circuit initial setting process is performed, and in step S1054, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308 is performed, and the initial setting 2 is completed.

  FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing the flow of the random number generation circuit initial setting process in step S1053. This random number generation circuit initial setting process is an initial setting process of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 366 performed in the above-described user mode. First, a range of random numbers (random number generation range) is set (step S1053a), and the process proceeds to step S1053b. As described above, in the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 366, the maximum width of the random number to be generated is 0 to 65535, and this maximum width becomes the default of the random number generation range. Here, FIGS. 368 to 371 are used. As described in detail, the random number generation range can be set to a range different from the default. Since the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 377 is a process that is executed every time reset (system reset or user reset) is performed, the setting of the random number generation range is also performed every time reset is performed. By doing in this way, the problem by abnormality of the random number generation range mentioned later using FIGS. 386 and 387 can be prevented.

  In step S1053b, the random number register 3188 shown in FIG. 366 is read and the read random number is discarded, and the process proceeds to step S1053c. By this processing, every time the random number generation range is reset, the random number register 3188 enters an allowable state that allows the random number to be latched. In this permissible state, even if a random number that may be abnormal remains in the random number register, it is possible to immediately update the random number, thereby preventing the use of a random number that may be abnormal.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit 318 generates a random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number and the universal winning random number, but the output channel differs depending on the control state. That is, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH1 during non-probability fluctuation (special figure low probability state), and is output from the channel CH2 during probability fluctuation (special figure high probability state). . Further, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH3 in the normal low probability state (during non-electric support) and is output from the channel CH4 in the normal high probability state (during electric support). Note that the random number generation circuit 318 may generate the special figure winning random number itself, or may generate a random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number. Further, the normal winning random number itself may be generated, or the random number that is the basis of the normal winning random number may be generated. In step S1053c, it is determined whether or not step S1053a and step S1053b have been executed for all four channels. If all channels have not been completed, the process returns to step S1053a for each unfinished channel. Process. Note that the setting of the random number generation range may be executed only for the channel used according to the state, or may be executed only for the channel for which the random number generation range is set. On the other hand, if all the channels have been completed, this random number generation circuit initial setting process is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the random number generation circuit initial setting process described above is performed, the random number generation circuit 318 starts updating the random number. When a user reset is applied, the random number is updated, and the random number is generated in the new random number generation range without delay based on the update of the random number generation range in that state. In addition, when a user reset is applied, a process for stopping the update of the random number may be performed once, and a process for restarting the update of the random number may be performed after setting the random number generation range. In addition, the timer interrupt of the main control unit is prohibited at this point, and the random number generation circuit initial setting processing is performed before the timer interrupt is permitted, so even if a new random number is latched, it is used for various lotteries. The lottery process can be stabilized.

  The random number generation circuit 318 may not perform the random number generation circuit initial setting process when receiving an instruction from the CPU 304 to execute the random number generation circuit initial setting process. That is, regardless of whether or not the random number generation circuit 318 performs the random number update, the CPU 304 may be instructed to execute the random number generation circuit initial setting process. With this configuration, the analysis result of the user program and the operation of the random number generation circuit 318 do not match, so that it becomes difficult to analyze the operation of the basic circuit 302 and fraud can be prevented. Therefore, the operation of the basic circuit 302 is not unstable due to fraud, and the game control can be stabilized. If the operation of the basic circuit 302 is analyzed by fraud, there is a possibility that an operation advantageous to the player may be performed. However, with the above configuration, such fraud can be prevented, so that game control is stable. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the random number generation circuit 318 performs the random number update, if the CPU 304 is instructed to execute the random number generation circuit initial setting process, the process when the user reset is performed may be unified. it can. That is, even if the state becomes unstable after the user reset, it is not necessary to perform the branch process, so that the game control can be stabilized. In addition, although the above-mentioned content described the case where a user reset was applied, the same effect can be acquired also when a system reset is applied.

  In step S107 in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 377, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (the main control unit 300). When the basic circuit 302 is initialized, the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (step S115).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 291, indicating that there has been an operation. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The result of the calculated checksum is It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set in the RAM 308 (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S109 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is other than the specific value. In the case (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S109, data write-back processing is performed. In this data write-back process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293. In step S109, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S231 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S111, processing for starting WDT 3141 is performed. Here, activation permission of WDT 3141, setting of an initial value, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT 3141.

  In step S113, RWM clear processing is performed. In this RWM clear process, all storage areas in the RAM 308 are initialized. In addition, setting of timer interrupt permission of the main control unit, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), etc. are also performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command that indicates that the RWM clear process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. In step S115, similarly to step S111, processing for starting WDT 3141 is performed.

  In step S117, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. Here, the basic random number corresponds to a big hit special figure random number, a small hit special figure random number, and a lost special figure random number, which are software random numbers. Note that each random number includes a random number for special figure 1 and a random number for special figure 2, but in the following description, unless otherwise noted, both will be described as a special figure without distinction. In this basic random number initial value updating process, the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial values of the big hit special figure random number counter, the small hit special figure random number counter, and the lost special figure random number counter is updated. Each counter is provided in the RAM 308. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S204 described later.

  In step S119, effect random number update processing is performed. The effect random number here is also a software random number, and this effect random number is a random number from which the effect is determined. In the present embodiment, when the lottery is executed to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch notice described later. It corresponds to the random number used. In this effect random number update process, the effect random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is updated. The effect random number counter is also updated in step S211 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S117 and step S119 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period. These steps S117 and S119 correspond to an example of main processing.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293 includes a timer circuit 311 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT 3141 is periodically changed to prevent the WDT 3141 interrupt from occurring when the count value of the WDT 3141 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 293 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 293, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S117 is updated, and then the jackpot special figure random number used in the main control unit 300, The random number counter for generating the special figure random number for small hits and the special figure random number for lose is updated. For example, if the possible numerical range for the big hit special figure random number is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the big hit special figure random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random counter for generating a special jackpot random number for big hit that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating special jackpot random numbers, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special counter random number counter for generating a big hit special round has been made next round. Keep it. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated, as in step S119. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. In other words, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, a hardware random number that is the basis of the special figure 1 winning random number is obtained from the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 293 and processed to obtain the special figure 1 winning random number. . This point will be described in more detail later. Also, the big hit special figure 1 random number, the small hit special figure 1 random number, and the lost special figure 1 random number are acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308. The special hit 1 random number for big hits, the special Fig. 1 random number for small hits, and the special Fig. 1 random number for lost are values obtained by processing software random numbers derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value) Value + 1). Further, the special figure 1 variation time determining random number is acquired from the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. A combination of the random number generation circuit 318, the counter circuit 312, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing shown in FIG. 293 generates and derives start information. This corresponds to an example of information deriving means (first starting information deriving means, second starting information deriving means). If attention is paid to the generation of hardware random numbers, the random number generation circuit 318 or the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. 293 generates start information, and start information generation means (first start information generation means, second start information generation means, Corresponds to an example of the starting information generating means). The various random numbers (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. . The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random numbers (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage unit. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random number which is start information is acquired as in special figure 1, and the obtained random number is similarly stored as a set of start information in the holding storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. Further, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random numbers (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The starting information storage means may be used, or the holding storage unit and the temporary area of FIG. 2 may be used as the second starting information storage means.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general figure starting port 228 and the number of pending custom figure variable games is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), the timing is as follows. The common winning random number is obtained from the random number generation circuit 318 shown in 293 and stored in a random number storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the special figure. The point that the normal winning random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit 318 will also be described later.

  In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. In such a case, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the winnings of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. ) Is set to receive winning information. Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 293 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 294 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 294 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, a signal to be held is output and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and provided in the RAM 308.

 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is a loss, the usual figure loss flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223. Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed.

  FIG. 381 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the general drawing related lottery process. In the general drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 381 (a), it is first determined whether or not there is general drawing hold information (step S2231). Here, the general map hold information refers to the number of hold of the general map. In other words, here, it is determined whether or not the number of pending variable games is one or more. In addition, even if it does not have the usual number of reservations as data, for example, a random number corresponding to the reservation (a normal winning random number) may be recognized as the general reservation information. If there is no general map hold information, this general drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if there is general map hold information, the process proceeds to step S2232. In step S2232, it is determined whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed. If it has been performed, the usual figure related lottery process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2233. In step S2233, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 is being performed (whether or not the normal map is operating). If it is not normally operated, the process proceeds to step S2234. In step S2234, a random number lottery based on the regular winning random number stored in the random number storage area is performed.

  FIG. 381 (b) is a diagram showing a general drawing lottery table. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the normal winning random number from the random number storage area of the RAM 308, refers to the short time flag, and if the short time flag is on, it is in a high probability state (during electric support) Subtracting the high-probability common-plan winning data from the common-lot winning random number, if a carry occurs (if the value of the general-plan winning data is larger than the normal winning random number), it is determined to be a general winning and a carry occurs. If you don't, you will lose your usual figure. That is, the normal winning random number range is 0-9. In the normal high probability state, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH4, a random number generation range of 0 to 9 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S1053a) in the random number generation circuit initial setting process shown in FIG. 379. The range that can be taken is 0-9. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal drawing in the normal high probability state is 1/1. On the other hand, if the time flag is off, it is in the low probability state (non-powered support), so the winning symbol in the low probability state is the same as the data in the high probability state from the acquired random number. If the data is pulled and a carry occurs (when the value of the win-winning data is larger than the normal-winning random number), the win-winning is determined. If no carry occurs, the win-win is lost. That is, even in the normal figure low probability state, the normal figure winning random number range is 0-9. In the normal low probability state, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH3 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. For this channel CH3, a random number generation range of 0 to 999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S1053a), and the range that can be taken by the normal winning random number in the normal low probability state is 0 to 999. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal figure in the normal figure low probability state becomes 1/100.

  In this embodiment, by limiting the range (random number generation range) that the normal winning random numbers can take from the default 0 to 65535 to 0 to 999, the big hit probability can be reduced to 1/100. In addition, the common figure winning data can be set to the same value in the common figure high probability state and the common figure low probability state. Determining the probability without limiting the random number generation range may lead to an increase in development man-hours and may cause erroneous probability design. In particular, the complexity becomes more noticeable when lottery is performed a plurality of times based on one opportunity. Therefore, limiting the random number generation range can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process. In addition, it can be said that sharing the common figure winning data in the common figure high probability state and the common figure low probability state can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process.

  When the regular drawing lottery is won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of losing (unfair), the winning flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the general drawing lottery, the random number for determining the normal diagram variation time is acquired from the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. One time for variably displaying the normal map on the figure display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in the normal time variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that selects one common map change time from a plurality of change times by lottery using the random number for determining the normal map change time corresponds to an example of a lottery means. Here, the lottery process for the usual time fluctuation time is different from the determination of whether or not the lottery is successful. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the common figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308. Each time step S2234 is executed, the number of pending custom figure variable games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. In addition, acquisition of the random number for determining the normal figure change time from the counter circuit 312 may be performed at the time of winning a prize in the general figure start port 228.

  In step S2235, the normal winning lottery used in the previous general drawing lottery is deleted from the random number storage area described above, and this general drawing related lottery process ends. Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S225) is executed. In this prefetching process, first, the special figure 1 winning random number in the special memory 1 of FIG. 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special figure 2 winning random number in the special memory 2 of FIG. 2 is prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read. In this step S225, a pre-judgment table having the same contents as the contents of the special figure lottery table shown in FIG. 383 (a) used in the special figure related process (step S229) described later is used, and the validity based on the pre-read special figure winning random number. Pre-determination is performed. In the special figure related process, the special figure lottery table is used again to determine whether or not the special figure variable game is successful, and the determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination. In the pre-judgment determination, a result of “big hit” or a result other than “big hit” is derived, and in the case of a result of “big hit”, the big hit in the reserved storage unit of FIG. The special figure 1 random number is prefetched, or the big hit special figure 2 random number in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 is prefetched. Subsequently, using the pre-determination table having the same content as the content of the stop symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 383 (b) used in the special symbol-related processing in step S229, the special symbol stop symbol based on the pre-fetched special bonus random number Make a prior judgment.

  In the special symbol related process, the special symbol stop symbol lottery table is used again, and the special symbol stop symbol lottery is performed again, and the determination result here is a preliminary determination result. In this way, when the stop symbol of the special figure is determined in advance, a lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is performed. This pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination performed in the special drawing-related lottery process before the special figure-related lottery process (step S229) is executed, that is, before the determination of success / failure is performed. 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit). The pre-reading notice here is a fake pre-reading notice that gives a false notice as if it was a big hit of 15R even if the pre-determined result of the stop symbol is not a big hit of 15R (Special Figure A or Special Figure B) Is also included. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot, an advance notification that suggests to the player, or an advance notice that the player expects that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot. It can be said that it is information. An effect random number (for example, a possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired from an effect random number counter provided in the RAM 308 at the timing of performing the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery, and the execution availability lottery is performed based on the acquired effect random number. In addition, the prior determination result of the stop symbol may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may perform this execution availability lottery.

  Next, the special figure state update process (step S227) for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 is performed, and then the special figure state for the special figure 1 is performed. Perform figure state update processing. In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S231) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lose flag, second lose flag, probability change flag, and hourly flag. Is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S231), which will be described later, is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S231).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S231).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S231) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S231).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. That is, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure start. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random numbers are stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the game is stored in the second special start area. When a ball wins, a random number is stored in both the first random number storage area and the first random number storage area, and the winning random number storage area that stores random numbers up to the maximum number of reservations in the second random number storage area In this case, the random number is stored in the second random number storage area regardless of the time when the random number is stored in the first random number storage area and the time when the random number is stored in the second random number storage area. If the random number is determined based on the random number, and the random number is not stored in the first random number storage area and the random number is stored in the second random number storage area, the second random number Based on random numbers stored in the storage area If the random number is not stored in the second random number storage area and the random number is stored in the first random number storage area, it is stored in the first random number storage area. In this case, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not the image is correct based on the random number. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. Note that the special figure 2 related lottery process may be performed first after the special figure 2 state update process, then the special figure 1 state update process may be performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process may be performed.

  FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special drawing related lottery process. In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 382, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are shown without being distinguished, but the processing from the step S2291 to the step S2296 is performed on the special drawing 2 first, and then the special drawing 1 is executed. The process from step S2291 to step S2296 is performed. Here, it demonstrates without distinguishing special figure 2 and special figure 1. FIG.

  In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 382, first, it is determined whether or not there is special figure holding information (step S2291). Here, special figure hold information refers to the number of special figure hold. That is, here, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games that are on hold is one or more. For example, a random number corresponding to a hold (a special figure winning random number) may be recognized as the special figure hold information without having the number of special figure hold as data. If there is no special figure hold information, the special figure related lottery process is terminated, and if there is special figure hold information, the process proceeds to step S2292. In step S 2292, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device (212, 214) is in the special figure variation display or in the stop display. The related lottery process ends, and if none of the displays is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2293. In step S2293, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in operation. If the special figure is in operation, the special figure-related lottery process ends. If the special figure is inactive, the process proceeds to step S2294.

  In step S2294, special drawing lottery processing is performed. Here, first, a special set of random numbers (special figure winning random number, big hit special figure random number, small hit special figure random number, Take out the special figure random number for losing and the random number for determining the special figure fluctuation time), and transfer the starting information (set of random numbers) still stored in the reserved storage part from the currently stored area to the next area . That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the reserved storage unit of the special figure and the starting information is stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure, the Nth oldest starting information is stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 Is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random numbers (special figure winning random number, big hit special figure random number, small hit special figure random number, lose special figure random number, and special figure variable time determination random number) are taken out from the special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs processing corresponds to an example of the start information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 383 (a) shows a special drawing lottery table. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress (the special figure high probability state). If the special figure jackpot winning data with probability fluctuation is subtracted from the figure winning random number and carry occurs (if the value of the special figure winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number), the special figure jackpot is won and the carry occurs If not, the special figure jackpot will not be selected. That is, the special figure big hit winning random number range is 0 to 124. During the probability variation, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH2, a random number generation range of 0 to 4999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range in the random number generation circuit initial setting process shown in FIG. 379 (step S1053a). The range obtained is 0-4999. Therefore, the winning probability of the special figure jackpot during the probability change is 1/40.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it means that non-probability fluctuation is in progress (special figure low probability state). On the other hand, if a carry occurs (when the value of the special figure winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number), the special figure big hit is won, and if no carry occurs, the special figure big hit is not selected. That is, the special figure big hit winning random number range is 0 to 124 even during non-probability fluctuation. During non-probability fluctuation, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH1, a random number generation range of 0 to 49999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S1053a), and the range that can be taken by the special figure winning random number during non-probability variation is 0 to 49999. Therefore, the winning probability of the special figure jackpot during non-probability fluctuation is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, by limiting the range (random number generation range) that the special figure winning random number can take from the default 0 to 65535 to 0 to 49999, the jackpot probability can be reduced to 1/400. Further, the special figure big hit winning data can be set to the same value during the probability fluctuation and the non-probability fluctuation. Determining the probability without limiting the random number generation range may lead to an increase in development man-hours and may cause erroneous probability design. In particular, the complexity becomes more noticeable when lottery is performed a plurality of times based on one opportunity. Therefore, limiting the random number generation range can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process. In addition, it can be said that sharing the special figure big hit winning data during the probability fluctuation and the non-probability fluctuation can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process.

  In FIG. 383 (a), only the special figure big hit lottery table is shown, but a predetermined value is prepared as the special figure small hit prize data. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 subtracts the special figure big hit winning data from the acquired special figure winning random number, and when no carry occurs (when the value of the special figure winning data is smaller than the special figure winning random number), This time, if the special figure small win winning data is subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the special figure big hit winning data, and a carry occurs here (if the special figure small winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number) If you win a small figure and no carry occurs, you will lose. It is also possible to separately provide lost winning data. In this way, the special chart “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” are determined, and the determination result is obtained as the special figure determination result. Note that the number of special figure variable games that are held is stored in the special figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure variable games that are held each time step S2294 is executed. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from is re-stored in this special figure holding number storage area.

  Next, in the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 382, a special figure stop symbol is drawn using software random numbers based on the special figure determination result (step S2295). FIG. 383 (b) is a diagram showing a stop symbol lottery table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the stop symbol lottery table, symbol winning data corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special symbol (see FIG. 294 (a)) is defined for each success / failure determination result. In FIG. 5B, the winning probability is also shown.

  When the determination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a special jackpot random number for a big hit out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible numerical range is 0 to 0). 99) from special figure A, special figure B, ... special figure F, the symbol winning data corresponding to each stop symbol is gradually subtracted, and the stop symbol when a carry occurs is used as the special symbol determination result. . If the result of the determination is a small hit, a special hit random number for a small hit (a numerical range that can be taken is 0 to 99) out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. If the symbol winning data of Fig. G is drawn and a carry occurs, "Special Illustration G" is won, and if no carry occurs, the special drawing H is further subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the symbol winning data of Special Illustration G. The symbol winning data is drawn, and since a carry occurs here, “Special Figure H” is won. Note that before drawing the symbol winning data of the special figure H, it may be determined that the “special figure H” has been won. In this way, when the determination result is a small hit, “special figure G” or “special figure H” is determined as the special figure determination result. Further, if the determination result is a loss, a special figure random number for loss (a possible numerical range is 0 to 99) out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the storage unit of the RAM 308 will be special figure I. If a carry occurs, the special symbol I will be selected, and if no carry occurs, the special symbol J will be further subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the special symbol I symbol winning data. The winning data is drawn, and here a carry occurs, so “Special Figure J” is won. Here, it may be determined that “Special Figure J” has been won before drawing the symbol winning data of Special Figure J. In this way, when the determination result is lost, “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure J” is determined as the special figure determination result. Note that the first sub-control unit 400 determines a stop symbol pattern that is a combination of decorative symbols according to the special symbol determination result determined here.

  Also, a special figure variation time determination random number (possible numerical range is 0 to 255) of a set of random numbers previously acquired from the storage unit of the RAM 308 is acquired, and the acquired special map variation time determination random number is acquired. In the lottery using, based on the result of the special figure determination, one time (special figure fluctuation time) for displaying the special figure on the special figure display device (212, 214) is selected from a plurality of fluctuation times. . In addition, in the 1st sub control part 400, the production | presentation aspect of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 according to the special figure change time determined here is determined. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that selects one special figure fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times by lottery using the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value also corresponds to an example of a lottery means. Here, the lottery process for the special figure variation time corresponds to the lottery process related to the production, which is different from the determination of whether or not the special figure is a big hit, and different from the lottery for determining the symbol of the special figure. That is, the lottery process is irrelevant to the change of the control state and is not related to the payout of the prize ball.

  In step S2296, the one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is erased, and this special drawing related lottery process ends. In step S231 performed following the special figure related lottery process in step S229, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S231, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Furthermore, in this step S231, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 380, an external output signal setting process (step S233) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. In step S235, device monitoring processing is performed.

  FIG. 384 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of device monitoring processing. First, in step S235a, information in the internal information register 3101 is acquired. Since step S235a is executed for each timer interrupt, the information in the internal information register 3101 is acquired for each timer interrupt.

  In step S235b, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the random number generation circuit 318 based on the information acquired in step S235a. Here, the abnormality of the random number generation circuit refers to both abnormality of the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and abnormality of the random number monitoring circuit 3184. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S235c. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S235e.

  In step S235c, the random number generation circuit abnormality flag is set to ON. This flag is stored in the RAM 308. More specifically, there are a flag indicating abnormality of the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and a flag indicating abnormality of the random number monitoring circuit 3184. Hereinafter, these flags may be collectively referred to as a random number generation circuit abnormality flag.

In subsequent step S235d, preparation for transmission of a random number generation circuit abnormality flag setting command is executed, and the process proceeds to step S235e. The random number generation circuit abnormality flag setting command is a command including information that can identify whether the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 is abnormal or the random number monitoring circuit 3184 is abnormal.

  In step S235e, other device monitoring processing is executed. For example, by reading the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 described above, the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the bottom pan full error is monitored, and the glass frame open error or bottom pan full error is monitored. Device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame open error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 293 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the normal symbol display device 210, Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. When these processes are finished, the device monitoring process in step S235 is finished.

  In the subsequent step S237, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S239, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S239, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return. On the other hand, in step S241, a power interruption process for returning to the power interruption state upon power recovery is performed.

  FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing a flow of a power interruption process in the main control unit. In this power interruption process, first, the stack pointer is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (step S2431), and then the power status stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is updated to information indicating suspend. (Step S2432). Subsequently, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum Is set in the RAM 308 (step S2433). Finally, access to the RAM 308 is set to be prohibited (step S2433), the power interruption process is terminated, and the pachinko machine 100 is eventually disconnected. When the voltage is restored before it completely drops, the reset control circuit 314 resets the reset operation (here, the WDT 3141 provided in the reset control circuit 314 shown in FIG. 364 times out). System reset). The main control unit timer interrupt process described above also corresponds to an example of the main process.

  Next, a process of acquiring the special winning random number and the normal winning random number in the winning acceptance process (step S217) shown in FIG. 380 will be described. FIG. 385 is a diagram showing a flow of processing for obtaining a special winning random number and a normal winning random number in the winning acceptance process in step S217.

  In step S217a, it is determined whether or not the random number generation circuit abnormality flag is set to ON. This flag is a flag set in step S235c of FIG. 384. When there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number update clock, or the random number updated by the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 366 is updated normally. If not, the corresponding flag is set to ON. If this flag is set to ON, the winning acceptance process is terminated. If there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S217b.

  In step S217b, there is a special signal of FIG. 1 indicating that the first special figure starting port 230 has won, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). If the result is negative, the process proceeds to step S217f. If the result is positive, the process proceeds to step S217c. In step S217c, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (special figure high probability state). If the probability variation flag is set to OFF, it means that non-probability variation is in progress (special figure low probability state), and step S217d is executed. In step S217d, a random number is acquired from the random number register of channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318. In the present embodiment, a similar signal is sent to the CPU separately from the incoming signal that triggers random number latching, and the CPU responds to a signal in a predetermined channel (here, CH1) based on the reception of the signal. Get the latched random number from the random number register. The CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the obtained random number, and further obtains a value obtained by adding 1 as the special figure 1 winning random number, and proceeds to step S217f. The CPU 304 recognizes the random number generation range set in step S1053a shown in FIG. 312 and performs addition processing based on the random number generation range. That is, when the added value exceeds the maximum value of the random number generation range, the remaining value is added to the minimum value of the random number generation range.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability is changing, and step S217e is executed. In this step S217e, a random number is acquired from the random number register of the channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318, and as in step S217d, the CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the acquired random number, and further adds a value obtained by adding 1. 1 is obtained as a winning random number, and the process proceeds to step S217f.

  In step S217f, there is a special signal of FIG. 2 indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has been won, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). If the result is negative, the process proceeds to step S217j. If the result is positive, the process proceeds to step S217g. Also in step S217g, as in step S217c, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and if the probability variation flag is set to OFF (if non-probability variation is in progress), the random number of channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318 The random number is acquired from the register, and similarly to step S217d, the CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the acquired random number, and further obtains a value obtained by adding 1 as a special figure 2 winning random number (step S217h), The process proceeds to step S217j. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is set to ON (if the probability is changing), the random number is acquired from the random number register of the channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318, and similarly to step S217d, the CPU 304 The value of the R register is added to the value, and a value obtained by adding 1 is obtained as the special figure 2 winning random number (step S217i), and the process proceeds to step S217j.

  In step S217j, whether there is a general-purpose entrance signal indicating that a win has been made at the general-purpose start opening 228, and whether the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold is less than a predetermined number (2 in this embodiment). If the answer is negative, the winning acceptance process ends. If the answer is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S217k. In step S217k, the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to. If the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is a normal low probability state (non-electric support), and step S217l is executed. In step S217l, a random number is acquired as a normal winning random number from the random number register of channel CH3 of the random number generation circuit 318, and this winning acceptance process ends. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is a normal high probability state (during electric support), and step S217m is executed. In step S217m, a random number is acquired as a regular winning random number from the random number register of channel CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318, and the winning acceptance process is completed.

  Here, based on the content described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game machine is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like in a big hit state, when the game table is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player becomes extremely disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a power interruption process (step S241 in FIG. 380) for holding the state of the gaming machine with the electric power stored in the capacitor is executed. This power interruption process is executed not only when the power is turned off, but also when the supply voltage temporarily decreases due to factors such as static electricity. Hereinafter, an operation when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as “power off”) and an operation when the supply voltage is temporarily reduced (hereinafter referred to as “momentary interruption”) will be described with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing an operation when the power is off, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an operation when there is an instantaneous interruption.

  When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not immediately become 0, but the supply voltage gradually drops due to the electric power stored in the capacitor. When the supply voltage is effective up to a predetermined voltage (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304. By receiving this signal, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred in step S237 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the power interruption process in step S241 is executed. FIG. 386 (a) shows that the normal process is executed until the supply voltage drops to 9V after the occurrence of the power interruption, and the process at the time of power interruption is started when the supply voltage becomes 9V. Has been. By this power interruption process, data indicating the state of the game machine is stored in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, a capacitor is provided that can sufficiently secure the time required for the execution of the power interruption process (main control section power interruption time delay). After that, when the process at the time of power interruption is completed, the apparatus is in a standby state as it is. Thereafter, when the supply of power is not resumed, the voltage drops to 0 and the operation of the game machine stops.

  On the other hand, even in the case of a momentary interruption, a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304, so that the power interruption process is executed, and then the apparatus enters a standby state. FIG. 386 (b) shows that the power interruption process is started due to a temporary voltage drop. Here, even if the voltage recovers to the operating voltage, the standby state continues. If this standby state continues, WDT 3141 of reset control circuit 314 of main control unit 300 is not restarted (step S203 in FIG. 380 is not executed), and WDT 3141 times out. As a result, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a system reset signal. Thereafter, when the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 377 is resumed, the return process (steps S109 to S111) including the data write-back process in step S109 is executed based on the data stored in the power interruption process. . FIG. 386 (b) shows that a reset signal due to a timeout of WDT 3141 has been transmitted, so that the process shifts from a standby state to a return process (reset process). By this return processing, the state of the gaming table is restored to the state before the processing at the time of power interruption. If the data stored in the power interruption process is defective, it is determined that the state before the power interruption process cannot be restored, and the contents of the RAM 308 are cleared (step S113 in FIG. 377). ).

  Next, the effect of setting a random number generation range by the random number generation circuit 318 of the present embodiment will be described, and then problems will be described. As described above, the random number generation circuit 318 included in the gaming machine of the present embodiment can set a random number generation range that is the basis of the lottery result. Using this function, the game state can be easily set.

  First, the case where the random number generation range is 0 to 65535 will be described. For example, when these random numbers correspond to either winning or losing, an attempt is made to design the winning probability to be 1/400 (0.25%). There are 65536 random numbers to be generated, but when 1/400 of 65536 is calculated, it is 163.84, which is not an integer. If 164 random numbers close to this number are made to correspond, the winning probability is not exactly 1/400.

  Here, it is assumed that the random number generation range is set to 0-49999. Similarly to the above case, in order to make the winning probability 1/400 (0.25%), it is only necessary to match 1/400 of the generated random numbers 50000, that is, 125 values. . For example, the winning probability can be reduced to 1/400 by associating a value of 0 to 124 among 50000 random numbers and associating other values of 125 to 49999 with a loss. That is, the random number generation range (for example, 0 to 49999) and the random number range (for example, 0 to 124) corresponding to the winning can be set so that the winning probability is as designed (for example, 1/400).

  As described above, a desired winning probability can be set by appropriately setting the random number generation range. For example, it is possible to exclude the random number generation range corresponding to the jackpot and leave the random number generation range corresponding to the jackpot, or to prevent generation of random numbers corresponding to half of the random number generation range corresponding to the jackpot. It is. In particular, if a random number generation range as described with reference to FIG. 371 can be set, it becomes easier to design a gaming machine than when only the maximum value is set. For this reason, it can be said that setting the random number generation range is useful in the design of a game machine.

  Next, a method for changing the winning probability by changing the random number generation range will be described. For example, it is assumed that the maximum value of the random number generation range is changed from 49999 to 249 from the state in which the values from 0 to 124 are associated with each other in the random number generation range of 0 to 49999. In this case, the value from 0 to 124 corresponds to the win, the value from 125 to 249 corresponds to the loss, and the winning probability is ½. That is, the winning probability can be easily changed by changing only the random number generation range while fixing the value corresponding to the winning or losing. In the above description, in order to make it easier to understand, the example in which the hit range is biased has been described, but the hit range may not be biased.

  As a method for determining whether it is a hit or a loss based on the generated random number, a method that prepares a table that defines these correspondences and uses this table can be considered. However, if the winning probability is to be changed by this method, it is necessary to prepare a table corresponding to the winning probability and execute a process for selectively using these according to the state of the game. In the above-described method, only one table in which values corresponding to winning or losing are determined is required, so that the memory capacity burden can be reduced. As a matter of course, the process of switching the table is unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of random number generation channels having different random number generation ranges are prepared, and the winning probability during the game is changed by using these channels properly. However, the random number generation range is appropriately changed for one channel. The winning probability may be changed by using a configuration to do so. In this embodiment, random numbers may be processed and used for lottery. In this case, a corresponding table may be prepared in consideration of processing.

  Here, a problem when the random number generation range has been changed unintentionally will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the problem of the random number generation range. For example, it is assumed that the above-described instantaneous interruption occurs due to factors such as static electricity, and then a return process (user reset) is performed. In this case, the internal register of the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained as it is before the return process. However, information in the internal register may be rewritten due to a change in voltage. If the random number generation range is changed unintentionally, the winning probability will change.

  For example, in the non-stochastic fluctuation state, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 387 (a), a random number generation range of 0 to 49999 is set, and 0 to 124 (range indicated by left-downward hatching) is hit. Is a random number corresponding to. It is assumed that a factor such as static electricity is generated in this state, and the random number generation range becomes 0 to 250. In this case, since the winning probability is reduced from 1/400 to 1/2, the store side is seriously damaged.

  Further, in the probability variation state, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 387 (b), a random number generation range of 0 to 4999 is set, and among these, 0 to 124 (range indicated by the left-downward hatching) is the hit. Assume that the corresponding random number. It is assumed that a factor such as static electricity is generated in this state and the random number generation range becomes 0 to 59999. In this case, the winning probability is reduced from 1/40 to 1/480, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player.

  As explained in the above example, if lottery processing is performed using a method that limits the numerical range in which random numbers are generated to an arbitrary numerical range, the lottery processing will not be performed if the numerical range restricted due to some abnormality changes. There arises a problem that it leads to stabilization.

  In order to prevent such a situation, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in step S1053a in FIG. 379, a process for resetting the random number generation range to a state immediately before the cause of the return process is executed. By re-setting the random number generation range in this way, the above problem can be prevented from occurring. That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery process from becoming unstable while performing the lottery process using a method of limiting the numerical value range in which the random number is generated to an arbitrary numerical value range.

  In this embodiment, since the random number generation range is set when the game machine is started, the state immediately before the cause of the return process is the same as the initial state. For example, the random number generation range is set during the game. In the case of a changeable configuration, a process for returning to the previous state may be executed.

  In addition, as in this embodiment, the random number generation range is reset for a channel for which the random number generation range is set, and the random number generation range is set for a channel for which the random number generation range is not set. In the case of a configuration that is not corrected, there are channels that are initialized and channels that are not initialized. In this case, since it is not known whether the channel is initialized from the outside of the basic circuit 302, there is an effect of preventing fraud.

  Further, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the random number register 3188 is allowed to be latched in step S1053b of FIG. In this way, when there is an abnormality in the random number latched in the random number register 3188, the frequency with which this random number is used can be lowered. At this time, the content of the random number latch flag register 3189 is rewritten with information indicating that the random number register 3188 is in a state in which the random number can be latched. In the present embodiment, the random number register 3188 and the random number generation range are set simultaneously by the user program (see FIG. 378). However, the hardware program is used to set the random number generation range. It may be. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even if the random number register 3188 enters the permissible state, the random number remains until a new random number is latched. You may make it set (for example, set to 0). In this case, it is possible not to use random numbers that may be abnormal.

  When the user reset by the WDT 3141 is executed, the above-described resetting is executed through the determination of the drive voltage (step S103 in FIG. 376) after the user reset is executed (step S1053 in FIG. 376). The time required for this determination process is not constant because it depends on the voltage supply. For this reason, it is possible to give randomness to the timing at which random numbers reflecting the resetting start to be output, which is effective in preventing fraud. Note that the same effect can be obtained in the above-described configuration in which the maximum random number is updated when an update command is received from the CPU 304.

  In the above description, an example of a problem caused by a change in voltage and a countermeasure for the problem has been described. However, for example, a value in the start value selection circuit 3183b of the random number generation circuit 318 may be rewritten. is there. In this case, a value that should not be generated may be output from the random number update circuit 3183. Also for such a problem, as in the example of the random number generation range described above, by executing a process of resetting the value in the start value selection circuit 3183b to the state immediately before the cause of the return process occurs, It is possible to prevent the above problems from occurring. In addition, the value in the start value selection circuit 3183b may be reset separately according to the random number generation range. That is, it is possible to prevent an abnormal operation from occurring due to a voltage change by executing a process of appropriately resetting a value that can be set by the random number generation circuit 318 as necessary.

  In addition to the change in voltage, for example, when an unexpected operation occurs due to traveling outside the specified area, the above-described problem may occur. In particular, when traveling outside the designated area, there is a high possibility that the same situation will be reproduced due to a program mistake or the like, and there is a risk that fraud will be easier than when the voltage changes. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when traveling outside the designated area occurs, the resetting is performed by step S1053a and step S1053b in FIG. 379.

  Here, based on the above description, a supplementary description will be given of the start timing (steps S111 and S115) of WDT 3141 in the main process of the main control unit in FIG. In normal WDT, counting up is performed independently of program execution. With this configuration, even if there is some problem in the execution of the program, the reset operation (user reset) can be executed without being affected by this. For this reason, WDT needs to be activated (reactivated) at the time of initial setting. However, there may be a problem depending on the start timing. This problem will be described with reference to an example in which WDT is started immediately after initial setting 1 in step S101 in FIG.

  It is assumed that the main process of the main control unit is started in a state where data for restoration is stored in the RAM 308 by the user reset. First, initial setting 1 is executed in step S101, and then WDT is activated. Next, standby processing in step S103 is executed until a sufficient drive voltage is secured.

  For example, when the above-described user reset is executed due to instability of the supply voltage, the execution time of this standby process may become long. If the standby process takes time here,

 In some cases, the WDT times out during execution of step S107 or step S109, and the user reset is executed again. In this case, since the main control unit main process is executed again from the beginning, the processing time until the return data stored in the RAM 308 is returned to the register becomes long.

  Further, for example, in step S109, when the process of returning the data of the RAM 308 to the register and erasing the data of the RAM 308 is executed, the user reset is executed in a state where a part of the data of the RAM 308 is erased. There is also a possibility. In this case, even if the main control unit main process is executed again from the beginning, the restoration data in the RAM 308 is incomplete, and it is not determined that restoration is possible in step S107. Even if it is determined in step S107 that recovery is possible, the data write-back processing in step S109 cannot completely return to the state before the user reset.

  In order to avoid such a problem, in this embodiment, a system reset is executed by a timeout by WDT 3141. However, in this embodiment, a user reset may be further executed by a timeout by WDT 3141. The WDT 3141 is configured to be activated after the drive voltage is determined until the main control unit timer interrupt process is permitted (steps S111 and S115). The above configuration is an example, and WDT 3141 is activated so that WDT 3141 does not time out after main control unit main processing is started after user reset and before main control unit timer interrupt processing is permitted. It is preferable to do. In addition, after the user reset is performed, the main control unit starts the progress of the game (in this embodiment, steps S117 to S119 of the main control unit main process are started, and the main control unit timer interrupt process is started). WDT 3141 is preferably activated so that WDT 3141 does not time out before In particular, the process for returning the game after the user reset (the process for enabling the progress of the game) includes a standby process for executing the initial setting process of the liquid crystal image display device (decorated symbol display device). In such a case, the above problem is more likely to occur, so that the WDT 3141 is activated more effectively at the timing described above. Furthermore, even if the WDT 3141 is activated in the first process of the main control unit timer interrupt process, the above problem can be avoided. In the above description, the case where the user reset is executed is described as an example, but the same applies to the case where the system reset is executed.

  Here, a modified example of the random number update circuit 3183 described with reference to FIG. 368 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG. The random number update circuit 3183n shown in FIG. 388 (a) is obtained by adding a random number sequence change circuit 3183d to the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG.

  The random number sequence change circuit 3183d is provided with a plurality of random number tables in advance. FIG. 388 (b) shows a plurality of random number sequences in which an array of 65536 random numbers is predetermined. When using these plurality of random number sequences, it is possible to set whether to use the same random number sequence continuously or to change to another random number sequence when one random number sequence is made a round. Furthermore, when changing to another random number sequence, it is possible to set whether to change automatically without an instruction or whether to instruct a change each time. Note that when a round signal is received from the counter circuit 3183a, it is determined that one round of the random number sequence has been made.

  When the random number sequence to be used in the random number sequence changing circuit 3183d is determined, a value is extracted from this random number sequence according to the count value output from the counter circuit 3183a. This extracted value is output as a random number. For example, in FIG. 388 (b), when it is decided to use the random number sequence B, if a count value “5” is input, “9806” is output as a random number (the thick frame in FIG. 388 (b)). (See the part indicated by).

  Here, an example of processing when the maximum value is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c will be described. In FIG. 370, the example in which the range of values output from the count circuit 3183a is changed according to the maximum value set in the maximum value setting register 3183c has been described. In FIG. 370, the value output from the count circuit 3183a is used as a random number as it is. Here, the value output from the count circuit 3183a is used as a count value instead of a random number, and is input to the random number sequence change circuit 3183d.

  For example, when the maximum value is set to 9999, a count value of 0 to 9999 is output from the count circuit 3183a. Here, the random number sequence changing circuit 3183d acquires the maximum value data from the maximum value setting register 3183c, and executes a process of deleting a value exceeding the maximum value from the values of the random number sequence and filling the empty portion. By this process, a random number sequence in which values 0 to 9999 are randomly arranged is prepared. When a value corresponding to the count value is output as a random number using this random number sequence, a random number having a random number generation range of 0 to 9999 can be output. Note that the above method is an example. For example, when a value corresponding to a count value is referred to from a random number sequence and the maximum value is exceeded, subsequent values are sequentially referred to, and the referenced value indicates the maximum value. Other methods may be used, such as outputting a value that does not exceed the value.

  Here, an example of detecting an abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184 when the random number update circuit 3183n is used will be described. In this case, the count value output from the counter circuit 3183a is compared before and after one random number update, and it is checked whether or not the same count value is output. If the same count value is output, information indicating abnormality is output. The check timing may be every predetermined cycle longer than the random number update cycle. The random number monitoring circuit 3184 may monitor the random number output from the random number sequence changing circuit 3183d. However, as described above, the monitoring accuracy is improved by monitoring the count value output from the counter circuit 3138a. At the same time, the monitoring burden can be reduced.

  As described in the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 366, a random number monitoring circuit 3183n may be provided outside the random number generation circuit 318, and a random number monitoring circuit 3184 is provided inside the random number update circuit 3183n. May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a payout control unit main process executed by the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 293 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the payout control unit.

  The payout control unit 600 illustrated in FIG. 293 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the payout control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600). If it is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

  A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the reception of this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process.

  First, in step S501, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S502, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S503. move on.

  In step S503, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter / timer, a setting for permitting the payout control unit 600 to write to the RAM, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S506 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S505. Specifically, also in this step S504, processing similar to that in step S111 of the main process of the main control unit 300 is performed, and if RAM clear is necessary, the process proceeds to step S506 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and when the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S506. If it is information indicating suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S505 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S506 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S505, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, of the storage area of the payout controller 600 RAM, a storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (a command buffer for storing commands, a memory other than an error status for storing error status, etc.) Area) is initialized.

  In step S506, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S507, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, information other than the illegal payout error and the payout excess error among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S508, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S509, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In step S510, similarly to step S502, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply shutoff is not detected), the process returns to step S508. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S511.

In step S511, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a numerical storage area for checksum calculation The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is performed.
<Discharge control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 600 also includes a counter circuit that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms), and starts the payout control unit timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. To do.

  In step S601, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU of the payout control unit 600 to the stack area is performed. The payout control unit 600 is also provided with a watch dog timer (WDT). In step S602, the WDT is restarted.

  In step S603, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the value of the I / O port of the payout control unit 600 is acquired to detect the state of the payout sensor 604 and the like shown in FIG. In step S604, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a timer for timing the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, the driving / non-driving time of the payout motor 602 shown in FIG.

  In step S605, an error monitoring process is performed. Various error signals such as a lower pan full error signal and a glass frame opening error signal are sent from the main control unit 300 to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. The RAM of the payout control unit 600 is provided with an error status storage area, a game medium lending information storage area, a payout completion number check storage area, and a motor drive amount storage area. Information corresponding to each error signal is stored in the error status storage area. In this error monitoring process, it is determined whether or not various error signals are ON. If ON, information indicating an error corresponding to the error status storage area is stored. If OFF, the error status storage area is stored. The information indicating the cancellation of the error corresponding to is stored. Further, whether or not communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is possible is determined based on whether or not a command from the main control unit can be received continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and an error status is stored. If the communication is possible, information indicating that communication is possible is stored in the area, and if the communication is impossible, information indicating that communication is not possible (main control communication error) is stored. In addition, as to whether communication between the card unit (CR unit) 608 and the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 293 is possible, is it impossible to continuously receive a signal from the card unit 608 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms)? If the communication is possible in the error status storage area, information indicating that communication is possible is conversely impossible if communication is impossible (CR unit unconnected error) Is stored. In addition, an error release signal is also sent to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. In this error monitoring process, it is also determined whether or not the error cancellation signal is on. If the error cancellation signal is on, the information stored in the error status storage area is initialized to cancel the error.

  In step S606, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, a game medium lending signal is received from the interface unit 606 shown in FIG. 293, and it is determined whether or not the game medium lending signal sensor signal is on. When a ball lending request is input from the unit 606), information indicating that there is a game medium lending request is stored in the game medium lending information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S607, a payout operation management process is performed. In the error status storage area described above, information on illegal payout errors and information on payout excess errors are also stored. In this payout operation management process, information on illegal payout errors and information on payout excess errors are read from the error status storage area. If neither error has occurred, a signal from the payout sensor 604 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the number of payouts is monitored based on the payout sensor signal. That is, when a predetermined error has occurred, the driving of the payout motor 602 is stopped, that is, the payout of a prize medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped. Specifically, the signal of the payout sensor 604 is detected to determine whether or not the payout sensor signal is on. When the payout sensor signal is on (when the ball passes through the payout sensor), the number of payouts completed. 1 is added to the check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. Further, when the payout sensor signal is turned on when there is no request for a winning ball or a lending ball, information indicating an illegal payout error is stored in the error status storage area, and the number of winning balls or the number of lending balls is When each request number is exceeded and the number exceeds the predetermined number, information indicating a payout excess error is stored in the error status storage area.

  Also, the information indicating the lower tray full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above, and when any error has not occurred, the payout start monitoring process, the initial Any one of position search operation processing, normal payout operation processing, retry operation processing, and reverse rotation operation processing is performed.

  As described above, the payout device 152 includes a sprocket that is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor 602. This sprocket temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and also drives the payout motor 602 to rotate by a predetermined angle, thereby temporarily retaining the game ball. Are delivered one by one downward to the dispensing device 152. In the payout start monitoring process, when the number of lending requests and the number of requested prize balls are 0, and the number of requested next prize balls is other than 0, the number of requested next prize balls is set as the number of requested prize balls, and the next prize ball request Clear the number. When the position of the payout motor 602 is indefinite (when the operation mode is the initial position search operation mode), 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the position is fixed (when the operation mode is the normal payout operation mode), 0 is set in the payout completion number check storage area as a payout completion number check. Also, the requested number of winning balls is converted into an amount for driving the payout motor 602 (motor drive amount), and this is stored in the motor drive amount storage area provided in the RAM, and the motor control data table provided in the RAM is referred to. Then, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit that controls the payout motor 602 via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the initial position search operation process and the normal payout operation process, after the driving of the payout motor 602 is completed, the payout completion check is read from the payout completion number check storage area, and the payout completion check is 0.

 If the payout completion check is other than 0, information indicating the payout device error is set in the error status storage area and the retry operation process is prepared. I do.

  In the retry operation process, wait for a predetermined time to elapse (wait for the retry operation start wait timer to become 0), and when the retry operation start wait timer becomes 0, execute the reverse rotation operation process. Make preparations. In the reverse rotation operation process, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table described above, and motor drive control data indicating reverse rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. To do. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to drive the sprocket in a reverse rotation. Further, in the reverse rotation operation process, preparation for executing the payout start monitoring process is performed after the driving of the payout motor 602 is completed.

  In step S608, a payout motor drive monitoring process is performed. In the payout motor drive monitoring process, any one of a drive start monitoring process, an acceleration drive process, a constant speed drive process, a brake drive process, and a drive end process is performed.

  In the drive start monitoring process, the information on the lower pan full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above. Motor control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the control data table, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the dispensing motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the acceleration drive process and constant speed drive process, 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check every time the excitation position of the payout motor 602 is changed 16 times, except during the initial position search operation of the sprocket or the reverse rotation operation. And stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the updated payout completion number check is less than −4, preparation for executing the brake drive process is made. Further, the game medium lending information is read from the above-mentioned game medium lending information storage area, the presence / absence of information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is determined, and information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is present. In some cases (when a ball lending request is input from the interface unit 606 while paying out a prize ball), preparations for executing the brake driving process are made. In the brake drive process, it waits for a predetermined time to elapse (waits for the motor drive management timer to become 0), and when the motor drive management timer becomes 0, prepares to execute the drive end process In the drive end process, a post-process for driving the motor is performed.

  In step S609, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 (for example, a prize ball signal output every time a payout sensor signal is input) is sent via an information output circuit (not shown). The information is output to an information input circuit 350 that is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S610, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, a launch permission signal for permitting launch is output from the I / O port of the payout control unit 600 to the launch control unit 630 shown in FIG. However, when the above-mentioned main control communication error or CR unit non-connection error has occurred, a state is set in which the firing permission signal is not output. Therefore, when the main control unit 300 is cut off and power is supplied to the payout control unit 600, a main control communication error is recognized in the above-described step S605, and a launch permission signal is output in this port output processing. It is set to the state that does not.

In step S611, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S601 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and the payout control unit timer interrupt process ends.
<Second internal information register>

  Next, the second internal information register of the interrupt control circuit 3100 whose first internal information register is shown in FIG. 373 will be described. FIG. 391 is a view for explaining a second internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100.

  As shown in FIG. 391, the second internal information register is an 8-bit register, but the seventh to third bits remain set to “0” and are not used. The initial values of the 2nd to 0th bits are “0”.

  In this embodiment, a system reset signal is input from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the reset control circuit 314 when the power is turned on. Then, the system reset signal 1 is output from the reset control circuit 314 to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 via the internal bus 3300. In this embodiment, when the WDT 3141 times out, the reset control circuit 314 indicates that a WDT timeout signal has been output to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 via the internal bus 3300. A system reset signal 2 is output. Further, when the CPU 304 refers to an address outside the predetermined range (running outside the designated area), the reset control circuit 314 runs outside the designated area via the internal bus 3300 to the circuit inside the microprocessor 3000. A system reset signal 3 indicating that the prohibit signal has been output is output.

  When the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 1 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the second bit. That is, the second bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is a reset due to power-on.

  Further, when the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 2 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the first bit. That is, the first bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is a timeout of WDT 3141.

Furthermore, when the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 3 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the 0th bit. That is, the 0th bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304. The value of each bit is cleared when the CPU 304 reads the value (becomes the initial value “0”). The second internal information register may be configured by the first internal information register shown in FIG.
<Third internal information register>

  FIG. 392 is a diagram for explaining a third internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. As shown in FIG. 392, the third internal information register is also an 8-bit register, but the seventh and second bits remain set to “0” and are not used.

  The first bit of the third internal information register shown in FIG. 392 is a bit for setting whether to perform a user reset operation or a system reset operation when the WDT 3141 times out. “0” is set when the user reset operation is performed, and “1” is set when the system reset operation is performed.

  The 0th bit is a bit for setting whether the user reset operation or the system reset operation is performed when the CPU 304 travels outside the designated area. In this bit, “0” is set when the user reset operation is performed, and “1” is set when the system reset operation is performed.

  The values set for the first bit and the 0th bit described here are stored in the program management area of the built-in ROM 306. These values stored in the program management area are called from the program management area in the initial setting 2 (step S107) in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 377, and are set in the first bit and the 0th bit, respectively. The In this embodiment, “1” is set to cause the system reset operation to be performed on any bit. Note that “0” for performing the user reset operation may be set in the first bit, and “1” for performing the system reset operation may be set in the 0th bit. Further, “1” for performing the system reset operation may be set in the first bit, and “0” for performing the user reset operation may be set in the 0th bit.

This third internal information register may also be composed of the empty bits (unused bits) of the first internal information register shown in FIG. 373, or the empty bits of the second internal information register shown in FIG. (Unused bits) may be used. When a reset occurs, the value of the reset operation setting data stored in the program management area of the ROM 306 may be directly referred to. In this case, the process of setting a value in the third internal information register may not be performed.
<Fourth internal information register>

  FIG. 393 is a view for explaining a fourth internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. As shown in FIG. 393, the fourth internal information register is an 8-bit register, but the seventh and second bits remain set to “0” and are not used.

  The first bit of the fourth internal information register is a bit indicating an abnormality in the external clock (update clock) RCK of the random number generation circuit 318. If there is an abnormality in the update clock, the information “1 (abnormal)” is read from the first bit of the fourth internal information register. If there is no abnormality in the update clock, the fourth internal information register Information of “0 (no abnormality)” is read from the first bit.

The 0th bit is a bit for indicating whether or not the immediately preceding reset factor is a system reset (reset upon power-on) when a reset occurs. When the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 1 via the internal bus 3300, the interrupt control circuit 3100 sets “1” to the 0th bit. If the immediately preceding reset factor is a system reset, information “1 (system reset has occurred)” is read from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register, and the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (reset factor Is the time-out of WDT 3141 or when the reset factor is running out of the designated area of CPU 304), the information of “0 (system reset not generated)” is read from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register Is done.
<Other internal information registers>

  Although not shown, the microprocessor 3000 includes a start register and a clear register as registers for controlling the WDT 3141. The start register is an 8-bit register for controlling start / stop of the WDT 3141. When starting the WDT 3141, a value (for example, CCh) instructing start is set (written), and when the WDT 3141 is stopped, the start register is stopped. Is set so as to set a value (for example, 33h).

  This start register is valid when “start by software” is set (selected) in the program management area at the time of reset. In this case, a stop instruction value (for example, 33h) is set as an initial value. Is set. Therefore, in order to activate WDT 3141 when “activation by software” is set (selected), it is necessary to set a value (for example, CCh) instructing activation by the game control program (manually). On the other hand, when “activation by software” is not set (selected) at the time of resetting, a value instructing activation (for example, CCh) is an initial value (automatically) regardless of the game control program. The WDT 3141 is activated (automatically) without depending on the game control program.

  The clear register is an 8-bit register for controlling clearing and restarting of the WDT 3141. After setting a predetermined first value (for example, 55h), a predetermined second value (for example, AAh) Is set, WDT 3141 is cleared and restarted immediately after. When the value of the clear register is read, a predetermined fixed value (for example, FFh) is read.

  Here, the flow of system reset will be described again, including the relationship with random number update. FIG. 394 is a diagram illustrating the flow of system reset including the relationship with random number update. Up to now, it has been described that when a momentary interruption occurs due to factors such as static electricity, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a system reset signal (here, the system reset signal 2) due to the timeout of the WDT 3141, and the reset operation is performed. Further, not only the timeout of WDT 3141 but also, for example, when the CPU 304 runs out of the designated area, the system reset signal (here, system reset signal 3) is output from the reset control circuit 314, and the reset operation is performed. . In this reset operation, the gaming machine shifts to the security mode, and a security check process (step SH05 shown in FIG. 365) is executed.

  The time-out of WDT 3141 and the running out of the designated area of CPU 304 correspond to an example of an abnormality that hinders normal progress of the game process. The system reset signal 2 and the system reset signal 3 correspond to an example of a return instruction. Furthermore, the reset control circuit 314 illustrated in FIG. 365 corresponds to an example of an abnormality detection unit that detects the abnormality.

  Although not shown in FIG. 394, in the security mode, first, the first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03 shown in FIG. 365 is executed, and the core of the CPU 304, the timer circuit 311, the counter circuit 312, and the parallel input port 3102 are executed. The values of built-in registers such as the RAM 308 access protect register, the interrupt control circuit 3100, and the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 are initialized. Since the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is initialized, the random number update range is reset, and the initial value of the random number is also reset. In particular, when traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304 occurs, it is preferable that the random number update range is reset because there is a possibility that the random number update range has some influence.

  Subsequently, a fixed extension process (step SH07) is performed. When this fixed extension process is completed, the reset control circuit 314 sends a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. Output a reset signal. That is, the reset signal (reset output) from the XRSTO terminal is output after the end of the fixed extension process (during the security mode), and is output at a timing different from the start of the user mode.

  Next, a random extension process (step SH09) is performed, and the delay process time becomes indefinite. When the random extension process is completed, the gaming machine shifts to the user mode, and a game control program (main control unit main process in this case) is started.

  In this game control program, first, various initial settings (steps S101 to S115 shown in FIG. 377) are performed. In this initial setting, as shown in FIG. 395 (a), after reading the value of "bit indicating update clock abnormality" from the first bit of the fourth internal information register, the read value is set in the general-purpose register. On the other hand, while the process of reading (writing) is executed, the process of reading “the bit indicating whether or not the reset factor is a system reset” is executed from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register. It is configured not to execute the process of setting (writing).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 7B, the microprocessor 3000 uses the bits (for example, the fourth information register) that change based on the first factor (for example, the state of the update clock of the random number generation circuit 318). While reading the value of bit 1) of the internal information register and setting (writing) the read value in the general-purpose register, it changes based on a second factor (for example, a reset factor) different from the first factor A value of the bit of the internal information register (for example, bit 0 of the fourth internal information register) is read, but the read value is not set (not written) in the general-purpose register.

  When the initial setting is completed, the software random number update process (step S117 and step S119) is performed, and then the first big hit random number acquisition timing is reached. Here, if a random number is illegally acquired at the first big hit random number acquisition timing, the big hit may be forced. However, since the time of delay processing is indefinite due to the random extension processing, the above-mentioned predetermined time is also indefinite even if the above-mentioned reset output is caught illegally and the timing for acquiring the first big hit random number is attempted. Therefore, cheating can be prevented.

  FIG. 396 is a diagram showing a modification of the reset control circuit 314 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. The reset circuit 1314 according to this modification includes a signal output timing control circuit 1314a instead of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition circuit 3142 and the watchdog timer (WDT) 3141 included in the reset control circuit 314 shown in FIG. This signal output timing control circuit 1314a is a circuit for determining the output timing of the reset output signal output from the reset output terminal XRSTO based on the reset input signals input from the two reset input terminals XSRST1 and XSRST2. is there.

  FIG. 397 is a timing chart showing an example in the case where a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs only in main controller 300 out of main controller 300 and first sub-controller 400. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 397, time (T) elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the state at the left end of the figure, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 perform normal processing. In this example, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure variation display, and the first sub control unit 400 performs the second sub control (not shown here) in accordance with the start of the special figure fluctuation display by the main control unit 300. Via the unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. The symbols (a) to (g) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 397 indicate the timing of the position where the symbol is written, and the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at that timing is shown below the FIG. 397. It is shown.

  Shortly after the main control unit 300 starts displaying the special figure fluctuation, an instantaneous interruption occurs in the main control unit 300, and a process at the time of power interruption is performed due to a temporary voltage drop, and a transition is made to a standby state. As described with reference to FIG. 386 (b), in the standby state, the WDT 3141 of the main control unit 300 is not restarted, and the WDT 3141 times out. A system reset signal 2 is output from the reset control circuit 314 based on the timeout of the WDT 3141.

  When the system reset signal 2 is output, the main control unit 300 starts the reset process shown in FIG. In the main control unit 300, after the first internal circuit initialization process (step SH03) is executed in this reset process, the security check process (step SH05) is executed. Even after the security check process is completed, the user mode (main control unit main process shown in FIG. 377) is not immediately shifted to, but a delay process is performed and the reset process is continued. In this delay process, the fixed extension process (step SH07) shown in FIG. 365 is executed. As described above, when the fixed extension process is completed, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a reset signal from the reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. The signal is not transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Further, in the delay process, a random extension process (step SH09) is executed, and the transition to the user mode is further delayed by a random time of a maximum of 30 seconds. These steps SH07 and SH09 correspond to an example of the delay processing referred to in the present invention.

  Further, as described above, when the dispensing control unit 600 shown in FIG. 293 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 300 until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) elapses after the power interruption process is started. Then, the output of the firing permission signal to the firing control unit 630 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in this example, although the main control unit 300 has an instantaneous interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 is continuously supplied with a voltage of 12 V, and the main control unit 300 performs the power interruption process and the reset process. The first sub-control unit 400 continues normal processing even during the process. As a result, the effect executing means continues the effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol fluctuating, and it is shortly after the main control unit 300 starts the power interruption process (b). At this timing, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a (so-called left symbol stop). At the timing (c), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c (so-called right symbol stop), and the reach state is reached. Subsequently, at the timing of (d), it develops into a special reach (here, so-called triple reach), at the timing of (e), a reach-off effect is once performed, and at the timing of (f), a combination of decorative symbols ( Here, “decoration 5—decoration 4—decoration 5”) fluctuates. Based on the fact that the symbol variation stop command is sent from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 completely stops the combination of the decorative symbols and performs the fixed stop. However, no command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 while the main control unit 300 is performing a power interruption process or a reset process.

  As a result, the fluctuation of the shaking continues even if the fluctuation time of the special figure elapses. Players who have seen fluctuations that continue to forever are worried that the pachinko machine 100 may have broken, and can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store. May be possible. In other words, in the conventional game machine, a technique has been devised to perform a reset process when a reset occurs due to an instantaneous voltage drop due to static electricity or the like during the game, but the reset process takes only a short time. Although the store side could not grasp the occurrence of the reset and could not allow the game machine to perform stable control, according to the game machine of this embodiment, by delaying the start of game control, The game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset. Further, since the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset, it is possible to cause the game machine to perform stable control by eliminating the cause of the occurrence of the reset (for example, by separating the wiring on the back of the game machine). Furthermore, in this example, the out-of-reach performance is performed, but if the fluctuation of fluctuation continues more than usual after the per-reach performance, the pachinko machine is expected for the player who expected the big hit. It is possible to further raise the player's anxiety that the 100 may have broken and changed so that it does not become an advantageous state, letting the player call the store clerk, that the game store clerk had a momentary break You may be able to inform.

  Further, during the period when the reset process is being performed, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped, and the game ball cannot be launched from the launch device 110. Therefore, although the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 continues, no matter how many times the ball launch handle 134 shown in FIG. 290 is operated, the game ball is not fired, and the player may have broken the pachinko machine 100. I am worried that there may be a chance, I can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and I may be able to inform the amusement store clerk that an interruption or reset has occurred. In other words, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the reset via the player by stopping the launch during the delay process.

  Further, a clear signal is output to each circuit (for example, the drive circuits 324 to 334) of the main control unit 300 at a timing when the XRSTO signal falls, and the main control unit 300 is driven, the special figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure. The game display means such as the hold lamp 220 and the high-probability lamp 222 are not displayed, and the player who notices these non-displays is anxious that the pachinko machine 100 is broken, and is a store clerk of the game store. Can be expected to inform the game store clerk that a momentary interruption or reset has occurred. In particular, the display device for displaying the status based on the rights acquired by the player, such as the general figure hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the high accuracy medium lamp 222, is not provided. When it is displayed, the pachinko machine 100 is broken and the player's anxiety that the acquired rights have been lost can be further exaggerated. It may be possible to notify that a disconnection or reset has occurred. Also, from a different perspective, the store clerk can be given an opportunity to apologize to the player, communicate with the player, and help to realize a cozy game store.

  In the main control unit 300, when the random extension process (step SH09) is completed, the main control unit 300 shifts to the user mode for the first time, and the normal process (main control unit main process shown in FIG. 377) is started. In the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 377, since the supply voltage to the main control unit 300 has returned to 12V, the initial setting 2 shown in FIG. 378 is performed. A clear signal is output for the first time (step S1052). The first sub-control unit 400 performs various initial settings when receiving the clear signal. With this initial setting, the initial design screen (default screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the default screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even when a timeout occurs in the WDT 3141 of the first sub-control unit 400. At the timing (g) shown in FIG. 397, a character display “Please wait” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a character display screen of “Please wait” from the shaking fluctuation that has not ended indefinitely. I am worried that it may have been, I can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and may be able to inform the amusement store clerk that a momentary break has occurred.

  When the main control unit main process is started, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and a launch permission signal is output to the launch control unit 630, and the game ball is fired. Will be able to.

  In this example, the timing at which the main control unit 300 shifts from the reset process to the normal process is during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination (after the timing (f)), but before the fluctuation fluctuation (timing (f). Even before, a default screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 397 described above is an example in the case where a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs. Similarly, when a run out of the designated area of CPU 304 occurs, the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset via the player. Thus, it is possible to cause the game machine to perform stable control. In addition, even if other abnormalities such as resetting occur, if the system reset operation is performed, a delay process is executed during the system reset, and the game store clerk detects the occurrence of the reset via the player. In some cases, the game table can be grasped and stable control can be performed.

  In the above description, “a game control unit (for example, a game process related to a game including a main process (for example, steps S117 and S119, and a main control unit timer interrupt process) that is repeatedly executed until power-off is detected) (for example, , The main control unit 300), and the game control unit detecting an abnormality (for example, time-out of the WDT 3141 or running out of the designated area of the CPU 304) that prevents normal progress of the game process while the game process is being executed. Provided with an electrical control means (for example, a microprocessor 3000) provided with an abnormality detection unit (for example, a reset control circuit 314) for performing a return instruction (for example, system reset signals 2 and 3), and the game control unit (for example, The main control unit 300) stops the execution of the game process based on the return instruction, and The air control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) performs a return process (for example, a system reset operation) for the game control unit to start execution of the game process based on the return instruction, and performs the return process. A game machine characterized by executing a delay process (for example, steps SH07 and SH09) for delaying the start of the game process during the execution. Is explained.

  Here, a storage unit (for example, a built-in ROM 306) that stores a game process program for the game process is provided, and the electrical control means performs an initialization process (for example, in step SH03) for resuming the execution of the game process. The first internal circuit initialization process) is performed based on the return instruction, and the game control unit suspends execution of the game process based on the return instruction, and the initialization process is performed. Thereafter, the game process program is sequentially read out from the storage unit and the game process is resumed, and the electrical control means is a period between the completion of the initialization process and the start of the game process. In addition, a delay process for delaying the start timing of the game process may be executed. That is, the return process here is a process that combines the initialization process and the delay process.

  Also, a game control means for executing a game process relating to a game including a main process that is repeatedly executed until power-off is detected, and an abnormality that prevents the progress of the game process while the game control means is executing the game process An abnormality detecting means for giving a return instruction based on the detection of the game, and the game control means stops the execution of the game process based on the return instruction and resumes the execution of the game process. A gaming machine that performs processing, and executes delay processing that delays resumption of the game processing during execution of the return processing. The aspect of this may be sufficient. According to this aspect, instead of the means that can perform both hardware processing and software processing such as the electrical control means, the return processing is performed by means that performs only software processing such as game control means, The delay process is executed while the return process is being executed. The game processing program includes a first storage unit storing a game processing program for the game process and a second storage unit storing a return program for the return process, and the game control unit is configured to receive the game processing program from the first storage unit. Are sequentially read out to execute the game process, and the electrical control means may execute the return process according to the return program.

  In this case, stable game control may be performed. In other words, by delaying the start of game control, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of reset via the player. In addition, since the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset, it is possible to identify and deal with the cause of the reset (for example, an electrical component that generates static electricity) (for example, review the layout of the wiring behind the game table) In some cases, the game machine can be controlled stably. In addition, since the game process is not performed during the return process, the process based on the entry is performed even if the game ball rolling in the game area when the reset occurs enters the first special figure starting port 230 during the return process. In some cases, it is possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to confirm the state of the game table by manually inserting the game ball into the first special figure starting port 230 or the like. In addition, since the game process is not performed during the return process, even if the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is opened, the process based on the opening is not performed, and the game store clerk opens the main body 104 or the front frame door 106, You may be able to check the status of the game console.

  Further, in the above description, “the electrical control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) performs a security check process for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred during the return process (for example, the security in step SH05). A game machine characterized by a check process). Is also explained.

  In this case, since the security check process is also performed during the return process, the time during which the return process is being performed can be used effectively, and security can be improved.

  The abnormality detection unit detects a first return instruction (for example, a system reset) among the return instructions based on a first abnormality (for example, traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304) among the abnormalities. Signal) and a second return instruction (for example, a user reset signal) of the return instructions based on the presence of a second abnormality (for example, timeout of WDT 3141) among the abnormalities. The electrical control means executes the delay process while executing the return process based on the first return instruction, and executes the return process based on the second return instruction. The delay process may not be executed during the operation.

  In this case, since the time until the game process is started differs depending on the type of abnormality, the game store clerk may be able to determine the type of abnormality.

  The first abnormality may have a higher degree of abnormality than the second abnormality.

  In this case, since the delay process is performed in the return process when the first abnormality having a high degree of abnormality occurs, the game clerk may be able to confirm that a reset based on the abnormality having a high degree of abnormality has occurred. .

  Further, the electrical control means executes the security check process while executing the return process based on the first return instruction, and performs the return process based on the second return instruction. The security check process may not be executed during the execution.

  In addition, a launching unit (e.g., launching device 110) that launches a game ball toward the game area is provided, and the launching unit stops launching the game ball while the delay process is being executed. Also good.

  In this case, the player is worried that the pachinko machine 100 may have broken, and can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and may be able to notify the game store clerk that an instantaneous interruption or reset has occurred. is there. In other words, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the reset via the player by stopping the launch during the delay process.

  In addition, a storage unit (for example, a built-in ROM 306) that stores a game processing program for the game processing is provided, and the game control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) reads the game processing program from the storage unit and stores the game The storage unit (for example, the built-in ROM 306) receives predetermined authentication information (for example, an authentication code) obtained based on the contents (for example, a user program) stored in the storage unit. The electrical control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) acquires the authentication information during the return process based on the content stored in the storage unit, and the acquired authentication information is stored in the storage unit. Case in memory

 It may be determined during the restoration process (for example, the security check process in step SH05 is performed) whether or not it matches the predetermined authentication information stored.

  In this case, since it is determined whether or not it matches the predetermined authentication information during the return process, the time during which the return process is performed can be used effectively, and security can be improved. There is a case.

  The electrical control unit may execute the delay process based on the fact that the acquired authentication information matches the predetermined authentication information stored in the storage unit.

  The game control unit may stop the operation based on the fact that the acquired authentication information does not match the predetermined authentication information stored in the storage unit.

  Further, the electrical control means is configured to delay the start of the gaming process by a predetermined time (for example, a fixed extension process at step SH07) and a second delay process (for example, a variable time delay). , Random extension process in step SH09) may be performed.

  The electrical control means performs a first delay process for delaying the start of the game process for a predetermined time, and then performs a reset instruction (for example, a reset signal from a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal)) to the outside. ), And then a second delay process that delays the start of the game process by a variable time may be performed. The changeable time here may be a time selected from a plurality of prepared times at the time of manufacture or setting of the electrical control means, or may be a time that can be arbitrarily changed. Good.

  In this case, since the start timing of the game process and the output timing of the reset instruction to the outside are different, it is possible for an unauthorized person to make it difficult to analyze the initial timing at which an advantageous random number can be obtained. It may be possible to prevent the act.

  In addition, the game control unit may perform a predetermined lottery process (for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate) using a numerical value that is repeatedly updated and updated in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a random number generation range) in the gaming process. The electrical control means initializes the numerical value in the return process (for example, executes the first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03). Also good.

  In addition, game display means controlled by the game control unit (for example, the common figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the common figure holding lamp 216, the first A special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222), and the game display means is not displayed while the delay process is being executed. Good.

  In this case, since the game display means should not be displayed, there is a case where it is possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to check the state of the game table by putting the game ball into the first starting port 230 or the like by hand.

  In addition, variable winning means (for example, the second special figure starting port 232, variable) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter than the first state. The variable winning means may change to the second state based on the return instruction in the first state.

  In this case, since the variable winning means should be in the first state but in the second state, it may be possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to check the state of the game table by putting the game ball into the first starting port 230 or the like by hand. The variable winning means may maintain the first state based on the return instruction in the first state. In this case, since the first state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, opening time) for a predetermined time, it may be possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety.

  In addition, an effect execution means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes an effect based on an instruction from the game control unit is provided, and the effect execution means continues the effect while the delay process is being executed. You may do. Here, the effect executing means may have a larger display area than the game display means.

  In this case, it may be possible to prevent the player from being bored during the delay process.

   The electrical control means selectively executes a first return process and a second return process based on the return instruction, and stores a return operation of the first return process. A storage unit, and a second return operation storage unit that stores a return operation of the second return process, and the electrical control means stores the first return operation memory when the first return process is selected. The first return process is executed according to the return operation stored in the unit, and when the second return process is selected, the second return process is executed according to the return operation stored in the second return operation storage unit. It may be executed.

  Further, the game control unit performs a predetermined lottery process using a numerical value that is repeatedly updated and updated within a predetermined numerical value range in the gaming process, and the electrical control means includes: Based on the return instruction, a first return process for initializing the numerical value (for example, a first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03) and a second value for holding the numerical value at a value before the return instruction is given. The return process (for example, the second internal circuit initialization process in step SH11) may be selectively executed.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses a predetermined number of game balls. Further, the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit 400 may be bi-directional communication, or a single control unit having the functions of the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit 400 may be provided instead.

  Conventionally, as a game stand, there are obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. that can be used for winning the game ball. There is known a ball game machine (pachinko machine) that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a prize ball when winning a prize. This ball game machine is advantageous to the player by performing a lottery process for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the starting port and opening the variable prize opening for a predetermined time according to the result of the determination. A game state is generated.

  In addition, when the reel is rotated by inserting a medal (game medium) and operating the start lever, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. If a combination of symbols that is predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the window, a winning combination is established. If a winning combination that involves paying out medals is achieved, a special number of medals are paid out. Also known is a slot machine.

  By the way, during the operation of the game store, an abnormality may occur in the electrical system of the game machine, and the power supply of the game machine may be cut off (power interruption). After the power is turned off, the game table is automatically restored immediately (power is turned on) so that the game is not hindered. For this reason, the game store may not be aware of the fact that the game stand has been disconnected. In addition, if any abnormality occurs, such as when the game machine program operates unexpectedly, a reset is temporarily applied. However, even if an abnormality that requires a reset occurs, the game automatically returns immediately so that there is no problem with the game.

  There are various reasons why an abnormality has occurred in the electrical system of the game machine or the cause of an abnormality that could cause a reset. There is a case where it is desired to grasp on the spot that an abnormal abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned game machine, it is easy to give the game store an opportunity to grasp on the spot that an abnormality of the electric system has occurred or that an abnormality that requires resetting has occurred. In addition, by delaying the start of the game control, the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset through the player, and the game store clerk identifies and deals with the cause of the reset (for example, the layout of the wiring behind the game table) Etc.) and may allow the game machine to perform stable control.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix 1)

  Game control means for performing game control including a plurality of types of processing relating to games;

  An abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality related to the progress of the process of the game control means and instructing a return to the game control means when the abnormality is detected;

A voltage supply means for supplying a predetermined voltage to the game control means and the abnormality detection means,
The game control means includes

Performing a return process performed based on receiving the return instruction from the abnormality detection means, and a main process that is started after the return process and repeatedly executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,

The game table characterized in that the return process includes a delay process for delaying the start of the game control.
(Appendix 2)

  Random number generation means for generating a random number and capable of setting a random number generation range that is a numerical range in which the random number is generated (random number generation circuit 318 in the first embodiment, random number generation circuit 316 ′ in the second embodiment) )When,

  Game control means (CPU 304 in the first embodiment, CPU 304 ′ in the second embodiment) for performing a plurality of types of processing relating to the game, including lottery processing using random numbers generated by the random number generation means;

A process for detecting whether or not there is an abnormality related to the progress of the process of the game control means is executed, and when the abnormality is detected, the process of the game control means is restarted from a specific process and the game control means An abnormality detection means (a reset control circuit 314 in the first embodiment, a reset control circuit 314 in the second embodiment) that performs a return instruction (system reset or user reset) for returning the processing to normal to the game control means. ')
The random number generation means includes

Executing a generation range update process (step S1053 in FIG. 378) for updating the random number generation range based on reception of a random number range setting instruction for setting the random number generation range from the game control means;
The game control means includes

  When the return instruction is received from the abnormality detection means, it is set before the return instruction is issued.

The game machine is characterized in that the random number range setting instruction for setting the same numerical value range as the random number generation range as the random number generation range is given to the random number generation means (step S1053 in FIG. 378). (The game machine 100 of the first embodiment, the slot machine 100 ′ of the second embodiment).
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 2,
The abnormality detection means includes

Based on the fact that the elapsed time starts to be measured based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, whether or not the elapsed time exceeds a specific time, and that the elapsed time exceeds the specific time A game table characterized by giving a return instruction to the game control means (see the description of WDT 3141 in FIG. 295).
(Appendix 4)

  Random number generation means (random number generation circuit 318 in the first embodiment, random number generation circuit 316 ′ in the second embodiment) that generates a random number that is updated every predetermined period within a predetermined numerical range and is used for lottery related to games,

  Update abnormality detection means (frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and random number monitoring circuit 3184) for detecting an abnormality related to the update of the random number;

  An abnormality detection information holding unit (internal information) that holds abnormality detection information indicating that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on detection of the abnormality by the abnormality detection unit. Register 3101),

An abnormality handling processing unit (first operation) that performs a predetermined abnormality handling process by referring to the abnormality detection information holding unit at a predetermined timing and based on the fact that the abnormality detection information is held by the abnormality detection information holding unit. A gaming machine comprising a CPU 304 and a device monitoring process and winning acceptance process of FIG. 384 in the embodiment, and a CPU 304 ′ and a device monitoring process in the second embodiment.
(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to appendix 4,
The abnormality detection information holding means is

A game characterized in that the abnormality detection information is erased on the basis of being referenced by the abnormality handling processing means in a state where the abnormality detection information is held (refer to the explanation of the internal information register). Stand.
<First Modification of Main Control Unit>

  FIG. 398 (a) is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the configuration of the main control unit. In this example, the CPU 304 includes a reset signal input terminal XSRST, and a random delay circuit 317 is connected to the reset signal input terminal XSRST. Note that the letter “X” attached to the head of the terminal name indicates that the signal input to and output from the terminal is low active, but it goes without saying that the signal may be high active (the same applies hereinafter).

  The random delay circuit 317 has two input terminals, a low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and a WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). (For example, an L level signal) is output. Further, the WDT 314 outputs a WDT activation signal (for example, an L level signal) due to a timeout of the WDT.

The random delay circuit 317 inputs the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 or the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 from the input terminal, waits for the delay time selected at random, and receives the input signal. It outputs toward the reset signal input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304. As described with reference to FIG. 298, the CPU 304 inputs an H level signal to the reset signal input terminal XSRST after an L level signal is input for a predetermined period (for example, a period corresponding to four cycles of the system clock). System reset (initialization). Therefore, in this example, the CPU 304 is reset (initialized) based on a signal obtained by adding a delay time to either the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 or the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314. The
<Second Modification of Main Control Unit>

  FIG. 398 (b) is a diagram showing a second modification of the configuration of the main control unit. In this example, the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 is directly output to the reset signal input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304 without going through the random delay circuit 317. Therefore, in this example, the CPU 304 performs a system operation based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 by a delay time or a WDT activation signal (no delay time) output from the WDT 314. It is reset (initialized).

FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reset circuit configured to include the random delay circuit 317, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and the WDT 314 described above. In this example, the CPU 304 outputs (1) a system reset based on the WDT activation signal (no delay time) output from the WDT 314, and (2) outputs the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 for the delay time selected by the random delay circuit 317. One of three states: system reset based on a signal with delayed timing, and (3) system reset based on only a low voltage signal without inputting the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 to the reset signal input terminal XSRST. Can be selected by the CPU 304. Further, the delay time added by the random delay circuit 317 can be set, and the delay time added to the WDT activation signal and the delay time added to the low voltage signal can be individually set. These selections and settings, WDT 314 start and reset, for example, write a set value to a register built in the reset circuit via the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the CPU 304, or set a predetermined value to a predetermined input terminal of the reset circuit. This is performed by inputting a level signal (a signal corresponding to a set value).
<First Modification of Reset Circuit>

FIG. 399 (a) is a diagram showing a first modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 398 (c). In this example, apart from the first WDT 314a built in the reset circuit, the CPU 304 also incorporates a second WDT 314b. The CPU 304 can select whether a system reset (external reset) is performed by a reset signal input to the reset signal input terminal XSRST or a system reset (internal reset) is performed by a timeout of the built-in second WDT 314b. It has.
<Second Modification of Reset Circuit>

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a second modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 398C. In this example, the CPU 304 has a random delay circuit 317 built in the reset circuit and a reset signal output terminal XRSTO. The CPU 304 includes a register that can select whether to output a reset signal from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO based on an external reset or to output a reset signal from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO based on an internal reset. Yes. The CPU 304 also includes a register capable of selecting whether or not to add the delay time selected by the random delay circuit 317 to the reset signal output from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO. The delay time for delaying the output timing of the signal and the delay time for delaying the output timing of the reset signal based on the internal reset can be individually set.
<Third Modification of Reset Circuit>

  FIG. 400 (a) is a diagram showing a third modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 398 (c). In this example, the first random delay circuit 317a for setting the delay time for delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and the delay for delaying the output timing of the WDT activation signal output by the WDT. A second random delay circuit 317b for setting the time is provided separately. That is, in this example, the CPU 304 performs (1) system reset based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing by the delay time selected by the first random delay circuit 317a to the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338. 2) System reset based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing by the delay time selected by the second random delay circuit 317b to the WDT activation signal output by the WDT 314. (3) WDT activation signal output by the WDT 314 (no delay time) ) Based on the system reset so that the CPU 304 can select one of the three states. Each delay time for delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal and the WDT activation signal can be individually set by the first random delay circuit 317a and the second random delay circuit 317b. These selections and settings, WDT 314 start and reset, for example, write a set value to a register built in the reset circuit via the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the CPU 304, or set a predetermined value to a predetermined input terminal of the reset circuit. This is performed by inputting a level signal (a signal corresponding to a set value).

  <Example of reset signal output terminal connection>

  FIG. 400B shows a part of various ICs connected to the CPU 304. In this example, the CPU 304 has a reset signal input terminal XSRST1 to which a reset signal generated based on a low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG. The three terminals of the reset signal input terminal XSRST2 to which a reset signal generated based on the WDT activation signal output by the WDT 314 shown in FIG. Prepare.

  As described with reference to FIG. 298, the CPU 304 receives an L level signal that is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, a period corresponding to four cycles of the system clock) to the reset signal input terminal XSRST1 (or the reset signal input terminal XSRST2). After that, when an H level signal is input to the input terminal, the system is reset (initialized).

  The reset signal output terminal XRSTO is connected to input terminals of a plurality (four in this example) of IC11 to IC14 and input terminals of other circuits. Here, as IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, for example, a logic IC such as an address decoder or a flip-flop, various circuits / ICs / devices shown in FIG. 293 (for example, a random value generation circuit, a start signal output circuit, a drive) Circuit, sound source IC, sensor circuit, shielding device, decorative design display device) can be applied. In addition, as input terminals of IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, a reset terminal for inputting a reset signal for initializing the entire circuit, or a CLR terminal for inputting a signal for initializing a part of the circuit Etc. can be applied.

  <First Modification of Connection of Reset Signal Output Terminal>

  401 is a diagram showing a first modification of the connection of the reset signal output terminal XRSTO shown in FIG. 400 (b). In this example, in addition to connecting the reset signal output terminal XRSTO to the input terminal 9 of the IC 11, the CPU 304 includes eight data signal terminals D 0 to D 7, and the data signal input terminal 1 to the input terminal 8 of the IC 11. Connected to each of. The IC 11 includes output terminals 1 to 8 corresponding to the data signal input terminals 1 to 8, and these output terminals 1 to 8 are connected to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 (not shown). It is connected to the data signal input terminal. That is, the data signal line of the CPU 304 is input to the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 via the IC 11, and the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 are configured to be able to communicate via the IC 11. . Note that the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 may be configured to be communicable via a part or all of the above-described IC12 to IC14 in addition to (or instead of) the IC11. Further, the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 may be configured to be communicable via a relay board in addition to (or instead of) these ICs 11 to 14.

  <Second Modification of Connection of Reset Signal Output Terminal>

  FIG. 402 is a diagram illustrating the basic circuit 302 described with reference to FIG. 293 and a part of various ICs connected to the basic circuit 302. Although the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 will be described here, the basic circuit 402 and the second sub control of the first sub control unit 400 are replaced with (or in addition to) the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. The present invention can also be applied to the basic circuit 502 of the unit 500 and a circuit corresponding to the basic circuit of another control unit (for example, the payout control unit 600).

  The basic circuit 302 includes two terminals, the reset signal input terminal XSRST and the reset signal output terminal XRSTO described above, as terminals related to reset. The reset signal input terminal XSRST is connected to the output terminal of IC01 (for example, the above-described reset circuit or power supply monitoring circuit). As described with reference to FIG. 298, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 receives the reset signal input. The system is reset (initialized) when an H-level signal is input after an L-level signal having been input for a predetermined period (for example, a period of four cycles of the system clock) is input to the terminal XSRST.

The reset signal output terminal XRSTO is connected to input terminals of a plurality (four in this example) of IC11 to IC14 and input terminals of other circuits. Here, as IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, for example, a logic IC such as an address decoder or a flip-flop, various circuits / ICs / devices shown in FIG. 293 (for example, a random value generation circuit, a start signal output circuit, a drive) Circuit, sound source IC, sensor circuit, shielding device, decorative design display device) can be applied. In addition, as input terminals of IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, a reset terminal for inputting a reset signal for initializing the entire circuit, or a CLR terminal for inputting a signal for initializing a part of the circuit Etc. can be applied.
<Fixed extension time and random extension time>

  Next, the time setting for the fixed extension process and the random extension process executed by the basic circuit 302 after the system reset will be described with reference to FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 298, the CPU 304 executes each processing in the order of security check processing → fixed extension processing → random extension processing in the security mode, then shifts to the user mode and executes the game control program. Is configured to do. In this embodiment, the security mode (= security check process + fixed extension process) is set in advance in the CPU 304 for each of the fixed extension process time (fixed extension time) and the random extension process time (random extension time). + Random extension process) can be extended by the set time.

  FIG. 403 (a) shows an example of setting the fixed extension time. In this example, the fixed extension time can be extended by the time shown in the figure by presetting any one of the 3-bit set value data 000B to 111B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. In this example, except for the case where the set value data is 111B, the fixed extension time is calculated by a calculation formula of “2 to the 22nd power × (1 / SCLK) × set value data”.

  For example, when the set value data is set to 000B, the fixed extension time is set to 0 (not extended) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 001B, the system clock SCLK When the frequency is 8 MHz, the fixed extension time is set to about 525 ms (= 2 to the power of 22 × (1/8 MHz) × 1), and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the fixed extension time is about 420 ms (= 2). 22 × (1/10 MHz) × 1), and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the fixed extension time is set to about 350 ms (= 2 to the 22nd power × (1/12 MHz) × 1). The

  In this example, the fixed extension time is calculated based on the system clock SCLK. However, for example, the fixed extension time may be calculated based on another set value (for example, a random extension time described later). The calculation may be based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, although an example in which the system clock SCLK and the fixed extension time are in an inversely proportional relationship has been shown, both may be in a proportional relationship. Further, in the case where the set value data is 111B, an example in which the fixed extension time is set to about 30000 ms in common regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK is shown. Or a maximum value may be set. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 3 bits, and the type of extension time may be increased. Further, the fixed extension time may be limited to a time longer than 0 without including 0 (the CPU 304 may always execute the fixed extension process). Further, different fixed extension times may be set for the internal reset and the external reset.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows an example of setting the random extension time. In this example, the random extension time can be extended by the time shown in the figure by presetting any of the 2-bit length set value data 00B to 11B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. ing. For example, when the set value data is set to 00B, the random extension time is set to 0 (not extended) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 01B, the frequency of the system clock SCLK is When the frequency is 8 MHz, the random extension time is set to a random time of 0 to 0.5 ms (a time randomly selected by the core of the CPU 304). When the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the random extension time is 0 to 0. When the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the random extension time is set to a random time of 0 to 0.3 ms.

In this example, an example in which the random extension time is changed by the system clock SCLK is shown, but the same may be set between different system clocks SCLK. Further, it may be calculated based on other set values (for example, the above-described fixed extension time) or may be calculated based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 2 bits, and the type of extension time may be increased. Further, the random extension time may be limited to a time longer than 0 without including 0 (the CPU 304 may always execute the random extension process). Further, different random extension times may be set for the internal reset and the external reset. Further, the reference clock may be variable for one of the fixed extension time and the random extension time, and the reference clock may be fixed for the other.
<WDT timeout period>

  Next, the timeout time setting of the WDT 314 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of setting the timeout time of WDT 314. In this example, the time-out time can be set for the time shown in the figure by presetting any one of 4-bit set value data 0000B to 1000B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. For example, when the set value data is set to 0000B, the timeout time is set to be prohibited (WDT is not used) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 0001B, the system clock SCLK is set. When the frequency of the clock is 8 MHz, the timeout time is set to about 65 ms, when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the timeout time is set to about 52 ms, and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the timeout time is about 44 ms. Set to

  In this example, the timeout time is changed according to the system clock SCLK. However, the same time may be set between different system clocks SCLK. Further, it may be calculated based on other set values (for example, the above-described fixed extension time or random extension time), or may be calculated based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 4 bits, and the types of timeout time may be increased. Further, although the timeout time is set to be smaller than the above-described fixed extension time, the timeout time may be set to be longer than the above-described fixed extension time.

  <Reset output signal and security mode>

  Next, the relationship between the change in the output signal of the reset output terminal XSRSTO and the change in the security mode state will be described. The example shown in FIG. 405 (a) shows the same state as that in FIG. 298, and when an H level signal is input to the reset input terminal XSRST after an L level signal is input for a predetermined period or more. Transition to security mode. Then, in this security mode, the security check process is first executed, then the fixed extension process waiting for the elapse of a period according to the above-described setting of the fixed extension time is executed, and when the fixed extension process is completed A game control program that shifts to a user mode when a random extension process that outputs an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO and then waits for the passage of a random period according to the setting of the above-described random extension time is completed. Execution has started. That is, in this example, the end timing of the fixed extension processing (= start timing of the random extension processing) is matched with the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 405 (b), when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed extension process is completed, an H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO, and then the random extension process is completed. Transition to the user mode, the execution of the game control program is started. That is, in this example, after the fixed extension process is finished, before the random extension process is finished and before the transition to the user mode (before the execution of the game control program is started), an H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO. Is output. The predetermined time (the time from the end of the fixed extension process to the output of the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO) may be a fixed time or a variable time. Further, when the fixed time is adopted, for example, the rising edge (or falling edge) of the system clock SCLK after a predetermined clock (for example, 4 clocks) has elapsed since the end of the fixed extension process. The time until may be set to a predetermined time. When variable time is adopted, the predetermined time may be changed to a random time each time the system is reset.

  <When changing the random extension time>

  406 (a) and (b) show that the end timing of fixed extension processing (= start timing of random extension processing) coincides with the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO. It is the figure which showed the different example. That is, in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the set value of the fixed extension time is the same (for example, set value = 001B, SCLK = about 8 MHz), and the set value of the random extension time is also the same (for example, the set value). (Value = 01B, SCLK = 8 MHz) In FIG. 9A, the time A1 (for example, 0.2 ms) is selected from the numerical range of the random extension time (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms). In FIG. 5B, a time A2 (for example, 0.3 ms) longer than the time A1 is selected from the numerical range (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms) of the random extension time. In this example, since 0 to 0.5 ms is selected as the numerical range of the random extension time, the case where the random extension time becomes 0 (no random extension time) is also included.

As described above, the user mode is started from the H level signal output of the reset output terminal XRSTO by changing the random extension time (A1, A2) even if the setting of the fixed extension time and the random extension time is the same. The time until (A1, A2) can be changed at every system reset. For this reason, after outputting an H level signal to IC11 to IC14 or other circuits connected to the reset signal output terminal XRSTO (after starting or initializing IC11 to IC14 or other circuits), for game control The time until the program is executed can be changed, and the execution timing of the game control program (for example, lottery timing for determination of success / failure) based on the output signals from the respective terminals of the CPU 304 and the operation of peripheral ICs of the CPU 304 ) Can be prevented in advance. In this example, the setting value of the random extension time is the same, but the setting value of the random extension time may be different.
<When changing the fixed extension time>

  406 (c) and (d) show that the end timing of fixed extension processing (= start timing of random extension processing) coincides with the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO. It is the figure which showed the different example. That is, the setting value data of the random extension time is the same (for example, setting value = 01B, SCLK = 8 MHz) in FIGS. 10C and 10D, and the random extension time is shown in FIGS. While the same time A1 (for example, 0.2 ms) is set from a numerical range of (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms), in FIG. 5C, the fixed extension time is set to the time B1 (for example, set value = (001B, SCLK = 8 MHz, about 525 ms), in FIG. 4D, the fixed extension time is set to a time B2 longer than the time B1 (for example, set value = 010B, SCLK = 8 MHz, about 1050 ms) (B1). <B2).

  Thus, by changing the fixed extension time (B1, B2) even if the random extension time (A1) is the same, the time from the start of the fixed extension process to the start of the user mode (C1, C2) can be varied. For this reason, the time from the system reset of the CPU 304 to the execution of the game control program can be changed every time the system reset is performed, and for the game control using the reset signal input to the reset input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304 as a clue. In some cases, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as grasping the execution timing of the program (for example, the lottery timing for determination of success / failure). In FIG. 398, an example in which one of the fixed extension time and the random extension time is made different is shown. However, if both are made different, an illegal act of grasping the execution timing of the game control program is more reliably performed. Can be prevented.

  <When changing the reset output signal triggered by fixed extension processing>

  FIG. 407 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the reset output signal is changed in response to the fixed extension process. In this example, the start timing of the fixed extension process (= end timing of the security check process) and the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO are matched. Since the reset output signal may be changed in response to the fixed extension process, for example, the reset output signal may be output before the start of the fixed extension process (for example, 200 ms before the start timing of the fixed extension process). The delay time may be determined according to the set value of the fixed extension time, and the reset output signal may be output after the delay time has elapsed. Also, it determines whether it is an internal reset (reset based on a built-in WDT timeout) or an external reset (reset based on a signal input to the XSRST terminal), and determines the output timing of the reset output signal according to the type of the reset. May be.

  Further, a storage unit that stores past reset types may be provided, and the output timing of the reset output signal may be changed based on the history of reset types stored in the storage unit. If it is continuous, the output timing of the reset output signal may be delayed or advanced from the previous time.

  <Other output signals and security mode>

  FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating changes in the address signal, data signal, control signal, and reset output signal output from the CPU 304, and changes in the security mode state. In this example, the CPU 304 outputs an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO when the fixed extension process is completed (when the random extension process is started) and at the same timing, an external IC (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308). Data read (or write) has started. Therefore, in this example, at the same time that the H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO, output of 16-bit address information (0000h in this example) is started from the address signals A0 to A15, and the control signal XM1 terminal A control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information (timing at which the external IC captures the address information) is output, and subsequently, 8-bit data information (opcode in this example) is output from the data signals D0 to D7 terminals. The control signal indicating the latch timing of the data information (the timing at which the external IC captures the data information) is output from the control signal XM1 terminal.

  In this example, the output of the address signal and the control signal is started simultaneously with the output of the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO. For example, the output of the address signal and the control signal is started before the reset output. Alternatively, the output of the address signal and the control signal may be started after the reset output (for example, immediately after shifting from the security mode to the user mode). The control signal output from the XM1 terminal may be, for example, an output signal indicating a machine cycle of the CPU 304, a request output signal to a memory space or an I / O space, or an output signal indicating a read cycle or a write cycle. But you can.

  FIG. 409 (a) shows the state change of another output signal after the external reset, and FIG. 409 (b) shows the state change of another output signal after the internal reset. In this example, in the case of an external reset, output of 16-bit address information (in this example, 0000h) is started from the address signals A0 to A15 by a predetermined time A1 before the random extension process, and the control signal A control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information is output from the XM1 terminal. On the other hand, in the case of an internal reset, output of 16-bit address information (0000h in this example) is started from the address signals A0 to A15 for a predetermined time A2 (A2> A1) before the random extension process. The control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information is output from the control signal XM1 terminal. That is, in this example, the signal output timing of the address signals A0 to A15 and the signal output of the control signal XM1 terminal are different between the external reset and the internal reset.

  In the case of an internal reset, 16-bit address information (E000h in this example) is output from the address signals A0 to A15 immediately after timeout of the WDT 314, and the address information immediately after the external reset ( For example, it is different from 0000h). Note that the address information output immediately after the internal reset and the address information output immediately after the external reset may be set to be the same.

  FIG. 410A is a diagram showing another example of the state change of another output signal after the external reset, and FIG. 410B is another example of the state change of another output signal after the internal reset. FIG. In this example, in the case of an internal reset, the internal reset is canceled after the elapse of a time B2 longer than the reset cancellation time B1 of the external reset. Note that this configuration and each configuration described with reference to FIG. 404 described above may be combined.

  <Start timing of security mode>

  FIG. 411 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the start timing of the security mode after the external system reset, and FIG. 411 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the start timing of the security mode after the internal system reset. In this example, in the case of an external system reset, after the cause of the external system reset occurs (for example, after the falling edge of the reset input signal XSRST is detected), the time C1 (for example, the system clock SCLK) The security mode is configured to start after a lapse of 4 clocks). On the other hand, in the case of an internal system reset, after the cause of the internal reset occurs (for example, after the WDT timer times out), the time C2 (for example, the time corresponding to one clock of the system clock SCLK) elapses. Security mode is configured to start.

  In this example, the time C1 from the occurrence of the external reset factor to the start of the security mode is set longer than the time C2 from the occurrence of the internal reset factor to the start of the security mode. However, (C1> C2), the time C1 from the occurrence of the external reset factor to the start of the security mode is determined from the time C2 from the occurrence of the internal reset factor to the start of the security mode. May be shortened (C1 <C2).

  In the above example, the execution time of random extension processing (random extension time) and fixed extension processing (fixed extension time) included in the security mode can be freely set regardless of the reset factor. Configured to have only one random extension time setting register and one fixed extension time setting register for external reset and internal reset, and set random extension time and fixed extension time individually for external reset and internal reset. Setting may be prohibited (only common setting may be permitted).

  FIG. 412 is a diagram showing the basic concept of the present invention. In the present invention, when starting the second event based on the first event, the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor The timing for starting the second event can be varied.

  For example, when considering the start timing of the security mode described with reference to FIG. 411 above, when the second event (security mode) is started based on the first event (reset), the first event is the first event. The timing for starting the second event (security mode) differs depending on whether the first event is caused by an external system reset or if the first event is caused by a second factor (internal system reset). Can do. Therefore, the time C1 from the occurrence of the first factor (external system reset) to the start of the second event (security mode) is set to The second event (security mode) starts after the first event (external system reset) occurs or the time C2 is longer than the time C2 until the second event (security mode) starts The time C1 until the second event (internal system reset) occurs can be made shorter than the time C2 until the second event (security mode) is started.

  Moreover, since the timing which starts security mode can be varied, it is also possible to vary the timing which starts user mode performed after that. For example, the security mode is started even when the execution time of the security mode is the same between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor. If the timing is different, the timing at which the user mode is started can be made different between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor.

Also, the security mode can be executed without changing the timing of starting the security mode between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor. If the times are different, the timing at which the user mode is started can be made different between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor.
<Other embodiments>

  Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described. In some cases, the contents described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the present embodiment may be applied to other configurations to further broaden the game width.

  For example, FIG. 413 (a) is a diagram illustrating a connection example of the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described with reference to FIG. The power supply board 182 includes a RAM clear switch 180 and a detection signal output terminal for outputting a detection signal when an operation of the RAM clear switch 180 is detected. The CPU of the power supply board 182 periodically detects whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated, and outputs a detection result (for example, an H level signal when there is an operation and an L level signal when there is no operation). Output from the detection signal output terminal toward the dispensing substrate 170.

  The payout board 170 is a RAM clear for temporarily storing the detection signal input terminal connected to the detection signal output terminal of the power supply board 182 and the operation information of the RAM clear switch 180 acquired through the detection signal input terminal. Switch operation information temporary storage means 171 (for example, RAM, CPU register, flip-flop) and an operation information output terminal for outputting the operation information stored in the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage means 171. . The CPU of the payout board 170 detects the signal input to the detection signal input terminal in the initial processing after power-on or system reset, and indicates operation information (for example, whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated). When the H level signal is detected, the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage 171 stores 1 information indicating that there is an operation and 0 information indicating that there is no operation when an L level signal is detected. The operation information is stored in a predetermined storage area and information corresponding to the operation information (for example, an H level signal in the case of operation information with an operation and an L level signal in the case of operation information without an operation) is output. Output from the terminal toward the main board 156.

  The main board 156 includes an operation information input terminal (the above-mentioned I / O 410) connected to the operation information output terminal of the payout board 170, and a RAM clear timing notification LED 155. The CPU 304 mounted on the main board 156 inputs the operation information input terminal (I / O 310) after turning on the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 in the initial setting (after notifying that the RAM can be cleared). When the signal is confirmed and an H level signal is detected, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is initialized (RAM clear).

  FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of the main control unit according to the modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 299 described above. The same parts as those in the flowchart shown in FIG. 299 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing a flow of initial setting 2 in the main process of the main control unit.

  In step S128 of the initial setting 2, the CPU 304 turns on the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 (after notifying that the RAM can be cleared), and then checks the input signal of the operation information input terminal (I / O 310). Operation information indicating whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated (for example, 1 information indicating that there is an operation when an H level signal is detected, and no operation when an L level signal is detected) Is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308.

  In the determination process in step S109 after the initial setting 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 information indicating that there is an operation is stored in the RAM 308, and if applicable (when the RAM needs to be cleared). In step S113, the basic circuit 302 is initialized. On the other hand, when 0 information indicating no operation is stored (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is It is determined whether the information indicates suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine to an initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  Returning to FIG. 414, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a conventional connection mode corresponding to FIG. 413A. In the conventional connection mode, when the setting data 111B (about 30 seconds) is set as the above-described fixed extension time on the main board 156, the security mode ends, the user mode is entered, and the game control program is started. Will be at least about 30 seconds later. For this reason, when the configuration for detecting the signal input to the operation information input terminal (I / O 410) is adopted in the game control program of the main board 156, the RAM clear switch 180 must be operated for at least about 30 seconds. For example, whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated cannot be detected, and the timing at which the main board 156 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 cannot be known from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the connection mode according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 5A, whether the store clerk of the game shop can clear the RAM by checking whether the LED 155 for RAM clear timing notification is turned on / off It is possible to immediately determine whether or not. For this reason, the RAM clear switch 180 can be operated by waiting for the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 to be lit, and the RAM clear switch 180 can be operated for a long time. There is a case where it is freed from troublesomeness and convenience can be improved. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is operated before the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 is turned on (before the game control program of the CPU 304 is started), the CPU of the payout board 170 is activated. The dispensing board 170 can store the operation information. Therefore, when the main board 156 can reliably execute the RAM clear after the start of the game control program based on the operation information stored in the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage means 171 of the payout board 170. There is.

In the present embodiment, an example in which input / output of signals between the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 is performed via the input / output terminals is described. It may be by transmission and reception. Further, the RAM clear switch 180 is not limited to the example arranged on the power supply board 182, and may be arranged on the payout board 170, for example.
<Other commands of main control unit>

  Next, other commands included in the main control unit 300 will be described. In the following description, “r”, “s”, “ss”, or “qq” is an abbreviation representing an arbitrary register,

“k” is an abbreviation representing a lower address paired with the T register, “n” is an abbreviation representing an 8-bit number (hexadecimal number), and “mn” is a 16-bit number (hexadecimal number). “()” Is an abbreviation that represents data at an address indicated by a value in parentheses.
<Other instructions / 8-bit load instructions>

  The 8-bit load instruction is an instruction for loading 8-bit data into a predetermined storage area, and corresponds to, for example, an LD instruction, an LDT instruction, or a CLRT instruction.

  For example, the (LD A, T) instruction loads data stored in the T register into the A register, and the (LD T, n) instruction loads an 8-bit numeric value n into the T register. It is an instruction to do.

  The (LDT A, (r)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r as the lower byte. (LDT A, (k)) instruction is an instruction for loading data stored in the T register into the upper byte, the register indicated by k. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the address having the data as the lower byte into the A register. The (LDT r, (k)) instruction is the register indicated by the upper byte, k, of the data stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the address having the data stored in the lower byte into the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (LDT (r), A) instruction is the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the registers (A, B, C, D, E, H, L indicated by r) (LDT (k), A) is an instruction to load data stored in the A register, data stored in the T register as upper bytes, This is an instruction to load the data stored in the register indicated by k into an address having a lower byte, and the (LDT (k), r) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E, H, This is an instruction to load data stored in L) into an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), (ss)) instruction is obtained by changing the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss and the data stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the register indicated by byte k to the address having the lower byte, and the (LDT (k), (HL + v)) instruction is indicated by v in the data stored in the HL register. Data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (v = 1 to 7), the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte The (LDT (k), (HL + d)) instruction is data indicated by d in the data stored in the HL register (d = 8 to 127, −1 to 128) is an instruction to load the data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of 128) into the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. , (LDT (ss), (k)) instruction, the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte This is an instruction to load to the address indicated by the data stored in the indicated pair register (BC, DE, HL).

  The (LDT (HL + v), (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the HL register at the address where the data stored in the T register is the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. This is an instruction to load the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by v (v = 1 to 7) to the stored data, and the (LDT (HL + d), (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the data indicated by d in the data stored in the HL register (d = 8 to 127, − 1 to -128) is added to the address indicated by the addition result, and the (LDT (k), n) instruction is used to set the value indicated by n to the data stored in the T register. High byte data is an instruction to load the address of the lower byte data stored in the register indicated by k.

The (CLRT (k)) instruction is an instruction to load a numerical value 0 to an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.
<Other instructions / 16-bit load instructions>

  The 16-bit load instruction is an instruction for loading 16-bit data into a predetermined storage area, and corresponds to, for example, an LDT instruction, an LDWT instruction, a CLR instruction, a CLRWT instruction, and the like. Specifically, the (LDT BC, n) instruction is an instruction for loading data stored in the T register into the B register and loading a numerical value indicated by n into the C register, and (LDT DE, n ) Instruction is an instruction to load data stored in the T register into the D register and load a numerical value indicated by n into the E register, and the (LDT HL, n) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load data into the H register and load a numerical value indicated by n into the L register.

  The (LDT IX, n) instruction loads the data stored in the T register into the upper 8 bits of the 16-bit IX register, and sets the numerical value indicated by n to the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit IX register. The (LDT IY, n) instruction loads data stored in the T register into the upper byte of the 16-bit IY register, and the numerical value indicated by n is a 16-bit IY register. This is an instruction to load the lower byte of.

  The (LDT ss, (k)) instruction is a pair indicated by ss with data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Load the upper byte of the register (BC, DE) and store the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte plus 1 This is an instruction to load the read data into the lower byte of the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss.

  The (LDT qq, (k)) instruction is a pair indicated by qq with data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Load the upper byte of the register (IX, IY), store the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and store the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to load the read data into the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq.

  The (LDT HL, (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the address stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And the data stored in the address obtained by adding 1 to the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the H register of the HL register. Is an instruction to load.

  The (LDT (k), ss) instruction is data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss, data stored in the T register is higher byte, and register indicated by k The data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, This is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as a lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), qq) instruction stores the data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the register indicated by k. The data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and k This is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the register as the lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), HL) instruction loads data stored in the L register into an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And an instruction to load data stored in the H register into an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. .

  The (LDWT (r), mn) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r as the lower byte. The data stored in the address indicated by mn + 1, which is a 16-bit numerical value, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the register indicated by r (A, B, C, D) , E, H, L) is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the lower byte.

  The (CLR (ss)) instruction is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 in a pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss, and the (CLRW (ss)) instruction is a pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss. , HL) is an instruction that stores a numerical value 0 at the address indicated by the data stored in the data, and stores a numerical value 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to the address. The (CLRW (qq)) instruction is qq This is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 at an address indicated by data stored in the indicated register (IX, IY) and storing a numerical value 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to the address, (CLRW (qq + d)) The instruction is an address indicated by an addition result obtained by adding data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) indicated by d to data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. In vinegar, it is an instruction to store the numeric 0.

  The (CLRT (k)) instruction is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and (CLRWT (K)) The instruction loads the data stored in the T register to the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and stores the numerical value 0 in the T register. This is an instruction for storing a numerical value of 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the stored data as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.

As described above, the register (BC, DE) indicated by ss and the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq are (CLR (ss)) instruction, (CLRW (ss)) instruction, (CLRW (qq + d)). It can be specified as an instruction operand. On the other hand, the T register (special register) can be specified only as an operand of the CLRT instruction or the CLRWT instruction, and in addition, a part of the operand (the lower 1 byte of the address indicated by k in this embodiment) is It can only be specified as a direct value. For this reason, a situation in which the value of the T register is unexpectedly cleared to 0 or an unexpected value is stored in the T register may be prevented.
<Other instructions / stack manipulation instructions>

  The stack operation instruction is an instruction for saving data in the stack area or restoring data from the stack area, and corresponds to, for example, a PUSH instruction, a POP instruction, and the like.

  For example, the (PUSH ss) instruction saves the data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss to the address indicated by (SP (stack pointer) -1). An instruction that subtracts 2 from SP after saving the data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss to the address indicated by (SP-2). is there. The (PUSH TI) instruction saves the data stored in the T register to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the data stored in the I register is indicated by (SP-2). This instruction subtracts 2 from SP after saving to an address. The (PUSH qq) instruction saves the data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the pair indicated by qq. This instruction subtracts 2 from SP after saving the data stored in the lower byte of the register (IX, IY) to the address indicated by (SP-2).

  (PUSH ALL) instruction is for all registers (T, I, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX high byte, IX low byte, IY high byte, IY low byte This is an instruction for subtracting 14 (total number of registers) from SP after the data stored in () is saved to the stack area byte by byte in this order. In addition, the (PUSH GPR) instruction saves data stored in some registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L) one byte at a time in this order, This is an instruction to subtract 8 from SP.

  The (POP ss) instruction restores the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the upper byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss and the address indicated by (SP + 1) This is an instruction to add 2 to SP after the data stored in is restored to the lower byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss. The (POP TI) instruction returns the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the I register and returns the data stored at the address indicated by (SP + 1) to the T register. This is an instruction to add 2 to SP. The (POP qq) instruction restores the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq and stores it at the address indicated by (SP + 1). This is an instruction to add 2 to SP after the restored data is restored to the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq.

The (POP ALL) instruction reads the data stored in SP, (SP + 1),..., (SP + 12), (SP + 13) in this order in all registers (lower byte of IY, upper byte of IY, lower byte of IX). , IX high byte, L, H, E, D, C, B, F, A, I, T) one byte at a time (low byte of IY ← (SP), high byte of IY ← (SP + 1), ..., I ← (SP + 12), T ← (SP + 13)), and then an instruction to add 14 to SP. In addition, the (POP GPR) instruction is used to store data stored in SP, (SP + 1),..., (SP + 6), (SP + 7) in this order in some registers (L, H, E, D, C, B). , F, A) is an instruction to add 8 to SP after returning one byte at a time (L ← (SP), H ← (SP + 1),..., F ← (SP + 6), A ← (SP + 7)).
<Other instructions / arithmetic logic operation instructions>

  The arithmetic logic operation instruction is an instruction for performing various logic operations. For example, an ADD instruction, a SUB instruction, an ANDT instruction, an ORT instruction, an XORT instruction, a CPT instruction, an INC instruction, an INCT instruction, an INCWT instruction, a DEC instruction, A DECT instruction, a DECWT instruction, and the like are applicable.

  For example, the (ADD A, r) instruction adds the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r, and adds This is an instruction for storing the result in the A register. The (ADDT r, (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r and the T register. The stored data is added to the upper byte, the data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the addition result is added to the register (B, C, D, E, H, L).

  For example, the (SUB r) instruction subtracts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r from the data stored in the A register. This is an instruction to be stored in the A register. The (SUBT r, (k)) instruction is stored in the T register from the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte are subtracted, and the subtraction result is indicated by the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction to be stored.

  For example, the (ANDT (k)) instruction is stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Is an instruction that calculates a logical product (AND) of the data and stores the operation result in the A register. The (ANDT r, (k)) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E) indicated by r. , H, L) and the data stored in the address stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte ( AND), and the operation result is stored in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (ORT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And (ORT r, (k)) instructions are registers (B, C, D, E, H) indicated by r. , L) and the data stored at the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte (OR) And the operation result is stored in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (XORT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And an XORT r, (k) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E) indicated by r. , H, L) and the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction for calculating the sum (XOR) and storing the operation result in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (CPT (k)) instruction is the data stored in the address stored in the A register with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the calculation result overflows, the predetermined flag is set to 1, while when the calculation result does not overflow, the predetermined flag is cleared to 0, and the S flag, Z flag, TZ flag, H flag, Alternatively, it is an instruction for changing the value stored in the carry flag (C flag) from 0 to 1 (or from 1 to 0). The (CPT r, (k)) instruction indicates the data stored in the T register from the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by the upper byte, k. The data stored in the address stored in the register is subtracted from the data stored in the lower byte. When the operation result overflows, the predetermined flag is set to 1. On the other hand, when the overflow does not occur, the predetermined flag is set. This instruction clears the value to 0 and changes the value stored in the S flag, Z flag, TZ flag, H flag, or carry flag (C flag) from 0 to 1 (or from 1 to 0).

  The (INC T) instruction is an instruction for adding 1 to the data stored in the T register, and the (INCT (r)) instruction is used to store the data stored in the T register as an upper byte and a register (A , B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction for adding 1 to the data stored in the address having the lower byte as the data stored therein, and the (INCT (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction to add 1 to the data stored in the address having the stored data as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. In addition, the (INCWT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. This is an instruction for adding 1 to the 2-byte data.

  The (DEC T) instruction is an instruction for subtracting 1 from the data stored in the T register, and the (DECT (r)) instruction is used to store the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, the register (A , B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction for subtracting 1 from the data stored in the address having the lower byte as the data stored therein, and the (DECT (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction for subtracting 1 from data stored at an address having stored data as an upper byte and data stored in a register indicated by k as a lower byte. In addition, the (INCWT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the 2-byte data.

  <Other instructions / Rotate shift instructions>

  Arithmetic logical operation instructions are instructions for performing various logical operations. For example, RLC instruction, RLCT instruction, RRC instruction, RRCT instruction, RL instruction, RLT instruction, RR instruction, RRT instruction, SLA instruction, SLAT instruction, An SRA instruction, SRAT instruction, SRL instruction, SRLT instruction, and the like are applicable.

  For example, the (RLC r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side) This instruction stores the bits shifted out from the MSB in the LSB and the carry flag. The (RLC (HL)) instruction rotates the data stored in the HL register to the left by 1 bit and is shifted out from the MSB. The bit is stored in the LSB and the carry flag. The (RLC (qq + d)) instruction is data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is added, the data stored at the address indicated by the addition result is rotated left by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is LSB (RLCT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Is rotated to the left by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the LSB and carry flag.

  The (RRC r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side) by 1 bit, and from the LSB This instruction stores the shifted out bits in the MSB and carry flag. The (RRC (HL)) instruction rotates the data stored in the HL register to the right by 1 bit, and shifts the bits shifted out from the LSB. This is an instruction stored in the MSB and carry flag, and the (RRC (qq + d)) instruction is data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1) in data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result is rotated by 1 bit to the right, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is carried with the MSB. (RRCT (k)) instruction stores data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This instruction rotates to the right by one bit and stores the bits shifted out from the LSB in the MSB and carry flag.

  The (RL r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side) by 1 bit, and carries the carry flag. The bit stored in the LSB is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RL (HL)) instruction stores the data stored in the HL register 1 bit to the left. The bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RL (qq + d)) instruction is a register ( IX, IY) is stored in the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128). Is rotated to the left by 1 bit, the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RLT (k)) instruction is Rotate the data stored in the address with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte by one bit to the left, and change the bit stored in the carry flag. This is an instruction for storing the bit shifted out from the MSB and stored in the LSB in the carry flag.

  The (RR r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side), and carries the carry flag. The bit stored in the MSB is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RR (HL)) instruction stores the data stored in the HL register 1 bit to the right. Only the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RR (qq + d)) instruction is a register ( IX, IY) is stored in the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128). Is rotated to the right by 1 bit, the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RRT (k)) instruction is Rotate the data stored in the address with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte by one bit to the right, and change the bit stored in the carry flag. This is an instruction to store in MSB the bit shifted out from LSB in the carry flag.

  The (SLA r) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side), and from the MSB. This instruction stores the shifted out bit in the carry flag and stores 0 in the LSB. The (SLA (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register by 1 bit to the left and shifts from the MSB. This is an instruction for storing the out bit in the carry flag and storing 0 in the LSB. The (SLA (qq + d)) instruction is indicated by d in the data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. Data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is shifted left by 1 bit, and the bits shifted out from the MSB are keyed. The instruction is stored in the Lee flag and 0 is stored in the LSB. The (SLAT (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to shift the data stored in the address by 1 bit to the left, store the bit shifted out from the MSB in the carry flag, and store 0 in the LSB.

  The (SRAR) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side) by 1 bit, and from the LSB This is an instruction to store the shifted out bit in the carry flag and store the previous MSB value in the MSB. The (SLA (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register by 1 bit to the right. , The bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag, and the MSB value is stored in the MSB. The (SLA (qq + d)) instruction is stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) to the generated data is shifted to the right by 1 bit, and from the LSB The bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the carry flag, and the value of the previous MSB is stored in the MSB. The (SLAT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, a register indicated by k. An instruction that shifts data stored in the address having the data stored in the lower byte by 1 bit to the right, stores the bit shifted out from the LSB in the carry flag, and stores the previous MSB value in the MSB It is.

The (SRL r) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side), and from the LSB This instruction stores the shifted-out bit in the carry flag and stores 0 in the MSB. The (SRL (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register to the right by 1 bit and shifts from the LSB. This is an instruction to store the out bit in the carry flag and store 0 in the MSB. The (SRL (qq + d)) instruction is indicated by d in the data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is shifted to the right by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is captured. -An instruction to store in the flag and 0 in the MSB. The (SRLT (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to shift data stored in the address by 1 bit to the right, store the bit shifted out from the LSB in the carry flag, and store 0 in the MSB.
<Other instructions / bit manipulation instructions>

  The bit operation instruction is an instruction for performing various operations in bit units, and corresponds to, for example, a BITT instruction, a SETT instruction, a REST instruction, and the like.

For example, the (BITT b, (k)) instruction inverts data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The (SETT b, (k)) instruction is an instruction that sets the data stored in the T register to the upper byte and 1 stored in the data stored in the register indicated by k. The (REST b, (k)) instruction is an instruction to set 0 to data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. is there.
<Other instructions / arithmetic & jump instructions>

  The calculation & jump instruction is an instruction for performing a branch process based on the calculation and the calculation result of the calculation.

  For example, the instruction (JCPT Z, A, (k), e), from the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and the Z flag is 0 In this case, it is an instruction to execute a subsequent instruction. The instruction (JCPT NZ, A, (k), e) is obtained by changing the data stored in the T register from the data stored in the A register with the upper byte, k. The data stored in the address stored in the indicated register is subtracted from the address stored in the lower byte. If the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set in the PC (program counter). It is an instruction to load (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the Z flag is 1.

  In the (JCPT C, A, (k), e) instruction, from the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the address as the lower byte is subtracted, and when the carry flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (to the address indicated by e) Branch), and when the carry flag is 0, it is an instruction for executing the subsequent instruction. The instruction (JCPT NC, A, (k), e) is stored in the T register from the data stored in the A register. When the carry flag is 0, the stored data is subtracted from the address where the stored data is the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. Is an instruction for loading the address indicated by e into the PC (program counter) (branching to the address indicated by e) and executing the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 1.

  The instruction (JCPT Z, (k), ss, e) adds an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and 1 is added to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored at the specified address, and when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is set to PC. (Program counter) is an instruction to load (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the Z flag is 0. (JCPT NZ, (k), ss, e) The data stored in the T register is the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data, and when the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter). (Branch to an address indicated by e), and when the Z flag is 1, this is an instruction for executing the subsequent instruction.

  The (JCPTC C, (k), ss, e) instruction adds an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and 1 to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored at the specified address, and when the carry flag is 1, the address indicated by e is set to PC. It is an instruction to load (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 0. The (JCPT NC, (k), ss, e) instruction is , An address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and an address obtained by adding 1 to the address The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored in, and when the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set to PC (program This is an instruction to load the counter) (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 1.

  The (JTT Z, (k) e) instruction calculates the numerical value 0 from the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and when the Z flag is 0, the subsequent instruction is executed. The (JTT NZ, (k) e) instruction is an instruction from data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The numerical value 0 is subtracted, and if the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and if the Z flag is 1, This is an instruction for executing a subsequent instruction.

The (JBITT Z, b, (k), e) instruction includes the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The inverted data of the bit indicated by b is stored in the Z flag, and when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and the Z flag Is an instruction to execute the following instruction when 0 is 0, the (JBITT NZ, b, (k), e) instruction stores the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, the register indicated by k. Of the data stored in the address having the lower data as the lower byte, the inverted data of the bit indicated by b is stored in the Z flag, and when the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set to PC Program counter) in the load branches to (address indicated by e), if Z flag is 1 is an instruction to execute the subsequent instruction.
<Other instructions / arithmetic & return instructions>

  The operation & return instruction is an instruction for performing a return process based on the operation and the operation result of the operation, and corresponds to, for example, an RTT instruction.

For example, the (RTT Z, (k)) instruction is a numerical value 0 from the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, the address stored in SP and (SP + 1) is loaded into the PC (program counter) (returned to the address indicated by SP and (SP + 1)), and the Z flag is 0. In the case of (1), an instruction to execute a subsequent instruction is executed. The (RTT NZ, (k)) instruction has the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The value 0 is subtracted from the data stored at the address to be loaded, and when the Z flag is 0, the address stored in SP and (SP + 1) is loaded into the PC (program counter). It returned to the address indicated by SP and (SP + 1)), if Z flag is 1 is an instruction to execute the subsequent instruction.
<Other instructions / Compound instructions>

  The compound instruction is an instruction in which a plurality of processes are combined, and includes, for example, an INCPLD instruction, an INCWLD instruction, a DECPLD instruction, and a DECPWLD instruction.

  The (INCPLD A, r) instruction subtracts the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r from the data stored in the A register, and the carry flag is 1. In this case, 1 is added to the data stored in the A register, and 0 is stored in the A register when the carry flag is 0. The (INCPLD (HL), r) instruction is stored in the HL register. The data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the data, and stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 1. This instruction adds 1 to the data stored at the address indicated by the read data and stores 0 in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 0. .

  The (INCPLD A, n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored in the A register, adds 1 to the data stored in the A register when the carry flag is 1, and the carry flag is 0 The (INCPLD (HL), n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and the carry flag is 1. In this case, 1 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and when the carry flag is 0, 0 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. Is an instruction to memorize.

  The (INCPLD HL, mn) instruction subtracts the numerical value mn from the data stored in the HL register, adds 1 to the data stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 1, and the carry flag is 0 The instruction (INCPWLD (HL), mn) is stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and at the address indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. The numerical value mn is subtracted from the data, and when the carry flag is 1, 1 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. When the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the HL register + This is an instruction for storing 0 in the data stored at the address indicated by 1.

  The (DECPLD A, r) instruction subtracts 1 from the data stored in the A register, and when the carry flag is 1, stores it in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r. The stored data is stored in the A register, and when the carry flag is 0, 1 is subtracted from the A register. The (DECPLD (HL), r) instruction is an address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. When the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r is subtracted from the data stored in, and the carry flag is 1, the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) is stored in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 0. Data indicated by the data This instruction subtracts 1 from the data stored in the dress.

  The (DECPLD A, n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored in the A register, stores the numerical value n in the A register when the carry flag is 1, and stores the numerical value n when the carry flag is 0. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored in the register. The (DECPLD (HL), n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, When the flag is 1, the numerical value n is stored in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. When the carry flag is 0, the numerical value n is stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. This instruction subtracts 1 from the data.

  The (DECPLD HL, mn) instruction subtracts the numerical value mn from the data stored in the HL register, stores the numerical value mn in the HL register when the carry flag is 1, and outputs the HL when the carry flag is 0. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored in the register. The (DECPWLD (HL), mn) instruction is an address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and an address indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. When the numerical value mn is subtracted from the stored data and the carry flag is 1, the numerical value is stored in the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register + 1. When mn is stored and the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the HL register This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored at the address indicated by the stored data + 1.

  For example, in the basic random number initial value update process (step S115) of the main control unit main process described above, the normal timer random number value is stored in the A register, and the maximum value (for example, 100) of the normal timer random value is stored in the numerical value n. If (INCPLD A, n) instruction is executed after (loading), if the carry flag is 1, that is, if the usual timer random number is not the maximum value, 1 is added to the ordinary timer random value. When the carry flag is 0, that is, when the usual timer random number value reaches the maximum value, 0 can be stored in the ordinary timer random value. For this reason, the usual timer random number value can be easily updated by only the (INCPLD A, n) instruction, and the program capacity may be reduced and the processing speed may be improved.

  Further, in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S115) of the main control unit main process described above, the normal timer random number value is stored in the A register, and the maximum value (for example, 100) of the normal timer random value is stored in the numerical value n. If the (DECPLD A, n) instruction is executed after (loading), if the carry flag is 1, that is, if the usual timer random number value becomes negative, the ordinary timer random number value is When the maximum value of the figure timer random value is stored and the carry flag is 0, that is, when the common timer random number is not a negative value, 1 can be subtracted from the common timer random value. For this reason, it is possible to easily update the regular timer random number value only with the (DECPLD A, n) instruction, and it may be possible to reduce the program capacity and improve the processing speed. In this example, the random number value is updated only by the A register. However, another register (for example, R register) may be used together, or a hardware random value may be used together.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine including at least a CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, the ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. The gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU includes at least a specific register (for example, a T register), and the gaming control program executes a predetermined process (for example, FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 320). Related lottery process) and a predetermined sub process called from the predetermined process (for example, the number of reservations stored in the “reserved number storage area (RWM area address F040H)” in step S1103 of FIG. 323 is transferred to the A register. The predetermined process includes at least a first process and a second process (for example, in FIG. 320). Special symbol random number transfer processing, special symbol lottery processing, display symbol lottery processing, special symbol variation time lottery processing, special symbol variation time setting processing, special symbol on-hold information migration processing is the first process The predetermined sub-process is called from both the first process and the second process, and the process using the specific register is the predetermined sub-process. It is a gaming machine characterized by being at least executable by processing.

  The first process according to the present invention is a process called from the main control unit main process (main loop process) (for example, each process shown in the main control unit main process of FIG. 299), and the second process according to the present invention. The process may be a process called from the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer interrupt process) (for example, each process shown in the main control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 303), and the predetermined sub-process according to the present invention is These may be called from both the process called from the main control part main process and the process called from the main control part timer interrupt process.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the sub-process called from two different processes (the first process and the second process), the process using the common specific register is executed. The program can be simplified, the code amount of the program can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, the occurrence of coding errors can be reduced, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  Further, the CPU can execute at least a predetermined instruction (for example, the RST instruction shown in FIG. 353), and the predetermined instruction has a predetermined address (for example, 0008H) from a process in which the instruction is executed. , 0010H, 0018H, 0020H, 0028H, 0030H, 0038H, and 0040H), and the predetermined sub-process includes the first process and the second process. It may be one of the processes that can be called from both of the processes using the predetermined instruction.

  Such a configuration makes it difficult to analyze and falsify the game control program. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an illegal profit by incorporating a program for reading out the sub-processing illegally, or an internal operation stored in the RAM illegally. There are cases where an act of acquiring information can be prevented in advance.

  Further, the CPU sets a predetermined value as an initial value as a function other than a function that is performed based on receiving a load command among functions that set a value in the specific register (for example, 8 A bit load (transfer) instruction, a 16-bit load (transfer) instruction, a stack operation instruction, a composite instruction, and the like.

  With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game control program can be increased, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  Further, it includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control part 500) for effect control, and the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means, and a game control means (game control means for performing game control). For example, it may be mounted only on the main control unit 300). Further, the CPU includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control part 500) for performing effect control, and a pay-out control means (for example, the pay-out control unit 600) for performing pay-out control. May be mounted on at least one of the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for performing game control and the payout control means, without being mounted on the effect control means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make analysis and alteration of the game control program more difficult.

  The microprocessor further includes a microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit 302) including at least the CPU and the ROM, and the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the predetermined output terminal Is capable of starting up at least at a predetermined timing (for example, before execution of the random extension function), and the microprocessor performs the processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the time-out time shown in FIG. 404 has elapsed). A watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) capable of generating at least a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT timeout signal) or a signal inside the CPU) , Storage area code other than the legitimate designated area A non-designated area travel prohibition circuit (for example, a non-designated area travel prohibition circuit 3142) capable of generating at least a non-designated area travel prohibition signal based on the execution of The security check started during the predetermined timing after the outside travel prohibition signal is generated may include at least a period during which the watchdog timer counter is stopped.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the above embodiment includes a microprocessor (for example, basic circuit 302) including at least a CPU (for example, CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the microprocessor is at least randomly It has an extension function (for example, a random extension process), the random extension function is capable of randomly changing the execution start timing of the game control program, the output from the predetermined output terminal, The first level from the first level at least at a predetermined timing It changes to a second level (for example, a high level signal) higher than a bell (for example, a low level signal), and the predetermined timing is before execution of the random extension function. It is a game stand.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the above embodiment is a game including a microprocessor (for example, basic circuit 302) including at least a CPU (for example, CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, ROM 306) for storing a game control program. The microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO), and the microprocessor has a predetermined signal from the predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO). Start of random delay processing that is performed before the start of execution of the game control program with respect to rising timing or falling timing of output (for example, reset output signal output) (for example, rising timing for changing from a low level signal to a high level signal) It is feasible before It is a skill base.

  FIG. 416 and FIG. 417 are diagrams for explaining an example of the signal output of the predetermined output terminal according to the present invention. In the figure, the voltage change of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO which is an example of the predetermined output terminal and the low level which is a reference voltage for judging whether or not the first level according to the present invention is set. A threshold voltage VL and a high level threshold voltage VH, which is a reference voltage for determining whether or not the second level according to the present invention is present, are shown.

  In this example, when the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is lower than the low level threshold voltage VL, it is defined as the first level (low level), and the voltage output from the reset output terminal XRSTO is high level. When it is higher than the threshold voltage VH, it is defined as the second level (high level). In this example, hysteresis is given to the low-level threshold voltage VL and the high-level threshold voltage VH, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the low-level threshold voltage VL and the high-level threshold voltage VH The level threshold voltage VH may be set to the same voltage (for example, when the high voltage is 5V and the low voltage is 0V, the average of both is 2.5V).

  In FIG. 416 (a), the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL after the execution of the random extension process is started. After that, during the execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level). In FIG. 6B, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL almost simultaneously with the start of the random extension processing. After the change, during execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level).

  In FIG. 8C, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process. Then, during the execution of the random extension process, after the start of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH and changed to the second level (high level). . In FIG. 4D, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process is started. Then, almost simultaneously with the start of execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 5E, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process is started. Then, before the execution of the random extension process is started, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level). In FIG. 417 (a), the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is lowered from the first level (low level) voltage before the start of the random extension process and after the execution of the fixed extension process. After changing to a voltage exceeding the threshold voltage VL, before starting the execution of the random extension process and after completing the fixed extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to the second level. (High level). In FIG. 5B, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is set to the first level (low level) voltage before the start of the random extension process and almost simultaneously with the end of the fixed extension process. After changing from a low level threshold voltage VL to a voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL, before starting the execution of the random extension process and after completing the fixed extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH. The level is changed to the second level (high level).

  In addition, the microprocessor performs a random delay process for performing a predetermined signal output (for example, reset output signal output) from the predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO) before the execution of the game control program is started. Even if it can be executed before the end of (or during random delay processing), the same effect can be obtained.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the game control program, so that a specific process of the game control process (for example, a soft random number update process, an initial value) In some cases, it is possible to prevent aiming of update processing and the like.

  The predetermined output terminal may be a terminal capable of outputting a reset signal. With such a configuration, for example, when a reset signal is connected to a predetermined electronic component, the electronic component can operate before game control, and the electronic component operates when an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted. It may be easier to detect fraud. In addition, since electronic components can operate before the start of the game control program, by making the operation start timing of the electronic components different from the execution start timing of the game control program, it is possible to aim at specific processing of the game control processing. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Further, at least a security mode and a user mode may be provided, and the game control program may be a user program executed in the user mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the user program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) In some cases, it is possible to prevent sniper shooting.

  In addition, the execution start of the game control program may be performed after receiving at least one of a system reset and a user reset.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift a predetermined signal output timing and a game control program execution start timing at each system reset or user reset. Update processing, initial value update processing, and the like) may be prevented.

  In addition, a predetermined electronic component (for example, IC11 to IC14) having at least a predetermined input terminal is provided, and the predetermined input terminal (for example, reset input terminal) inputs the predetermined signal from the predetermined output terminal. Possible terminals may be used.

  With such a configuration, the electronic component can be operated before the start of the game control program, so that the operation start timing of the electronic component and the execution start timing of the game control program are considered to be different. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a specific process from being aimed.

  FIG. 418 is a diagram showing changes in the system clock signal, the address signal, the data signal, the control signal, and the reset output signal at the time of user reset. As described above, there are two types of user resets according to this embodiment: user reset due to timeout of WDT and user reset due to access outside the designated area. The user reset is set to be effective by setting the program management area. It works when there is.

  The user reset due to the WDT timeout is a reset that occurs based on the WDT timeout signal, and is configured to output a first fixed value (for example, E000h) as an address signal during the reset. On the other hand, the user reset due to access outside the designated area is a reset that occurs based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, and during the reset, a second fixed value (for example, a value other than E000h, such as 8000h) is used as the address signal. Is output.

  When a user reset occurs, the CPU core, timer circuit, arithmetic circuit, input / output port, communication circuit, interrupt controller, etc. are initialized, and execution of the user program (game control program) is started from the reset address (0000h) and started. The watchdog timer that has been set is also cleared and restarted (automatically) regardless of the control program.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the time-out time shown in FIG. 404 has elapsed), the microprocessor performs a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT time-out signal)) A designated area based on the execution of a watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) capable of generating at least a storage area code other than a legally designated area. At least an out-of-designated area travel prohibition circuit (for example, out-of-designated-area travel prohibition circuit 3142) that can generate an out-of-designated travel prohibition signal, and after the predetermined out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal is generated During the security check that is initiated during the timing of Period during which the counter is stopped may be included at least.

  It should be noted that “the watchdog timer counter is stopped” according to the present invention means that when the counter is temporarily stopped, the counter temporarily stops after the counter is set to the initial value or 0. If the counter continues to count, but the counter is substantially stopped (does not time out) by continuing to clear and restart the counter before the counter times out, the counter value is set to the maximum security check time. This includes a case where the counter is substantially stopped (not timed out) by setting it longer than the processing time and avoiding a timeout during the security check. In addition, in the “period when the watchdog timer counter is stopped”, the system clock is set to a predetermined period from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to the period from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to immediately after the generation of the signal After the clock has elapsed (for example, from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to the falling edge or rising edge one clock after the system clock), part or all of the period from the rising edge of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO Etc. are also included. Also, the WDT is built in the microcomputer, and at least the period during which the WDT counter is stopped is included in the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the WDT timeout occurs, and the WDT is built in the microcomputer. In addition, at least a period during which the WDT counter is stopped is included in the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the out-of-designated-area travel prohibition signal is generated.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine including at least a CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, the ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. Is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the timeout time shown in FIG. 404 has elapsed), a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT timeout signal), CPU A watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) that generates at least an internal signal), and the CPU triggers the game control program at a predetermined address (for example, the generation of the predetermined signal). , And can be executed from the address 0000h shown in FIG. The gaming machine is configured to be capable of adjusting a time from generation of a predetermined signal to start of execution of the game control program.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the time until the game control program is executed can be changed, and the execution timing of the game control program (for example, the lottery timing for determination of success / failure) is grasped. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to perform stable game control.

  The watchdog timer according to the present invention includes both a CPU separate from the CPU and a built-in CPU. In the former case, the reset signal is input from the watchdog timer to the CPU, so the signal line is external. In the latter case, since the reset signal is wired inside the CPU, the signal line is not exposed to the outside. Therefore, in the latter case, it is possible to conceal whether or not the reset signal is generated based on the timeout of the WDT (whether or not the CPU is reset) and to grasp the execution timing of the game control program. In some cases, illegal acts can be prevented more reliably.

  The microprocessor further includes a microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit 302) including at least the CPU and the ROM, and the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the predetermined output terminal Can start at least at a predetermined timing, and the predetermined timing may be before the start of a random delay process performed before the execution of the game control program.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the game control program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) ) May be prevented.

  Further, the CPU changes the rising timing or falling timing (for example, the low level signal to the high level signal) of the output of the signal (for example, the reset output signal output) from the predetermined output terminal (for example, the reset output terminal XRSTO). May be executed before the start of the random delay process performed before the execution of the game control program.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the time from the generation of the reset signal to the output of the predetermined signal constant while changing the time until the game control program is executed, and stable game control May be possible.

  The predetermined output terminal may be a terminal capable of outputting a reset signal. With such a configuration, for example, when a reset signal is connected to a predetermined electronic component, the electronic component can operate before game control, and the electronic component operates when an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted. It may be easier to detect fraud. In addition, since electronic components can operate before the start of the game control program, by making the operation start timing of the electronic components different from the execution start timing of the game control program, it is possible to aim at specific processing of the game control processing. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Further, at least a security mode and a user mode may be provided, and the game control program may be a user program executed in the user mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the user program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) In some cases, it is possible to prevent sniper shooting.

  In addition, a register (for example, the fourth internal information register shown in FIG. 393) in which at least predetermined information indicating a reset factor (for example, information indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset) is set. The game control program may be configured not to include (do not execute) processing based on the predetermined information (for example, processing to write information read from the fourth internal information register to the general-purpose register). .

  With such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as intentionally generating a reset of the CPU and aiming at an execution timing of a specific process (for example, a soft random number update process, an initial value update process, etc.). .

  Further, the microprocessor travels outside the designated area capable of generating at least a running prohibition signal outside the designated area based on the execution of the watchdog timer and a code in a storage area other than the legitimate designated area. At least a prohibition circuit (for example, a travel prohibition circuit 3142 outside the designated area), and during the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area is generated, At least a period during which the counter of the timer is stopped may be included.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  Also, a game control including a random number circuit that changes a numerical value at a predetermined period, and a process of extracting a numerical value from the random number circuit based on the fact that a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied and performing a lottery regarding a game based on the numerical value And a microcomputer including a CPU for performing processing, a ROM in which the contents of the game control processing are stored in advance, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. A process that is executed when the power is shut off, and includes a process of storing predetermined data indicating that the process has been performed in a predetermined area of the RAM. When the predetermined data is stored, it is possible to return the game control process without performing an initialization process for initializing the RAM area. If the predetermined data is not stored, it is impossible to return the game control process without performing the initialization process, and the microcomputer is activated when the power is turned on. A time variation circuit for performing a time variation process for randomly varying the length of time from when a signal is input to when the game control process is started, and a code for a storage area other than a valid designated area are executed. A non-designated area running prohibition circuit for generating a non-designated area running prohibition signal based on the above, and in the case of a system reset that is executed based on the input of the start signal A process for checking whether the contents of the game control process stored in the ROM are abnormal by the microcomputer; and After the security check including the inter-process variation process is performed, the game control process is started, and in the case of a user reset that is executed based on the occurrence of the out-of-designated-area travel prohibition signal, the CPU Since the security check is not performed by the microcomputer, the time variation process is not performed, the game control process is started, and the CPU performs the game control process regardless of the system reset or the user reset. The game machine may be characterized in that no power interruption process is performed and the predetermined data is not stored in the predetermined area.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives an electronic prize or a medalless slot machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine of the present invention can be used particularly in the field of game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (such as a pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 140 Ball lending button 142 Return button 144 Switching button 208 Decorative symbol display device 208d Effect display area 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 230 First special figure start port 232 Second special figure starting port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable prize opening 2341 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (10)

Winning means,
A first control means;
A second control means;
A game machine equipped with
The first control means is means capable of executing at least game control,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least control for giving a prize (hereinafter referred to as “prize giving control”),
The second control means is at least electrically connected to the first control means via a communication line,
The first control means is means capable of executing at least a first process,
The first control means is means capable of executing at least a second process,
The first process is a process related to the winning means,
The second process is a process capable of detecting at least a first abnormality,
The first control means is means capable of at least starting execution of the first process in the first period even when the first abnormality is detected;
The first abnormality is an abnormality related to communication with the second control means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first control unit is a unit capable of starting execution of the first process even after the first period when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is resolved in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first control means is means for shifting to a prize invalid state when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is not resolved in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The winning invalid state is a state including at least not executing the first process.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first control means is means capable of executing at least a third process,
The third process is a process capable of detecting at least a second abnormality,
The first control means is means for not executing the first processing when the second abnormality is detected;
The second abnormality is an abnormality different from the first abnormality.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first control means is means capable of executing at least a fourth process,
The fourth process is a process capable of at least updating a random number,
The first control means is a means capable of executing at least the fourth process even when the first abnormality is detected.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The first control means is means capable of executing at least the game control according to a first control program,
The second control means is means capable of executing at least the prize giving control according to a second control program,
The first control program is a program including at least a main process,
The first control program is a program including at least an interrupt process,
The first process is a process that can be executed at least in the interrupt process.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The first control means is a means capable of starting execution of the first process a plurality of times in the first period even when the first abnormality is detected.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The first abnormality is an abnormality that occurs due to a timeout of communication with the second control means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.